1. DL manuals
  2. NEC
  3. Telephone
  4. SV8500
  5. Manual

NEC SV8500 Manual

Summary of SV8500

  • Page 1

    Peripheral equipment description nwa-041680-001 issue 12.0 fp85-110 s7.

  • Page 2

    Liability disclaimer nec corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. Nec corporation has prepared this document for use by its employ- ees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of nec corporation, and sha...

  • Page 3

    Product liability pl-1 product liability 1. Using the equipment safely the following safety information describes how to avoid injuries while working with the equipment and how to prevent damage to the equipment. Learn the meaning of the following symbols and then read this section carefully before ...

  • Page 4

    Product liability pl-2 2. Safety considerations the following describes the safety considerations that must be observed before using the system, the power- related equipment and the peripheral equipment, such as consoles, the main distribution frame (mdf), telephones, pcs, printers, etc. Danger if t...

  • Page 5

    Product liability pl-3 danger do not use power other than the power that was designated for the system when it was installed. Do not attempt to repair or move the main power source without assistance from the dealer. Do not put any metal or combustible objects into a vent of the system, the main pow...

  • Page 6

    Product liability pl-4 warning do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause personal injury or damage to the equipment. When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to remove the plug could cause...

  • Page 7

    Product liability pl-5 warning observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries: • the system’s emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check the emergency battery for an electrical failure. • battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and ...

  • Page 8

    Product liability pl-6 attention do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth. Do not place any equipment ...

  • Page 9

    Regulatory r-1 regulatory notice (for north america) 1. Customer information for telephone terminal equipment (tte) this equipment complies with part 68 of the fcc rules and the requirements adopted by the acta. On the equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier...

  • Page 10

    Regulatory r-2 1.2 incidence of harm if this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone com- pany will notify the customer as soon as ...

  • Page 11

    Regulatory r-3 failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are estab- lished will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and these codes. 1.6 direct inward dialing note: allowing this equipment to b...

  • Page 12

    Regulatory r-4 1.8 equal access requirements if equipment such as private branch exchanges (pbx), key systems or customer-owned coin/credit card tele- phones is sold to a call aggregator, it must be capable of providing users access to interstate providers of op- erator services through the use of a...

  • Page 13

    Regulatory r-5 • can/csa c22.2 no. 60950-1-03 – safety of information technology equipment – part l: general re- quirements • ul 60950-1-safety, 1st edition – safety of information technology equipment – part i: general re- quirements 4. Industry canada requirements industry canada has established r...

  • Page 14

    Regulatory r-6 • this equipment meets ic requirements cs03, part ii, part iii, part vi. • this digital apparatus does not exceed the class a limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of industry canada/le present appareil numerique n’eme...

  • Page 15

    Regulatory r-7 • nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state approved nickel-cadmi- um (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials...

  • Page 16

    Regulatory r-8 regulatory notice (for emea) 1. Preface this manual is valid for the univerge sv8500 telephone system. Some products described in this manual are not (yet) available for specific countries or markets. For this rea- son, the related specifications, instructions for installation and use...

  • Page 17

    Regulatory r-9 1.2 electromagnetic compatibility for some of the sv8500 communication platform components the following warning is applicable: notice that this warning is only applicable to components of the sv8500 communication platform of which the product type plate indicates “complies with en550...

  • Page 18

    Regulatory r-10 • dansk undertegnede “nec corporation” erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr “sv8500” overholder de væsent- lige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/ef. Http://www.Nec-unified.Com/doc • deutsch hiermit erklärt “nec corporation”, dass sich das gerät “sv8500” in Übereinstimmu...

  • Page 19

    Regulatory r-11 • italiano con la presente “nec corporation” dichiara che questo “sv8500” è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/ce. Http://www.Nec-unified.Com/doc • latviski ar šo “nec corporation” deklar ē , ka “sv8500” atbilst dir...

  • Page 20

    Regulatory r-12 “nec corporation” declara que este “sv8500” está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras dis- posições da directiva 1999/5/ce. Http://www.Nec-unified.Com/doc • slovensko “nec corporation” izjavlja, da je ta “sv8500” v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo...

  • Page 21

    Terms in this manual terms-1 terms in this manual system name in this manual, the following are used unless the types of the telephony server and the pbx need to be identified. Note 1: univerge sv7000 remote node over ip is also included in the sv7000 series, which is migrated from the existing ipx ...

  • Page 22

    Terms in this manual terms-2 terminal name in this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. Note 4: this terminal provides users with all features currently available on dtermip (proprietary protocol). Generic terms used in this manu...

  • Page 23

    Terms in this manual terms-3 note 5: from fp85-110 s7, sip handler can also control standard sip video terminals and standard sip voice terminals which are controlled by sp in fp85-109 s6 or earlier. Standard sip terminals require connection tests of nec. When service conditions of standard sip term...

  • Page 24

    Terms in this manual terms-4 media gateway (mg), media converter (mc), and voice conference server (vs) names in this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. Generic terms used in this manual equipment names mg(pri) note 8 mg(pri) card [sca-2...

  • Page 25

    Terms in this manual terms-5 general terms • pir on this manual is a term equivalent to gc (gateway chassis) in the north america. • automatic number identification (ani) on this manual is a term equivalent to calling line identification (cli) in australia. Note 6: the conditions vary according to t...

  • Page 26

    Terms in this manual terms-6 note 7: for proprietary protocol mode, “[proprietary protocol]”will notdisplay on the ipan command. Note 8: mg (pri) in this manual indicates the following terminals: • mg (pri) card [sca-24pria] • mg (pri) box [mg-24pria] • mg (pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg (pri) box [mg-...

  • Page 27

    Introduction int-1 introduction 1. Quick reference sheet the figure below shows devices/terminals explained in this manual. Note 1: ip-bs is not for the north american market. Alarm out 0 0 serial link power alarm txrx 1 2 3 1 2 3 lan mg-sip - mg(bri) - mg(pri) (1.5m) - mg(pri) (2m) - mg-t1(sip) - m...

  • Page 28

    Introduction int-2 2. Lt cable accommodations and time slot allocations for pir the following shows pir lt cable accommodations and time slot allocation..

  • Page 29

    Introduction int-3 2.1 lt cable accommodations the figure below shows lt cable accommodations for pir. A maximum of twelve lt cable conductors that range from lt 0 to lt 11 are provided on the backplane of pir. The lt connector to be used is determined by the circuit card mounting location. For more...

  • Page 30

    Introduction int-4 2.2 time slot allocation the figure below shows time slot allocation for pir. Four groups compose one highway. Each group consists of eight time slots. 2.3 relationship between lt cable conductors and time slots the figure below shows where the lt cable conductor corresponding to ...

  • Page 31

    Introduction int-5 3. Channel accommodating conditions the system has restrictions in accommodating ip equipment. A maximum of 460 channels can be accommodat- ed per lp. Make sure the total number of channels does not exceed 460. Each ip equipment occupies a certain number of channels as shown in th...

  • Page 32

    Introduction int-6 4. Operation of ip equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conversation a conversation can be retained even if a fault occurs during the conversation. This section explains operation of ip equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conversation. 4.1 examples the fol...

  • Page 33

    Introduction int-7 4.2 call retention function status in ip equipment/terminals the following table shows the operation of ip equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conver- sation. The table describes information when call retention function is activated in ip equipment/terminals. If ip eq...

  • Page 34

    Introduction int-8 sp controlled standard sip terminal (keep-alive through options method) ( note 6 ) no condition terminal: no limit telephony server: guard for 63 min. Key operation on terminal sp controlled standard sip terminal (keep-alive through session timer method) ( note 6 ) no condition te...

  • Page 35

    Introduction int-9 analog 2mc no condition up to 2 minutes 30 seconds ( note 13 ) when health check timeout occurs 8lc card [sca-8lcc/sca- 8lcc-emea] no condition no limit when a loop is opened in the self-office (a call will be retained even if health check timeout occurs) 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca- 8...

  • Page 36

    Introduction int-10 mcmg card [sca- 4lc2cota] mc sp-3927 mcmg prog-b is- sue 1 or later ( note 12 ) no limit • when a loop is opened at counter party • when not receiving rtp from coun- ter party for a certain period mg (cot) no condition no limit • when pstn line is disconnected • when not receivin...

  • Page 37

    Introduction int-11 mg(pri) box [mg-24pria] proprie- tary proto- col ( note 14 ) sp-3884 mg pri prog-a issue 8 or lat- er ( note 12 ) no limit • when rtp communication stops • when the disconnection message is received from the network • when layer 2 link is down ( note 11 ) sip sp-3884 mg pri prog-...

  • Page 38

    Introduction int-12 mg-sip96 [mg-96sipmgb] earlier than sp-3987 mgsip prog-b is- sue 3 up to 4 minutes • when health check timeout occurs • when a communication failure oc- curs ( note 16 ) since sp- 3987 mgsip prog-b is- sue 3 ( note 12 ) no limit • when rtp communication stops • when the disconnec...

  • Page 39

    Introduction int-13 note 1: no office data setting is required to use call retention function. Note 2: this column provides no information when equipment does not have firmware conditions particularly. Note 3: for ip equipment/terminals which do not support call retention function, the time duration...

  • Page 40

    Introduction int-14 note 5: when call retention function is inactivated or when any key on the terminal such as line/feature key is pressed during a conversation using a headset/speaker, a call will be disconnected in 60 to 90 seconds (call can be retained until the key operation.). Note 6: when cal...

  • Page 41

    Introduction int-15 ip equipment/terminal telephony server/ip equipment/terminal status no control signals between telephony server and ip equipment/ terminal telephony server mode change by lan cable link down at act-side cpu telephony server mode change manu- ally by cmod command cpu restart assoc...

  • Page 42

    Introduction int-16 analog 2mc not avail- able not avail- able available ( note 19 ) available not available 8lc card [sca-8lcc/sca- 8lcc-emea] restricted not avail- able available ( note 18 ) available restricted 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca- 8lca-emea] restricted not avail- able available ( note 18 ) av...

  • Page 43

    Introduction int-17 mg(bri) box [mg-2bria] restricted not avail- able available ( note 18 ) available restricted mg-pri/mg-pra restricted not avail- able available ( note 18 ) available restricted mg(pri) card [sca-24pria] proprietary protocol restricted not avail- able available ( note 19 ) availab...

  • Page 44

    Introduction int-18 note 18: if communications are failed also between sp and act-side tp when the ip equipment/terminal registering to sp, a call will not be retained. The telephony server orders the counter party to release a call by related- call release. Note 19: if communications are failed als...

  • Page 45

    Introduction int-19 5. Basic terms and features this chapter explains ip-related basic terms and features that are used in the system. For more detailed informa- tion, refer to the reference documents. 5.1 basic terms registration to support communication between ip devices/stations and the telephon...

  • Page 46

    Introduction int-20 tos (type of service) type of service (tos) is 1-byte data field used in ip packet. Tos value is used to assign priorities to ip packets that are exchanged in a network for qos control. Diffserv and ip precedence are typical qos control technics. Qos (quality of service) quality ...

  • Page 47

    Introduction int-21 dynamic routing routing table is automatically created by using routing protocols such as rip, ospf. Since routing information is exchanged between routers, the bandwidth of wan is used for the information. Dynamic routing is used for a comparatively large-sized network. 5.2 gene...

  • Page 48

    Introduction int-22 ippad (pa-32iplb) ippad is a gateway interface card that is automatically used when an ip station attempts to make/receive a call to/from a station and trk accommodated in pir. One ippad can control a maximum of 32 calls. Refer to the circuit card description for more details. Th...

  • Page 49

    Introduction int-23 mg-pri/pra media gateway primary rate access interface (mg-pri/pra) is an interface between ip network and isdn, and it provides an efficient network and cost-effective network through interaction with the telephony server by using the ip network via mg. Mg-sip128/96/16 media gat...

  • Page 50

    Introduction int-24 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] mg(pri) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] is a media gateway between isdn network and ip network to provide a primary rate interface (t1) through interaction with the system. Mg(pri) is controlled by the telephony server, and a variety of services can b...

  • Page 51

    Introduction int-25 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotb] mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotb] has a function of media gateway (mg) which is an interface be- tween ip network and analog pstn line. Also an analog telephone for exclusive use of power failure transfer (pft) can be connected through a pft conn...

  • Page 52

    Introduction int-26 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] voice server conference server provides announcement feature, external hold-tone feature, and conference feature. These features can be performed over ip network that may reduce communication cost drastically, com- pared with the existing public...

  • Page 53

    Introduction int-27 ip gateway (ipg) ipg is a gateway device to allow a maximum of 32 digital multiple line telephones/single line telephones to be accommodated in the sv8500 via a lan. It enables the system to accommodate digital multiple line tele- phones/single line telephones without the use of ...

  • Page 54

    Introduction int-28 5.3 network service features, terms bandwidth control bandwidth for conveying ip packets can be controlled. When a call is made or received, the system automati- cally determines whether sufficient bandwidth can be reserved or not. If sufficient bandwidth is not remained, the sys...

  • Page 55

    Introduction int-29 echo canceler control by location id echo is voice signal reflection to the calling party.Typical network-related echo is caused by poor impedance matching. Echo canceler serves to alleviate this echo. In the system, echo canceler can be set to on/off on a location id basis that ...

  • Page 56

    Revision sheet rev-1 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description - introduction revision sheet s7 :date july,2013 terms in this manual 4,5,6 introduction 5,6,12,13,14,15,17,18,19,22,23, 24,25,26,27 s7 :date june,2013 terms in this manual 2,3,4 introduction 7,8,14,25 s6 :date november,2012 intro...

  • Page 57

    Nwa-041680-001 issue 12.0 july, 2013 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description volume 1 page vol.1-i chapter 1 devices required to build network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. Dhcp server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 58

    Vol.1-ii table of contents (continued) page 7. Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 1. ...

  • Page 59

    Vol.1-iii table of contents (continued) page 3.3 tos control by location id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 3.3.1 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 60

    Vol.1-iv table of contents (continued) page 2. Zt/cs installation design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 2.1 basic knowledge on zt installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 61

    Vol.1-1 chapter 1 devices required to build network chapter 1 devices required to build network 1. Dhcp server this section explains dynamic host configuration protocol (dhcp) server installation, setup and the optional setting procedure. By installing a dhcp server, ip addresses listed below can be...

  • Page 62

    Vol.1-2 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1 when using microsoft windows nt before installing dhcp server, prepare the following: • pc installed microsoft windows nt server • cd-rom of microsoft windows nt server note: be sure to install the latest version of service pack. The figure bel...

  • Page 63

    Vol.1-3 chapter 1 devices required to build network (2) click “services” tab to see services that are installed on the pc. When “microsoft dhcp server” is listed as follows, this procedure is not required. Close the network dialog box, and move on to “2. Dhcp server setup.” when it is not listed, mo...

  • Page 64

    Vol.1-4 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1.2 setting up dhcp (microsoft windows nt) step 1: startup of microsoft windows nt server start the microsoft windows nt server. Step 2: startup of dhcp server service (1) select “start” -> “settings” -> “control panel” and click the “services” b...

  • Page 65

    Vol.1-5 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: startup of dhcp manager start dhcp manager by selecting “start” -> “programs” -> “administrative tools [common]” -> “dhcp manager” as shown below. Step 4: dhcp server address entry (1) select “server” -> “add” on the menu bar of the “dhcp m...

  • Page 66

    Vol.1-6 chapter 1 devices required to build network (2) enter the ip address of the dhcp server. As an example, “10.136.20.150” is entered as the address of the dhcp server. (it is recommended to enter the ip address of the microsoft windows nt server.) (3) click “ok” to close this dialog box. Step ...

  • Page 67

    Vol.1-7 chapter 1 devices required to build network (2) select “scope” -> “create” on the menu bar as shown below..

  • Page 68

    Vol.1-8 chapter 1 devices required to build network (3) when “create” is selected, “create scope” dialog box is displayed. Enter start address, end address, sub- net mask, and lease duration. In this example, the following is assigned: start address: 10.136.20.221 end address: 10.136.20.230 subnet m...

  • Page 69

    Vol.1-9 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1.3 setting up dhcp options - default gateway (microsoft windows nt) note: this data assignment is optional. Step 1: adding options (1) select the activated scope (highlighted in blue) in the “dhcp servers” list box. (2) select “dhcp options” -> ...

  • Page 70

    Vol.1-10 chapter 1 devices required to build network (3) the following “ip address array editor” appears. Enter the ip address of the default gateway in the “new ip address” text box. (4) click “add->” button on the “ip address array editor.” as an example “10.136.20.254” is assigned. (5) click “ok”...

  • Page 71

    Vol.1-11 chapter 1 devices required to build network (7) click “ok” to close “dhcp options: scope” dialog box. (8) make sure that “003 router” is selected in the “option configuration” list box. Up to this point “dhcp options” data assignment has completed. The dhcp server can notify the ip ad- dres...

  • Page 72

    Vol.1-12 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1.4 setting up dhcp options - drs address (microsoft windows nt) note: this data assignment is optional. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to telephony server. Telephony server acts as drs where ip device/termi...

  • Page 73

    Vol.1-13 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2. “dhcp options: default values” dialog box appears. Click “new...” button. “add option type” dialog box appears. 3. Enter the following data of the new option: name: any name is available as far as it is not duplicated. In this case “drs” is ass...

  • Page 74

    Vol.1-14 chapter 1 devices required to build network the display returns to “dhcp options: default values” as shown below. 5. Make sure that “161 drs” is added in the list box. Click “ok” button to close the dialog box. Step 2: adding options add the newly assigned option as performed in “2” of step...

  • Page 75

    Vol.1-15 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2. Click “edit array...” button. The “ip address array editor” is displayed. 3. Enter the ip address you want to use as the drs in the “new ip address” text box on the “ip address ed- itor” dialog box. 4. Click the “add->” button when the ip addre...

  • Page 76

    Vol.1-16 chapter 1 devices required to build network 5. When assigning “drs secondary”, enter two ip addresses as shown below. In this case, the upper address is “drs primary” and the lower is “drs secondary.” 6. Click the “ok” on the dialog box to close the “ip address array editor.” the display re...

  • Page 77

    Vol.1-17 chapter 1 devices required to build network 9. Make sure that “003 router” is selected in the “option configuration” list box. Up to this point “dhcp options” data assignment has completed. The dhcp server can notify the ip address of the drs to dhcp clients (including ip enabled dterm) as ...

  • Page 78

    Vol.1-18 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1.5 setting up dhcp address conflict detection (microsoft windows nt) set the number of times the dhcp server executes the ping command for the detection of ip address conflict. Follow the procedure below. * be sure to perform this setting. Note...

  • Page 79

    Vol.1-19 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: the following dialog box appears. Enter the number of times the dhcp server executes the ping command for the detection of ip address conflict. (default: 0).

  • Page 80

    Vol.1-20 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.1.6 setting up dhcp address static (microsoft windows nt) by the following setting, a dhcp client is always assigned the same ip address. In consideration of network security, etc., follow the procedure below if necessary. Note: dhcp server must...

  • Page 81

    Vol.1-21 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: the following dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate ip address and mac address. The following figure is example. Step 4: then click “add” button. After all the necessary ip addresses are set, click “close” button. Step 5: select “scope...

  • Page 82

    Vol.1-22 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 6: when the dhcp server reserves the address request from the target client, the message changes to “reservation in use” as the following figure..

  • Page 83

    Vol.1-23 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2 when using microsoft windows 2000 before installing dhcp server, prepare the following: • pc (microsoft windows 2000 server) • cd-rom of microsoft windows 2000 server note: be sure to install the latest version of service pack. The figure belo...

  • Page 84

    Vol.1-24 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 2: make sure that microsoft dhcp server is installed on the pc. Select “start” -> “settings” -> “control panel” -> “add/remove programs” -> “add/remove win- dows components”, then the dialog below appears. Click the check box of “networking s...

  • Page 85

    Vol.1-25 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: the dialog below appears, click the check box of “dynamic host configuration protocol (dhcp)”, and then click “ok”. Step 4: windows components dialog box is displayed again, click “next”..

  • Page 86

    Vol.1-26 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 5: cd-rom request dialog appears. Specify the location of cd-rom (drive:\i386) into edit box and click “ok”. Components start to be configured in the diagram below. Step 6: windows components wizard is complete, and the following diagram appe...

  • Page 87

    Vol.1-27 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2.2 setting up dhcp server (microsoft windows 2000) step 1: start the microsoft windows 2000 server. Step 2: select “start” -> “program” -> “administrative tool” -> “dhcp” then the dialog below appears. Se- lect “action” -> “add server”. Step 3:...

  • Page 88

    Vol.1-28 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 4: dhcp administrative tool dialog box appears again. Move the mouse pointer to the newly added dhcp ip address (ss2p251[10.40.13.1]), and then select “action” -> “new scope”. Step 5: click “next” on the dialog to create a new scope..

  • Page 89

    Vol.1-29 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 6: enter the scope name (drs2) into the “name:” edit box and click “next”. Step 7: specify the effective ip addresses (start ip address: 10.40.13.250, end ip address: 10.40.13.253) and subnet mask, which dhcp server allocates to ip terminals....

  • Page 90

    Vol.1-30 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 8: enter the range of ip addresses (start ip address: 10.40.13.1, start ip address: 10.40.13.4), which dhcp server does not allocate to ip devices/terminals. (exclusive range) step 9: specify the lease duration (8 days) and click “next”..

  • Page 91

    Vol.1-31 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 10: select the dhcp options. Select “yes, i want to configure these option now”, and click “next” to con- figure the dhcp options..

  • Page 92

    Vol.1-32 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2.3 setting up dhcp server option (microsoft windows 2000) step 1: select the dhcp options. Select “yes, i want to configure these option now”, and click “next”. The dialog below is displayed. Step 2: specify the domain name and ip address of dn...

  • Page 93

    Vol.1-33 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: when microsoft windows internet name service (wing) servers are needed in the network (when netbios comes into effect in ip network), specify the wing server name (wing) and the ip address (10.40.13.5). Then click “next”..

  • Page 94

    Vol.1-34 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 4: select “no, i will activate this scope later” and click “next”. Step 5: click “finish” to complete the new scope wizard..

  • Page 95

    Vol.1-35 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2.4 setting up dhcp server options - drs address (microsoft windows 2000) note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to telephony server. Telephony server acts as drs where ip device/terminal is registered. Note: “sip s...

  • Page 96

    Vol.1-36 chapter 1 devices required to build network for dt700 series, and dtermip(sip): firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later, select option according to the following priorities: 1st priority is option 162. If there is no option 162, 2nd priority is option 120. If there is no option 120, 3rd priority ...

  • Page 97

    Vol.1-37 chapter 1 devices required to build network note: in the case that “120” is set to dhcp server, when mh250s, standard sip terminals, and dtermip(sip)s coexist in a network using sip wireless terminal backup feature: - mh250 and standard sip terminal try to use a virtual ip address created b...

  • Page 98

    Vol.1-38 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 4: enter ip address of drs (10.40.13.4) and click “add”. After confirming the ip address is added, click “ok”. Note: when setting two ip addresses, the first one in the column indicates ip address of drs primary, and the second one indicates ...

  • Page 99

    Vol.1-39 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 6: after completing the drs setting, go back to the following window. Select “scope options” in the tree, and then select “action” -> “configure options”. Step 7: click the check box of an appropriate option. The data entry field becomes avai...

  • Page 100

    Vol.1-40 chapter 1 devices required to build network • when ip address used with dhcp options (120) is assigned. Select “decimal”, and click “add” after specifying a value per octet of the ip address. After all the settings are done, click “ok”. For example, when sip server’s ip address in the netwo...

  • Page 101

    Vol.1-41 chapter 1 devices required to build network • when fully qualified domain name used with dhcp options (120) is assigned. Select “hexadecimal”, and click “add” after specifying a value per character of the domain name. After all the settings are done, click “ok”. For example, when sip server...

  • Page 102

    Vol.1-42 chapter 1 devices required to build network use the following ascii spread sheet for specifying a sip domain name. Note that available characters to be used for the domain name are different, depending on countries. 0x20: space 0x21-0x7e: graphic characters char. Code char. Code char. Code ...

  • Page 103

    Vol.1-43 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 8: highlight “scope [10.0.0.0] ss2”, and select “action” -> “activate”..

  • Page 104

    Vol.1-44 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2.5 setting up dhcp address conflict detection (microsoft windows 2000) set the number of times the dhcp server executes the ping command for the detection of ip address conflict. Follow the procedure below. * be sure to perform this setting. No...

  • Page 105

    Vol.1-45 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: click “advanced” tab. The display changes as follows. Step 4: set the number of times the dhcp server executes the ping command for the detection of ip address conflict. In the following example, “3” is specified as the number of times pin...

  • Page 106

    Vol.1-46 chapter 1 devices required to build network 1.2.6 setting up dhcp address static (microsoft windows 2000) by the following setting, a dhcp client is always assigned the same ip address. In consideration of network security, etc., follow the procedure below if necessary. Note: dhcp server mu...

  • Page 107

    Vol.1-47 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 4: click “address leases” in the tree. The display changes as follows. The message “reservation (inac- tive)” is displayed until the dhcp server receives the address request from the target client. Step 5: when the dhcp server reserves the ad...

  • Page 108

    Vol.1-48 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2. Dns server this section explains how to set up a dns server. The dns server allows ip devices/terminals to set the ip ad- dress of the drs primary automatically. Follow the procedure below to set up the dns server. This section con- sists of th...

  • Page 109

    Vol.1-49 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.1 when using microsoft windows nt before installing dns server, prepare the following: • pc installed microsoft windows nt server • cd-rom of microsoft windows nt server • cd-rom of microsoft windows nt server service pack 4 or higher the figure...

  • Page 110

    Vol.1-50 chapter 1 devices required to build network network services list box (example).

  • Page 111

    Vol.1-51 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: click “add” button on the “network” dialog box. “select network service” dialog box appears with the network service listing. Select network service step 4: select “microsoft dns server” in the list box and click “ok.” step 5: a dialog box...

  • Page 112

    Vol.1-52 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.1.2 setting up dns server (microsoft windows nt) step 1: start the microsoft windows nt server. Step 2: start “dns manager.” • select “start” -> “programs” -> “management tool” -> “dns manager.” startup of dns manager step 3: click “dns” on the ...

  • Page 113

    Vol.1-53 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 7: click the right mouse button on the added dns. Step 8: select “new zone.” selecting new zone note: to distribute arbitrary domain name to ip terminals, use dhcp server. Step 9: select “primary” radio button and click “next” button. “select...

  • Page 114

    Vol.1-54 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 1: enter a domain name in “zone name” and press tab key instead of enter key. [example] zone name: nec.Com domain name entry step 10: the database file name is automatically input in “zone file” text box. Click “next” button to create zone. S...

  • Page 115

    Vol.1-55 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 13: select “a record” and enter “necdrs1” in the “host name.” new resource record step 14: enter the ip address (ex. “10.136.20.100) of the drs and click “ok.” when an ip terminal inquires the ip address of “necdrs1.Nec.Com,” the dns server r...

  • Page 116

    Vol.1-56 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.1.3 setting up dhcp options - dns server address, domain name (microsoft windows nt) note: this data assignment is optional. This section explains how to set dhcp options for ip enabled dterm to obtain dns server address, domain name. Refer to 1...

  • Page 117

    Vol.1-57 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 5: click “value>>>” button on the dialog box. “edit array...” button appears. Router address entry step 6: click “edit array...” button. “ip address array editor” dialog box appears. Step 7: enter the ip address of the dns server in the “new ...

  • Page 118

    Vol.1-58 chapter 1 devices required to build network [domain name of dns server] step 1: select “015 domain name” from “unused options” list box and click “add” button. “015 domain name” moves to “active options:” list box. Adding options (domain name) step 2: enter the domain name. Step 3: click “o...

  • Page 119

    Vol.1-59 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.2 when using microsoft windows 2000 before installing dns server, prepare the following: • pc installed microsoft windows 2000 server • cd-rom of microsoft windows 2000 server note: be sure to install the latest version service pack. The figure ...

  • Page 120

    Vol.1-60 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.2.1 installing microsoft dns server in microsoft windows 2000 step 1: start the microsoft windows 2000 server. Step 2: make sure that microsoft dns server has been installed on the pc. • select “start” -> “settings” -> “control panel” -> “add/re...

  • Page 121

    Vol.1-61 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 2: check the box of “domain name system[dns]” and click “ok”. Cd-rom request dialog box appears.Specify the location of cd-rom into edit box, and click “ok”. Components start to be configured in the diagram below..

  • Page 122

    Vol.1-62 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: click “finish” to complete the dns installation..

  • Page 123

    Vol.1-63 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.2.2 setting up dns server (microsoft windows 2000) step 1: start the microsoft windows 2000 server. Step 2: start “dns manager”. Select “start” -> “programs” -> “administrative tools” -> “dns”. Step 3: click “action” on the menu bar and point to...

  • Page 124

    Vol.1-64 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 5: highlight the dns on dns console, and then select “new zone...” on pulldown of “action”. Note: when the specified domain name is given to ip terminal, dhpc server must be used. Step 6: click “next” on new zone wizard..

  • Page 125

    Vol.1-65 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 7: select “standard primary” and click “next”. Step 8: select “forward lookup zone” and click “next”..

  • Page 126

    Vol.1-66 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 9: enter a domain name (nec.Co.Jp) in the name on the screen, and then click “next”. Step 10: make sure the file name (nec.Co.Jp.Dns) on the screen, and then click “next”..

  • Page 127

    Vol.1-67 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 11: click “finish” to complete the process. Step 12: make sure that the zone is created on dns screen..

  • Page 128

    Vol.1-68 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 13: highlight the created zone (nec.Co.Jp). Click the right mouse button and select “new host...” on the menu..

  • Page 129

    Vol.1-69 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 14: enter the host name (necdrs1) and the ip address (10.136.20.100), then click “add host”. The con- firming dialog appears indicating the process is successfully completed, then click “ok”. Note: host name of ip terminal is set to "necdrs1"...

  • Page 130

    Vol.1-70 chapter 1 devices required to build network 2.2.3 setting up dhcp options - dns server address, domain name (microsoft windows 2000) this section explains how to set dhcp options for ip terminals to obtain dns server address and domain name. Refer to 1.2.3 setting up dhcp server option (mic...

  • Page 131

    Vol.1-71 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 3: check the box of “006 dns servers” and specify ip address (10.136.20.150). Then click “add”. Ip address moves to “active options:” list box. Step 4: after confirming the ip address, click “ok” on the dialog box. Step 5: confirm that dns se...

  • Page 132

    Vol.1-72 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 6: select “configure options...” on “action”. Check the box of “015 dns domain name” and specify domain name (nec.Co.Jp), and then click “ok”. Step 7: confirm that dns server and dns domain name are added on dhcp console..

  • Page 133

    Vol.1-73 chapter 1 devices required to build network 3. Ftp server this section explains how to set up ftp service and the related data assignment. Ftp service allows ip terminals to download the program files by ftp. This section consists of the following. 10. Install of microsoft internet informat...

  • Page 134

    Vol.1-74 chapter 1 devices required to build network “network” dialog box (example) step 3: click “add” button on the “network” dialog box. “select network service” dialog box appears with the network service listing. Step 4: select “microsoft internet information server” in the list box and click “...

  • Page 135

    Vol.1-75 chapter 1 devices required to build network 3.2 ftp service setup this section explains how to set up ftp service. Step 1: start the microsoft windows nt server. Step 2: start “internet service manager.” select “start” -> “program” -> “internet service manager.” “microsoft internet service ...

  • Page 136

    Vol.1-76 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 4: click the right mouse button on the ftp server icon. A pull-down menu appears. “service properties...” on pull-down menu step 5: select “service properties...” on the menu. Ftp service property dialog box appears. “ftp service properties f...

  • Page 137

    Vol.1-77 chapter 1 devices required to build network step 6: check “allow anonymous connections” and “allow only anonymous connections” boxes on the service tab. Step 7: select “directories” tab. Directory used for download is displayed. The default is “c:\inetpub\ftp- root.” copy the files you want...

  • Page 138

    Vol.1-78 chapter 1 devices required to build network 4. Maintenance administration terminal (pcpro) this section explains the installation procedure of pcpro. The pcpro can be connected to the system via one of the following: • using lan cable • using rs-232c cable (ioc card provides rs-232c interfa...

  • Page 139

    Vol.1-79 chapter 1 devices required to build network 4.2 when using rs-232c cable (direct connection) when the distance between telephony server and the pcpro within 15 meters (49 feet), telephony server can be connected using rs-232c cables. See the figure below for details. Pcpro cable connection ...

  • Page 140

    Vol.1-80 chapter 1 devices required to build network 4.3 when using rs-232c cable via modems if the distance between telephony server and the pcpro exceeds 15 meters (49 feet), then connect telephony server and the pcpro using modems. Pcpro cabling, when using modems start prepare the pcpro. Set up ...

  • Page 141

    Vol.1-81 chapter 1 devices required to build network 5. System message printer when connecting a system message dedicated printer, follow the procedure below. Connecting the system message printer start install the printer. Install the printer, referring to the printer’s instruction manual. Connect ...

  • Page 142

    Vol.1-82 chapter 1 devices required to build network 6. Station message detail recording (smdr) terminal this section explains the cable connection for the station message detail recording (smdr) terminal.The smdr terminal can be connected to the system via one of the following: • using lan cable • ...

  • Page 143

    Vol.1-83 chapter 1 devices required to build network 6.2 when using rs-232c cable (direct connection) when the distance between telephony server and the smdr terminal is within 15 meters (49 feet), telephony server can be directly connected using rs-232c cables. See the figure below for details. Smd...

  • Page 144

    Vol.1-84 chapter 1 devices required to build network 6.3 when using rs-232c cable via modems if the distance between telephony server and the smdr terminal exceeds 15 meters (49 feet), then connect telephony server and the terminal using modems. Smdr terminal cabling, when using modems start prepare...

  • Page 145

    Vol.1-85 chapter 1 devices required to build network 7. Cable specifications sv 4port ca-a cable 1 rd rd st2 st2 cable accommodation (a) 2 cs cs cd cd rt rt ci ci dr dr sd sd cd cd dr dr rt rt ci ci sd sd st1 st1 g g rs rs er er rs rs er er st1 st1 g g cs cs rd rd st2 st2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1...

  • Page 146

    Vol.1-86 chapter 1 devices required to build network rs-232c ca-(0) detail 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) typ dt e champ connector (female) 25-pin cannon connector (male) connect to prt connect to ipx 2port ca-a type-1-sd type-2-rd type-3-rs type-4-cs type-5-dr type-6-sg type-7-cd type-8-er type-9-pb typ...

  • Page 147

    Vol.1-87 chapter 1 devices required to build network rs-232c ca-(1) detail 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) typ champ connector (female) 25-pin cannon connector (female) connect to rs-232c cable connect to ipx 2port ca-a type-1-sd type-2-rd type-3-rs type-4-cs type-5-dr type-6-sg type-7-cd type-8-er type-9...

  • Page 148

    Vol.1-88 chapter 1 devices required to build network rs-232c ca-(3) detail 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) typ champ connector (female) 25-pin cannon connector (male) connect to modem connect to ipx 2port ca-a typ-1-sd typ-2-rd typ-3-rs typ-4-cs typ-5-dr typ-6-sg typ-7-cd typ-8-er typ-10-sp0 typ-11-sp2 ty...

  • Page 149

    Vol.1-89 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming this chapter explains how to assign ip-related data using pcpro. Detailed information on each subject is ex- plained in the related guides. This chapter covers the following subjects: • ip related ...

  • Page 150

    Vol.1-90 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2. Ip related basic programming this section explains basic programming for ip devices/terminals, as listed below: • how to assign internal phe • how to assign internal phi • how to assign sp-phd • how to assign sp-phi • how to assign virtual p...

  • Page 151

    Vol.1-91 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.1 how to assign internal phe 2.1.1 general internal phe is a type of ph embedded in tp, which is one of the two registration destinations (tp and sp) in telephony server. Internal phe handles signaling control data for ip devices including an...

  • Page 152

    Vol.1-92 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.1.4 data programming step 1: asydl assign internal phe as valid. Sys 1, index 880, bit 3 = 1 (internal phe is valid.) step 2: (adtm) assign the internal phe port number when changing the default value (= 60130). Note: when the data are modifi...

  • Page 153

    Vol.1-93 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.2 how to assign internal phi 2.2.1 general internal phi is a type of ph embedded in tp, which is one of the two registration destinations (tp and sp) in the telephony server. Internal phi handles signaling control data for ip devices in propr...

  • Page 154

    Vol.1-94 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.2.4 data programming step 1: asydl assign internal phi as valid. Sys 1, index 880, bit 1 = 1 (internal phi is valid) assign phi re-transmission timer. Sys 1, index 884, bit 0 (phi re-transmission timer) 0 = 256 ms (default setting) 1 = 512 ms...

  • Page 155

    Vol.1-95 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming the figure below is an example to show internal phi accommodated location. In this example, “ 01308 ” is specified to lens and the group colored blue is the accommodated location corresponding to the lens. Step 4: adpm initialize and reset the ...

  • Page 156

    Vol.1-96 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.3 how to assign sp-phd 2.3.1 general sp-phd is a type of ph which controls communication between ip stations. In the communication, signaling control data are handled by sp-phd while voice data are sent/received by peer-to-peer between ip sta...

  • Page 157

    Vol.1-97 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.3.4 data programming note: sp-phd is embedded in, and controlled by mph. For the use of mph, it is required to make internal phe function valid. So internal phe data assignment is also necessary for the use of sp-phd. About the procedure for ...

  • Page 158

    Vol.1-98 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming hw4 hw0 hw1 hw2 hw3 hw5 hw6 hw7 hw8 hw9 hw10 highway number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 pwr #0 tsw/mux tsw/mux pwr #1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 00-01 02-03 0...

  • Page 159

    Vol.1-99 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.4 how to assign sp-phi 2.4.1 general sp-phi is a type of ph embedded in the telephony server. Sp-phi controls signaling control data for ip devices in sip mode including mg(bri)/mg(pri) [sip]/mc&mg-cot/mg-cot/8lc card/vs32 (sip mode). Some of...

  • Page 160

    Vol.1-100 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.4.4 data programming note: sp-phi is embedded in, and controlled by mph. For the use of mph, it is required to make internal phe function valid. So internal phe data assignment is also necessary for the use of sp-phi. About the procedure for...

  • Page 161

    Vol.1-101 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming hw4 hw0 hw1 hw2 hw3 hw5 hw6 hw7 hw8 hw9 hw10 highway number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 pwr #0 tsw/mux tsw/mux pwr #1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 00-01 02-03 ...

  • Page 162

    Vol.1-102 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.5 how to assign virtual pir 2.5.1 general virtual pir is a non-physical port interface rack. Some phs must be accommodated in virtual pir. Virtual pir can also be used for ip terminal, the subline of dterm, and voice channel for ccis over ip...

  • Page 163

    Vol.1-103 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.5.4 data programming step 1: asydl (virtual pir assignment) using sys1 index 556, 557, set 1 to each bit of the corresponding pir to be used as virtual pir. The default value is 0 (=physical pir). The following shows the relationship between...

  • Page 164

    Vol.1-104 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 2.6 how to set terminal software (when using hyperterminal) 2.6.1 general terminal software is necessary for assigning configuration data to ip devices. Note: for windows computers, hyperterminal was bundled with windows 95 to windows xp. This...

  • Page 165

    Vol.1-105 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming step 5: port setting screen appears. Set appropriate data and click ok. Terminal software setting has completed..

  • Page 166

    Vol.1-106 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3. Network data programming this section explains data programming of network related data programming. The following topics are covered here: • guideline for calculating bandwidth required • peer to peer bandwidth control (by location id) • t...

  • Page 167

    Vol.1-107 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.1 guideline for calculating bandwidth required this section provides a guideline for designing network that includes ip terminals in terms of bandwidth. 3.1.1 bandwidth required for voice traffic bandwidth required for carrying voice traffic...

  • Page 168

    Vol.1-108 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming ip terminal dtermip, dtermip inaset, ip enabled dterm g.711, g.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms g.723.1 (5.3k 6.3k), g.723.1 (6.3k 5.3k) 30ms, 60ms note 2 sip multiple line terminal dt700 series dt750, dt730, dt730g g.711, g.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, ...

  • Page 169

    Vol.1-109 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming mg(pri) mg-24pria, mg-30pria, sca-24pria, sca-30pria g.711, g.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms note 7 g.723.1 (5.3k 6.3k), g.723.1 (6.3k 5.3k) 30ms, 60ms t.30 (for fax) - g.726 (for fax) 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms t.38udp (for fax) - mg-pri/mg-pra g.71...

  • Page 170

    Vol.1-110 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming note 1: for a connection via ippad, “60 milliseconds” cannot be specified as payload size. Mg(sip) mg-sip16, mg-sip16 [mg-16sipmga/ sca-16sipmga], mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] g.711, g.729a 20ms, 30ms, 40ms note 8 mg-sip96 g.711, g.729a 20ms, 30...

  • Page 171

    Vol.1-111 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming note 2: for dtermip 8 button-type (itr-8d), g.723.1 cannot be used. Note 3: payload type g.722 can be used only for: • the connection between dt700 series (dt730/dt730g/dt750) • the connection between dtermsp30 version 15 and dt700 series (dt7...

  • Page 172

    Vol.1-112 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming note 11: when soft client sp350 is used as an acd terminal, assign the following payload type and payload size. Following payload type and payload size are effective only for the connection to dtermsp30 (version 15 or later), sp350, dt750, dt7...

  • Page 173

    Vol.1-113 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.1.2 bandwidth required for control signal the following shows approximate value of bandwidth required for carrying control signal. Relationship between equipment and bandwidth required for control signal equipment bandwidth required [kbps] n...

  • Page 174

    Vol.1-114 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming mg(sip) mg-sip16 see remarks. {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit note 3 mg-sip16 card [sca-16sipmga] see remarks. {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit note 3 mg-sip16 box [mg-16sipmga] see remarks. {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit note 3...

  • Page 175

    Vol.1-115 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming vs-32 vs32 vs-32(dual) card [sca-vs32va] proprietary protocol 480 per unit (15kbps/ch) sip 1200 per unit (37.5kbps/ch) vs-32(dual) box [mg- vs32va] proprietary protocol 480 per unit (15kbps/ch) sip 1200 per unit (37.5kbps/ch) ipg digital 5 per...

  • Page 176

    Vol.1-116 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming note 1: all values listed are approximate. Note 2: the bandwidth noted above are worst case. Depending on the layer 2 infrastructure between the end points will determined the final bandwidth of the algorithm integrated. Note 3: bandwidth for ...

  • Page 177

    Vol.1-117 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.2 peer to peer bandwidth control (by location id) 3.2.1 general this feature can realize effective use of available bandwidth, by specifying adequate payload type and payload size on a location-location basis by using location id. Location i...

  • Page 178

    Vol.1-118 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming as mentioned, loc-id is the basic unit for setting bandwidth control. Loc-ids can be assigned on the basis of several units; network address, point code, fusion point code, station number. The following explains about them. In addition, anothe...

  • Page 179

    Vol.1-119 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming [2] station number assigning loc-id on a station number (stn) basis meets the requirement for more flexible configura- tion. By putting a specific station in an individual location, the station can be used in different bandwidth from other sta...

  • Page 180

    Vol.1-120 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming [3] point code assigning loc-id to point code (pc) is necessary for bandwidth control in ccis over ip network. In ccis over ip network, each node manages bandwidth control individually. Each node assigns loc-id to pc for the other node. So pc,...

  • Page 181

    Vol.1-121 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming [4] fusion point code assigning loc-id to fusion point code (fpc) is necessary for bandwidth control in fccs network. In fccs network, each node manages bandwidth control individually. Each node assigns loc-ids to fpcs except for its own. So e...

  • Page 182

    Vol.1-122 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming [5] dummy location when network routes branched off in multiple directions, it is available to combine these routes into one by assigning dummy location as a branch point. Also, when multiple locations exist in a single network, these location...

  • Page 183

    Vol.1-123 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming therefore, the configuration of location ids is as follows: how to use dummy locations 3.2.2 hardware required none 3.2.3 installation procedure none 3.2.4 data programming step 1: alocl assign ip location id at first. This id can be set on a ...

  • Page 184

    Vol.1-124 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming loc-id: assign any number in the range 0-4095, associated with the network ad- dress assigned in the ip address parameter. When 0.0.0.0 is assigned in the ip address parameter, loc-id is automatically set to “0” (the value cannot be changed). ...

  • Page 185

    Vol.1-125 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming for aivcn: a fpc: fusion point code of the self-location. (1-253) a loc-id: location id of the self-location. (0-4095) b fpc: fusion point code of the target location. (1-253) b: loc-id: location id of the target location. (0-4095) [setting of...

  • Page 186

    Vol.1-126 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming payload size (payload size): • 10ms • 20ms • 30ms • 40ms • 60ms note: for available payload type/payload size, refer to “3.1.1 bandwidth required for voice traffic”. Note: when no payload type and size are specified, the values assigned via sy...

  • Page 187

    Vol.1-127 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 1st - 15th loc-id: enter loc-id which relays start loc-id and end loc-id. When start loc and end loc are adjacent to each other, leave the routing table blank. (d) the routing table is set by pressing “set.” (e) by pressing “disp”, bandwidth b...

  • Page 188

    Vol.1-128 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.2.5 example of bandwidth control data assignment here describes how to assign bandwidth control data. Sample #1 star topology (standalone) [1] alocl 1 2 3 4 5 0.0.0.0 / 32 10.40.10.0 / 24 10.40.20. 0 / 24 10.40.30.0 / 25 10.40.30.128 / 25 ip...

  • Page 189

    Vol.1-129 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming sample #2 star topology (p2p ccis) in ccis network, both pcs (telephony servers) need different data assignment respectively. The following is an example of it. [1] alocl 1 2 3 4 5 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 / 32 10 . 40 . 10 . 0 / 24 10 . 41 . 10 . 0 / 24...

  • Page 190

    Vol.1-130 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming data assignment in pc2 [1] alocl 1 2 3 4 5 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 / 32 10 . 41 . 10 . 0 / 24 10 . 41 . 20 . 0 / 24 10 . 40 . 10 . 0 / 24 ip address loc-id 0 1 2 11 * loc-id 10 [2] aivcl 1 2 3 4 5 6 loc-id b 1 2 11 2 11 11 payload g.711, 40 ms g.729a, 2...

  • Page 191

    Vol.1-131 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming sample #3 star topology (p2p fccs) in fccs network, all fpcs (telephony servers) need different data assignment respectively, same as ccis net- work. Differently from ccis, however, there is data assigned only to ncn which is the main node in ...

  • Page 192

    Vol.1-132 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming [1] alocl [2] aivcn ( ncn only ) [3] abndl 1 2 0 1 100 100 start loc-id intermediate loc-id end loc-id 20 20 routing data assignment limit value assignment: 1 20 100 1520 kbps loc-id a loc-id b limit value remarks line a 1 2 3 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 / ...

  • Page 193

    Vol.1-133 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.3 tos control by location id 3.3.1 general type of service (tos) control function between the ip terminals connected to the system. This function assigns priorities to the signaling packet and voice packet to ensure efficient, reliable commu...

  • Page 194

    Vol.1-134 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.3.4 data programming step 1: alocl assign the location id data and tos value for signaling packets by this command. Type: select “network address” note 1 . Ip address: assign the ip address. For the telephony server, assign “0.0.0.0.” mask b...

  • Page 195

    Vol.1-135 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming b loc-id: location id of the target location. (0-4095) note: loc-id=0 is used for the location id of the telephony server. Note: only the location id corresponding to the network address can be assigned on the aivcl/aivcn when assigning settin...

  • Page 196

    Vol.1-136 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.4 virtual lan (vlan) 3.4.1 general the implementation of virtual lans (vlans) divides voice and data network into different segments at layer2. The system uses tagged vlan, which conforms to ieee 802.1q. To identify vlan frame, a unique id c...

  • Page 197

    Vol.1-137 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming priority control (conforms to ieee 802.1p) to use this feature, a switch that supports priority control is required. Phd/phe/ippad circuit cards can set this value to the user priority field. User priority is configured as follows: low high pr...

  • Page 198

    Vol.1-138 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming vlan availability in the system the following shows a listing of terminals/circuit cards and vlan availability. 3.4.2 hardware required layer 2 switch (i.E.Poe switch) that supports vlan is required. For details, please contact the network adm...

  • Page 199

    Vol.1-139 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.5 pad control by location id 3.5.1 general pad value can be set on a location id basis, according to the network condition. The following figure shows an example of the network configuration that applies pad control by using location id. Pad...

  • Page 200

    Vol.1-140 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.5.4 data programming step 1: asyd index 4 、 bit 5 (pad control for station-to-station call) on/off when bit 5 is 0 (default), pad control for station-to-station call is applied by the telephony server. The following pad value is applied to r...

  • Page 201

    Vol.1-141 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming step 2: alocl assign the location-id data on a network basis. Step 3: aivcl assign adequate pad value by specifying two location-ids. The total pad value that is obtained by add- ing the pad value specified in this step and pad value specified...

  • Page 202

    Vol.1-142 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming the following shows the relative pad value by aivcl when pad control for station-to-station call is on (asyd, index 4, bit 5 = 0) pad table for ip terminals. Pad table for legacy terminals ip terminal group and ip terminal group ip terminal gr...

  • Page 203

    Vol.1-143 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming note 1: pad value can be set in combination of two location ids by aivcl (kind = 1). The value ranges 0 [db] to 16 [db] in 2 db increments. This pad value and pad value by asyd, index 4, bit 5 (pad con- trol for station-to-station call) are ap...

  • Page 204

    Vol.1-144 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.6 echo canceler control by location id 3.6.1 general in voip networks, echo is an important issue to maintain quality of voice communications. Echo canceler can be controlled by using location id. For this feature, location id must be assign...

  • Page 205

    Vol.1-145 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 3.7 pad/ec control ip/phc support by assigning system data (asydl, sys 1, index 825), default pad/ec value that is appropriate to the network environment is automatically applied. If the value is not appropriate for a particular network or ter...

  • Page 206

    Vol.1-146 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming programming step 1: asydl - assign the following system data. Sys 1 index 811: tone code by countries. For more information, refer to the command manual. Index 825, bit 0 = 1, bit 1 = 0: pad / ec ip support is in service when using ccis over i...

  • Page 207

    Vol.1-147 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4. Data programming quick reference sheet this section provides quick reference for service features covered in the previous chapters. Command in a round bracket ( ) is optional command. Assign the data when required..

  • Page 208

    Vol.1-148 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.1 ip terminal and sip multiple line terminal 4.1.1 basic data assignment asydl anpd aspa alidl aistl (alocl) (aivcl) (akyd) (adks) sys1, index 811: terminal tone type terminal tone type ip station data (virtual pir) 1st digit of station numb...

  • Page 209

    Vol.1-149 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.1.2 mac authentication yes no amac adtm start ip station mac address registration password? End assign mac address and the station number. Assign ip station mac address registration password..

  • Page 210

    Vol.1-150 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.1.3 login/logout asyd asydl adtm anpd aspa asfc amnd (akyd) (adsl) (adks) start end sys1, index 93, bit 6 = 0 : separate tenant data table development for amnd command. Sys1, index 848, bits 0-3 : assign threshold count number for outputting...

  • Page 211

    Vol.1-151 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.2 sp controlled sip terminal asydl asyd alocl adtm alidl adpm asdin assdn aspo asptl sys1, index 880, bit 3 = 1 (internal phe is valid) assign port number of internal phe. Assign the lens of internal phe. Sys1, index 30 = 06 hex. Sys1, index...

  • Page 212

    Vol.1-152 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.3 sip handler controlled sip terminal asydl adtm assign port number of internal phe and sip handler. Alidl assign the accommodated locations of internal phe, sip handler and ip-dtg. Alocl assign tos value. Adpm initialize internal phe and si...

  • Page 213

    Vol.1-153 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.4 ip terminal and legacy station / trunk connection via ippad acrd actk afpc alidl mbct assign the route class data of the ip pad. Assign the connection trunk data. Assign the c_rt number to fpc = 0. Assign the lan information. Make idle the...

  • Page 214

    Vol.1-154 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.5 h.323 terminal connection asydl alidl agkdl/ agkdn cogkl/ coghn ahsd algsl/ algsn sys1, index 30 sys1, index 186, bit 6 = 1 sys1, index 187 = 00h sys1, index 220, bit 6 = 0 assign phe lan information. Assign gatekeeper information. Make su...

  • Page 215

    Vol.1-155 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.6 analog terminal connection via analog 2mc / mc&mg-cot note: note: for necessary data assignment of analog terminals connected with ug50, refer to “ug50 instal- lation guide”. Asydl anpd aspa alidl aistl (alocl) (aivcl) sys1, index 811 sys1...

  • Page 216

    Vol.1-156 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.7 how to assign sp-phd note: this flow chart includes data assignment for internal phe because internal phe is necessary for acti- vating sp-phd. If internal phe data has been already assigned, the related data are not required to be assigne...

  • Page 217

    Vol.1-157 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.8 how to assign internal phe asydl (adtm) alidl adpm sys1, index 880 bit 3 = 1 (internal phe) assign port number when changing the default value (= 60130). Assign the lan information. Initialize the internal phe. Start end.

  • Page 218

    Vol.1-158 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.9 how to assign internal phi asydl (adtm) alidl adpm sys1, index 880 bit 1 = 1 (internal phi) sys1, index 884 bit 0 (phi re-transmission timer) assign port number when changing the default value (= 64000). Assign the lan information. Initial...

  • Page 219

    Vol.1-159 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.10 how to assign sp-phi note: this flow chart includes data assignment for internal phe because internal phe is necessary for acti- vating sp-phi. If internal phe data has been already assigned, the related data are not required to be assign...

  • Page 220

    Vol.1-160 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.11 how to assign virtual pir asydl asyd aunt start end sys1, index 556-557 (set 1 to each pir to be used as virtual pir.) sys1, index 0 (number of mgs[physical pir + virtual pir]) sys1, index 198-199 (specify img [0-3] mounting status.) assi...

  • Page 221

    Vol.1-161 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.12 peer to peer bandwidth control (by location id) alocl aivcl asfc abndl start end assign the location id data. Assign ip service voice control data. Sfi 199 (bandwidth restriction) when 1 is set, the station assigning the sfc will not be r...

  • Page 222

    Vol.1-162 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.13 tos control by location id alocl aivcl start end assign the location id data. Assign the ip service voice control data..

  • Page 223

    Vol.1-163 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.14 pad control by location id asyd alocl aivcl start end sys1, index 4, bit 5 = 0 (pad control for station-to-station call is applied.) assign the location id data. Assign pad value by specifying two location ids..

  • Page 224

    Vol.1-164 chapter 2 ip-related basic feature programming 4.15 echo canceler control by location id alocl aivcl start end assign the location id data. Assign echo on/off data..

  • Page 225

    Vol.1-165 chapter 3 installation design chapter 3 installation design 1. Precautions when installing peripheral equipment 1.1 anti-static this manual provides static caution indicators on pages which describe tasks that involve static-sensitive com- ponents. Static caution indicator the 3m model 801...

  • Page 226

    Vol.1-166 chapter 3 installation design note 2: a ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material. 1.2 essential/critical information in order to prevent accidents or equipment damage when performing tasks, this manual provides warning , caution and note in...

  • Page 227

    Vol.1-167 chapter 3 installation design 2. Zt/cs installation design 2.1 basic knowledge on zt installation 2.1.1 hypothetical range of radio zone when designing the image of a radio zone provided by a zt, the radio zone can be drawn by using a specific prefixed distance characteristics value. Provi...

  • Page 228

    Vol.1-168 chapter 3 installation design 2.1.2 image of zt installation assuming a zt is installed in a general office environment, one zt can rarely cover the entire service area. A general service area is composed of multiple zts. The following diagrams show the image of zt instal- lation. A. Singl...

  • Page 229

    Vol.1-169 chapter 3 installation design 2.1.3 radio wave propagation radio waves used by the built-in pcs system employ a digital signal of service frequency of approximate- ly 1.9 ghz band. The types of radio waves and types of propagation involved with basic radio wave prop- agation are considered...

  • Page 230

    Vol.1-170 chapter 3 installation design • types of propagation there are two major types of radio wave propagation: 1. Line-of-sight propagation 2. Propagation beyond the horizon. As opposed to a cellular phone, consideration must be given to the line-of-sight propagation character- istics, where a ...

  • Page 231

    Vol.1-171 chapter 3 installation design outdoor installation avoid places easily affected by radio disturbances from cars, etc. (e.G., near a principal road). When installing by the sea, protect the zt from salt using the outdoor mounting box and other pro- tection if necessary. Avoid places where t...

  • Page 232

    Vol.1-172 chapter 3 installation design 3. Ip-bs installation design note: ip-bs is not for the north american market. 3.1 installation design of ip-bs (synchronization) 3.1.1 wireless synchronization kind when assigning ip-bs data to the telephony server, you can select one of the following three w...

  • Page 233

    Vol.1-173 chapter 3 installation design wireless block 1 wireless block 2 wireless block 3 seconday seconday seconday seconday seconday seconday seconday seconday sync sync sync sync sync sync sync sync sync primay primay primay sub-primay sub-primary : represents wireless area for 1 ip-bs : represe...

  • Page 234

    Vol.1-174 chapter 3 installation design 3.1.3 operation pattern of primary ip-bs (a) when synchronizing to the sys-id specified by office data in this settings, the ip-bs starts up, synchronizing with the cs of specified id. If not find any cs for the syn- chronization, it will start running by itse...

  • Page 235

    Vol.1-175 chapter 3 installation design (b) when using cs within the same system as primary when the other ip-bss and css are in the same area; these wireless blocks are overlapped with each other. Ip- bs takes the cs for the synchronization. In this case, setting as primary or sub primary is not en...

  • Page 236

    Vol.1-176 chapter 3 installation design (c) when primary ip-bs starts running by itself due to not find cs for the synchronization. Ip-bs assigned as primary will search for the cs in the following order: (1) cs having sys-id specified as clock source (2) cs which has identical sys-id and whose sync...

  • Page 237

    Vol.1-177 chapter 3 installation design 4. Sn1757 bbub installation design sn1757 bbub is a booster battery unit (hereinafter called bbu) that is used to light message waiting lamp. This bbu is able to light 100 message waiting lamps by one unit. A maximum of two unit can be connected per a system. ...

  • Page 238

    Vol.1-178 chapter 3 installation design note 1: when connecting the bbu to the system, be sure to remove the short piece (sp pwr ca-l) before in- serting the cable. Note 2: the bbu can be installed in a maximum of two pirs. Note: the consumption current for +80v is 0.5a, and 0.88a for -48v. Note: a ...

  • Page 239

    Revision sheet rev-1 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description - vol.1 revision sheet s7 :date july,2013 chapter 2 91,93,96,99,110,112,115,116, 117,123,124,134,135,138,140, 143,146,155 chapter 3 172 s7 :date june,2013 chapter 1 78,82 chapter 2 92,94,97,100,108,110,113,114, 121,122,123,132,149...

  • Page 240

    Nwa-041680-001 issue 12.0 july, 2013 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description volume 2 page vol.2-i 1. Ip-bs (bs301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 241

    Vol.2-ii table of contents (continued) page 4.3.6 basic test procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4.4 operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 242

    Vol.2-iii table of contents (continued) page 6.3.3 power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 6.3.4 configuration command assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 243

    Vol.2-iv table of contents (continued) page 8.4 operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 8.4.1 how to use maintenance command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4...

  • Page 244

    Vol.2-v table of contents (continued) page 11.1.1 other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 11.2 operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 245

    Vol.2-vi table of contents (continued) page 12.3.6 basic test procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 12.4 operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 246

    Vol.2-vii table of contents (continued) page 14.2 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 14.2.1 how to set mg(pri) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 247

    Vol.2-viii table of contents (continued) page 15.4.1 how to back up and restore config data by serial connection (local download) . . . . 1188 15.4.2 how to back up and restore config data by tftp connection (remote download) . . 1191 15.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local downlo...

  • Page 248

    Vol.2-ix table of contents (continued) page 17.2 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339 17.3 startup and installation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 249

    Vol.2-x table of contents (continued) page 19.3.4 setting of pilot number for mg-sip96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607 19.3.5 operation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 250

    Vol.2-xi table of contents (continued) page 21.4.5 cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 21.4.6 operation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 251

    Vol.2-xii table of contents (continued) page 24.2.1 how to set vs-32(dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2007 24.2.2 cable connection to vs-32(dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 252

    Vol.2-xiii table of contents (continued) page 27.1.2 function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2152 27.1.3 office data copy to sr-mgc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 253

    Vol.2-xiv table of contents (continued) page.

  • Page 254

    Vol.2-1 ip-bs (bs301) 1. Ip-bs (bs301) 1.1 general ip-bs is an ip-based cell station. To connect ip-bs, follow the procedure below. Note: ip-bs is not for the north american market. Ip-bs when the ip-bs is connected to a hub using cascade connection, a maximum of four hubs are recommended for 10base...

  • Page 255

    Vol.2-2 ip-bs (bs301) 1.2 preparation for ip-bs installation (a) confirmation before starting the installation because ip-bs is the equipment uses the faint signal, avoid installing the ip-bs within the below written con- ditions as possible to ensure the communication quality and complex working. [...

  • Page 256

    Vol.2-3 ip-bs (bs301) 1.3 ip-bs installation procedure note: ip-bs is registered to internal phe embedded in the telephony server. So internal phe data assignment is required to use ip-bs. About the procedure for the internal phe data assignment, refer to vol.1, chapter 2, “2. Ip related basic progr...

  • Page 257

    Vol.2-4 ip-bs (bs301) step 9: connect the ac adapter ( note 1 ) to the socket of the ip-bs. Note 1: when a power supply hub is used, the ac adapter is not used. Step 10: attach the removed cover again. Connection of lan cable and ac adapter step 11: mount the ip-bs to the mounting tab. Step 12: adju...

  • Page 258

    Vol.2-5 ip-bs (bs301) - flash faulty need to be repaired. Off off power off check the connections of cables and the ac adapter (if used). Flash - speech channels are all busy please wait for a while. Lamp indication state remarks green red.

  • Page 259

    Vol.2-6 ip-bs (bs301) caution: • do not take the equipment apart. • do not short the positive/negative terminals of the ac adapter. • pull out the ac adapter for safety in case of lightning nearby. • do not touch the power plug by wet hand. • do not use the multiple outlet extension plug/code. • do ...

  • Page 260

    Vol.2-7 ip-bs (bs301) 1.4 ip-bs data assignment note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. When ip-bs com- municates with the telephony server, the telephony server acts as drs, which is controlling function of the telephony server. • ip address, de...

  • Page 261

    Vol.2-8 ip-bs (bs301) • data settings enter commands to write/read the data. Reset the ip-bs after the data change by reboot command. [1] not using dhcp server. Command: set dhcp off when ip-bs receives the settings successfully, set done is displayed. This current settings can be dis- played by sho...

  • Page 262

    Vol.2-9 ip-bs (bs301) -use the broadcast by using ping command (example: in the case of “10.2.168.0/24”, enter “ping 10.2.168.255”) [3] default gateway ip address command: set dgw example: default gateway ip address is “10.41.207.254” when ip-bs receives the settings successfully, set done message i...

  • Page 263

    Vol.2-10 ip-bs (bs301) in the case of using secondary drs, specify ip address for it. Command: set drssip example: secondary ip address is “10.41.207.31” when ip-bs receives the settings successfully, set done message is displayed. This specified settings can be displayed by using show drssip comman...

  • Page 264

    Vol.2-11 ip-bs (bs301) command: reboot [6] vlan settings vlan can be set from a pc only. Connecting and logging in is the same as explained on the previous page. Command: set vlan example: vlan id: 4094 priority: 0 when ip-bs receives the settings successfully, set done message is displayed. This sp...

  • Page 265

    Vol.2-12 ip-bs (bs301) (3) example of settings here shows a example of data assignment for the following condition. • dhcp is not used • ip address of ip-bs: 10.41.207.20 • subnet mask of ip-bs: 255.255.255.0 • ip address of default gateway: 10.41.207.254 • ip address of drs: 10.41.207.30 note 1 not...

  • Page 266

    Vol.2-13 cell station (cs) 2. Cell station (cs) 2.1 general cell station (cs) is used for the phs system. The following shows the outer view of cs (bs31) as an example. A maximum three personal stations (ps) can be simultaneously accessed to a cs. Cell station interface circuit cards: the following ...

  • Page 267

    Vol.2-14 cell station (cs) 2.3 cable connection diagram and maximum length maximum length of the cable to each cs depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the way of power supply (power supply from built-in phs system or local power supply). Power supply from the telephony server (without arresto...

  • Page 268

    Vol.2-15 cell station (cs) 1. Cable connection for bs21-id/bs21-nd/bs21a-id/bs21a-nd cable connection for bs21-id/bs21-nd/bs21a-id/bs21a-nd (s interface) note 1: maximum length of the cable to each cs depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the way of power supply (power supply from built-in phs...

  • Page 269

    Vol.2-16 cell station (cs) power supply from built-in phs system (without arrestor) local power supply note 2: connection of the connector lead depends on the mounting location of csint circuit card. For more detail, refer to circuit card description. Note 3: below is the specification of 4-wire pre...

  • Page 270

    Vol.2-17 cell station (cs) 2. Cable connection for bs31a/bs41 cable connection for bs31a/bs41 (u interface) note 1: the maximum length of the cable to each cs depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the way of power supply (power supply from built-in phs system/local power supply). Attention con...

  • Page 271

    Vol.2-18 cell station (cs) power supply from built-in phs system (without arrestor) local power supply note 2: connection of the connector lead depends on the mounting location of csint circuit card. For more detail, refer to the circuit card description. Note 3: below is the specification of 4-wire...

  • Page 272

    Vol.2-19 cell station (cs) 2.4 installation of cell station 2.4.1 how to install bs01-id/bs01-nd step 1: post the attached dimension drawing on the mounting location so as to mark the locations of screw holes. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. Diameter : φ 3.0~3.2 dep...

  • Page 273

    Vol.2-20 cell station (cs) step 3: if power feeding from the telephony server is impossible, use the “ac adapter” for local power feeding. The cs has two adapter jacks; “in” and “out”. When the ac adapter is used for one cs, use the adapter jack “in”. When the ac adapter is also used for the adjacen...

  • Page 274

    Vol.2-21 cell station (cs) step 5: adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Note: since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Adjustment of antenna 30 ° 30 ° 30 ° 0 ° 90 ° 0 ° typical setting for wall-mount note: when installing a cs in a dedicated locat...

  • Page 275

    Vol.2-22 cell station (cs) 2.4.2 how to install bs21-id/bs21-nd/bs21a-id/bs21a-nd/bs31a step 1: [1] secure the mounting tag using three screws as shown below. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. Diameter : φ 3.0~3.2 depth : 20mm (0.8 inch) [2] mount the cs on the mounti...

  • Page 276

    Vol.2-23 cell station (cs) step 2: if power feeding from the telephony server is not available, use the “ac adapter” for local power feed- ing. The “ac adapter” is connected to the cs as shown below. Local power feeding cs ac adaptor plug ac adaptor jack ac100v plug ac adaptor.

  • Page 277

    Vol.2-24 cell station (cs) step 3: adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Note: since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Adjustment of antenna step 4: turn on the power to the cs to confirm the lamp indications are normal. Lamp indication state rema...

  • Page 278

    Vol.2-25 cell station (cs) [reference] how to make busy a cs observe the following procedure to make busy a cs. • use mbcsl/mbcsn to make busy an individual line. • use the mb key on the csint card to perform make-busy on a csint card basis. • disconnect the line cable from the cs that is set make-b...

  • Page 279

    Vol.2-26 cell station (cs) 2.4.3 how to install bs41 step 1: [1] secure the mounting tag using three screws as shown below. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. Diameter : φ 3.0~3.2 depth : 20mm (0.8 inch) [2] mount the cs on the mounting tag, and secure the cs using the...

  • Page 280

    Vol.2-27 cell station (cs) step 2: [1] if power feeding from the telephony server is not available, use the “ac adapter” for local power feeding. Remove the cover from the reverse side of the cs. [2] the “ac adapter” and “line cable” are connected to the cs as shown below. Local power feeding [3] at...

  • Page 281

    Vol.2-28 cell station (cs) step 3: adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Note: since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Adjustment of antenna step 4: turn on the power to the cs to confirm the lamp indications are normal. Lamp indication state rema...

  • Page 282

    Vol.2-29 cell station (cs) [reference] how to make busy a cs observe the following procedure to make busy a cs. • use mbcsn to make busy an individual line. • use the mb key on the csint card to perform make-busy on a csint card basis. • disconnect the line cable from the cs that is set make-busy. I...

  • Page 283

    Vol.2-30 zone transceiver (zt) 3. Zone transceiver (zt) 3.1 general zone transceiver (zt) is used for the wireless/pcs system. The following shows the outer view of 2-wired zone transceiver as an example. A maximum three personal stations (ps) can be simultaneously accessed to a zt. Zone transceiver...

  • Page 284

    Vol.2-31 zone transceiver (zt) 3.2 installation procedure step 1: run the cables between zt and its modular block (jack), and between the modular blocks and the mdf. Step 2: install csint circuit card into a proper slot of pir for connecting cs. For more information about csint circuit card, refer t...

  • Page 285

    Vol.2-32 zone transceiver (zt) 3.3 cable connection diagram and maximum length when using pa-4csie (s interface): attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required related equipment for built-in wireless system (when using pa-4csie) pir installation cable back- board lt p mdf no.1 no...

  • Page 286

    Vol.2-33 zone transceiver (zt) note 1: the maximum length of the cable to each ztii/ztii-s depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the type of power supply (power supply from the built-in wireless system/local power supply). Power supply from the built-in wireless system (without arrester, when ...

  • Page 287

    Vol.2-34 zone transceiver (zt) 3.4 installation of zone transceiver (zt) step 1: when mounting a zt on a wall/ceiling, observe the following instructions. I do not mount a zt on a wall/ceiling that cannot sustain the weight of zt (e.G. A plaster wall, plywood wall). Ii make sufficient space so that ...

  • Page 288

    Vol.2-35 zone transceiver (zt) step 2: post the attached dimension drawing on the mounting location to mark the locations of the screw holes. Two screw holes are provided for the lower mounting position. Depending on the mounting location, se- lect either of the two mounting position. Leave a space ...

  • Page 289

    Vol.2-36 zone transceiver (zt) dimension drawing for zt installation (2/2) 0.2 (5) 0.5 (12) 2.4 (60) 0.08 (2) 0.3 (8) 0.2 ( 5) front 0.9 (22.5) 4.9 (124.4) 2.2 (54) 0.5 ( 13.5) 0.4 ( 10) 3.1 (78.75 ) 0.8 ( 21) 0.08 (2) 0.3 (8) inches (mm).

  • Page 290

    Vol.2-37 zone transceiver (zt) step 4: mount the zt on the wall and slide it so that the heads of the screws fix the zt tightly. Mounting of the zt step 5: if power feeding from the telephony server is impossible, use the ac adapter for local power feeding. The “ac adapter” is connected to the zt as...

  • Page 291

    Vol.2-38 zone transceiver (zt) step 6: turn on the power to the zt to confirm the lamp indications are normal. Refer to the table and figure below. * one cycle is 2 second meaning of led indications lamp light stage meaning power lit light when the power is supplied status off line is not open lit t...

  • Page 292

    Vol.2-39 zone transceiver (zt) leds on the zone transceiver power status power lamp status lamp.

  • Page 293

    Vol.2-40 zone transceiver (zt) step 7: the angle of the antenna is variable between 0º and 180º as shown below. In a wall-mount installation, normally the antenna is set at an angle of 0º so that the antenna may be vertical with the radio zone. Note: since the antenna is easily broken, handle it wit...

  • Page 294

    Vol.2-41 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4. Analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.1 general 4.1.1 introduction this document describes the setup, data programming, operation, and maintenance procedures of the media converter (mc). Mc is a gateway device providing media conversion between interne...

  • Page 295

    Vol.2-42 analog 2mc (analog media converter) position of analog 2mc within the system (basic connection) note 1: in the communication between analog 2mc and ip terminals/devices, control signals are all handled by internal phe, media (voice or fax) data are sent/received directly between the ip term...

  • Page 296

    Vol.2-43 analog 2mc (analog media converter) ccis over ip the ccis over ip feature applies to mc terminals as well as other ip terminals, such as a dtermip. Internal phc, which is accommodated in the telephony server same as internal phe, enables node-to-node connection - ccis network. The figure be...

  • Page 297

    Vol.2-44 analog 2mc (analog media converter) vlan the vlan feature applies to mc terminals as well as other ip terminals, such as a dtermip. When dividing one physical network into multiple networks virtually, priority control (giving precedence to voice packet) can be performed. Network data progra...

  • Page 298

    Vol.2-45 analog 2mc (analog media converter) fax connection fax data transmission can be selected according to the network configuration. The transmission type is deter- mined by the connection route, whether the data are transferred to destination node via cot, dti, odt, prt or iptrk card to pstn/p...

  • Page 299

    Vol.2-46 analog 2mc (analog media converter) fax relay (t30) between iptrk cards cot, prt, brt, dti, tlt, odt fax iptrk iptrk fax fax fax analog 2mc analog 2mc pstn/ private network wan lc ip pad ippad g.711 or adpcm (g.726) is recommended [mc-trunk connection via ippad (excluding ccis over ip)] [mc...

  • Page 300

    Vol.2-47 analog 2mc (analog media converter) analog 2mc analog 2mc has an rj-45 jack (for lan connection) and a total of two modular jacks (port 0 and port 1) for a maximum of two analog telephone/fax (g3) terminals. In addition, it provides the following features: a. Voice data processing • voice d...

  • Page 301

    Vol.2-48 analog 2mc (analog media converter) note 1: the maximum transmission speed is 14.4 kbps. Note 2: t.30 is available for fccs and ccis. Note 3: super g3 fax is connected in a g3 mode automatically (v.34 is not available). Assign ecm=off on the mc setting by using the maintenance console. Note...

  • Page 302

    Vol.2-49 analog 2mc (analog media converter) specifications of analog 2mc (continued) function specification note analog in- terface/ function number of lines two lines per mc rj-11 modular jack 2 ports supply voltage -48v loop resistance maximum of 1200 Ω including the terminal supply current 25 ma...

  • Page 303

    Vol.2-50 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.1.3 hardware requirements the required hardware for using mc is described in this section. Analog 2mc analog 2mc (sn8029 mcec-a) pz-cc152 (this card is built inside the mc main frame) installed firmware: sp-3629 2amc prog-a to use analog 2mc for an anal...

  • Page 304

    Vol.2-51 analog 2mc (analog media converter) (for more detail about adpm command, refer to chapter 2 business system command descriptions and data sheets of command manual.) 3. Internal phe module can be initialized with adpm command. The behaviors of each operation are below. Module reset: regenera...

  • Page 305

    Vol.2-52 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.2 analog 2mc - installation 4.2.1 mounting location this section shows how to install the hardware required for analog 2mc. 4.2.2 how to set analog 2mc analog 2mc can be installed in one of two ways; horizontal or vertical setting. F desktop horizontal ...

  • Page 306

    Vol.2-53 analog 2mc (analog media converter) f desktop vertical setting with stand analog 2mc vertical setting with stand *use four screws on the stand..

  • Page 307

    Vol.2-54 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.2.3 cable connection analog 2mc cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the analog 2mc. The mc provides the following interface types: • connection to lan • connection of analog telephone/g3 fax machine • power supply • serial port c...

  • Page 308

    Vol.2-55 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.2.4 safety instruction when installing the analog 2mc for providing the analog telephone interface that is connected to off-premise site, connect gas tube arrester across the line shown in figure below. • specifications specifications of the gas tube ar...

  • Page 309

    Vol.2-56 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.2.5 switch settings switch settings on the analog 2mc on the right side of an analog 2mc, a slide switch is provided to select an operation mode. Push either of the switches according to system requirements. Left (front): reverse right (back): momentary...

  • Page 310

    Vol.2-57 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3 startup analog 2mc and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Analog 2mc data assignment step 1: data assignment by pcpro 1. Connection between pc (maint...

  • Page 311

    Vol.2-58 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section shows how to assign basic data via pcpro. By this data assignment, analog terminals connected to the mc can be used as ip terminals. [1] internal phe data assignment when you use analog 2mc, control signals betw...

  • Page 312

    Vol.2-59 analog 2mc (analog media converter) fax data setting:click the check box to on when manual data setting is required for fax communication. Jitsiz: enter the jitter buffer size in the range 1-30 ( × 10ms) for fax controlling. Paytyp x:select the payload type g.711/g.726/t.30 in the combo box...

  • Page 313

    Vol.2-60 analog 2mc (analog media converter) note: • if payload type g.711 is specified to more than two priorities in pri1 through pri4, assign different payload size to each priority. • when payload types g.723.1 (5.3k → 6.3k) and g.723.1 (6.3k → 5.3k) are to be assigned on the same terminal, spec...

  • Page 314

    Vol.2-61 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to rs-232c connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as fo...

  • Page 315

    Vol.2-62 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of analog 2mc. Step 2: make sure the led indicate normal status. - pwr lamp lights green (*boot program automatically starts) attention contents static sensitive handling precautions r...

  • Page 316

    Vol.2-63 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. For more information about pro- cedure for the command operation, refer to “ 4.4.5 how to use maintenance command ”. Note: “drs (device regis...

  • Page 317

    Vol.2-64 analog 2mc (analog media converter) • when dhcp server is used as mc automatically gets ip address from dhcp server, ip address setting is not required on mc. Assign the ip address listed below on dhcp server side. Note 1 , note 2 • ip address of default gateway • ip address of drs note 3 a...

  • Page 318

    Vol.2-65 analog 2mc (analog media converter) • when dhcp server is not used assign the following data from the maintenance terminal: 1. Change dhcp setting to disable. ( set dhcp disable ) 2. Assign ip address and subnet mask of mc.( set ipaddress x.X.X.X y.Y.Y.Y ) 3. Assign default gateway address ...

  • Page 319

    Vol.2-66 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect analog 2mc to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the 8lc card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the following: - is there other device having the same ip address o...

  • Page 320

    Vol.2-67 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.3.6 basic test procedures when installation and necessary data assignment have been completed, perform the following operation tests. [1] basic connection test perform the connection test according to the following procedure. Before starting the connect...

  • Page 321

    Vol.2-68 analog 2mc (analog media converter) [2] alarm information check make sure that the analog 2mc is operating normally by the lamp indication. The meaning of lamp indi- cations on the analog 2mc is shown below. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telepho...

  • Page 322

    Vol.2-69 analog 2mc (analog media converter) operation 1 green lights when line 1 is busy flash flashes when line 1 is in make-busy state or station data has not been assigned off remains off when line 1 is idle tx/rx flash flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving ip packet (betwe...

  • Page 323

    Vol.2-70 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.4 operation and maintenance 4.4.1 how to back up and restore config data by serial connection (local download) this config download/upload is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each analog 2mc with a rs-232c and a lan cable.Prepare the following: ...

  • Page 324

    Vol.2-71 analog 2mc (analog media converter) • restoring config data by serial connection and tftp connection step 1 power off analog 2mc and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to analog 2mc by using a rs-232c cable. Step 3 connect tftp server to analog 2mc by using a lan ...

  • Page 325

    Vol.2-72 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 11 confirm that “successfully completed” is displayed in the screen, indicating the upload to tftp server is completed normally. Step 12 to reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from tftp server, save it by entering “ save config ” and re...

  • Page 326

    Vol.2-73 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.4.2 how to back up and restore config data by tftp connection (remote download) this config download/upload is performed via tftp. Prepare the following: - pc that is capable of telnet and tftp features. - all the pcs have to belong to the same segment ...

  • Page 327

    Vol.2-74 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 5 to make environment setting for telnet, use the atud command. - specify the lens, which is belonging to the target analog 2mc. - specify a user id and a password, which are required for logging in analog 2mc via telnet. - input any letter for user ...

  • Page 328

    Vol.2-75 analog 2mc (analog media converter) • restoring config data via tftp step 1 if the name of the backup config file is not sysdata, rename it to “sysdata”. Step 2 put the file in the root folder of tftp server, and then start the tftp server program. Step 3 permit read behavior of this folder...

  • Page 329

    Vol.2-76 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 8 log in to the target analog 2mc by entering userid and password, which are set in the autd command. Step 9 after a prompt ( -> ) is displayed, enter “ usrconsole ”. Step 10 after a prompt ( 2a-mc> ) is displayed, enter “ get configdata dress> ” to ...

  • Page 330

    Vol.2-77 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each analog 2mc with a rs-232c and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - rs-232c cable and lan cab...

  • Page 331

    Vol.2-78 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 4 permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the tftp server program. Step 5 set network environment for the tftp server. Ip address: 10.41.1.250 subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 step 6 start t...

  • Page 332

    Vol.2-79 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 23 connect the analog 2mc to a network. Step 24 to confirm analog 2mc is operating properly with the upgraded firmware, make a call to the analog 2mc. Check that you can hear rbt. Step 25 receive a call via the analog 2mc, and confirm that you can ta...

  • Page 333

    Vol.2-80 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.4.4 how to upgrade firmware by ftp (remote download) this firmware upgrade is performed up to eight analog 2mcs at once. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same segment with analog 2mc. - ftp server has to be insta...

  • Page 334

    Vol.2-81 analog 2mc (analog media converter) step 2 allow a read in this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the ftp server program. Step 3 activate the atdl command, and then specify the following: select an item of external server in ftp server setup. Input...

  • Page 335

    Vol.2-82 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4.4.5 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs, where analog 2mc is registered. 1. Connect a pc to the mc using the rs-232c straight-throu...

  • Page 336

    Vol.2-83 analog 2mc (analog media converter) the following maintenance commands can be used. List of maintenance command note 1: assign the network data to the mc according to the network environment. Command no. Sub command function remarks set 1 burstpattern setting burst ringer pattern 2 channela...

  • Page 337

    Vol.2-84 analog 2mc (analog media converter) list of maintenance command (continued) enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (2a-mc>) is shown. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is s...

  • Page 338

    Vol.2-85 analog 2mc (analog media converter) note: when the maintenance command program is activated, it provides a help function for referring to avail- able commands and sub commands. After a prompt is shown, request to list-up the target help by entering “?”, “command name + ?”, or “command name ...

  • Page 339

    Vol.2-86 analog 2mc (analog media converter) set command 1. Setting burst ringer pattern: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting channel attribute: note: data transmission (voice data for g.726 mode) is supporte...

  • Page 340

    Vol.2-87 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 4. Setting default gateway: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 5. Setting dhcp: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the...

  • Page 341

    Vol.2-88 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 7. Setting tos of drs session: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: to make this assignment effective, use...

  • Page 342

    Vol.2-89 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 8. Setting change effective timer of fax: 9. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the receiver (ip to an- alog terminal) direction when the fax signal is detected. Note: the tot...

  • Page 343

    Vol.2-90 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 11. Setting the health check timer value: note: available for sp-3753 2amc prog-b 8a or later. Note: the action starts after the timer value that you set and the extra 30 seconds (150-330). Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, an...

  • Page 344

    Vol.2-91 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 14. Setting music-on-hold type: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 15. Setting open/reverse mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart ...

  • Page 345

    Vol.2-92 analog 2mc (analog media converter) note: the total pad value (receiver pad + fax receiver pad) is limited to 15db. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 17. Setting pre-ringing: 18. Setting frequency of ringer: ...

  • Page 346

    Vol.2-93 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 20. Setting default value of sender pad: note: the sendpad command assigns the value to decrease voice level in the sender (analog terminal to ip) direction. Note: the total pad value (sender pad + fax sender pad) is limited to 15db. Note: to make this as...

  • Page 347

    Vol.2-94 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 23. Setting synchronous ringing: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 24. Setting balancing network (bnw) to each channel: note: the bnw setting value is determined by the cou...

  • Page 348

    Vol.2-95 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 25. Setting vlan: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. - setting procedure when fixed ip address is used: [1] disable dhcp [2] vlan id and ip address setting [3] existing lan ...

  • Page 349

    Vol.2-96 analog 2mc (analog media converter) - setting procedure when dhcp is used: [1] existing lan ip address setting [2] vlan id and ip address setting [3] enable dhcp *as dhcp server distributes default gateway and drs address, manual setting is not required here. Activate the usrconsole dhcp. A...

  • Page 350

    Vol.2-97 analog 2mc (analog media converter) the screen shows the assignment of the following value as an example: vlan id: 5 vlan priority: 3 vlan ip address: (distributed by dhcp) existing lan ip address 0.0.0.0 (set to disabled, because the ip address of existing lan is not used) default gateway:...

  • Page 351

    Vol.2-98 analog 2mc (analog media converter) • if the drs address and the existing lan of mc are configured in the same subnet, even if vlan setting is assigned to mc, registration is activated via the existing lan because the telephony server acknowledges the mc’s ip address in the existing lan sid...

  • Page 352

    Vol.2-99 analog 2mc (analog media converter) show command 1. To show the setting of burst ringer pattern: 2. To show circuit attribute: : 3. To show country code: 4. To show dhcp setting: line 1: line 2: currently registered burst ringer pattern is shown line 3: 2a-mc>show burstpattern burst ringer ...

  • Page 353

    Vol.2-100 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 5. To show drs address and port number: note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. 6. To show tos setting of drs session: 7. To show the setting o...

  • Page 354

    Vol.2-101 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 9. To show fax sender pad value: note: the fax sender pad is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the ip. 10. To show health check timer value: note 1: available for sp-3753 2amc prog-b 8a or later. Note 2: the action starts after the time...

  • Page 355

    Vol.2-102 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 13. To show music-on-hold type: 14. To show open/reverse mode: 15. To show the default value of receiver pad setting: note: receiver pad is inserted in the direction of ip to analog terminal. 16. To show the setting of pre-ringing: 17. To show the freque...

  • Page 356

    Vol.2-103 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 18. To show the setting of ringer voltage: note: this command is available for analog 2mc firmware issue 3 or later. 19. To show default value of sender pad: note: the sender pad is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the ip. 20. To show ...

  • Page 357

    Vol.2-104 analog 2mc (analog media converter) 23. To show the setting of balancing network (bnw): 24. To show the version information of mc: 25. To show vlan setting: line 1: line 2: the current bnw setting of channel 0 is shown line 3: line 4: the current bnw setting of channel 1 is shown 2a-mc> sh...

  • Page 358

    Vol.2-105 analog 2mc (analog media converter) delete command f to delete the vlan setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom: get command f to download configu...

  • Page 359

    Vol.2-106 analog 2mc (analog media converter) put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server: reboot command f to reboot the mc: exit command f to exit the maintenance command: line 1: specify the ip address of tftp server after the command name line 2: result is shown 2a-m...

  • Page 360

    Vol.2-107 analog 2mc (analog media converter) note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (2a-mc, in default) if any error occurs when “y” is selected after changing the configuration data. 4.5 error messages when an error occurs using the maintenance commands, an error message...

  • Page 361

    Vol.2-108 analog 2mc (analog media converter) this command cannot normal end. The command did not end correctly. This command needs a parameter. A required parameter has not been entered. This vlan id is registered already. The specified vlan id has already been registered. Vlan id is not registered...

  • Page 362

    Vol.2-109 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5. 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.1 general 5.1.1 what is 8lc card? 8lc card is a media converter (mc), providing media converting function between internet protocol (lan- side) and conventional voice data...

  • Page 363

    Vol.2-110 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.1.2 function overview the general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below. 8lc card in the system note: when a call is made to/from 8lc card and the opposite party is a tdm-based station/trunk (that requires time ...

  • Page 364

    Vol.2-111 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension 8lc card is mounted on 1u-mpc module (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Size of 8lc card in 1u-mpc unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") mc1 mc3 mc5 mc7 mc0 mc2 mc4 mc6 alm pwr e...

  • Page 365

    Vol.2-112 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 2. Specifications 8lc card specifications (ip interface/function) function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 m...

  • Page 366

    Vol.2-113 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] mc specifications (analog interface/function) function specification note number of lines 8 lines rj-11 modular jack 8 ports supply voltage -38v (min) loop resistance maximum of 600 Ω including the terminal resistance distance to ter...

  • Page 367

    Vol.2-114 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front view of 8lc card [sca-8lc] connectors and switch on front panel connector name function note ether lan interface rj-4...

  • Page 368

    Vol.2-115 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] lamps on front panel lamp indication and status lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm red lights when power failure is detected off normal operation on line green see lamp indication and status. O...

  • Page 369

    Vol.2-116 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] note: when 8lc card repeats rebooting (on line lamp does not light for a long time), there may be any prob- lem in initial setting. Check the configuration data (especially ip related data) and cable connection to clear the problem. ...

  • Page 370

    Vol.2-117 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] rear view of 8lc card [sca-8lc] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit for dual power configuration. See the installation manual for mounting procedure. Connector...

  • Page 371

    Vol.2-118 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 4. Port numbers the following provides the port number to be used in the system including 8lc card. Note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the network because both of which are part of the te...

  • Page 372

    Vol.2-119 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.1.4 requirements 1. Hardware requirements to use 8lc card for an analog terminal connection, the following hardware is required: • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • tftp server (required for file downloading)...

  • Page 373

    Vol.2-120 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.1.5 service conditions before the use of 8lc card, note the following conditions. 1. 8lc card is controlled by sp-phi. Internal phe registration is required to activate sp-phi. To turn sp- phi and the telephony server (signaling pr...

  • Page 374

    Vol.2-121 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • dphl: to display the registration status on each ph, counted on the number of registration/login on sp-phi. 10. Sr-mgc supports 8lc card. 11. Modem connection using 8lc card is not supported. 12. If connection to the telephony serv...

  • Page 375

    Vol.2-122 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using 8lc card. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 5.2.1 how to set 8lc card step 1 insert 8lc card to 1u-mpc. Step 2 secure the 8lc card ...

  • Page 376

    Vol.2-123 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the 8lc card. 8lc card provides the following interfaces: • connection to the lan • connection of analog telephone/g3 fax machine • serial port connection to maintenan...

  • Page 377

    Vol.2-124 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 1 ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of 8lc card. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety...

  • Page 378

    Vol.2-125 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 2 connect a maintenance console (pc) to console connector using console cable. Step 3 connect analog terminals to mc0 through mc7 connectors on the front panel. Note: lan cable is connected in 5.3 startup 8lc card and basic test...

  • Page 379

    Vol.2-126 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3 startup 8lc card and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. 8lc card data assignmet 4. Security data assi...

  • Page 380

    Vol.2-127 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. [1] internal phe data assignment 8lc card is controlled by sp-phi which is embedded in, and controlled by mph. For ...

  • Page 381

    Vol.2-128 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] mc-ch: channel number of 8lc card for each analog terminal [0-7] fax data setting:click the check box to on when data setting is required for fax communication. Note 2 jitsiz: enter the jitter buffer size in the range 1-30 ( × 10ms) ...

  • Page 382

    Vol.2-129 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • 60 milliseconds note: • if payload type g.711 is specified to more than two priorities in pri1 through pri4, assign different pay- load size to each priority. • when payload types g.723.1 (5.3k → 6.3k) and g.723.1 (6.3k → 5.3k) are...

  • Page 383

    Vol.2-130 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] [4] security data assignment assign authentication data. Asecl: assignment of security data (ldm) one time password: one time password to be used for authentication procedure in 8lc card reg- istration [4-10 digits with numerics, - (...

  • Page 384

    Vol.2-131 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the t...

  • Page 385

    Vol.2-132 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of 8lc card. Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of 8lc card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step...

  • Page 386

    Vol.2-133 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server for 8lc...

  • Page 387

    Vol.2-134 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] move on to one-time password (e.G. 12345#) setting after completing the ip address getting from dhcp or when asked to set one-time password in the state of dhcp disabled. Note: when you want to assign one-time password later, enter “...

  • Page 388

    Vol.2-135 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] (1) assign whether to use dhcp server. The required setting differs whether to use dhcp server. (2) assign whether to use dns server. The required setting differs whether to use dns server. (3) assign network data according to the se...

  • Page 389

    Vol.2-136 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • when dhcp server is used in this setting, because 8lc card automatically gets ip address from dhcp server, it is not required to set ip address and default gateway on 8lc card. Set the ethernet speed as follows. 1. Communication sp...

  • Page 390

    Vol.2-137 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is used set the following data on 8lc card. • ip address of dns server • ip address and subnet mask of 8lc card (own address) • host name of 8lc card • ip address of default gateway • host ...

  • Page 391

    Vol.2-138 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 4. Default gateway ip address 5. Host name of sip server 6. Communication speed of lan interface --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 change default gateway? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input ...

  • Page 392

    Vol.2-139 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is not used set the following data on 8lc card. • ip address and subnet mask of 8lc card (own address) • host name of 8lc card (*optional) • ip address of default gateway • ip address, port...

  • Page 393

    Vol.2-140 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 4. Ip address, port number, and host name of sip server (*host name setting is optional. Leave the host name field blank if not required.) 5. Communication speed of lan interface --- sip server ip address & host name set --- current ...

  • Page 394

    Vol.2-141 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] (4) save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. Step 7: use show command to see all the required configuration data is correctly assigned. Step 8: reboot the 8lc card by turning t...

  • Page 395

    Vol.2-142 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the 8lc card to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the 8lc card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the following: - is there other device havi...

  • Page 396

    Vol.2-143 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.3.6 basic test procedures [1] basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link lamp lighting green? *initial setting on 8lc card is started. *registration established. *initial setting between 8lc card ...

  • Page 397

    Vol.2-144 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search for the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See t...

  • Page 398

    Vol.2-145 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4 operation and maintenance 5.4.1 how to back up and restore config data by serial connection (local) this config download/upload is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each 8lc card with a con- sole cable and a lan cable. Pre...

  • Page 399

    Vol.2-146 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • restoring config data by serial connection and tftp connection step 1 power off 8lc card and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to 8lc card by using a console cable. Step 3 connect tftp server to 8lc card...

  • Page 400

    Vol.2-147 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 11 confirm that “ successfully completed ” is displayed in the screen, indicating the up- load to tftp server is completed normally. Step 12 to reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from tftp server, save it by enter...

  • Page 401

    Vol.2-148 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4.2 how to back up and restore config data by tftp connection (remote) this config download/upload is performed via tftp. Prepare the following: - pc that is capable of telnet and tftp features. - all the pcs have to belong to the ...

  • Page 402

    Vol.2-149 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 5 to make environment setting for telnet, use the atud command. - specify the lens, which belongs to the target 8lc card. - specify a user id and a password, which are required for logging in 8lc card via telnet. - input any let...

  • Page 403

    Vol.2-150 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • restoring config data via tftp step 1 if the name of the backup config file is not sysdata, rename it to “mc8-sysdata.Txt”. Step 2 put the file in the root folder of tftp server, and then start the tftp server program. Step 3 permi...

  • Page 404

    Vol.2-151 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 7 start a command prompt and enter “ telnet ” to connect 8lc card via telnet. Step 8 log in to the target 8lc card by entering userid and password, which are set in the autd command. Step 9 after a prompt ( -> ) is displayed, en...

  • Page 405

    Vol.2-152 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each 8lc card with a console cable and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - console ...

  • Page 406

    Vol.2-153 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] note: the following files have to be located in the root folder. Step 4 permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the tftp server program. Step 5 set network environment...

  • Page 407

    Vol.2-154 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 13 the current setting of 8lc card and tftp server is displayed. Make sure the settings. If you need to modify the settings, select a number (1-4) to modify the item. If all the settings are correct, enter “ y ”. Step 14 downloa...

  • Page 408

    Vol.2-155 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 24 to confirm 8lc card is operating properly with the upgraded firmware, make a call to the 8lc card. Check that you can hear rbt. Step 25 receive a call via the 8lc card, and confirm that you can talk to each other. Step 26 aft...

  • Page 409

    Vol.2-156 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4.4 how to upgrade firmware by ftp (remote) this firmware upgrade is performed up to eight 8lc cards at once. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same segment with 8lc card. - ftp server has to...

  • Page 410

    Vol.2-157 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] step 2 permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the ftp server program. Step 3 activate the atdl command, and then specify the following: select an item of external ser...

  • Page 411

    Vol.2-158 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4.5 how to use maintenance command note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server for 8lc card using proprietary protocol. Note: when 8lc card reboots itself due to s...

  • Page 412

    Vol.2-159 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. -----//--------------------------------------------//------ analog media converter *firmware sp-38...

  • Page 413

    Vol.2-160 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] maintenance command for 8lc card the maintenance console uses the commands listed in. Command no. Sub command function remarks setup 1 sp setup command command no. Sub command function remarks set 1 burstpattern setting burst ringer ...

  • Page 414

    Vol.2-161 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] command no. Sub command function remarks show 1 burstpattern to show burst ringer pattern setting: 2 ch_attribute to show channel attribute: 3 cid_send_wait to show caller id send wait timer: 4 codec_coef to show codec coefficiency: ...

  • Page 415

    Vol.2-162 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mc(sip)>). Parameters vary de- pending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, parameter) is specified correctly, the c...

  • Page 416

    Vol.2-163 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] setup command this command is used to setup the basic data for sip mode. Setting display differs whether dhcp server and dns server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialog form. ...

  • Page 417

    Vol.2-164 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] f setting dns server enable/disable: f setting dns server ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. --- dns interface set --- current dns interface: disable change dn...

  • Page 418

    Vol.2-165 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] f setting ip address and subnet mask of 8lc card: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: do not assign network address and broadcast address for 8lc card setting. See the examples below: (example 1) n...

  • Page 419

    Vol.2-166 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] f setting host name of 8lc card: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. F setting default gateway ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: make sure to set the def...

  • Page 420

    Vol.2-167 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server (a) when dns server is disable: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (...

  • Page 421

    Vol.2-168 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] (b) when dns server is enable: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server and host name: sip server 1 2 3 : : 20 host name chan...

  • Page 422

    Vol.2-169 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] f setting ethernet speed f save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. --- ethernet speed set --- current lan speed: auto change lan speed? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input...

  • Page 423

    Vol.2-170 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] set command 1. Setting burst ringer pattern: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting channel attribute: note: the value in [ ] shows the current ...

  • Page 424

    Vol.2-171 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 3. Setting caller id send wait timer: note: the maximum value of caller id send wait timer for each specification is as follows: - etsi caller id 20 (2000 milliseconds) - bellcore caller id:15 (1500 milliseconds) note: to make this a...

  • Page 425

    Vol.2-172 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] • uk • brazil • china * setting value 0-2=constant voltage mode setting value 3-5=constant current mode • other note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note: to mak...

  • Page 426

    Vol.2-173 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5. Setting default gateway: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 6. Setting dhcp: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and rest...

  • Page 427

    Vol.2-174 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 8. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication : note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 9. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller: note: to m...

  • Page 428

    Vol.2-175 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 11. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the receiver (ip to an- alog terminal) direction when the fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (recei...

  • Page 429

    Vol.2-176 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 14. Setting the communication speed for lan interface: note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note: duplex setting is not shown when auto negotiation (auto) is sel...

  • Page 430

    Vol.2-177 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 17. Setting message waiting lamp control type: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 18. Setting one time password for security: 19. Setting open/reverse ...

  • Page 431

    Vol.2-178 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 20. Setting host name of 8lc card: note: host name cannot be used when dhcp is assigned enable or dns is assigned disable. Before assign- ing the host name, be sure to execute “set dhcp disable” and “set dns_sw”. Note: to make this a...

  • Page 432

    Vol.2-179 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 23. Setting frequency of ringer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 24. Setting default sender pad value: note: the sendpad command assigns the value t...

  • Page 433

    Vol.2-180 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 26. Setting qos for sip signaling session: • when tos is selected in qos setting type: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meani...

  • Page 434

    Vol.2-181 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 27. Setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server: note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save comm...

  • Page 435

    Vol.2-182 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 29. Setting rtp start port: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: assign even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified port number ...

  • Page 436

    Vol.2-183 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 32. Setting vlan: note: the maximum number of vlan is one. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 33. Setting the warning tone for lan failure: note: to ma...

  • Page 437

    Vol.2-184 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] show command 1. To show burst ringer pattern setting: 2. To show channel attribute: 3. To show caller id send wait timer: 4. To show codec coefficiency: mc(sip)> show burstpattern burst ringer pattern is 1 (0.35s on - 0.3s off - 0.35...

  • Page 438

    Vol.2-185 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5. To show configuration data list: 6. To show dhcp: 7. To show dns server: 8. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication : mc(sip)> show configdata [system] register_mode=sp file_info=2005.11.11 [ip] own_name= own_addr=0.0.0.0...

  • Page 439

    Vol.2-186 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 9. To show echo canceller training: 10. To show fax enable timer: 11. To show fax receiver pad value: 12. To show fax sender pad value: 13. To show health check receive timer 14. To show the communication speed for lan interface: mc(...

  • Page 440

    Vol.2-187 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 15. To show ip address, subnet mask, and default gateway of 8lc card: 16. To show internal music-on-hold type: 17. To show message waiting lamp control type: 18. To show one time password for security: 19. To show open/reverse mode: ...

  • Page 441

    Vol.2-188 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 21. To show default receiver pad value: 22. To show pre-ringing: 23. To show ringer frequency: 24. To show default sender pad value: 25. To show signaling port number for sip: 26. To show qos setting for sip signaling session: mc(sip...

  • Page 442

    Vol.2-189 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 27. To show ip address, port number, and host name of sip server: note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. 28. To sh...

  • Page 443

    Vol.2-190 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 30. To show operating status of 8lc card: 31. To show stutter dial tone: 32. To show synchronous ringer mode: mc(sip)> show status register mode mac address link state speed duplex vlan mode dhcp mode ip address subnet mask default g...

  • Page 444

    Vol.2-191 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 33. To show firmware and hardware version: note: for an example, the above screen indicates the firmware for sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea. 34. To show vlan: 35. To show warning tone for lan failure: mc(sip)> show version mc maintenance com...

  • Page 445

    Vol.2-192 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] ping command f to check the connection status of network: delete command f to delete the vlan setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command ...

  • Page 446

    Vol.2-193 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] get command f to download configuration data file from specified tftp server: note: configuration data file is downloaded from the specified tftp server. Put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server: note:...

  • Page 447

    Vol.2-194 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] reboot command f to reboot the 8lc card: note: the screen returns to the prompt of the configuration command (mc(sip)>) if any error occurs after se- lecting “y”. Exit command f to exit the configuration command: [normal occasion] [w...

  • Page 448

    Vol.2-195 8lc card [sca-8lca/sca-8lca-emea/sca-8lcc/sca-8lcc-emea] 5.4.6 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, an error message is indicated showing the cause, to help in the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tft...

  • Page 449

    Vol.2-196 mc & mg with pft 6. Mc & mg with pft 6.1 general 6.1.1 what is mc & mg with pft? Mc & mg with pft has two functions, media converter and media gateway. Media converter (mc) is a gate- way device providing media conversion between internet protocol (lan-side) and conventional voice data (th...

  • Page 450

    Vol.2-197 mc & mg with pft function of mc & mg with pft mc side mc has four analog ports. Analog terminal and fax can be connected to the analog ports. Service conditions are the same as analog 2mc. Mc is controlled by internal phe. Note 1 mg (cot) side note 2 mg (cot) has two analog ports and conne...

  • Page 451

    Vol.2-198 mc & mg with pft 6.1.2 function overview power failure transfer (pft) mc&mg has four mc ports and two mg (cot) ports. Pft connects two mc ports to two mg (cot) ports directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to pstn network and then call origination t...

  • Page 452

    Vol.2-199 mc & mg with pft connecting diagram of pft function release of pft pft is released under the following conditions: • after rebooting, ip link with the telephony server is established • release of the lines activating over pft function are supervised. • pft is canceled, starting from the re...

  • Page 453

    Vol.2-200 mc & mg with pft fax connection fax data transmission can be selected according to the network configuration. The transmission type is de- termined by the connection route, whether the data is transferred to destination node via cot, dti, odt, prt or iptrk card to pstn/private line (tdm-ba...

  • Page 454

    Vol.2-201 mc & mg with pft [mc&mg -trunk (in destination node) connection via ippad through ccis ] complies with the fax connection type assigned to the internal phc cot, prt, brt, dti, tlt, odt fax fax mc&mg pstn/ private network ip network ip pad internal phc internal phe g.711 or adpcm (g.726) is...

  • Page 455

    Vol.2-202 mc & mg with pft vlan vlan feature applies to mc&mg as well as other ip terminals, such as a dtermip. When dividing one physical network into multiple networks virtually, priority control (giving precedence to voice packet) can be activated. Network data programming by the pcpro command al...

  • Page 456

    Vol.2-203 mc & mg with pft paging station and attendant console can page anyone over the speaker connected to mc&mg. Three types of paging feature is supported by mg-cot’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of paging access [p-1] and paging transfer [p-10] in data programmi...

  • Page 457

    Vol.2-204 mc & mg with pft after holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-delay system, delay system, and paging transfer supervision is available. Mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mc&mg (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) hold the station/trunk call (2...

  • Page 458

    Vol.2-205 mc & mg with pft by dialing the access code of priority paging, the station/attcon is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. Interrupted mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mc&mg (1) (2) (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) dial the access code of priori...

  • Page 459

    Vol.2-206 mc & mg with pft 6.1.3 specifications size of mc & mg with pft the specifications of mc & mg with pft are listed. Mc & mg with pft specifications function specification note input power dc+12v use an ac-dc adapter (input ac 100-240v) voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law g.729a 8 ...

  • Page 460

    Vol.2-207 mc & mg with pft mc & mg with pft specifications (continued) function specification note jitter buffer static 10~300 milliseconds (assignable in increments of 10-millisecond) dynamic 10~300 milliseconds quality of service (qos) tos, ip precedence diffserv ip address assignment dhcp is supp...

  • Page 461

    Vol.2-208 mc & mg with pft mc specifications function specification note analog in- terface (mc side)/ function number of lines four lines rj-11 modular jack 4 ports (two ports are connected to c.O.Lines if pft is activated) note 1 supply voltage -38v (min) loop resistance maximum of 600 Ω including...

  • Page 462

    Vol.2-209 mc & mg with pft note 1: available terminals are analog(pb) telephone and fax. Dp telephone can not be used and “calling number display” feature is not supported. If you connect analog telephone that has “calling number display” feature, the feature must be set off by the terminal side..

  • Page 463

    Vol.2-210 mc & mg with pft note 1: pb only note 2: grounding less than 10 Ω is desirable for reverse detection. If the grounding is not available, the interface functions as a ringdown trunk. Mg (cot) specifications function specification note pstn in- terface (mg side)/ function number of lines two...

  • Page 464

    Vol.2-211 mc & mg with pft layout of connectors and lamps connectors and lamp indications are explained below. Connectors and lamps on the front panel connectors on the front panel connector function note tel0 analog terminal or fax is connected. Rj-11 connected to c.O. Line when pft is activated. T...

  • Page 465

    Vol.2-212 mc & mg with pft lamps on the front panel lamp name color meaning of indication power green power on off power off mc on-line mc green see the table on the next page for the detail explanations of the lamp indication. Operation mc0 green operation mc1 green operation mc2 green operation mc...

  • Page 466

    Vol.2-213 mc & mg with pft lamp indication and status lamp indication description of status legend l: lights fr: flashes rapidly (60int) fs: flashes slowly (30int) × : remains off mc mg on line operation on line operation 0 1 2 3 0 1 × l × × × - - - start the boot program × l l × × - - - boot: os in...

  • Page 467

    Vol.2-214 mc & mg with pft [connectors on the rear panel] connectors on the rear panel note 1: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). As mc&mg has pstn interface, if the line...

  • Page 468

    Vol.2-215 mc & mg with pft port number the following provides the port number to be used in this system. Port no. Path function note 3456/udp drs (telephony server lan1) registration changed by using pcpro belonging to the telephony server. (adtm) 3456/udp mc&mg (mc side) registration - 3457 /udp mc...

  • Page 469

    Vol.2-216 mc & mg with pft 6.1.4 requirements the required hardware for using the mc&mg is described in this section. Hardware requirements to use the mc&mg for an analog terminal connection, the following hardware is required: • tftp server (required for file downloading) • pc running terminal soft...

  • Page 470

    Vol.2-217 mc & mg with pft firmware program the following program is installed in mc&mg (sn8052 mcee-a). Pz-cc155 (this card is built inside the mc block) pz-cc156 (this card is built inside the mg block) boot program: sp-3777 mcmg boot prog-a installed firmware: sp-3778 mcmg prog-a 6.1.5 service co...

  • Page 471

    Vol.2-218 mc & mg with pft 3. Internal ph-bri handles a control signal between mc&mg and internal phi-bri. Control signal is han- dled with lan cable. 4. There are the following restrictions when using incoming call with remote access to system [r-2] or automated attendant [a-82]. • virtual register...

  • Page 472

    Vol.2-219 mc & mg with pft service conditions related to mg (cot) 1. Virtual trunk for mg (cot) occupies one group. Therefore, the group to which virtual channel of mg (cot) has been assigned cannot be used for other trunk. The virtual trunk can be assigned for virtual pir. 2. Number of mg (cot) tha...

  • Page 473

    Vol.2-220 mc & mg with pft 13. Route number of mg (cot) must be different from that of conventional analog cot card. Route num- ber can be shared by multiple mg (cot)s. 14. Assign each lens for line (0-1) and ch (fixed to 0) in amgil command. (line 0: even number level, line 1: level of line 0 + 1) ...

  • Page 474

    Vol.2-221 mc & mg with pft 24. When trunk soft hold timer is effective, the call originating party will be charged when the timer expires. 25. A conference cannot be established until the false answer timer expires. 26. Smdr cannot be collected until the false answer timer expires. 27. Adding a paus...

  • Page 475

    Vol.2-222 mc & mg with pft 6.2 installation 6.2.1 mounting location how to set mc&mg there are two ways to set the mc&mg. Select the horizontal or vertical setting for keeping the mc&mg operating at optimal performance. F desktop horizontal setting mc&mg horizontal setting f desktop vertical setting...

  • Page 476

    Vol.2-223 mc & mg with pft 6.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mc&mg. The mc&mg provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • connection to pstn • connection of analog telephone/g3 fax machine • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console...

  • Page 477

    Vol.2-224 mc & mg with pft connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows an example of cable configuration. Mc&mg cable connection diagram (rear view) rs-232c music ether line 0 line 1 pftrd audio equipment maintenance console (pc) d-sub 9-pin rs-232c stra...

  • Page 478

    Vol.2-225 mc & mg with pft mc&mg cable connection diagram (front view) mc4a/mg2a mc4a/mg2a tel 1 tel 2 tel 3 tel 0 analog terminals fax 4 not used 3 b 2 a 1 not used rj-11 connector pin assignment pwr on line mc mg link/ 100m -operation- txrx 0 1 0 1 2 3.

  • Page 479

    Vol.2-226 mc & mg with pft 6.3 startup mc&mg and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. Mc&mg startup flow note 1: be sure to assign mg data before assigning mc data. When registering to sp-phi...

  • Page 480

    Vol.2-227 mc & mg with pft 6.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please make sure details...

  • Page 481

    Vol.2-228 mc & mg with pft cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data for virtual speech channel. Cdn68 vir = 2 mg connection when using fax connection via mg, following assignment is necessary. Cdn 71 ...

  • Page 482

    Vol.2-229 mc & mg with pft pir hw4 hw0 hw1 hw2 hw3 hw5 hw6 hw7 hw8 hw9 hw10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 pwr #0 tsw/mux tsw/mux pwr #1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23...

  • Page 483

    Vol.2-230 mc & mg with pft mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information for ldm assign the information of mg (cot). Note: when assi...

  • Page 484

    Vol.2-231 mc & mg with pft hong kong μ law japan μ law korea μ /Α law malaysia a law mexico a law new zealand a law north america μ law singapore a law taiwan μ law u.K. A law other μ /Α law receive complete timing of pb direct-in [0-15] default value is 0. False answer timing [0-15] default value i...

  • Page 485

    Vol.2-232 mc & mg with pft note: the pad value of mg(cot) is valid only when you select “setting”from the drop-down box of “setting of detail” to specify the detail pad value. Aivcl: assignment of ip service voice control data for ldm assign the voice packet control data for terminal that is connect...

  • Page 486

    Vol.2-233 mc & mg with pft assign the ringing pattern when a call from the c.O. Line terminates to a station. Normally, “21” is assigned in hexadecimal (1 second ringing, 2 second pause). For details, refer to command manual. Sys3, index 1 assign the ringing pattern when a station is called from ano...

  • Page 487

    Vol.2-234 mc & mg with pft atnr: assignment of tenant restriction class data assign the connection restriction data between originating tenant (ogtn) and terminating tenant (tmtn). When asyd, sys1, index 94, b0=0 is assigned (multiple tenant service is in-service), assign the respective tenant numbe...

  • Page 488

    Vol.2-235 mc & mg with pft loc-id: assign the location id in the range of 0-4095, associated with the ip address. When ip ad- dress=0.0.0.0, loc-id=0 is automatically set (the value cannot be changed). Note: loc-id=0 is predetermined to the location id of the telephony server (i.E.Ippad). Setting ty...

  • Page 489

    Vol.2-236 mc & mg with pft payload size: select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the payload type. •no data •10 milliseconds •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds note: • if payload type g.711 is specified to more than two priorities in pri1 through...

  • Page 490

    Vol.2-237 mc & mg with pft mg part of mc&mg can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. Here explains mc&mg data as- signment for registering to sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-bri, refer to page 227 . [1] internal phe data assignment when mg part of mc&mg is registered to sp-ph...

  • Page 491

    Vol.2-238 mc & mg with pft arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data for virtual speech channel. Cdn68 vir = 2 mg connection when using fax connection via mg, following assignment is necessary. Cdn 71 ip fax data cdn 72 jitter buffer seize for ip fax cdn 73 payload typ...

  • Page 492

    Vol.2-239 mc & mg with pft mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information for ldm assign the information of mg (cot). Note: when assi...

  • Page 493

    Vol.2-240 mc & mg with pft ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mg (cot). Setting of service type exists (signaling packet) type of service for mg (cot) music on hold exists external music on hold (default setting) internal music on hold1 internal music on hold2 ex...

  • Page 494

    Vol.2-241 mc & mg with pft a rt (mg storing) physical route number for virtual speech channel of mg (cot) type select one of the followings: • route specified • location id specified b rt (mg storing) displayed when type=route specified is selected. Physical route number for virtual speech channel o...

  • Page 495

    Vol.2-242 mc & mg with pft asyd: assignment of system data sys1, index 4, b2-b3 assign the releasing method for station-to-station calling service 00 = calling party release 01 = called party release 10 = first party release 11 = both party release normally, “10” = first party release is assigned. S...

  • Page 496

    Vol.2-243 mc & mg with pft 03 = 6db aunt: assignment of unit data mg: module group number type: 1 (select 1 for unit data assignment) unit0: 1/2 (unit 0 is used/not used). Unit1: 1/2 (unit 1 is used/not used). Unit2: 1/2 (unit 2 is used/not used). Unit3: 1/2 (unit 3 is used/not used). Anpd: assignme...

  • Page 497

    Vol.2-244 mc & mg with pft note: for a detailed explanation of data assignment for a virtual pir, see the data programming manual. Mc-id: id of the mc&mg (enter the fixed mac address of the mc&mg) mc-ch: channel number of the mc (assign 0-3 (port 0-3)) for each analog terminal connected to the mc&mg...

  • Page 498

    Vol.2-245 mc & mg with pft ip precedence/diffserv: select either of the radio buttons. Precedence: specify the precedence in the range of 0-7 (low-high). Low delay: place a checkmark to set low delay to on. Through put: place a checkmark to set high throughput to on. Reliability: place a checkmark t...

  • Page 499

    Vol.2-246 mc & mg with pft setting of echo canceller: click the check box to assign the echo canceller data, and select one of the ra- dio buttons. •a ec-on/b ec-on •a ec-on/b ec-off •a ec-off/b ec-on •a ec-off/b ec-off note: when the same value is assigned to both “a loc-id” and “b loc-id” paramete...

  • Page 500

    Vol.2-247 mc & mg with pft 6.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • port: com...

  • Page 501

    Vol.2-248 mc & mg with pft step 2: connect the ac-dc adapter to mc&mg to turn on the power. Step 3: make sure the leds indicate normal status. - pwr led lights green. - (boot program automatically starts.) - on line led light green when the sequence is completed. Line 0 line 1 pftrd ether rs-232c mu...

  • Page 502

    Vol.2-249 mc & mg with pft 6.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mc & mg with pft using propr...

  • Page 503

    Vol.2-250 mc & mg with pft step 3: mc&mg command prompt appears as follows. Mc&mg maintenance console command prompt step 4: set the network data depending on your lan environment. There are two types of ways to set the network data. Use set dhcp enable command to set the data and move on to step 5....

  • Page 504

    Vol.2-251 mc & mg with pft use set ipaddress command to set the ip address and subnet mask of the mc&mg. Set ip address and subnet mask of mc&mg (when dhcp server is not used) use set drfaultroute command to set the default gateway of the mc&mg. Set ip address of default gateway (when dhcp server is...

  • Page 505

    Vol.2-252 mc & mg with pft step 5: save the assigned data using the save configdata. Save the assigned data mc-mg>save configdata **don't power off in progress** do you need save? [n/y]: y erase start... Erase ok? Write start... Write ok! Checksum write. Ok! Configuration data has been saved. Re-sta...

  • Page 506

    Vol.2-253 mc & mg with pft 6.3.5 cable connection step 1: disconnect the power cable to turn off the mc&mg. Step 2: connect the mc&mg to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Step 3: connect c.O. Lines to line0 and line1 on the rear panel. Step 4: connect analog terminals to tel0 through tel3 o...

  • Page 507

    Vol.2-254 mc & mg with pft step 6: make sure the leds on the front panel are normal status. Note: refer to layout of connectors and lamps in this section. Mc&mg front view line 0 line 1 line 2 line 3 pwr on line mc mg 0 1 2 3 0 1 operation link tx/rx to analog terminals.

  • Page 508

    Vol.2-255 mc & mg with pft 6.3.6 basic test procedures basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link/txrx lamp lighting green? *initial setting on mc&mg is started. *registration established. *initial setting between mc&mg and mgc is started. *mc&mg starts operating n...

  • Page 509

    Vol.2-256 mc & mg with pft alarm information check • check the topu alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search for the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See the system message and confirm whether m...

  • Page 510

    Vol.2-257 mc & mg with pft tel0 ⇔ line0 tel1 ⇔ line1 tel2 [pft function is not provided] tel3 [pft function is not provided] before the test, connect c.O. Lines to line 0/1 and analog terminals to tel 0/1. (a) perform this test before mc&mg initialization has been completed. Step 1: turn off the mc&...

  • Page 511

    Vol.2-258 mc & mg with pft 6.4 operation and maintenance 6.4.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to telephony server. Telephony server acts as drs for mc & mg with pft using proprietary protocol. Note: when mc & mg with pft reboots it...

  • Page 512

    Vol.2-259 mc & mg with pft the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. In set command, some of the sub commands can be specified with hexadecimal numbers (called set value), which determine a group of the deta...

  • Page 513

    Vol.2-260 mc & mg with pft command no. Sub command function remarks set (mc side) 1 burstpattern setting burst ringer pattern 2 codec_coef setting codec coefficiency 3 dsp_ecfb setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4 ec_training setting training feature mode of echo canceller 5 faxerrorde...

  • Page 514

    Vol.2-261 mc & mg with pft command no. Sub command function remarks show (both mc and mg sides) 1 dhcp to show dhcp setting 2 drsaddress to show drs address and port number 3 drstos to show tos setting of drs session 4 hc_timer to show health check receive timer 5 interface to show communication spe...

  • Page 515

    Vol.2-262 mc & mg with pft command no. Sub command function remarks show (mg side) 1 car_detect to show car detection 2 codec_coef_mg to show codec coefficiency 3 dsp_ecfb_mg to show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4 dtmf_cutoff_time to show dtmf cutoff timer 5 ec_training_mg to show traini...

  • Page 516

    Vol.2-263 mc & mg with pft enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mc-mg>) is shown. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required data...

  • Page 517

    Vol.2-264 mc & mg with pft set command (both mc and mg sides) 1. Setting default gateway: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting dhcp: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart b...

  • Page 518

    Vol.2-265 mc & mg with pft 4. Setting tos of drs session: you can set tos of drs in the following two ways. Note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: to mak...

  • Page 519

    Vol.2-266 mc & mg with pft note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 6. Setting the communication speed for lan interface: note: the duplex setting is not shown when auto negotiation (auto) is selected in the speed setting. N...

  • Page 520

    Vol.2-267 mc & mg with pft 8. Setting rtp start port: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: port number must be the even number. Rtcp port number is assigned to start port number + 1. (odd num- ber) 9. Setting vlan:...

  • Page 521

    Vol.2-268 mc & mg with pft set command (mc side) 1. Setting burst ringer pattern: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting codec coefficient: note: the setting values are shown in the following table. • north amer...

  • Page 522

    Vol.2-269 mc & mg with pft • uk • brazil • china * setting value 0-2=constant voltage mode setting value 3-5=constant current mode • other resister kind of bnw setting value 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 600 Ω 0 (default) 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 370 Ω +(620 Ω //310nf) 1 600 Ω 600 Ω 2 resister kind of bnw ...

  • Page 523

    Vol.2-270 mc & mg with pft 3. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller: note: to make this assignment effective, use the sav...

  • Page 524

    Vol.2-271 mc & mg with pft 6. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the receiver (ip to an- alog terminal) direction when the fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (receiver pad + fax receiver pad) is limited to...

  • Page 525

    Vol.2-272 mc & mg with pft 9. Setting open/reverse mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 10. Setting default receiver pad value: note: the pad command assigns the value to decrease voice level in the receiver (ip to...

  • Page 526

    Vol.2-273 mc & mg with pft 12. Setting frequency of ringer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 13. Setting default sender pad value: note: the sendpad command assigns the value to decrease voice level in the sender (an...

  • Page 527

    Vol.2-274 mc & mg with pft 15. Setting stutter dial tone: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 16. Setting synchronous ringer mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exitin...

  • Page 528

    Vol.2-275 mc & mg with pft set command (mg side) 1. Setting car detection note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting codec coefficiency: note 1: the setting values are shown in the following table. Setting value “2”...

  • Page 529

    Vol.2-276 mc & mg with pft • brazil • china * setting value 0 = constant voltage mode setting value 1 = constant current mode • other note 2: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Resister kind of bnw setting value 900 Ω 800 Ω ...

  • Page 530

    Vol.2-277 mc & mg with pft 3. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting dtmf cutoff timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart ...

  • Page 531

    Vol.2-278 mc & mg with pft 6. Setting fax enable timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 7. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the recei...

  • Page 532

    Vol.2-279 mc & mg with pft 9. Setting i/c call abandon timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 10. Setting loop prohibition timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exit...

  • Page 533

    Vol.2-280 mc & mg with pft note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 13. Setting rvs mode (for australia) note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 14...

  • Page 534

    Vol.2-281 mc & mg with pft show command (both mc and mg sides) 1. To show dhcp setting: 2. To show drs address and port number: note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. 3. To show tos setting ...

  • Page 535

    Vol.2-282 mc & mg with pft 5. To show communication speed for lan interface: 6. To show ip address, net mask, and default gateway: 7. To show rtp start port: 8. To show the version information: mc-mg> show interface ethernet speed duplex 10mbps full the current setting is shown line 1: enter the int...

  • Page 536

    Vol.2-283 mc & mg with pft 9. To show vlan setting: note: for version 11 or later, the ip address and subnetmask are not displayed. 10. To show warning tone control the current vlan setting is shown. Mc-mg> show vlan device id cos ipaddress subnetmask vlan1 1 0 10.123.123.123 255.255.255.0 mc-mg> sh...

  • Page 537

    Vol.2-284 mc & mg with pft show command (mc side) 1. To show burst ringer pattern: 2. To show codec coefficiency: 3. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: currently registered burst ringer pattern is shown mc-mg> show burstpattern burst ...

  • Page 538

    Vol.2-285 mc & mg with pft 5. To show fax enable timer: 6. To show fax receiver pad value: 7. To show fax sender pad value: 8. To show internal music-on-hold type: 9. To show open/reverse mode: the current setting is shown mc-mg> show faxerrordetect fax enable timer is 1 minute. Mc-mg> show faxrecvp...

  • Page 539

    Vol.2-286 mc & mg with pft 10. To show default receiver pad value: 11. To show pre-ringing: 12. To show frequency of ringer: 13. To show default sender pad value: note: the sender pad is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the ip. The current receiver pad value (lan → terminal direct...

  • Page 540

    Vol.2-287 mc & mg with pft 14. To show dsp smooth pad mode: 15. To show stutter dial tone: 16. To show synchronous ringing: the current setting is shown mc-mg> show smooth_pad smooth pad mode is 3. Registered setting is shown mc-mg> show stutterdt stutter dial tone is disable. Registered setting is ...

  • Page 541

    Vol.2-288 mc & mg with pft show command (mg side) 1. To show car detection 2. To show codec coefficiency 3. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4. To show dtmf cutoff timer 5. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: the current setting is shown mc-mg> show car_detect car detect...

  • Page 542

    Vol.2-289 mc & mg with pft 6. To show fax enable timer: 7. To show fax receiver pad value: 8. To show fax sender pad value: 9. To show i/c call abandon timer: 10. To show loop prohibition timer the current setting is shown mc-mg> show faxerrordetect_mg fax enable timer is 1 minute. Mc-mg> show faxre...

  • Page 543

    Vol.2-290 mc & mg with pft 11. To show release signal 12. To show dsp smooth pad mode 13. To show rvs mode (for australia) 14. To show auto polarity the current setting is shown mc-mg > show release_signal .Release signal is on. The current setting is shown mc-mg> show smooth_pad_mg smooth pad mode ...

  • Page 544

    Vol.2-291 mc & mg with pft delete command f to delete the vlan setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom: note: when the error occurs during saving, configur...

  • Page 545

    Vol.2-292 mc & mg with pft put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server: note: configuration data file is uploaded to the tftp server. Reboot command f to reboot the mc&mg: note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mc-mg, in default) if any error ...

  • Page 546

    Vol.2-293 mc & mg with pft [when configuration data is changed] note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mc-mg, in default) if any error occurs when “y” is selected after changing the configuration data. Line 1: line 2: when save command is not ex- ecuted after changing con...

  • Page 547

    Vol.2-294 mc & mg with pft 6.4.2 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, an error message is indicated, showing the cause, to help in the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. Download file of system data ...

  • Page 548

    Vol.2-295 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7. Mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.1 general 7.1.1 what is mcmg? Mcmg has two functions, media converter and media gateway. Media converter (mc) is an interface pro- viding media conversion between internet protocol (lan-side) and conventional voice data (...

  • Page 549

    Vol.2-296 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.1.2 function overview the general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below. Basic connection mcmg in the system note: internal phi-bri controls the signaling data, which is accommodated in telephony server. Call control between internal ph...

  • Page 550

    Vol.2-297 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] power failure transfer (pft) mcmg has four mc ports and two mg (cot) ports. Pft connects two mc ports to two mg ports directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to pstn network and then call origination to c.O. Line beco...

  • Page 551

    Vol.2-298 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] connecting diagram of pft function release of pft pft is released under the following conditions: • after rebooting, ip link with telephony server is established • release of the lines activating over pft function are supervised. • pft is canceled, starting ...

  • Page 552

    Vol.2-299 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] paging station and attendant console can page anyone over the speaker connected to mcmg. Three types of paging feature are supported by mcmg’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of paging access [p-1] and paging transfer [p-10] in d...

  • Page 553

    Vol.2-300 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] after holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-delay system, delay system, and paging transfer supervision are available. Mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mcmg (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) hold the statio...

  • Page 554

    Vol.2-301 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] by dialing the access code of priority paging, the station/attcon is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. Interrupted mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mcmg (1) (2) (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) dial the access ...

  • Page 555

    Vol.2-302 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] trunk line appearance-d connecting an analog c.O. Trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows dtermip user to directly access c.O. Line of mcmg by pressing corresponding line key on dtermip station, without dialing access code. Dtermip station c...

  • Page 556

    Vol.2-303 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] (h) distinctive ringing is not activated when incoming call terminates. (i) analog telephone cannot answer the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d. (j) when dtermip station answers and holds the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d, analog telephone...

  • Page 557

    Vol.2-304 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension • mcmg card [sca-4lc2cota] mcmg card is mounted on 1u-mpc module (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Size of mcmg card in 1u-mpc • mcmg box [mg-4lc2cota] size of mcmg box unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4....

  • Page 558

    Vol.2-305 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 2. Specifications mcmg specifications function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.723.1 6.3 k (bps): mp-mlq/ac...

  • Page 559

    Vol.2-306 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mc specifications (analog interface/function) function specification note number of lines four lines rj-11 modular jack 4 ports (two ports are connected to c.O.Lines if pft is activated) note 1 supply voltage -38v (min) loop resistance maximum of 600 Ω inclu...

  • Page 560

    Vol.2-307 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] note 1: available terminals are analog(pb) telephone and fax. Dp telephone can not be used and “calling number display” feature is not supported. If you connect analog telephone that has “calling number display” feature, the feature must be set off by the te...

  • Page 561

    Vol.2-308 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front view of mcmg card [sca-4lc2cota] front view of mcmg box [mg-4lc2cota] pft is provided mg1 mc1 mc3 mg mc mg0 mc0 mc2 alm pwr ether operation mg...

  • Page 562

    Vol.2-309 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/full duplex) mg0 pstn interface rj-11 connected to analog line (mc0/mc1) when pft is acti- vated. Mg1 mc0 analog terminal or fax is con- nected...

  • Page 563

    Vol.2-310 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] lamps on the front panel note 1: for alm lamp on mg-4lc2cota, it always remains off. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm note 1 red lights when power failure is detected off normal operation ether link green lights when...

  • Page 564

    Vol.2-311 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] lamp indication and status lamp indication description of status legend l: lights fr: flashes rapidly (60int) fs: flashes slowly (30int) × : remains off mc mg on line operation on line operation mc0 mc1 mc2 mc3 mg0 mg1 × l × × × - - - start the boot program ...

  • Page 565

    Vol.2-312 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] rear view of mcmg card [sca-4lc2cota] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit for dual power configuration. Rear view of mcmg box [mg-4lc2cota] connectors, lamps, and switches on rear pane...

  • Page 566

    Vol.2-313 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 4. Port number the following provides the port number to be used in this system. Port no. Path function note 3456/udp drs (telephony server lan1) registration changing an initial value by using adtm command. 3456/udp mcmg (mc side) registration - 3457 /udp m...

  • Page 567

    Vol.2-314 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.1.4 requirements 1. Hardware requirements to use the mcmg for an analog terminal and pstn connection, the following hardware is required: • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for conne...

  • Page 568

    Vol.2-315 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.1.5 service conditions before the use of mcmg, note the following conditions. Note: the following conditions are based on the assumption that mcmg is registered to internal phi-bri though mcmg can be registered to sp-phi instead of internal phi-bri. Please...

  • Page 569

    Vol.2-316 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 4. Mg does not supervise the condition such as trunk failure. Therefore, mg can originate a call regardless of trunk failure. (as far as mg works correctly.) this condition is the same as conventional cot. 5. Internal phi-bri and mg is connected via udp/ip. ...

  • Page 570

    Vol.2-317 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 17. There are the following restrictions when using remote access to system [r-2] or auto- mated attendant [a-82]. • if virtual register cannot be seized, physical register is seized. (i.E. Rt=902 ort, rt=903 irt, rt=906 pbr for automated attendant service, ...

  • Page 571

    Vol.2-318 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] note 2: available since the first version for ug50. Note 3: this feature is available when (1), (2), or (3) is stored in a desktop terminal. Interaction with other features 1. When using preset conference/progressive conference if conference leader will use ...

  • Page 572

    Vol.2-319 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mcmg. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 7.2.1 how to set mcmg • mcmg card [sca-4lc2cota] note: the figure below, where mcmg card is accommodated in the left...

  • Page 573

    Vol.2-320 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] • mcmg box [mg-4lc2cota] mcmg box is set as the following. Be sure to place mcmg box on the flat surface. 7.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mcmg card/box. Mcmg card/box provides the following in- terfaces: • connection to ...

  • Page 574

    Vol.2-321 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows general description of cable connection for mcmg. Mcmg cable connection diagram (front) note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpos...

  • Page 575

    Vol.2-322 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] the procedure for cable connection is as the following. Step 1 ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mcmg. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. • mcmg card [sca-4lc2cota] • mcmg box [mg-4lc2cota] rear pac...

  • Page 576

    Vol.2-323 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). As mcmg has pstn int...

  • Page 577

    Vol.2-324 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3 startup mcmg and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. Note 1: be sure to assign mg data before assigning mc data. When registering to sp-phi 1. I...

  • Page 578

    Vol.2-325 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please ma...

  • Page 579

    Vol.2-326 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] cdn 72 mfsp sending speed (0-15) cdn 73 kppt duration of kp sending (0-15) cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data for virtual speech channel. Cdn68 vir = 2 ...

  • Page 580

    Vol.2-327 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information for ldm assign the information of mcmg. Note...

  • Page 581

    Vol.2-328 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] select mc-mg (cot) line mg line number [0/1] ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mcmg. Setting of service type exists (signaling packet) type of service for mcmg music on hold exists external music on hold (default setting...

  • Page 582

    Vol.2-329 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mcmg. When amgvl data is not assigned, aivcl data setting is applied. A rt (mg storing) physical route number for virtual speech channel of mg (cot) type select one of the followings: • route sp...

  • Page 583

    Vol.2-330 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mc part of mcmg is controlled by internal phe which is embedded in the telephony server. About the pro- cedure for the internal phe data assignment, refer to vol.1, chapter 2, “2. Ip related basic programming” in this manual. The explanation of phs including...

  • Page 584

    Vol.2-331 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] sys1, index 811 assign the tone code by countries. For more information, refer to the command manual. Sys1, index 813 assign the pad value of mc 00 = no pad control (conforms to the setting on asyd, sys1, index 4, b5) 01 = pad off (0db) 02 = 3db 03 = 6db aun...

  • Page 585

    Vol.2-332 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] aistl: assignment of ip station data (ldm) assign the ip station data of each terminal connected to the mc by the aistl command. Tn: tenant number [1-63] ip stn: station number of ip station (assign the station number for each analog terminal connected to th...

  • Page 586

    Vol.2-333 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] note: default settings (ip precedence, priority=6, low delay=off, throughput=off, reliability=off, min cost=off) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Aivcl: assignment of ip service voice control data (ldm) a loc-id:location id of the self-location ...

  • Page 587

    Vol.2-334 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] setting of pad: click the check box to assign the pad data manually. If not checked, default value 0 is applied. Kind2: specify the pad value of analog mc in the range of 0-3. •no pad control (determined by asyd, sys1, index 4, bit5 (5 db pad)) •pad off (0 d...

  • Page 588

    Vol.2-335 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mg part of mcmg can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. Here explains mcmg data assign- ment for registering to sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-bri, refer to page 325 . [1] internal phe data assignment when mg part of mcmg is registe...

  • Page 589

    Vol.2-336 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data for virtual speech channel. Cdn68 vir = 2 mg connection when using fax connection via mg, following assignment is necessary. Cdn 71 ip fax data cdn 72 jitter buffer size for ip fax cdn ...

  • Page 590

    Vol.2-337 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information for ldm assign the information of mcmg. Note...

  • Page 591

    Vol.2-338 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] select mc-mg (cot) line mg line number [0/1] ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mcmg. Setting of service type exists (signaling packet) type of service for mcmg music on hold exists external music on hold (default setting...

  • Page 592

    Vol.2-339 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mcmg. When amgvl data is not assigned, aivcl data setting is applied. A rt (mg storing) physical route number for virtual speech channel of mg (cot) type select one of the followings: • route sp...

  • Page 593

    Vol.2-340 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] assign the system data, according to the station numbering plan. Refer to the following for the prerequisite min- imum data. Asyd: assignment of system data sys1, index 4, b2-b3 assign the releasing method for station-to-station calling service 00 = calling ...

  • Page 594

    Vol.2-341 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 00 = no pad control (conforms to the setting on asyd, sys1, index 4, b5) 01 = pad off (0db) 02 = 3db 03 = 6db aunt: assignment of unit data mg: module group number type: 1 (select 1 for unit data assignment) unit0: 1/2 (unit 0 is used/not used). Unit1: 1/2 (...

  • Page 595

    Vol.2-342 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] lens: ip station equipment number as virtual lens. Allocate the ip station to the virtual lens within virtual pir, or to the lens of a vacant slot that the station/trunk is not mounted (an ip station cannot be assigned to a registered station multiple times....

  • Page 596

    Vol.2-343 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] jb_max: jitter buffer maximum value [0-30 ( × 10 milliseconds)] note: default settings (jb_min=1 (10 ms), jb_max=30 (300 ms)) are applied when the check box is not clicked. Setting of type of service (voice packet): click the check box to assign the tos data...

  • Page 597

    Vol.2-344 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] kind3: specify the pad no. Of ippad in the range of 0-15. Pad value is determined by this pad no. (0-15) and the setting of sw10-6/7 on ippad card. Refer to the circuit card description for more details. Setting of echo canceller: click the check box to assi...

  • Page 598

    Vol.2-345 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follo...

  • Page 599

    Vol.2-346 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of mcmg. Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mcmg card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the leds indic...

  • Page 600

    Vol.2-347 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mcmg using pr...

  • Page 601

    Vol.2-348 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] step 3: mcmg command prompt appears as follows. Step 4: set the network data depending on your lan environment. There are two ways to set the network data; dhcp server is used or not used. • when dhcp server is used • when dhcp server is not used -> ->usrcon...

  • Page 602

    Vol.2-349 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] • when dhcp server is used use set dhcp enable command to set the data and move on to step 5. Note: assign the ip address of default gateway and drs to dhcp server in this case. About ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to vol.1, chapter 2, “2. Ip re...

  • Page 603

    Vol.2-350 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mcmg. • ip address of mcmg (own address) • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 1 note: when the dhcp is set to “enable”, ip addresses assigned here cannot take effect...

  • Page 604

    Vol.2-351 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] step 5: save the assigned data using save configdata command. Mc-mg> save configdata **don’t power off in progress** do you need save? [n/y]:y erase start... Erase ok! Write start... Write ok! Checksum write. Ok! Configuration data has been saved. Restarting...

  • Page 605

    Vol.2-352 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mcmg to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the mcmg to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the following: - is there other device having the same ip address overlapped...

  • Page 606

    Vol.2-353 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] - pwr lamp: lights green - alarm lamp: off (*used for mcmg card only) - on line mc lamp: off - on line mg lamp: off - operation mc lamp: flashes green - operation mg0~mg6: flashes green note: after the data assignment (mcmg entry, incoming/originating outsid...

  • Page 607

    Vol.2-354 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.3.6 basic test procedures [1] basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link lamp lighting green? *initial setting on mcmg is started. *registration established. *initial setting between mcmg and mgc (telephony server) is sta...

  • Page 608

    Vol.2-355 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search for the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See the system message and con...

  • Page 609

    Vol.2-356 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mc0 ⇔ mg0 mc1 ⇔ mg1 mc2 [pft function is not provided] mc3 [pft function is not provided] before the test, connect c.O. Lines to mg0/mg1 and analog terminals to mc0/mc1. (a) perform this test before mcmg initialization has been completed. Step 1: turn off th...

  • Page 610

    Vol.2-357 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.4 operation and maintenance 7.4.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mcmg using proprietary protocol. Note: when mcmg reboots its...

  • Page 611

    Vol.2-358 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] the user input command above consists of several components. The following describes these components us- ing one of the set commands. Mc-id: 00004ca41cfd boot program version: sp3777 mcmg boot prog-a [05.00.00.00] main program version: sp3778 mcmg prog-a [1...

  • Page 612

    Vol.2-359 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] mc-mg> set ipaddress 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1 2 3 4 1: command 2: sub command 3: parameter 1 4: parameter 2 note: the number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command..

  • Page 613

    Vol.2-360 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] maintenance command for mcmg the maintenance console uses the commands listed in. Command no. Sub command function remarks set (both mc and mg sides) 1 defaultroute setting default gateway 2 dhcp setting dhcp 3 drsaddress setting drs address 4 drstos setting...

  • Page 614

    Vol.2-361 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] command no. Sub command function remarks set (mg side) 1 call_hold setting call hold 2 car_detect setting car detection 3 codec_coef_mg setting codec coefficiency 4 dsp_ecfb_mg setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication 5 dtmf_cutoff_time setting dtmf ...

  • Page 615

    Vol.2-362 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] command no. Sub command function remarks show (mg side) 1 call_hold to show call hold setting 2 car_detect to show car detection 3 codec_coef_mg to show codec coefficiency 4 dsp_ecfb_mg to show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 5 dtmf_cutoff_time to s...

  • Page 616

    Vol.2-363 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mc-mg>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) are specified correctly, the command executes th...

  • Page 617

    Vol.2-364 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] set command (both mc and mg sides) 1. Setting default gateway: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting dhcp: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command...

  • Page 618

    Vol.2-365 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 4. Setting tos of drs session: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: to make this assignment effective, use th...

  • Page 619

    Vol.2-366 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 6. Setting the communication speed for lan interface: note: the duplex setting is not shown when auto negotiation (auto) is selected in the speed setting. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenan...

  • Page 620

    Vol.2-367 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 9. Setting vlan: note: the maximum number of vlan is one. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: for sp-3778 mcmg prog-a issue 11/sp-3927 mcmg prog-b issue 1 or later firmwar...

  • Page 621

    Vol.2-368 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] set command (mc side) 1. Setting burst ringer pattern: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting codec coefficiency: note: the setting values are shown in the following tab...

  • Page 622

    Vol.2-369 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] • uk • brazil • china * setting value 0-2=constant voltage mode setting value 3-5=constant current mode • other resister kind of bnw setting value 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 600 Ω 0 (default) 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 370 Ω +(620 Ω //310nf) 1 600 Ω 600 Ω 2 resist...

  • Page 623

    Vol.2-370 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 3. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller: note: to make this assignment effecti...

  • Page 624

    Vol.2-371 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 6. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the receiver (ip to an- alog terminal) direction when the fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (receiver pad + fax receiver pad...

  • Page 625

    Vol.2-372 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 9. Setting open/reverse mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 10. Setting default receiver pad value: note: the pad command assigns the value to decrease voice level in the ...

  • Page 626

    Vol.2-373 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 12. Setting frequency of ringer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 13. Setting default sender pad value: note: the sendpad command assigns the value to decrease voice level in...

  • Page 627

    Vol.2-374 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 15. Setting stutter dial tone: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 16. Setting synchronous ringer mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restar...

  • Page 628

    Vol.2-375 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] set command (mg side) 1. Setting call hold note: by setting “enable” by this command, if a network failure occurred between the telephony server and mcmg, the call will be retained. The system will be rebooted automatically and re-registered to the tele- pho...

  • Page 629

    Vol.2-376 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] • australia • brazil • china * setting value 0 = constant voltage mode setting value 1 = constant current mode • other 600 Ω +2.16 μ f 350 Ω +(1000 Ω //210nf) 2 600 Ω +2.16 μ f 900 Ω +2.16 μ f 3 600 Ω +2.16 μ f 900 Ω 4 600 Ω +2.16 μ f 800 Ω //(100 Ω +50nf) 5...

  • Page 630

    Vol.2-377 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting...

  • Page 631

    Vol.2-378 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 6. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 7. Setting fax enable timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save comman...

  • Page 632

    Vol.2-379 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 9. Setting fax sender pad value: note: the faxsendpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the sender (ip to pstn) direction when fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (sender pad + fax sender pad) is limited to 20db. Not...

  • Page 633

    Vol.2-380 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 11. Setting loop prohibition timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 12. Setting release signal note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart befo...

  • Page 634

    Vol.2-381 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 14. Setting dsp smooth pad mode note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com...

  • Page 635

    Vol.2-382 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] show command (both mc and mg sides) 1. To show dhcp setting: 2. To show drs address and port number: note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. 3. To sh...

  • Page 636

    Vol.2-383 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 5. To show communication speed for lan interface: 6. To show ip address, net mask, and default gateway: 7. To show rtp start port: 8. To show the version information: mc-mg> show interface ethernet speed duplex 10mbps full the current setting is shown line 1...

  • Page 637

    Vol.2-384 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 9. To show vlan setting: note: for sp-3778 mcmg prog-a issue 11/sp-3927 mcmg prog-b issue 1 or later firmware, the ip ad- dress and subnetmask are not displayed. 10. To show warning tone control the current vlan setting is shown. Mc-mg> show vlan device id c...

  • Page 638

    Vol.2-385 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] show command (mc side) 1. To show burst ringer pattern: 2. To show codec coefficiency: 3. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: currently registered burst ringer pattern is shown mc-mg> show burs...

  • Page 639

    Vol.2-386 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 5. To show fax enable timer: 6. To show fax receiver pad value: 7. To show fax sender pad value: 8. To show internal music-on-hold type: 9. To show open/reverse mode: the current setting is shown mc-mg> show faxerrordetect fax enable timer is 1 minute. Mc-mg...

  • Page 640

    Vol.2-387 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 10. To show default receiver pad value: 11. To show pre-ringing: 12. To show frequency of ringer: 13. To show default sender pad value: note: the sender pad is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the ip. 14. To show dsp smooth pad mode: the c...

  • Page 641

    Vol.2-388 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 15. To show stutter dial tone: 16. To show synchronous ringing: registered setting is shown mc-mg> show stutterdt stutter dial tone is disable. Registered setting is shown mc-mg> show syncringing synchronous ringing is on..

  • Page 642

    Vol.2-389 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] show command (mg side) 1. To show call hold setting 2. To show car detection 3. To show codec coefficiency 4. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication the current setting is shown mc-mg> show call_hold call hold is disable. The current setting is sho...

  • Page 643

    Vol.2-390 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 5. To show dtmf cutoff timer 6. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: 7. To show fax enable timer: 8. To show fax receiver pad value: 9. To show fax sender pad value: the current setting is shown mc-mg> show dtmf_cutoff_time dtmf cutoff timer is 0...

  • Page 644

    Vol.2-391 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 10. To show i/c call abandon timer: 11. To show loop prohibition timer 12. To show release signal 13. To show rtp stop detect timer 14. To show dsp smooth pad mode the current setting is shown mc-mg> show ic_abandon_time i/c call abandon timer is 0 (6sec). T...

  • Page 645

    Vol.2-392 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 15. To show rvs mode (for australia) 16. To show auto polarity the current setting is shown mc-mg> show rvs_aust reverse watch (au) is roa. The current setting is shown mc-mg> show auto_polarity auto polarity is on..

  • Page 646

    Vol.2-393 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] delete command f to delete the vlan setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom: note: when the error occurs during s...

  • Page 647

    Vol.2-394 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server: note: configuration data file is uploaded to the tftp server. Reboot command f to reboot the mcmg: note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mc-mg, in default)...

  • Page 648

    Vol.2-395 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] [when configuration data is changed] note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mc-mg, in default) if any error occurs when “y” is selected after changing the configuration data. Line 1: line 2: line 3: line 4: line 5: line 6: line 7:...

  • Page 649

    Vol.2-396 mcmg [sca-4lc2cota/mg-4lc2cota] 7.4.2 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. Download file of...

  • Page 650

    Vol.2-397 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8. Mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.1 general 8.1.1 what is mcmg? Mcmg has two functions, media converter and media gateway. Media converter (mc) is an interface pro- viding media conversion between internet protocol (lan-side) and conventional voice data (the mc-connected con...

  • Page 651

    Vol.2-398 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.1.2 function overview basic connection mcmg in the system note: internal phi-bri controls the signaling and is accommodated in the telephony server to control mcmg. Call control between internal phi-bri and mcmg is executed via tcp/ip port of the system. Signaling c...

  • Page 652

    Vol.2-399 mcmg card [sca-7cota] power failure transfer (pft) mcmg has one mc port and seven mg (cot) ports. Pft connects one mc port to one mg port directly when some failure have occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to pstn network and then call origination to c.O. Line becomes availab...

  • Page 653

    Vol.2-400 mcmg card [sca-7cota] connecting diagram of pft function release of pft pft is released under the following conditions: • after rebooting, ip link with the telephony server is established • release of the lines activating over pft function are supervised. • pft is canceled, starting from t...

  • Page 654

    Vol.2-401 mcmg card [sca-7cota] paging station and attendant console can page anyone over the speaker connected to mcmg. Three types of paging features are supported by mcmg’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of paging access [p-1] and paging transfer [p-10] in data progr...

  • Page 655

    Vol.2-402 mcmg card [sca-7cota] after holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-delay system, delay system, and paging transfer supervision is available. Mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mcmg (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) hold the station/trunk cal...

  • Page 656

    Vol.2-403 mcmg card [sca-7cota] by dialing the access code of priority paging, the station/attcon is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. Interrupted mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mcmg (1) (2) (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) dial the access code of pr...

  • Page 657

    Vol.2-404 mcmg card [sca-7cota] trunk line appearance-d connecting an analog c.O. Trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows dtermip user to directly access c.O. Line of mcmg by pressing corresponding line key on dtermip station, without dialing access code. Dtermip station can also an...

  • Page 658

    Vol.2-405 mcmg card [sca-7cota] (j) when dtermip station answers and holds the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d, analog telephone station cannot answer the held call. Dtermip stations belong to multiple-line group can answer the held call. (k) call termination is informed to the user only by...

  • Page 659

    Vol.2-406 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension • mcmg card [sca-7cota] mcmg card is mounted on 1u-mpc module (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Size of mcmg card in 1u-mpc 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") unit : mm (inch) ether1 100m link 100m link ether2 pwr act alm load...

  • Page 660

    Vol.2-407 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 2. Specification mcmg specifications function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec step) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec step) g.723.1 6.3 k (bps): mp-mlq...

  • Page 661

    Vol.2-408 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mc specifications (analog interface/function) function specification note number of lines one line rj-11 modular jack 1 port (the port is connected to a c.O.Line if pft is activated) note 1 supply voltage -38v (min) loop resistance maximum of 600 Ω including the termi...

  • Page 662

    Vol.2-409 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note 1: available terminals are analog(pb) telephone and fax. Dp telephone can not be used and “calling number display” feature is not supported. If you connect analog telephone that has “calling number display” feature, the feature must be set off by the terminal sid...

  • Page 663

    Vol.2-410 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front view of mcmg card [sca-7cota] mc mg1 mg3 mg5 mc mg mg0 mg2 mg4 mg6 alm pwr ether operation mg0 mg2 mg4 mg6 mc mg1 mg3 mg5 mg7mc1 on line 100m link conso...

  • Page 664

    Vol.2-411 mcmg card [sca-7cota] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/full duplex) mg0 pstn interface rj-11 connected to analog line (mc) when pft is activated. Mg1 rj-11 mg2 mg3 mg4 mg5 mg6 mc analog terminal or fax is con...

  • Page 665

    Vol.2-412 mcmg card [sca-7cota] lamps on the front panel lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm red lights when power failure is detected off normal operation ether link green lights when establishing port link note: lights when physically connected to ip network....

  • Page 666

    Vol.2-413 mcmg card [sca-7cota] lamp indication and status lamp indication discription of status legend l: lights fr: flashes rapidly (60int) fs: flashes slowly (30int) × : remains off r: rotary lights mc on line mg on line operation mc mg0 mg1 mg2 mg3 mg4 mg5 mg6 × × × l × l × l × l start the boot ...

  • Page 667

    Vol.2-414 mcmg card [sca-7cota] rear view of mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure.) connectors,...

  • Page 668

    Vol.2-415 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 4. Port number the following provides the port number to be used in this system. Port no. Path function note 3456/udp drs (telephony server lan1) registration changing an initial value by using adtm command. 3456/udp mcmg (mc side) registration - 3457 /udp mcmg (mg si...

  • Page 669

    Vol.2-416 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.1.4 requirements 1. Hardware requirements to use the mcmg for an analog terminal and pstn connection, the following hardware is required: • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for connecting to l...

  • Page 670

    Vol.2-417 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.1.5 service conditions before the use of mcmg, note the following conditions. Note: the following conditions are based on the assumption that mcmg is registered to internal phi-bri though mcmg can be registered to sp-phi instead of internal phi-bri. Please make sure...

  • Page 671

    Vol.2-418 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 5. Mg does not supervise the condition such as trunk failure. Therefore, mg can originate a call regardless of trunk failure. (as far as mg works correctly.) this condition is the same as conventional cot. 6. Internal phi-bri and mg are connected via udp/ip. Therefore...

  • Page 672

    Vol.2-419 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 18. There are following restrictions when using remote access to system [r-2] or automated attendant [a-82]. • if virtual register cannot be seized, physical register is seized. (i.E. Rt=902 ort, rt=903 irt, rt=906 pbr for automated attendant service, rt=933 crt) • wh...

  • Page 673

    Vol.2-420 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 3. When using location diversity mg data need to be assigned to all channels although physical connection with lines is not necessary..

  • Page 674

    Vol.2-421 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mcmg. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 8.2.1 how to set mcmg • mcmg card [sca-7cota] * this figure is an example to mount a server card in the left slot and a mcmg c...

  • Page 675

    Vol.2-422 mcmg card [sca-7cota] step 2 secure the mcmg card to 1u-mpc fixing two screws on right and left sides. 8.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to mcmg. Mcmg provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • connection to pstn • connection of analog telephone/g...

  • Page 676

    Vol.2-423 mcmg card [sca-7cota] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows general description of cable connection for mcmg. *the following figures show example connections to mcmg card. For mcmg box, connect in the same way. Mcmg cable connection diagr...

  • Page 677

    Vol.2-424 mcmg card [sca-7cota] step 1 ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mcmg. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. • mcmg card [sca-7cota] connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety measures again...

  • Page 678

    Vol.2-425 mcmg card [sca-7cota] step 3 connect analog terminals to mc connector on the front panel. Note that mc provides pft function note: pstn lines and lan cables are connected in section 8.3 startup mcmg and basic tests . Do not connect these cables here. B a 1 rj-11 connector pin assignment 2 ...

  • Page 679

    Vol.2-426 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3 startup mcmg and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. Note 1: be sure to assign mg data before assigning mc data. When registering to sp-phi 1. Internal ph...

  • Page 680

    Vol.2-427 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please make sure de...

  • Page 681

    Vol.2-428 mcmg card [sca-7cota] cdn 73 kppt duration of kp sending (0-15) cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, mg, or vs-32. Arti: assignment of trunk applicat...

  • Page 682

    Vol.2-429 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mcmg. Note: when assig...

  • Page 683

    Vol.2-430 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mg-id mac address of mcmg kind kind of mg trunk select mc-mg (7cot) line mg line number [0-6] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line6 (lv6). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign ...

  • Page 684

    Vol.2-431 mcmg card [sca-7cota] other μ /Α law receive complete timing of pb direct-in [0-15] default value is 0. False answer timing [0-15] default value is 0. Amgvl: assignment of media gateway voice control (ldm) assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mcmg. When amgvl dat...

  • Page 685

    Vol.2-432 mcmg card [sca-7cota] setting of type of service (voice packet) type of service for mg (cot) setting of payload payload type payload size [3] internal phe data assignment mc part of mcmg is controlled by internal phe which is embedded in the telephony server. About the pro- cedure for the ...

  • Page 686

    Vol.2-433 mcmg card [sca-7cota] assign station release timer (ts - release timing when connected to an ort) and hooking timer (tl - shf maximum timing). Normally, “91” is set in hexadecimal (ts = 120 milliseconds, tl = 1,080 milli- seconds). For details, refer to command manual. Asydl: assignment of...

  • Page 687

    Vol.2-434 mcmg card [sca-7cota] assign the connection restriction data between originating tenant (ogtn) and terminating tenant (tmtn). When asyd, sys1, index 94, b0=0 is assigned (multiple tenant service is in-service), assign the respective tenant number of ogtn and tmtn. If not (when the data is ...

  • Page 688

    Vol.2-435 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: loc-id=0 is predetermined to the location id of mgc (i.E.Ippad). Setting type of signaling packet service: click the check box to assign the tos for signaling packet. Ip precedence/diffserv: priority: specify the precedence in the range of 0-7 (low-high). Low de...

  • Page 689

    Vol.2-436 mcmg card [sca-7cota] •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds note: • if payload type g.711 is specified to more than two priorities in pri1 through pri4, assign different payload size to each priority. • when payload types g.723.1 (5.3k → 6.3k) and g.723.1 (6.3...

  • Page 690

    Vol.2-437 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mg part of mcmg can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. Here explains mcmg data assign- ment for registering to sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-bri, refer to page 427 . [1] internal phe data assignment when mg part of mcmg is registered to sp-...

  • Page 691

    Vol.2-438 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, mg, or vs-32. Arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data for virtual speech channel. Cdn68 vir = 2 mg connection when using fax ...

  • Page 692

    Vol.2-439 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mcmg. Note: when assig...

  • Page 693

    Vol.2-440 mcmg card [sca-7cota] mg-id mac address of mcmg kind kind of mg trunk select mc-mg (7cot) line mg line number [0-6] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line6 (lv6). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign ...

  • Page 694

    Vol.2-441 mcmg card [sca-7cota] other μ /Α law receive complete timing of pb direct-in [0-15] default value is 0. False answer timing [0-15] default value is 0. Amgvl: assignment of media gateway voice control (ldm) assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mcmg. When amgvl dat...

  • Page 695

    Vol.2-442 mcmg card [sca-7cota] setting of type of service (voice packet) type of service for mg (cot) setting of payload payload type payload size [4] mc data assignment assign the system data, according to the station numbering plan. Refer to the following for the prerequisite min- imum data. Asyd...

  • Page 696

    Vol.2-443 mcmg card [sca-7cota] asydl: assignment of system data (ldm) sys1, index 811 assign the tone code by countries. For more information, refer to the command manual. Sys1, index 813 assign the pad value of mc 00 = no pad control (conforms to the setting on asyd, sys1, index 4, b5) 01 = pad of...

  • Page 697

    Vol.2-444 mcmg card [sca-7cota] assign the ip station data of each terminal connected to the mc by the aistl command. Tn: tenant number [1-63] ip stn: station number of ip station (assign the station number for each analog terminal connected to the mcmg) kind: kind of ip terminal. Select the termina...

  • Page 698

    Vol.2-445 mcmg card [sca-7cota] aivcl: assignment of ip service voice control data (ldm) a loc-id:location id of the self-location [0-4095] b loc-id:location id of the destination location [0-4095] setting of jitter buffer: click the check box to assign the jitter buffer data. Jb_min: jitter buffer ...

  • Page 699

    Vol.2-446 mcmg card [sca-7cota] kind2: specify the pad value of analog mc in the range of 0-3. •no pad control (determined by asyd, sys1, index 4, bit5 (5 db pad)) •pad off (0 db) •3 db •6 db kind3: specify the pad no. Of ippad in the range of 0-15. Pad value is determined by this pad no. (0-15) and...

  • Page 700

    Vol.2-447 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • port...

  • Page 701

    Vol.2-448 mcmg card [sca-7cota] step 2: make sure the leds indicate normal status. - pwr led lights green. - (boot program automatically starts.) - on line led light green when the sequence is completed. Front mc mg1 mg3 mg5 mc mg mg0 mg2 mg4 mg6 alm pwr ether operation mg0 mg2 mg4 mg6 mc mg1 mg3 mg...

  • Page 702

    Vol.2-449 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mcmg card using proprie...

  • Page 703

    Vol.2-450 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • ip address and port number of drs note 1 , note 2 * check the number of ip address saved in dhcp server is sufficient so as to get ip address of mcmg anytime. Note 1: dhcp option setting is as follows. Class: global name: not specified, but do not enter the same opt...

  • Page 704

    Vol.2-451 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: write down the displayed mg-id (mac address of mcmg) to assign the mac address on pcpro com- mand amgil and aistl. Mg-id = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa mcmg's mac address is displayed. Use dhcp? Input [y(yes)/n(no)/q(quit)]:y set whether to use dhcp server. Input “y” here ...

  • Page 705

    Vol.2-452 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note 1 set the following data on mcmg. • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 2 • ip address of mcmg (own address) note 1: when the dhcp is set to “enable”, ip addresses assigned here cannot take effect. Be sure to assign “set dhcp di...

  • Page 706

    Vol.2-453 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual..

  • Page 707

    Vol.2-454 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mcmg to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the mcmg to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the followings: - is there other device having the same ip address overlapped? - is th...

  • Page 708

    Vol.2-455 mcmg card [sca-7cota] step 2: connect c.O. Lines to mg0-mg6. Connecting c.O. Lines step 3: check the lamp indication on the front panel of mcmg. - pwr lamp: lights green - alarm lamp: off (*used for mcmg card only) - on line mc lamp: off - on line mg lamp: off - operation mc lamp: flashes ...

  • Page 709

    Vol.2-456 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.3.6 basic test procedure [1] basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link lamp lighting green? *initial setting on mcmg is started. *registration established. *initial setting between mcmg and mgc (telephony server) is started. *mcmg...

  • Page 710

    Vol.2-457 mcmg card [sca-7cota] [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See the system message and confirm whether m...

  • Page 711

    Vol.2-458 mcmg card [sca-7cota] before the test, connect c.O. Lines to mg0-mg6 and analog terminals to mc. (a) perform this test before mcmg initialization has been completed. Step 1: turn off the mcmg by switching off the power switch (down) on the rear panel of mcmg. Step 2: perform the following ...

  • Page 712

    Vol.2-459 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.4 operation and maintenance 8.4.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mcmg card using proprietary protocol. Note: when mcmg reboots itself d...

  • Page 713

    Vol.2-460 mcmg card [sca-7cota] the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. Mc-mg> set ipaddress 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1 2 3 4 1: command 2: sub command 3: parameter 1 4: parameter 2 note: the number of ...

  • Page 714

    Vol.2-461 mcmg card [sca-7cota] maintenance command for mcmg the maintenance console uses the commands listed in. Command no. Sub command function remarks set (both mc and mg sides) 1 defaultroute setting default gateway: 2 dhcp setting dhcp: 3 drsaddress setting ip address and port number of drs: 4...

  • Page 715

    Vol.2-462 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: the following set commands are available for mcmg with the firmware versions: sp-3849 mcmg prog-a issue 9 or later. Command no. Sub command function remarks set (mg side) 1 car_detect setting car detection: 2 codec_coef_mg setting codec coefficiency: 3 dsp_ecfb_...

  • Page 716

    Vol.2-463 mcmg card [sca-7cota] command no. Sub command function remarks show (both mc and mg sides) 1 dhcp to show dhcp setting: 2 drsaddress to show drs address and port number: 3 drstos to show tos setting of drs session: 4 hc_timer to show health check receive timer 5 interface to show communica...

  • Page 717

    Vol.2-464 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note: the following show commands are available for mcmg with the firmware versions: sp-3849 mcmg prog-a issue 9 or later. Command no. Sub command function remarks show (mg side) 1 call_hold to show the current setting of mg based call retention 2 rtp_stop_detect to s...

  • Page 718

    Vol.2-465 mcmg card [sca-7cota] enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mc-mg>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required ...

  • Page 719

    Vol.2-466 mcmg card [sca-7cota] set command (both mc and mg sides) 1. Setting default gateway: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting dhcp: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and rest...

  • Page 720

    Vol.2-467 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 4. Setting tos of drs session: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save com...

  • Page 721

    Vol.2-468 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 6. Setting the communication speed for lan interface: note: the duplex setting is not shown when auto negotiation (auto) is selected in the speed setting. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- ma...

  • Page 722

    Vol.2-469 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8. Setting rtp start port: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: port number must be the even number. Rtcp port number is assigned to start port number + 1. (odd num- ber) 9. Setting ...

  • Page 723

    Vol.2-470 mcmg card [sca-7cota] set command (mc side) 1. Setting burst ringer pattern: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting codec coefficiency: note: the setting values are shown in the following table. • nort...

  • Page 724

    Vol.2-471 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • uk • brazil • china * setting value 0-2=constant voltage mode setting value 3-5=constant current mode • other resister kind of bnw setting value 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 600 Ω 0 (default) 300 Ω +(1000 Ω //220nf) 370 Ω +(620 Ω //310nf) 1 600 Ω 600 Ω 2 resister kind of...

  • Page 725

    Vol.2-472 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 3. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller: note: to make this assignment effective, use th...

  • Page 726

    Vol.2-473 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 5. Setting fax enable timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 6. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the ...

  • Page 727

    Vol.2-474 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8. Setting internal music-on-hold type: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 9. Setting open/reverse mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before...

  • Page 728

    Vol.2-475 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 11. Setting pre-ringing: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 12. Setting frequency of ringer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the...

  • Page 729

    Vol.2-476 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 14. Setting dsp smooth pad mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 15. Setting stutter dial tone: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiti...

  • Page 730

    Vol.2-477 mcmg card [sca-7cota] set command (mg side) 1. Setting car detection: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting codec coefficiency: note: the setting values are shown in the following table. Setting value...

  • Page 731

    Vol.2-478 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • brazil • china * setting value 0 = constant voltage mode setting value 1 = constant current mode • other note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Resister kind of bnw setting value 900 Ω 800...

  • Page 732

    Vol.2-479 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 3. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting dtmf cutoff timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and re...

  • Page 733

    Vol.2-480 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 6. Setting fax enable timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 7. Setting fax receiver pad value: note: the faxrecvpad command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the ...

  • Page 734

    Vol.2-481 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 9. Setting i/c call abandon timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 10. Setting loop prohibition timer: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart befor...

  • Page 735

    Vol.2-482 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 12. Setting dsp smooth pad mode: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 13. Setting rvs mode (for australia): 14. Setting auto polarity note: to make this assignment effective, use the save ...

  • Page 736

    Vol.2-483 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware versions: sp-3849 mcmg prog- a issue 9 or later. 1. Setting mg based call retention note: when “enable” is set and a network error occurs between the telephony server and mcmg, an ongoing call can be ...

  • Page 737

    Vol.2-484 mcmg card [sca-7cota] show command (both mc and mg sides) 1. To show dhcp setting: 2. To show drs address and port number: note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. 3. To show tos set...

  • Page 738

    Vol.2-485 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 5. To show communication speed for lan interface: 6. To show ip address, net mask, and default gateway: 7. To show rtp start port: 8. To show the version information: mc-mg> show interface ethernet speed duplex 10mbps full the current setting is shown. Line 1: enter t...

  • Page 739

    Vol.2-486 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 9. To show vlan setting: 10. To show warning tone control: the current vlan setting is shown. Mc-mg> show vlan device id cos vlan1 1 0 mc-mg> show vlan device id cos ipaddress subnetmask mc-mg > show warning_tone warning tone control of ip network is 3 (ip & tdm side)...

  • Page 740

    Vol.2-487 mcmg card [sca-7cota] show command (mc side) 1. To show burst ringer pattern: 2. To show codec coefficiency: 3. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication: 4. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: currently registered burst ringer pattern is shown. Mc-mg> show burstpattern...

  • Page 741

    Vol.2-488 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 5. To show fax enable timer: 6. To show fax receiver pad value: 7. To show fax sender pad value: 8. To show internal music-on-hold type: 9. To show open/reverse mode: the current setting is shown. Mc-mg> show faxerrordetect fax enable timer is 1 minute. Mc-mg> show fa...

  • Page 742

    Vol.2-489 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 10. To show default receiver pad value: 11. To show pre-ringing: 12. To show frequency of ringer: 13. To show default sender pad value: note: the sender pad is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the ip. 14. To show dsp smooth pad mode: the current rec...

  • Page 743

    Vol.2-490 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 15. To show stutter dial tone: registered setting is shown. Mc-mg> show stutterdt stutter dial tone is disable..

  • Page 744

    Vol.2-491 mcmg card [sca-7cota] show command (mg side) 1. To show car detection 2. To show codec coefficiency 3. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 4. To show dtmf cutoff timer the current setting is shown. Mc-mg> show car_detect car detecting is on. The current setting is shown. Mc-mg...

  • Page 745

    Vol.2-492 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 5. To show training feature mode of echo canceller: 6. To show fax enable timer: 7. To show fax receiver pad value: 8. To show fax sender pad value: 9. To show i/c call abandon timer: the current setting is shown. Mc-mg> show ec_training_mg ec training is on. The curr...

  • Page 746

    Vol.2-493 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 10. To show loop prohibition timer 11. To show release signal 12. To show dsp smooth pad mode 13. To show rvs mode (for australia) 14. To show auto polarity the current setting is shown. Mc-mg> show no_loop_time loop prohibition timer is 0 (608ms). The current setting...

  • Page 747

    Vol.2-494 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware versions: sp-3849 mcmg prog- a issue 9 or later. 1. To show the current setting of mg based call retention 2. To show the current setting of receive stop detect timer displays the current setting of m...

  • Page 748

    Vol.2-495 mcmg card [sca-7cota] delete command f to delete the vlan setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom: note: when the error occurs during saving, con...

  • Page 749

    Vol.2-496 mcmg card [sca-7cota] put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server: note: configuration data file is uploaded to the tftp server. Reboot command f to reboot the mcmg: note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mc-mg, in default) if any er...

  • Page 750

    Vol.2-497 mcmg card [sca-7cota] exit command f to exit the maintenance command: [normal occasion] note: when the “exit” command is executed on the os prompt ( → ), key operation turns unaccepted. In this case, press the ctrl + c keys simultaneously to display the os prompt ( → ) again. [when configu...

  • Page 751

    Vol.2-498 mcmg card [sca-7cota] setup command f to assign the data related to ip address simply: • when dhcp option is used (to get drs address): • when dhcp option is not used : note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introdu...

  • Page 752

    Vol.2-499 mcmg card [sca-7cota] • when dhcp server is not used: note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note 2: follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Mc-mg> setup mg-i...

  • Page 753

    Vol.2-500 mcmg card [sca-7cota] note 3: follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. Clear command f to clear all the assigned configuration data. Own ipaddress (xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx):1.1.1.10 ip address is entered. Subnet mask (xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx):255.255.255.0 sub...

  • Page 754

    Vol.2-501 mcmg card [sca-7cota] 8.4.2 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. Download file of system da...

  • Page 755

    Vol.2-502 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.Mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.1 general 9.1.1 what is mg-cot? Mg-cot has a function of media gateway (mg) which is an interface between ip network and analog pstn line. Also an analog terminal for exclusive use of power failure transfer (pft) can b...

  • Page 756

    Vol.2-503 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.1.2 function overview basic connection mg has six analog ports and connects ip network and pstn. Any ip terminal or sip terminal can originate and receive call to/from analog pstn line when mg-cot is accommodated in the system. Mg-cot in the system note:...

  • Page 757

    Vol.2-504 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] power failure transfer (pft) mg-cot has six mg (cot) ports and one pft port. Pft connects the pft port to one mg port (mg0) directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to pstn network and then call origination to c.O. L...

  • Page 758

    Vol.2-505 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] paging stations can page anyone over the speaker connected to mg-cot. Three types of paging features are supported by mg-cot’s paging. For operation procedures refer to ser- vice conditions of paging access [p-1] and paging transfer [p-10] in data programm...

  • Page 759

    Vol.2-506 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] after holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-delay system, delay system, and paging transfer supervision is available. Mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mg-cot (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) hold the sta...

  • Page 760

    Vol.2-507 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] by dialing the access code of priority paging, the station/attcon is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. Interrupted mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mg-cot (1) (2) (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) dial the acc...

  • Page 761

    Vol.2-508 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] analog caller id caller id information (calling number and calling name) can be displayed on called terminals (dterm and dtermip stations with lcd) for the calls via caller id-compliant analog c.O. Line in north amer- ica. Follow the service conditions bel...

  • Page 762

    Vol.2-509 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] (d) caller information display is available only for the incoming call from c.O. Line terminated directly to each station. Caller information cannot be displayed when intermediate station exists by call for- warding. When the intermediate station hangs up,...

  • Page 763

    Vol.2-510 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] trunk line appearance-d connecting an analog c.O. Trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows dtermip user to directly access c.O. Line of mg-cot by pressing corresponding line key on dtermip station, without dialing ac- cess code. Dtermip sta...

  • Page 764

    Vol.2-511 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] (i) analog telephone cannot answer the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d. (j) when dtermip station answers and holds the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d, analog telephone station cannot answer the held call. Dtermip stations can answer the ...

  • Page 765

    Vol.2-512 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension mg-cot card is mounted on 1u-mpc module (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Size of mg-cot card in 1u-mpc unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") mg1 mg3 mg5 mg0 mg2 mg4 alm pwr ether mg6 opera tion mg0 m...

  • Page 766

    Vol.2-513 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 2. Specifications mg-cot specifications function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) g.723.1 6....

  • Page 767

    Vol.2-514 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note 1: grounding less than 10 Ω is desirable for signaling method. If the grounding is not available, the interface functions as a ringdown trunk. When ground start is used as signaling method, proper grounding is re- quired. Mg specifications function sp...

  • Page 768

    Vol.2-515 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. This figure shows sca-6cota as an example. Front view of mg-cot card [sca-6cota] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan inter...

  • Page 769

    Vol.2-516 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] lamps on the front panel lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm red lights when power failure is detected off normal operation ether link green lights when establishing port link note: lights when physically connected to...

  • Page 770

    Vol.2-517 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] lamp indication and status lamp indication discription of status legend l: lights fr: flashes rapidly (60int) fs: flashes slowly (30int) × : remains off r: rotary lights mg on line operation mg0 mg1 mg2 mg3 mg4 mg5 × × × × × × × start the boot program × r ...

  • Page 771

    Vol.2-518 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] rear view of mg-cot card [sca-6cota] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure...

  • Page 772

    Vol.2-519 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 4. Port number the following provides the port number to be used in this system. • when using proprietary protocol mode when using sip mode note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the network because both of which a...

  • Page 773

    Vol.2-520 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 5. Available channels when using sip mode the number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by mg-cot in sip mode. Therefore, adjustments will be needed, such as placing unnecessary channels into the make busy status. See vo...

  • Page 774

    Vol.2-521 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 2. Firmware program the following program is installed in mg-cot [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc]. • installed firmware [sca-6cota]: • installed firmware [sca-6cotc]: 3. Environmental requirements • temperature: 0 ° c~40 ° c (32 ° f~104 ° f) • humidity: 20%~90% (not ...

  • Page 775

    Vol.2-522 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.1.5 service conditions before the use of mg-cot, note the following conditions. Service conditions for proprietary protocol mode and sip mode 1. When the setting of asydl, sys1, index880, bit 1 (internal phi-pri/bri)/bit 3 (internal phe) is modified, ini...

  • Page 776

    Vol.2-523 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 16. There are following restrictions when using remote access to system [r-2] or automated attendant [a-82]. • if virtual register cannot be seized, physical register is seized. (i.E. Rt=902 ort, rt=903 irt, rt=906 pbr for automated attendant service, rt=9...

  • Page 777

    Vol.2-524 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 5. Internal phi-bri and mg are connected via udp/ip. Therefore, routine diagnosis is performed by pro- prietary protocol procedure. System message (33-s) is output if failure is detected. 6. System message (33-r) is output if control packet is sent and con...

  • Page 778

    Vol.2-525 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg-cot. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 9.2.1 how to set mg-cot note: the figure below, where mg-cot card is accommodated in the left slot of 1u-mpc,.Is...

  • Page 779

    Vol.2-526 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg-cot. Mg-cot provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • connection to pstn • connection of analog telephone • serial port connection to maintenance console • connection t...

  • Page 780

    Vol.2-527 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows a cable configura- tion example. Mg-cot cable connection diagram (front) note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpose φ 3.5 mono-...

  • Page 781

    Vol.2-528 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] step 1 ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mg-cot. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper.] connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety measures against static...

  • Page 782

    Vol.2-529 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] step 2 connect a maintenance console (pc) to console connector using console cable. Step 3 connect analog terminals to pft connector on the front panel. Note: pstn lines and lan cables are connected in section 9.3 startup mg-cot and basic tests . Do not co...

  • Page 783

    Vol.2-530 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3 startup mg-cot and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. When sip mode 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg-cot card data as...

  • Page 784

    Vol.2-531 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please ...

  • Page 785

    Vol.2-532 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] cdn 72 mfsp sending speed (0-15) cdn 73 kppt duration of kp sending (0-15) cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) cdn 15 lsg = 1 ground start is available note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot t...

  • Page 786

    Vol.2-533 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mg (6cot)....

  • Page 787

    Vol.2-534 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line5 (lv5). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mg (6cot). Setting of service type exi...

  • Page 788

    Vol.2-535 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] amgvl: assignment of media gateway voice control (ldm) assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mg (6cot). When amgvl data is not as- signed, aivcl data setting is applied. A rt (mg storing) physical route number for virtual speech c...

  • Page 789

    Vol.2-536 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] alocl: assignment of location id data (ldm) each ip terminal is allocated a location id to identify its location within the network on network address basis. By using the location id, ip services such as bandwidth control and tos control are provided for e...

  • Page 790

    Vol.2-537 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: default settings (ip precedence, precedence=5, low delay=off, throughput=off, reliability=off, min cost=off) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Setting of payload: click the check box to assign the payload data. Specify the payload type an...

  • Page 791

    Vol.2-538 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: mg-cot needs to be rebooted after station data is assigned to reflect change. Confirm that there is no con- versation in progress when rebooting. [*] data deletion deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment. Make sure to delete in t...

  • Page 792

    Vol.2-539 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] mg-cot card can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. When registering to sp-phi, it works using sip, which is called sip mode. Here explains mg-cot card data assignment for sip mode. When reg- istering to internal phi-bri (proprietary protoc...

  • Page 793

    Vol.2-540 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] cdn 72 mfsp sending speed (0-15) cdn 73 kppt duration of kp sending (0-15) cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) cdn 15 lsg = 1 ground start is available arti: assignment of trunk application data assign trunk application data...

  • Page 794

    Vol.2-541 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mg (6cot)....

  • Page 795

    Vol.2-542 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line5 (lv5). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mg line number 0. Setting of service t...

  • Page 796

    Vol.2-543 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] amgvl: assignment of media gateway voice control (ldm) assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to mg (6cot). When amgvl data is not as- signed, aivcl data setting is applied. A rt (mg storing) physical route number for virtual speech c...

  • Page 797

    Vol.2-544 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: default settings (jb_min=1 (10 ms), jb_max=30 (300 ms)) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Setting of type of service (voice packet): click the check box to assign the tos data for voice packet. Ip precedence/diffserv: select either of the...

  • Page 798

    Vol.2-545 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] kind3: specify the pad no. Of ippad in the range of 0-15. Pad value is determined by this pad no. (0-15) and the setting of sw10-6/7 on ippad card. Refer to the circuit card description for more details. Setting of echo canceller: click the check box to as...

  • Page 799

    Vol.2-546 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] when automatic number identification (ani) feature for enhanced 911 (e911) is required, assign the follow- ing data. Artd: assignment of route class data assign the route class data for virtual speech channel. An independent route is required for e911-ani ...

  • Page 800

    Vol.2-547 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as fol...

  • Page 801

    Vol.2-548 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of mg-cot. Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg-cot card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the leds...

  • Page 802

    Vol.2-549 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The following explains the procedure b...

  • Page 803

    Vol.2-550 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] assign the configuration data for mg-cot card in proprietary protocol mode. About the configuration data for sip mode, refer to page 555 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. Step 2: type “usrcons...

  • Page 804

    Vol.2-551 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg-cot card, default gateway, and the telepho- ny server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg-cot card side. Ip addresses listed below, however, have to be prep...

  • Page 805

    Vol.2-552 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note 1: type “setup” here for a firmware version of earlier than sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0. Note 2: if the firmware version is earlier than sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.2.0.0.0, whether to use dhcp op- tion will be asked after dhcp server is set for...

  • Page 806

    Vol.2-553 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 1 • ip address of mg-cot card (own address) note: when the dhcp is set to “enable”, ip addresses assigned here ca...

  • Page 807

    Vol.2-554 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note 1: type “setup” here for a firmware version of earlier than sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0. Note 2: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual..

  • Page 808

    Vol.2-555 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] assign the configuration data for mg-cot card in sip mode. About the configuration data for proprietary pro- tocol mode, refer to page 550 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The system requires...

  • Page 809

    Vol.2-556 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] step 3: mg-cot card command prompt “mg-cot>” appears as follows. Step 4: set the basic data for connecting network by “setup sp” command depending on your lan envi- ronment. Enter “setup sp” following the prompt. Step 5: assign whether to use dhcp server a...

  • Page 810

    Vol.2-557 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is used in this setting, because mg-cot card automatically gets ip address from dhcp server, it is not required to set ip address and default gateway on mg-cot card. Set the ethernet speed as follows. Ethernet speed: --- ethernet speed s...

  • Page 811

    Vol.2-558 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address of dns server • ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card (own address) • host name of mg-cot card • ip address of default gateway • host name of sip se...

  • Page 812

    Vol.2-559 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 4. Default gateway ip address 5. Host name of sip server 6. Ethernet speed --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 change default gateway? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input new default gateway : 10.41.1.254 --- sip ser...

  • Page 813

    Vol.2-560 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is not used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card (own address) • ip address of default gateway • ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note 1 • etherne...

  • Page 814

    Vol.2-561 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 3. Ip address, port number, and host name of sip server 4. Ethernet speed step 7: save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server/ip address/port number/h...

  • Page 815

    Vol.2-562 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mg-cot card to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the mg-cot card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the followings: - is there other device having the same ip a...

  • Page 816

    Vol.2-563 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] step 2: connect c.O. Lines to mg0-mg5. Connecting c.O. Lines step 3: check the lamp indication on the front panel of mg-cot card. - pwr lamp: lights green - alarm lamp: off - on line lamp: off - operation mg0~mg5: flashes green note: after the data assignm...

  • Page 817

    Vol.2-564 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.3.6 basic test procedures [1] basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link lamp lighting green? *initial setting on mg-cot is started. *registration established. *initial setting between mg-cot and mgc (telephony server) ...

  • Page 818

    Vol.2-565 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See the system message and confi...

  • Page 819

    Vol.2-566 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] pft ⇔ mg0 before the test, connect c.O. Lines to mg0 and analog terminals to pft. (a) perform this test before mg-cot card initialization has been completed. Step 1: turn off the mg-cot card by switching off the power switch (down) on the rear panel of mg-...

  • Page 820

    Vol.2-567 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.4 operation and maintenance 9.4.1 how to use maintenance command on a serial connection client (e.G. Hyperterminal), start up the program and uses maintenance command. Enter “usrconsole” after the os prompt (->). When the maintenance command is started, ...

  • Page 821

    Vol.2-568 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] an example of indication is shown below: mg-id: xxxxxxxxxxxx boot program version : sp3839 sh7751r cboot-1 prog-a [04.00.00.00] main program version : sp3948 6mgcot prog-a [01.00.00.00] /w pkg information : ca-cc07 001 h/w pkg information : ca-cc08 001 dsp...

  • Page 822

    Vol.2-569 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. Mg-cot> set ipaddress 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1 2 3 4 1: command 2: sub command 3: parameter 1 (p1) 4: parameter 2 (p...

  • Page 823

    Vol.2-570 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] maintenance command for mg-cot card the maintenance console uses the commands listed in. Command no. Sub command function remarks setup 1 tp set up network environment for mg-cot card proprietary protocol mode (sp-3875 6mgcot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or later) 2...

  • Page 824

    Vol.2-571 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] command no. Sub command function remarks show 1 codec_coef_mg to show codec coefficiency 2 cnfigdata to show configuration data list 3 dhcp to show dhcp setting 4 dns_sw to show dns server 5 drsaddress to show drs address and port number 6 drstos to show t...

  • Page 825

    Vol.2-572 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] command sub command function remarks get configdata to download configuration data file from specified tftp server command sub command function remarks put configdata to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server command sub command function r...

  • Page 826

    Vol.2-573 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mg-cot>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes ...

  • Page 827

    Vol.2-574 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] setup command 1. Set up network environment for mg-cot card proprietary protocol mode (sp-3875 6mgcot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or later) this command is used to setup the basic data for proprietary protocol mode. Setting display differs whether dhcp server is us...

  • Page 828

    Vol.2-575 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is not used: note 1: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note 2: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in...

  • Page 829

    Vol.2-576 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note 3: follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Note 4: follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. 2. Set up network environment for mg-cot card sp mode (sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or ...

  • Page 830

    Vol.2-577 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] f setting dhcp server enable/disable: f setting dns server enable/disable: f setting dns server ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. --- dhcp interface set --- current dhcp interface: ...

  • Page 831

    Vol.2-578 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] f setting ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. F setting host name of mg-cot card: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. F se...

  • Page 832

    Vol.2-579 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] f setting host name of sip server: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server and host name: sip server 1 2 3 : : 20 host name change sip server infor...

  • Page 833

    Vol.2-580 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination o...

  • Page 834

    Vol.2-581 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] f setting ethernet speed: f save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. 3. Set up network environment for mg-cot card proprietary protocol mode.(sp-3875 6mgcot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or earlier) to setup ip...

  • Page 835

    Vol.2-582 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: the designated operating status cannot refer when sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver 3.0.0.0 or earlier. • when dhcp option is not used : note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introd...

  • Page 836

    Vol.2-583 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • sp-3875 6mgcot prog-a ver.2.0.0.0 or later note: if dhcp server is set for use, dhcp option will be set for use automatically. ( sp-3875 6mgcot prog-a ver.2.0.0.0 or later ) if you do not assign the ip address of drs to dhcp server, it must be assigned b...

  • Page 837

    Vol.2-584 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when dhcp server is not used: note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note 2: follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Mg-co...

  • Page 838

    Vol.2-585 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note 3: follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. Own ipaddress (xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx):1.1.1.10 ip address is entered. Subnet mask (xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx):255.255.255.0 subnet mask is entered. Default route (xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xx...

  • Page 839

    Vol.2-586 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] set command 1. Setting codec coefficiency note: the setting values are shown in the following table. Set appropriate values. Setting value “2” is assigned when the product is shipped. Change the data if required. • north america • australia • brazil mg-cot...

  • Page 840

    Vol.2-587 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • china * setting value 0=constant voltage mode setting value 1=constant current mode • other note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Resister kind of bnw setting value 200 Ω +(68...

  • Page 841

    Vol.2-588 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 2. Setting default gateway note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 3. Setting dhcp note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the ma...

  • Page 842

    Vol.2-589 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 5. Setting ip address and port number of drs note: the designated drs setting cannot be applied when sp mode. Assign the proprietary protocol mode before executing this drs setting. Note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply...

  • Page 843

    Vol.2-590 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: the designated drs setting cannot be applied when sp mode. Assign the ...

  • Page 844

    Vol.2-591 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9. Setting training feature mode of echo canceller note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 10. Setting fax enable timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save comma...

  • Page 845

    Vol.2-592 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: the faxsendpad_mg command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the sender (ip to pstn) direction when fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (sender pad + fax sender pad) is limited to 20db. Note: to make this assignment e...

  • Page 846

    Vol.2-593 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 14. Setting i/c call abandon timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 15. Setting the communication speed for lan interface note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. ...

  • Page 847

    Vol.2-594 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 17. Setting one time password for security note: the designated one time password cannot be applied when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this one time password setting. 18. Setting host name of mg-cot card note: the designate...

  • Page 848

    Vol.2-595 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 21. Setting qos for sip signaling session • when tos is selected in qos setting type: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte...

  • Page 849

    Vol.2-596 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data in tos field for diffserv is shown below: note: the designated signaling qos cannot be appli...

  • Page 850

    Vol.2-597 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 23. Setting dsp smooth pad mode note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 24. Setting rtp start port note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart befor...

  • Page 851

    Vol.2-598 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 25. Setting vlan note: the maximum number of vlan is one. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 26. Setting the warning tone for lan failure note: to make this assignment effect...

  • Page 852

    Vol.2-599 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 28. Setting e911 connection signal detection timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 29. Setting e911 reception signal detection timer 30. Setting auto polarity note: to mak...

  • Page 853

    Vol.2-600 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] show command 1. To show codec coefficiency 2. To show configuration data list mg-cot> show codec_coef_mg ch00=0 ch01=3 ch02=3 ch03=0 ch04=0 ch05=3 the current setting is shown. Mg-cot > show configdata [system] register_mode=tp file_info=2006.07.14 [ip] ow...

  • Page 854

    Vol.2-601 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 3. To show dhcp setting 4. To show dns server note: the designated dns server cannot refer when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before ex- ecuting this dns server shown. 5. To show drs address and port number note: the designated drs cannot r...

  • Page 855

    Vol.2-602 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 7. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 8. To show dtmf cutoff timer 9. To show training feature mode of echo canceller 10. To show fax enable timer 11. To show fax receiver pad value 12. To show fax sender pad value 13. To show health check re...

  • Page 856

    Vol.2-603 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 14. To show i/c call abandon timer 15. To show communication speed for lan interface 16. To show ip address, net mask, and default gateway 17. To show one time password for security note: the designated one time password cannot refer when proprietary proto...

  • Page 857

    Vol.2-604 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 20. To show signaling port number for sip note: the designated signaling port number cannot refer when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this signaling port number shown. 21. To show qos setting for sip signaling session note: ...

  • Page 858

    Vol.2-605 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 23. To show dsp smooth pad mode 24. To show rtp start port 25. To show operating status of mg-cot card • when proprietary protocol mode is used mg-cot > show smooth_pad_mg smooth pad mode is 3. The current setting is shown. Mg-cot > show startport rtp star...

  • Page 859

    Vol.2-606 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] • when sp mode is used note: the designated operating status cannot refer when sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or later. 26. To show the version information mg-cot(sip) > show status register mode : sp mac address : 00:30:13:6e:f4:e4 link state : up spe...

  • Page 860

    Vol.2-607 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 27. To show vlan setting 28. To show warning tone control 29. To show rvs mode (for australia) 30. To show e911 connection signal detection timer 31. To show e911answer signal detection timer 32. To show auto polarity mg-cot > show vlan vlan is enable devi...

  • Page 861

    Vol.2-608 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] ping command f to check the connection status of network: mc(sip)> ping p1 mc(sip)> ping 100.100.100.4 ping 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=0. Time=0. Ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=1. Time=0. Ms 64 bytes from 1...

  • Page 862

    Vol.2-609 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] delete command f to delete the vlan setting note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom note: when the error occurs during s...

  • Page 863

    Vol.2-610 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server note: configuration data file is uploaded to the tftp server. Reboot command f to reboot the mg-cot card note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mg-cot card...

  • Page 864

    Vol.2-611 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] exit command f to exit the maintenance command [normal occasion] note: when the “exit” command is executed on the os prompt ( → ), key operation turns unaccepted. In this case, press the ctrl + c keys simultaneously to display the os prompt ( → ) again. [w...

  • Page 865

    Vol.2-612 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] init (clear) command f to initialize the configuration data to factory default value note: the designated operating status cannot refer when sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver.3.0.0.0 or later. • sp-3875 6mg cot prog-a ver 3.0.0.0 or earlier mg-cot > init configda...

  • Page 866

    Vol.2-613 mg-cot card [sca-6cota/sca-6cotc] 9.4.2 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. Download file ...

  • Page 867

    Vol.2-614 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10. Mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.1 general 10.1.1 what is mg-cot? Mg-cot has a function of media gateway (mg) which is an interface between ip network and analog pstn line. Also an analog terminal for exclusive use of power failure transfer (pft) can be connected thro...

  • Page 868

    Vol.2-615 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.1.2 function overview basic connection mg has six analog ports and connects ip network and pstn. Any ip terminals and sip terminals can orig- inate and receive call to/from analog pstn line. Mg-cot in the system note: for proprietary protocol mode, internal phi-b...

  • Page 869

    Vol.2-616 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] power failure transfer (pft) mg-cot has six mg (cot) ports and one pft port. Pft connects the pft port to one mg port (mg0) directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to pstn network and then call origination to c.O. Line become...

  • Page 870

    Vol.2-617 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] paging stations can page anyone over the speaker connected to mg-cot. Three types of paging features are supported by mg-cot’s paging. For operation procedures refer to ser- vice conditions of paging access [p-1] and paging transfer [p-10] in data programming man- u...

  • Page 871

    Vol.2-618 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] after holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-delay system, delay system, and paging transfer supervision is available. Mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mg-cot (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) hold the station/trunk...

  • Page 872

    Vol.2-619 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] by dialing the access code of priority paging, the station/attcon is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. Interrupted mr. Oo..... Amplifier speaker mg-cot (1) (2) (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) dial the access code o...

  • Page 873

    Vol.2-620 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] analog caller id caller id information (calling number and calling name) can be displayed on called terminals (dterm and dtermip stations with lcd) for the calls via caller id-compliant analog c.O. Line. Follow the service conditions below: (a) firmware sp3875 6mgco...

  • Page 874

    Vol.2-621 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] (e) when caller id has not been received, any caller information cannot be displayed. (f) calling name is not displayed even when calling name has been received but calling number has not been informed or cannot be displayed. Note: refer to data programming manual -...

  • Page 875

    Vol.2-622 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] trunk line appearance-d connecting an analog c.O. Trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows dtermip user to directly access c.O. Line of mg-cot by pressing corresponding line key on dtermip station, without dialing ac- cess code. Dtermip station can a...

  • Page 876

    Vol.2-623 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] (h) distinctive ringing is not activated when incoming call terminates. (i) analog telephone cannot answer the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d. (j) when dtermip station answers and holds the incoming call of trunk line appearance-d, analog telephone station...

  • Page 877

    Vol.2-624 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension mg-cot card is mounted on 1u-mpc module (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Size of mg-cot card in 1u-mpc unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") mg1 mg3 mg5 mg0 mg2 mg4 alm pwr ether opera tion mg0 mg2 mg4 pft mg...

  • Page 878

    Vol.2-625 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 2. Specifications mg-cot specifications function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) g.723.1 6.3 k (bps):...

  • Page 879

    Vol.2-626 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] mg specifications function specification note number of lines six lines rj-11 modular jack 6 ports signaling method loop start reverse detection supported available in idle or loop closing state. Caller id supported available for firmware sp3875 6mgcot prog-a issue ...

  • Page 880

    Vol.2-627 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front view of mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] connectors and switch on front panel name function note ether connector lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negot...

  • Page 881

    Vol.2-628 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] lamps on the front panel lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm red lights when power failure is detected off normal operation ether link green lights when establishing port link note: lights when physically connected to ip networ...

  • Page 882

    Vol.2-629 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] lamp indication and status lamp indication discription of status legend l: lights fr: flashes rapidly (60int) fs: flashes slowly (30int) × : remains off r: rotary lights mg on line operation mg0 mg1 mg2 mg3 mg4 mg5 × × × × × × × start the boot program × r r r r r r ...

  • Page 883

    Vol.2-630 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] rear view of mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure.) connect...

  • Page 884

    Vol.2-631 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 4. Port number the following provides the port number to be used in this system. • when using proprietary protocol mode when using sip mode note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the network because both of which are part of...

  • Page 885

    Vol.2-632 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 5. Available channels when using sip mode the number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by mg-cot in sip mode. Therefore, adjustments will be needed, such as placing unnecessary channels into the make busy status. See voip encrypt...

  • Page 886

    Vol.2-633 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 2. Firmware program the following program is installed in mg-cot [sca-6cotb]. • installed firmware: 3. Environmental requirements • temperature: 0 ° c~40 ° c (32 ° f~104 ° f) • humidity: 20%~90% (not condensing) • main source power: ac100v/120v/230v/240v (50/60 hz) ...

  • Page 887

    Vol.2-634 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.1.5 service conditions before the use of mg-cot, note the following conditions. Service conditions for proprietary protocol mode and sip mode 1. When the setting of asydl, sys1, index880, bit 1 (internal phi-pri/bri)/bit 3 (internal phe) is modified, initialize t...

  • Page 888

    Vol.2-635 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 16. There are following restrictions when using remote access to system [r-2] or automated attendant [a-82]. • if virtual register cannot be seized, physical register is seized. (i.E. Rt=902 ort, rt=903 irt, rt=906 pbr for automated attendant service, rt=933 crt) • ...

  • Page 889

    Vol.2-636 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 4. System messages (33-r) are output when packet transmission failure is detected in internal phi-bri. 5. Internal phi-bri and mg are connected via udp/ip. Therefore, routine diagnosis is performed by pro- prietary protocol procedure. System message (33-s) is output...

  • Page 890

    Vol.2-637 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when timer timeout of control packet transmission between internal phe and sp-phi occurs eight times consecutively, system message (33-r) is output to the internal phe accommodated location (lens). 8. Sr-mgc supports mg-cot card..

  • Page 891

    Vol.2-638 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg-cot. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 10.2.1 how to set mg-cot mg-cot card is used by mounting on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box) . Step 1 insert mg-cot ca...

  • Page 892

    Vol.2-639 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg-cot. Mg-cot provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • connection to pstn • connection of analog telephone • serial port connection to maintenance console • connection to audio e...

  • Page 893

    Vol.2-640 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows a cable configura- tion example. Mg-cot cable connection diagram (front) note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpose φ 3.5 mono-aural ear ...

  • Page 894

    Vol.2-641 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] step 1 ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mg-cot. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety measures against static electricit...

  • Page 895

    Vol.2-642 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] step 2 connect a maintenance console (pc) to console connector using console cable. Step 3 connect analog terminals to pft connector on the front panel. Note: pstn lines and lan cables are connected in section 10.3 startup mg-cot and basic tests . Do not con- nect t...

  • Page 896

    Vol.2-643 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3 startup mg-cot and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. When sip mode 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg-cot card data assignment ...

  • Page 897

    Vol.2-644 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please make sure...

  • Page 898

    Vol.2-645 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] cdn 72 mfsp sending speed (0-15) cdn 73 kppt duration of kp sending (0-15) cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) cdn 15 lsg = 0 loop start is available note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk dev...

  • Page 899

    Vol.2-646 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mg (6cot). Note: whe...

  • Page 900

    Vol.2-647 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line5 (lv5). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mg (6cot). Setting of service type exists (signa...

  • Page 901

    Vol.2-648 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] size setting of pad click this check box when setting data for pad value of mg. Pad information this parameter is available only when the check box of “setting of pad” is on. No = 1: the pad value of mg when dtermip/soft phone/inaset is connected no = 2: the pad val...

  • Page 902

    Vol.2-649 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] reliability: place a checkmark to set high reliability to on. Min cost: place a checkmark to set cost precedence to on. Priority: specify the diffserv code point in the range of 0-63. Note: default settings (ip precedence, priority=6, low delay=off, throughput=off, ...

  • Page 903

    Vol.2-650 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • it is not necessary to assign the payload type/size to the whole priorities. Specifying the first priority only is allowed. • for available payload type/payload size, refer to peripheral equipment description, volume 1, chapter 2, “3.1.1 bandwidth required for voi...

  • Page 904

    Vol.2-651 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] mg-cot card can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. When registering to sp-phi, it works using sip, which is called sip mode. Here explains mg-cot card data assignment for sip mode. When reg- istering to internal phi-bri (proprietary protocol mode), ...

  • Page 905

    Vol.2-652 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] cdn 74 kpst pause after kp sending (0-15) cdn 75 mt step code (0/1) cdn 15 lsg = 0 loop start is available note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circut card, mg, or vs-32. Arti: assignment of trunk applicatio...

  • Page 906

    Vol.2-653 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] mbtk: make-busy of trunk assign the idle/busy status of trunks for virtual speech channel. Rt route number tk trunk number mb make-busy information mb = 0 (make idle) amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) assign the information of mg (6cot). Note: whe...

  • Page 907

    Vol.2-654 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: check all of the boxes for line0 (lv0) - line5 (lv5). This data setting is available only when trunk data is assigned by arti/atrk command. Ch mg channel number assign “0”. Lens assign virtual speech channel for mg line number 0. Setting of service type exists...

  • Page 908

    Vol.2-655 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] size setting of pad click this check box when setting data for pad value of mg. Pad information this parameter is available only when the check box of “setting of pad” is on. No = 1: the pad value of mg when dtermip/soft phone/inaset is connected no = 2: the pad val...

  • Page 909

    Vol.2-656 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] payload size: select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the payload type. •no data •10 milliseconds •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds note: • if payload type g.711 is specified to more than two priorities in pri1 ...

  • Page 910

    Vol.2-657 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] one time password one time password to be used for authentication procedure [4-10 digits with numerics, - (hyphen), . (period)] note 1 available period expiration date of one time password (no limit/1-7 days) note: authentication data assignment is used only for sip...

  • Page 911

    Vol.2-658 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • p...

  • Page 912

    Vol.2-659 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of mg-cot. Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg-cot card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the leds indicate...

  • Page 913

    Vol.2-660 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The following explains the procedure by each mo...

  • Page 914

    Vol.2-661 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] assign the configuration data for mg-cot card in proprietary protocol mode. About the configuration data for sip mode, refer to page 665 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. Step 2: type “usrconsole” at th...

  • Page 915

    Vol.2-662 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg-cot card, default gateway, and the telepho- ny server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg-cot card side. Ip addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared in dh...

  • Page 916

    Vol.2-663 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 1 • ip address of mg-cot card (own address) note: when the dhcp is set to “enable”, ip addresses assigned here cannot take ...

  • Page 917

    Vol.2-664 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual..

  • Page 918

    Vol.2-665 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] assign the configuration data for mg-cot card in sip mode. About the configuration data for proprietary pro- tocol mode, refer to page 661 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The system requires a one-tim...

  • Page 919

    Vol.2-666 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] step 4: set the basic data for connecting network by “setup sp” command depending on your lan envi- ronment. Enter “setup sp” following the prompt. Step 5: assign whether to use dhcp server and dns server. The required setting differs whether to use each server firs...

  • Page 920

    Vol.2-667 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is used in this setting, because mg-cot card automatically gets ip address from dhcp server, it is not required to set ip address and default gateway on mg-cot card. Set the ethernet speed as follows. Ethernet speed: --- ethernet speed set --- cur...

  • Page 921

    Vol.2-668 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address of dns server • ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card (own address) • host name of mg-cot card • ip address of default gateway • host name of sip server • eth...

  • Page 922

    Vol.2-669 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 4. Default gateway ip address 5. Host name of sip server 6. Ethernet speed --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 change default gateway? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input new default gateway : 10.41.1.254 --- sip server host n...

  • Page 923

    Vol.2-670 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is not used & dns server is not used set the following data on mg-cot card. • ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card (own address) • ip address of default gateway • ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note 1 • ethernet speed no...

  • Page 924

    Vol.2-671 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 3. Ip address, port number, and host name of sip server 4. Ethernet speed step 7: save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server/ip address/port number/host name: ...

  • Page 925

    Vol.2-672 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mg-cot card to the lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting the mg-cot card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the followings: - is there other device having the same ip address ov...

  • Page 926

    Vol.2-673 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] step 2: connect c.O. Lines to mg0-mg5. Connecting c.O. Lines step 3: check the lamp indication on the front panel of mg-cot card. - pwr lamp: lights green - alarm lamp: off - on line lamp: off - operation mg0~mg5: flashes green note: after the data assignment (mg-co...

  • Page 927

    Vol.2-674 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.3.6 basic test procedures [1] basic connection test start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the link lamp lighting green? *initial setting on mg-cot is started. *registration established. *initial setting between mg-cot and mgc (telephony server) is starte...

  • Page 928

    Vol.2-675 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. • check the system message. 1. Display the system message using dftd command. 2. See the system message and confirm whether...

  • Page 929

    Vol.2-676 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] pft ⇔ mg0 before the test, connect c.O. Lines to mg0 and analog terminals to pft. (a) perform this test before mg-cot card initialization has been completed. Step 1: turn off the mg-cot card by switching off the power switch (down) on the rear panel of mg- cot card....

  • Page 930

    Vol.2-677 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.4 operation and maintenance 10.4.1 how to use maintenance command on a serial connection client (e.G. Hyperterminal), start up the program and uses maintenance command. Enter “usrconsole” after the os prompt (->). When the maintenance command is started, the foll...

  • Page 931

    Vol.2-678 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] an example of indication is shown below: mg-id: xxxxxxxxxxxx boot program version : sp3839 sh7751r cboot-1 prog-a [04.00.00.00] main program version : sp3948 6mgcot prog-a [01.00.00.00] /w pkg information : ca-cc07 001 h/w pkg information : ca-cc08 001 dsp informati...

  • Page 932

    Vol.2-679 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. Mg-cot> set ipaddress 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1 2 3 4 1: command 2: sub command 3: parameter 1 (p1) 4: parameter 2 (p2) note: t...

  • Page 933

    Vol.2-680 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] maintenance command for mg-cot card the maintenance console uses the commands listed in. Command no. Sub command function remarks setup 1 tp set up network environment for mg-cot card proprietary protocol mode. 2 sp set up network environment for mg-cot card sip mod...

  • Page 934

    Vol.2-681 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] command no. Sub command function remarks show 1 codec_coef_mg to show codec coefficiency 2 cnfigdata to show configuration data list 3 dhcp to show dhcp setting 4 dns_sw to show dns server 5 drsaddress to show drs address and port number 6 drstos to show tos setting...

  • Page 935

    Vol.2-682 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] command sub command function remarks put configdata to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server command sub command function remarks reboot - to reboot the mg-cot card command sub command function remarks exit - to exit the maintenance command command...

  • Page 936

    Vol.2-683 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (mg-cot>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the requir...

  • Page 937

    Vol.2-684 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] setup command 1. Set up network environment for mg-cot card proprietary protocol mode. This command is used to setup the basic data for proprietary protocol mode. Setting display differs whether dhcp server is used or not. Assign the required network data following ...

  • Page 938

    Vol.2-685 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when dhcp server is not used: note 1: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note 2: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduct...

  • Page 939

    Vol.2-686 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note 3: follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Note 4: follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. Input (y:ok / n:change / q:quit) : n enter “n”. Change list. Dhcp --- input :1 own ipaddress --- input ...

  • Page 940

    Vol.2-687 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 2. Set up network environment for mg-cot card sip mode this command is used to setup the basic data for sip mode. Setting display differs whether dhcp server and dns server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialo...

  • Page 941

    Vol.2-688 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] f setting dns server ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. F setting ip address and subnet mask of mg-cot card: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. F setting host na...

  • Page 942

    Vol.2-689 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] f setting default gateway ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 change default gateway? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input new default gateway: 10.41...

  • Page 943

    Vol.2-690 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] f setting host name of sip server: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server and host name: sip server 1 2 3 : : 20 host name change sip server information? [y...

  • Page 944

    Vol.2-691 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devic...

  • Page 945

    Vol.2-692 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] f setting ethernet speed: f save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. --- ethernet speed set --- current lan speed: auto change lan speed? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input new speed [1(auto)/2(100m)/3(10...

  • Page 946

    Vol.2-693 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] set command 1. Setting codec coefficiency note: the setting values are shown in the following table. Set appropriate values. Setting value “2” is assigned when the product is shipped. Change the data if required. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save...

  • Page 947

    Vol.2-694 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 4. Setting dns server note: the designated dns server cannot be applied when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this dns server setting. Note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown ...

  • Page 948

    Vol.2-695 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 6. Setting tos of drs session note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: note: the designated drs tos cannot be applied when sp m...

  • Page 949

    Vol.2-696 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 7. Setting dsp echo canceller for fax communication note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 8. Setting dtmf cutoff timer note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and r...

  • Page 950

    Vol.2-697 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 11. Setting fax receiver pad value note: the faxrecvpad_mg command assigns the value to decrease the fax signal level in the receiver (pstn to ip) direction when the fax signal is detected. Note: the total pad value (receiver pad + fax receiver pad) is limited to 20...

  • Page 951

    Vol.2-698 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 15. Setting the communication speed for lan interface note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting ...

  • Page 952

    Vol.2-699 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 18. Setting host name of mg-cot card note: the designated host name cannot be applied when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this host name setting. Note: host name cannot be used when dhcp is assigned enable or dns is assigned disable. ...

  • Page 953

    Vol.2-700 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: • when diffserv is selected in qos setting type: note: the result of data setting is s...

  • Page 954

    Vol.2-701 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 22. Setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note: the designated sip server cannot be applied when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this sip server setting. Note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press en...

  • Page 955

    Vol.2-702 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 24. Setting rtp start port note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: port number must be the even number. Rtcp port number is assigned to start port number + 1. (odd num- ber) 25. Setti...

  • Page 956

    Vol.2-703 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand..

  • Page 957

    Vol.2-704 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] show command 1. To show codec coefficiency 2. To show configuration data list mg-cot> show codec_coef_mg ch00=0 ch01=3 ch02=3 ch03=0 ch04=0 ch05=3 the current setting is shown. Mg-cot > show configdata [system] register_mode=tp file_info=2006.07.14 [ip] own_addr=0.0...

  • Page 958

    Vol.2-705 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 3. To show dhcp setting 4. To show dns server note: the designated dns server cannot refer when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before ex- ecuting this dns server shown. 5. To show drs address and port number note: the designated drs cannot refer when ...

  • Page 959

    Vol.2-706 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 7. To show dsp echo canceller for fax communication 8. To show dtmf cutoff timer 9. To show training feature mode of echo canceller 10. To show fax enable timer 11. To show fax receiver pad value 12. To show fax sender pad value 13. To show health check receive time...

  • Page 960

    Vol.2-707 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 14. To show i/c call abandon timer 15. To show communication speed for lan interface 16. To show ip address, net mask, and default gateway 17. To show one time password for security note: the designated one time password cannot refer when proprietary protocol mode. ...

  • Page 961

    Vol.2-708 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 20. To show signaling port number for sip note: the designated signaling port number cannot refer when proprietary protocol mode. Assign the sp mode before executing this signaling port number shown. 21. To show qos setting for sip signaling session note: the design...

  • Page 962

    Vol.2-709 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 23. To show dsp smooth pad mode 24. To show rtp start port 25. To show operating status of mg-cot card • when proprietary protocol mode is used mg-cot > show smooth_pad_mg smooth pad mode is 3. The current setting is shown. Mg-cot > show startport rtp start port num...

  • Page 963

    Vol.2-710 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] • when sp mode is used note: the designated operating status cannot refer when sp-3948 6mg cot prog-a ver.1.0.0.0 or later. 26. To show the version information mg-cot(sip) > show status register mode : sp mac address : 00:30:13:6e:f4:e4 link state : up speed : 100mb...

  • Page 964

    Vol.2-711 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 27. To show vlan setting 28. To show warning tone control 29. To show auto polarity mg-cot > show vlan vlan is enable device id cos ipaddress subnetmask vlan1 1 0 10.4.128.5 255.255.255.0 the current vlan setting is shown. Mg-cot > show warning_tone warning tone con...

  • Page 965

    Vol.2-712 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] ping command f to check the connection status of network: mc(sip)> ping p1 mc(sip)> ping 100.100.100.4 ping 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=0. Time=0. Ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=1. Time=0. Ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100...

  • Page 966

    Vol.2-713 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] delete command f to delete the vlan setting note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Save command f to save the configuration data to flash rom note: when the error occurs during saving, con...

  • Page 967

    Vol.2-714 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] put command f to upload configuration data file to specified tftp server note: configuration data file is uploaded to the tftp server. Reboot command f to reboot the mg-cot card note: the screen returns to the prompt of the maintenance command (mg-cot card, in defau...

  • Page 968

    Vol.2-715 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] exit command f to exit the maintenance command [normal occasion] note: when the “exit” command is executed on the os prompt ( → ), key operation turns unaccepted. In this case, press the ctrl + c keys simultaneously to display the os prompt ( → ) again. [when config...

  • Page 969

    Vol.2-716 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] init (clear) command f to initialize the configuration data to factory default value note: the designated operating status cannot refer when sp-3948 6mg cot prog-a ver.1.0.0.0 or later. Mg-cot > init configdata *** warning !! *** this command is for initialize confi...

  • Page 970

    Vol.2-717 mg-cot card [sca-6cotb] 10.4.2 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. Download file of system...

  • Page 971

    Vol.2-718 mg-bri 11. Mg-bri 11.1 general media gateway - basic rate interface (mg-bri) provides the gateway function for isdn network and ip net- work and it is available to accommodate a maximum of two isdn lines. Mg-bri also can connect one emer- gency telephone line to be used in case mg function...

  • Page 972

    Vol.2-719 mg-bri note 2: sp-phi, which can be used as registration destination for mg-bri, is accommodated in, and controlled by mph. Mph needs internal phe to be activated. Therefore, if you want to use sp-phi as registration des- tination for mg-bri, data assignment for mph and internal phe is nec...

  • Page 973

    Vol.2-720 mg-bri - mg-bri cannot go over through other country’s isdn specification as shown in the figure below. 2. Virtual speech channel occupies one group. One group will be occupied and that group can only be used as virtual speech channel of mg-bri even when only one channel is assigned in tha...

  • Page 974

    Vol.2-721 mg-bri note 1: this section shows the maximum number of mg-bris to be accommodated when two lines are accommo- dated to mg-bri, the amount shown here will be doubled when only one line is accommodated to a mg- bri. Note 2: the maximum number of channels to be controlled simultaneously here...

  • Page 975

    Vol.2-722 mg-bri bit0). The module needs to be reset or initialized after the system data was modified by using the adpm command. 16. Re-routing following the lcr feature is performed if isdn line or udp/ip is faulty. 17. For internal phi-bri, the port number used for mg-bri can be changed using the...

  • Page 976

    Vol.2-723 mg-bri 26. Use dimg command to display the mg registration status. 11.3.2 service conditions for mg external hold-tone 1. This feature is effective when “music-on-hold service” is effective (asyd sys1 index64 bit7=1). 2. Each mg-bri can choose which hold-tone to send out per each equipment...

  • Page 977

    Vol.2-724 mg-bri 11.3.3 service conditions for mg-bri emergency telephone 1. If one of the following occurs, mg-bri is placed in emergency telephone mode. (a) when communication of the telephony server and mg-bri was lost and health check was timed-out (approximately 150 seconds) within the mg-bri. ...

  • Page 978

    Vol.2-725 mg-bri 10. When mg-bri is in online status, mode currently being in use can be confirmed by using the dimg command..

  • Page 979

    Vol.2-726 mg-bri 11.4 function 11.4.1 outer view of mg-bri details of the system and its general information is described in the diagram below. Front view back view note 1: emergency telephone (isdn telephone or ta + analog telephone) will be connected to line 0 directly when mg-bri does not operate...

  • Page 980

    Vol.2-727 mg-bri 11.4.2 specification 1. Information of mg-bri is shown in the table below. Function specification isdn network side (line [s/t point] interface) number of port 2 ports connector type rj-45 modular × 2 layer 1 specification conforming i.430 of itu-t recommendation conforming ets300 0...

  • Page 981

    Vol.2-728 mg-bri 2. Port numbers used for mg-bri is shown in the table below. Note 1: available to modify the data only when using pcpro. Port num- ber pass function how to change the port number 1024- peer-to-peer h.245 designated by os 1024-65534 peer-to-peer rtp default value can be changed from ...

  • Page 982

    Vol.2-729 mg-bri 11.5 installation this section explains the installation and cable connection of mg-bri. Be sure to take measures to work with anti-static electricity. 11.5.1 installation method • horizontal installation 11.5.2 cable connecting diagram general description of cable connection for mg...

  • Page 983

    Vol.2-730 mg-bri note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpose 3.5 φ mono-aural ear phone jack. Adjustment of output level for external hold tone source needs to be started from low and to higher. To avoid the over-signal. The tuning of volume level sent is to be ...

  • Page 984

    Vol.2-731 mg-bri note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less then 10 Ω ) . As mg-bri has interface to access isdn network, if the line cable is struck by lightning directly, the lightnin...

  • Page 985

    Vol.2-732 mg-bri all cable connection for this section is completed, proceed to 4. Startup mg-bri and basic tests section. Note: connecting isdn lines and lan cables is explained later. Ether ema tel line 0 line 1 rs-232c reset music external maintenance pc to ground (below 10 ohm) power cable backs...

  • Page 986

    Vol.2-733 mg-bri 11.6 startup mg-bri and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. When registering to sp-phi 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg-bri data assignment wh...

  • Page 987

    Vol.2-734 mg-bri 11.6.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Note: this equipment needs to be considered beforehand either internal phi-bri or sp-phi is set as the regis- tration destination. Please make sure details of “cons...

  • Page 988

    Vol.2-735 mg-bri note 3: effective when interface type of route class data is int:6. Artd: assignment of route class data assign the route class data of virtual speech channel. Cdn65(int): interface specification for isdn. Note: refer to artd section in the command manual for your country’s specific...

  • Page 989

    Vol.2-736 mg-bri line=0/1 (mg line number) ch=0/1 (mg channel number) lens: accommodation location of virtual speech channel note 1 note 1: make sure that lens number assigned here already has been assigned by the atrk command data. Setting of service type exists (signalling packet) qos setting of m...

  • Page 990

    Vol.2-737 mg-bri ip precedence: priority: assign value within 0-7. - low delay (add a check if required) - through put (add a check if required) - reliability (add a check if required) - min cost (add a check if required) diffserv priority: assign value within 00-63. Setting of pad: click this check...

  • Page 991

    Vol.2-738 mg-bri mg-bri can be registered to either internal phi-bri or sp-phi. Here explains mg-bri data assignment for registering to sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-bri, refer to page 734 . [1] internal phe data assignment when mg-bri is registered to sp-phi, mph is used to control sp-ph...

  • Page 992

    Vol.2-739 mg-bri artd: assignment of route class data assign the route class data of virtual speech channel. Cdn65(int): interface specification for isdn. Note: refer to artd section in the command manual for your country’s specification. Cdn60 (tc/ec)=1 (tc) cdn114 (dch)=1 (channel integration enab...

  • Page 993

    Vol.2-740 mg-bri mbtk: make-busy of trunk cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb=0 make-busy cancel amgil: assignment of media gateway information (ldm) note: make sure to assign in order of artd → amgil. Assign mg-bri. Mg-id: mac address of mg (6 byte) fun...

  • Page 994

    Vol.2-741 mg-bri setting of service type exists (signalling packet) qos setting of mg signalling path (tos value to be used by signalling control of mg-bri) music on hold exists : external music on hold : internal music on hold1 : internal music on hold2 external music on hold gain adjustment 0: 0db...

  • Page 995

    Vol.2-742 mg-bri - min cost (add a check if required) diffserv priority: assign value within 00-63. Setting of pad: click this check box when setting data for pad value of mg pad information: this parameter is available only when the check box of “setting of pad” is on. No = 1: the pad value of mg w...

  • Page 996

    Vol.2-743 mg-bri 11.6.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to rs-232c connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • port: com1 (depend...

  • Page 997

    Vol.2-744 mg-bri 11.6.3 power on step 1 turn on the power of mg-bri. Make sure that external maintenance terminal (pc) is connected to mg-bri and turn on the power of mg-bri. Lights come on by plugging in the power supply ac adapter into the socket. (confirm that “power” lamp ignites in green.) step...

  • Page 998

    Vol.2-745 mg-bri 11.6.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-bri using proprietary protocol..

  • Page 999

    Vol.2-746 mg-bri step 1 set the configuration data, “enable/disable dhcp server”. [1] boot program will start by turning the power on or pressing the reset button in the starting mg-bri boot program.... -main menu- configuration data. --- input : 1 quit input : 1 --- [q/q] mg-bri> mg-bri>set dhcp en...

  • Page 1000

    Vol.2-747 mg-bri step 2 assign the network related data. Dhcp server “enabled” and “disabled” are explained here. Note • • when dhcp server is enabled • when dhcp server is disabled note 1: ip addresses shown here are examples. Assign the ip address that suits your network configuration for actual a...

  • Page 1001

    Vol.2-748 mg-bri • when dhcp server is enabled there is no need to assign ip address of mg-bri, default gateway or the telephony server on mg- bri side when acquiring the network information from the dhcp server, however, ip addresses listed below need to be assigned on dhcp server side. • default g...

  • Page 1002

    Vol.2-749 mg-bri • when dhcp server is disabled setting on mg-bri side is necessary. Ip addresses of the following listed items need to be assigned on mg-bri. Note 1 • default gateway • drs note 2 • mg-bri note 1: ip addresses assigned here are not effective when dhcp server has been “enabled”. Conf...

  • Page 1003

    Vol.2-750 mg-bri note 1: the mac address of mg-bri (mg-id) will be displayed after reboot do you need reboot? [y/n]:y enter “y” and reboot mg-bri..

  • Page 1004

    Vol.2-751 mg-bri 11.6.5 cable connection step 1 connect mg-bri to the lan. Insert lan cable into the “ethernet” connector lo- cated in backside of the mg-bri. “on line” lamp in front side of mg-bri will ignite in green few minutes later when all process has succeeded. Step 2 connect isdn line to mg-...

  • Page 1005

    Vol.2-752 mg-bri 11.6.6 basic test procedure [1] basic connection test step 1 is the power lamp turned on? [not turned on] • confirm that power cable is firmly inserted. • confirm that ac cable from the power socket is firmly inserted to the ac adapter. [turned on] proceed to step 2 . Step 2 is the ...

  • Page 1006

    Vol.2-753 mg-bri • confirm the system message of the telephony server side. • confirm that the mg-bri is physically connected to isdn network. Also confirm the line cable between: - mdf and mg-bri - mdf and dsu • confirm the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg-bri side. Telephony ser...

  • Page 1007

    Vol.2-754 mg-bri [b lamp of line0/1 is turned on] • either one of the b1, b2 channel is currently used. [call originated/terminated normally], [call quality is adequate] connection test is completed. [2] alarm information check • lamp check operation of mg-bri can be confirmed from the visual inspec...

  • Page 1008

    Vol.2-755 mg-bri lamp display of mg-bri (symbol): l: lit, o: off, s: slow flash (120int), f: fast flash (240int), -: don’t care st a tus lamp detail of status note power on lin e lin e 0 line 1 b d b d in itial s tartup l o s o o o fault found in self-diagnosis turn the power off → on in this circum...

  • Page 1009

    Vol.2-756 mg-bri layer 1 fault l l - s - - cable slip off/frame loss occurred in line0 (when office data exist in line0) confirm the cable connection and dsu side operation. L l - - - s cable slip off/frame loss occurred in line1 (when office data exist in line1) l l - s - s cable slip off/frame los...

  • Page 1010

    Vol.2-757 mg-bri • confirmation of the system message step 1 display the system message. Step 2 comprehend the system message and see if mg-bri is faulty or not. Repair it if needed. • 3-h (digital line warning) • 3-i (digital line failure) • 13-j (restoration from ccs link failure) • 33-r (ip pkg w...

  • Page 1011

    Vol.2-758 mg-bri [3] emergency telephone switching test the general description of the “emergency telephone” is explained below. Note: telephone terminal to be connected to ema tel will be isdn terminal or terminal adapter + analog tele- phone. The line connected directly to the isdn line using this...

  • Page 1012

    Vol.2-759 mg-bri 11.7 operation and maintenance this section explains the operation and maintenance procedure of mg-bri. Data is assigned terminal software installed in external maintenance terminal (pc). 11.7.1 how to restore config data by serial connection (local download) this config download/up...

  • Page 1013

    Vol.2-760 mg-bri • restoring config data by serial connection step 1 power off mg-bri and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to mg-bri by using a rs-232c cable. Step 3 power on mg-bri. Step 4 activate hyperterminal and set the following: bit per second:9600bps data bits:8b...

  • Page 1014

    Vol.2-761 mg-bri 11.7.2 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg-bri with a rs-232c and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - rs-232c cable and lan cable (crossover) are required. - ...

  • Page 1015

    Vol.2-762 mg-bri step 11 enter “cmd” for input step 12 enter “ipxadmin” for password. Step 13 after a prompt ( >>>set command : ) is displayed, enter “download”. Step 14 the file download mode is displayed. Input “2” (download of one program). Note: if you input “1” (download of all programs), syste...

  • Page 1016

    Vol.2-763 mg-bri 11.7.3 how to upgrading firmware by ftp (remote download) this upgrading process can be performed up to eight mg-bris at once. - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same segment with mg-bri. - ftp server has to be installed in advance. - pcpro has to be installed in adv...

  • Page 1017

    Vol.2-764 mg-bri - confirm mg-bri sip is displayed in firmware file name. If it is not in the list, create an item by clicking the insert button. Set the following attributes, and then click the ok button. After completing the above, click the insert button located in terminal information. Step 6 se...

  • Page 1018

    Vol.2-765 mg-bri note: mg-bri is capable of more than one channel, therefore, the same mg-bri might be displayed more than once. Check to see the version information by ip address and mac address. Step 15 to confirm mg-bri is properly operating with the upgraded firmware, make a call to the mg-bri. ...

  • Page 1019

    Vol.2-766 mg-bri 11.7.4 operation of configuration command configuration command is used just for modifying the default data. Data is to be modified only when it is required and to the necessary part. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The t...

  • Page 1020

    Vol.2-767 mg-bri ordinary command executes one order at a line, but for some of the command, value needs to be entered in dialogue format because some of the command cannot execute a order in a line. For example, some of the sub-command for “set” command value need to be assigned in hexadecimal. Par...

  • Page 1021

    Vol.2-768 mg-bri 11.7.6 list of command used for configuration data set: command to assign the configuration data note: the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware versions: sp-3709 bri mg bsc prog-a issue 18 or later and sp-3708 bri boot prog-a issue 8 or later. Sub-command fu...

  • Page 1022

    Vol.2-769 mg-bri note: the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware versions: sp-3709 bri mg bsc prog-a issue 18 or later and sp-3708 bri boot prog-a issue 7 or earlier. Sub-command function 1 call_hold enable mg based call retention. 2 rtp_stop_detect assign rtp receive stop de...

  • Page 1023

    Vol.2-770 mg-bri show: command to display the configuration data note: the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware version: sp-3709 bri mg bsc prog-a issue 18 or later. Sub-command function 1 config displays the list of current configuration data. 2 dhcp displays the current se...

  • Page 1024

    Vol.2-771 mg-bri save: command to save the modified configuration exit: command to exit the configuration setting mode reboot: command to reboot the mg-bri note: what to enter next can be confirmed by entering [“?”] after the command. For example, to confirm what to enter after the “set” command wil...

  • Page 1025

    Vol.2-772 mg-bri [set command] 1. Set default_gateway: assignment of default gateway. Assign the default gateway. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 2. Set dhcp: assignment of dhcp assign whether to use dhcp server or not. Note: execute the “...

  • Page 1026

    Vol.2-773 mg-bri 5. Set fax_detection_time: assignment of effective switching time for fax assign the effective switching time for fax note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 6. Set hc_rcv_timer: assignment of time-out value for telephony server h...

  • Page 1027

    Vol.2-774 mg-bri 9. Set own_ipaddressÅfassignment of ip address and subnet mask of mg-bri itself. Assignment of ip address and subnet mask of mg-bri itself. Note: assign the ip address, then subnet mask. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 10....

  • Page 1028

    Vol.2-775 mg-bri • when p1 and p2 is not specified (dialogue type entry: when ip precedence was selected) note: meaning of tos field for ip precedence type is as follows. • prec.= precedence (3bits) • d = delay (1bit) • t = throughput (1bit) • r = reliability (1bit) • c = cost (1bit) • - = not used ...

  • Page 1029

    Vol.2-776 mg-bri 12. Set smooth_pad : assignment of the smooth pad assign the smooth pad note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 13. Set pre-negotiation_port_no : assignment of port number to be used for sending/receiving h.245 pre-negotiation pac...

  • Page 1030

    Vol.2-777 mg-bri 16. Set warning_tone_control : assignment of warning tone assign whether to use warning tone when lan failure or not. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. • the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware vers...

  • Page 1031

    Vol.2-778 mg-bri • the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware versions: sp-3709 bri mg bsc prog-a issue 18 or later and sp-3708 bri boot prog-a issue 7 or earlier. 1. Call_hold : assignment of mg based call retention enable mg based call retention. Disable mg based call retent...

  • Page 1032

    Vol.2-779 mg-bri [show command] 1. Show config: display of current configuration data displays the list of current configuration data. Mg-bri>show config [config] lan_speed=auto dhcp=disable own_addr=0.0.0.0 subnet_mask=0.0.0.0 default_gateway=0.0.0.0 drs_addr1=0.0.0.0 drs_port1=3456 drs_addr2=0.0.0...

  • Page 1033

    Vol.2-780 mg-bri note: “misc_act” and “misc_0” - “misc_7” are not used. Note: “call_hold” and “rtp_stop_detect” appear when they are configured with the add value command, or when the mg-bri is running firmware version: sp-3708 bri boot prog-a issue 8 or lat- er. 2. Show dhcp: displays the current s...

  • Page 1034

    Vol.2-781 mg-bri 6. Show hc_rcv_timer: displays the current setting of time-out value for telephony server health check packet waiting process. Displays the current setting of time-out value for telephony server health check packet waiting process. 7. Show interface: displays the current setting for...

  • Page 1035

    Vol.2-782 mg-bri 11. Show signaling_qos: displays the setting status for current signaling session. Displays the setting status for current signaling session. 12. Show smooth_pad: displays the current smooth pad mode. Displays the current smooth pad mode. 13. Show pre-negotiation_port_no: displays t...

  • Page 1036

    Vol.2-783 mg-bri 16. Show warning_tone_control: displays the current setting of warning tone when lan failure. Displays the current setting of warning tone when lan failure. • the following commands are available for mg-bri with the firmware version: sp-3709 bri mg bsc prog-a issue 18 or later. 1. S...

  • Page 1037

    Vol.2-784 mg-bri [save config, exit, reboot command] 1. Save config command this command is used to save the modified configuration data to the flash card. Note: configuration data will not going to be saved when error has occurred while executing save configu- ration command. 1. Exit command this c...

  • Page 1038

    Vol.2-785 mg-bri 1. Reboot command this command is used to reboot the mg-bri. Mg-bri>reboot do you need reboot? [y/n]: y enter "y" to execute the command. [createramdrb]new file system is created attached tcp/ip interface to axdev unit 0 boot message will be displayed..

  • Page 1039

    Vol.2-786 mg-bri 11.7.7 error message error message will be displayed to force you to execute the re-registration when error has occurred during the use of configuration command. Message meaning file not found on the tftp server. Download file of system data cannot be found on tftp server. Command n...

  • Page 1040

    Vol.2-787 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12. Mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.1 general 12.1.1 what is mg(bri)? Mg(bri) is a media gateway to provide gateway function between isdn network and ip network. An mg(bri) can accommodate a maximum of two isdn lines. Mg(bri) works in sip mode and the controlli...

  • Page 1041

    Vol.2-788 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.1.2 function overview basic connection the general structure of this equipment and signaling flow are shown in the diagram below. Mg(bri) in the system note: sp-phi, which is accommodated in mph (multi protocol handler) of the telephony server, handles the c...

  • Page 1042

    Vol.2-789 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] mg external hold-tone when a station is connected to outer-office terminal through the mg(bri) and holds a call, mg(bri) out- puts hold-tone. Mg(bri) can output two kinds of hold-tones. One is mg(bri) internal hold-tone (2 kinds), which mg(bri) equips internall...

  • Page 1043

    Vol.2-790 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • mg(bri) box [mg-2bria] size of mg(bri) card in 1u-mpc 2. Specifications mg(bri) specifications function specification isdn network side (line [t point] interface) number of port 2 ports connector type rj-45 modular × 2 layer 1 specification conforms to i.430 ...

  • Page 1044

    Vol.2-791 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] mg(bri) specifications (continued) function specification note voice codec g.711 64 k (bps): pcm µ -law/a-law packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8 k (bps): cs-acelp packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.723.1 6.3 k (bps): mp-mlq/acelp pa...

  • Page 1045

    Vol.2-792 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches front view • mg(bri) card [sca-2bria] front view of mg(bri) card [sca-2bria • mg(bri) box [mg-2bria] front view of mg(bri) box [mg-2bria connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100...

  • Page 1046

    Vol.2-793 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: emergency telephone (isdn telephone or ta + analog telephone) is connected to line0 directly when mg(bri) does not operate in case of power failure, ip network failure, etc. Lamps on the front panel note: in the case of mg-2bria, alm lamp always turns o...

  • Page 1047

    Vol.2-794 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] mg(bri) lamp indication and status (symbol): l: lit, o: off, s: slow flash (120int), f: fast flash (240int), -: don’t care status lamp detail of status note pwr on li ne line0 line1 b d b d in itial s tartup l o s o o o fault found in self-diagnosis turn the po...

  • Page 1048

    Vol.2-795 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] la ye r 1 fault l l - s - - cable slip off/frame loss occurred in line0 (when office data exist in line0) confirm the cable connection and dsu side operation. L l - - - s cable slip off/frame loss occurred in line1 (when office data exist in line1) l l - s - s ...

  • Page 1049

    Vol.2-796 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] during operation l l o l - - both two channels of line 0 are in idle state normal l l s l - - one channel line 0 is in make- busy state and another in idle state normal l l f l - - both two channels of line 0 are in make-busy state normal l l l l - - either one...

  • Page 1050

    Vol.2-797 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] rear view • mg(bri) card [sca-2bria] note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure.) • ...

  • Page 1051

    Vol.2-798 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). As mg(bri) has isdn interface, if the line cable is struck by lightning directly, the ligh...

  • Page 1052

    Vol.2-799 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 4. Port numbers the table below provides information about the port numbers of the telephony server to be used in the system including mg(bri). Note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the network because both of which ar...

  • Page 1053

    Vol.2-800 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.1.4 requirements 1. Hardware requirements • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for connecting to lan. 10base-t:unshielded twisted-pair (utp) straight-through cable category 3 or higher, ...

  • Page 1054

    Vol.2-801 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.1.5 service conditions general service conditions 1. Etsi-isdn for australia is supported by assigning the system data (asydl sys1 index818 bit6=1). - etsi basic features are supported. - etsi optional features are not supported. - mg(bri) cannot go over thr...

  • Page 1055

    Vol.2-802 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 7. Isdn line can be connected both in point-to-multipoint connection or point-to-point connection. How- ever, be careful for the following. • in the case of point to point connection, the tei value is fixed to 0. • in the case of point to multi point connection...

  • Page 1056

    Vol.2-803 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 18. Codec is assigned by amgvl command (aivcl command is used when no data is assigned by amgvl command). Payload type and size needs to be assigned after confirming the setting condition of mg(bri). (contact your local nec dealer for further information.) 19. ...

  • Page 1057

    Vol.2-804 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] service conditions for mg external hold-tone 1. This feature is effective when music-on-hold service is effective (asyd sys1 index64 bit7=1). 2. Each mg(bri) can choose hold-tone to send out by amgil command. This assignment takes prece- dence over the data by ...

  • Page 1058

    Vol.2-805 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] service conditions for mg(bri) emergency telephone 1. Mg(bri) is switched to emergency telephone mode on the following conditions: • when the communication between the system and mg(bri) is disconnected and health check timer expires (approximately 150 seconds)...

  • Page 1059

    Vol.2-806 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg(bri). Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 12.2.1 how to set mg(bri) • mg(bri) card [sca-2bria] note: this figure is an example to mount a mg(bri) in the left...

  • Page 1060

    Vol.2-807 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • mg(bri) box [mg-2bria] mg(bri) box is set as the following. Be sure to place mg(bri) box on the flat surface. 12.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg(bri). Mg(bri) provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • conn...

  • Page 1061

    Vol.2-808 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. General description of cable connection for mg(bri) is explained in the diagram below. Mg(bri) cable connection diagram (front) note 1: emergency telephone: connects one emergency telephone line...

  • Page 1062

    Vol.2-809 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: do not connect lan and isdn line here. These cables are connected in section 12.3 startup mg(bri) and basic tests. Step 1: ac power cable connection connect the ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of 1u-mpc. Fix the ac power cable with the ...

  • Page 1063

    Vol.2-810 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 2: connect a maintenance terminal (pc) to console connector using console cable. Step 3: connect isdn telephone terminal to ema tel connector to be used in emergency case. * emergency telephone: isdn telephone or ta + analog telephone note: isdn lines and ...

  • Page 1064

    Vol.2-811 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.2.3 safety instructions (1) for digital interfaces, a csu/dsu may be required for proper operation. When choosing a csu/dsu, make sure that it is provided with suitable lightning protection. If this is not the case gas tube arresters as specified elsewhere i...

  • Page 1065

    Vol.2-812 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • specifications specifications of the gas tube arrester for digital line to be provided are as follows. Parameter specifications transmission bandwidth dc to 2mhz transmission loss less than 0.5db longitudinal balance more than 50db nominal decoupling resistan...

  • Page 1066

    Vol.2-813 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3 startup mg(bri) and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg(bri) data assignmet 4. Security data assignment step 1: data assignmen...

  • Page 1067

    Vol.2-814 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. [1] internal phe data assignment mg(bri) is registered to sp-phi. In this case, mph is used to control sp-phi. For the use of mph, it is requi...

  • Page 1068

    Vol.2-815 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: refer to artd section in the command manual for your country’s specification. Arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Cdn68 (vir): 2 (mg connection) cdn89 (region) 1 (etsi-isdn) *require...

  • Page 1069

    Vol.2-816 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb: 0=make-busy cancel amgil (assignment of media gateway information for ldm) note: make sure to assign in order of atrk → amgil. Assign mg(bri). Mg-id: ma...

  • Page 1070

    Vol.2-817 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] type: select “route specified” or “location id specified”. B rt (mg storing): displayed when type=route specified is selected. Used when connecting mg(bri) and mg(bri) in tandem. Assign the route number of virtual speech channel for the destination mg(bri). B l...

  • Page 1071

    Vol.2-818 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment. Make sure to delete in the order of amgil → atrk. (confirm there is no data left in amgil before deleting atrk) note: do not delete “asydl sys1 index 810 bit2” if external hold tone provided by the s...

  • Page 1072

    Vol.2-819 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows...

  • Page 1073

    Vol.2-820 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel. Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg(bri) card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the leds indicate nor...

  • Page 1074

    Vol.2-821 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server for mg(bri) using sip. Note: the s...

  • Page 1075

    Vol.2-822 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 6: assign network data according to the setting of dhcp server and dns server. • when dhcp server is enabled • when dhcp server is disabled current dns interface: enable change dns interface? [y (change)/n (current)/q (quit)]: y input new dns interface [e ...

  • Page 1076

    Vol.2-823 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • when dhcp server is enabled assign the following network data on mg(bri) side. • ethernet speed • signaling port number • rtp start port number • signaling qos • vlan 1. Ethernet speed note: duplex setting is not displayed when auto negotiation is selected. N...

  • Page 1077

    Vol.2-824 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 3. Rtp start port number note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied following the rtp start port. More than 24 o...

  • Page 1078

    Vol.2-825 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-by...

  • Page 1079

    Vol.2-826 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 2: dhcp option setting is as follows. Class: global name: not specified, but do not enter the same option name in duplicate data: ip address array: checked code: 162.

  • Page 1080

    Vol.2-827 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • when dhcp server is disabled the following listed items need to be assigned on mg(bri). • ip address of dns server (*only when dns server is used) • ip address and subnetmask of mg(bri) • host name of mg(bri) (*can be skipped when dns server is not used) • ip...

  • Page 1081

    Vol.2-828 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 3. Host name of mg(bri) 4. Ip address of default gateway note: specify the default gateway in the same subnet of mg(bri). 5. Ip address and port number of sip server see the following. 6. Host name of sip server --- host name set --- current host name: blank cu...

  • Page 1082

    Vol.2-829 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 7. Ethernet speed note: duplex setting is not displayed when auto negotiation is selected. Note: assign the proper speed adjusting the network devices (router, hub) on the destination. 8. Signaling port number note: specify the same port number assigned on sip ...

  • Page 1083

    Vol.2-830 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 9. Rtp start port number note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied following the rtp start port. More than 24 o...

  • Page 1084

    Vol.2-831 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-by...

  • Page 1085

    Vol.2-832 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: check the number of ip address saved in dhcp server is sufficient so as to get ip address of mg(bri) anytime. Note 2: dhcp option setting is as follows. Class: global name: not specified, but do not enter the same option name in duplicate data: ip addre...

  • Page 1086

    Vol.2-833 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 7: after data assignment in standard mode is completed normally, the assigned data is listed. Enter “y” and press enter key when asked to save the data. The display returns to main menu of the configuration mode. Step 8: one time password setting move on t...

  • Page 1087

    Vol.2-834 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect mg(bri) to the lan. Insert lan cable into the ethernet connector on the front panel of the mg(bri). On line lamp lights green few minutes later after connection succeeded. Step 2: connect isdn line to mg(bri). Insert line...

  • Page 1088

    Vol.2-835 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] depending on the network data acquisition status from dhcp and dns server, whether mg(bri) starts up or not varies as follows. Note 1: if the firmware issue is sp-3826 bri mg sip bsc prog-a issue 5.0 or later, if ip address of dns server, and host name of mg(br...

  • Page 1089

    Vol.2-836 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.3.6 basic test procedures operation of mg(bri) can be checked from the visual inspection of lamp display (see lamps on the front panel in section 12.1.3 on page 789 ). [1] basic connection test step 1: is the pwr lamp lighting green? [no] • check the ac powe...

  • Page 1090

    Vol.2-837 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • check the system message of the telephony server. • check the mg(bri) is physically connected to isdn network. Also confirm the line cable between; - mdf and mg(bri) - mdf and dsu • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg(bri) side. Tele...

  • Page 1091

    Vol.2-838 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] [b lamp of line0/1 lights] • either of the b1 or b2 channels is currently used. [call originated/terminated normally], [call quality is adequate] connection test is completed. [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search t...

  • Page 1092

    Vol.2-839 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] (a) test of mg(bri) before completing the initialization step 1: turn off the mg(bri) by switching off the power switch on the rear panel of 1u-mpc. Step 2: check whether call origination/termination can be executed on emergency telephone. • from the isdn termi...

  • Page 1093

    Vol.2-840 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4 operation and maintenance this section explains the operation and maintenance procedure of mg(bri). Configuration data is assigned by using maintenance console (pc). 12.4.1 how to restore config data by serial connection (local download) this config downlo...

  • Page 1094

    Vol.2-841 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • restoring config data by serial connection step 1 power off mg(bri) and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to mg(bri) by using a rs-232c cable. Step 3 power on mg(bri). Step 4 activate hyperterminal and set the following: bit per se...

  • Page 1095

    Vol.2-842 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.2 how to download tone data this tone data downloading is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg(bri) with a rj- 45/rs-232c cable. This tone data setting requires tftp server. Prepare the following: - lan cable and switching hub are required. - c...

  • Page 1096

    Vol.2-843 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 9 activate hyperterminal and set the following: bit per second: 9600bps data bits: 8bit parity: none stop bit:1bit flow control: none step 10 reboot mg(bri) (off -> on). Step 11 connect ac adapter to mg(bri) (or turn on the switch). Step 12 when the messag...

  • Page 1097

    Vol.2-844 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg(bri) with a rs-232c and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - rs-232c cable and lan cable (cros...

  • Page 1098

    Vol.2-845 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 11 enter “cmd” for input step 12 enter “ipxadmin” for password. Step 13 after a prompt ( >>>set command : ) is displayed, enter “download”. Step 14 the file download mode is displayed. Input “2” (download of one program). Note: if you input “1” (download o...

  • Page 1099

    Vol.2-846 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.4 how to upgrade firmware by ftp (remote download) this upgrading process can be performed on up to eight mg(bri)s at once. - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same segment with mg(bri). - ftp server has to be installed in advance. - pcpro h...

  • Page 1100

    Vol.2-847 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 10 click [exit] to close the command. Step 11 activate the atdl command, and then specify the following: - select an item of external server in ftp server setup. - input the ip address of ftp server. - input login name and password for logging in to ftp se...

  • Page 1101

    Vol.2-848 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] step 21 to confirm mg(bri) is operating properly with the upgraded firmware, make a call to the mg(bri). Check that you can hear rbt. Step 22 receive a call via the mg(bri), and confirm that you are able to talk to each other. Step 23 after all the tasks are co...

  • Page 1102

    Vol.2-849 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.5 how to use maintenance command configuration command is used just for modifying the default data. Data is to be modified only when it is re- quired and to the necessary part. Note: if the firmware issue is sp-3826 bri mg sip bsc prog-a issue 5.0 or later...

  • Page 1103

    Vol.2-850 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] - data: 8 bits - parity: none - stop bit: 1 - flow control: none f standard mode display changes as follows when standard mode is selected on the main menu. Standard mode displays necessary commands in order. Assign the basic network data in dialog format. --- ...

  • Page 1104

    Vol.2-851 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] first assign dhcp server and dns server setting. Assign the following network data according to your network environment. The required commands vary depending on dhcp server and dns server setting. Function dhcp interface set dns interface set dhcp server dns s...

  • Page 1105

    Vol.2-852 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: this command can be skipped. Depending on the network data acquisition status from dhcp and dns server, whether mg(bri) starts up or not varies as follows. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ...

  • Page 1106

    Vol.2-853 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 3: if the firmware issue is sp-3826 bri mg sip bsc prog-a issue 5.0 or later, if network data required for starting up mg(bri) could not be acquired from dhcp and dns server, mg(bri) will start up by using ip address of sip server registered in the configu...

  • Page 1107

    Vol.2-854 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: other displays are omitted here. Cost(0/1:0):0 precedence of lower cost in ip network 0: not specified (default) 1: specified.

  • Page 1108

    Vol.2-855 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] set: command to assign the configuration data show: command to display the configuration data sub-command function 1 default_gateway assign the ip address of default gateway. 2 dhcp_sv assign whether to use dhcp server or not. 3 dns_ipaddrss assign the ip addre...

  • Page 1109

    Vol.2-856 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] save: command to save the modified configuration exit: command to exit the configuration setting mode reboot: command to reboot the mg(bri) 6 fax_detection_time displays the current setting of effective timer for fax switching. 7 hc_rcv_timer displays the curre...

  • Page 1110

    Vol.2-857 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] what to enter next can be confirmed by entering [“?”] after the command. For example, to confirm what to enter after the “set” command will be [“set (command name)” + “?”]. To confirm the parameter after the sub- command, it will be [“set (command name)” + “own...

  • Page 1111

    Vol.2-858 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] this maintenance command is available for sp-3826 bri mg sip bsc prog-a issue 5.0 or later. Configura- tion data can be registered on line without turning off and on the power or pressing reset switch to start a boot program. Run terminal software (e.G. Hyperte...

  • Page 1112

    Vol.2-859 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: delay(0/1): 0 precedence of low delay in ip network 0: not specified (default) 1:...

  • Page 1113

    Vol.2-860 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] setup set: command to assign the configuration data sub-command function 1 sp setup command sub-command function 1 call_hold assign whether to use mg based call retention or not. 2 default_gateway assign the ip address of default gateway. 3 dhcp_sv assign wheth...

  • Page 1114

    Vol.2-861 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] show: command to display the configuration data 22 vlan assign the tag vlan information. 23 warning_tone_control assign whether to use warning tone when lan failure or not. Sub-command function 1 call_hold display the current setting of mg based call retention....

  • Page 1115

    Vol.2-862 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] save: command to save the modified configuration init: command to initialize the configuration data to factory default value: reboot: command to reboot the mg(bri) exit: command to exit the configuration setting mode 24 warning_tone_control displays the current...

  • Page 1116

    Vol.2-863 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] what to enter next can be confirmed by entering [“?”] after the command. For example, to confirm what to enter after the “set” command will be [“set (command name)” + “?”]. To confirm the parameter after the sub- command, it will be [“set (command name)” + “own...

  • Page 1117

    Vol.2-864 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.6 standard mode note: data setting in this section is an example. Assign the data adjusting your network configuration. F dhcp interface set assign whether to use dhcp server. F dns interface set assign whether to use dns server. F ethernet speed set assig...

  • Page 1118

    Vol.2-865 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: duplex setting is not displayed when auto negotiation is selected. Note 2: assign the proper speed adjusting the network devices (router, hub) on the destination. F signaling port number set assign the port number of phi signaling [phi = internal contro...

  • Page 1119

    Vol.2-866 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied following the rtp start port. More than 24 of consecutive vacant port...

  • Page 1120

    Vol.2-867 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] when i: ip precedence is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result...

  • Page 1121

    Vol.2-868 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f vlan information set assign the vlan data. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0 is network address, improper) - ip address 176.16...

  • Page 1122

    Vol.2-869 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f ethernet speed set assign the lan interface data. Note: duplex setting is not displayed when auto negotiation is selected. Note: assign the proper speed adjusting the network devices (router, hub) on the destination. F signaling port number set assign the por...

  • Page 1123

    Vol.2-870 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f rtp start port number set assign the rtp start port number. Note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied followi...

  • Page 1124

    Vol.2-871 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] when i: ip precedence is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result...

  • Page 1125

    Vol.2-872 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f vlan information set assign the vlan data. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0 is network address, improper) - ip address 176.16...

  • Page 1126

    Vol.2-873 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] assign the ip address of dns server. F ip address & subnetmask set assign the ip address and subnet mask of mg(bri). Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255....

  • Page 1127

    Vol.2-874 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] change host name? [y (change)/n (current)/ q(quit)]: y asked whether to change the displayed data. Y: to change the displayed data n: not change q: quit standard mode is there the host name? [y/n]: y asked whether to use host name. Y: use host name n: not use h...

  • Page 1128

    Vol.2-875 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f default gateway ip address set assign the ip address of default gateway. Note: specify the default gateway in the same subnet of mg(bri). --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 current data setting is displayed. Change default...

  • Page 1129

    Vol.2-876 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f sip server host name set assign the host name of sip server. Note 1 note 1: sip server refers to the telephony server. F ethernet speed set assign the lan interface data. --- sip server host name set --- current sip server and host name: sip server host name ...

  • Page 1130

    Vol.2-877 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: duplex setting is not displayed when auto negotiation is selected. Note: assign the proper speed adjusting the network devices (router, hub) on the destination. F signaling port number set assign the port number of phi signaling [phi = internal controllin...

  • Page 1131

    Vol.2-878 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f rtp start port number set assign the rtp start port number. Note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied followi...

  • Page 1132

    Vol.2-879 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] when i: ip precedence is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result...

  • Page 1133

    Vol.2-880 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f vlan information set assign the vlan data. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0 is network address, improper) - ip address 176.16...

  • Page 1134

    Vol.2-881 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f ip address & subnetmask set assign the ip address and subnet mask of mg(bri). Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0 is network add...

  • Page 1135

    Vol.2-882 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f default gateway ip address set assign the ip address of default gateway. Note: specify the default gateway in the same subnet of mg(bri). --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 current data setting is displayed. Change default...

  • Page 1136

    Vol.2-883 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f sip server ip address & host name set assign the ip address, port number, and host name of sip server. Note 1 note 1: sip server refers to the telephony server. --- sip server ip address & host name set --- current sip server/ip address/port number/host name:...

  • Page 1137

    Vol.2-884 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 2: lan1 of the telephony server is used for the communication between sip server and mg(bri). So assign ip address of lan1 on the telephony server here. In the case of dual configuration, assign ip address of lan1 on telephony server#0. F ethernet speed se...

  • Page 1138

    Vol.2-885 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f rtp start port number set assign the rtp start port number. Note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied followi...

  • Page 1139

    Vol.2-886 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] when i: ip precedence is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result...

  • Page 1140

    Vol.2-887 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f vlan information set assign the vlan data. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address 192.168.1.0/subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0 is network address, improper) - ip address 176.16...

  • Page 1141

    Vol.2-888 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.7 custom mode set command 1. Set default_gateway assign the ip address of default gateway. Note: specify the default gateway in the same subnet of mg(bri). Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 2. Set ...

  • Page 1142

    Vol.2-889 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 4. Set dns_sv assign whether to use dns server or not. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 5. Set fax_detection_time assign the effective switching timer for fax note: execute the “save” command before fi...

  • Page 1143

    Vol.2-890 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 7. Set interface assign the speed and activation mode of ether controller. Note: duplex setting is displayed when speed “2: 100m” or “3: 10m” is selected. F (full) = full-duplex mode h (half) = half-duplex mode note: assign the proper speed adjusting the networ...

  • Page 1144

    Vol.2-891 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 10. Set own_ipaddress assignment of ip address, subnet mask, and host name of mg(bri) itself. Note: assign the ip address first, then subnet mask. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip addres...

  • Page 1145

    Vol.2-892 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12. Set signaling_port_no assign the port number to be used for phi signaling. Note: phi is the internal controlling function in sip server, that is, sp-phi in the telephony server. Specify the same port number assigned on sip server. Note: execute the “save” c...

  • Page 1146

    Vol.2-893 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: meaning of tos field for ip precedence type is as follows. • when p1 = diffserv is specified: note: meaning of tos field for diffserv type is as follows . Note 1: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 14....

  • Page 1147

    Vol.2-894 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 15. Set ...

  • Page 1148

    Vol.2-895 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] • when assigning the time-out value for rtp_stop_detect. Note 1 , note 2 , note 3 note 1: assign this value as one of the conditions for mg based call retention to determine that the call is re- leased. The call will be determined released if rtp is not receive...

  • Page 1149

    Vol.2-896 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note 1: check the number of ip address saved in dhcp server is sufficient so as to get ip address of mg(bri) anytime. Note 2: dhcp option setting is as follows. Class: global name: not specified, but do not enter the same option name in duplicate data: ip addre...

  • Page 1150

    Vol.2-897 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] show command 1. Show config displays the list of current configuration data. 2. Show default_gateway displays the current setting of default gateway . 3. Show dhcp_sv displays the current setting of dhcp server. Mg-bri>show config [config] lan_speed=auto dhcp=e...

  • Page 1151

    Vol.2-898 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 4. Show dns_ipaddress displays the current ip address setting of dns server. 5. Show dns_sv displays the current setting of dns server. 6. Show fax_detection_time displays the current setting of effective timer for fax switching . 7. Show hc_rcv_timer displays ...

  • Page 1152

    Vol.2-899 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 10. Show one_time_pass displays the current setting of one time password. 11. Show own_ipaddress displays the current setting of ip address, subnet mask, and host name of mg(bri) itself. 12. Show rtp_start_port_no displays the current setting of rtp start port ...

  • Page 1153

    Vol.2-900 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 15. Show sipsv_ipaddress displays the current setting of sip server’s ip address, port number, and host name. Note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation m...

  • Page 1154

    Vol.2-901 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 18. Show warning_tone_control displays the current setting whether to send warning tone in the case of lan failure. Save config, exit, reboot command f save config command this command is used to save the modified configuration data to the flashrom. Note: confi...

  • Page 1155

    Vol.2-902 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f exit command this command is used to exit the configuration command of mg(bri). Save the latest configuration using save command and then exit. Confirmation message appears when the configuration has not been saved. Note: key entry will be denied when executi...

  • Page 1156

    Vol.2-903 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f reboot command this command is used to reboot the mg(bri). Note: when configuration data has been modified, use reboot command after executing save command. The check message below appears whether to save or not save the modified data when save command has no...

  • Page 1157

    Vol.2-904 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.8 maintenance command ( sp-3826 bri mg sip bsc prog-a issue 5.0 or later ) setup command set the basic data for connecting network by “setup sp” command depending on your lan environment. En- ter “setup sp” following the prompt. F to startup setup sp: f se...

  • Page 1158

    Vol.2-905 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f setting dns server ip address: note: this setting is required when dns server is “e (enable)”. F setting ip address and subnet mask of mg(bri): note: do not assign network address and broadcast address for mg(bri) setting. See the examples below: (example 1) ...

  • Page 1159

    Vol.2-906 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f setting host name of mg(bri): f setting default gateway ip address: note: make sure to set the default gateway to place on the same subnet with mg(bri). --- host name set --- current host name: blank line 2: the current setting is displayed. Change host name?...

  • Page 1160

    Vol.2-907 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note: this setting is required when dns server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introducti...

  • Page 1161

    Vol.2-908 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f setting ethernet speed f setting signaling port number note: specify the same port number assigned on sip server. --- ethernet speed set --- current lan speed: auto the current setting is displayed. Change lan speed? [y(change)/n(current)/ q(quit)]: y asked w...

  • Page 1162

    Vol.2-909 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f setting rtp start port number note: assign any even-numbered port number to the rtp start port. The specified data + 1 (the next odd-num- bered port number) is assigned as the rtcp port number. Note: 24 ports are occupied following the rtp start port. More th...

  • Page 1163

    Vol.2-910 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: when d: diffserv is selected: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-by...

  • Page 1164

    Vol.2-911 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: a maximum one of vlan can be registered. Note: when using vlan, assign “0.0.0.0” for ip address of actual lan by using “set own_ipaddress” command. Note: if “0” is assigned for vlan id, vlan will be disabled. Note: do not assign the following addresses (n...

  • Page 1165

    Vol.2-912 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] set command 1. Set call_hold assign whether to use mg based call retention or not. Note: by setting “enable” by this command, if a network failure occurred between the telephony server and mg (bri), the call will be retained. However, re-registration to the tel...

  • Page 1166

    Vol.2-913 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 4. Set dns_ipaddress assign the ip address of dns server. Note: enter 0.0.0.0 when dns server is not used. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 5. Set dns_sv assign whether to use dns server or not. Note: ...

  • Page 1167

    Vol.2-914 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 7. Set fax_detection_time assign the effective switching timer for fax note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 8. Set hc_rcv_timer assign the time-out value for telephony server health check waiting process. ...

  • Page 1168

    Vol.2-915 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 10. Set lan_error_check assign the interval to detect lan cable fall-off note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 11...

  • Page 1169

    Vol.2-916 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: assign the ip address first, then subnet mask. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. Note: do not assign the following addresses (network address, broadcast address) to mg(bri). (example) - ip address...

  • Page 1170

    Vol.2-917 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: specify this value as one of the conditions for mg based call retention to determine that the call is re- leased. The call will be determined released if rtp is not received exceeding the assigned timer value dur- ing call retention. Note: execute the “sa...

  • Page 1171

    Vol.2-918 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: meaning of tos field for ip precedence type is as follows. • when p1 = diffserv is specified: note: meaning of tos field for diffserv type is as follows . Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 17. Set...

  • Page 1172

    Vol.2-919 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] to the originating ip address designated by the maddr parameter. The maddr parameter will not be added to via header of sip request to be transferred from mg-bri. - 2: to be used for transmission. Even if maddr parameter is in via header of sip request received...

  • Page 1173

    Vol.2-920 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] if rport parameter is in via header of sip request received by mg-bri, sip response will be transferred to the originating port of sip request. The rport parameter will be added to via header of sip request to be transferred from mg-bri. 19. Set sipsv_ipaddress...

  • Page 1174

    Vol.2-921 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 21. Set subscribe_retry select the regeneration mode for sip subscribe session. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. 22. Set vlan assign the tag vlan information. Note: a maximum one of vlan can be registe...

  • Page 1175

    Vol.2-922 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 23. Set warning_tone_control assign whether to use warning tone when lan failure or not. Note: execute the “save” command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change. Mg-bri(sip> set warning_tone_control p1 p1: setting of mode (default: 3) 0: do ...

  • Page 1176

    Vol.2-923 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] show command 1. Show call_hold display the current setting of mg based call retention. 2. Show config displays the list of current configuration data. 3. Show default_gateway displays the current setting of default gateway . Mg-bri(sip)> show call_hold call hol...

  • Page 1177

    Vol.2-924 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 4. Show dhcp_sv displays the current setting of dhcp server. 5. Show dns_ipaddress displays the current ip address setting of dns server. 6. Show dns_sv displays the current setting of dns server. 7. Show dtmf_in display the current setting of dtmf relay of in-...

  • Page 1178

    Vol.2-925 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 10. Show interface displays the current setting for speed and activation mode of ethernet controller. 11. Show lan_error_check displays the interval to detect lan cable fall-off. 12. Show one_time_pass displays the current setting of one time password. 13. Show...

  • Page 1179

    Vol.2-926 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 16. Show signaling_port_no displays the current setting of signaling port number 17. Show signaling_qos displays the current setting of qos data for signaling session. 18. Show sip_maddr displays the current setting of sip maddr. 19. Show sip_rport displays the...

  • Page 1180

    Vol.2-927 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 20. Show sipsv_ipaddress displays the current setting of sip server’s ip address, port number, and host name. Note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation m...

  • Page 1181

    Vol.2-928 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 23. Show vlan displays the current vlan setting. 24. Show warning_tone_control displays the current setting whether to send warning tone in the case of lan failure. Mb-bri(sip)> show vlan device id cos ipaddress subnetmask vlan1 1 6 192.168.10.100 255.255.255.0...

  • Page 1182

    Vol.2-929 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] save config, init config, exit, reboot command f save config this command is used to save the modified configuration data to the flashrom. Note: configuration data will not be saved when any error occurs while save config command is in process. F init config th...

  • Page 1183

    Vol.2-930 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] f reboot this command is used to reboot the mg(bri). [normal occasion] [when configuration data is changed] note: the screen returns to the prompt of the configuration command [mg-bri(sip)>] if any error occurs after selecting “y”. F exit this command is used t...

  • Page 1184

    Vol.2-931 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] note: the screen returns to the prompt of the configuration command [mg-bri(sip)>] if any error occurs after selecting “y”. Configuration data was changed. ** don’t power off in progress ** y: save and exit. N: exit without saving. C: cancel (y/n/c): y enter “y...

  • Page 1185

    Vol.2-932 mg(bri) [sca-2bria/mg-2bria] 12.4.9 error message error message will be displayed to force you to execute the re-registration when error has occurred during the use of configuration command. Message meaning file not found on the tftp server. Download file of system data cannot be found on ...

  • Page 1186

    Vol.2-933 mg-pri/pra 13. Mg-pri/pra 13.1 general 13.1.1 what is media gateway primary rate access interface? Media gateway primary rate access interface (mg-pri/pra) is an interface between ip network with isdn and provides an efficient network through interaction with the telephony server by using ...

  • Page 1187

    Vol.2-934 mg-pri/pra 13.1.2 relationship between mg-pri/pra and telephony server (internal phi-pri) managing mg-pri/pras via internal phi-pri internal phi-pri installed in the telephony server, manages the mg-pri/pras to make an effective con- nection and achieves a variety of services. If a fault o...

  • Page 1188

    Vol.2-935 mg-pri/pra 13.1.3 signaling flow when a connection is established, two-type data are transmitted across the network; signaling control data based on tcp/ip is transmitted between the telephony server (internal phi-pri) and mg-pri/pra. Voice data based on udp is transmitted peer-to-peer. Th...

  • Page 1189

    Vol.2-936 mg-pri/pra 13.1.4 function overview of mg-pri/pra to maintain high-quality network, mg-pri/pra supports network-efficient management features. The follow- ing describes some of them. Virtual lan (vlan) when a network is flat (one broadcast domain), the larger the network becomes, the large...

  • Page 1190

    Vol.2-937 mg-pri/pra 13.1.5 quality of service (qos) to distinguish transmission quality of signaling control data, mg-pri/pra can specify type of service (tos) of ip precedence and differentiated service (diffserv). The packets mapped by diffserv are con- trolled per switch, which is called per hop...

  • Page 1191

    Vol.2-938 mg-pri/pra the other functions performed in mg-pri/pra are in the following: • codec • echo canceller • jitter-buffer • tone control to achieve a variety of service as existing network provides, mg-pri/pra supports the following: • fax • unrestricted 64k digital communication • hold tone 1...

  • Page 1192

    Vol.2-939 mg-pri/pra led specifications led color description power green indicates power on in mg-pri/pra. Extinction indicates power off in mg-pri/pra. Note: change from lighting indicates fan alarm is being detect- ed. On line green indicates initial settings has been completed. Blink indicates i...

  • Page 1193

    Vol.2-940 mg-pri/pra imp t1 - not used. E1 green indicates tns and rcv connectors are available. Extinction indicates line connector is available. Led color description.

  • Page 1194

    Vol.2-941 mg-pri/pra cable specifications item specification use note input power ac100 ± 10% ∼ 240v ± 10% connector music for external music microphone output 3.5 ∅ mini-jack (monaural type) rj-45 10/100 base to ip network line to isdn network as follows: -t1 (24ch): north america -e1 (30ch): other...

  • Page 1195

    Vol.2-942 mg-pri/pra • software specifications item specification note codec g.711 64k [bps]: pcm μ -law/a-law (default setting) g.729a 8k [bps]: cs-acelp (reduce complexity) g.723.1 5.3k [bps]: mp-mlq/acelp 6.3k [bps]: mp-mlq/acelp rtp payload cycle 40 msec, 60 ms g.711/g.729a: 40 msec g.723.1: 60 ...

  • Page 1196

    Vol.2-943 mg-pri/pra 13.2 installation 13.2.1 mounting location this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg-pri/pra. How to set mg-pri/pra mg-pri/pra is set as following. Be sure to place the mg-pri/pra on the flat surface. Mg-pri/pra horizontal setting pwr on line line musi...

  • Page 1197

    Vol.2-944 mg-pri/pra 13.2.2 cable connection cable connection to mg-pri/pra this section shows the cable connection to mg-pri/pra. The mg-pri/pra provides the following types of interfaces: • connection to e1/t1 (coax cable and rj-45/rj-45) • ethernet port to ip network • power supply • serial port ...

  • Page 1198

    Vol.2-945 mg-pri/pra 13.3 system startup 13.3.1 summary after completing hardware settings on the previous page, the setup procedures as follows are taken. These set- tings are divided into three parts: the settings of the telephony server and the settings of mg-pri/pra, and connection check. To set...

  • Page 1199

    Vol.2-946 mg-pri/pra if an access list is applied to the network, looking into all the communication flows, classify the priorities to make the network effective. The throughput will become low if the settings is inappropriate. The following is an example: • check the availability if mg-pri/pra is c...

  • Page 1200

    Vol.2-947 mg-pri/pra tandem connection involving media converter (mc) note 2: for a tandem connection involving central office trunk (cot) and loop dialing trunk (ldt), input level can be lower than minimum dtmf detection level (-27.0 dbm) at mg-pri/pra because of line loss be- tween two switches. T...

  • Page 1201

    Vol.2-948 mg-pri/pra 13.3.3 procedure overview this section explains how to set up mg-pri/pra. The set-up have to be performed by specifying data of the telephony server and mg-pri/pra. The following describes the basic step overview. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section ref...

  • Page 1202

    Vol.2-949 mg-pri/pra step 20 enable the function to soft keys on ip terminals (option) note 1 step 21 add the function to the function keys of ip terminals (option) note 1 step 22 add the function to the soft keys of ip terminals (option) note 1 step 23 specify the soft key name displayed on lcd (op...

  • Page 1203

    Vol.2-950 mg-pri/pra step 1 make sure that pwr lamp lights on step 2 make sure that link lamp lights on step 3 make sure that on line lamp lights on step 4 make sure that layer 2 lamp lights on step 5 make sure the signaling via mg-pri/pra is normal step 6 make sure the mg-pri/pra is working properl...

  • Page 1204

    Vol.2-951 mg-pri/pra type set dhcp enable the dhcp server needs to be registered ip addresses for the default gateway and the drs (mgc). Note: confirm the dhcp server reserves ip addresses to be assigned for the clients (mg-pri/pra). • when not using dhcp type set dhcp disable type set defaultroute ...

  • Page 1205

    Vol.2-952 mg-pri/pra the following describe the procedures for the telephony server by using pcpro. This describes parameters re- quired only for the mg-pri/pra setting. For more information, refer to the command manual. Step 1 specify system data open asyd command and specify the following: sys1 in...

  • Page 1206

    Vol.2-953 mg-pri/pra note: default settings (ip precedence, priority=6, low delay=off, throughput=off, reliability=off, min cost=off) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Note: execute the following to make the changed data effective after assigning tos data for signaling packet. - internal...

  • Page 1207

    Vol.2-954 mg-pri/pra open atrk command and specify trunk data on virtual speech channel. For more information, refer to the command manual. The following is an example for assigning channel data of t1 and e1 respectively. Note that the data setting for dch must be performed after the acic1 command a...

  • Page 1208

    Vol.2-955 mg-pri/pra • in the case of t1 (23b+d) setting. • in the case of e1 (30b+d) setting. Cscg cicg cch mg (00-07) u (0-3) g (00-23) 130/131 0 00 0 04 1 00 0 04 2 00 0 04 3 00 0 04 4 00 0 04 5 00 0 04 6 00 0 04 7 00 0 04 cscg cicg cch mg (00-07) u (0-3) g (00-23) 130/131 0 00 0 04 1 00 0 04 2 0...

  • Page 1209

    Vol.2-956 mg-pri/pra step 10 specify cic information open acic1 command and specify the accommodated location of virtual control channel on point code. As follows: note: ndm command (acic1n) cannot be used here. Pc: enter the point code specified by adpc cscg: enter the csc group specified by acsc s...

  • Page 1210

    Vol.2-957 mg-pri/pra b loc-id displayed when type=location id specified is selected. Specify the location id (ip terminals) setting of jitter buffer jb_min:jitter buffer minimum jb_max:jitter buffer maximum setting type of voice packet service specify qos settings of voice speech setting of payload ...

  • Page 1211

    Vol.2-958 mg-pri/pra conditions check after the settings, make sure that mg-pri/pra is working properly, taking the following: step 1 make sure that pwr lamp lights on. If the lamp does not light on, check the following: • check if the cable is inserted appropriately. • check if the power switch is ...

  • Page 1212

    Vol.2-959 mg-pri/pra step 5 make sure the signaling via mg-pri/pra is normal. Make sure line b is lightening on or blinking, which indicates the signaling is normal, and make sure the red lamp on the telephony server is not indicating any alarm related to mg-pri/pra. If the signaling is abnormal: • ...

  • Page 1213

    Vol.2-960 mg-pri/pra step 7 when the leds on mg-pri/pra remain the following status for a long time, a failure might occur in the system. Make sure of the cables and the office data by using the listings below, and solve the prob- lems. Ledl power on- line line-b line-d lb cause pattern 1 on blink o...

  • Page 1214

    Vol.2-961 mg-pri/pra 13.4 operation and maintenance 13.4.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs, where mg-pri/pra is registered. Note: when an event causing a restart of the devic...

  • Page 1215

    Vol.2-962 mg-pri/pra mg-pri> set ipaddress 123.201.18.45 1 2 3 1: command 2: sub command 3: parameter 1 note : the number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command. Mg-pri> set sigqos qos (tos/diffserv:tos):tos 5:set value (or default value) 5.

  • Page 1216

    Vol.2-963 mg-pri/pra in set command, some of the sub commands can be specified with hexadecimal numbers (called set value), which deter- mine a group of the detailed values. It is also possible to omit its parameters; the interactive guidance will help you speci- fying its detailed values. The follo...

  • Page 1217

    Vol.2-964 mg-pri/pra the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. List of maintenance command note: first assign the network data to mg-pri/pra according to your network environment. Command no. Sub command function page set 1 bch_attribute assigns the bch parameters for fax ...

  • Page 1218

    Vol.2-965 mg-pri/pra list of maintenance command (continued) command no. Sub command function page show 1 bch_attribute displays the state of bch parameters page 991 2 dhcp displays the state of dhcp setting page 991 3 drsaddress displays the setting of drs (ip address and port no.) page 992 4 drsqo...

  • Page 1219

    Vol.2-966 mg-pri/pra input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-pri>” as an ex- ample here) is indicated. Parameters vary depending on the specified command. When each data (command name, sub command name, parameter) is specified correctly, the command e...

  • Page 1220

    Vol.2-967 mg-pri/pra 2. Set Δ cos Δ p1 Δ p2 this command is used to modify class of service (cos). Using this command is available while vlan is working. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 3. Set Δ de...

  • Page 1221

    Vol.2-968 mg-pri/pra 4. Set Δ dhcp Δ p1 this command is used to enable/disable dhcp server. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 5. Set Δ drsaddress this command is used to specify ip address for drs.To...

  • Page 1222

    Vol.2-969 mg-pri/pra 6. Set Δ drsqos Δ [ p1 ] Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify quality of service (qos) such as ip precedence and differentiated ser- vice (diffserv) for drs. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" com- mand and to restart before exiting the m...

  • Page 1223

    Vol.2-970 mg-pri/pra note: the result of data setting is indicated in 1-byte (hex.) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by prompt. The meaning of 1-bite data is as shown below: 7. Set Δ dtmf_in Δ p1 this command is used to specify whether inband dtmf relay is used or not. Note: inb...

  • Page 1224

    Vol.2-971 mg-pri/pra 8. Set Δ e_t_time Δ p1 this command is used to specify the executing time of echo canceller training feature. To make this as- signment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the mainte- nance command. 9. Set Δ e_t_waittime Δ p1 thi...

  • Page 1225

    Vol.2-972 mg-pri/pra 10. Set Δ ec_training Δ p1 this command is used to enable/disable the training feature mode of echo canceller. Echo canceller fea- ture is used to prevent initial echo (ranging from 500 to 1ms) from occurring in the beginning of speech to pbx. To make this assignment effective, ...

  • Page 1226

    Vol.2-973 mg-pri/pra 13. Set Δ ippaddress Δ p1 Δ p2 this command is used to specify ip address and subnet mask for mg-pri/pra. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: the designated ip address cann...

  • Page 1227

    Vol.2-974 mg-pri/pra 14. Set Δ mediaqos Δ [ p1 ] Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify quality of service (qos) for real-time protocol (rtp) session. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify ...

  • Page 1228

    Vol.2-975 mg-pri/pra note: the result of data setting is indicated in 1-byte (hex.) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by prompt. The meaning of 1-bite data is as shown below: 15. Set Δ prompt Δ p1 the command is used to change a prompt. Ascii code (except for control characters) ...

  • Page 1229

    Vol.2-976 mg-pri/pra 16. Set Δ sigqos Δ [ p1 ] Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify quality of service (qos) such as ip precedence and differentiated ser- vice (diffserv) for signaling session. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before ...

  • Page 1230

    Vol.2-977 mg-pri/pra note: the result of data setting is indicated in 1-byte (hex.) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by prompt. The meaning of 1-bite data is as shown below: 17. Set Δ smooth_pad Δ p1 this command is used to specify smooth pad mode of dsp. To make this assignment...

  • Page 1231

    Vol.2-978 mg-pri/pra 19. Set Δ tcp_timer p1 this command is used to specify the timer waiting for tcp link connection. P1 -specify the waiting time (30 seconds interval) 60-80 = effective waiting time (default: 60) a command is executed, and the result is displayed. Mg-pri > set tcp_timer p1 tcp lin...

  • Page 1232

    Vol.2-979 mg-pri/pra 20. Set Δ tcs_common1 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify common data 1 for t1/e1. When not specify an attribute on the interactive setting, the original setting keeps being used. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart...

  • Page 1233

    Vol.2-980 mg-pri/pra 21. Set Δ tcs_e1_1 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify e1 dch data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 9080) whe...

  • Page 1234

    Vol.2-981 mg-pri/pra 22. Set Δ tcs_e1_2 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify e1 data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 1000) when p1...

  • Page 1235

    Vol.2-982 mg-pri/pra 23. Set Δ tcs_loopback Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify loopback data for t1/e1. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Note: the trace of loopback test varies depending on it...

  • Page 1236

    Vol.2-983 mg-pri/pra (1) line loopback the line interface part of mg-pri/pra sends back all the channels from isdn network. Normally, this loopback will work with the timing of isdn. (2) payload loopback the speech control part of mg-pri/pra sends back all the channels from isdn network. Differing f...

  • Page 1237

    Vol.2-984 mg-pri/pra the sending (snd) and receiving (rcv) values vary depending on pad settings of artd (pbx settings) and pad pattern number. The following are divided into two sheets in the case of the a-law/ μ -law settings, which de- scribe the snd/rcv values: note: the snd or rcv value might b...

  • Page 1238

    Vol.2-985 mg-pri/pra 25. Set Δ tcs_pad p1 Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify pad data for t1/e1. Before using this command, set flexible ( 1 ) in pad selection of set tcs pad0. Fore more information about the procedures, refer to next page. To make this assignment effective, it is required to ...

  • Page 1239

    Vol.2-986 mg-pri/pra - artd: pad = 4 - flexible pad send = -4db(gain) - flexible pad recv = 0db to specify the above settings, perform the following steps: step1 ) tcs_pad0: pad selection =1 (flexible) step2 ) tcs_pad0: pad control =3 (send/receive control) step3 ) tcs_pad4: flexible pad #4-recv=0 f...

  • Page 1240

    Vol.2-987 mg-pri/pra 26. Set Δ tcs_t1_1 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify t1 dch data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 90b8) whe...

  • Page 1241

    Vol.2-988 mg-pri/pra 27. Set Δ tcs_t1_2 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify t1 data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 0000) when p1...

  • Page 1242

    Vol.2-989 mg-pri/pra 28. Set Δ tcs_t1_3 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify t1 data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 00cc) when p1...

  • Page 1243

    Vol.2-990 mg-pri/pra 29. Set Δ vlan this command is used to specify the settings for vlan.To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. In mg-pri/pra, one vlan can be created per network. 30. Set Δ warning_tone ...

  • Page 1244

    Vol.2-991 mg-pri/pra 13.4.4 show command 1. Show Δ bch_attribute Δ p1 this command is used to display the setting of bch parameters. : 2. Show Δ dhcp this command is used to display whether dhcp is enabled at current network. P1 -specify bch parameter to be displayed 0-29 =circuit number all =all th...

  • Page 1245

    Vol.2-992 mg-pri/pra 3. Show Δ drsaddress Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to display the status of drs. 4. Show Δ drsqos this command is used to display the qos setting for drs session. The following is an example in the case of tos setting. 5. Show Δ dtmf_in this command is used to display inband dtm...

  • Page 1246

    Vol.2-993 mg-pri/pra 6. Show Δ e_t_time this command is used to display an executing time of ec training feature. 7. Show Δ e_t_waittime this command is used to display the waiting time (ms) before starting ec training feature. 1 counter indi- cates 10ms. 8. Show Δ ec_training this command is used t...

  • Page 1247

    Vol.2-994 mg-pri/pra 11. Show Δ ipaddress this command is used to display the ip address of lan interface. Note: axdev0 is needed as p1 when the program version is sw-423 pri mg program-a or earlier. 12. Show Δ mediaqos this command is used to display the qos setting for rtp session. The following i...

  • Page 1248

    Vol.2-995 mg-pri/pra 14. Show Δ smooth_pad this command is used to display smooth pad mode of dsp. 15. Show Δ startport this command is used to display the start port of rtp. 16. Show Δ tcp_timer this command is used to display the setting of the timer for tcp link connection. The current setting is...

  • Page 1249

    Vol.2-996 mg-pri/pra 17. Show Δ tcs_common1 this command is used to display the common settings 1 for trunk. The current setting is displayed. - remote alarm sending (0/1=enable/disable) - signal all 01(0/1=disable/enable) - idle code sending (0/1=disable/enable) - dch back-up (0/1=disable/enable) -...

  • Page 1250

    Vol.2-997 mg-pri/pra 18. Show Δ tcs_e1_1 this command is used to display e1 dch settings for trunk. 19. Show Δ tcs_e1_2 this command is used to display e1 settings for trunk. The current setting is displayed. - dch control (0/1=disable/enable) - dch mode (0/1=user/network) - dch signal logic (0/1=po...

  • Page 1251

    Vol.2-998 mg-pri/pra 20. Show Δ tcs_loopback this command is used to display the loopback settings for tc. 21. Show Δ tcs_pad p1 this command is used to display the specified pad register for voice quality tuning. The following is an example in the case of displaying pad1. The current setting is dis...

  • Page 1252

    Vol.2-999 mg-pri/pra 22. Show Δ tcs_t1_ p1 this command is used to display the specified t type settings for tc. The following is an example when selecting 1 in t type. P1 -specify a type of t carrier. 1-3 =t type the current setting is displayed. - dch control (0/1=disable/enable) - dch mode (0/1=u...

  • Page 1253

    Vol.2-1000 mg-pri/pra 23. Show Δ version p1 this command is used to display information about hardware and software. 24. Show Δ vlan Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to display the vlan. 25. Show Δ warning_tone p1 - specify the version to be displayed. Nc: network control tc: trunk control vc0: voice c...

  • Page 1254

    Vol.2-1001 mg-pri/pra 13.4.5 delete command 1. Delete Δ vlan Δ p1 this command is used to delete vlan. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. P1 -specify vlan id 1) determine when the change is reflected ...

  • Page 1255

    Vol.2-1002 mg-pri/pra 13.4.6 save command 1. Save Δ configdata this command is used to save the configuration data. 2. Save Δ tcs_ configdata this command is used to save the configuration data for trunk. 1) determine that a change in configuration data is reserved. Y : the data is saved n : the dat...

  • Page 1256

    Vol.2-1003 mg-pri/pra 13.4.7 get command 1. Get Δ configdata Δ p1 this command is used to download configuration data from tftp server. 2. Get Δ tcs_configdata Δ p1 this command is used to download configuration data for tc from tftp server. 13.4.8 put command 1. Put Δ configdata Δ p1 this command i...

  • Page 1257

    Vol.2-1004 mg-pri/pra 13.4.9 reboot command 3. Reboot this command is used to reboot the mg-pri/pra. 1) determine the reboot y =reboot n =not reboot a command is executed, and the result is displayed. Mg-pri > reboot do you need reboot ? [y/n] : y.

  • Page 1258

    Vol.2-1005 mg-pri/pra 13.4.10 exit command 1. Exit this command is used to exit the program. Note: if “exit” command is executed at os(mg-pri/pra) prompt, any key entry will not be effective. In this case, press “ctrl” and “c” together to redisplay os prompts. Command 2 and 3 1) determine the follow...

  • Page 1259

    Vol.2-1006 mg-pri/pra 13.4.11 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. System data cannot be found and do...

  • Page 1260

    Vol.2-1007 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14. Mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.1 general 14.1.1 what is mg(pri) card/mg(pri)? Mg(pri) is a media gateway between isdn network and ip network to provide an efficient network through interaction with the telephony server. Mg(pri) is contro...

  • Page 1261

    Vol.2-1008 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note 1: for proprietary protocol mode, internal phi-pri controls the signaling data, which is accommodated in the telephony server. Call control between internal phi-pri and mg(pri) is executed via tcp/ip port of the system. Note 2: for sip mode, the ...

  • Page 1262

    Vol.2-1009 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.1.2 specifications 1. Dimension • mg(pri) card [sca-24pria] mg(pri) is mounted on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). • mg(pri) box [mg-24pria] unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") b d alm pwr on line lb line ether 100m ...

  • Page 1263

    Vol.2-1010 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 2. Specifications mg(pri) specifications item specification note codec g.711 64k [bps]: pcm μ -law/a-law (default setting) rtp payload cycle: 30~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8k [bps]: cs-acelp (reduce complexity) rtp payload cycle: 10~40 msec (in...

  • Page 1264

    Vol.2-1011 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches front view • mg(pri) card [sca-24pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-24pria] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/full duplex) line isdn lin...

  • Page 1265

    Vol.2-1012 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] lamps on the front panel note 1: for alm lamp on mg-24pria, it always remains off. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm note 1 red lights when power module failure is detected off normal operation on line green li...

  • Page 1266

    Vol.2-1013 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] rear view • mg(pri) card [sca-24pria] note: this figure is an example when 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- du...

  • Page 1267

    Vol.2-1014 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). As mg(pri) has isdn interface, if the line cable is struck by lightning directly...

  • Page 1268

    Vol.2-1015 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 4. Port numbers the following provides the port number to be used in mg(pri). If a firewall is used in your network, do not block the following ports. • when using sip mode. • when using proprietary protocol mode 5. Available channels when using sip m...

  • Page 1269

    Vol.2-1016 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.1.3 requirements 1. Hardware requirements • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for connecting to lan. 10base-t:unshielded twisted-pair (utp) straight-through cable category 3 o...

  • Page 1270

    Vol.2-1017 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.1.4 service conditions 1. Mg(pri) occupies four groups (1hw) of virtual speech channel. One hw (32 channels) can only be used as virtual speech channel of mg(pri) even when only one channel is assigned. The virtual speech channel of mg(pri) cannot ...

  • Page 1271

    Vol.2-1018 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 12. [s-127d] serial call - d cannot be used to the call termination via mg(pri). The following are applied when automated attendant is set: - if any virtual register cannot be used, physical register (rst for automated attendant service) will be used....

  • Page 1272

    Vol.2-1019 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 1. Virtual speech/signal channel can be assigned to the virtual pir. 2. Phi-pri is stored in system processor (sp). 3. Phi-pri handles a control signal between mg-pri and phi-pri. Control signal is handled with tcp/ip port on system processor (sp). 4....

  • Page 1273

    Vol.2-1020 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg(pri). Be sure to take measures for anti-static electricity. 14.2.1 how to set mg(pri) • sca-24pria * this figure is an example to mount an mg(pri) in the left slot ...

  • Page 1274

    Vol.2-1021 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-24pria] mg(pri) is set as the following. Be sure to place mg(pri) on the flat surface. 14.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg(pri). Mg(pri) provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • c...

  • Page 1275

    Vol.2-1022 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. General description of cable connection for mg(pri) is explained in the diagram below. Mg(pri) cable/box connection diagram (front) note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to ...

  • Page 1276

    Vol.2-1023 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 1: ac power cable connection connect the ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of 1u-mpc. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. • mg(pri) card [sca-24pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-24pria] connect the other end of the power cable to appr...

  • Page 1277

    Vol.2-1024 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 2: connect a maintenance terminal (pc) to console connector using console cable. The following shows the case of connection to console connector of sca-24pria. Note: isdn lines and lan cables are connected in section 14.3 startup mg(pri) and basi...

  • Page 1278

    Vol.2-1025 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3 startup mg(pri) and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. When sip mode 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg(pri) data...

  • Page 1279

    Vol.2-1026 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Besides, this section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The following ex- p...

  • Page 1280

    Vol.2-1027 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • check the availability if mg is connected to the following equipment by tandem connection. - : not guaranteed √ : available note 1: tandem here stands for a connection that is established over multiple networks such as shown in the fol- lowing figur...

  • Page 1281

    Vol.2-1028 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note 2: for a tandem connection involving central office trunk (cot) and loop dialing trunk (ldt), input level can be lower than minimum dtmf detection level (-27.0 dbm) at mg(pri) because of line loss between two switches. Line loss the signal can be...

  • Page 1282

    Vol.2-1029 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] mg(pri) can be registered to either internal phi-pri or sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-pri, it works using proprietary protocol, which is called proprietary protocol mode. Here explains mg(pri) data assignment for proprietary protocol mode. ...

  • Page 1283

    Vol.2-1030 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, mg, or vs-32. • for isdn trunk data the other data should be “0” (default data). Note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize...

  • Page 1284

    Vol.2-1031 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • for q-sig trunk data the other data should be “0” (default data). Note 3: depending on the level diagram of the network, data “4” is standard. Note 4: each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of call origination....

  • Page 1285

    Vol.2-1032 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 3: arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Rt=10 (virtual signaling channel) rt=20 (virtual speech channel) cdn68 (vir): 2 (mg connection) note: to change the data for existing ...

  • Page 1286

    Vol.2-1033 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 4: atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual speech channel. The following is an example for assigning channel data of pri (1.5m). Note that the data setting for dch must be performed after the acic1 command assignment. Tru...

  • Page 1287

    Vol.2-1034 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 5: adpc (assignment of determinate point code data) assign the point code (1 ∼ 16383) on virtual speech channel and virtual signaling channel. Note that the point code must be different from the point code for ccis. (isdn does not actually use th...

  • Page 1288

    Vol.2-1035 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 9: atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual signaling channel, referring to page 1033. Step 10:mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb: 0=make-busy cancel...

  • Page 1289

    Vol.2-1036 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] [*] data deletion deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment. Make sure to delete in the order of amgil → atrk. (confirm there is no data left in amgil before deleting atrk).

  • Page 1290

    Vol.2-1037 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] mg(pri) can be registered to either internal phi-pri or sp-phi. When registering to sp-phi, it works using sip, which is called sip mode. Here explains mg(pri) data assignment for sip mode. When registering to in- ternal phi-pri (proprietary protocol ...

  • Page 1291

    Vol.2-1038 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • for isdn trunk data the other data should be “0” (default data). Note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, mg, or vs-32. Note 1: int (cdn65): 1 n-isdn2 2 australia 4 itu (ccitt), et...

  • Page 1292

    Vol.2-1039 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • for q-sig trunk data the other data should be “0” (default data). Note 3: depending on the level diagram of the network, data “4” is standard. Note 4: each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of call origination....

  • Page 1293

    Vol.2-1040 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 4: arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Rt=10 (virtual signaling channel) rt=20 (virtual speech channel) cdn68 (vir)=2 (mg connection) note: to change the data for existing r...

  • Page 1294

    Vol.2-1041 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 5: atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual speech channel. The following is an example for assigning channel data of pri (1.5m). Note that the data setting for dch must be performed after the acic1 command assignment trun...

  • Page 1295

    Vol.2-1042 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 6: adpc (assignment of determinate point code data) assign the point code (1 ∼ 16383) on virtual speech channel and virtual signaling channel. Note that the point code must be different from the point code for ccis. (isdn does not actually use th...

  • Page 1296

    Vol.2-1043 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] assign the trunk data to virtual signaling channel, referring to page 1041. Step 11:mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb: 0(make-busy cancel) step 12:amgil (assignment of media gat...

  • Page 1297

    Vol.2-1044 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 1: asecl (assignment of media gateway voice control data for ldm) specify a one-time password and the available period. One-time password:enter a one-time password.[4-10 digits] available period: specify the available period.This command assigns ...

  • Page 1298

    Vol.2-1045 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software ...

  • Page 1299

    Vol.2-1046 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear side of mg(pri). Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg(pri) card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure t...

  • Page 1300

    Vol.2-1047 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the network data to mg(pri) by configuration command operation on the maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The follo...

  • Page 1301

    Vol.2-1048 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] assign the configuration data for mg(pri) in proprietary protocol mode. About the configuration data for sip mode, refer to page 1053 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. Note: the default o...

  • Page 1302

    Vol.2-1049 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: if a prompt does not appear on the screen, press the enter key to display a prompt. Step 4: type “setup tp” to set the network data referring to page 1089 , also set the following network data depending on your lan environment. There are two way...

  • Page 1303

    Vol.2-1050 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg(pri), default gateway, and the telephony server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg(pri) side. Ip addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared ...

  • Page 1304

    Vol.2-1051 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg(pri) side. Note 1 • dhcp server setting • ip address and subnet mask of mg(pri) • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 2 • ip address of default gateway note...

  • Page 1305

    Vol.2-1052 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 5: save the configuration data assigned . Step 6: reboot the mg(pri) by entering reboot command. Turning off and on/pressing reset button also reset the mg(pri). Note: mg-id (mac address of mg(pri)) is displayed after rebooting. The mg-id needs t...

  • Page 1306

    Vol.2-1053 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] assign the configuration data for mg(pri) in sip mode. About the configuration data for proprietary protocol mode, refer to page 1048 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The default of regi...

  • Page 1307

    Vol.2-1054 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 2: type “usrconsole” at the indicated os prompt and press the enter key. If a prompt (->) displays on the screen, press the enter key. Step 3: mg(pri)’s command prompt appears as follows. Note: if a prompt does not appear on the screen, press the...

  • Page 1308

    Vol.2-1055 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg(pri), default gateway, and the telephony server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg(pri) side. Ip addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared ...

  • Page 1309

    Vol.2-1056 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg(pri) side. Note 1 • dhcp server setting • ip address and subnet mask of mg(pri) • ip address of default gateway • ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note 2 host name can be ...

  • Page 1310

    Vol.2-1057 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • host name of mg(pri) specify the host name of mg(pri) when dns server is enabled. Note 1: ip addresses assigned here will not be effective if dhcp server is set to “enabled”. Be sure to assign “set dhcp disabled” before starting the ip address setti...

  • Page 1311

    Vol.2-1058 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect mg(pri) to the lan. Insert lan cable into the ether connector on the front panel of the mg(pri). On line lamp lights green in a few minutes when connection succeeded. • sca-24pria • mg-24pria front b d alm pwr o...

  • Page 1312

    Vol.2-1059 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 2: connect isdn line to mg(pri). Insert line cable of dsu into line connector on the front panel of the mg(pri). Check the d lamp of line flashes → steady lights in green when connection succeeded. • sca-24pria • mg-24pria line (rj-45) connector ...

  • Page 1313

    Vol.2-1060 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.3.6 basic test procedures operation of mg(pri) can be checked from the visual inspection of lamp display. Lamps on the front panel note 1: for alm lamp on mg-24pria, it always remains off. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on of...

  • Page 1314

    Vol.2-1061 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: when the lamps remain the following status for a long time, any failure might occur in initial setting. Make sure of the cable connection and the office data assignment to solve the problem. [1] basic connection test step 1: is the pwr lamp ligh...

  • Page 1315

    Vol.2-1062 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 3: is the on line lamp lighting green? [no] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg(pri) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg(pri): check the configuration data assigned from...

  • Page 1316

    Vol.2-1063 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg(pri) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg(pri): check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console. • check the contract st...

  • Page 1317

    Vol.2-1064 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] [3] loop-back test execute the loop-back test on the maintenance console. (a) line loop-back all the channels (23ch) are looped back to isdn on the isdn line interface of mg(pri). (b) payload loop-back all the channels (23ch) are looped back to isdn o...

  • Page 1318

    Vol.2-1065 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4 operation and maintenance this section explains the operation and maintenance procedure of mg(pri). Configuration data is assigned by using maintenance console (pc). 14.4.1 how to back up and restore config data by serial connection (local downlo...

  • Page 1319

    Vol.2-1066 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • restoring config data by serial connection and tftp connection step 1 power off mg(pri) and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to mg(pri) by using a console cable (rs232c rj-45) cable. Step 3 connect tftp server to mg(pri)...

  • Page 1320

    Vol.2-1067 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 12 to reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from tftp server, save it by entering “ save config ” and reboot mg(pri) by entering “ reboot ”. Step 13 exit the hyperterminal by selecting [file] -> [exit] . Step 14 connect the mg(pri) to...

  • Page 1321

    Vol.2-1068 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.2 how to back up and restore config data by tftp connection (remote download) this config download/upload is performed via tftp. Prepare the following: - pc that is capable of telnet and tftp features. - all the pcs have to belong to the same seg...

  • Page 1322

    Vol.2-1069 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 5 to make environment setting for telnet, use the atud command. - specify the lens, which is belonging to the target mg(pri). - specify a user id and a password, which are required for logging in mg(pri) via telnet. - input any letter for user le...

  • Page 1323

    Vol.2-1070 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] • restoring config data via tftp step 1 if the name of the backup config file is not sysdata, rename it to “sysdata”. Step 2 put the file in the root folder of tftp server, and then start the tftp server program. Step 3 permit read behavior of this fo...

  • Page 1324

    Vol.2-1071 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 9 after a prompt ( -> ) is displayed, enter “ usrconsole ”. Step 10 after a prompt (“ >mg-pri ” or “ >mg-pri(sip) ”) is displayed, enter “ get configda- ta ” to download configuration data into mg(pri). Step 11 confirm that “successfully complete...

  • Page 1325

    Vol.2-1072 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg(pri) with a console ca- ble (rs232c rj-45) and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - ...

  • Page 1326

    Vol.2-1073 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 5 set network environment for the tftp server. Ip address: 10.41.1.250 subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 step 6 start the tftp program. Step 7 power on mg(pri). Step 8 activate hyperterminal and set the following: bit per second:9600bps data bits:8bit p...

  • Page 1327

    Vol.2-1074 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 19 make sure that a new firmware has been installed by checking the following: step 20 enter “ show config ” to confirm the config data. Step 21 connect the mg(pri) to a network. Step 22 to confirm mg(pri) is properly operating with the upgraded ...

  • Page 1328

    Vol.2-1075 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.4 how to upgrade firmware by ftp (remote download) this upgrading process can be performed up to eight mg(pri)s at once. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same segment with mg(pri). - ftp server has to be i...

  • Page 1329

    Vol.2-1076 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 1 put the firmware files (for example, sp3884) and mpgrimwlist.Txt for upgrade in the root fold- er of ftp server. Step 2 set read permission for this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the ftp server pro...

  • Page 1330

    Vol.2-1077 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] step 6 after the mg(pri)s are displayed in result of search, select the appropriate mg(pri) to be upgraded the firmware. Step 7 click the close button to back to the main screen. Step 8 click the exe button to upgrade the firmware to the target mg(pri...

  • Page 1331

    Vol.2-1078 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.5 how to use maintenance command configuration command is used just for modifying the default data. Data is to be modified only when it is re- quired and to the necessary part. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony serve...

  • Page 1332

    Vol.2-1079 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] example indication • sca-24pria • mg-24pria the user input command above is consist of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. To console connector maintenance console (pc) b d alm pwr on line lb l...

  • Page 1333

    Vol.2-1080 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] in set command, some of the sub commands can be specified with hexadecimal numbers (called set value), which deter- mine a group of the detailed values. It is also possible to omit its parameters; the interactive guidance will help you speci- fying it...

  • Page 1334

    Vol.2-1081 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] how to read maintenance command the commands in this section are explained with defined characters. These characters’ meanings are in the fol- lowing: characters meaning Δ blank p1 , p2 , p3 parameters [ ] parameter option (indicates not essential).

  • Page 1335

    Vol.2-1082 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] configuration command list the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. List of maintenance command note: first assign the network data to mg(pri) according to your network environment. Command no. Sub command function page set...

  • Page 1336

    Vol.2-1083 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] list of maintenance command (continued) command no. Sub command function page show 1 call_hold displays the state of call hold setting page 1114 2 config displays the state of dhcp setting page 1114 3 dhcp displays the state of dhcp setting page 1114 ...

  • Page 1337

    Vol.2-1084 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-pri>” as an ex- ample here) is indicated. Parameters vary depending on the specified command. When each data (command name, sub command name, parameter) is specif...

  • Page 1338

    Vol.2-1085 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.6 setup command 1. Setup Δ sp this command is used to set up network environment of mg(pri) sip mode. Mg-pri(sip)>setup sp ---dhcp interface set--- current dhcp interface:enable the current setting is displayed. Change dhcp interface? [y (change)...

  • Page 1339

    Vol.2-1086 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] change host name? [y (change)/n (current)/q(quit)]: y 9) select the host name setting of mg(pri). Y: change the setting n: remain the current setting q: exit the command input new host name: mgpri.Nec.Com 10) specify a new host name. --- default gatew...

  • Page 1340

    Vol.2-1087 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. Note: the following are examples that cannot be used in the mg(pri) setting: (example1) net...

  • Page 1341

    Vol.2-1088 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: if you enter an invalid value, the system continues to respond to it until three times. If the invalid value is entered in four times, the system forcibly discards the configuration data and exits the sp setup. Note: if the setup is finished by ...

  • Page 1342

    Vol.2-1089 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 2. Setup Δ tp this command is used to set up network environment of mg(pri) proprietary protocol mode. Mg-pri(sip)>setup tp ---dhcp interface set--- current dhcp interface:enable the current setting is displayed. Change dhcp interface? [y (change)/n (...

  • Page 1343

    Vol.2-1090 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note: the following are examples that cannot be set in the mg(pri) setting: (example1) network addre...

  • Page 1344

    Vol.2-1091 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] ip address:192.168.1.0 subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 (example2) broadcast address cannot be assigned as ip address of mg(pri). Ip address:192.168.1.255 subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 note: if you enter an invalid value, the system continues to respond to it ...

  • Page 1345

    Vol.2-1092 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.7 set command 1. Set Δ call_hold Δ p1 this command is used to set call retention. By setting “enable” by this command, if a network failure occurred between the telephony server and mg(pri), the call will be retained. However, re-registration to ...

  • Page 1346

    Vol.2-1093 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 5. Set Δ dns_sw this command is used to enable/disable dns server. A bracket ([ ]) shows the current setting. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the main- tenance command. 6. S...

  • Page 1347

    Vol.2-1094 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data in tos field for ip precedence is shown below: note: the result of data setting is show...

  • Page 1348

    Vol.2-1095 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] when p1=clear: mg-pri(sip)>set drsqos clear drs qos setting succeeded.(0x00) result is displayed..

  • Page 1349

    Vol.2-1096 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 8. Set Δ dtmf_in Δ p1 this command is used to specify whether inband dtmf is used or not. Note: dtmf relay of in-band signaling is effective only for the speech transferring of codec g.711. As this function cannot distinguish the codec type, make sure...

  • Page 1350

    Vol.2-1097 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 12. Set Δ fax_ecm this command is used to enable/disable the fax ecm. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 13. Set Δ faxerrordetect Δ p1 this command is ...

  • Page 1351

    Vol.2-1098 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 16. Set Δ ippaddress Δ p1 Δ p2 this command is used to specify ip address and subnet mask for mg. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Note: the designat...

  • Page 1352

    Vol.2-1099 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 19. Set Δ pad0 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify pad 0 data for pri (1.5m). To make this assignment effective, it is re- quired to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not entered: when p1...

  • Page 1353

    Vol.2-1100 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: the snd or rcv value might be 0 db, depending on the pad control settings. Pad control settings (a-law/ μ -law) pad data pattern 1 pattern 2 pattern 3 pattern 4 pattern 5 artd snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 1 2 2 -...

  • Page 1354

    Vol.2-1101 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 20. Set Δ pad p1 Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify pad data for pri (1.5m). Before using this command, set flexible ( 1 ) in pad selection of set pad0. For more information about the procedures, refer to the next page. To make this assignment e...

  • Page 1355

    Vol.2-1102 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] when p2=0000: mg-pri(sip)>set pad1 0000 p1 -specifying a pad number 1-4 =pad number p2 -specifying a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 0000) set value is 0x0000 setting succeeded. Result is displayed..

  • Page 1356

    Vol.2-1103 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] - artd: pad = 4 - flexible pad send = -4db(gain) - flexible pad recv = 0db to specify the above settings, perform the following steps: step1 ) pad0: pad selection =1 (flexible) step2 ) pad0: pad control =3 (send/receive control) step3 ) pad4: flexible...

  • Page 1357

    Vol.2-1104 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 21. Set Δ pri_common1 Δ[ p1 ] this command is used to specify common data 1 for pri (1.5m). When not specifying an attribute on the interactive setting, the original setting keeps being used. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execut...

  • Page 1358

    Vol.2-1105 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] when p1=0215: 22. Set Δ pri_loopback Δ [p1] this command is used to specify loop-back data for pri (1.5m). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 i...

  • Page 1359

    Vol.2-1106 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note: the trace of loop-back test varies depending on its setting. The following describes its loop-back traces by each. (a) line loop-back the line interface part of mg(pri) sends back all the channels from isdn network. Normally, this loop-back will...

  • Page 1360

    Vol.2-1107 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 23. Set Δ pri_t1_1 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify pri (1.5m) dch data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not entered: when p1=90b...

  • Page 1361

    Vol.2-1108 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 24. Set Δ pri_t1_2 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify alarm and signaling data for pri (1.5m). To make this assignment effec- tive, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is no...

  • Page 1362

    Vol.2-1109 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 25. Set Δ pri_t1_3 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify signaling data for pri (1.5m). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not entered: w...

  • Page 1363

    Vol.2-1110 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 26. Set Δ rtp_stop_detect Δ p1 this command is used to specify a time-out value as one of the conditions for mg based call retention to determine that the call is released. The call will be determined released if rtp is not received exceeding the assi...

  • Page 1364

    Vol.2-1111 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 29. Set Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to specify the network setting of sip server . To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Reliability(0/1: 0): 0...

  • Page 1365

    Vol.2-1112 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. 30. Set Δ smooth_pad Δ p1 this command is used to specify smooth pad mode of dsp. To make t...

  • Page 1366

    Vol.2-1113 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 34. Set Δ warning_tone Δ p1 vlan id (1-4094):1 1) specify vlan id 1-4094 =vlan id cos (0-7):0 2) specify cos 0-7 =cos vlan setting succeeded. Result is displayed. Mg-pri(sip)>set warning_tone 0 p1 -specify a set value (default: 0) 0 = no warning tone ...

  • Page 1367

    Vol.2-1114 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.8 show command 1. Show Δ call_hold this command is used to display the current call hold settings. 2. Show Δ config this command is used to display the current network settings. 3. Show Δ dhcp this command is used to display whether dhcp is enabl...

  • Page 1368

    Vol.2-1115 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] when p1=1 (primary drs) is not entered: when p1=1 (primary drs) is entered: 6. Show Δ drsqos this command is used to display the qos setting for drs session. The following is an example in the case of tos setting. 7. Show Δ dtmf_in this command is use...

  • Page 1369

    Vol.2-1116 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] this command is used to display the waiting time (ms) before starting ec training feature. 1 counter indi- cates 10ms. Mg-pri(sip)>show e_t_waittime ec training start wait time is 10. The current setting is displayed..

  • Page 1370

    Vol.2-1117 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 10. Show Δ ec_training this command is used to display the training feature of echo canceller (ec). Echo canceller feature is used to prevent initial echo (ranging from 500 to 1ms) from occurring in the beginning of speech to pbx 11. Show Δ fax_ecm th...

  • Page 1371

    Vol.2-1118 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 16. Show Δ one_time_pass this command is used to display the one-time password. 17. Show Δ own_name this command is used to display the host name of mg(pri). 18. Show Δ pad p1 this command is used to display the specified pad register for voice qualit...

  • Page 1372

    Vol.2-1119 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 19. Show Δ pri_common1 this command is used to display the common settings 1 for trunk. 20. Show Δ pri_loopback this command is used to display the loop-back settings for tc. Mg-pri(sip)>show pri_common1 value is 0x0215 the current setting is displaye...

  • Page 1373

    Vol.2-1120 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 21. Show Δ pri_t1_ p1 this command is used to display the specified t type settings for tc. The following is an example when selecting 1 in t type. 22. Show Δ rtp_stop_detect this command is used to display the time-out value for rtp reception. 23. Sh...

  • Page 1374

    Vol.2-1121 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 24. Show Δ signaling_qos this command is used to display the qos of signaling. 25. Show Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to display the network settings of sip server. Note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registrati...

  • Page 1375

    Vol.2-1122 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 26. Show Δ smooth_pad this command is used to display smooth pad mode of dsp. 27. Show Δ startport this command is used to display the start port of rtp. 28. Show Δ status this command is used to display the status of mg(pri). 29. Show Δ tcp_timer thi...

  • Page 1376

    Vol.2-1123 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 30. Show Δ version this command is used to display information about hardware, boot program, and firmware. Mg-pri(sip)>show version mg maintenance command version the current setting is displayed. Version information hardware :ca-cc00 2a boot program ...

  • Page 1377

    Vol.2-1124 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 31. Show Δ vlan Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to display the vlan. When p1 is not entered: when p1=1: 32. Show Δ warning_tone this command is used to display the warning tone setting. 14.4.9 ping command 1. Ping Δ p1 this command is used to check the ...

  • Page 1378

    Vol.2-1125 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.10 delete command 1. Delete Δ vlan Δ p1 this command is used to delete vlan. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 14.4.11 save command 1. Save Δ con...

  • Page 1379

    Vol.2-1126 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.13 put command 1. Put Δ configdata Δ p1 this command is used to upload a configuration data to specified tftp server: 14.4.14 reboot command 1. Reboot this command is used to reboot the mg. 14.4.15 exit command 1. Exit this command is used to exi...

  • Page 1380

    Vol.2-1127 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.16 initial command 1. Init Δ config this command is used to initialize the config data in mg(pri). Mg-pri(sip)>init config ***warning!*** this command is for initializing config data. If this command is executed, your configuration is deleted!! R...

  • Page 1381

    Vol.2-1128 mg(pri) (1.5m) [sca-24pria/mg-24pria] 14.4.17 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. System ...

  • Page 1382

    Vol.2-1129 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15. Mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.1 general 15.1.1 what is mg(pri)? Mg(pri) is a media gateway between isdn network and ip network to provide an efficient network through interaction with the telephony server. Mg(pri) is controlled by the telep...

  • Page 1383

    Vol.2-1130 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 1: for proprietary protocol mode, internal phi-pri controls the signaling data, which is accommodated in the telephony server. Call control between internal phi-pri and mg(pri) is executed via tcp/ip port of the system. Note 2: for sip mode, the te...

  • Page 1384

    Vol.2-1131 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.1.2 specifications 1. Dimension • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] mg(pri) is mounted on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") b d alm pwr on line lb line ether 100m li...

  • Page 1385

    Vol.2-1132 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 2. Specifications mg(pri) specifications item specification note codec g.711 64k [bps]: pcm μ -law/a-law (default setting) rtp payload cycle: 30~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8k [bps]: cs-acelp (reduce complexity) rtp payload cycle: 10~40 msec (in 1...

  • Page 1386

    Vol.2-1133 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches front view • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/full duplex) line isdn line ...

  • Page 1387

    Vol.2-1134 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] lamps on the front panel note 1: for alm lamp on mg-30pria, it always remains off. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off alm note 1 red lights when power module failure is detected off normal operation on line green ligh...

  • Page 1388

    Vol.2-1135 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] rear view • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] note: this figure is an example when 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure...

  • Page 1389

    Vol.2-1136 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). As mg(pri) has isdn interface, if the line cable is struck by lightning directly, ...

  • Page 1390

    Vol.2-1137 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 4. Port numbers the following provides the port number to be used in mg(pri). If a firewall is used in your network, do not block the following ports. • when using sip mode. • when using proprietary protocol mode 5. Available channels when using sip mod...

  • Page 1391

    Vol.2-1138 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.1.3 requirements 1. Hardware requirements • pc running terminal software (for maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for connecting to lan. 10base-t:unshielded twisted-pair (utp) straight-through cable category 3 or ...

  • Page 1392

    Vol.2-1139 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.1.4 service conditions 1. Mg(pri) occupies four groups (1hw) of virtual speech channel. One hw (32 channels) can only be used as virtual speech channel of mg(pri) even when only one channel is assigned. The virtual speech channel of mg(pri) cannot co...

  • Page 1393

    Vol.2-1140 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 13. The following are applied when automated attendant is set: - if any virtual register cannot be used, physical register (rst for automated attendant service) will be used. If all the register cannot be used, busy tone will be transmitted. - the maxim...

  • Page 1394

    Vol.2-1141 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.2 installation this section shows how to mount mg(pri). Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 15.2.1 how to set mg(pri) • sca-30pria * this figure is an example to mount an mg(pri) in the left slot on 1u-mpc. Step 1: insert mg(pri) to ...

  • Page 1395

    Vol.2-1142 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] mg(pri) is set as the following. Be sure to place mg(pri) on the flat surface. 15.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg(pri). Mg(pri) provides the following interfaces: • connection to lan • con...

  • Page 1396

    Vol.2-1143 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. General description of cable connection for mg(pri) is explained in the diagram below. Mg(pri) cable connection diagram (front) • sca-30pria front maintenance console (pc) : used for con...

  • Page 1397

    Vol.2-1144 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpose 3.5 φ mono-aural ear phone jack. Adjustment of output level for external hold tone source needs to be started from low and to higher to avoid ove...

  • Page 1398

    Vol.2-1145 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 1: ac power cable connection connect the ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear side of mg(pri). Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] connect the other end of the power cable to approp...

  • Page 1399

    Vol.2-1146 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 2: connect a maintenance terminal (pc) to console connector using console cable. . Note: isdn lines and lan cables are connected in section 15.3 startup mg(pri) and basic tests . Do not con- nect these cables here. Front b d alm pwr on line lb line...

  • Page 1400

    Vol.2-1147 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3 startup mg(pri) and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. When sip mode 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg(pri) data a...

  • Page 1401

    Vol.2-1148 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. Besides, this section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The following ex- pla...

  • Page 1402

    Vol.2-1149 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • check the availability if mg is connected to the following equipment by tandem connection. - : not guaranteed √ : available note 1: tandem here stands for a connection that is established over multiple networks such as shown in the fol- lowing figure....

  • Page 1403

    Vol.2-1150 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 2: for a tandem connection involving central office trunk (cot) and loop dialing trunk (ldt), input level can be lower than minimum dtmf detection level (-27.0 dbm) at mg(pri) because of line loss between two switches. Line loss the signal can be a...

  • Page 1404

    Vol.2-1151 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] mg(pri) can be registered to either internal phi-pri or sp-phi. When registering to internal phi-pri, it works using proprietary protocol, which is called proprietary protocol mode. Here explains mg(pri) data assignment for proprietary protocol mode. Wh...

  • Page 1405

    Vol.2-1152 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, mg, or vs-32. • for isdn trunk data the other data should be “0” (default data). Note: to change the data for existing route (rt), initialize o...

  • Page 1406

    Vol.2-1153 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 4: required for emea. When you use etsi channel negotiation, refer to 6. Etsi channel negotiation in chapter 3 of data programming manual - isdn. • for q-sig trunk data note 5: depending on the level diagram of the network, data “4” is standard. No...

  • Page 1407

    Vol.2-1154 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 3: arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Rt=10 (virtual signaling channel) rt=20 (virtual speech channel) cdn68 (vir): 2 (mg connection) cdn89 (region): 1 = etsi isdn *required ...

  • Page 1408

    Vol.2-1155 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 4: atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual speech channel. The following is an example for assigning channel data of pri (2m). Note that the data setting for dch must be performed after the acic1 command assignment. Trunk d...

  • Page 1409

    Vol.2-1156 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 5: adpc (assignment of determinate point code data) assign the point code (1 ∼ 16383) on virtual speech channel and virtual signaling channel. Note that the point code must be different from the point code for ccis. (isdn does not actually use the ...

  • Page 1410

    Vol.2-1157 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] assign the trunk data to virtual signaling channel, referring to page 1155. Step 10:mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb: 0=make-busy cancel step 11:amgil (assignment of media gatewa...

  • Page 1411

    Vol.2-1158 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] [*] data deletion deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment. Make sure to delete in the order of amgil → atrk. (confirm there is no data left in amgil before deleting atrk).

  • Page 1412

    Vol.2-1159 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] mg(pri) can be registered to either internal phi-pri or sp-phi. When registering to sp-phi, it works using sip, which is called sip mode. Here explains mg(pri) data assignment for sip mode. When registering to in- ternal phi-pri (proprietary protocol mo...

  • Page 1413

    Vol.2-1160 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 3: artd (assignment of route class data) assign the route class data on virtual speech channel and virtual signaling channel. The following is an example when the virtual signaling channel=10 and the virtual speech channel =20: rt=10 (virtual signa...

  • Page 1414

    Vol.2-1161 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 2: when you assign 65(int)=4 (emea only), refer to 5. Etsi isdn data assignment in chapter 3 of data programming manual - isdn. Note 3: in the case of “sub address - addressing”, assign “0”. (refer to sub address-addressing [s-95] in data programmi...

  • Page 1415

    Vol.2-1162 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 10: required for emea. To provide the system with channel negotiation, see 7. Q-sig channel negotia- tion in chapter 3 of data programming guide - isdn. Note 11: assign “1” when the multi-rate bearer service is used..

  • Page 1416

    Vol.2-1163 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 4: arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Rt=10 (virtual signaling channel) rt=20 (virtual speech channel) cdn68 (vir)=2 (mg connection) cdn89 (region): 1 = etsi isdn *required f...

  • Page 1417

    Vol.2-1164 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 5: atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual speech channel. The following is an example for assigning channel data of pri (2.0m). Trunk data channel note: virtual trunk occupies 1hw (4-group). For example, if one channel is ...

  • Page 1418

    Vol.2-1165 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 6: adpc (assignment of determinate point code data) assign the point code (1 ∼ 16383) on virtual speech channel and virtual signaling channel. Note that the point code must be different from the point code for ccis. (isdn does not actually use the ...

  • Page 1419

    Vol.2-1166 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 10:atrk (assignment of trunk data) assign the trunk data to virtual signaling channel, referring to page 1164. Step 11:mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech path. Rt: route number tk: trunk number mb: 0(make-busy cancel) ...

  • Page 1420

    Vol.2-1167 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] [4] security data assignment assign authentication data for sip mode. Step 1: asecl (assignment of media gateway voice control data for ldm) specify a one-time password and the available period. One-time password:enter a one-time password.[4-10 digits] ...

  • Page 1421

    Vol.2-1168 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as...

  • Page 1422

    Vol.2-1169 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear side of mg(pri). Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg(pri) card to restart the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the...

  • Page 1423

    Vol.2-1170 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the network data to mg(pri) by configuration command operation on the maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The followi...

  • Page 1424

    Vol.2-1171 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] assign the configuration data for mg(pri) in proprietary protocol mode. About the configuration data for sip mode, refer to page 1176 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. Note: the default of ...

  • Page 1425

    Vol.2-1172 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: if a prompt does not appear on the screen, press the enter key to display a prompt. Step 4: type “setup tp” to set the network data referring to page 1211 , also set the following network data depending on your lan environment. There are two ways ...

  • Page 1426

    Vol.2-1173 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • when dhcp server is used as ip address of mg(pri), default gateway, and the telephony server is automatically get by dhcp serv- er, there is no need to assign these network data on mg(pri) side. Ip addresses listed below, however, need to be assigned ...

  • Page 1427

    Vol.2-1174 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg(pri) side. Note 1 • dhcp server setting • ip address and subnet mask of mg(pri) • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of drs note 2 • ip address of default gateway note 1...

  • Page 1428

    Vol.2-1175 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 5: save the configuration data assigned . Step 6: reboot the mg(pri) by entering reboot command. Turning off and on/pressing reset button also reset the mg(pri). Note: mg-id (mac address of mg(pri)) is displayed after rebooting. The mg-id needs to ...

  • Page 1429

    Vol.2-1176 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] assign the configuration data for mg(pri) in sip mode. About the configuration data for proprietary protocol mode, refer to page 1171 . Step 1: when the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The default of regist...

  • Page 1430

    Vol.2-1177 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 2: type “usrconsole” at the indicated os prompt and press the enter key. If a prompt (->) displays on the screen, press the enter key. Step 3: mg(pri)’s command prompt appears as follows. Note: if a prompt does not appear on the screen, press the e...

  • Page 1431

    Vol.2-1178 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg(pri), default gateway, and the telephony server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg(pri) side. Ip addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared in...

  • Page 1432

    Vol.2-1179 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on mg(pri) side. Note 1 • dhcp server setting • ip address and subnet mask of mg(pri) • ip address of default gateway • ip address, port number, and host name of sip server note 2 host name can be om...

  • Page 1433

    Vol.2-1180 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • host name of mg(pri) specify the host name of mg(pri) when dns server is enabled. Note 1: ip addresses assigned here will not be effective if dhcp server is set to “enabled”. Be sure to assign “set dhcp disabled” before starting the ip address setting...

  • Page 1434

    Vol.2-1181 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect mg(pri) to the lan. Insert lan cable into the ether connector on the front panel of the mg(pri). On line lamp lights green few minutes later when connection succeeded. • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg(pri) card [m...

  • Page 1435

    Vol.2-1182 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 2: connect isdn line to mg(pri). Insert line cable of dsu into line connector on the front panel of the mg(pri). Check the d lamp of line flashes → steady lights in green when connection succeeded. • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pr...

  • Page 1436

    Vol.2-1183 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.3.6 basic test procedures operation of mg(pri) can be checked from the visual inspection of lamp display. Lamps on the front panel note 1: for alm lamp on mg-30pria, it always turns off. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off po...

  • Page 1437

    Vol.2-1184 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: when the lamps remain the following status for a long time, any failure might occur in initial setting. Make sure of the cable connection and the office data assignment to solve the problem. [1] basic connection test step 1: is the pwr lamp lighti...

  • Page 1438

    Vol.2-1185 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 3: is the on line lamp lighting green? [no] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg(pri) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg(pri): check the configuration data assigned from t...

  • Page 1439

    Vol.2-1186 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg(pri) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg(pri): check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console. • check the contract stat...

  • Page 1440

    Vol.2-1187 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] [3] loop-back test execute the loop-back test on the maintenance console. (a) line loop-back all the channels (32ch) are looped back to isdn on the isdn line interface of mg(pri). (b) payload loop-back all the channels (32ch) are looped back to isdn on ...

  • Page 1441

    Vol.2-1188 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4 operation and maintenance this section explains the operation and maintenance procedure of mg(pri). Configuration data is assigned by using maintenance console (pc). 15.4.1 how to back up and restore config data by serial connection (local download...

  • Page 1442

    Vol.2-1189 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • restoring config data by serial connection and tftp connection step 1 power off mg(pri) and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to mg(pri) by using a console cable (rs232c rj-45) cable. Step 3 connect tftp server to mg(pri) b...

  • Page 1443

    Vol.2-1190 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 12 to reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from tftp server, save it by entering “ save config ” and reboot mg(pri) by entering “ reboot ”. Step 13 exit the hyperterminal by selecting [file] -> [exit] . Step 14 connect the mg(pri) to t...

  • Page 1444

    Vol.2-1191 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.2 how to back up and restore config data by tftp connection (remote download) this config download/upload is performed via tftp. Prepare the following: - pc that is capable of telnet and tftp features. - all the pcs have to belong to the same segme...

  • Page 1445

    Vol.2-1192 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 1 create a folder to back up configuration data. Step 2 start the tftp server program. Step 3 assign the folder as root folder, and then permit write and read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attache...

  • Page 1446

    Vol.2-1193 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] • restoring config data via tftp step 1 if the name of the backup config file is not sysdata, rename it to “sysdata”. Step 2 put the file in the root folder of tftp server, and then start the tftp server program. Step 3 permit read behavior of this fold...

  • Page 1447

    Vol.2-1194 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 9 after a prompt ( -> ) is displayed, enter “ usrconsole ”. Step 10 after a prompt (“ >mg-pri ” or “ >mg-pri (sip)”) is displayed, enter “ get configdata ” to download configuration data into mg(pri). Step 11 confirm that “successfully completed” i...

  • Page 1448

    Vol.2-1195 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg(pri) with a console ca- ble (rs232c rj-45) and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - co...

  • Page 1449

    Vol.2-1196 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 5 set network environment for the tftp server. Ip address: 10.41.1.250 subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 step 6 start the tftp program. Step 7 power on mg(pri). Step 8 activate hyperterminal and set the following: bit per second:9600bps data bits:8bit par...

  • Page 1450

    Vol.2-1197 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 19 make sure that a new firmware has been installed: the following is an example. Step 20 enter “ show config ” to confirm the config data. Step 21 connect the mg(pri) to a network. Step 22 to confirm mg(pri) is properly operating with the upgraded...

  • Page 1451

    Vol.2-1198 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.4 how to upgrade firmware by ftp (remote download) this upgrading process can be performed up to eight mg(pri)s at once. Note that this procedure re- quires ftp server. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - pcs have to belong to the same ...

  • Page 1452

    Vol.2-1199 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 1 put the firmware files (for example, sp3884) and mpgrimwlist.Txt for upgrade in the root fold- er of ftp server. Step 2 set read permission for this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the ftp server progr...

  • Page 1453

    Vol.2-1200 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] step 6 after the mg(pri)s are displayed in result of search, select the appropriate mg(pri) to be upgraded the firmware. Step 7 click the close button to back to the main screen. Step 8 click the exe button to upgrade the firmware to the target mg(pri)s...

  • Page 1454

    Vol.2-1201 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.5 how to use maintenance command configuration command is used just for modifying the default data. Data is to be modified only when it is re- quired and to the necessary part. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server....

  • Page 1455

    Vol.2-1202 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] example indication • mg(pri) card [sca-30pria] • mg(pri) box [mg-30pria] the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. To console connector maintenance console (pc)...

  • Page 1456

    Vol.2-1203 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] in set command, some of the sub commands can be specified with hexadecimal numbers (called set value), which deter- mine a group of the detailed values. It is also possible to omit its parameters; the interactive guidance will help you speci- fying its ...

  • Page 1457

    Vol.2-1204 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] how to read maintenance command the commands in this section are explained with defined characters. These characters’ meanings are in the fol- lowing: characters meaning Δ blank p1 , p2 , p3 parameters [ ] parameter option (indicates not essential).

  • Page 1458

    Vol.2-1205 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] configuration command list the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. List of maintenance command note: first assign the network data to mg(pri) according to your network environment. Command no. Sub command function page setup...

  • Page 1459

    Vol.2-1206 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] list of maintenance command (continued) command no. Sub command function page show 1 call_hold displays the state of call hold setting page 1236 2 config displays the state of dhcp setting page 1236 3 dhcp displays the state of dhcp setting page 1236 4 ...

  • Page 1460

    Vol.2-1207 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-pri(sip)>” as an example here) is indicated. Parameters vary depending on the specified command. When each data (com- mand name, sub command name, parameter) is spe...

  • Page 1461

    Vol.2-1208 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.6 setup command 1. Setup Δ sp this command is used to set up network environment of mg(pri) sip mode. Mg-pri(sip)>setup sp ---dhcp interface set--- current dhcp interface:enable the current setting is displayed. Change dhcp interface? [y (change)/n...

  • Page 1462

    Vol.2-1209 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] input new host name: mgpri.Nec.Com 10) specify a new host name. --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0.0.0.0 the current setting is displayed. Change default gateway? [y (change)/n (current)/ q(quit)]: y 11) select the default...

  • Page 1463

    Vol.2-1210 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. Note: the following are examples that cannot be used in the mg(pri) setting: (example1) netwo...

  • Page 1464

    Vol.2-1211 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 2. Setup Δ tp this command is used to set up network environment of mg(pri) proprietary protocol mode. Mg-pri(sip)>setup tp ---dhcp interface set--- current dhcp interface:enable the current setting is displayed. Change dhcp interface? [y (change)/n (cu...

  • Page 1465

    Vol.2-1212 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note: the following are examples that cannot be set in the mg(pri) setting: (example1) network address...

  • Page 1466

    Vol.2-1213 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: if you enter an invalid value, the system continues to respond to it until three times. If the invalid value is entered in four times, the system forcibly discards the configuration data and exits the sp setup. Note: if the setup is finished by qu...

  • Page 1467

    Vol.2-1214 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.7 set command 1. Set Δ call_hold Δ p1 this command is used to set call retention. By setting “enable” by this command, if a network failure occurred between the telephony server and mg (bri), the call will be retained. However, re-registration to t...

  • Page 1468

    Vol.2-1215 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 5. Set Δ dns_sw this command is used to enable/disable dns server. A bracket ([ ]) shows the current setting. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the main- tenance command. Mg-pri...

  • Page 1469

    Vol.2-1216 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 6. Set Δ drsaddress this command is used to specify ip address for drs.To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony serv...

  • Page 1470

    Vol.2-1217 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data in tos field for ip precedence is shown below: note: the result of data setting is shown ...

  • Page 1471

    Vol.2-1218 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 8. Set Δ dtmf_in Δ p1 this command is used to specify whether inband dtmf is used or not. Note: dtmf relay of in-band signaling is effective only for the speech transferring of codec g.711. As this function cannot distinguish the codec type, make sure t...

  • Page 1472

    Vol.2-1219 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 12. Set Δ fax_ecm this command is used to enable/disable the fax ecm. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 13. Set Δ faxerrordetect Δ p1 this command is us...

  • Page 1473

    Vol.2-1220 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 16. Set Δ interface this command is used to specify the specifications of connection mode. Assign a correct setting corre- sponding to connecting network equipment. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to r...

  • Page 1474

    Vol.2-1221 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 19. Set Δ own_name this command is used to specify a host name for mg(pri). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Mg-pri(sip)>set own_name nec p1 -specify a...

  • Page 1475

    Vol.2-1222 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 20. Set Δ pad0 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify pad 0 data for pri (2m). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not entered: when p1=0000:...

  • Page 1476

    Vol.2-1223 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: the snd or rcv value might be 0 db, depending on the pad control settings. Pad control settings (a-law/ μ -law) pad data pattern 1 pattern 2 pattern 3 pattern 4 pattern 5 artd snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 1 2 2 -3 ...

  • Page 1477

    Vol.2-1224 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 21. Set Δ pad p1 Δ [ p2 ] this command is used to specify pad data for pri (2m). Before using this command, set flexible ( 1 ) in pad selection of set pad0. For more information about the procedures, refer to the next page. To make this assignment effec...

  • Page 1478

    Vol.2-1225 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] when p2=0000: mg-pri(sip)>set pad1 0000 p1 -specifying a pad number 1-4 =pad number p2 -specifying a set value 0000-ffff = set value (default value: 0000) set value is 0x0000 setting succeeded. Result is displayed..

  • Page 1479

    Vol.2-1226 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] - artd: pad = 4 - flexible pad send = -4db(gain) - flexible pad recv = 0db to specify the above settings, perform the following steps: step1 ) pad0: pad selection =1 (flexible) step2 ) pad0: pad control =3 (send/receive control) step3 ) pad4: flexible p...

  • Page 1480

    Vol.2-1227 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 22. Set Δ pri_common1 Δ[ p1 ] this command is used to specify common data 1 for pri (2m). When not specifying an attribute on the interactive setting, the original setting keeps being used. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute th...

  • Page 1481

    Vol.2-1228 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] when p1=0215: 23. Set Δ pri_loopback Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify loop-back data for pri (2m). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is ...

  • Page 1482

    Vol.2-1229 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] note: the trace of loop-back test varies depending on its setting. The following describes its loop-back traces by each. (a) line loop-back the line interface part of mg(pri) sends back all the channels from isdn network. Normally, this loop-back will w...

  • Page 1483

    Vol.2-1230 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 24. Set Δ pri_e1_1 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify pri (2m) dch data. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not entered: when p1=9080: m...

  • Page 1484

    Vol.2-1231 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 25. Set Δ pri_e1_2 Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to specify alarm and signaling data for pri (2m). To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the "save" command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. When p1 is not ente...

  • Page 1485

    Vol.2-1232 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 26. Set Δ rtp_stop_detect Δ p1 this command is used to specify a time-out value as one of the conditions for mg based call retention to determine that the call is released. The call will be determined released if rtp is not received exceeding the assign...

  • Page 1486

    Vol.2-1233 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 29. Set Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to specify the network setting of sip server . To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. Note 1: about ip address...

  • Page 1487

    Vol.2-1234 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 30. Set Δ smooth_pad Δ p1 this command is used to specify smooth pad mode of dsp. To make this assignment effective, it is re- quired to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 31. Set Δ startport Δ p1 this comm...

  • Page 1488

    Vol.2-1235 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 33. Set Δ vlan this command is used to specify the settings for vlan.To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. In mg, one vlan can be created per network. 34. S...

  • Page 1489

    Vol.2-1236 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.8 show command 1. Show Δ call_hold this command is used to display the current call hold settings. 2. Show Δ config this command is used to display the current network settings. 3. Show Δ dhcp this command is used to display whether dhcp is enabled...

  • Page 1490

    Vol.2-1237 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] when p1=1 (primary drs) is not entered: when p1=1 (primary drs) is entered: 6. Show Δ drsqos this command is used to display the qos setting for drs session. The following is an example in the case of tos setting. Mg-pri(sip)>show drsaddress primary drs...

  • Page 1491

    Vol.2-1238 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 7. Show Δ dtmf_in this command is used to display the current setting of dtmf relay of in-band signaling. 8. Show Δ e_t_time this command is used to display an executing time of ec training feature. 9. Show Δ e_t_waittime this command is used to display...

  • Page 1492

    Vol.2-1239 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 14. Show Δ gnd_open_sw this command is used to display the setting of grand open switch. 15. Show Δ impedance this command is used to display the setting of impedance. 16. Show Δ interface this command is used to display the connection mode of lan inter...

  • Page 1493

    Vol.2-1240 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 20. Show Δ pad p1 this command is used to display the specified pad register for voice quality tuning. The following is an example in the case of displaying pad0. 21. Show Δ pri_common1 this command is used to display the common settings 1 for trunk. Mg...

  • Page 1494

    Vol.2-1241 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 22. Show Δ pri_loopback this command is used to display the loop-back settings for tc. 23. Show Δ pri_e1_1 this command is used to display e1 dch settings for trunk. Mg-pri(sip)>show pri_loopback value is 0x0000 the current setting is displayed. Local l...

  • Page 1495

    Vol.2-1242 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 24. Show Δ pri_e1_2 this command is used to display e1 settings for trunk. 25. Show Δ rtp_stop_detect this command is used to display the time-out value for rtp reception. 26. Show Δ signaling_port_no this command is used to display the port number of s...

  • Page 1496

    Vol.2-1243 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 28. Show Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to display the network settings of sip server. Note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. ...

  • Page 1497

    Vol.2-1244 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 29. Show Δ smooth_pad this command is used to display smooth pad mode of dsp. 30. Show Δ startport this command is used to display the start port of rtp. 31. Show Δ status this command is used to display the status of mg(pri). 32. Show Δ tcp_timer this ...

  • Page 1498

    Vol.2-1245 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 33. Show Δ version this command is used to display information about hardware, boot program, and firmware. Mg-pri(sip)>show version mg maintenance command version the current setting is displayed. Version information hardware :ca-cc01 1a boot program :s...

  • Page 1499

    Vol.2-1246 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 34. Show Δ vlan Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to display the vlan. When p1 is not entered: when p1=1: 35. Show Δ warning_tone this command is used to display the warning tone setting. 15.4.9 ping command 1. Ping Δ p1 this command is used to check the co...

  • Page 1500

    Vol.2-1247 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.10 delete command 1. Delete Δ vlan Δ p1 this command is used to delete vlan. To make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “save” command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command. 15.4.11 save command 1. Save Δ confi...

  • Page 1501

    Vol.2-1248 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.14 reboot command 1. Reboot this command is used to reboot the mg. 15.4.15 exit command 1. Exit this command is used to exit the program. Normal operation: when configuration data is changed, the following is displayed according to the changed data...

  • Page 1502

    Vol.2-1249 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.16 initial command 1. Init Δ config this command is used to initialize the config data in mg(pri). Mg-pri(sip)>init config ***warning!*** this command is for initializing config data. If this command is executed, your configuration is deleted!! Rea...

  • Page 1503

    Vol.2-1250 mg(pri) (2m) [sca-30pria/mg-30pria] 15.4.17 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. System da...

  • Page 1504

    Vol.2-1251 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16. Mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.1 general 16.1.1 what is mg-t1(sip)? Mg-t1(sip) is a media gateway between t1 carrier (1.5mbps of digital transmission service with 24 separate channels) and ip network to provide an efficient network through interaction with the tele...

  • Page 1505

    Vol.2-1252 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.1.2 function overview one of the main purposes of mg-t1(sip) in the system is to establish peer-to-peer connection between ip net- work and pstn line, emulating the digital circuit on t1 interface to the connected line’s signaling. *refer to section 16.1.5 servi...

  • Page 1506

    Vol.2-1253 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.1.3 specifications 1. Dimension • mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] mg-t1(sip) is mounted on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). Unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") b d alm pwr on line lb line ether 100m link console reset music.

  • Page 1507

    Vol.2-1254 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 2. Specifications mg-t1(sip) specifications function specification note codec g.711 64k [bps]: pcm μ -law/a-law rtp payload cycle: 20~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.729a 8k [bps]: cs-acelp (reduce complexity) rtp payload cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) g.723.1 5...

  • Page 1508

    Vol.2-1255 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] mg-t1(sip) specifications for t1 interface function specification note pulsing signal pb 60/120msec interval multi-frame 12/24 multiframe line signal b8zs/ami or zcs channel associated signaling bit steal signaling a logic positive/negative available for sending/re...

  • Page 1509

    Vol.2-1256 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 3. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches • front view: mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] connectors on front panel connector function note ether lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/full duplex) line t1 line connection rj-45 -t1 (1.5m): 24ch co...

  • Page 1510

    Vol.2-1257 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] lamps on the front panel note: when mg-t1(sip) keeps the lamp indications below continuously, some error has occurred in initial set- ting. Check the system data and cable connection to clear the problem. Lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off...

  • Page 1511

    Vol.2-1258 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • rear view: mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] note: this figure is an example when 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit (optional) for dual power configuration. (see the installation manual for the power unit mounting proce- dure.) conne...

  • Page 1512

    Vol.2-1259 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 4. Port numbers the following provides the port number to be used in the system including mg-t1(sip). If a firewall is used in your network, do not block the following ports. Note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the netwo...

  • Page 1513

    Vol.2-1260 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.1.4 requirements 1. Hardware requirements • 1u-mpc (multi purposes chassis) for mounting on 19-inch rack *required for mg-t1(sip) card on- ly. • pc running terminal software (for using maintenance console) • cables lan cable: use any of the following cables for ...

  • Page 1514

    Vol.2-1261 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.1.5 service conditions 1. Mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] is available for north america. 2. Assign the following system data to use mg-t1(sip): - asydl, sys 1, index880, bit3=1 (internal phe is valid) - asydl, sys 1, index885, bit7=1 (sp implementation is valid) 3. Mg-...

  • Page 1515

    Vol.2-1262 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 14. Mg-t1(sip) usually applies pad/ec control ip support setting data. However, when the system data assigns the pad/ec control ip support to out of service, mg-t1(sip) adopts the setting by amgvl or aivcl command. When there is no command assignment, the default v...

  • Page 1516

    Vol.2-1263 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 24. On detecting any failure from t1 interface, the telephony server outputs the system messages below: call origination/termination via mg-t1(sip) cannot be executed when detecting any failure or during loopback setting on t1 line. 25. Conditions on fault monitori...

  • Page 1517

    Vol.2-1264 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • dimg: to display the information of mg. Select the radio button “media gateway information” and specify the ph lens. Information is displayed for each virtual speech channel. • dptr: to display the line capacity and the number of license. Mg-t1(sip) is counted on...

  • Page 1518

    Vol.2-1265 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using mg-t1(sip). Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. 16.2.1 how to set mg-t1(sip) • mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] * this figure is an example to mount an mg-t1(sip) card ...

  • Page 1519

    Vol.2-1266 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.2.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to the mg-t1(sip). Mg-t1(sip) provides the following interfaces: • power supply • ground connection • serial port connection to maintenance console • connection to audio equipment for external music-on...

  • Page 1520

    Vol.2-1267 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] connect the required cables according to the system configuration. General description of cable connection for mg-t1(sip) is explained in the diagram below. The following figures show the connection to mg-t1(sip) card. Mg-t1(sip) cable connection diagram (front) • ...

  • Page 1521

    Vol.2-1268 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 1: ac power cable connection connect the ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of 1u-mpc. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. • mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Rear pact ac power...

  • Page 1522

    Vol.2-1269 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 2: connect ground cable to prevent the device from lightning, electric shock, and external noises. Note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lightning struck, and other electrical surges, be sure to take proper connection to grounding (less tha...

  • Page 1523

    Vol.2-1270 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3 startup mg-t1(sip) and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. 1. Internal phe data assignment 2. Sp-phi data assignment 3. Mg-t1(sip) data assignmet 4. Security data assignment step 1: data assignm...

  • Page 1524

    Vol.2-1271 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.1 data assignment by pcpro this section explains the data assignment procedures to the telephony server by pcpro. • unstable network environment such as using nat and dial-up connection is not preferred. • if an access list is applied to the network, looking i...

  • Page 1525

    Vol.2-1272 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note 1: tandem here stands for a connection that is established over multiple networks such as shown in the fol- lowing figure. Note 2: for a tandem connection involving central office trunk (cot) and loop dialing trunk (ldt), input level can be lower than minimum ...

  • Page 1526

    Vol.2-1273 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] [1] internal phe data assignment mg-t1(sip) is registered to sp-phi. In this case, mph is used to control sp-phi. For the use of mph, it is required to make internal phe function valid. So internal phe data assignment is necessary. About the proce- dure for the int...

  • Page 1527

    Vol.2-1274 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 2: arti (assignment of trunk application data) assign the application data for trunk in virtual speech channel. Rt = route number of virtual speech channel cdn68 (vir): 2=mg connection to use fax, specify the fax relay settings: cdn71 (fxd) cdn72 (fxjs) cdn73 ...

  • Page 1528

    Vol.2-1275 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 4: mbtk (make busy of trunk) cancel the make-busy of virtual speech channels. Rt: route number of virtual speech channel tk: trunk number of virtual speech channel mb: 0=make-busy cancel step 5: amgil (assignment of media gateway information for ldm) *make sur...

  • Page 1529

    Vol.2-1276 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] [4] security data assignment step 1: asecl (assignment of security data for ldm) assign one-time password and its available period. One-time password: enter one-time password. [4-10 digits] available period: specify the available period of one-time password. Note: ...

  • Page 1530

    Vol.2-1277 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • ...

  • Page 1531

    Vol.2-1278 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear side of mg-t1(sip). Note: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of mg-t1(sip) to re- start the card and start its boot program. Step 2: make sure the led indi...

  • Page 1532

    Vol.2-1279 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the network data to mg-t1(sip) by configuration command operation on the maintenance console. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server for mg-t1(si...

  • Page 1533

    Vol.2-1280 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 3: mg-t1(sip)’s command prompt “ mg-t1(sip)> ”appears as follows. Note: if the prompt mg-t1(sip)> does not appear on the screen, press the enter key to display. Step 4: type “setup sp” to set the network data depending on your lan environment. Note: the settin...

  • Page 1534

    Vol.2-1281 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to mg-t1(sip), default gateway, and the telephony server, there is no need to assign these network data on mg-t1(sip) side. Set the following data on mg- t1(sip) side. • communication spee...

  • Page 1535

    Vol.2-1282 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • when dhcp server is not used and dns server is used set the following data on mg-t1(sip) side. • ip address of dns server • ip address and subnet mask of mg-t1(sip) • host name of mg-t1(sip) • ip address of default gateway • host name of sip server • communicatio...

  • Page 1536

    Vol.2-1283 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • when dhcp server is not used and dns server is not used set the following data on mg-t1(sip) side. • ip address and subnet mask of mg-t1(sip) • host name of mg-t1(sip) (*can be skipped) • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of sip server no...

  • Page 1537

    Vol.2-1284 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 7: assign t1 interface data by setup t1 command (see setup t1 command in section 16.4.5 how to use maintenance command for the detail assignment procedure.). Step 8: save the configuration data assigned. . Step 9: reboot the mg-t1(sip) by entering reboot comma...

  • Page 1538

    Vol.2-1285 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect mg-t1(sip) to the lan. Insert lan cable into the ether connector on the front panel of the mg-t1(sip). On line lamp lights green in a few minutes when connection succeeded. • mg-t1(sip) card [sca-24dtia] step 2: connect t1 li...

  • Page 1539

    Vol.2-1286 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.3.6 basic test procedures operation of mg-t1(sip) can be checked from the visual inspection of lamp display. Lamps on the front panel lamp name color meaning of indication pwr green power on off power off *turns on → off on detecting fan alarm alm red lights whe...

  • Page 1540

    Vol.2-1287 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: when mg-t1(sip) keeps the lamp indications below continuously, some error has occurred in initial set- ting. Check the system data and cable connection to clear the problem. [1] basic connection test step 1: is the pwr lamp lighting green? [no] • check the ac...

  • Page 1541

    Vol.2-1288 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 3: is the on line lamp lighting green? [no] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg-t1(sip) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg-t1(sip): check the configuration data assigned from the mai...

  • Page 1542

    Vol.2-1289 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and mg-t1(sip) side. - telephony server: is the data assignment on each pcpro command correct? - mg-t1(sip): check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console. • check the contract status of ...

  • Page 1543

    Vol.2-1290 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] [3] loop-back test execute the loopback test on the maintenance console. Loopback point (local, line, payload) can be specified by the set loopback command. (1) local loopback t1 line interface part of mg-t1(sip) sends back all the channels to lan side. The counter...

  • Page 1544

    Vol.2-1291 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4 operation and maintenance 16.4.1 how to back up and restore configuration data by serial connection (local download) this configuration data download/upload is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg-t1(sip) with a console cable (rs-232c ⇔ rj-45) and ...

  • Page 1545

    Vol.2-1292 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • restoring config data by serial connection and tftp connection step 1 power off mg-t1(sip) and disconnect it from the network. Step 2 connect serial console to mg-t1(sip) by using a console cable (rs-232c ⇔ rj-45). Step 3 connect tftp server to mg-t1(sip) by usin...

  • Page 1546

    Vol.2-1293 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 12 to reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from tftp server, save it by entering “ save configdata ” and reboot mg-t1(sip) by entering “ reboot ”. Step 13 exit the hyperterminal by selecting [file] → [exit] . Step 14 connect the mg-t1(sip) to the ...

  • Page 1547

    Vol.2-1294 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4.2 how to backup and restore configuration data by tftp connection (remote download) this config download/upload is performed via tftp. Prepare the following: - pc that is capable of telnet and tftp features. - all the pcs have to belong to the same segment wit...

  • Page 1548

    Vol.2-1295 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 4 to search for the lens of the target mg-t1(sip), use the ipan command. Step 5 to make environment setting for telnet, use the atud command. - specify the lens, which is belonging to the target mg-t1(sip). - specify a user id and a password, which are require...

  • Page 1549

    Vol.2-1296 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • restoring configuration data via tftp step 1 if the name of the backup config file is not sysdata, rename it to “sysdata”. Step 2 put the file in the root folder of tftp server, and then start the tftp server program. Step 3 permit read behavior of this folder. F...

  • Page 1550

    Vol.2-1297 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 9 after a prompt ( -> ) is displayed, enter “ usrconsole ”. Step 10 after a prompt ( mg-t1(sip)> ) is displayed, enter “ get configdata address> ” to download configuration data into mg-t1(sip). Step 11 confirm that “successfully completed” is displayed in the...

  • Page 1551

    Vol.2-1298 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4.3 how to upgrade firmware by serial connection (local download) this firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a pc to each mg-t1(sip) with a console cable (rs-232c ⇔ rj-45) and a lan cable. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - console ca...

  • Page 1552

    Vol.2-1299 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 4 permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the tftp server program. Step 5 change the network setting (ip address and subnet mask) of the pc (used as tftp server) temporarily to connect to the mg...

  • Page 1553

    Vol.2-1300 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 19 make sure that a new firmware has been installed by checking the following: step 20 enter “ show configdata ” to confirm the config data. Step 21 change the ip address and subnet mask of tftp server pc to the original setting. Step 22 connect the mg-t1(sip)...

  • Page 1554

    Vol.2-1301 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4.4 how to upgrading firmware by ftp (remote download) this upgrading process can be performed up to eight mg-t1(sip)s at once. Prepare the following: - firmware for upgrade - pcs (pcpro and ftp server) have to communicate with the telephony server and mg-t1(sip...

  • Page 1555

    Vol.2-1302 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 1 put the firmware files (for example, sp3926) and mgdtimwlist.Txt for upgrade in the root folder of ftp server. Step 2 set read permission for this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached to the ftp server program. Step 3 act...

  • Page 1556

    Vol.2-1303 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] step 4 select specify terminal type in how to specify terminal, and then select mg-t1[sip] . Step 5 click the search button. Step 6 after the mg-t1(sip)s are displayed in result of search, select the appropriate mg-t1(sip) to be upgraded the firmware. Step 7 click ...

  • Page 1557

    Vol.2-1304 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4.5 how to use maintenance command configuration command is used just for modifying the default data. Data is to be modified only when it is re- quired and to the necessary part. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telepho...

  • Page 1558

    Vol.2-1305 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] the user input command is consist of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. In set command, some of the sub commands can be specified with hexadecimal numbers (called set value), which determine a group of the ...

  • Page 1559

    Vol.2-1306 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] [how to read maintenance command] the commands in this section are explained with defined characters. These characters’ meanings are in the fol- lowing: [configuration command list] the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. List of mainte...

  • Page 1560

    Vol.2-1307 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] list of maintenance command (continued) input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-t1(sip)>” as an example here) is indicated. Parameters vary depending on the specified command. When each data (command name, sub comman...

  • Page 1561

    Vol.2-1308 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] [help] during the maintenance command program is activated, it also provides help function for referring to available command and sub command. After a prompt is indicated, request to list up the target help by inputting “?”, “command name + ?”, or “command name + s...

  • Page 1562

    Vol.2-1309 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] setup command assign ip network data and t1 interface data following the setting command shown in dialog form. Be sure to save the entered data at the end of each setup command. Note: when any abnormal data is entered, the dialog asks to enter proper data until thr...

  • Page 1563

    Vol.2-1310 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] f setting ip address and subnet mask of mg-t1(sip): note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: do not assign network address and broadcast address for mg-t1(sip). See the examples below: (example 1) network address cannot be assigned as...

  • Page 1564

    Vol.2-1311 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] f setting default gateway ip address: f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server: input new host name: mgt1.Nec.Com enter new host name of mg-t1(sip) in full- domain format. E.G. Mgt1.Nec.Com (*up to 63 bytes of alphanumeric characters, . (perio...

  • Page 1565

    Vol.2-1312 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. F setting communication speed of lan interface: f save the assigned configuration data at the last of set...

  • Page 1566

    Vol.2-1313 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] f setting multiframe format and equalizer (transmission distance) data for t1 interface: f setting optional data for t1 interface: f to stop setup t1 command and save the changed data: ---mandatory setting--- 1.Multiframe (0:24mf/1:12mf)[0]: 1 2.Equalizer (0:0-40m/...

  • Page 1567

    Vol.2-1314 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: restart if the setting of “1. All ch make busy” in optional setting is changed. Set command 1. Set Δ defaultroute Δ p1 this command is used to specify ip address for default gateway. Note that default route be located at the same segment with mg-t1(sip). Note...

  • Page 1568

    Vol.2-1315 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save command and restart before exiting the maintenance command. 3. Set Δ dns_sw this command is used to enable/disable dns server. Note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the c...

  • Page 1569

    Vol.2-1316 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] this command is used to enable/disable the training feature mode of echo canceller. Echo canceller fea- ture is used to prevent initial echo (ranging from 500 to 1ms) occurred in the beginning of speech to the telephony server. 7. Set Δ faxerrordetect Δ p1 this com...

  • Page 1570

    Vol.2-1317 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save command and restart before exiting the maintenance command. 10. Set Δ ippaddress Δ p1 Δ p2 this command is used to set ip address and subnet mask of mg-t1(sip). Be sure to assign this data when static addres...

  • Page 1571

    Vol.2-1318 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save command and restart before exiting the maintenance command. 12. Set Δ own_name Δ p1 this command is used to specify a host name of mg-t1(sip). Note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save comman...

  • Page 1572

    Vol.2-1319 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] (2) line loopback the line interface part of mg-t1(sip) sends back all the channels from t1 side. Normally, this loop- back will work with the timing of pstn. (3) payload loopback the speech path control part of mg-t1(sip) sends back all the channels from t1. Diffe...

  • Page 1573

    Vol.2-1320 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • when p1=clear is entered to delete the current qos setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: the value in ( ) shows the current setting. F to set in dialog format (press ent...

  • Page 1574

    Vol.2-1321 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save command and restart before exiting the maintenance command. 16. Set Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to assign ip address, port number, and host name of sip server. Note 1: about ip address of sip serv...

  • Page 1575

    Vol.2-1322 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 17. Set Δ smooth_pad Δ p1 this command is used to specify smooth pad mode of dsp. Note: to make this assignment effective, execute the save command and restart before exiting the maintenance command. 18. Set Δ startport Δ p1 this command is used to specify the star...

  • Page 1576

    Vol.2-1323 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 20. Set Δ warning_tone Δ p1 show command 1. Show Δ configdata this command is used to display the current network settings. 2. Show Δ dhcp this command is used to display whether dhcp is enabled at current network. 3. Show Δ dns_sw this command is used to display w...

  • Page 1577

    Vol.2-1324 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 5. Show Δ e_t_waittime this command is used to display the waiting time (ms) before starting ec training feature. 1 counter indi- cates 10ms. 6. Show Δ ec_training this command is used to display the training feature of echo canceller (ec). Echo canceller feature i...

  • Page 1578

    Vol.2-1325 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 11. Show Δ one_time_pass this command is used to display the one-time password. 12. Show Δ own_name this command is used to display the host name of mg-t1(sip). 13. Show Δ loopback this command is used to display the loopback settings for tc. 14. Show Δ signaling_p...

  • Page 1579

    Vol.2-1326 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16. Show Δ sipsv_ipaddress this command is used to display the network settings of sip server. Note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. 17. Show Δ s...

  • Page 1580

    Vol.2-1327 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 19. Show Δ status this command is used to display the status of mg-t1(sip). Mg-t1(sip)> show status register mode mac address link state speed duplex vlan mode dhcp mode ip address subnet mask default gateway dns mode dns server address encryption +--sip encrypt +-...

  • Page 1581

    Vol.2-1328 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 20. Show Δ t1 this command is used to display the setting related to t1 interface. Mg-t1(sip)> show t1 ---mandatory setting--- 1. Multiframe (0:24mf/1:12mf) 2. Equalizer (0:0-40m/1:40-80m/2:80-120m/3:120-162m/4:162m-) :0 :0 the current setting is displayed. ---opti...

  • Page 1582

    Vol.2-1329 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 21. Show Δ version this command is used to display information about hardware, boot program, and firmware. 22. Show Δ vlan Δ [ p1 ] this command is used to display the vlan. • when p1 is not entered: mg-t1(sip)> show version mg maintenance command version the curre...

  • Page 1583

    Vol.2-1330 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] • when p1=1: 23. Show Δ warning_tone this command is used to display the warning tone setting. Ping command 1. Ping Δ p1 this command is used to check the connectivity of network. Delete command 1. Delete Δ vlan Δ p1 this command is used to delete vlan. Note: to ma...

  • Page 1584

    Vol.2-1331 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] save command 1. Save Δ configdata this command is used to save the configuration data. Get command 1. Get Δ configdata Δ p1 this command is used to download configuration data from tftp server. Put command 1. Put Δ configdata Δ p1 this command is used to upload a c...

  • Page 1585

    Vol.2-1332 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] reboot command 1. Reboot this command is used to reboot the mg-t1(sip). Exit command 1. Exit this command is used to exit the program. • normal operation: • when configuration data is changed, the following is displayed according to the changed data: note: if exit ...

  • Page 1586

    Vol.2-1333 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] initial command 1. Init Δ configdata this command is used to initialize the configuration data in mg-t1(sip). Mg-t1(sip)> init config ***warning!!*** this command initializes the configuration data. This deletes the current setting. Recommend to back up the setting...

  • Page 1587

    Vol.2-1334 mg-t1(sip) [sca-24dtia] 16.4.6 error messages when an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of error messages message cause file not found on the tftp server. System data cannot be ...

  • Page 1588

    Vol.2-1335 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17. Mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] here explains mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]: function overview, configuration, and installation procedure. 17.1 general mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] is a sip-compatible media gateway to realize communication with service networks. Mg-sip128 [mg...

  • Page 1589

    Vol.2-1336 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.1.1 specifications (1) part names the following are the appearances of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. Front rear note: after installing a mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg], fix the ac power cable with the attached ac power cable stopper. (2) details [1] hardware specificatio...

  • Page 1590

    Vol.2-1337 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [2] functions (a) front dimensions 65 (h) x 430 (w) x 297 (d) mm (corresponds to 1.5u when mounting on a 19-inch rack with depth of a4 paper.) weight 3.8kg input power source ac100v (50/60hz) ± 10% maximum power con- sumption 75w (for maximum cpu load) qos ieee802...

  • Page 1591

    Vol.2-1338 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 1: it works only when cpu pwr switch on the rear panel is on. Note 2: to confirm that shutdown is complete, check the pwr lamp. When auto-shutdown does not work, press and hold cpu pwr switch for four seconds to turn off forcibly. Note 3: when console cable i...

  • Page 1592

    Vol.2-1339 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.2 installation this section describes installing and cabling procedures for an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg]. Take anti-static measures to work on it. (1) installing procedure you can mount an mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] on a 19-inch rack. The procedure is the same as...

  • Page 1593

    Vol.2-1340 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] step3: plug lan cables into the ether1 and ether2 connectors (rj-45). Note 6 front panel note 6: if you want to establish ip addresses of lan and a sip network in the same segment, connect a lan cable only to a connector for lan. Cable connection is completed. Mov...

  • Page 1594

    Vol.2-1341 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.3 startup and installation test here explains procedures for startup and installation test of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. Step1: assigning office data on the telephony server refer to media gateway sip [m-111] in data programming manual - business. Step2: connect...

  • Page 1595

    Vol.2-1342 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: you can use any icon and name. “connect to” window is opened. Choose a com port which is connected to mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] in “connect using” box. Enter “ok.” note 7 note 7: it depends on the pc. Mgsip mgsip.

  • Page 1596

    Vol.2-1343 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] “port settings” tab opens. Set the values as the following figure shows..

  • Page 1597

    Vol.2-1344 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] step3: turning on mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] making sure of cable connection between the maintenance terminal (pc) and the mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] via console cable, turning on pwr switch. Make sure that pwr lamp on the front panel of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] turn...

  • Page 1598

    Vol.2-1345 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] step4: setting configuration data on mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (1) on the activated mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] with “ mgsip login: ” displayed, type “con- fig” as the login name, and press enter key. (2) prompt “mg(sip)>” appears: you are in data setting mode. (3) us...

  • Page 1599

    Vol.2-1346 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • ether1 lan: telephony server side • ether2 wan: sip network side note: when the ip addresses of both lan and wan are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 port only. Select one port in the number of port setting, and assign ether1’s ip address only. In this c...

  • Page 1600

    Vol.2-1347 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • if you select one port in the number of port setting, be careful not to use the same rtp port number when setting the non-default sip network rtp base port number (by “set sip_rtp_port_no” command) or ipx net- work rtp base port number (by “set ipx_rtp_port_no” ...

  • Page 1601

    Vol.2-1348 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.3.4 setting of sip server data set the ip address or fqdn, and port number, type, and sip domain of a sip proxy server. (fqdn=fully qual- ified domain name) set sip proxy server data by using “set sip_server” command. This data can be assigned by using ip addre...

  • Page 1602

    Vol.2-1349 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: • pressing the enter key can skip the item. Make sure to input data for “sip server type” and “ipaddress/ fqdn”; these cannot be skipped. • to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configura- tion and rest...

  • Page 1603

    Vol.2-1350 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] rebooting of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] reboot the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] by using “reboot” command. The assigned configuration data can also be saved onto the flash memory by using this command. Note 9: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data ...

  • Page 1604

    Vol.2-1351 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] after the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] is rebooted, the following message appears on the mainte- nance console. Step5: connecting mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] to lan and wan • connect mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] to lan and wan. Connect a cable to “lan” connector (lan side: e...

  • Page 1605

    Vol.2-1352 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] connects to a network with transmitting speed of 1gbps. [speed lamp is lighting in green] • the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] connects to a network with transmitting speed of 100mbps. If you expected transmitting speed of 1gbps, check a c...

  • Page 1606

    Vol.2-1353 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: when using pcpro, make sure of the registration status of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] by us- ing “dimg” command. * if “mg (sip) offline start” is displayed on maintenance console, make sure of the following. • is the lan cable securely inserted to ether 2 (sip ...

  • Page 1607

    Vol.2-1354 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.4 operation and maintenance this section explains mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]: operation and maintenance..

  • Page 1608

    Vol.2-1355 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.4.1 fan replacement this section describes the procedure to replace fans inside an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg]. * a failure of a cooling fan rises the temperature inside of an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg], which greatly influences the system. Please replace a coolin...

  • Page 1609

    Vol.2-1356 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] step3: remove the fan connector; the screw; the fan. Note: if you are replacing fans as the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] remains on, removing both fans may generate heat inside, resulting in system failure. Be sure to replace one by one, but not at the same time. Step...

  • Page 1610

    Vol.2-1357 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.5 configuration commands 17.5.1 how to use the configuration command configuration commands are used to change the default settings. Change the settings only where it is necessary. Start a communication software such as hyperterminal note 1 of maintenance conso...

  • Page 1611

    Vol.2-1358 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] commands other than “ping” cannot be set within a single line; use interactive mode to input values. The following figure shows an example of data setting using the interactive mode. * the example of the screen below the above example is omitted here. Note: ip pre...

  • Page 1612

    Vol.2-1359 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.5.2 list of maintenance console commands note: drs (device registration server) used in this section refers to a control function of the telephony server. Set the ip address of the telephony server (tp). R: required c: not required, but configurable set: comman...

  • Page 1613

    Vol.2-1360 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 21 dtmf_mode c assigns a type of dtmf relay mode on the sip network. 22 h245_base_port_no c assigns the base port number for h.245 tcp server. 23 hc_alarm c specifies the alarm transmission destination. 24 hc_timer c assigns the health check timer value. 25 interf...

  • Page 1614

    Vol.2-1361 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 1: required to set silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection in the acd system. Note 2: available for sp-4051 mgsip prog-g issue 2 or later. Note 3: this command cannot be used in combination with the codec_change command or “3pcc function” of the sip_te...

  • Page 1615

    Vol.2-1362 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] reboot : command to reboot mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sub command must? Function 1 - - restarts mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] and saves the settings. Ping : command to use the “ping” for ipv4 address sub command must? Function 1 parameter (enter the ping destination ipv4...

  • Page 1616

    Vol.2-1363 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.5.3 ipv6 function mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] supports ipv6 function based on rfc2460 in order to communicate with the sip server having an ipv6 address. When ipv6 mode is enabled, ipv6 packets are sent from/received to wan side (through the ether2 port) on mg-sip...

  • Page 1617

    Vol.2-1364 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [operating procedure] to enable ipv6 function, execute the following commands. For the details of the commands, refer to 17.5.2 . List of maintenance console commands . Step1: select “ipv6” by “set ip_version” command. Note 4 step2: set sip server address by “set ...

  • Page 1618

    Vol.2-1365 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 5: when ipv6 function is in service, ether2 ip address can be generated by mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] after mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] receives the ra message from the router. So ether2 ip address setting is unnecessary. Note 6: • “set ip_version: ipv6” is execu...

  • Page 1619

    Vol.2-1366 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (6) in this feature, ipv6 addresses can be abbreviated. For example, “2001:db8::850” can be typed. Also, ipv6 addresses can be typed in the general form. For example, “2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0850” can be typed. • short form • general form (7) “one-port...

  • Page 1620

    Vol.2-1367 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] set command (1) 183rbt setting of local rbt connection select function when receiving 183 message (w/o sdp) this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. [setting example] note: the conditions of this ...

  • Page 1621

    Vol.2-1368 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (3) another_keynumber setting of additional pilot numbers assigns additional three pilot numbers to the sip server other than the one registered by “set keynumber” command. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • unique number to b...

  • Page 1622

    Vol.2-1369 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] the command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes- sage in updating ack and register for re-invite/200 ok. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-...

  • Page 1623

    Vol.2-1370 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] the command is used to specify whether to send call-id to sv8500. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (8) cause_table setting of error translation table select fun...

  • Page 1624

    Vol.2-1371 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (10) cdn_pattern setting of a way of obtaining information for cdn (called num...

  • Page 1625

    Vol.2-1372 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (11) check_number setting a limit to the letters and numerals that can be used for calling/called party number this command is ...

  • Page 1626

    Vol.2-1373 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • in the telephony server side, a system data setting (asydl, system data 1, index 1144, bit 6=1 (codec change function is in service) is required to enable this function. • in the telephony server side, payload...

  • Page 1627

    Vol.2-1374 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] this command is used to assign how to obtain cpn (calling party number), and to change the priority of obtaining calling party number when a call terminates via sip network. When this command is enabled, calling party number is obtained according to the priority o...

  • Page 1628

    Vol.2-1375 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (15) default setting the default values to the configuration data the command is used to set back to the default setting of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] configuration. Make sure to execute this command when updating firmware to a different firmware name (sp-xxxx). [se...

  • Page 1629

    Vol.2-1376 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [setting example] when locating sip servers function (rfc3263) (=2) is selected note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • the cache retention time length is 60 seconds. • available transport protocols are tcp and udp. • during naptr lookup, sip proces...

  • Page 1630

    Vol.2-1377 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • to set sip domain, change the domain name from the “domain name” parameter of “set sip_server” com- mand or “set_self_sip_domain” comman...

  • Page 1631

    Vol.2-1378 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (20) drs_qos setting of tos value of drs server this command is used to specify the tos value of ip packets to be sent to drs server. [setting example] note: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. Input ip address.(default=0.0.0.0) :172.16.253.4 ip...

  • Page 1632

    Vol.2-1379 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] prec.=precedence(3bits) d=delay(1bit) t=throughput(1bit) r=reliability(1bit) c=cost(1bit) note: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. Dscp=differentiated service code point(6bits) note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the ente...

  • Page 1633

    Vol.2-1380 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • when negotiation is selected: • when out-band is selected: • when in-band is selected: mg(sip) > set dtmf_mode select dtmf mode. 0=negotiation(default) 1=out-band 2=in-band input:0 0: negotiation (default) 1: out-band (fixed) 2: in-band (fixed) input dtmf durati...

  • Page 1634

    Vol.2-1381 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows: • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. • at dtmf mode negotiation/out-band, the payload type 103 cannot be used. • note that the sum of...

  • Page 1635

    Vol.2-1382 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (24) hc_timer setting of health check timer value this command is used to specify the health check time-out value. [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (25) interfac...

  • Page 1636

    Vol.2-1383 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 9: when100mbps (fixed) is selected, “full duplex” is automatically applied to the interface. There- fore, this command line will not appear for interface that is specified as “100mbps (fixed)”. Note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (26) i...

  • Page 1637

    Vol.2-1384 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [ipv4] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 only as shown below. * if you select one port in the number of port setting, ether2 setting is not perform...

  • Page 1638

    Vol.2-1385 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • if you select one port in the number of port setting, be careful not to use the same rtp port number (set by “set sip_rtp_port_no” or “set ipx_rtp_port_no” command) when setting the non-default sip network rtp base port number. (27) ip_version setting of sip sid...

  • Page 1639

    Vol.2-1386 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when route type = 1 is selected: when route type = 2 is selected: • [to assign destination network address and gateway address] usually, gateway data should be set as ‘static’ at lan (telephony server network) side. Mg(sip) > set ipx_route select route type(0:exit...

  • Page 1640

    Vol.2-1387 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 10: do not set routing in the segment where mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] belongs. • [to assign routing information (gateway address only)] to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either lan side port or sip network side port. Usually, assign a default ...

  • Page 1642

    Vol.2-1389 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either one of the lan side port or sip network side port. • routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned to ether (0). The following shows a...

  • Page 1643

    Vol.2-1390 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [sample data setting for the above network configuration] (29) ipx_rtp_port_no setting of the rtp base port number for lan (telephony server network) this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. (even numbers only.) [settin...

  • Page 1644

    Vol.2-1391 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • rtp ports occupy 512 (128 × 4) ports (counting from the rtp base port number). For fp85-108 s5 or before, rtp ports occupy 384 (96 × 4) ports (counting fr...

  • Page 1645

    Vol.2-1392 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [when this function is disabled] only the pilot number that is set in the configuration of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] by “set keynumber” command registers to sip server. Note 11: when “privacy” is selected : assign a random value to the user id field of sip message ...

  • Page 1646

    Vol.2-1393 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (33) no_media_code setting of the sip error response code this command is used to set a sip error response code. When 415 is set as a response code, 415 unsup- ported media type is sent instead of response code 488 if an unsupported codec is received. [setting exa...

  • Page 1647

    Vol.2-1394 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (36) ppi_to_pai setting of paid transmission function this command is used to enable/disable p-asserted-identity header (paid) to be transmitted ...

  • Page 1648

    Vol.2-1395 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (38) privacy_pattern setting of the privacy pattern this command is used to specify a type of calling line identification non-presentation when calling to sip network. [setting example] w...

  • Page 1649

    Vol.2-1396 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when “2” is selected:. Note 12: use of p-preferred-id headers of invite message differs for each pattern. When pattern 1 is set: p-preferred-id header is not attached. When pattern 2 is set: p-preferred-id header is attached. (tel: is used) when pattern 3 is set: ...

  • Page 1650

    Vol.2-1397 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (40) reg_interval setting of the waiting time to retry after registration failure this command is used to assign the retry waiting time when failed to register, due to the error-response or no answer from ...

  • Page 1651

    Vol.2-1398 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (42) rtp_pathon setting of path-on function by 183 progress after receiving 180 ringing this command is used to assign path-on function by 183progress after receiving 180ringing. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this ...

  • Page 1652

    Vol.2-1399 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • this command can be skipped by pressing enter key. • to make this command effective, save the config data in “reboot” command before finishing configuration command, and reboot mg(sip). (45) self_sip_domain se...

  • Page 1653

    Vol.2-1400 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • this command is required only when sip domain must be separated between the sip server and mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. • if this command is not set, the sip domain set by “set sip_server” command is used for the sip domain of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. (46) session...

  • Page 1654

    Vol.2-1401 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (47) signaling_port_no setting of the udp port number that receives control signal packets this c...

  • Page 1655

    Vol.2-1402 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] input sip access filter mask. (default=128) (sip server ip address : 2001:db8::860) : 128 when sip access filter is enabled, set sip access filter mask. (default: perfect matching which means only sip server address is authorized) when sip access filter is enabled...

  • Page 1656

    Vol.2-1403 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [ipv4] mg(sip) > set sip_accfilter select the setting of sip access filter. 0=disable (default) 1=enable input: 1 enable/disable sip access filter. 0: sip access filter is disabled (default). 1: sip access filter is enabled. Input sip access filter mask. (default ...

  • Page 1657

    Vol.2-1404 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when fqdn (=1) is selected by “set sip_server” command: note 14: this feature is available for sp-4051 mgsip prog-g issue 2 or later. Mg(sip) > set sip_accfilter select the setting of sip access filter. 0=disable (default) 1=enable input: 1 enable/disable sip acce...

  • Page 1658

    Vol.2-1405 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when receiving incoming calls that exceed the assigned limit number while this feature is enabled, an error response code is sent back to a sip network and further incoming calls are rejected until the next period of monitoring incoming calls. Note 15: only initia...

  • Page 1659

    Vol.2-1406 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when ip address (=0) is selected: [ipv6] [ipv4] when fqdn (=1) is selected: mg(sip) > set sip_register select sip register type. 0=ipaddress(default) 1=fqdn input:0 when ip address (=0) is selected. Input sip register ip address. (default=::) : 2001:db8::880 assig...

  • Page 1660

    Vol.2-1407 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip register type” and “ip address/fqdn”. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • be sure not to enter a blank character to the en...

  • Page 1661

    Vol.2-1408 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • rtp ports occupy 256 (128 × 2) ports (counting from the rtp base port number). • if you select one port in the number of port setting, be careful not to u...

  • Page 1662

    Vol.2-1409 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [ipv4] when fqdn (=1) is selected: input domain name.(default=0, max128(strings)) input a string that specifies the service provider in maximum of 128 charac- ters. Mg(sip) > set sip_server select sip server type. 0=ipaddress(default) 1=fqdn input:0 when ip addres...

  • Page 1663

    Vol.2-1410 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip server type” and “ipaddress/fqdn”. • if you have set a character string to specify the service provider, the character string is used as the si...

  • Page 1664

    Vol.2-1411 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] when enable (=1) is selected, the following screen is displayed. (when disable is selected, no screen is dis- played.) when enable (=0) is selected for 3pcc function, the following screen is displayed. (when disable is selected, no screen is displayed.) note: the ...

  • Page 1665

    Vol.2-1412 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 17: when invite without sdp is received, the following conditions are applied. - only g.711 (20ms) μ -law/a-law connection is available. - amgvl/aivcl data assignment cannot give an offer. Note 18: • when “2=auto(default)” is selected, the codec used for 3pcc...

  • Page 1666

    Vol.2-1413 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] this command is used to enable/disable the use of update method. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg] connects. (59) country_code setting of a country code this command is us...

  • Page 1667

    Vol.2-1414 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: inband tone of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] can be changed by using the following system data (asydl sys1 index811). To change the inband tone of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg], set the configuration command “set country_code” to “0”. (60) multisession setting of sile...

  • Page 1668

    Vol.2-1415 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (62) softdsp setting of a-law / μ -law converting and pad value this command is used for the settings of the a-law / μ -law converting feature and for the pad value set- tings. The following table shows the operating status of mg (sip) when the a-law / μ -law conv...

  • Page 1669

    Vol.2-1416 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] the followings are the setting example: when enabling/disabling the a-law / μ -law converting feature note: the pad value settings are also needed to be assigned when enabling the a-law / μ -law converting. When adjusting pad value according to the configuration d...

  • Page 1670

    Vol.2-1417 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the a-law / μ -law converting feature setting is also needed to be assigned when enabling the pad value adjusting feature. When adjusting pad value automatically select the pad setting for voice/fax. 0 = disable (default) 1 = local setting 2 = auto input ： 1...

  • Page 1671

    Vol.2-1418 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the a-law / μ -law converting feature setting is also needed to be assigned when enabling the pad value adjusting feature..

  • Page 1672

    Vol.2-1419 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] show (1) arp displaying of arp table this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table of mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgg]. [setting example] note: actual values such as address or hwaddress may differ from this sample. Note 1: address : ip address...

  • Page 1673

    Vol.2-1420 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [drs configuration data] 4=sip config data sip config data=sip configura- tion data 5=route config data route config data=route infor- mation configuration data 9=exit end of show command select a reference number:0 select “0”. Ether[1] mac address:00-00-00-00-00-...

  • Page 1674

    Vol.2-1421 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [common configuration data] mg(sip)> show config [2012-05-05 14:49:29] time when the configuration is acquired. [sp-4051:01.00.00.00] software version information of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1=drs data drsdata=configurati...

  • Page 1675

    Vol.2-1422 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sip side rtp port number :50000 ------------------------------------------------- set h245_base_port_no: h245 base port number :40000 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y after displaying about 20 lines of config data, you ...

  • Page 1676

    Vol.2-1423 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sip qos :0xa0 precedence :5 delay :0 throughput :0 reliability :0 cost :0 ------------------------------------------------- set domain: domain name :0 ------------------------------------------------- set dnsaddress: dns ip address :0.0.0.0 -----------------------...

  • Page 1677

    Vol.2-1424 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [port configuration data] ------------------------------------------------- set call_hold: call hold function :enable rtp detect timer value :3sec response code to reject :488 displays the current setting of mg based call retention. When “dis- able” is selected by...

  • Page 1678

    Vol.2-1425 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [sip configuration data] 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1=drs data drsdata=configuration data of the telephony server 2=common config data common config data=common configuration data 3=port config data port config data=port configura- tion data 4=sip ...

  • Page 1679

    Vol.2-1426 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1=drs data drsdata=drs configuration data 2=common config data common config data=common configuration data 3=port config data port config data=port configura- tion data 4=sip config data sip config data=sip configura- ti...

  • Page 1680

    Vol.2-1427 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sip register ip address :0.0.0.0 displays the current setting of the sip register ip address. When ipv6 (=1) is selected by “set ip_version” command, this ip address will be shown in ipv6 address format. Sip register port number :5060 sip register expires time :36...

  • Page 1681

    Vol.2-1428 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] session-timer :enable when “disable” is selected by the set command “session_timer”, “disable” is displayed. In this case, “session-expires” and “refresher” are not displayed. Session-expires :180sec refresher :uac when uas is selected for refresher, “uas” is disp...

  • Page 1682

    Vol.2-1429 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y ------------------------------------------------- set 184toprivacy: 184 to privacy pattern :disable when “pattern 1” is selected by the set command “184toprivacy”, “pattern 1” is dis- pl...

  • Page 1683

    Vol.2-1430 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] ------------------------------------------------- set 183rbt: rbt addition (183w/osdp) :enable when “disable” is selected by the set command “183rbt”, “dis- able” is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set rtp_pathon: path-on 183 after 180...

  • Page 1684

    Vol.2-1431 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] register interval timer :5min ------------------------------------------------- set update: update method support function :disable when “enable” is selected by the set command “update”, “enable” is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set ...

  • Page 1685

    Vol.2-1432 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] set cc_convert: country code convert :disable when “enable” is selected by the set command “cc_convert”, “enable” is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set check_number: telephone-number check function :disable when “enable” is selected b...

  • Page 1686

    Vol.2-1433 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sip access filter :disable when “enable” is selected for “sip access filter” by the set command “sip_accfilter”, “enable” and the following set- tings are displayed: • when ip address is assigned by the set command “sip_server” (sip server ip address: 192.168.100....

  • Page 1687

    Vol.2-1434 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [route information configuration data] ------------------------------------------------- set dns_option: dns type :locating sip servers function (rfc3263) dns cache :enable locating sip servers function (rfc3263) data and dns cache data are displayed. ------------...

  • Page 1688

    Vol.2-1435 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 4: the conditions of “sip telephony service function” are as follows. • when “sip telephony service function” is enabled by the set command “sip_tel_service”, “enable” is dis- played, as well as enablement/disablement of the following settings: replaces funct...

  • Page 1689

    Vol.2-1436 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • the following is an example of display when “sip telephony service function” is enabled by the set com- mand “sip_tel_service”. Note 5: this parameter is displayed since sp-4051 mgsip prog-g issue 2. (3) interface displaying of link and display states of ether t...

  • Page 1690

    Vol.2-1437 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] (5) route displaying of route table this command is used to show the route table of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • actual values such as destination or genmask may differ from this sample. • it ma...

  • Page 1691

    Vol.2-1438 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 13: the following describes display of port status. • if displaying status of registration to lan (telephony server side) note 14: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip128 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip128 su...

  • Page 1692

    Vol.2-1439 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 15: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip128 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip128 successfully registered: registration is ok. After mg-sip128 fails to register: registration is ng. Waiting re-registration timer...

  • Page 1693

    Vol.2-1440 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 16: the example above shows a total of 16 cnts tried registration, and eight (9 to 16) of them failed. (use the asril command to set mg-nos and a pilot number. Cnt is a parameter set with the as- ril command) note 17: mg group no. 5-15 is available since fp85...

  • Page 1694

    Vol.2-1441 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • if displaying information on channels in use mg(sip)> show status 0:port status 1:ipx status 2:sip status 3:ch status 9:exit 0: port status (default) 1: telephony server network registration status 2: sip network registration status 3: information of channels in...

  • Page 1695

    Vol.2-1442 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 18: this parameter is displayed for sp-4051 mgsip prog-g issue 2 or later. Invite client transaction = 0, max=0 number of invite client transactions and their maximum number invite server transaction = 0, max=0 number of invite server transactions and their m...

  • Page 1696

    Vol.2-1443 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] download this command is used to download mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] program and music/tone file via ether1 port (ether port on the lan side). The following figure shows an example of a display. [when downloading all programs] mg(sip) > download input “download” at ...

  • Page 1697

    Vol.2-1444 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new subnet mask:255.255.0.0 enter a subnet mask. --- ip address setting of tftp server --- current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the ip address of a tftp server, enter “y”. (defa...

  • Page 1698

    Vol.2-1445 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] sp4051/music/music.Tar.Gz download... Tftpdownload:user file tftp start. Received. Checksum matched! Download was completed! Please reboot after a download menu end. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- input:1 download of one program. ---...

  • Page 1699

    Vol.2-1446 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] [when downloading one program] mg(sip) > download enter “download” in configuration mode. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 quit --- [q/q] input:2 to download one program, enter “2”. --- ip a...

  • Page 1700

    Vol.2-1447 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new ip address:172.16.253.250 enter the ip address. Ip address change was completed. New ip address of mg(sip):172.16.253.100 new subnet mask of mg(sip):255.255.0.0 new ip address of tftp server:1...

  • Page 1701

    Vol.2-1448 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] tone data:1 music data:2 wave file:3 config data:4 quit:[q/q] input:q when download is complete, the pro- gram download menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. Please reboot after a download menu end. --- download menu --- download of all programs....

  • Page 1702

    Vol.2-1449 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] how to download a wave file if you select type3 (wave file) for the music type of “set musictype” command, you can use a wave file for music on hold. Note that the payload type of the rtp header sent by mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] must be g.7...

  • Page 1703

    Vol.2-1450 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] about wave file format a wave file must meet the following specifications as its format: • sampling frequency: 8khz • quantifying bit number:8 bit • quantifying format: g.711 μ -law/a-law • channel: monaural • capacity: only a single wave file with about 1 mbyte (...

  • Page 1704

    Vol.2-1451 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new subnet mask:255.255.0.0 enter a subnet mask. --- ip address setting of tftp server --- current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the tftp server ip address, enter “y”. (default a...

  • Page 1705

    Vol.2-1452 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the conditions of “display example of downloading a wave file (music_3.Wav) individually” are as follows. • be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. • after downloading, initialize the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg]. Input:...

  • Page 1706

    Vol.2-1453 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] • make sure of the following to set an ip address for download. 1. A port to download files needs to have a different network address (or segment) from the other ports. 2. Do not use a network address set as a static route in the routing table. • if checksum error...

  • Page 1707

    Vol.2-1454 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] listdload : sub directory error =[sub- folder name] listdload: download file is not found download failed! Incorrect name of the subfolder of the download-list file (only main, tone, music, and config are allowed) check the name of the subfolder of the download-li...

  • Page 1708

    Vol.2-1455 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] other commands 1. Exit 2. Logout [function] to exit the configuration command menu. [setting example] note: after changing the configuration, if you execute this command without saving the running config- uration, the system discards the change and exits the confi...

  • Page 1709

    Vol.2-1456 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note 1: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data to the flash memory, be sure to execute the following commands: • “set ipaddress”: assigns the ip addresses on lan side, and sip side. • “set drsaddress”: assigns the ip address of drs. • “set sip...

  • Page 1710

    Vol.2-1457 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. 5. Ping6 [function] to attempt “ping” command five times to the designated ipv6 host on the network. [setting example] 64 bytes from 172.16.253.3: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time=0.5...

  • Page 1711

    Vol.2-1458 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. 6. Traceroute [function] to inquire network routes. The following figures show display examples. [on the telephony server side] [sip side] 64 bytes from 2001:db8:1:0:216:97ff...

  • Page 1712

    Vol.2-1459 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] note: when the response from the network is delayed, it takes time to complete the command. Note 3: when “ipv6” is selected by “set ip_version”, input an ipv6 address for target ip address. When “ipv4” is selected by “set ip_version”, input an ipv4 address for tar...

  • Page 1713

    Vol.2-1460 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 17.5.4 error messages when an error occurs while using a configuration command, an error message prompting for re-registration is displayed. Refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshooting illegal command. An incorrect command is ...

  • Page 1714

    Vol.2-1461 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18. Mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] here explains mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]: function overview, configuration, and installation procedure. Note: mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] is available since fp85-109 s6. 18.1 general mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] is a sip-compatible media gatewa...

  • Page 1715

    Vol.2-1462 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the following table shows the number of available channels of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms g.711 - 128ch - - - g.729a - - - - - g.723.1 - - - - -.

  • Page 1716

    Vol.2-1463 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.1.1 specifications (1) part names the following are the appearances of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. Front rear note: after installing a mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj], fix the ac power cable with the attached ac power cable stopper. (2) details [1] hardware specificatio...

  • Page 1717

    Vol.2-1464 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [2] functions (a) front dimensions 65 (h) x 430 (w) x 297 (d) mm (corresponds to 1.5u when mounting on a 19-inch rack with depth of a4 paper.) weight 3.8kg input power source ac100v (50/60hz) ± 10% maximum power con- sumption 75w (for maximum cpu load) qos ieee802...

  • Page 1718

    Vol.2-1465 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 4: it works only when cpu pwr switch on the rear panel is on. Note 5: to confirm that shutdown is complete, check the pwr lamp. When auto-shutdown does not work, press and hold cpu pwr switch for four seconds to turn off forcibly. Note 6: when console cable i...

  • Page 1719

    Vol.2-1466 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.2 installation this section describes installing and cabling procedures for an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj]. Take anti-static measures to work on it. (1) installing procedure you can mount an mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] on a 19-inch rack. The procedure is the same as...

  • Page 1720

    Vol.2-1467 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step3: plug lan cables into the ether1 and ether2 connectors (rj-45). Note 9 front panel note 9: if you want to establish ip addresses of lan and a sip network in the same segment, connect a lan cable only to a connector for lan. Cable connection is completed. Mov...

  • Page 1721

    Vol.2-1468 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.3 startup and installation test here explains procedures for startup and installation test of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. Step1: assigning office data on the telephony server refer to [m-111] media gateway sip in data programming manual - business. Step2: connect...

  • Page 1722

    Vol.2-1469 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: you can use any icon and name. “connect to” window is opened. Choose a com port which is connected to mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] in “connect using” box. Enter “ok.” note 10 note 10: it depends on the pc. Mgsip mgsip.

  • Page 1723

    Vol.2-1470 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] “port settings” tab opens. Set the values as the following figure shows..

  • Page 1724

    Vol.2-1471 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step3: turning on mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] making sure of cable connection between the maintenance terminal (pc) and the mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] via console cable, turning on pwr switch. Make sure that pwr lamp on the front panel of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] turn...

  • Page 1725

    Vol.2-1472 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step4: setting configuration data on mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (1) on the activated mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] with “ mgsip login: ” displayed, type “config” as the login name, and press enter key. (2) prompt “mg(sip)>” appears: you are in data setting mode. (3) use ...

  • Page 1726

    Vol.2-1473 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.3.2 setting of ip address here explains procedures for setting the number of ports that mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] uses, and ip ad- dresses and subnet masks for each port of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. Each port of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] is used as follows: • eth...

  • Page 1727

    Vol.2-1474 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 only as shown below. * if you select one port in the number of port setting, ether2 setting is not necessary. • if you select one port in the number of port setting, ...

  • Page 1728

    Vol.2-1475 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configuration and restart the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. 18.3.4 setting of sip server data when multipoint feature is used, the setting of sip server data is not req...

  • Page 1729

    Vol.2-1476 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when fqdn (=1) is selected: • pressing the enter key can skip the item. Make sure to input data for “sip server type” and “ipaddress/ fqdn”; these cannot be skipped. • to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the co...

  • Page 1730

    Vol.2-1477 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.3.5 setting of pilot number for mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] assign a pilot number of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. [display example] note: • pressing the enter key can skip the item. • to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command t...

  • Page 1731

    Vol.2-1478 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] * when multipoint mode is enabled by using “set mp_mode” command, the “set sip_server” com- mand is not required. If any of these items have not been assigned when saving the running configuration data, the fol- lowing message will be displayed to the unassigned i...

  • Page 1732

    Vol.2-1479 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when you have finished, the following message appears on the maintenance console. Note: both lan1 and lan2 must be connected to make mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] online. (for a one-port configuration, only lan1 connection makes mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] online.) step6:...

  • Page 1733

    Vol.2-1480 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step3: make sure the registration status of the telephony server network and sip network by us- ing “show status” command in the configuration mode. If “registration is ok.” message ap- pears, mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] is in operating state. Note: when using pcpro,...

  • Page 1734

    Vol.2-1481 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.4 operation and maintenance here explains mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]: operation and maintenance..

  • Page 1735

    Vol.2-1482 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.4.1 fan replacement this section describes the procedure to replace fans inside an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj]. * a failure of a cooling fan rises the temperature inside of an mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj], which greatly influences the system. Please replace a coolin...

  • Page 1736

    Vol.2-1483 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step3: remove the fan connector; the screw; the fan. Note: if you are replacing fans as the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] remains on, removing both fans may generate heat inside, resulting in system failure. Be sure to replace one by one, but not at the same time. Step...

  • Page 1737

    Vol.2-1484 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.5 configuration commands 18.5.1 how to use the configuration command configuration commands are used to change the default settings. Change the settings only where it is necessary. Start a communication software such as hyperterminal note 1 of maintenance conso...

  • Page 1738

    Vol.2-1485 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] commands other than “ping” cannot be set within a single line; use interactive mode to input values. The following figure shows an example of data setting using the interactive mode. * the example of the screen below the above example is omitted here. Note: ip pre...

  • Page 1739

    Vol.2-1486 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.5.2 list of maintenance console commands note: drs (device registration server) used in this section refers to a control function of the telephony server. Set the ip address of the telephony server (tp). R: required c: not required, but configurable set: comman...

  • Page 1740

    Vol.2-1487 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 21 hc_alarm c specifies the alarm transmission destination. 22 hc_timer c assigns the health check timer value. 23 interface c assigns the operation speed and operation mode of an interface. 24 ipaddress r assigns the ip address and the subnet mask to the port. 25...

  • Page 1741

    Vol.2-1488 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 1: required to set when multipoint feature is used. However, multipoint data table can also be reg- istered by downloading csv file. Note 2: required to set when not using multipoint feature. Note 3: required to set silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connect...

  • Page 1742

    Vol.2-1489 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] exit or logout : command to exit the configuration mode sub command must? Function 1 - - exits the configuration mode. Reboot : command to reboot mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] sub command must? Function 1 - - restarts mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] and saves the settings. Pi...

  • Page 1743

    Vol.2-1490 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] set command (1) 183rbt setting of local rbt connection select function when receiving 183 message (w/o sdp) this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. [setting example] note: the conditions of this ...

  • Page 1744

    Vol.2-1491 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (3) another_keynumber setting of additional pilot numbers assigns additional three pilot numbers to the sip server other than the one registered by “set keynumber” command. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • unique number to b...

  • Page 1745

    Vol.2-1492 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes- sage in updating ack and register for re-invite/200 ok. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-...

  • Page 1746

    Vol.2-1493 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (8) cause_table setting of error translation table select function the command is used to select the translation table of error...

  • Page 1747

    Vol.2-1494 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (10) cdn_pattern setting of a way of obtaining information for cdn (called number) the command is used to assign the way of obtaining information...

  • Page 1748

    Vol.2-1495 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (11) check_number setting a limit to the letters and numerals that can be used for calling/called party number this command is used to assign a f...

  • Page 1749

    Vol.2-1496 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • the following shows the method of obtaining cpn when this feature is available. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connec...

  • Page 1750

    Vol.2-1497 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be used. (15) dnsaddress setting of the ip address of dns server this command is used to specify the dns ip address to resolve an address by dns server. [setting example] note: you do not have to cha...

  • Page 1751

    Vol.2-1498 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] (18) drs_qos setting of tos value of drs server this command is used to specify the tos value of ip packets to be sent to drs server. [setting example] mg(sip) > set drsaddress [primary drs setting] setting primary drs; input ip address.(default=...

  • Page 1752

    Vol.2-1499 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. Prec.=precedence(3bits) d=delay(1bit) t=throughput(1bit) r=reliability(1bit) c=cost(1bit) input following parameters. Precedence(default=5, 0-7):5 specify the precedence in an ip network (default: 5). 0-...

  • Page 1753

    Vol.2-1500 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. Dscp=differentiated service code point(6bits) note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with an exception of “input type”. Be sure to input a value to “i...

  • Page 1754

    Vol.2-1501 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • when out-band is selected: • when in-band is selected: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. • at dtmf mode negotiation/out-band, th...

  • Page 1755

    Vol.2-1502 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (20) h245_base_port_no setting of the base port number for h.245 tcp server this command is used to specify the port number for h.245 tcp server. [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (21) hc_alarm setting of the alarm transm...

  • Page 1756

    Vol.2-1503 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (23) interface setting of the operation speed and operation mode of an interface this command is used to assign the ether speed and the duplex type to each port on mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj]. [setting example] note 2: when “automatic negotiation” is selected, “auto...

  • Page 1757

    Vol.2-1504 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: when the ip addresses of both lan and wan are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 port only. Select one port in the number of port setting, and assign ether1’s ip address only. In this case, ether2 is not used. For the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] where eth...

  • Page 1758

    Vol.2-1505 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (25) ipx_route setting of the route information in the telephony server network this command is used to specify route information on the telephony server side network. A maximum of 500 route information can be assigned. Note: before sp-4032 mgsip prog-e issue 2, a...

  • Page 1759

    Vol.2-1506 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 4: do not set routing in the segment where mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] belongs. Select command(0:exit/1:set/2:delete):1 0: exit (exit the command without execut- ing anything.) 1: set route information. 2: delete route information. Select “1”. Select gateway typ...

  • Page 1760

    Vol.2-1507 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • [to assign routing information (gateway address only)] to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either lan side port or sip network side port. Usually, assign a default gateway to sip network side port. Two or more default gateways cannot be registered...

  • Page 1761

    Vol.2-1508 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either one of the lan side port or sip network side port. • routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned to ether (0). Select command(0:exit...

  • Page 1762

    Vol.2-1509 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the following shows a typical network configuration and the sample data setting. [typical network configuration] note: the conditions of network configuration is as follows. • summarize the network addresses if possible. • if you set an invalid gateway address and...

  • Page 1763

    Vol.2-1510 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (26) ipx_rtp_port_no setting of the rtp base port number for lan (telephony server network) this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. (even numbers only.) [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as fol...

  • Page 1764

    Vol.2-1511 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (27) keynumber setting of the pilot number for mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the command is used to assign a pilot number of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] for registration. [setting example] note: be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the pilot number (with t...

  • Page 1765

    Vol.2-1512 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 5: input the digits of search number (default: 7 digits) assigned by “set mp_mode”. Error occurs when the input digits are different from the number of digits assigned by “set mp_mode”. (29) mp_mode enabling or disabling multipoint feature the command is used...

  • Page 1766

    Vol.2-1513 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] note: when the “set mp_mode” command has been assigned, be sure to reboot mg(sip) before assigning the “set mp_data” command. (30) mp_refresh refreshing of the multipoint data table the command is used to refresh the multipoint data table. [setti...

  • Page 1767

    Vol.2-1514 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: for mg-sip [mg-128sipmgj], multi registration feature is not used. [when this function is enabled] registers to sip server per sip-uri (or telephone number). [when this function is disabled] only the pilot number that is set in the configuration of mg-sip128...

  • Page 1768

    Vol.2-1515 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] this command is used to select music type that is sent from mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. [setting example] (33) out_of_area_code setting of the out-of-area error response this command is used to set the out-of-area (ipx network) error response. [setting example] note...

  • Page 1769

    Vol.2-1516 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (35) pre_negotiation_port_no setting of the udp port receiving packets for voice control path this command is used to specify the udp port number...

  • Page 1770

    Vol.2-1517 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when “2” is selected:. Note 7: use of p-preferred-id headers of invite message differs for each pattern. When pattern 1 is set: p-preferred-id header is not attached. When pattern 2 is set: p-preferred-id header is attached. (tel: is used) when pattern 3 is set: n...

  • Page 1771

    Vol.2-1518 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (38) reg_interval setting of the waiting time to retry after registration failure this command is used to assign the retry waiting time when failed to register, due to the error-response or no answer from ...

  • Page 1772

    Vol.2-1519 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (40) rtp_pathon setting of path-on function by 183 progress after receiving 180 ringing this command is used to assign path-on function by 183progress after receiving 180ringing. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this ...

  • Page 1773

    Vol.2-1520 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] • when this command is enabled: • disable note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. • this command is required only when...

  • Page 1774

    Vol.2-1521 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (45) signaling_port_no setting of the udp port number that receives control signal packets this c...

  • Page 1775

    Vol.2-1522 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (46) sip_accfilter setting of sip access filter this command is used to enable the sip access filter which discards sip packets received from an un- authorized destination. Also, this command is used to en...

  • Page 1776

    Vol.2-1523 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when fqdn (=1) is selected by “set sip_server” command: select the setting of burst access filter. 0 = disable (default) 1 = enable input : 1 input burst access limit timer value. (sec) (1-60(default=1)) : 30 input burst access limit number value. (1-1000(default=...

  • Page 1777

    Vol.2-1524 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 8: this feature is available for sp-4032 mgsip prog-e issue 2 or later. When receiving incoming calls that exceed the assigned limit number while this feature is enabled, an error response code is sent back to a sip network and further incoming calls are reje...

  • Page 1778

    Vol.2-1525 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (47) sip_domain setting of the sip domain this command is used to assign the sip domain. [setting example] note: as with this command, sip domain can be assigned by “set sip_server” command. (48) sip_port_no setting of the port number that receives sip messages th...

  • Page 1779

    Vol.2-1526 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when fqdn (=1) is selected: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip register type” and “ip address/fqdn”. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • be sure not to enter...

  • Page 1780

    Vol.2-1527 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] this command is used to specify route information in the sip side network. Use “set sip_route” command. For details, see “ ipx_route ”(setting of the route information in the telephony server network). (52) sip_rtp_port_no setting of the rtp base port number of si...

  • Page 1781

    Vol.2-1528 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when fqdn (=1) is selected: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip server type” and “ipaddress/fqdn”. • be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the fqdn (with the copy a...

  • Page 1782

    Vol.2-1529 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [setting example] when enable (=1) is selected, the following screen is displayed. (when disable is selected, no screen is dis- played.) note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network w...

  • Page 1783

    Vol.2-1530 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (56) update setting of update method this command is used to enable/disable the use of update method. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj] connects. (57) country_code setting...

  • Page 1784

    Vol.2-1531 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: inband tone of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] can be changed by using the following system data (asydl sys1 index811). To change the inband tone of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj], set the configuration command “set country_code” to “0”. (58) multisession setting of sile...

  • Page 1785

    Vol.2-1532 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (59) softdsp setting of a-law / μ -law converting and pad value this command is used for the settings of the a-law / μ -law converting feature and for the pad value set- tings. The following table shows the operating status of mg (sip) when the a-law / μ -law conv...

  • Page 1786

    Vol.2-1533 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the followings are the setting example: when enabling/disabling the a-law / μ -law converting feature note: the pad value settings are also needed to be assigned when enabling the a-law / μ -law converting feature. When mg (sip) places an outgoing call station sid...

  • Page 1787

    Vol.2-1534 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when adjusting pad value according to the configuration data setting. Note: the a-law / μ -law converting feature setting is also needed to be assigned when enabling the pad value adjusting feature. Mg(sip) > set softdsp > codec convert mode ： disable pad setting ...

  • Page 1788

    Vol.2-1535 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] when adjusting pad value automatically note: the a-law / μ -law converting feature setting is also needed to be assigned when enabling the pad value adjusting feature. Mg(sip) > set softdsp > codec convert mode ： disable pad setting ： disable displays the current ...

  • Page 1789

    Vol.2-1536 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] show (1) arp displaying of arp table this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table of mg-sip128 [mg- 128sipmgj]. [setting example] note: actual values such as address or hwaddress may differ from this sample. Note 1: address : ip address...

  • Page 1790

    Vol.2-1537 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [drs configuration data] 4=sip config data sip config data=sip configura- tion data 5=route config data route config data=route infor- mation configuration data 6=multipoint data multipoint data 9=exit end of show command select a reference number:0 select “0”. Et...

  • Page 1791

    Vol.2-1538 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [common configuration data] primary drs ip address:0. 0. 0. 0:portno[3456] secondary drs ip address:0. 0. 0. 0:portno[3456] tertiary drs ip address:0. 0. 0. 0:portno[3456] quaternary drs ip address:0. 0. 0. 0:portno[3456] ip address and port number of the currentl...

  • Page 1792

    Vol.2-1539 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] ------------------------------------------------- set ipx_rtp_port_no: ipx side rtp port number :51000 ------------------------------------------------- set sip_rtp_port_no: sip side rtp port number :50000 ------------------------------------------------- set h245...

  • Page 1793

    Vol.2-1540 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] ------------------------------------------------- set sip_qos: sip qos :0xa0 precedence :5 delay :0 throughput :0 reliability :0 cost :0 ------------------------------------------------- set domain: domain name :0 ------------------------------------------------- ...

  • Page 1794

    Vol.2-1541 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 1: this parameter is displayed since sp-4032 mgsip prog-e issue 2. [port configuration data] music type :type1 display (type1/type2/type3/ type4) depends on which type you set. ------------------------------------------------- set call_hold: call hold functio...

  • Page 1795

    Vol.2-1542 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [sip configuration data] 2=common config data common config data=common configuration data 3=port config data port config data=port configura- tion data 4=sip config data sip config data=sip configura- tion data 5=route config data route config data=route infor- m...

  • Page 1796

    Vol.2-1543 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 2=common config data common config data=common configuration data 3=port config data port config data=port configura- tion data 4=sip config data sip config data=sip configura- tion data 5=route config data route config data=route infor- mation configuration data ...

  • Page 1797

    Vol.2-1544 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] ------------------------------------------------- set auth: user id :0 password :0 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y after displaying about 20 lines of config data, you can select if you want to see more data or not. To ...

  • Page 1798

    Vol.2-1545 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] forced mode :disable when “enable” is selected for “forced mode” by the set com- mand “session_timer”, “enable” is displayed. Set prack: supported 100rel :enable when “disable” is selected by the set command “prack”, “disable” is displayed. Stop cyclical-send of 1...

  • Page 1799

    Vol.2-1546 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] sip server slip response code :488 ------------------------------------------------- set self_sip_domain: self sip domain mode :disable when “enable” is selected by the set command “self_sip_domain”, “enable” is selected as well as the set domain name. Example) se...

  • Page 1800

    Vol.2-1547 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] set another_keynumber: another keynumber 1 :0 another keynumber 2 :0 another keynumber 3 :0 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y ------------------------------------------------- set multi_regist: multi-registration mode :d...

  • Page 1801

    Vol.2-1548 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y ------------------------------------------------- set cause_table: cause table :normal when “alternate routing” is selected by the set command “cause_table”, “alternate routing” is displ...

  • Page 1802

    Vol.2-1549 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] sdp style setting :rfc4566 when “normal” is selected by the set command “sdp_style”, “nor- mal” is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set call_id_relay: call-id relay mode :disable when “enable” is selected by the set command “call_id_rel...

  • Page 1803

    Vol.2-1550 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 1: the conditions of “sip telephony service function” are as follows. • when “sip telephony service function” is enabled by the set command “sip_tel_service”, “enable” is dis- played, as well as enablement/disablement of the following settings: replaces funct...

  • Page 1804

    Vol.2-1551 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [route information configuration data] [multipoint data] mg(sip)> show config [2012-05-05 14:49:29] time when the configuration is acquired. [sp-4032:01.00.00.00] software version information of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1...

  • Page 1805

    Vol.2-1552 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [2012-05-05 14:49:29] time when the configuration is acquired. [sp-4032:01.00.00.00] software version information of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1=drs data drs data=drs configuration data 2=common config data common config d...

  • Page 1808

    Vol.2-1555 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (4) version displaying of version information this command is used to display version information of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] functions (base system and firmware). [setting example] (5) route displaying of route table this command is used to show the route table o...

  • Page 1809

    Vol.2-1556 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 7: irtt : indicates the initial round-trip time of tcp connections to each route. Mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] regards a tcp connection where no reply lasts for the round-trip time (1 to 12000) as no connection. (1) status displaying status of ports and registrat...

  • Page 1810

    Vol.2-1557 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 2: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip128 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip128 successfully registered: registration is ok. (drs ip address 192.168.0.1) (the ip address succeeding in registration appears as we...

  • Page 1811

    Vol.2-1558 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • if displaying status of registration to sip network (when the registration function per number is enabled) mg(sip)> show status 0:port status 1:ipx status 2:sip status 3:ch status 9:exit 0: port status (default) 1: telephony server network registration status 2:...

  • Page 1812

    Vol.2-1559 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 5: the example above shows a total of 16 cnts tried registration, and eight (9 to 16) of them failed. (use the asril command to set mg-nos and a pilot number. Cnt is a parameter set with the asril command) • if displaying information on channels in use [mg-no...

  • Page 1814

    Vol.2-1561 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 6: this parameter is displayed for sp-4032 mgsip prog-e issue 2 or later. The number of burst filtered messages = 0 number of incoming calls that are rejected by burst access filter note 6 when “disable” is selected for “burst access filter”, this parameter i...

  • Page 1815

    Vol.2-1562 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] download this command is used to download mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] program, music/tone file, and multipoint data via ether1 port (ether port on the lan side). The following figure shows an example of a display. [when downloading all programs] mg(sip) > download in...

  • Page 1816

    Vol.2-1563 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the ip address of a tftp server, enter “y”. (default address: 10.41.1.250) do you change ip address of tftp server? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]:y if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q...

  • Page 1817

    Vol.2-1564 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] download mp_data file ? [y(download)/n(skip)/ q(skip)] : y whether to download the multipoiht data or not is displayed. Be sure to enter ‘y’. Sp4032/config/mp_data.Csv download... Tftpdownload : user file tftp start. Received. Checksum matched! Download was comple...

  • Page 1818

    Vol.2-1565 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [when downloading one program] mg(sip) > download enter “download” in configuration mode. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 quit --- [q/q] input:2 to download one program, enter “2”. --- ip a...

  • Page 1819

    Vol.2-1566 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new ip address:172.16.253.250 enter the ip address. Ip address change was completed. New ip address of mg(sip):172.16.253.100 new subnet mask of mg(sip):255.255.0.0 new ip address of tftp server:1...

  • Page 1820

    Vol.2-1567 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] main program:0 tone data:1 music data:2 wave file:3 config data:4 multipoint data:5 quit:[q/q] input:q when download is complete, the pro- gram download menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. If you download except for mp_data file, please reboot ...

  • Page 1821

    Vol.2-1568 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] how to download a wave file if you select type3 (wave file) for the music type of “set musictype” command, you can use a wave file for music on hold. Note that the payload type of the rtp header sent by mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] must be g.7...

  • Page 1822

    Vol.2-1569 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] about wave file format a wave file must meet the following specifications as its format: • sampling frequency: 8khz • quantifying bit number:8 bit • quantifying format: g.711 μ -law/a-law • channel: monaural • capacity: only a single wave file with about 1mbyte (a...

  • Page 1823

    Vol.2-1570 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new subnet mask:255.255.0.0 enter a subnet mask. --- ip address setting of tftp server --- current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the tftp server ip address, enter “y”. (default a...

  • Page 1824

    Vol.2-1571 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] quit:[q/q] input:3 select “3” representing wave file. Sp4032/music/music_3.Wav download... Download starts. Tftpdownload:user file tftp start. Received. Checksum no check. Checksum of sp4032/music/ music_3.Wav is 23915. Download was completed! --- program download...

  • Page 1825

    Vol.2-1572 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: • be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. • after downloading, initialize the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. • make sure of the following to set an ip address for download. 1. A port to download files needs to have a diff...

  • Page 1826

    Vol.2-1573 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] download list unmatched! Download failed! Request to download a file not written in the download-list file (individual down- load) check if the contents of the download- list file correspond to the actually-down- loaded file. Download only files set in the down- l...

  • Page 1827

    Vol.2-1574 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] upload this command is used to upload multipoint data via ether1 port (ether port on the lan side). The following figure shows an example of a display. [example] mg(sip) > upload input “upload” in the configuration mode. --- upload menu --- upload of mp_data. --- ...

  • Page 1828

    Vol.2-1575 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the following lists causes and solutions of error codes. Do you change ip address of tftp server? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]:y if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new ip address:172.Nn.Nnn.Nnn enter an ip address. Ip address cha...

  • Page 1829

    Vol.2-1576 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] other commands 1. Exit 2. Logout [function] to exit the configuration command menu. [setting example] note: after changing the configuration, if you execute this command without saving the running config- uration, the system discards the change and exits the confi...

  • Page 1830

    Vol.2-1577 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 1: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data to the flash memory, be sure to execute the following commands: • “set ipaddress”: assigns the ip addresses on lan side, and sip side. • “set drsaddress”: assigns the ip address of drs. • “set sip...

  • Page 1831

    Vol.2-1578 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. 5. Traceroute [function] to inquire network routes. The following figures show display examples. [on the telephony server side] ping 172.16.253.3 (172.16.253.3) 56(84) bytes ...

  • Page 1832

    Vol.2-1579 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] [sip side] note: when the response from the network is delayed, it takes time to complete the command. 6. Help or ? [function] this command is used to show the brief explanation of the configuration commands that are available on mg- sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. [settin...

  • Page 1833

    Vol.2-1580 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.5.3 error messages when an error occurs while using a configuration command, an error message prompting for re-registration is displayed. Refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshooting illegal command. An incorrect command is ...

  • Page 1834

    Vol.2-1581 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] 18.6 multipoint feature this feature allows to connect an outgoing call to the opposite office specified by dialed caller id for register- ing multiple connected parties with mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. Dial number (search number) and connected party is controlled b...

  • Page 1835

    Vol.2-1582 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] (5) when multiple connected parties are registered for one search number, if server priority is assigned to “address that is assigned to primary for multipoint data table is prioritized (fixed)” by “set mp_mode” command, a normal outgoing call uses the connected p...

  • Page 1836

    Vol.2-1583 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] • registration by “set mp_data” command step8: to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configuration and restart the mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj]. 18.6.3 registration by downloading csv file you can use a csv file ...

  • Page 1837

    Vol.2-1584 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step2: edit the uploaded multipoint data file (mp_data.Csv). Note 2: when ip address is not used, do not enter anything in this field. Note 3: when port number is not used, do not enter anything in this field. Note 4: be sure not to enter anything in this field, w...

  • Page 1838

    Vol.2-1585 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] the following format shows multipoint table on excel. • excel file • text file (csv format) 1230200 tokyo1 192.168.X.Xx 5060 1230203 tokyo4 192.168.X.Xx 5060 192.168.X.Xx 5060 192.168.X.Xx 5060 192.168.X.Xx 5060 1230201 tokyo2 192.168.X.Xx 5060 192.168.X.Xx 5060 1...

  • Page 1839

    Vol.2-1586 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] step3: place the firmware of mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] in a folder on a tftp server. If the firmware is not present, create a folder with the name of the mg-sip128 firmware (“sp4032” in this case) in a folder on the server, and then create a subfolder named “con- f...

  • Page 1840

    Vol.2-1587 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] download of one program. --- input:2 quit --- [q/q] input:2 to download the program individually, enter “2”. --- ip address and subnet mask setting of mg(sip) --- select ether port [1(ether1)/2(ether2)/ q(quit)]:1 select ether port. (be sure to use ether1 port for...

  • Page 1841

    Vol.2-1588 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] new ip address of mg(sip) : 172.Yy.Yyy.Yyy new subnet mask of mg(sip) : 255.255.0.0 new ip address of tftp server : 172.Nn.Nnn.Nnn are these ip address correct ? [y(correct)/n(change)/q(quit)] when these ip addresses are correct, enter “y”. If you enter y, mg(sip)...

  • Page 1842

    Vol.2-1589 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 5: it is possible to reflect the update of multipoint data table by executing “set mp_refresh” command. 18.6.4 registration by “set mp_data” command you can register connected party number to the multipoint data table directly from the maintenance console by ...

  • Page 1843

    Vol.2-1590 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] select the method to operation. 0 : exit 1 : set 2 : delete input:1 the method to operation is displayed. 0 : exit 1 : set 2 : delete input search number.(number of digits=7) search number entry screen and number of digits are displayed. : 1230200 enter search num...

  • Page 1844

    Vol.2-1591 mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] note 6: input the digits of search number (default: 7 digits) assigned by “set mp_mode”. Error occurs when the input digits are different from the number of digits assigned by “set mp_mode”. : 0.0.0.0 input quaternary dest port number.(1024- 65535 (default=5060)) ...

  • Page 1845

    Vol.2-1592 mg-sip96 19. Mg-sip96 here explains mg-sip96: function overview, configuration, and installation procedure. 19.1 general mg-sip96 is a sip-compatible media gateway to realize communication with service networks. Mg-sip96 provides voip devices supporting sip (session initiation protocol, b...

  • Page 1846

    Vol.2-1593 mg-sip96 the following table shows the number of available channels of mg-sip96. 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms g.711 - 96ch 96ch 96ch - g.729a - 96ch 96ch 96ch - g.723.1 - - - - -.

  • Page 1847

    Vol.2-1594 mg-sip96 19.1.1 specifications (1) part names the following are the appearances of mg-sip96. Front rear note: after installing a mg-sip96, fix the ac power cable with the attached ac power cable stopper. (2) details [1] hardware specifications item specifications remarks connection termin...

  • Page 1848

    Vol.2-1595 mg-sip96 [2] functions (a) front note 7: it works only when cpu pwr switch on the rear panel is on. Weight 3.8kg input power source ac100v (50/60hz) ± 10% maximum power con- sumption 75w (for maximum cpu load) qos ieee802.1p (tos field is supported, diffserv) how to set flatly on desktop ...

  • Page 1849

    Vol.2-1596 mg-sip96 note 8: to confirm that shutdown is complete, check the pwr lamp. When auto-shutdown does not work, press and hold cpu pwr switch for four seconds to turn off forcibly. Note 9: when console cable is used, connect the console cable with the maintenance terminal (pc) prior to conne...

  • Page 1850

    Vol.2-1597 mg-sip96 19.2 installation this section describes installing and cabling procedures for an mg-sip96. Take anti-static measures to work on it. (1) installing procedure you can mount an mg-sip96 on a 19-inch rack. The procedure is the same as mounting an sv8500 server on a 19-inch rack; ref...

  • Page 1851

    Vol.2-1598 mg-sip96 step4: plug lan cables into the ether1 and ether2 connectors (rj-45). Note 12 front panel note 12: if you want to establish ip addresses of lan and a sip network in the same segment, connect a lan cable only to a connector for lan. Cable connection is completed. Move on to the ne...

  • Page 1852

    Vol.2-1599 mg-sip96 19.3 startup and installation test here explains procedures for startup and installation test of mg-sip96. Step1: assigning office data on the telephony server refer to [m-111] media gateway sip in data programming manual - business. Step2: connecting maintenance terminal (pc) an...

  • Page 1853

    Vol.2-1600 mg-sip96 note: you can use any icon and name. “connect to” window is opened. Choose a com port which is connected to mg-sip96 in “con- nect using” box. Enter “ok.” note 13 note 13: it depends on the pc. Mgsip mgsip.

  • Page 1854

    Vol.2-1601 mg-sip96 “port settings” tab opens. Set the values as the following figure shows..

  • Page 1855

    Vol.2-1602 mg-sip96 step3: turning on mg-sip96 making sure of cable connection between the maintenance terminal (pc) and the mg-sip96 via con- sole cable, turning on pwr switch. Make sure that pwr lamp on the front panel of mg-sip96 turns green. Rear panel front panel after mg-sip96 is activated, th...

  • Page 1856

    Vol.2-1603 mg-sip96 step4: setting configuration data on mg-sip96 (1) on the activated mg-sip96 with “ mgsip login: ” displayed, type “config” as the login name, and press enter key. (2) prompt “mg(sip)>” appears: you are in data setting mode. (3) use configuration commands to set data: follow the f...

  • Page 1857

    Vol.2-1604 mg-sip96 note: • pressing the enter key can skip the item. • to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configura- tion and restart the mg-sip96. • when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use e...

  • Page 1858

    Vol.2-1605 mg-sip96 note: to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configuration and restart the mg-sip96. 19.3.3 setting of sip server data set the ip address or fqdn, and port number, type, and sip domain of a sip proxy server. (fqdn=fully qual-...

  • Page 1859

    Vol.2-1606 mg-sip96 when fqdn (=1) is selected: note: • pressing the enter key can skip the item. Make sure to input data for “sip server type” and “ipaddress/ fqdn”; these cannot be skipped. • to make this assignment effective, it is required to execute the “reboot” command to save the configura- t...

  • Page 1860

    Vol.2-1607 mg-sip96 • be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the fqdn (with the copy and paste features of your personal computer), and be careful not to mistype a character. (“0”(zero) or “o” (alphabetical o), for ex- ample.) 19.3.4 setting of pilot number for mg-sip96 assign a pilot ...

  • Page 1861

    Vol.2-1608 mg-sip96 •set keynumber (assign a pilot number.) if any of these items have not been assigned when saving the running configuration data, the fol- lowing message will be displayed to the unassigned item. When these messages are displayed, you can select if you want to set the default conf...

  • Page 1862

    Vol.2-1609 mg-sip96 when you have finished, the following message appears on the maintenance console. Note: both lan1 and lan2 must be connected to make mg-sip96 online. (for a one-port configuration, only lan1 connection makes mg-sip96 online.) step6: checking the lamp status of link and speed at e...

  • Page 1863

    Vol.2-1610 mg-sip96 step3: make sure the registration status of the telephony server network and sip network by us- ing “show status” command in the configuration mode. If “registration is ok.” message ap- pears, mg-sip96 is in operating state. Note: when using pcpro, make sure of the registration s...

  • Page 1864

    Vol.2-1611 mg-sip96 19.4 operation and maintenance here explains mg-sip96: operation and maintenance..

  • Page 1865

    Vol.2-1612 mg-sip96 19.4.1 cf card replacement for mg-sip this section describes the procedure to replace a current cf card with a new cf card for ver- sion upgrade. Note: you cannot replace a cf card while the mg-sip96 is in operation. Doing so stops the device. Note: antistatic measures must be ta...

  • Page 1866

    Vol.2-1613 mg-sip96 19.4.2 fan replacement this section describes the procedure to replace fans inside an mg-sip96. * a failure of a cooling fan rises the temperature inside of an mg-sip96, which greatly influences the system. Please replace a cooling fan every five years to avoid it, even though th...

  • Page 1867

    Vol.2-1614 mg-sip96 step3: remove the fan connector; the screw; the fan. Note: if you are replacing fans as the mg-sip96 remains on, removing both fans may generate heat inside, resulting in system failure. Be sure to replace one by one, but not at the same time. Step4: attach new fans: perform the ...

  • Page 1868

    Vol.2-1615 mg-sip96 19.5 configuration commands 19.5.1 how to use the configuration command configuration commands are used to change the default settings. Change the settings only where it is necessary. Start a communication software such as hyperterminal note 1 of maintenance console (pc), and tur...

  • Page 1869

    Vol.2-1616 mg-sip96 commands other than “ping” cannot be set within a single line; use interactive mode to input values. The following figure shows an example of data setting using the interactive mode. * the example of the screen below the above example is omitted here. Note: ip precedence - tos fi...

  • Page 1870

    Vol.2-1617 mg-sip96 19.5.2 list of maintenance console commands note: drs (device registration server) used in this section refers to a control function of the telephony server. Set the ip address of the telephony server (tp). R: required c: not required, but configurable set: commands to set config...

  • Page 1871

    Vol.2-1618 mg-sip96 21 h245_base_port_no c assigns the base port number for h.245 tcp server. 22 hc_alarm c specifies the alarm transmission destination. 23 hc_timer c assigns the health check timer value. 24 interface c assigns the operation speed and operation mode of an interface. 25 ipaddress r ...

  • Page 1872

    Vol.2-1619 mg-sip96 note 1: available since sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3. Note 2: required to set silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection in the acd system. Note 3: available since fp85-106 s3. 55 sip_transport c specifies a sip transport protocol. Note 1 56 slipresp c assigns error response ...

  • Page 1873

    Vol.2-1620 mg-sip96 note 1: available since sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3. Ping : command to use the “ping” for ipv4 address sub command must? Function 1 parameter (enter the ping destination ipv4 address) - “ping” command for ipv4 address ping6 : command to use the “ping” for ipv6 address sub comman...

  • Page 1874

    Vol.2-1621 mg-sip96 19.5.3 ipv6 function mg-sip96 supports ipv6 function based on rfc2460 in order to communicate with the sip server having an ipv6 address. When ipv6 mode is enabled, ipv6 packets are sent from/received to wan side (through the ether2 port) on mg-sip96. You can select an ip version...

  • Page 1875

    Vol.2-1622 mg-sip96 [operating procedure] to enable ipv6 function, execute the following commands. For the details of the commands, refer to 19.5.2 . List of maintenance console commands . Step1: select “ipv6” by “set ip_version” command. Note 2 step2: set sip server address by “set sip_server” comm...

  • Page 1876

    Vol.2-1623 mg-sip96 note 3: when ipv6 function is in service, ether2 ip address can be generated by mg-sip96 after mg- sip96 receives the ra message from the router. So ether2 ip address setting is unnecessary. Note 4: • “set ip_version: ipv6” is executed. When the last ip address set for ether2 por...

  • Page 1877

    Vol.2-1624 mg-sip96 • general form (7) “one-port only” is not supported by ipv6 function. Do not enable “one-port only” with the set_ipaddress command when ipv6 is selected with the set ip_version command. (8) when ether2 port fails to obtain an ipv6 address while ipv6 function is active, it attempt...

  • Page 1878

    Vol.2-1625 mg-sip96 set command (1) 183rbt setting of local rbt connection select function when receiving 183 message (w/o sdp) this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as f...

  • Page 1879

    Vol.2-1626 mg-sip96 assigns additional three pilot numbers to the sip server other than the one registered by “set keynumber” command. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • unique number to be assigned for each of another keynumber 1/2/3. Assign value=0 (default) f...

  • Page 1880

    Vol.2-1627 mg-sip96 the command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes- sage in updating ack and register for re-invite/200 ok. [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. ...

  • Page 1881

    Vol.2-1628 mg-sip96 the command is used to specify whether to send call-id to sv8500. [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • this command is available for sp-3987 mgsip...

  • Page 1882

    Vol.2-1629 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • normally this command is not required to be changed. (9) cc_convert setting of calling party’ s country code display conversion...

  • Page 1883

    Vol.2-1630 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • parameter “4=p-called-party-id[isub]” is available since sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 2 or later. For the other...

  • Page 1884

    Vol.2-1631 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. (11) check_number setting a limit to the letters and numerals that can be used for calling/called party number this command is used to assign a function that pe...

  • Page 1885

    Vol.2-1632 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • this command is available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3 or later. • in the telephony server side, a system data setting (asydl, system data 1, index 1144, bit 6=1 (codec change function is in service) is required to enable...

  • Page 1886

    Vol.2-1633 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • select 2 when the caller id blocking is judged by the userinfo in from header on the sip network side spec- i...

  • Page 1887

    Vol.2-1634 mg-sip96 note: normally this command is not required to be used. (15) dnsaddress setting of the ip address of dns server this command is used to specify the dns ip address to resolve an address by dns server. [setting example] [ipv6] [ipv4] note: you do not have to change this command if ...

  • Page 1888

    Vol.2-1635 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • the cache retention time length is 60 seconds. • available transport protocols are tcp and udp. • during naptr lookup, sip processing stops. • this function takes priority over transport protocol (tcp/udp selection) configure...

  • Page 1889

    Vol.2-1636 mg-sip96 [setting example] (19) drs_qos setting of tos value of drs server this command is used to specify the tos value of ip packets to be sent to drs server. [setting example] mg(sip)> set drsaddress [primary drs setting] setting primary drs; input ip address.(default=0.0.0.0) :172.16....

  • Page 1890

    Vol.2-1637 mg-sip96 note: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. Prec.=precedence(3bits) d=delay(1bit) t=throughput(1bit) r=reliability(1bit) c=cost(1bit) input following parameters. Precedence(default=5, 0-7):5 specify the precedence in an ip network (default: 5). 0-7 (low - high) d...

  • Page 1891

    Vol.2-1638 mg-sip96 note: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. Dscp=differentiated service code point(6bits) note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with an exception of “input type”. Be sure to input a value to “input type.” • no...

  • Page 1892

    Vol.2-1639 mg-sip96 • when out-band is selected: • when in-band is selected: select dtmf mode. 0=negotiation(default) 1=out-band 2=in-band input:0 0: negotiation (default) 1: out-band (fixed) 2: in-band (fixed) input dtmf duration value.(ms) (50-240(default=120)):120 specify dtmf duration. (50 to 24...

  • Page 1893

    Vol.2-1640 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • at dtmf mode negotiation/out-band, the payload type 103 cannot be used. • note that the sum of dtmf duration and dtmf pause val...

  • Page 1894

    Vol.2-1641 mg-sip96 (23) hc_timer setting of health check timer value this command is used to specify the health check time-out value. [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (24) interface setting of the operation speed and operation mode of an interface this co...

  • Page 1895

    Vol.2-1642 mg-sip96 (25) ipaddress setting of ip address and subnet mask this command is used to set the number of ports mg-sip96 uses, and assign an ip address and a subnet mask to each ether port on mg-sip96. Ports of mg-sip96 are allocated as follows; • ether1: lan (telephony server network) side...

  • Page 1896

    Vol.2-1643 mg-sip96 [ipv4] note: when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 only as shown below. * if you select one port in the number of port setting, ether2 setting is not performed. > using all port ether[1] ip address : 192.168.100.33 subnet ...

  • Page 1897

    Vol.2-1644 mg-sip96 note: if you select one port in the number of port setting, be careful not to use the same rtp port number (set by “set sip_rtp_port_no” or “set ipx_rtp_port_no” command) when setting the non-default sip network rtp base port number. (26) ip_version setting of sip side ip version...

  • Page 1898

    Vol.2-1645 mg-sip96 when route type = 1 is selected: when route type = 2 is selected: • [to assign destination network address and gateway address] usually, gateway data should be set as ‘static’ at lan (telephony server network) side. Mg(sip)> set ipx_route select route type(0:exit/1:none/2:static)...

  • Page 1899

    Vol.2-1646 mg-sip96 note 4: do not set routing in the segment where mg-sip96 belongs. • [to assign routing information (gateway address only)] to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either lan side port or sip network side port. Usually, assign a default gateway to sip network side port....

  • Page 1900

    Vol.2-1647 mg-sip96 • [to delete the assigned routing information] select gateway type(0:exit/1:gateway/ 2:default gateway):2 0: exit (exit the command without execut- ing anything.) 1: specify the gateway. 2: specify the default gateway. Select “2”. Input ip address of default gateway:192.168.0.254...

  • Page 1901

    Vol.2-1648 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either one of the lan side port or sip network side port. • routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned to ether (0). The following shows a typical network...

  • Page 1902

    Vol.2-1649 mg-sip96 note: • summarize the network addresses if possible. • if you set an invalid gateway address and reboot the system, a message of “please set correct gateway ad- dress!!” stays displayed after rebooting the system. [example of setting] • router 3/4/5 that are placed downstream of ...

  • Page 1903

    Vol.2-1650 mg-sip96 (28) ipx_rtp_port_no setting of the rtp base port number for lan (telephony server network) this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. (even numbers only.) [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • normally...

  • Page 1904

    Vol.2-1651 mg-sip96 registers to sip server per sip-uri (or telephone number). [when this function is disabled] only the pilot number that is set in the configuration of mg-sip96 by “set keynumber” command registers to sip server. Note 5: when “privacy” is selected : assign a random value to the use...

  • Page 1905

    Vol.2-1652 mg-sip96 [setting example] (32) no_media_code setting of the sip error response code this command is used to set a sip error response code. When 415 is set as a response code, 415 unsup- ported media type is sent instead of response code 488 if an unsupported codec is received. [setting e...

  • Page 1906

    Vol.2-1653 mg-sip96 (34) prack setting of prack (provisional response acknowledgment) function (rfc3262) this command is used to enable/disable provisional response acknowledgement (pra) function (rfc3262). When this is set enabled, the 18x cyclical-send of provisional response function can be spec-...

  • Page 1907

    Vol.2-1654 mg-sip96 (36) pre_negotiation_port_no setting of the udp port receiving packets for voice control path this command is used to specify the udp port number that receives packets regarding the voice control path. [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (...

  • Page 1908

    Vol.2-1655 mg-sip96 when “1” is selected: when “2” is selected: (a) if the firmware version is sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 2 or later. Note 6: use of p-preferred-id headers of invite message differs for each pattern. When pattern 1 is set: p-preferred-id header is not attached. When pattern 2 is set:...

  • Page 1909

    Vol.2-1656 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • pattern 3~5 can be selected since sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 2 or later. For pattern 1 or 2, there is no difference among firmw...

  • Page 1910

    Vol.2-1657 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • when registration per number function is effective, assign by setting mg-sip96 using the largest number withi...

  • Page 1911

    Vol.2-1658 mg-sip96 note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • normally this command is not required to be changed. (42) rtp_qos this command is used to specify the tos value of real-time pr...

  • Page 1912

    Vol.2-1659 mg-sip96 this command is used to set the sip domain name for mg-sip96. [setting example] • when this command is enabled: • disable note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. • this ...

  • Page 1913

    Vol.2-1660 mg-sip96 when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 connects. (46) signaling_port_no setting of the udp port number that receives control signal packets this command is used to specify the udp...

  • Page 1914

    Vol.2-1661 mg-sip96 note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (47) sip_accfilter setting of sip access filter this command is used to enable the sip access filter which discards sip packets received from an un- authorized destination. [setting example] when ip address (=0) is select...

  • Page 1915

    Vol.2-1662 mg-sip96 when fqdn (=1) is selected by “set sip_server” command: note: this command is available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3 or later. (48) sip_port_no setting of the port number that receives sip messages this command is used to specify a udp port number that receives sip messages. ...

  • Page 1916

    Vol.2-1663 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: normally this command is not required to be changed. (49) sip_qos setting of the tos value for sip signaling this command is used to specify the tos value of ip packets for sip signaling. [setting example] * see “set drs_qos ” command for a display example...

  • Page 1917

    Vol.2-1664 mg-sip96 [ipv4] when fqdn (=1) is selected: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip register type” and “ip address/fqdn”. • normally this command is not required to be changed. • be sure not to enter a blank ...

  • Page 1918

    Vol.2-1665 mg-sip96 (51) sip_route setting of the route information of sip network this command is used to specify route information in the sip side network. Use “set sip_route” command. For details, see “ ipx_route ”(setting of the route information in the telephony server network). Note: when ipv6...

  • Page 1919

    Vol.2-1666 mg-sip96 [ipv4] input sip server ip address. Input sip server ip address. (default=::) : 2001:db8::860 assign the ip address of the proxy server (default: ::). Input sip server port number. (1024-65535(default=5060)):5060 assign the port number of the proxy server (default: 5060) select s...

  • Page 1920

    Vol.2-1667 mg-sip96 when fqdn (=1) is selected: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • pressing the enter key can skip the item, with exceptions of “sip server type” and “ipaddress/fqdn”. Select sip server router type. 0=strict(default) 1=loose input:0 select a strict router or loose...

  • Page 1921

    Vol.2-1668 mg-sip96 • if you have set a character string to specify the service provider, the character string is used as the sip do- main name. • be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the fqdn (with the copy and paste features of your personal computer), and be careful not to mistype...

  • Page 1922

    Vol.2-1669 mg-sip96 when enable (=0) is selected for 3pcc function, the following screen is displayed. (when disable is selected, no screen is displayed.) note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network where mg-sip96 conn...

  • Page 1923

    Vol.2-1670 mg-sip96 [setting example] note: this command is available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3 or later. (56) slipresp setting of error response codes used when bypassing a sip server this command is used to determine an error response code that is sent in order to prompt a sip server to byp...

  • Page 1924

    Vol.2-1671 mg-sip96 note 12: country code 11 (new zealand) is available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 2 or later. (59) multisession setting of silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection this command is used to set silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection using mg-sip96 in the acd system. ...

  • Page 1925

    Vol.2-1672 mg-sip96 show (1) arp displaying of arp table this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table of mg-sip96. [setting example] note: actual values such as address or hwaddress may differ from this sample. Note 1: address : ip address (ip address or host name of an e...

  • Page 1926

    Vol.2-1673 mg-sip96 [drs configuration data] [common configuration data] 5=route config data route config data=route infor- mation configuration data 9=exit end of show command select a reference number:0 select “0”. Ether[1] mac address:00-00-00-00-00-00 mac addresses of ether [1] [2] of mg-sip96 e...

  • Page 1927

    Vol.2-1674 mg-sip96 [2009-03-05 14:49:29] time when the configuration is acquired. [sp-3987:01.00.00.00] software version information of mg-sip96 0=mac data mac data=mac configuration data 1=drs data drsdata=configuration data of the telephony server 2=common config data common config data=common co...

  • Page 1928

    Vol.2-1675 mg-sip96 set h245_base_port_no: h245 base port number :40000 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y after displaying about 20 lines of config data, you can select if you want to see more data or not. To see the config data more, enter “y”. To exit th...

  • Page 1929

    Vol.2-1676 mg-sip96 ------------------------------------------------- set domain: domain name :0 ------------------------------------------------- set dnsaddress: dns ip address :0.0.0.0 ------------------------------------------------- set hc_alarm: h/c alarm type :ipx and sip side enable h/c alarm...

  • Page 1930

    Vol.2-1677 mg-sip96 [port configuration data] call hold function :enable rtp detect timer value :3sec response code to reject :488 displays the current setting of mg based call retention. When “dis- able” is selected by a set com- mand “call_hold”, “disable” is displayed, but “rtp detect timer value...

  • Page 1931

    Vol.2-1678 mg-sip96 [sip configuration data] 9=exit end of show command select a reference number:3 select “3”. Using all port data that is set to each port num- ber is displayed. Ether[1] ip address:172.16.253.200 subnet :255.255.255.0 interface :speed/duplex=auto/auto port type :ipx side port ethe...

  • Page 1932

    Vol.2-1679 mg-sip96 select a reference number:4 select “4”. Set sip_server: currently assigned common con- fig data will be displayed. Server type :ip address server ip address :0.0.0.0 when fqdn is set by a set com- mand “sip_server”, “sip server fqdn”, not “sip server ip address”, is displayed. Di...

  • Page 1933

    Vol.2-1680 mg-sip96 user id :0 password :0 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y after displaying about 20 lines of config data, you can select if you want to see more data or not. To see the config data more, enter “y”. To exit this command, press “n”. ------...

  • Page 1934

    Vol.2-1681 mg-sip96 set prack: supported 100rel :enable when “disable” is selected by the set command “prack”, “disable” is displayed. Stop cyclical-send of 18x :disable “enable” may be displayed according to the setting. When “set prack” is disabled, nothing is displayed. --------------------------...

  • Page 1935

    Vol.2-1682 mg-sip96 self sip domain mode :disable when “enable” is selected by the set command “self_sip_domain”, “enable” is selected as well as the set domain name. Example) self sip domain string: xxxxxxxx ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y -------------...

  • Page 1936

    Vol.2-1683 mg-sip96 ------------------------------------------------- does it display more? Y/n=y ------------------------------------------------- set multi_regist: multi-registration mode :disable when “enable” is selected by set command “multi-regist”, “enable” is displayed as well as the follow-...

  • Page 1937

    Vol.2-1684 mg-sip96 cause table :normal when “alternate routing/route advance” is selected by the set command “cause_table”, “alter- nate routing/route advance” is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set response_table: response table :normal when “revised_table” is selected...

  • Page 1938

    Vol.2-1685 mg-sip96 sdp style setting :rfc4566 when “normal” is selected by the set command “sdp_style”, “nor- mal” is displayed. G729 annexb=no :enable when “disable” is selected by the set command “sdp_style”, “dis- able” is displayed. Note 4 ------------------------------------------------- set c...

  • Page 1939

    Vol.2-1686 mg-sip96 [route information configuration data] response code(unsupported codec) :415 the number for a response code specified by “no_media_code” command is displayed. ------------------------------------------------- set ppi_to_pai: note 4 paid transmission function :enable when “disable...

  • Page 1940

    Vol.2-1687 mg-sip96 note 4: available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3 or later. Note 5: • when “sip telephony service function” is enabled by the set command “sip_tel_service”, “enable” is dis- played, as well as enablement/disablement of the following settings: replaces function hold [a=inactive] ...

  • Page 1941

    Vol.2-1688 mg-sip96 (4) version displaying of version information this command is used to display version information of mg-sip96 functions (base system and firm- ware). [setting example] (5) route displaying of route table this command is used to show the route table of mg-sip96. [setting example] ...

  • Page 1942

    Vol.2-1689 mg-sip96 • settings of “flags”, “metric”, ref”, “use”, “mss”, “window” and “irtt” do not affect the operation of mg-sip96 directly. Note 6: flags : indicates a route type. (“u” is usable, “h” is host, “g” is gateway.) note 7: metric : indicates route metric. (in the range of one to 9999.)...

  • Page 1943

    Vol.2-1690 mg-sip96 • if displaying status of registration to lan (telephony server side) note 14: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip96 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip96 successfully registered: registration is ok. (drs ip address 192.168.0.1) (th...

  • Page 1944

    Vol.2-1691 mg-sip96 • if displaying status of registration to sip network (when the registration function per number is enabled) note 16: the example above shows a total of 16 cnts tried registration, and eight (9 to 16) of them failed. (use the asril command to set mg-nos and a pilot number. Cnt is...

  • Page 1946

    Vol.2-1693 mg-sip96 download this command is used to download mg-sip96 program and music/tone file via ether1 port (ether port on the lan side). The following figure shows an example of a display. [when downloading all programs] mg(sip) > download input “download” at the configuration mode. --- down...

  • Page 1947

    Vol.2-1694 mg-sip96 if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new subnet mask:255.255.0.0 enter a subnet mask. --- ip address setting of tftp server --- current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the ip address of a tftp server, enter “y”. (default address: 10....

  • Page 1948

    Vol.2-1695 mg-sip96 sp3987/music/music.Tar.Gz download... Tftpdownload:user file tftp start. Received. Checksum matched! Download was completed! Please reboot after a download menu end. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 quit --...

  • Page 1949

    Vol.2-1696 mg-sip96 [when downloading one program] mg(sip) > download enter “download” in configuration mode. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 quit --- [q/q] input:2 to download one program, enter “2”. --- ip address setting o...

  • Page 1950

    Vol.2-1697 mg-sip96 if you want to return to the previous step, please input 'q'. Input new ip address:172.16.253.250 enter the ip address. Ip address change was completed. New ip address of mg(sip):172.16.253.100 new subnet mask of mg(sip):255.255.0.0 new ip address of tftp server:172.16.253.250 ar...

  • Page 1951

    Vol.2-1698 mg-sip96 tone data:1 music data:2 wave file:3 config data:4 quit:[q/q] input:q when download is complete, the pro- gram download menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. Please reboot after a download menu end. --- download menu --- download of all programs. (default) --- i...

  • Page 1952

    Vol.2-1699 mg-sip96 how to download a wave file if you select type3 (wave file) for the music type of “set musictype” command, you can use any wave file for music on hold. Note that the payload type of the rtp header sent by mg-sip96 must be g.711. The following explains how to download a wave file....

  • Page 1953

    Vol.2-1700 mg-sip96 about wave file format a wave file must meet the following specifications as its format: • sampling frequency: 8khz • quantifying bit number:8 bit • quantifying format: g.711 μ -law/a-law • channel: monaural • capacity: only a single wave file with about 1mbyte (about 120 seconds...

  • Page 1954

    Vol.2-1701 mg-sip96 input new subnet mask:255.255.0.0 enter a subnet mask. --- ip address setting of tftp server --- current ip address of tftp server:10.41.1.250 to change the tftp server ip address, enter “y”. (default address: 10.41.1.250) do you change ip address of tftp server? [y(change)/n(cur...

  • Page 1955

    Vol.2-1702 mg-sip96 note: • be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. • after downloading, initialize the mg-sip96. • make sure of the following to set an ip address for download. 1. A port to download files needs to have a different network address (or segmen...

  • Page 1956

    Vol.2-1703 mg-sip96 • if checksum error occurs during download, an error message similar to the following is displayed. Checksum unmatched! Checksum of sp3987/main/main.Tar.Gz is 1234. Not 5678. Download failed! If an error message is displayed, the display goes back to the download menu. In this ca...

  • Page 1957

    Vol.2-1704 mg-sip96 listdload: datakind = [number] (0- 255) is too large out of running numbers (0-255) check the contents of the download-list file. Listdload: comment strings too long =[comment strings] bad length of comment strings in the download-list file check if the download-list file is prop...

  • Page 1958

    Vol.2-1705 mg-sip96 other commands 1. Exit 2. Logout [function] to exit the configuration command menu. [setting example] note: after changing the configuration, if you execute this command without saving the running config- uration, the system discards the change and exits the configuration command...

  • Page 1959

    Vol.2-1706 mg-sip96 • “set keynumber”: assigns a pilot number. If any of these items have not been assigned when saving the running configuration data, the fol- lowing message will be displayed to the unassigned item. When these messages are displayed, you can select if you want to set the default c...

  • Page 1960

    Vol.2-1707 mg-sip96 note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. 5. Ping6 [function] to attempt “ping” command five times to the designated ipv6 host on the network. [setting example] 64 bytes from 172.16.253.3: icmp_seq=3 ttl=128 time=0.443 ms 64 bytes f...

  • Page 1961

    Vol.2-1708 mg-sip96 note: • this command is available for sp-3987 mgsip prog-b issue 3 or later. • the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. 6. Traceroute [function] to inquire network routes. The following figures show display examples. [on the telephony se...

  • Page 1962

    Vol.2-1709 mg-sip96 note: when the response from the network is delayed, it takes time to complete the command. Note 19: when “ipv6” is selected by “set ip_version”, input an ipv6 address for target ip address. When “ipv4” is selected by “set ip_version”, input an ipv4 address for target ip address....

  • Page 1963

    Vol.2-1710 mg-sip96 19.5.4 error messages when an error occurs while using a configuration command, an error message prompting for re-registration is displayed. Refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshooting illegal command. An incorrect command is entered. Enter t...

  • Page 1964

    Vol.2-1711 mg-sip16 20. Mg-sip16 20.1 what is mg-sip16? Mg-sip16 is an media gateway to provide the system with session initiation protocol (sip) interface. It enables the system to build multi-service and reliable voice over ip (voip) networks using sip defined by ietf. Sip is an application-layer ...

  • Page 1965

    Vol.2-1712 mg-sip16 20.2 specifications 20.2.1 hardware specifications the following explains the hardware specifications of mg-sip16. Note 1: use a straight-through cable to connect this connector to pc. Item specification remarks external interface serial connector (rs-232c, d-sub 9 pins) × 1 for ...

  • Page 1966

    Vol.2-1713 mg-sip16 20.2.2 software specifications the available features are in the following: note: additional services (such as refer) on the sip procedure are not provided in this system. Note: tone and holding tone to sip network is generated by mg-sip. When mgc(internal phi-bri) external holdi...

  • Page 1967

    Vol.2-1714 mg-sip16 20.2.3 switches, lamps, and connectors • front see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the front panel of mg- sip16. Description of lamps and connectors on front panel note 1: the following causes may be considered when on line lamp flashes...

  • Page 1968

    Vol.2-1715 mg-sip16 • rear see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the rear panel of mg- sip16. Description of switches and connectors on rear panel note 2: when reclosing the power supply, wait for more than a second to turn on the power switch. Name descript...

  • Page 1969

    Vol.2-1716 mg-sip16 20.3 installation 20.3.1 mounting mg-sip16 a.) desktop horizontal setting b.) 19-inch rack mount use a tray sv70 rack mgt to mount mg-sip16 on 19-inch rack. Be sure to check the sv70 rack mgt is securely fixed on the rack before setting the mg-sip16. Front view pwr on line mg-sip...

  • Page 1970

    Vol.2-1717 mg-sip16 20.3.2 cable connection this section shows the cable connection to mg-sip16. The mg-sip provides the following types of interfaces: • ethernet port to sip network (wan)/telephony server network (lan) • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console connect the requi...

  • Page 1971

    Vol.2-1718 mg-sip16 20.4 startup mg-sip16 and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. These steps provide the minimum data required only for mg-sip16 setup. Before taking the following steps, refer to service con- ditions of [m-111] media...

  • Page 1972

    Vol.2-1719 mg-sip16 20.4.1 data assignment by pcpro for this information about mg-sip16 settings, refer to [m-111] mg-sip in data programming manual..

  • Page 1973

    Vol.2-1720 mg-sip16 20.4.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to rs-232c connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: • port: com1 (dep...

  • Page 1974

    Vol.2-1721 mg-sip16 20.4.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of mg-sip16. Step 2: make sure the led indicate normal status. - pwr lamp lights green (*boot program automatically starts) attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required rear turn on the p...

  • Page 1975

    Vol.2-1722 mg-sip16 20.4.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on the maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-sip16 using proprietary pro...

  • Page 1976

    Vol.2-1723 mg-sip16 note: assign the data depending on the sip network configuration. Step 1: when a prompt “->” is displayed, enter “config” and then press enter key. Step 2: a prompt “mg-sip>” is displayed indicating the console command mode. Step 3: specify drs ip address. Open set drsaddress com...

  • Page 1977

    Vol.2-1724 mg-sip16 20.4.5 cable connection step 1: connect mg-sip16 to the lan and wan by using appropriate lan cables. Note: before connecting the mg-sip16 to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the following: - is there other device having the same ip address overlapped? - is the ...

  • Page 1978

    Vol.2-1725 mg-sip16 note: if a message indicating mg-sip offline start is displayed, make sure of the following: - confirm a cable connected to sip network is inserted firmly. - check the link lamp lights. If any message does not appear on the screen for three minutes, it could be a communication pr...

  • Page 1979

    Vol.2-1726 mg-sip16 20.5 maintenance console commands 20.5.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-sip16 using proprietary protocol. • connection settings a communication be...

  • Page 1980

    Vol.2-1727 mg-sip16 the user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the set commands. Input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-sip>” as an ex- ample here) is indicated. Parameters var...

  • Page 1981

    Vol.2-1728 mg-sip16 the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. * if you go out of the configuration mode by using “logout” command without saving the setting information using “reboot” command, the changed settings are discarded. To save the settings, execute “reboot” com- ...

  • Page 1982

    Vol.2-1729 mg-sip16 note: for versions prior to below, assign by command “set Δ 81to0.” sp3796/sp-3816ver08. 00. 02. 00 sp3843ver04. 00. 02. 00 sp3905ver01. 00. 03. 00 set 36 sip_port_no specifies the tos transmitted to/from sip network. Page 1749 37 sip_qos specifies the sip tos page 1750 38 sip_re...

  • Page 1983

    Vol.2-1730 mg-sip16 set command 1 set Δ 183rbt this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. Normally this command is not required to be changed. 2 set Δ another_keynumb...

  • Page 1984

    Vol.2-1731 mg-sip16 5 set Δ cause_table the command is used to select the translation table of error cause to be sent to lan received from sip network as error response. Note: assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connected sip network. 6 set Δ cc_convert this command is used ...

  • Page 1985

    Vol.2-1732 mg-sip16 note: - assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. - this command is available for sp-3843 sipmg prog-b issue 6 or later. - for the earlier versions of firmware, the command displays as follows. P-called-party is not available. When isub parameter is enab...

  • Page 1986

    Vol.2-1733 mg-sip16 9 set Δ cpn_pattern this command is used to assign how to obtain cpn (calling party number). It is possible to change the pri- ority of obtaining calling party number when a call terminates via sip network. The following shows the method of obtaining cpn when this feature is avai...

  • Page 1987

    Vol.2-1734 mg-sip16 when this feature is available, calling party number is obtained in the following order 10 set Δ default the command is used to set back to the default setting of mg-sip16 configuration. Executing this com- mand saves the default setting to the flash memory. 11 set Δ dnsaddress t...

  • Page 1988

    Vol.2-1735 mg-sip16 13 set Δ drsaddress this command is used to assign drs address to mg-sip16. Note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note: unit(0), unit(1), unit(2), and unit(3) represent ...

  • Page 1989

    Vol.2-1736 mg-sip16 note: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. When diffserv (=2) is selected: note: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. When tos (=3) is selected: 15 set Δ dtmf_mode this command is used to specify the dtmf relay system in sip network. Mg-sip16 suppor...

  • Page 1990

    Vol.2-1737 mg-sip16 when out-band is selected: when in-band is selected: note: note that the sum of dtmf duration and dtmf pause values must be specified more than 120ms. If not, the following error message is displayed. 16 set Δ h245_base_port_no this command is used to specify the h.245 port numbe...

  • Page 1991

    Vol.2-1738 mg-sip16 18 set Δ hc_timer this command is used to specify the health check time-out. 19 set Δ interface this command is used to assign the ether speed and the duplex type to each port on mg-sip16. Note 1: when “automatic negotiation” is selected, “full duplex” is automatically applied to...

  • Page 1992

    Vol.2-1739 mg-sip16 21 set Δ ipx_route this command is used to specify route information in the pbx side network. The registered number of the route information is up to 10. Pressing the enter key can skip some of the items. When exit (route type = 0) is selected: when none (route type = 1) is selec...

  • Page 1993

    Vol.2-1740 mg-sip16 when static (route type = 2) is selected: note 1 [to assign destination network address and gateway address] note 1: usually, gateway data should be set as ‘static’ at lan side. Note 1: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Mg(sip) > set ipx_route route ...

  • Page 1994

    Vol.2-1741 mg-sip16 [to assign gateway address only] note 1: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: two or more default gateway cannot be registered. Note: to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to lan port or sip network port either. [to delete the assigned r...

  • Page 1995

    Vol.2-1742 mg-sip16 note 1: if there is no route to be deleted, the following will be displayed. Note 2: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned to ether (0). There is no static route table to delete. Route ...

  • Page 1996

    Vol.2-1743 mg-sip16 the following shows a typical network configuration and the sample data setting. Typical network configuration sample data setting for the above network configuration mg(sip) > set ipx_route route type(0: exit/1: none/2: static) : 2 select command (0: exit/1: set/2: delete) : 1 s...

  • Page 1997

    Vol.2-1744 mg-sip16 22 set Δ ipx_rtp_port_no this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. Note 1: the value must be assigned by an even number. 23 set Δ keynumber the command is used to assign a pilot number of mg-sip16 for registration. Note 1: be sure not t...

  • Page 1998

    Vol.2-1745 mg-sip16 25 set Δ musictype this command is used to select music type that is sent from mg-sip16. 26 set Δ prack this command is used to enable/disable provisional response acknowledgement (pra) function. When this is set enabled, the cyclical-send of provisional response function can be ...

  • Page 1999

    Vol.2-1746 mg-sip16 when displayname (=0) is selected: when remote-party-id (=1) is selected: note 1: be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the dummy string characters (with the copy and paste features of your personal computer), and be careful not to mistype a character. When rfc3323...

  • Page 2000

    Vol.2-1747 mg-sip16 30 set Δ reg_interval this command is used to assign the retry waiting time when failed to register, due to the error-response or no answer from the server when register packet was sent to sip server from mg(sip). Note: assign this command adjusting to the specification on sip ne...

  • Page 2001

    Vol.2-1748 mg-sip16 when sip domain mode is disable (=0) is selected: when sip domain mode is enable (=1) is selected: note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the sip network. Note: this command is required only when sip domain must be separated between the sip server and mg(sip...

  • Page 2002

    Vol.2-1749 mg-sip16 when session-timer is enable (=0) is selected: when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: 35 set Δ signaling_port_number this command is used to specify the udp port number that receives the control signal packets. 36 set Δ sip_port_no the command is used to specify a port n...

  • Page 2003

    Vol.2-1750 mg-sip16 37 set Δ sip_qos this command is used to specify the qos of session initiation protocol (sip). 38 set Δ sip_register the command is used to assign an ip address or a fully qualified domain name (fqdn) to the sip reg- istrar. This command is required for using a proxy server. When...

  • Page 2004

    Vol.2-1751 mg-sip16 40 set Δ sip_rtp_port_no this command is used to specify the rtp base port number from sip network. Note: the value must be assigned by an even number. 41 set Δ sip_server the command specifies the ip address or the fully qualified domain name (fqdn) of a sip proxy server. Note: ...

  • Page 2005

    Vol.2-1752 mg-sip16 when fqdn (=1) is selected : note: be sure not to enter a space after fqdn characters. 42 set Δ sip_tel_service the command is used to enable/disable the use of additional service features (hold/retrieve/transfer from the sip network side terminal). When enable (= 1) is selected:...

  • Page 2006

    Vol.2-1753 mg-sip16 43 set Δ slipresp this command is used to determine a slip response code. 44 set Δ update this command is used to enable/disable the use of update method. Note: assign this command adjusting to the specification on sip network. 45 set Δ response_table this command is used to set ...

  • Page 2007

    Vol.2-1754 mg-sip16 show command 1 show Δ arp this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table. The following shows a sample display. Note 1 note 1: actual value may differ from this sample. 2 show Δ config this command is used to show the configuration that has been currentl...

  • Page 2008

    Vol.2-1755 mg-sip16 when drs data (=1) is selected: when common config data (=2) is selected: mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose a reference number:1 drs[0] ip address: 0.0.0.0: portno[3456] d...

  • Page 2009

    Vol.2-1756 mg-sip16 note 1: h/c alarm type display varies depending on the type that is assigned by the “set hc_alarm.” - when assigned as ipx network ⇒ sip network: “telephony server and sip side enable” - when assigned as ipx network: “telephony server side enable” - when assigned as sip network: ...

  • Page 2010

    Vol.2-1757 mg-sip16 when port config data (=3) is selected: when sip config data (=4) is selected: mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose a reference number:3 ether[1] ip address: 0.0.0.0 subnet :...

  • Page 2011

    Vol.2-1758 mg-sip16 set privacy_pattern: privacy pattern :remote-party-id dummy string :anonymous ----------------------------------------------------- set session_timer: session-timer :0 session-expires :180 refresher :uac invite refresher :enable forced :disable -----------------------------------...

  • Page 2012

    Vol.2-1759 mg-sip16 note 1: “revised_table” will be displayed when revised_table is selected in “response_table” command. Note 2: “user info” will be displayed when user info is selected in “cpn_pattern” command. Note 3: “enable” will be displayed when user info is selected in “cc_convert” command. ...

  • Page 2013

    Vol.2-1760 mg-sip16 privacy pattern displayed as pattern shown below, pertaining to the data assigned. “displayname” “remote-party-id” “rfc3323/3325(0)” “rfc3323/3325(1)” dummy string displayed only when “remote-party-id” is assigned for “privacy pattern”. Session-timer may be displayed “disabled”, ...

  • Page 2014

    Vol.2-1761 mg-sip16 sip telephony service function when enable is selected in “ sip_tel_service ” command, “enable” is displayed and the setting of replaces function is displayed as follows. Replaces function: enable replaces function: disable *replaces function setting is not displayed when “disabl...

  • Page 2015

    Vol.2-1762 mg-sip16 when route config data (=5) is selected: 3 show Δ interface this command is used to show the link and setting state of ether connection . Mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose...

  • Page 2016

    Vol.2-1763 mg-sip16 4 show Δ route this command is used to show the route table. Note: actual value may differ from this sample. 5 show Δ status this command is used to show a status of the system. When port status (=0) is selected: note 1: port status is displayed as follows depending on the status...

  • Page 2017

    Vol.2-1764 mg-sip16 when ipx status (=1) is selected: note: display pattern is as follow depending on the registration status. - during registration: now registering - registration succeed: registration done. When sip status (=2) is selected [multi registration mode is disabled]: note: displayed mes...

  • Page 2018

    Vol.2-1765 mg-sip16 when sip status (=2) is selected [multi registration mode is enabled]: note: in the above example, registration was attempted for 16 numbers toward the sip server. However, 8 num- bers failed. Assign mg-no by using asril command. “cnt” is a parameter of asril command. 6 show Δ ve...

  • Page 2019

    Vol.2-1766 mg-sip16 download command 1 download this command is used to download main program/dtmf/music data via ether1 port. The data is down- loaded from trivial file transfer protocol (tftp) server. [when downloading all programs ] note: the new ip address that is used for downloading and those ...

  • Page 2020

    Vol.2-1767 mg-sip16 --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 input: q mg(sip) > _ • when download is complete, the menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. Note: be sure to reboot the mg-sip16 after downloading data..

  • Page 2021

    Vol.2-1768 mg-sip16 [when downloading one program ] mg(sip) > download please reboot after the command. --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input: 1 download of one program. --- input: 2 input: 2 --- mg-sip ip address set --- select ether port[1(ether1)/2(ether2)/q(quit)]: 1...

  • Page 2022

    Vol.2-1769 mg-sip16 note: be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. Note 1: if checksum error occurs during download, an error message similar to the following is displayed and the display goes back to the download menu. In this case, execute download again. N...

  • Page 2023

    Vol.2-1770 mg-sip16 ping command 1 ping Δ p1 this command is used to send ping packets to a specified address to confirm network status. Ping is at- tempted 5 times to the address specified. Note note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. Mg(sip) > ping...

  • Page 2024

    Vol.2-1771 mg-sip16 reboot command 2 reboot this command is used to reboot the mg-sip16. Also configuration data can be saved to the flash memory by using this command. Note 1: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data to the flash memory, be sure to execute the following commands:...

  • Page 2025

    Vol.2-1772 mg-sip16 exit command 1 exit this command is used to exit from configuration mode. Help command 1 help/? This command is used to show the brief explanation of all the commands that are available on the mainte- nance console. Mg(sip) > exit exit configmode. Bye! -> • exit from config mode....

  • Page 2026

    Vol.2-1773 mg-sip16 20.5.3 error messages on maintenance console the following are error messages displayed on the maintenance console. *refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshotting illegal command. An incorrect command is entered. Enter the command correctly. Il...

  • Page 2027

    Vol.2-1774 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21. Mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.1 what is mg-sip16? Mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] is an media gateway to provide the system with session initiation protocol (sip) interface. It enables the system to build multi-service and reliable voic...

  • Page 2028

    Vol.2-1775 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: the following table shows the number of available channels of mg-sip16. 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms g.711 - 16ch 16ch 16ch - g.729a - 16ch 16ch 16ch - g.723.1 - - - - -.

  • Page 2029

    Vol.2-1776 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.2 specifications 21.2.1 hardware specifications this subsection explains the hardware specifications of sca-16sipmga and mg-16sipmga. The figure below shows the outer view of mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga] and mg-sip16 [mg- 16sipmga]. • outerview the follow...

  • Page 2030

    Vol.2-1777 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] • dimension alm pwr on line ether 1 ether 2 100m link 100m link reset console mg-sip alm pwr on line ether 1 ether 2 100m link 100m link reset console mg-sip 400.0 (1' 3.75") (8.26") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 210.0 (1.72") 43.0 (11.6") 297.0 (1' 4.93") unit : ...

  • Page 2031

    Vol.2-1778 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] item specification remarks external interface rj-45 serial connector × 1 for maintenance rj-45 ether connector (100base-tx/ 10base-t) × 2 port for connecting to lan × 1 port for connecting to sip network × 1 setting desktop horizontal setting (standard ...

  • Page 2032

    Vol.2-1779 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.2.2 software specifications the available features are in the following: note: additional services (such as refer) on the sip procedure are not provided in this system. Note: tone and holding tone to sip network are generated by mg-sip. When mgc(inte...

  • Page 2033

    Vol.2-1780 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.2.3 switches, lamps, and connectors • front see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the front panel. Description of lamps and connectors on front panel note 1: alm lamp is used for sca-16sipmga only. Note 2: if...

  • Page 2034

    Vol.2-1781 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] • rear see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the rear panel of mg- sip16. Description of switches and connectors on rear panel note 1: when turning off the power supply, wait for more than one second to turn on ...

  • Page 2035

    Vol.2-1782 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.3 installation this section explains how to install the mg-sip16. Be sure to use anti-static kit. 21.3.1 installation of mg-sip16 installation location should be easily accessible to the following: • wan (sip network)/lan • power supply • a pc that r...

  • Page 2036

    Vol.2-1783 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] mg-sip box [mg-16sipmga] install the unit on a flat and stable surface. Alm pwr on line ether 1 ether 2 100m link 100m link reset console mg-sip front.

  • Page 2037

    Vol.2-1784 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.3.2 cable connection mg-sip16 provides the following types of interfaces: • ethernet port to wan (sip network)/lan • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console connect the required cables according to your system configuration. Alm ...

  • Page 2038

    Vol.2-1785 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] step 1: ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mg-sip16. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. Step 2: connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note: for the safety measures a...

  • Page 2039

    Vol.2-1786 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] step 3 connect a maintenance console (pc) to console connector using console cable. Note: lan cables should not be connected to ether1 and ether 2 connectors at this time. Theses will be connected after setting the network data. Alm pwr on line ether 1 ...

  • Page 2040

    Vol.2-1787 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4 startup mg-sip16 and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. These steps provide the minimum data required only for mg-sip16 setup. Before taking the following steps, refer to service co...

  • Page 2041

    Vol.2-1788 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.1 data assignment by pcpro please refer to [m-111] mg-sip in data programming manual - business..

  • Page 2042

    Vol.2-1789 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as...

  • Page 2043

    Vol.2-1790 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.3 power on step 1: turn on the mg-sip16. (power switch is provided on the rear panel of mg-sip16). Step 2: make sure the led indicate normal status. - pwr lamp lights green (*boot program automatically starts) attention contents static sensitive ha...

  • Page 2044

    Vol.2-1791 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on the maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-...

  • Page 2045

    Vol.2-1792 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] using configuration commands, assign the mg-sip16 data. The following data is assigned here: note: assign the data depending on the sip network configuration. [enter in config mode] step 1: when a prompt “ -> ” is displayed, enter “config” and then pres...

  • Page 2046

    Vol.2-1793 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [set ip address of mg-sip16] mg-sip16 has two lan ports (ether1 and ether2) on the front panel. Each port is used as follows: note: when ip addresses that belong to the same segment are used for ether1 and ether2, set the ip address to ether1 only. Othe...

  • Page 2047

    Vol.2-1794 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [set ip address and port number of drs] step 4: assign the ip address and port number of drs by using set drsaddress command. Note 1 note: unit(0), unit(1), unit(2), and unit(3) represent primary, secondary, tertiary, and fourthly respectively. Note 1: ...

  • Page 2048

    Vol.2-1795 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when fqdn (=1) is selected : note: be sure not to enter a space after fqdn characters. [set key number data] step 6: assign a pilot number, which is used to perform registration to the sip server. Note 1: be sure not to enter a space after the key numbe...

  • Page 2049

    Vol.2-1796 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [reboot mg-sip16] step 7: reboot the mg-sip16 by using reboot command. The assigned config data can also be saved onto the flash memory by using this command. Note 1: before saving the config data, be sure to assign necessary data by using “set ipaddres...

  • Page 2050

    Vol.2-1797 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mg-sip16 to the dedicated network as shown below. In few minutes, link lamps will light green, which indicates the connection is ok. • ether 1: link lamp (lan side) • ether 2: link lamp (wan side - sip network...

  • Page 2051

    Vol.2-1798 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.4.6 operation check make sure the mg-sip16 is in normal operation by the following procedure. Step 1: reboot the mg-sip16 by using reboot command. Step 2: make sure the following message appears on the maintenance console. Step 3: make sure the regis...

  • Page 2052

    Vol.2-1799 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.5 maintenance console commands 21.5.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-sip16 using proprietary protocol. • connection ...

  • Page 2053

    Vol.2-1800 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] the user input command above consists of several components. The following describes these components us- ing one of the set commands. Input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-sip>” as an ex- ample here) i...

  • Page 2054

    Vol.2-1801 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. * if you go out of the configuration mode by using “logout” command without saving the setting information using “reboot” command, the changed settings are discarded. To save the setti...

  • Page 2055

    Vol.2-1802 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: when using silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection in acd system, assign the command “ set- dmultisession ”. (available for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a ver02.01.00.00 or later) note 1: for versions prior to below, assign by command “set Δ 81...

  • Page 2056

    Vol.2-1803 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] set command 1 set Δ 183rbt this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. Normally this command is not required to be chang...

  • Page 2057

    Vol.2-1804 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 4 set Δ auth_header the command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes- sage in updating ack and register for re-invite/200 ok. Note: assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connec...

  • Page 2058

    Vol.2-1805 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 7 set Δ cause_table the command is used to select the translation table of error cause to be sent to lan received from sip network as error response. Note: assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connected sip network. 8 set Δ cc_co...

  • Page 2059

    Vol.2-1806 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: - assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. - this command is available for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 3 or later. - for the earlier versions of firmware, the command displays as follows. P-called-party is not avail...

  • Page 2060

    Vol.2-1807 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 11 set Δ cpn_pattern this command is used to assign how to obtain cpn (calling party number). It is possible to change the pri- ority of obtaining calling party number when a call terminates via sip network. The following shows the method of obtaining c...

  • Page 2061

    Vol.2-1808 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when this feature is available, calling party number is obtained in the following order note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. 12 set Δ default the command is used to set back to the default setting of mg-sip16 configu...

  • Page 2062

    Vol.2-1809 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 15 set Δ drsaddress this command is used to assign drs address to mg-sip16. Note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note: unit(0), unit(1), unit...

  • Page 2063

    Vol.2-1810 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 1: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. When diffserv (=2) is selected: note 1: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. When tos (=3) is selected: 17 set Δ dtmf_mode this command is used to specify the dtmf relay system ...

  • Page 2064

    Vol.2-1811 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when out-band is selected: when in-band is selected: note: note that the sum of dtmf duration and dtmf pause values must be specified more than 120ms. If not, the following error message is displayed. 18 set Δ h245_base_port_no this command is used to s...

  • Page 2065

    Vol.2-1812 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 20 set Δ hc_timer this command is used to specify the health check time-out. 21 set Δ interface this command is used to assign the ether speed and the duplex type to each port on mg-sip16. Note 1: when “automatic negotiation” is selected, “full duplex” ...

  • Page 2066

    Vol.2-1813 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 only as shown below. 23 set Δ ipx_route this command is used to specify route information in the telephony server side network. The registered number o...

  • Page 2067

    Vol.2-1814 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 1: pressing any key other than “y” causes the following message. When static (route type = 2) is selected: note 1 [to assign destination network address and gateway address] note 1: usually, gateway data should be set as ‘static’ at lan (telephony ...

  • Page 2068

    Vol.2-1815 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [to assign gateway address only] note 1: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: two or more default gateway cannot be registered. Note: to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either lan side port or sip network...

  • Page 2069

    Vol.2-1816 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [to delete the assigned routing information] note 1: if there is no route to be deleted, the following will be displayed. Note 2: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment...

  • Page 2070

    Vol.2-1817 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] the following shows a typical network configuration and the sample data setting. Typical network configuration sample data setting for the above network configuration mg(sip) > set ipx_route route type(0: exit/1: none/2: static) : 2 select command (0: e...

  • Page 2071

    Vol.2-1818 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 24 set Δ ipx_rtp_port_no this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. Note 1: the value must be assigned by an even number. 25 set Δ keynumber the command is used to assign a pilot number of mg-sip16 for registra...

  • Page 2072

    Vol.2-1819 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 27 set Δ musictype this command is used to select music type that is sent from mg-sip16. 28 set Δ prack this command is used to enable/disable provisional response acknowledgement (pra) function. When this is set enabled, the cyclical-send of provisiona...

  • Page 2073

    Vol.2-1820 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 30 set Δ privacy_pattern this command is used to specify a type of calling line identification non-presentation. When displayname (=0) is selected: when remote-party-id (=1) is selected: note 1: be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the d...

  • Page 2074

    Vol.2-1821 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 31 set Δ registration _ port_no this command is used to specify the udp port number that receives the registration packets. 32 set Δ reg_interval this command is used to assign the retry waiting time when failed to register, due to the error-response or...

  • Page 2075

    Vol.2-1822 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 34 set Δ rtp_qos this command is used to specify the qos of real-time protocol (rtp). The sample data setting is ex- plained in 16 setddrs_qos . 35 set Δ sdp_style this command is used to receive sdp with multiple “m” lines. Note: this command is availa...

  • Page 2076

    Vol.2-1823 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 37 set Δ session_timer this command is used to specify the session timer. When session-timer is enable (=0) is selected: when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: mg(sip) > set session_timer is a session-timer enable?(0: enable/1: disable(default=...

  • Page 2077

    Vol.2-1824 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 38 set Δ signaling_port_number this command is used to specify the udp port number that receives the control signal packets. 39 set Δ sip_accfilter this command is used to enable the sip access filter which discards sip packets received from an unau- th...

  • Page 2078

    Vol.2-1825 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when fqdn (=1) is selected by “set sip_server” command: note 1: this feature is available for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 5 or later. Note 2: this feature is available for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 7 or later. When receiving incoming calls t...

  • Page 2079

    Vol.2-1826 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 40 set Δ sip_port_no the command is used to specify a port number that receives sip messages. 41 set Δ sip_qos this command is used to specify the qos of session initiation protocol (sip). 42 set Δ sip_register the command is used to assign an ip addres...

  • Page 2080

    Vol.2-1827 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 43 set Δ sip_route this command is used to specify route information in the sip side network. The registered number of the route information is up to 10. 44 set Δ sip_rtp_port_no this command is used to specify the base rtp port number from sip network....

  • Page 2081

    Vol.2-1828 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when fqdn (=1) is selected : note: be sure not to enter a space after fqdn characters. 46 set Δ sip_tel_service the command is used to enable/disable the use of additional service features (hold/retrieve/transfer from the sip network side terminal). Whe...

  • Page 2082

    Vol.2-1829 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 47 set Δ slipresp this command is used to determine a slip response code. 48 set Δ update this command is used to enable/disable the use of update method. Note: assign this command adjusting to the specification on sip network. 49 set Δ response_table t...

  • Page 2083

    Vol.2-1830 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 51 set Δ multisession this command is used to enable/disable the use of multi-path switch in acd system by using mg-sip16. Note: this command is available for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a 02.01.00.00 or later. Mg(sip) > set multisession the multi-session ...

  • Page 2084

    Vol.2-1831 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] show command 1 show Δ arp this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table. The following shows a sam- ple display. Note: the actual value may differ from this sample. 2 show Δ config this command is used to show the configuratio...

  • Page 2085

    Vol.2-1832 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when drs data (=1) is selected: when common config data (=2) is selected: mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose a reference number:1 drs[0] ip addre...

  • Page 2086

    Vol.2-1833 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 1: h/c alarm type display varies depending on the type that is assigned by the “set hc_alarm.” - when assigned as ipx network ⇒ sip network: “telephony server and sip side enable” - when assigned as ipx network: “telephony server side enable” - whe...

  • Page 2087

    Vol.2-1834 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 2: the display shows “set call_hold” since sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 5. Note 3: when “disable” is selected by the set command “call_hold”, “disable” is displayed, but “rtp detect tim- er value” and “response code to reject” are not displayed...

  • Page 2088

    Vol.2-1835 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when sip config data (=4) is selected: mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose a reference number:4 set sip_server: server type :0 sever ip address :0...

  • Page 2089

    Vol.2-1836 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] set privacy_pattern: privacy pattern :remote-party-id dummy string :anonymous ----------------------------------------------------- set session_timer: session-timer :0 session-expires :180 refresher :uac invite refresher :enable forced :disable --------...

  • Page 2090

    Vol.2-1837 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 1: “revised_table” will be displayed when revised_table is selected in “response_table” command. Note 2: “user info” will be displayed when user info is selected in “cpn_pattern” command. Note 3: “enable” will be displayed when enable is selected i...

  • Page 2091

    Vol.2-1838 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 4: “enable” will be displayed when enable is selected in “check_number” command. Note 5: “rfc4566” will be displayed when rfc4566 is selected in “sdp_style” command. Note 6: “set call_id_relay” and “set sip_accfilter” are displayed since sp-3905 mg...

  • Page 2092

    Vol.2-1839 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 100rel may be displayed “disabled”, pertaining to the data assigned. Stop cyclical-send of 18x not displayed when the value of “100rel” is “disable”. May be displayed “enabled”, pertaining to the data assigned. Called-number pattern may be displayed “re...

  • Page 2093

    Vol.2-1840 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when route config data (=5) is selected: 3 show Δ interface this command is used to show the link and setting state of ether connection . Mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route confi...

  • Page 2094

    Vol.2-1841 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 4 show Δ route this command is used to show the route table. Note: the actual value may differ from this sample. 5 show Δ status this command is used to show a status of the system. [setting example] earlier than sp-3905 mgsip (16) prog-a issue 3 when p...

  • Page 2095

    Vol.2-1842 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when ipx status (=1) is selected: note 2: display pattern is as follows depending on the registration status. - during registration: now registering - registration succeed: registration done. (the ip address succeeding in registration appears as well.) ...

  • Page 2096

    Vol.2-1843 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] when sip status (=2) is selected [multi registration mode is enabled]: mg(sip) > show status 0: port status 1: ipx status 2: sip status 9: exit please choose a reference number:2 mg(sip) > ipx registration information registration done. Mg(sip) > sip re...

  • Page 2097

    Vol.2-1844 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: in the above example, registration was attempted for 16 numbers toward the sip server. However, 8 num- bers failed. Assign mg-no by using asril command. “cnt” is a parameter of asril command. Since sp-3905 mgsip (16) prog-a issue 4 or later: • whe...

  • Page 2098

    Vol.2-1845 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 2: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip16 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip16 successfully registered: registration done. (drs ip address 192.168.0.1) (the ip address succeeding in registration appea...

  • Page 2099

    Vol.2-1846 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] • when sip status (=2) is selected [multi registration mode is enabled]: mg(sip)> show status 0:port status 1:ipx status 2:sip status 3:ch status 9:exit 0: port status (default) 1: telephony server network registration status 2: sip network registration...

  • Page 2100

    Vol.2-1847 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 4: the example above shows a total of 16 cnts tried registration, and eight (9 to 16) of them failed. (use the asril command to set mg-nos and a pilot number. Cnt is a parameter set with the asril com- mand) note 5: mg-no:5-15 are displayed for sp-...

  • Page 2101

    Vol.2-1848 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note 1: this parameter is displayed for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 5 or later. Note 2: this parameter is displayed for sp-3905 mg sip (16) prog-a issue 7 or later. 6 show Δ version this command is used to show a version information installed in mg...

  • Page 2102

    Vol.2-1849 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] download command 1 download this command is used to download main program/dtmf/music data via ether1 port. The data is down- loaded from trivial file transfer protocol (tftp) server. [when downloading all programs ] note 3: the new ip address that is us...

  • Page 2103

    Vol.2-1850 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 input: q mg(sip) > _ • when download is complete, the menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. Note: be sure to reboot the mg-sip16 ...

  • Page 2104

    Vol.2-1851 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] [when downloading one program ] mg(sip) > download please reboot after the command. --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input: 1 download of one program. --- input: 2 input: 2 --- mg-sip ip address set --- select ether port[1(et...

  • Page 2105

    Vol.2-1852 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] note: be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. Note 1: if checksum error occurs during download, an error message similar to the following is displayed and the display goes back to the download menu. In this case...

  • Page 2106

    Vol.2-1853 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] ping command 1 ping Δ p1 this command is used to send ping packets to a specified address to confirm network status. Ping is at- tempted 5 times to the address specified. Note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be c...

  • Page 2107

    Vol.2-1854 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] reboot command 2 reboot this command is used to reboot the mg-sip16. Also configuration data can be saved to the flash memory by using this command. Note 1: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data to the flash memory, be sure to exec...

  • Page 2108

    Vol.2-1855 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] exit command 1 exit this command is used to exit from configuration mode. Help command 1 help/? This command is used to show the brief explanation of all the commands that are available on the mainte- nance console. Mg(sip) > exit exit configmode. Bye! ...

  • Page 2109

    Vol.2-1856 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmga/mg-16sipmga] 21.5.3 error messages on maintenance console the following are error messages displayed on the maintenance console. *refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshotting illegal command. An incorrect command is entered. Ente...

  • Page 2110

    Vol.2-1857 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22. Mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.1 what is mg-sip16? Mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] is an media gateway to provide the system with session initiation pro- tocol (sip) interface. It enables the system to build multi-service and reliable voice over ip (voip) networks...

  • Page 2111

    Vol.2-1858 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: connection test with common carrier is required. Note: the following table shows the number of available channels of mg-sip16. 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms g.711 - 16ch 16ch 16ch - g.729a - 16ch 16ch 16ch - g.723.1 - - - - -.

  • Page 2112

    Vol.2-1859 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.2 specifications 22.2.1 hardware specifications this subsection explains the hardware specifications of sca-16sipmg(us). The figure below shows the outer view of mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)]. • outerview the following shows the outerview of mg-sip16. • dimensio...

  • Page 2113

    Vol.2-1860 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] item specification remarks external interface rj-45 serial connector × 1 for maintenance rj-45 ether connector (100base-tx/ 10base-t) × 2 port for connecting to lan × 1 port for connecting to sip network × 1 setting desktop horizontal setting (standard setting) ...

  • Page 2114

    Vol.2-1861 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.2.2 software specifications the available features are in the following: note: additional services (such as refer) on the sip procedure are not provided in this system. Note: tone and holding tone to sip network are generated by mg-sip. When mgc(phi-bri) exte...

  • Page 2115

    Vol.2-1862 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.2.3 switches, lamps, and connectors • front see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the front panel. Description of lamps and connectors on front panel note 1: if on line lamp flashes, it is considered that main program...

  • Page 2116

    Vol.2-1863 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] • rear see the figure and table below for the location and description of the parts on the rear panel of mg- sip16. Description of switches and connectors on rear panel note 1: when turning off the power supply, wait for more than one second to turn on the power...

  • Page 2117

    Vol.2-1864 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.3 installation this section explains how to install the mg-sip16. Be sure to use anti-static kit. 22.3.1 installation of mg-sip16 installation location should be easily accessible to the following: • wan (sip network)/lan • power supply • a pc that runs commu...

  • Page 2118

    Vol.2-1865 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.3.2 cable connection mg-sip16 provides the following types of interfaces: • ethernet port to wan (sip network)/lan • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console connect the required cables according to your system configuration. Alm pwr on li...

  • Page 2119

    Vol.2-1866 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] step 1: ac power cable connection connect ac power cable to ac power inlet on the rear panel of mg-sip16. Fix the ac power cable with the stopper. Step 2: connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate ac supply. Note for the safety measures against sta...

  • Page 2120

    Vol.2-1867 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] step 3 connect a maintenance console (pc) to console connector using console cable. Note: lan cables should not be connected to ether1 and ether 2 connectors at this time. Theses will be connected after setting the network data. Alm pwr on line ether 1 ether 2 1...

  • Page 2121

    Vol.2-1868 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4 1startup mg-sip16 and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. These steps provide the minimum data required only for mg-sip16 setup. Before taking the following steps, refer to service con- ditio...

  • Page 2122

    Vol.2-1869 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.1 data assignment by pcpro please refer to [m-111] mg-sip in data programming manual - business..

  • Page 2123

    Vol.2-1870 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as follows:...

  • Page 2124

    Vol.2-1871 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.3 power on step 1: turn on the mg-sip16. (power switch is provided on the rear panel of mg-sip16). Step 2: make sure the led indicate normal status. - pwr lamp lights green (*boot program automatically starts) attention contents static sensitive handling pr...

  • Page 2125

    Vol.2-1872 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.4 configuration command assignment assign the configuration data by command operation on the maintenance console. Note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-sip16 usi...

  • Page 2126

    Vol.2-1873 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] using configuration commands, assign the mg-sip16 data. The following data is assigned here: note: assign the data depending on the sip network configuration. [enter in config mode] step 1: when a prompt “ -> ” is displayed, enter “config” and then press enter k...

  • Page 2127

    Vol.2-1874 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [set ip address of mg-sip16] mg-sip16 has two lan ports (ether1 and ether2) on the front panel. Each port is used as follows: note: when ip addresses that belong to the same segment are used for ether1 and ether2, set the ip address to ether1 only. Otherwise, se...

  • Page 2128

    Vol.2-1875 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [set ip address and port number of drs] step 4: assign the ip address and port number of drs by using set drsaddress command. Note 1 note: unit(0), unit(1), unit(2), and unit(3) represent primary, secondary, tertiary, and fourthly respectively. Note 1: about ip ...

  • Page 2129

    Vol.2-1876 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when ip address (=0) is selected : when fqdn (=1) is selected : note: be sure not to enter a space after fqdn characters. [set key number data] step 6: assign a pilot number, which is used to perform registration to the sip server. Note 1: be sure not to enter a...

  • Page 2130

    Vol.2-1877 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [reboot mg-sip16] step 7: reboot the mg-sip16 by using reboot command. The assigned config data can also be saved onto the flash memory by using this command. Note 1: before saving the config data, be sure to assign necessary data by using “set ipaddress”, “set ...

  • Page 2131

    Vol.2-1878 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.5 cable connection step 1: connect the mg-sip16 to the dedicated network as shown below. In few minutes, link lamps will light green, which indicates the connection is ok. • ether 1: link lamp (lan side) • ether 2: link lamp (wan side - sip network) when yo...

  • Page 2132

    Vol.2-1879 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.4.6 operation check make sure the mg-sip16 is in normal operation by the following procedure. Step 1: reboot the mg-sip16 by using reboot command. Step 2: make sure the following message appears on the maintenance console. Step 3: make sure the registration s...

  • Page 2133

    Vol.2-1880 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.5 maintenance console commands 22.5.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for mg-sip16 using proprietary protocol. • connection settings ...

  • Page 2134

    Vol.2-1881 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] the user input command above consists of several components. The following describes these components us- ing one of the set commands. Input the desired command, sub command and each required parameter after the prompt (“mg-sip>” as an ex- ample here) is indicat...

  • Page 2135

    Vol.2-1882 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] the maintenance console uses the commands listed on the table below. * if you go out of the configuration mode by using “logout” command without saving the setting information using “reboot” command, the changed settings are discarded. To save the settings, exec...

  • Page 2136

    Vol.2-1883 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: when using silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection in acd system, assign the command “ set- dmultisession ”. Note 1: required to set silent monitor (multi-path monitor) connection in the acd system. Note 2: available since sp-3988 mgsip (16) prog-g ...

  • Page 2137

    Vol.2-1884 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] set command 1 set Δ 183rbt this command is used to enable/disable the connection of local rbt when 183 message without sdp is received. Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. Normally this command is not required to be changed. 2 set...

  • Page 2138

    Vol.2-1885 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connected sip network. 5 set Δ call_hold the command is used to specify whether to enable the mg based call retention. Note 1: when an initial-invite is received from the sip network side while a...

  • Page 2139

    Vol.2-1886 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] since sp-3988 mgsip (16) prog-g issue 2: note: assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connected sip network. 8 set Δ cc_convert this command is used to assign calling party’s country code display conversion feature. When this feature is ava...

  • Page 2140

    Vol.2-1887 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. 10 set Δ check_number this command is used to assign a limit to number of digits for calling/called party number. A calling/called party number sent via the telephony server network may be...

  • Page 2141

    Vol.2-1888 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] tion. G711 fax renegotiation enables a called party to receive a facsimile with fax pass through when commu- nication is changed over to a fax communication while a call is in progress with g.729a. Note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • this comm...

  • Page 2142

    Vol.2-1889 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: - assign this command adjusting to the specifications on sip network. - select 2 when the caller id blocking is judged by the userinfo in from header on the sip network side specification. E.G.) from: “01234567” - do not select 2 when the caller id blockin...

  • Page 2143

    Vol.2-1890 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 15 set Δ dns_option this command is used to enable multiple sip servers to be supported by dns server. When ip addresses of multiple sip servers are obtained by a record lookup, an alternative route can be used for transmission. Naptr lookup (rfc3263) is also en...

  • Page 2144

    Vol.2-1891 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 17 set Δ drsaddress this command is used to assign drs address to mg-sip16. Note: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Note: unit(0), unit(1), unit(2), and ...

  • Page 2145

    Vol.2-1892 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when ip precedence (=1) is selected: note 1: ip precedence - tos field is allocated as shown below. When diffserv (=2) is selected: note 1: diffserv - tos field is allocated as shown below. When tos (=3) is selected: mg(sip) > set drs_qos input type: (1=preceden...

  • Page 2146

    Vol.2-1893 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 19 set Δ dtmf_mode this command is used to specify the dtmf relay system in sip network. Mg-sip16 supports out-band (rfc2833) and in-band (g.711 data transmission as voice data). Negotiation, out-band, or in-band can be assigned. When negotiation is selected: wh...

  • Page 2147

    Vol.2-1894 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: note that the sum of dtmf duration and dtmf pause values must be specified more than 120ms. If not, the following error message is displayed. 20 set Δ h245_base_port_no this command is used to specify the h.245 port number to/from the telephony server netw...

  • Page 2148

    Vol.2-1895 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 23 set Δ interface this command is used to assign the ether speed and the duplex type to each port on mg-sip16. Note 1: when “automatic negotiation” is selected, “full duplex” is automatically applied to the interface. There- fore, this command line will not app...

  • Page 2149

    Vol.2-1896 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: when the ip addresses of lan and sip network sides are assigned in the same segment, use ether1 only as shown below. 25 set Δ ipx_route this command is used to specify route information in the telephony server side network. The registered number of pieces ...

  • Page 2150

    Vol.2-1897 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 1: pressing any key other than “y” causes the following message. When static (route type = 2) is selected: note 2 [to assign destination network address and gateway address] note 2: usually, gateway data should be set as ‘static’ at lan (telephony server ne...

  • Page 2151

    Vol.2-1898 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [to assign gateway address only] note 4: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: two or more default gateway cannot be registered. Note: to set a default gateway, it should be assigned to either lan side port or sip network side por...

  • Page 2152

    Vol.2-1899 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [to delete the assigned routing information] note 1: if there is no route to be deleted, the following will be displayed. Note 2: pressing any key other than “y” displays the following message. Note: routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned...

  • Page 2153

    Vol.2-1900 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] the following shows a typical network configuration and the sample data setting. Typical network configuration sample data setting for the above network configuration mg(sip) > set ipx_route route type(0: exit/1: none/2: static) : 2 select command (0: exit/1: se...

  • Page 2154

    Vol.2-1901 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 26 set Δ ipx_rtp_port_no this command is used to assign the base port number that is used for rtp at lan side. Note 1: the value must be assigned by an even number. 27 set Δ keynumber the command is used to assign a pilot number of mg-sip16 for registration. Not...

  • Page 2155

    Vol.2-1902 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 29 set Δ musictype this command is used to select music type that is sent from mg-sip16. 30 set Δ no_media_code this command is used to set a sip error response code. When 415 is set as a response code, 415 unsup- ported media type is sent instead of response co...

  • Page 2156

    Vol.2-1903 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 32 set Δ prack this command is used to enable/disable provisional response acknowledgement (pra) function. When this is set enabled, the cyclical-send of provisional response function can be specified. Note: assign this command adjusting to the specifications on...

  • Page 2157

    Vol.2-1904 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when remote-party-id (=1) is selected: note 1: be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the dummy string characters (with the copy and paste features of your personal computer), and be careful not to mistype a character. When rfc3323/3325 (=2) is sel...

  • Page 2158

    Vol.2-1905 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: assign this command adjusting to the specification on sip network. When registration per number function is effective, assign by setting mg(sip) using the largest number within the same mg(sip) group referring to table below. 37 set Δ rtp_pathon this comma...

  • Page 2159

    Vol.2-1906 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when rfc4566 (=1) style is specified: note: the conditions of this command are as follows. • this command is available for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 2 or later. • the setting of g729 annexb=no is available for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. 40...

  • Page 2160

    Vol.2-1907 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 41 set Δ session_timer this command is used to specify the session timer. When session-timer is enable (=0) is selected when session-timer is disable (=1) is selected: 42 set Δ signaling_port_number this command is used to specify the udp port number that receiv...

  • Page 2161

    Vol.2-1908 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 43 set Δ sip_accfilter this command is used to enable the sip access filter which discards sip packets received from an unau- thorized destination. Also, this command is used to enable the burst access filter which temporarily limits the maximum num- ber of inco...

  • Page 2162

    Vol.2-1909 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when fqdn (=1) is selected by “set sip_server” command: note 1: this feature is available for sp-3988 mg sip (16) prog-g issue 3 or later. Note 2: this feature is available for sp-3988 mg sip (16) prog-g issue 5 or later. When receiving incoming calls that excee...

  • Page 2163

    Vol.2-1910 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 44 set Δ sip_port_no the command is used to specify a port number that receives sip messages. 45 set Δ sip_qos this command is used to specify the qos of session initiation protocol (sip). 46 set Δ sip_register the command is used to assign an ip address or a fu...

  • Page 2164

    Vol.2-1911 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 47 set Δ sip_route this command is used to specify route information in the sip side network. The registered number of the route information is up to 10. 48 set Δ sip_rtp_port_no this command is used to specify the base rtp port number from sip network. Note 1: ...

  • Page 2165

    Vol.2-1912 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when ip address (=0) is selected : when fqdn (=1) is selected : note: be sure not to enter a space after fqdn characters. Note 1: the rport(rfc3581) function is available for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. The follow- ing conditions are applied to t...

  • Page 2166

    Vol.2-1913 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 50 set Δ sip_tel_service the command is used to enable/disable the use of additional service features (hold/retrieve/transfer from the sip network side terminal). When enable ( = 1) is selected (when disable is selected, no screen is displayed.): when enable ( =...

  • Page 2167

    Vol.2-1914 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: the following functions are available for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. • hold [put off hold] function • refer/notify function • 3pcc function • 3pcc function(codec) note 1: call transfer features using refer/notify methods are available only...

  • Page 2168

    Vol.2-1915 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 52 set Δ slipresp this command is used to determine a slip response code. 53 set Δ update this command is used to enable/disable the use of update method. Note: assign this command adjusting to the specification on sip network. 54 set Δ response_table this comma...

  • Page 2169

    Vol.2-1916 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 56 set Δ multisession this command is used to enable/disable the use of multi-path switch in acd system by using mg-sip16. 57 set Δ name_display this command is used to enable/disable name display service using mg-sip16. Mg(sip) > set multisession the multi-sess...

  • Page 2170

    Vol.2-1917 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] show command 1 show Δ arp this command is used to show the address resolution protocol (arp) table. The following shows a sam- ple display. Note: the actual value may differ from this sample. 2 show Δ config this command is used to show the configuration that ha...

  • Page 2171

    Vol.2-1918 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when drs data (=1) is selected: when common config data (=2) is selected: mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=exit please choose a reference number:1 drs[0] ip address: 0.0.0...

  • Page 2172

    Vol.2-1919 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 1: h/c alarm type display varies depending on the type that is assigned by the “set hc_alarm.” - when assigned as ipx network ⇒ sip network: “telephony server and sip side enable” - when assigned as ipx network: “telephony server side enable” - when assigne...

  • Page 2173

    Vol.2-1920 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 2: the display shows “set call_hold” since sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3. Note 3: when “disable” is selected by the set command “call_hold”, “disable” is displayed, but “rtp detect tim- er value” and “response code to reject” are not displayed. When por...

  • Page 2174

    Vol.2-1921 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when sip config data (=4) is selected: note 4: the display shows “rport(rfc3581) function” since sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. Mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data...

  • Page 2175

    Vol.2-1922 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] set privacy_pattern: privacy pattern :remote-party-id dummy string :anonymous ----------------------------------------------------- set session_timer: session-timer :0 session-expires :180 refresher :uac invite refresher :enable forced :disable -----------------...

  • Page 2176

    Vol.2-1923 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 1: “revised_table” will be displayed when revised_table is selected in “response_table” command. Note 2: “user info” will be displayed when user info is selected in “cpn_pattern” command. Note 3: “enable” will be displayed when user info is selected in “cc_...

  • Page 2177

    Vol.2-1924 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 5: the display shows the following since sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3. • g729 annexb=no function (sdp_style) • call_id_relay • sip_accfilter • sip_transport • dns_option • codec_change • no_media_code • ppi_to_pai note 6: when “enable” is selected for ...

  • Page 2178

    Vol.2-1925 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when “disable” is selected for “sip access filter”, the above settings are not shown. Note 7: for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 5 or later, when “enable” is selected for “burst access filter” by the set command “sip_accfilter”, “enable” and the following setti...

  • Page 2179

    Vol.2-1926 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] dtmf payload type not displayed when the value of “dtmf mode” is “in-band”. Rbt add (183 w/o sdp) may be displayed “disabled”, pertaining to the data assigned. Path-on 183 after 180 may be displayed "enabled", pertaining to the data assigned. Transmitting interv...

  • Page 2180

    Vol.2-1927 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 8: settings for hold [put off hold] function, refer/notify function, 3pcc function, 3pcc function(codec) are available for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. Note 9: “3pcc function” and “3pcc function(codec)” are displayed only when 3pcc function i...

  • Page 2181

    Vol.2-1928 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when route config data (=5) is selected: 3 show Δ interface this command is used to show the link and setting state of ether connection . Mg(sip) > show config 0=mac data 1=drs data 2=common config data 3=port config data 4=sip config data 5=route config data 9=...

  • Page 2182

    Vol.2-1929 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 4 show Δ route this command is used to show the route table. Note: the actual value may differ from this sample. 5 show Δ status this command is used to show a status of the system. [setting example] earlier than sp-3988 mgsip (16) prog-g issue 2: when port stat...

  • Page 2183

    Vol.2-1930 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when ipx status (=1) is selected: note 1: display pattern is as follows depending on the registration status. - during registration: now registering - registration succeed: registration done. (the ip address succeeding in registration appears as well.) when sip ...

  • Page 2184

    Vol.2-1931 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] when sip status (=2) is selected [multi registration mode is enabled]: mg(sip) > show status 0: port status 1: ipx status 2: sip status 9: exit please choose a reference number:2 mg(sip) > ipx registration information registration done. Mg(sip) > sip registratio...

  • Page 2185

    Vol.2-1932 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note: in the above example, registration was attempted for 16 numbers toward the sip server. However, 8 num- bers failed. Assign mg-no by using asril command. “cnt” is a parameter of asril command. Since sp-3988 mgsip (16) prog-g issue 3 or later: • when port st...

  • Page 2186

    Vol.2-1933 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 2: display changes depending on the registration status: when mg-sip16 is trying to register: now registrating. After mg-sip16 successfully registered: registration done. (drs ip address 192.168.0.1) (the ip address succeeding in registration appears as wel...

  • Page 2187

    Vol.2-1934 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] ------registration ng regindex------ information on cnts (regindex) failing in reg- istration [mg-no:1] mg-no: 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 cnts failing in registration [mg-no:2] mg-no: 2 [mg-no:3] mg-no: 3 [mg-no:4] mg-no: 4 [mg-no:5] mg-no: 5 note 5 [mg-no:6] mg-n...

  • Page 2188

    Vol.2-1935 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 4: the example above shows a total of 16 cnts tried registration, and eight (9 to 16) of them failed. (use the asril command to set mg-nos and a pilot number. Cnt is a parameter set with the asril com- mand) note 5: mg-no:5-15 are displayed for sp-3988 mgsi...

  • Page 2189

    Vol.2-1936 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 1: this parameter is displayed for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 3 or later. Note 2: this parameter is displayed for sp-3988 mg sip(16) prog-g issue 5 or later 6 show Δ version this command is used to show a version information installed in mg-sip16. Othe...

  • Page 2190

    Vol.2-1937 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] download command 1 download this command is used to download main program/dtmf/music data via ether1 port. The data is down- loaded from trivial file transfer protocol (tftp) server. [when downloading all programs ] note 3: the new ip address that is used for do...

  • Page 2191

    Vol.2-1938 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input:1 download of one program. --- input:2 input: q mg(sip) > _ • when download is complete, the menu appears again. Enter ‘q’ to exit download command. Note: be sure to reboot the mg-sip16 after dow...

  • Page 2192

    Vol.2-1939 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] [when downloading one program ] note: be sure to check the product name of the firmware to download before downloading. Mg(sip) > download please reboot after the command. --- download menu --- download of all programs.(default) --- input: 1 download of one prog...

  • Page 2193

    Vol.2-1940 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] note 1: if checksum error occurs during download, an error message similar to the following is displayed and the display goes back to the download menu. In this case, execute download again. Note 2: if download fails, an error message similar to the following is...

  • Page 2194

    Vol.2-1941 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] ping command 1 ping Δ p1 this command is used to send ping packets to a specified address to confirm network status. Ping is at- tempted 5 times to the address specified. Note: the number of ping attempts (5 times) and packet size (56 bytes) cannot be changed. M...

  • Page 2195

    Vol.2-1942 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] reboot command 1 reboot this command is used to reboot the mg-sip16. Also configuration data can be saved to the flash memory by using this command. Note 1: before selecting “y” to save the running configuration data to the flash memory, be sure to execute the f...

  • Page 2196

    Vol.2-1943 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] exit command 1 exit this command is used to exit from configuration mode. Help command 1 help/? This command is used to show the brief explanation of all the commands that are available on the mainte- nance console. Mg(sip) > exit exit configmode. Bye! -> • exit...

  • Page 2197

    Vol.2-1944 mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg(us)] 22.5.3 error messages on maintenance console the following are error messages displayed on the maintenance console. *refer to each command for the other error messages. Error message troubleshotting illegal command. An incorrect command is entered. Enter the com...

  • Page 2198

    Vol.2-1945 vs-32 conference server 23. Vs-32 conference server 23.1 introduction this section describes the setup, data programming, operation, and maintenance procedures of the voice server (vs)-32 conference server with announcement feature, external hold-tone feature, and conference feature. Thes...

  • Page 2199

    Vol.2-1946 vs-32 conference server 23.1.1 vs-32 conference server feature details vs-32 conference server allows a user to assign the vs-32 conference server features (announcement/exter- nal hold-tone/conference) within 32 channels as follows: note: an asterisk (*) indicates a non-used port. Note 1...

  • Page 2200

    Vol.2-1947 vs-32 conference server 1. Announcement feature vs-32 conference server can provide various announcement services for stations by dialing the access code. This feature can be performed without ippad circuit card. The telephony server and sr-mgc can provide announcement service in conjunct...

  • Page 2201

    Vol.2-1948 vs-32 conference server 2. Ip external hold tone feature vs-32 conference server provides external holding tone to held calls. This feature can be performed with- out ippad circuit card. Wave sound files in the internal flash rom or cf memory of vs-32 conference server are used in the ext...

  • Page 2202

    Vol.2-1949 vs-32 conference server 3. External audible sound feature vs-32 conference server provides external audible sound (such as ringing tone) in stead of tsw rom and ema/plo rom. This feature can be performed by fixing the connection between music on hold (moh) of vs-32 and speech path memory ...

  • Page 2203

    Vol.2-1950 vs-32 conference server 4. Three-way conference this feature enables station user to make a three-way conference by calling another party, when it is on two-way connection. Even if the additional station user holds the call, three-way conference may be es- tablished. (this service is call...

  • Page 2204

    Vol.2-1951 vs-32 conference server 5. Multiple-party conference 8-party/16-party/32-party (including a conference leader who hosts the conference) conferences are avail- able in the conference feature. 1. Preset when a conference leader seizes the conference port, vs-32 conference server automatical...

  • Page 2205

    Vol.2-1952 vs-32 conference server 6. Least cost routing this feature enables the terminal to take the least cost routing to vs-32. For example, on the condition that an mgc in a main office manipulates multiple vs-32s installed in remote offices, adding ma-ids to them will provide best routing to s...

  • Page 2206

    Vol.2-1953 vs-32 conference server 23.2 specifications the front view and rear view of vs-32 conference server is in the following: vs-32(v) vs-32(v) conf on line annc busy moh cf pwr cf memory card rs-232c ether 100m link front view rear view 1 3 2 4-1 4-2 5 6 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 cf memory card vs...

  • Page 2207

    Vol.2-1954 vs-32 conference server the interfaces of vs-32 conference server are listed in : specifications of vs-32 conference server no. Name specifications note 1 ether rj-45 10/100m (common) for ethernet connection 2 serial interface rs-232c (d-sub 9 pin) vs-32 conference server is maintained by...

  • Page 2208

    Vol.2-1955 vs-32 conference server 5 ac power inlet ac 100v/120v/240v, 50/60hz the power varies depending on the country. Plug in an attached three-polar grounded ac power cable for main power supply (cable length: 3 m [9.8 ft.]) 6 power switch no. Name specifications note.

  • Page 2209

    Vol.2-1956 vs-32 conference server > led lamp display status are listed in : no. Lamp meaning status 7 pwr status of vs-32 conference server power on vs-32 conference server power on flash - off vs-32 conference server power off 8 on line connection status of mgc and vs-32 conference server on on li...

  • Page 2210

    Vol.2-1957 vs-32 conference server 12 cf status of the internal flash rom and external compact flash card on cf is mounted flash cf access internal flash rom access do not turn off the power during flash- ing. Off cf is not mounted cf mbr 13 100 m transmission speed on 100 m bps off 10 m bps 14 link...

  • Page 2211

    Vol.2-1958 vs-32 conference server > services available in vs-32 are listed in : items feature name remarks external music source music-on-hold (c.O. Incoming call function) for ip devices only cft executive right-of-way (extension function) three-way calling (extension function) supervisory call/at...

  • Page 2212

    Vol.2-1959 vs-32 conference server 23.2.1 hardware requirements the required hardware for using the vs-32 conference server is described in this section. To use vs-32 con- ference server, the following hardware must be installed within an ip network: • ftp server (required for downloading files) • c...

  • Page 2213

    Vol.2-1960 vs-32 conference server 23.3 installation this explains how to install vs-32 conference server. The procedures are as follows: note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for vs-32 conference server using p...

  • Page 2214

    Vol.2-1961 vs-32 conference server 23.3.1 vs-32 hardware settings this shows how to install the hardware required for using the vs-32 conference server. 1. Setting vs-32 conference server to mounting location vs-32 conference server can only be set horizontally. Vertical setting is not available. • ...

  • Page 2215

    Vol.2-1962 vs-32 conference server 2. Connecting cables into vs-32 conference server the vs-32 conference server provides the following types of interfaces: • connection to lan • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console connect the required cables according to the system configur...

  • Page 2216

    Vol.2-1963 vs-32 conference server 23.3.2 vs-32 conference server settings this item describes the procedures for vs-32 conference server by using the maintenance console, which con- nects to vs-32 conference server.If you need more information about these commands, refer to operation and maintenanc...

  • Page 2217

    Vol.2-1964 vs-32 conference server 23.4 operation and maintenance 23.4.1 how to use maintenance command note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs for vs-32 conference server using proprietary protocol. Maintenance c...

  • Page 2218

    Vol.2-1965 vs-32 conference server • directory tree in vs-32 is as follows: /system /wave /cf /wave /wave2 root indicates configuration data are stored. Indicates wave sound files (moderate priority) in the flash rom. Indicates wave sound files (high priority) in compact flash card. Indicates wave s...

  • Page 2219

    Vol.2-1966 vs-32 conference server the maintenance console uses the commands listed in . List of setup command list of set command list of show command list of save command list of init command list of reboot command list of get command command no. Sub command function setup 1 ip setting basic ip da...

  • Page 2220

    Vol.2-1967 vs-32 conference server list of put command list of ping command list of cd command list of pwd command list of rm command list of ls command list of cp command list of mv command list of exit command get 1 configdata to download the configuration of data from the specified tftp server: c...

  • Page 2221

    Vol.2-1968 vs-32 conference server setup basic settings of vs-32 conference server ip relations such as ip addresses, subnetmask, drs and dhcp used in vs-32 conference server are assigned by this command. This command must be executed when starting up a vs-32 conference server from the initial setti...

  • Page 2222

    Vol.2-1969 vs-32 conference server 2. Downloading wave sound file this command is used to set a wave sound file when using announcement feature or external hold tone feature. Before using this command, the following wave sound file must be prepared: • sound format sampling frequency: 8khz quantifyin...

  • Page 2223

    Vol.2-1970 vs-32 conference server before downloading the wave sound file, the ftp server (such as internet information service) must be installed in the network. Make sure connection between the ftp server and vs-32 can be established with- out any problem. Vs-32> setup wavefile 10.10.10.96 ftp 10....

  • Page 2224

    Vol.2-1971 vs-32 conference server note: after downloading files, it is possible to verify the sound by selecting “9”.Check wave file for vs-32”. The following is a sample. Enter(1-10): 9 directory name: /cf/wave file name 000.Wav 001.Wav step1 illegal format:codec=0x0001 illegal format:channel=2 il...

  • Page 2225

    Vol.2-1972 vs-32 conference server the following explains how to make a sound file on windows operating system. Step1: select [start] → [programs] → [accessories] → [entertainment] → [soundrecorder] . Step2: select [file] → [properties] . Step3: click the [convert now] button on the [properties for ...

  • Page 2226

    Vol.2-1973 vs-32 conference server step4: enter the sound name by clicking the save as button, and then specify the ccitt μ -law or ccitta- law for format, and 8khz 8bit mono for attributes. Step5: click the record button. Step6: click the stop button. Step7: select [file] → [save as] to save the fi...

  • Page 2227

    Vol.2-1974 vs-32 conference server set this command is used to assign individual detailed settings. 1. Setting default gateway in system data of vs-32 conference server: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 2. Setting dh...

  • Page 2228

    Vol.2-1975 vs-32 conference server note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. 4. Setting tos of drs session: this command is used to set the quality of service (qos) of drs. Drstos precedence and drstos value means ip preceden...

  • Page 2229

    Vol.2-1976 vs-32 conference server 5. Setting interface transmission speed of vs-32 conference server: note: duplex setting does not appear when auto (auto negotiation) is selected in speed setting. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the mainten...

  • Page 2230

    Vol.2-1977 vs-32 conference server 6. Setting ip address and net mask in system data of vs-32 conference server: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- mand. Note: the designated ip address cannot be applied when dhcp is set to ...

  • Page 2231

    Vol.2-1978 vs-32 conference server show 1. To show country code: 2. To show dhcp setting: 3. To show drs address and port number note 1 : note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. 4. To show ...

  • Page 2232

    Vol.2-1979 vs-32 conference server 6. To show the registered ip address, net mask, and default gateway: 7. To show settings of each port: 8. To show the firmware and hardware information: vs-32> show ipaddress dp0 ip address 10.4.128.5 netmask 255.255.255.0 default gateway 10.4.128.254 vs-32> show p...

  • Page 2233

    Vol.2-1980 vs-32 conference server 9. To show the status of vs-32 conference server: 10. To show vlan settings: vs-32> show status vs32 is online vs-id:003013266666 vs-32> show vlan device vlan5 id cos 5 3.

  • Page 2234

    Vol.2-1981 vs-32 conference server save 1. To save the configuration data to vs-32 conference server internal flash rom: 2. To save wave sound files to vs-32 conference server internal flash rom: step1: select y or n y: save n:cancel result is shown. Vs-32> save configdata **don’t power off during s...

  • Page 2235

    Vol.2-1982 vs-32 conference server init 1. To initialize configuration data to the factory default setting: reboot 1. To reboot the vs-32 conference server: note: this command cannot check the normality of configuration files. In case that a wrong file has been down- loaded, use the init config comm...

  • Page 2236

    Vol.2-1983 vs-32 conference server ping 1. To check network conditions: cd 1. To change the current directory: pwd 1. To display the current directory: vs-32> put configdata 100.100.100.4 configuration data has been uploaded step1 step1:enter an ip address for tftp server vs-32> ping 100.100.100.4 c...

  • Page 2237

    Vol.2-1984 vs-32 conference server rm 1. To delete the files: ls 1. To display detailed information for directories and files: cp 1. To copy files: mv 1. To move and rename files: note: file cannot be moved into another disk: for example “/cf” and “/wave”. In this case, use the cp command. Note: thi...

  • Page 2238

    Vol.2-1985 vs-32 conference server exit 1. To exit the maintenance command: note: if any error occurs in saving the setting, the screen returns to the prompt of maintenance command (vs-32 conference server, in default) step1:select y, n, or c. Y:save settings and exit n:exit without saving c:cancel ...

  • Page 2239

    Vol.2-1986 vs-32 conference server error messages when an error occurs using the maintenance commands, the following error messages are displayed. This mes- sage will help you find solutions. List of error messages error message cause/solution command not found. A command other than the supported co...

  • Page 2240

    Vol.2-1987 vs-32 conference server registration is started now ! Wait for a while. If this status continues, vs-32 might be in an abnormal status. Drs message send error ! Use the show ipaddress command and make sure the ip address for default gateway is properly assigned. Drs message is unreceivabl...

  • Page 2241

    Vol.2-1988 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24. Vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.1 introduction this section describes the setup, data programming, operation, and maintenance procedures of the voice server conference server (referred to as vs-32(dual) hereinafter) with announcement, external ...

  • Page 2242

    Vol.2-1989 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] vs-32(dual) can select registration mode; proprietary protocol mode (default) or sip mode depending on the configuration setting. In proprietary protocol mode, control signal between the telephony server and vs-32(dual) is handled by in- ternal phe (buil...

  • Page 2243

    Vol.2-1990 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.1.1 vs-32(dual) feature details vs-32(dual) allows a user to assign the features such as announcement, external hold-tone, and conference fea- tures within 32 channels as follows: note: an asterisk (*) indicates a non-used port. Note 1: this case is o...

  • Page 2244

    Vol.2-1991 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] for announcement and external music-on-hold sound source, wave files stored in internal flash rom of vs- 32(dual) or in cf memory card are used. In addition, playback of monaural sound data from music jack (ex- ternal input connector) is available. Creat...

  • Page 2245

    Vol.2-1992 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 1. Announcement feature vs-32(dual) can provide various announcement services for stations dialing the access code. This feature can be performed without ippad circuit card. Music source files in the internal flash rom or cf memory card of vs-32(dual) ar...

  • Page 2246

    Vol.2-1993 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. Ip external hold tone feature vs-32(dual) provides external holding tone to held calls. This feature can be performed without ippad circuit card. Music source files in the internal flash rom or cf memory card of vs-32(dual) are used in the external ho...

  • Page 2247

    Vol.2-1994 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 3. External audible sound feature vs-32(dual) provides external audible sound (such as ringing tone) to non-ip terminals instead of tsw rom and ema/plo rom. This feature can be performed by fixing the connection between music on hold (moh) of vs-32(dual)...

  • Page 2248

    Vol.2-1995 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 4. Three-way calling this feature enables station user to make a three-way calling by calling another party, when it is on two- way connection. Even if the additional station user holds the call, three-way calling may be established (this service is call...

  • Page 2249

    Vol.2-1996 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 5. Multiple-party conference 8-party/16-party/32-party (including a conference leader who hosts the conference) conferences are avail- able in the conference feature. 1. Preset when a conference leader seizes the conference port, vs-32(dual) automaticall...

  • Page 2250

    Vol.2-1997 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 6. Least cost routing this feature enables the terminal to take the least cost routing to vs-32(dual). For example, on the condition that the telephony server in a main office manipulates multiple vs-32(dual)s installed in remote offices, add- ing ma-ids...

  • Page 2251

    Vol.2-1998 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.1.2 specifications 1. Dimension • vs-32(dual) card [sca-vs32va] vs-32(dual) card is mounted on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). • vs-32(dual) box [mg-vs32va] unit : mm (inch) 400.0 (1' 3.75") 43.8 (1.72") 430.0 (1' 4.93") cf annc moh conf alm pwr ...

  • Page 2252

    Vol.2-1999 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. Layout of connectors, lamps, and switches connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Note: this figure is an example when the 1u-mpc is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit for dual power configuration. (see...

  • Page 2253

    Vol.2-2000 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] front view rear view cf annc moh conf alm pwr on line ether 100m link reset music console vs-32(v) ac in power on off 5-1 5-2 5 1 3 2 7 6 16 15 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 14 size weight : 210(w) × 297(d) × 43(h) mm : 1.8kg.

  • Page 2254

    Vol.2-2001 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] the interfaces of vs-32(dual) are listed in: specifications of vs-32(dual) no. Name specifications note 1 ether connector lan interface rj-45 100mbps/10mbps, auto-negotiation (half/ full duplex) 2 console connector rj-45 with serial connection for mainte...

  • Page 2255

    Vol.2-2002 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] led lamp display status are listed in : note 1: alm and pact lamps are used for vs-32(dual) card only. No. Lamp meaning status 8 pwr status of vs-32(dual) power green vs-32(dual) power on off vs-32(dual) power off 9 alm note 1 status of the power module ...

  • Page 2256

    Vol.2-2003 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 3. Port numbers the following provides the port number to be used in the system note 1: the packet between tp and sp (“tp ⇔ sp” in the table) does not flow over the network because both of which are part of the telephony server. Note 2: the packet relate...

  • Page 2257

    Vol.2-2004 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 4. Available channels when using sip mode the number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by vs-32(dual) in sip mode. Therefore, adjustments will be needed, such as placing unnecessary channels into the make busy status....

  • Page 2258

    Vol.2-2005 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] ip related features tos control vs32 conference server (three-way calling, multiple- party conference, external ip music-on-hold, announce- ment, external multiple music-on-hold source, least cost routing for vs32, payload change) dtmf playback (in rtp i...

  • Page 2259

    Vol.2-2006 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.1.3 requirements 1. Hardware requirements the required hardware for using vs-32(dual) is described in this section. To use vs-32(dual), the follow- ing hardware must be prepared: • 1u-mpc (multi purposes chassis) for mounting on 19-inch rack *required...

  • Page 2260

    Vol.2-2007 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.2 installation this section shows how to install the hardware required for using vs-32(dual). 24.2.1 how to set vs-32(dual) • how to mount vs-32(dual) card on 1u-mpc vs-32(dual) card is used by mounting on 1u-mpc (19-inch rack mount, 1u-box). *see the...

  • Page 2261

    Vol.2-2008 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] step 2 secure the vs-32(dual) card to 1u-mpc fixing two screws on right and left sides. • vs-32(dual) box desktop horizontal setting desktop horizontal setting cf annc moh conf alm pwr on line ether 100m link reset music console vs-32(v) phillips screw d...

  • Page 2262

    Vol.2-2009 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.2.2 cable connection to vs-32(dual) the vs-32(dual) provides the following types of interfaces: • connection to lan • power supply • serial port connection to maintenance console • connection to audio equipment (*optional) connect the required cables ...

  • Page 2263

    Vol.2-2010 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] cable connection to vs-32(dual) card (rear) note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lighting strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). If the cable is struck by lightning dire...

  • Page 2264

    Vol.2-2011 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. Vs-32(dual) box cable connection cable connection to vs-32(dual) box (front) note 1: cable of external hold tone source needs to be conformed with all-purpose φ 3.5 monaural ear phone jack. Adjustment of output level for external hold tone source need...

  • Page 2265

    Vol.2-2012 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] cable connection to vs-32(dual) box (rear) note: for the safety measures against static electricity, lighting struck, and other electrical surges, be sure to take proper connection to grounding (less than 10 Ω ). If the cable is struck by lightning direc...

  • Page 2266

    Vol.2-2013 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3 startup vs-32(dual) and basic tests this section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. Note: sip mode can be selected when sp-3891 ca-vs32 prog-a issue 3a or later version o...

  • Page 2267

    Vol.2-2014 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.1 data assignment by pcpro assign control module data and vs-32 feature data (announcement, three-way calling, multiple-party confer- ence, external music-on-hold feature) on the telephony server. Depending on the using maintenance applica- tion, se...

  • Page 2268

    Vol.2-2015 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.2 terminal software setting on maintenance console step 1: connect a pc (maintenance console) to console connector. Step 2: run terminal software (e.G. Hyperterminal) on the maintenance console. Step 3: set the parameter of the terminal software as ...

  • Page 2269

    Vol.2-2016 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.3 power on step 1: turn on the power switch (up) on the rear panel of vs-32(dual). Note 1: when the 1u-mpc has already turned on, press “reset” button on the front panel of vs-32(dual) card. Step 2: make sure the leds indicate normal status. - pwr l...

  • Page 2270

    Vol.2-2017 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.4 configuration command assignment assign the network configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for proprietary protocol mode and procedure for sip mode. The following explains the ...

  • Page 2271

    Vol.2-2018 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] assign the configuration data for vs-32(dual) in proprietary protocol mode. About the configuration data for sip mode, refer to page 2022 . Step 1: enter setup tp following the prompt and press enter key. Note: when no setup command is executed, propriet...

  • Page 2272

    Vol.2-2019 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server is used as dhcp server automatically assigns ip addresses to vs-32(dual), default gateway, and the telephony server, there is no need to assign these network data on vs-32(dual) side. Ip addresses listed below, how- ever, have to be pr...

  • Page 2273

    Vol.2-2020 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server is not used set the following data on vs-32(dual). (see setup tp command in 24.4.1 how to use maintenance command for the detail assignment procedure.) • ip address and subnet mask of vs-32(dual) • ip address of default gateway • ip ad...

  • Page 2274

    Vol.2-2021 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] step 4: save the assigned configuration data to internal flash rom of vs-32(dual) at the last of setup tp command to complete network setting. If you exit the setup tp command without saving the con- figuration data, the assigned data is all canceled aft...

  • Page 2275

    Vol.2-2022 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] assign the configuration data for vs-32(dual) in sip mode. About the configuration data for proprietary pro- tocol mode, refer to page 2018 . Step 1: enter setup sp following the prompt and press enter key. Note: when no setup command is executed, propri...

  • Page 2276

    Vol.2-2023 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. Dns server enable/disable setting: step 4: assign network data according to the setting of dhcp server and dns server. (see setup sp com- mand in 24.4.1 how to use maintenance command for the detail assignment procedure.) • when dhcp server and dns se...

  • Page 2277

    Vol.2-2024 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server and dns server are used in this setting, because ip addresses are automatically distributed from dhcp server, it is not required to set ip address on vs-32(dual) side. Set the following data on vs-32(dual): • communication speed of lan...

  • Page 2278

    Vol.2-2025 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server is used and dns server is not used in this setting, because ip addresses are automatically distributed from dhcp server, it is not required to set ip address on vs-32(dual) side. Set the following data on vs-32(dual): • communication s...

  • Page 2279

    Vol.2-2026 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server is not used and dns server is used set the following data on vs-32(dual): • ip address of dns server • ip address and subnet mask of vs-32(dual) • host name of vs-32(dual) • ip address of default gateway • host name of sip server • com...

  • Page 2280

    Vol.2-2027 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • when dhcp server is not used and dns server is not used set the following data on vs-32(dual): • ip address and subnet mask of vs-32(dual) • host name of vs-32(dual) (*can be skipped) • ip address of default gateway • ip address and port number of sip ...

  • Page 2281

    Vol.2-2028 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] step 5: save the assigned configuration data to internal flash rom of vs-32(dual) at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. If you exit the setup sp command without saving the con- figuration data, the assigned data is all canceled aft...

  • Page 2282

    Vol.2-2029 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.5 cable connection step 1: connect the vs-32(dual) to lan by using an appropriate lan cable. Note: before connecting vs-32(dual) to lan, be sure to execute “ping” command to check the following: - are there other devices having the same ip address o...

  • Page 2283

    Vol.2-2030 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.3.6 basic test procedures this section explains the operation check of vs-32(dual) after completing the startup. [1] basic connection test step 1: is the pwr lamp lighting green? [not light] • check the ac power cable is firmly inserted. • check the p...

  • Page 2284

    Vol.2-2031 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] step 4: does the conf/annc/moh lamp go off? [not go off] • check the data assignment of the telephony server side and vs-32(dual) side. Telephony server side: - is the data assignment on pcpro correct? Vs-32(dual) side: - is the configuration data assign...

  • Page 2285

    Vol.2-2032 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] [lights green] connection test is completed. [2] alarm information check • check the alarm lamps. If the red lamp lights, search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations. Check the system message even when the vs-32(dual) operates in red...

  • Page 2286

    Vol.2-2033 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.4 operation and maintenance 24.4.1 how to use maintenance command maintenance command is used to change the vs-32(dual) configuration setting. Default value is pre-assigned for the basic items. Therefore, execute the data change only when needed. Setu...

  • Page 2287

    Vol.2-2034 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] note: the command prompt switches to vs-32(sip)> after completing the configuration setting to sip mode by setup sp command. Data setting is explained using the prompt of proprietary protocol mode here. Vs-32>set ipaddress 10.10.15.5 255.255.255.0 comman...

  • Page 2288

    Vol.2-2035 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] [command list] the maintenance console uses the commands listed in the following tables. X: available, n: not available list of setup command command no. Sub command function propri- etary sip setup 1 sp setting basic ip data for sip mode: x x 2 tp setti...

  • Page 2289

    Vol.2-2036 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] show 11 portnumber to show port number setting: x x 12 signaling_port_no to show signaling port number for sip: n x 13 signaling_qos to show qos setting for sip signaling session: n x 14 sipsv_ipaddress to show ip address, port number, and host name of s...

  • Page 2290

    Vol.2-2037 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] note: when two or more characters are input for specifying command or sub command entry, full name is auto- matically displayed complementing the rest of the characters. (e.G. When “in” is input following the set command, “interface” setting line automat...

  • Page 2291

    Vol.2-2038 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] [help] when the maintenance command mode is activated, it provides a help function for referring to available com- mands and sub commands. After a prompt is shown, request to list up the target help by entering “?”, “com- mand name + ?”, or “command name...

  • Page 2292

    Vol.2-2039 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] setup basic settings for ip related data such as ip addresses, subnet mask, and dhcp used in vs-32(dual) is assigned by this command. This command must be executed when starting up vs-32(dual) on the initial setting. Assign ip network data and music sour...

  • Page 2293

    Vol.2-2040 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting dhcp server enable/disable: f setting dns server enable/disable: --- dhcp interfase set --- current dhcp interface: enable change dhcp interface? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y input new dhcp interface [e(enable)/d(disable)]: d line 2: the c...

  • Page 2294

    Vol.2-2041 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting ip address and subnet mask of vs-32(dual): note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: do not assign network address and broadcast address for vs-32(dual) setting. See the examples below: (example 1) network address ...

  • Page 2295

    Vol.2-2042 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting host name of vs-32(dual): note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)” and dns server is “e (enable)”. F setting default gateway ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: assign defa...

  • Page 2296

    Vol.2-2043 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of sip server: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in i...

  • Page 2297

    Vol.2-2044 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting communication speed of lan interface: f save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup sp command to complete network setting. --- ethernet speed set --- current lan speed: 10mbps_fd change lan speed? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: ...

  • Page 2298

    Vol.2-2045 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. Setting basic ip data for proprietary protocol mode: f to startup setup tp command: f setting dhcp server enable/disable: note: when dhcp is set to e (enable), this command moves on to lan interface speed setting in the next step, skipping the vs-32(d...

  • Page 2299

    Vol.2-2046 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting ip address and subnet mask of vs-32(dual): note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: do not assign network address and broadcast address for vs-32(dual) setting. See the examples below: (example 1) network address ...

  • Page 2300

    Vol.2-2047 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting default gateway ip address: note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note: assign default gateway on the same network segment where vs-32(dual) belongs. --- default gateway ip address set --- current default gateway: 0....

  • Page 2301

    Vol.2-2048 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting ip address, port number, and host name of drs note: this setting is required when dhcp server is “d (disable)”. Note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of in...

  • Page 2302

    Vol.2-2049 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f setting communication speed of lan interface: f save the assigned configuration data at the last of setup tp command to complete network setting. --- ethernet speed set --- current lan speed: auto change lan speed? [y(change)/n(current)/q(quit)]: y inp...

  • Page 2303

    Vol.2-2050 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 3. Downloading, uploading, and saving music source file in /wave directory: this command is used to set music source file. Wave file downloading via ftp and saving to flash rom is executed. Be sure to set wave file in this command before assigning announ...

  • Page 2304

    Vol.2-2051 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • how to make a sound file on windows operating system step1: select [start] → [programs] → [accessories] → [entertainment] → [soundrecorder] . Step2: select [file] → [properties] . Step3: click the [convert now] button on the [properties for sound] wind...

  • Page 2305

    Vol.2-2052 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] step4: enter the sound name by clicking the save as button, and then specify the ccitt μ -law or ccitta- law for format, and 8khz 8bit mono for attributes. Step5: click the record button. Step6: click the stop button. Step7: select [file] → [save as] to ...

  • Page 2306

    Vol.2-2053 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] before downloading the music source file, ftp server (such as internet information service) must be in- stalled in the network. Make sure the connection between the ftp server and vs-32(dual) can be estab- lished with no problem. Setup wavefile is a comm...

  • Page 2307

    Vol.2-2054 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] please enter item number 1. Change remote working directory 2. List contents of remote directory 3. Receive remote file 4. List contents of local directory 5. Send local file 6. Copy local file 7. Rename local file 8. Delete local file 9. Check wave file...

  • Page 2308

    Vol.2-2055 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] the procedure below shows how to check whether the wave files in flash rom and cf memory card can be played back on vs-32(dual): enter(1-10): 9 enter the parameter 9. Directory name: /cf/wave enter a directory name to be checked in. /cf/wave is the data ...

  • Page 2309

    Vol.2-2056 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] set this command is used to assign individual detailed settings. 1. Setting default gateway: assign the ip address of default gateway in the same segment where vs-32(dual) belongs. This data can be set also in setup tp and setup sp command. Note: to make...

  • Page 2310

    Vol.2-2057 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 3. Setting dns server: this command is used to set whether to use dns server (required for sip mode only). Note: the value in [ ] shows the current setting. Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in [ ]. Note: when disable is selected, the se...

  • Page 2311

    Vol.2-2058 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 5. Setting tos value for drs session: this command is used to set quality of service data for drs session (for proprietary protocol mode only). Precedence setting by specifying each bit or value setting by entering the setting value directly can be selec...

  • Page 2312

    Vol.2-2059 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 6. Setting the communication speed of lan interface: be sure to assign this data adjusting to the network devices (router, switch, or hub, etc.). This data can be set also in setup tp and setup sp command. Note: duplex setting does not appear when auto (...

  • Page 2313

    Vol.2-2060 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 8. Setting one time password for security: this command is used for sip mode only. 9. Setting host name of vs-32(dual): this command is used for sip mode only. Note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the ...

  • Page 2314

    Vol.2-2061 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f sip mode this command assigns rtp start port (udp). Rtp start port is used for voice data communication between the counter party’s devices; which reserves the port number 1024 from the specified port. Usually use the default value for rtp start port. ...

  • Page 2315

    Vol.2-2062 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f to set in dialog format (press enter key after the sub command to skip entering p1 and p2): • when tos is selected in qos setting, assign the data in ip precedence type: note: the result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in acco...

  • Page 2316

    Vol.2-2063 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] f to directly enter the setting value: • when p1=tos is entered: • when p1=diffserv is entered: • when p1=clear is entered to delete the current qos setting: note: to make this assignment effective, use the save command, and restart before exiting the ma...

  • Page 2317

    Vol.2-2064 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. 14. Setting vlans: this command assigns vlan id and its cos value. When vlan is enabled in vs-...

  • Page 2318

    Vol.2-2065 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] show 1. To show configuration data list: • proprietary protocol mode vs-32> show configdata [system] register_mode=tp the current setting related to proprietary protocol mode is shown. [ip] own_addr=xx.Xx.Xx.Xx subnet_mask=xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx default_gateway...

  • Page 2319

    Vol.2-2066 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • sip mode vs-32(sip)> show configdata [system] register_mode=sp [ip] own_addr=xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx subnet_mask=xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx default_gateway=xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx own_name= dns_addr=0.0.0.0 signaling_port=5060 [sip] sipsv_addr1=xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx sipsv_port1=5060 s...

  • Page 2320

    Vol.2-2067 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 2. To show country code: 3. To show dhcp setting: 4. To show dns server setting: 5. To show ip address and port number of drs: this command shows the drs’s ip address and port number setting on vs-32(dual) (for proprietary pro- tocol mode only). Note: ab...

  • Page 2321

    Vol.2-2068 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 7. To show the setting of lan communication speed: 8. To show the setting of ip address, subnet mask, and default gateway on vs-32(dual): 9. To show one time password: this command is used for sip mode only. • when authentication is not completed between...

  • Page 2322

    Vol.2-2069 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 11. To show port number setting: • proprietary protocol mode: • sip mode: 12. To show signaling port number for sip: 13. To show qos setting for sip signaling session: 14. To show ip address, port number, and host name of sip server: note: about ip addre...

  • Page 2323

    Vol.2-2070 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 15. To show the status of vs-32(dual): when data setting cannot be executed normally and registration error occurs, use this command to check the operating state of vs-32(dual). See 24.4.2 error messages for the output information and their coun- termeas...

  • Page 2324

    Vol.2-2071 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] • sip mode note: online or offline is informed for registration status. In the case of offline, the cause of registration error is to be displayed. See error messages (related to registration in sip mode) for the reason and the counter- measures of regis...

  • Page 2325

    Vol.2-2072 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 16. To show the firmware and hardware information: 17. To show vlan settings: vs-32> show version vs-32 hardware: ca-cc09 1a boot program: sp-3839 04.00 firmware: sp-3891 03.00 vs-32(dual)’s hardware, boot program, and software version information is lis...

  • Page 2326

    Vol.2-2073 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] save 1. To save the configuration data to vs-32(dual) internal flash rom: note: when vs-32(dual) is rebooted without saving the configuration data, the assigned data is discarded. 2. To save music source files on the ram to vs-32(dual) internal flash rom...

  • Page 2327

    Vol.2-2074 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] init 1. To initialize configuration data to the factory default setting: use this command only when required to reset the system data to default value. • proprietary protocol mode • sip mode vs-32> init configdata *** warning !! *** this command initiali...

  • Page 2328

    Vol.2-2075 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] reboot 1. To reboot vs-32(dual): note: calls in progress are disconnected on any condition. Get 1. To download the configuration data file from the specified tftp server: name the configuration data file to “sysdata” and save it on the route directory of...

  • Page 2329

    Vol.2-2076 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] ping 1. To check the network conditions: cd 1. To change the current directory: pwd 1. To display the current directory: rm 1. To delete file: vs-32> ping p1 p1 : enter the ip address of the system to access. Ping 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes 64 bytes fr...

  • Page 2330

    Vol.2-2077 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] ls 1. To display detailed information for directories and files: cp 1. To copy file: mv 1. To move and rename file: note: file cannot be moved between another disks: for example “/cf” and “/wave”. In this case, use the cp com- mand. Note: this command ca...

  • Page 2331

    Vol.2-2078 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] exit 1. To exit the maintenance command: [normal occasion] [when configuration data is changed] note: if any error occurs in saving the setting after “y” is selected, the screen returns to the prompt of mainte- nance command (“vs-32>”, in default). Vs-32...

  • Page 2332

    Vol.2-2079 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] 24.4.2 error messages when any error occurs in using the maintenance commands, error message is displayed to urge data entry again. The error messages listed below will help you to find solutions. Error messages error message cause solution command not c...

  • Page 2333

    Vol.2-2080 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] sub command not found. The entered sub command is not supported. Enter supported sub command. System data file (sysdata) corrupted. Initialize sys- tem data with “init configdata” command. The system data file is corrupted. Initialize the system data usi...

  • Page 2334

    Vol.2-2081 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] drs message is unreceivable! Registration message cannot be received from drs. Possible cause is: • vs-32(dual) sets incorrect ip address of drs. • drs is shut down. • vs-32(dual) has incorrect ip network setting. • channel route between vs-32(dual) and ...

  • Page 2335

    Vol.2-2082 vs-32(dual) [sca-vs32va/mg-vs32va] no response from dhcp! Response has not been received from dhcp server. Vs-32(dual) cannot receive response from dhcp server. Confirm the dhcp server is normally operating on the network. Registration is not started yet! Vs-32(dual) has not started regis...

  • Page 2336

    Vol.2-2083 sr-mgc(e) 25. Sr-mgc(e) here explains an sr-mgc(e): function overview, configuration, installation procedure..

  • Page 2337

    Vol.2-2084 sr-mgc(e) 25.1 general ip terminals in offices of an enterprise normally work under control of a telephony server in a main office: the telephony server can maintain all terminals’ operations via an ip network, even if some of them are in other offices. It is one of flagship features of o...

  • Page 2338

    Vol.2-2085 sr-mgc(e) 25.2 specifications this section describes the specifications of an sr-mgc(e). 25.2.1 part names the following are the appearances of an sr-mgc(e), including lamps and connectors. Front rear 25.2.2 details (1) technical specifications item specification dimensions 65 (h) x 430 (...

  • Page 2339

    Vol.2-2086 sr-mgc(e) (2) front panel use environment temperature operating: 0 ° to 40 ° c non-operating: -20 ° to 60 ° c humidity operating: 20%~90%, non-condensing non-operating: 20%~90% seismic design horizontal acceleration 0.5g *1.1g when mounting on a 19-inch rack. Lan cable ieee802.3 • 10base-...

  • Page 2340

    Vol.2-2087 sr-mgc(e) usb2.0 connector - not used. Ether1 connector link on (green) connection is established. External lan inter- face for tcp/ip (max 1gbps) flash (green) accessing. Off connection is not estab- lished. Speed on (green) 100mbps on (or- ange) 1gbps off 10mbps ether2 connector note 6 ...

  • Page 2341

    Vol.2-2088 sr-mgc(e) note 3: to confirm that shutdown is complete, check the pwr lamp. When the auto-shutdown does not work, press and hold the cpu pwr switch for four seconds to turn off the power forcibly. Note 4: if you want to operate an sr-mgc(e) with off-line mode, turn it on with the mode swi...

  • Page 2342

    Vol.2-2089 sr-mgc(e) (4) port numbers to be used port no. Path function how to change default port no. 60110 mgc to sr-mgc(e) a port for health check re- ceive mgc - sr-mgc (serv- er). Adtm command 60120 sr-mgc(e) to mgc a port for health check send mgc - sr-mgc (client). Adtm command 60140 mgc to s...

  • Page 2343

    Vol.2-2090 sr-mgc(e) 25.3 installation this section describes installing and cabling procedures for an sr-mgc(e). Take anti-static measures to work on it. 25.3.1 installing procedure you can mount an sr-mgc(e) on a 19-inch rack. The procedure is the same as mounting an sv8500 server on a 19-inch rac...

  • Page 2344

    Vol.2-2091 sr-mgc(e) step 3: plug a lan cable into the ether1 connector (rj-45). Front panel now you are done. Move on to the next section: startup. Link/act speed ether1 ether2 pwr load on line lan cable (10base-t /100base-tx/ 1000base-t) plug into the lan connector..

  • Page 2345

    Vol.2-2092 sr-mgc(e) 25.4 startup note: for north american market only - sr-mgc(e) 8gb cf card must be prepared using s6 dvd. This section describes the procedure to start up an sr-mgc(e). Sr-mgc(e) startup procedure note: for details on hardware information, see specifications . Step 1: turn on an ...

  • Page 2346

    Vol.2-2093 sr-mgc(e) subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 default gateway address: 172.16.253.0, a default ip address of an sr-mgc(e) now you are supposed to be able to login to the sr-mgc(e). Perform the following to check the connectivity between the pc and sr-mgc(e). [1] open a dos window; enter ping 172.16....

  • Page 2347

    Vol.2-2094 sr-mgc(e) [4] open a dos window; enter ping 172.223.12.45 (sr-mgc(e) address); press the enter key. [5] make sure that you get replies from the sr-mgc(e) (172.223.12.45, in this case). [6] run pcpro and login to the sr-mgc(e). Step 13: test pcpro operation. Make sure that you can use pcpr...

  • Page 2348

    Vol.2-2095 sr-mgc(e) [for fp85-108 s5 or earlier version] • copy office data: perform the cmnt command; open the office data copy tab. • specifying sr-mgc: select if you want to copy office data to specific sr-mgc(e)s. Sr-mgc number: click on sr-mgc numbers to which you want to copy office data; the...

  • Page 2349

    Vol.2-2096 sr-mgc(e) note 7: perform either of the following two. (1) perform the cmnt command; open the initialize tab. All initial: initializes all sr-mgcs at the same time. Individual initial: initializes only sr-mgcs specified with an sr-mgc number. Sr-mgc number: if selecting individual initial...

  • Page 2350

    Vol.2-2097 sr-mgc(e) 25.5 office data assignment for information about office data assignment, refer to programming section for survivable remote mgc [s- 141] in the data programming manual - business..

  • Page 2351

    Vol.2-2098 sr-mgc(e) 25.6 installation test this section describes the basic installation test for sr-mgc(e) including checks for lamp indications and sys- tem messages. (1) lamp indications check lamps to make sure that the sr-mgc(e) is working properly. For details on lamps, see specifications . (...

  • Page 2352

    Vol.2-2099 sr-mgc(e) • the sr-mgc(e) connects to a network with transmitting speed of 10mbps. • if you expected transmitting speed of 1gbps or 100mbps, check a connected network device and a cable between them. Step 4: is the online lamp turned on? - no. • indicates that the sr-mgc(e) is not set up....

  • Page 2353

    Vol.2-2100 sr-mgc(e) • do both the sr-mgc(e) and ip terminals for testing belong to the same network? • is sr-mgc(e) data set properly? Check the assigned data such as ip address by using the aipa command. - if there are no problem; a call can be sent and received properly; and the call quality is g...

  • Page 2354

    Vol.2-2101 sr-mgc(e) 25.7 fan replacement this section describes the procedure to replace fans inside an sr-mgc(e). * a failure of a cooling fan rises the temperature inside of an sr-mgc(e), which greatly influences the system. Please replace a cooling fan every five years to avoid it, even though t...

  • Page 2355

    Vol.2-2102 sr-mgc(e) step 3: remove the fan connector; the screw; the fan. Note: if you are replacing fans as the sr-mgc(e) remains on, removing both fans may generate heat inside, resulting in system failure. Be sure to replace one by one, but not at the same time. Step 4: attach new fans: perform ...

  • Page 2356

    Vol.2-2103 sr-mgc(e) 25.8 shutdown this section describes the procedure to shut down an sr-mgc(e). Sr-mgc(e) shutdown procedure for details on hardware information, see specifications . The following explains how to shut down the sr-mgc(e) when pcpro can be connected to the sr-mgc(e). Step 1: execut...

  • Page 2357

    Vol.2-2104 sr-mgc(e) [1] click the shutdown button under system control area. Step 3: power off the sr-mgc(e). Make sure that pwr lamp goes out, and then turn off the power switch on the rear of the sr- mgc(e). The following explains how to shut down the sr-mgc(e) when neither pcpro nor telephony se...

  • Page 2358

    Vol.2-2105 sr-mgc(e) 25.9 version upgrade this section describes the procedure to upgrade an sr-mgc(e) program. Take anti-static measures to work on it. Sr-mgc(e) version upgrade procedure for details on hardware information, see specifications . Step 1: turn off an sr-mgc(e). Perform the sinz comma...

  • Page 2359

    Vol.2-2106 sr-mgc(e) [pcpro connection account setting] on the main menu, click on system; click on connection account setting; set the following. Account name connection type: tcp/ip tcp/ip setting ip address: 172.16.253.0, a default ip address of an sr-mgc(e) port number: 60000 [pc setting] a pc w...

  • Page 2360

    Vol.2-2107 sr-mgc(e) step 11: set sp configuration data on the sr-mgc(e). Perform the aspc command to assign a sip server id on the sr-mgc(e); set the following parameter. [sip server id] • system: system-0 (fixed) • input mode: standard • function: sip server • sip server id: specify a sip server i...

  • Page 2361

    Vol.2-2108 sr-mgc(e) step 17: test pcpro operation. Make sure that you can use pcpro properly. Step 18: assign office data for the sr-mgc(e) to the mgc. With pcpro logging-in to the mgc, perform the cmnt command to assign office data for the sr-mgc(e) belonging to the mgc. For the procedure to assig...

  • Page 2362

    Vol.2-2109 sr-mgc(e) [for fp85-108 s5 or earlier version] • copy office data: perform the cmnt command; open the office data copy tab. • specifying sr-mgc: select if you want to copy office data to specific sr-mgc(e)s. • sr-mgc number: click on sr-mgc numbers to which you want to copy office data; t...

  • Page 2363

    Vol.2-2110 sr-mgc(e) note 9: perform either of the following two. (1) perform the cmnt command; open the initialize tab. All initial: initializes all sr-mgcs at the same time. Individual initial: initializes only sr-mgcs specified with an sr-mgc number. Sr-mgc number: if selecting individual initial...

  • Page 2364

    Vol.2-2111 sr-mgc(e) 25.10 remote version upgrade this section describes the procedure to upgrade an sr-mgc(e) program remotely. The version of an sr-mgc(e) is upgraded remotely by copying the program file provided in ftp server to sr-mgc. Note: observe the following when performing a remote version...

  • Page 2365

    Vol.2-2112 sr-mgc(e) “generic software” to the ftp server before performing a remote version upgrade for sr- mgc(e). Store the program file and the checksum file in a same folder. • a file size of a program file is more than 2 gb. Make sure that the disk space of the ftp server is enough. • multiple...

  • Page 2366

    Vol.2-2113 sr-mgc(e) note: specify the ftp server no. In the range of 1 to 256. [2] set the data for ftp server used for version upgrade. The parameters for ftp server setting are as follows. Ftp server no. [1 - 256]: enter the number to be allocated to the ftp number. Ip address: enter the ip addre...

  • Page 2367

    Vol.2-2114 sr-mgc(e) [1] execute the cmnt command and open the file control tab. Select program copy from process type. [2] click the target sr-mgc number to perform a program copy. A box of the number you have specified will turn to yellow. Click the number again to cancel the designa- tion. When t...

  • Page 2368

    Vol.2-2115 sr-mgc(e) [5] sr-mgcs will restart automatically when the program switch is completed. The sr- mgc will boot up with the program file switched to an upgraded version. Step 11: connect pcpro to sr-mgc. After the sr-mgc boots up, connect to sr-mgc using the connection account for sr-mgc set...

  • Page 2369

    Vol.2-2116 sr-mgc(e) sr-mgc(e) remote version downgrade procedure here describes the procedure to return an sr-mgc(e) remotely to the status before upgraded. Sr-mgc(e) version remote downgrade procedure step 1: execute the program switch. Execute a program switch to restore the program before upgrad...

  • Page 2370

    Vol.2-2117 sr-mgc(s) 26. Sr-mgc(s) here explains sr-mgc(s): function overview, configuration, installation procedure. * the following supposes that the sr-mgc(s) is inserted in a 1u-mpc though a sr-mgc is delivered with- out the 1u-mpc. For details on 1u-mpc, see “ appendix a ”..

  • Page 2371

    Vol.2-2118 sr-mgc(s) 26.1 general ip terminals in offices of an enterprise normally work under control of a telephony server in a main office: the telephony server can maintain all terminals’ operations via an ip network, even if some of them are in other offices. It is one of flagship features of o...

  • Page 2372

    Vol.2-2119 sr-mgc(s) 26.2 specifications this section describes the specifications of sr-mgc(s). 26.2.1 part names the following are the appearances of an sr-mgc(s), including lamps and connectors. Front rear 26.2.2 details (1) technical specifications item specification dimensions 43.8 (h) x 430 (w...

  • Page 2373

    Vol.2-2120 sr-mgc(s) (2) front panel note 1: if you want to operate an sr-mgc(s) with off-line mode, turn it on with the system switch 1 set to on. Qos ieee802.1p (tos field is supported, diffserv) part condition description remarks pwr lamp on (green) cpu is powered on. Off cpu is powered off. Alm ...

  • Page 2374

    Vol.2-2121 sr-mgc(s) if you activate an sr-mgc(s) with off-line mode, the following settings apply: • the sr-mgc(s) is set up without running tp and sp programs. • ether1 ip address comes to 192.168.0.2/24. Connect pcpro tools to ether1 so that you can maintain the sr-mgc(s). But pcpro tools may not...

  • Page 2375

    Vol.2-2122 sr-mgc(s) (4) port numbers to be used port no. Path function how to change default port no. 60110 mgc to sr-mgc(s) a port for health check re- ceive mgc - sr-mgc (serv- er). Adtm command 60120 sr-mgc(s) to mgc a port for health check send mgc - sr-mgc (client). Adtm command 60140 mgc to s...

  • Page 2376

    Vol.2-2123 sr-mgc(s) 26.3 installation this section describes installing and cabling procedures for an sr-mgc(s). Take anti-static measures to work on it. 26.3.1 installing procedure you can mount an sr-mgc(s) on a 19-inch rack. The procedure is the same as mounting an sv8500 server on a 19-inch rac...

  • Page 2377

    Vol.2-2124 sr-mgc(s) front panel now you are done. Move on to the next section: startup. Lan cable (10base-t /100base-tx) plug into the lan connector. Ether1 100m link 100m link ether2 pwr online alm load p c c a r d u s b on 1 2 3 4 &25$.

  • Page 2378

    Vol.2-2125 sr-mgc(s) 26.4 office data assignment for information about office data assignment, refer to programming section for survivable remote mgc [s- 141] in the data programming manual - business..

  • Page 2379

    Vol.2-2126 sr-mgc(s) 26.5 startup this section describes the procedure to start up an sr-mgc(s). Sr-mgc(s) startup procedure for details on hardware information, see specifications . Step 1: turn on an sr-mgc(s). Turn on power of an sr-mgc(s), where its operation is the following: booting up the sys...

  • Page 2380

    Vol.2-2127 sr-mgc(s) now you are supposed to be able to login to the sr-mgc(s). Perform the following to check the connectivity between the pc and sr-mgc(s). [1] open a dos window; enter ping 172.16.253.0 (sr-mgc(s) address); press the enter key. [2] make sure that you get replies from the sr-mgc(s)...

  • Page 2381

    Vol.2-2128 sr-mgc(s) key. [5] make sure that you get replies from the sr-mgc(s) (172.223.12.45, in this case). [6] run pcpro and login to the sr-mgc(s). Step 13: test pcpro operation. Make sure that you can use pcpro properly. Step 14: assign office data for the sr-mgc(s) to the mgc. With pcpro logg...

  • Page 2382

    Vol.2-2129 sr-mgc(s) [for fp85-108 s5 or earlier version] • copy office data: perform the cmnt command; open the office data copy tab. • specifying sr-mgc: select if you want to copy office data to specific sr-mgc(s)s. Sr-mgc number: click on sr-mgc numbers to which you want to copy office data; the...

  • Page 2383

    Vol.2-2130 sr-mgc(s) note 4: perform either of the following two. (1) perform the cmnt command; open the initialize tab. All initial: initializes all sr-mgcs at the same time. Individual initial: initializes only sr-mgcs specified with an sr-mgc number. Sr-mgc number: if selecting individual initial...

  • Page 2384

    Vol.2-2131 sr-mgc(s) 26.6 installation test this section describes the basic installation test for sr-mgc(s) including checks for lamp indications and sys- tem messages. (1) lamp indications check lamps to make sure that the sr-mgc(s) is working properly. For details on lamps, see specifications . (...

  • Page 2385

    Vol.2-2132 sr-mgc(s) • indicates that the sr-mgc(s) is not set up. Reread startup to make sure that all steps in the procedure are performed. - yes. Move on to the next step. Step 5: can you make a call from a station that is controlled by the sr-mgc(s)? The following is an example of a call test fo...

  • Page 2386

    Vol.2-2133 sr-mgc(s) ronment. (3) check with a command you can use the following command to check the state of an sr-mgc(s). [cmnt: control of sr-mgc maintenance data] the update button provides you with states of all sr-mgcs managed by the mgc. • sr-mgc no. • sts: indicates the connection state bet...

  • Page 2387

    Vol.2-2134 sr-mgc(s) 26.7 fan replacement this section describes the procedure to replace fans inside an sr-mgc(s). * a failure of a cooling fan rises the temperature inside of an sr-mgc(s), which greatly influences the system. Please replace a cooling fan every three years to avoid it, even though ...

  • Page 2388

    Vol.2-2135 sr-mgc(s) step 4: insert a new power unit and tighten the screws. Step 5: turn on the power unit. Test after attaching check if the replaced fans work properly. • if the fan does not work properly, remove the power unit to insert it again. If it does not help, the power unit may be broken...

  • Page 2389

    Vol.2-2136 sr-mgc(s) 26.8 shutdown procedure this section describes the procedure to shut down an sr-mgc(s). Sr-mgc shutdown procedure for details on hardware information, see specifications . The following explains how to shut down the sr-mgc(s) when pcpro can be connected to the sr-mgc(s). Step 1:...

  • Page 2390

    Vol.2-2137 sr-mgc(s) [1] click the shutdown button under system control . Step 3: power off sr-mgc(s). Wait for five minutes after the shutdown. Confirm the load lamp is not lighted or flashing before turning off the power switch on the rear panel of sr-mgc(s). > program office data license patch lo...

  • Page 2391

    Vol.2-2138 sr-mgc(s) 26.9 version upgrade this section describes the procedure to upgrade an sr-mgc(s) program. Take anti-static measures to work on it. Sr-mgc(s) version upgrade procedure for details on hardware information, see specifications . To upgrade an sr-mgc(s) program from fp85-107 s4 to f...

  • Page 2392

    Vol.2-2139 sr-mgc(s) step 8: connect pcpro (pc) outside your lan. Connect a pc with pcpro installed to the sr-mgc(s) through the ether1 connector on it, so that you can assign office data to the sr-mgc(s). Note: if connecting them directly, use a lan cable (crossover cable); if connecting via a hub,...

  • Page 2393

    Vol.2-2140 sr-mgc(s) step 11: set sp configuration data on the sr-mgc(s). Perform the aspc command to assign a sip server id on the sr-mgc(s); set the following parameter. [sip server id] • system: system-0 (fixed) • input mode: standard • function: sip server • sip server id: specify a sip server i...

  • Page 2394

    Vol.2-2141 sr-mgc(s) step 17: test pcpro operation. Make sure that you can use pcpro properly. Step 18: assign office data for the sr-mgc(s) to the mgc. With pcpro logging-in to the mgc, perform the cmnt command to assign office data for the sr-mgc(s) belonging to the mgc. For the procedure to assig...

  • Page 2395

    Vol.2-2142 sr-mgc(s) [for fp85-108 s5 or earlier version] • copy office data: perform the cmnt command; open the office data copy tab. • specifying sr-mgc: select if you want to copy office data to specific sr-mgc(s)s. • sr-mgc number: click on sr-mgc numbers to which you want to copy office data; t...

  • Page 2396

    Vol.2-2143 sr-mgc(s) note 6: perform either of the following two. (1) perform the cmnt command; open the initialize tab. All initial: initializes all sr-mgcs at the same time. Individual initial: initializes only sr-mgcs specified with an sr-mgc number. Sr-mgc number: if selecting individual initial...

  • Page 2397

    Vol.2-2144 sr-mgc(s) 26.10 remote version upgrade this section describes the procedure to upgrade an sr-mgc(s) program remotely. The version of an sr-mgc(s) is upgraded remotely by copying the program file provided in ftp server to sr-mgc. Note: observe the following when performing a remote version...

  • Page 2398

    Vol.2-2145 sr-mgc(s) note: observe the following when preparing a ftp server for remote version upgrade. • import the program file and the checksum file from the image folder in the version upgrade dvd “generic software” to the ftp server before performing a remote version upgrade for sr- mgc(s). St...

  • Page 2399

    Vol.2-2146 sr-mgc(s) ton. Note: specify the ftp server no. In the range of 1 to 256. [2] set the data for ftp server used for version upgrade. The parameters for ftp server setting are as follows. Ftp server no. [1 - 256]: enter the number to be allocated to the ftp number. Ip address: enter the ip ...

  • Page 2400

    Vol.2-2147 sr-mgc(s) step 9: execute the program copy. Follow the procedure below to copy the program from the ftp server to sr-mgc. [1] execute the cmnt command and open the file control tab. Select program copy from process type. [2] click the target sr-mgc number to perform a program copy. A box ...

  • Page 2401

    Vol.2-2148 sr-mgc(s) [4] when the program switch completes, a dialog box with a message “executed process succeeded.” appears. [5] sr-mgcs will restart automatically when the program switch is completed. The sr- mgc will boot up with the program file switched to an upgraded version. Step 11: connect...

  • Page 2402

    Vol.2-2149 sr-mgc(s) sr-mgc(s) remote version downgrade procedure here describes the procedure to return an sr-mgc(s) remotely to the status before upgraded. Sr-mgc(s) version remote downgrade procedure step 1: execute the program switch. Execute a program switch to restore the program before upgrad...

  • Page 2403

    Vol.2-2150 sr-mgc 27. Sr-mgc 27.1 general 27.1.1 what is survivable remote mgc? Survivable remote mgc (sr-mgc) is placed on remote office to manage the call of ip terminals and sip ter- minals and trunk call to/from pstn via mg in case of network failure ( note 1 ) or the telephony server break- dow...

  • Page 2404

    Vol.2-2151 sr-mgc the figure below shows an example where the telephony server cannot control ip stations in remote office b because of network failure. In this case, sr-mgc installed in office b automatically starts operation to control ip stations on the lan. Ip network sr-mgc in operation failure...

  • Page 2405

    Vol.2-2152 sr-mgc 27.1.2 function overview health check the telephony server needs to recognize whether the corresponding sr-mgc keeps stand-by mode in preparation for registration failure of ip devices/stations in remote office. On the other hand, sr-mgc needs to recognize whether the corresponding...

  • Page 2406

    Vol.2-2153 sr-mgc telephony server sr-mgc health check request packet sr-mgc waits health check request packet from telephony server for 60 seconds (default 60 seconds, determined by the value of asydl, sys1 index 850 × index 852, b0-b3). If the request has not been received, the sr-mgc accepts regi...

  • Page 2407

    Vol.2-2154 sr-mgc telephony server sr-mgc telephony server sr-mgc terminals telephony server sends health check request packet to sr-mgc at intervals of 30 seconds (default 30 seconds, determined by asydl, sys1, index 850). Telephony server returns to normal operation. Health check request packet he...

  • Page 2408

    Vol.2-2155 sr-mgc number of terminals to be rescued ip stations in the remote office are controlled by sr-mgc if the request for registration to the telephony server fails. The maximum number of ip stations depends on sr-mgc series as follow. Phd function when ip station is controlled by sr-mgc, sp-...

  • Page 2409

    Vol.2-2156 sr-mgc billing information management while sr-mgc is in operation, smdr information of the remote office is stored on the sr-mgc in the call base table (cbt) format the same as in main office. When the telephony server recovers to normal operation, the collected cbt file is transferred t...

  • Page 2410

    Vol.2-2157 sr-mgc 27.1.3 office data copy to sr-mgc telephony server’s office data can be copied to sr-mgc to match the data settings between the tele- phony server and the sr-mgc. Data copy is performed via ftp. The copy is activated in the following two ways: • periodic sending office data copy st...

  • Page 2411

    Vol.2-2158 sr-mgc ip terminal registration changeover from sr-mgc to the telephony server when the telephony server recovers to normal operation, the registration of ip terminals is switched over to the telephony server from sr-mgc. The type of registration changeover, automatic changeover to the te...

  • Page 2412

    Vol.2-2159 sr-mgc 27.1.4 specifications 27.1.5 required hardware make sure all the following hardware is prepared: note 1: the system program and the license of sr-mgc is already installed on the flash card when the product is shipped. Item specification note input power ac 100 ~ 240v, 50/60 hz (ac ...

  • Page 2413

    Vol.2-2160 sr-mgc 27.2 installation 27.2.1 face layout the following shows the front and rear view of two-unit sr-mgc. Size of sr-mgc 346 mm (13.62'' inch) (1.69'' inch) 430 mm (1' 4.93'' inch) 43 mm (1.72'' inch) 43.8 mm load lan1 lan2 txrx link txrx link load lan1 lan2 txrx link txrx link sr t20 s...

  • Page 2414

    Vol.2-2161 sr-mgc 27.2.2 layout of switches, connectors, and lamps switches, connectors, lamps rear view sr t20 sr s20 front view txrx, link pc card slot ether connector usb port load pwr, act, alm pwr load lan1 lan2 txrx link txrx link load lan1 lan2 txrx link txrx link sr t20 connectors lamps sr s...

  • Page 2415

    Vol.2-2162 sr-mgc switches connectors lamps switch name setting meaning pwr (seesaw) on power is supplied to the sr-mgc (left side). Off power is not supplied to the sr-mgc (right side). Connector description note ac power inlet plug in an attached three-polar grounded ac power cable (cable length: ...

  • Page 2416

    Vol.2-2163 sr-mgc 27.3 starting up 27.3.1 flow of starting up procedure when the installation has been completed, go on to the starting-up procedure as follows. • sr-mgc setup procedure overview note: for service conditions, refer to the data programming manual - business. Step 1: preparation before...

  • Page 2417

    Vol.2-2164 sr-mgc 27.3.2 preparation before starting up sr-mgc [pcpro preparation] prepare a pc running windows (xp, vista, windows server 2003 or windows server 2008) used as pcpro connecting to sr-mgc for data assignment and management. Install pcpro software on the pc..

  • Page 2418

    Vol.2-2165 sr-mgc 27.3.3 starting up sr t of sr-mgc the following are procedures for setting up sr-mgc. To complete sr-mgc, the set- tings for sr s (refer to “ section 27.3.4, starting up sr s of sr-mgc ”) are also re- quired. [1] flash card insertion step 1: unfasten the screw and remove the front ...

  • Page 2419

    Vol.2-2166 sr-mgc use ping to test reachability to the sr t. The connection is established when a reply is sent back from the sr t. [9] login to sr t via local pcpro login to the sr t by the account created above step. Run the pcpro software from program menu on the pcpro pc. In the [pcpro] window, ...

  • Page 2420

    Vol.2-2167 sr-mgc 27.3.4 starting up sr s of sr-mgc the following are procedures for setting sr s of sr-mgc. [1] flash card insertion step 1: unfasten the screw and remove the front cover on the front panel of sr s. Step 2: insert the prepared flash card (system program and the license have already ...

  • Page 2421

    Vol.2-2168 sr-mgc to change the network settings, take the procedures by using telnet: step 1: use telnet to log on to the sr s. Step 2: type “sv7000” twice for login and password, and then make sure the prompt is changed. Step 3: enter sudo command to obtain limited super user privileges as follows...

  • Page 2422

    Vol.2-2169 sr-mgc sr-mgc(sp) nameserver [172.16.253.1] =: 10.40.182.124 type the ip address of dns. Note 1 sr-mgc(sp) hostname [srmgc-sp] =: type a desired host name. Sr-mgc(sp) sip-id [1] =: 1 assign a value from 1 to 255. Note 2 sr-mgc(sp) mph-id [1] =: 1 assign a value from 1 to 4095. Note 3 sr-m...

  • Page 2423

    Vol.2-2170 sr-mgc note 1: when domain name server (dns) does not exist in the system, assign the same ip address as that of sr s to the dns address. Note 2: this value must be the same as one assigned in sr t of sr-mgc. Pcpro: “sip server id” in the assdn command note 3: this value must be the same ...

  • Page 2424

    Vol.2-2171 sr-mgc step 5: restart the sr s. Act lamp lights off and the system is automatically restarted. Check to see that act lamp lights on, which indicates the system is operating. [8] reset sr t and sr s first, reset the sr t by turning the pwr switch off → on on the rear side. And then reset ...

  • Page 2425

    Vol.2-2172 sr-mgc 27.3.5 office data assignment perform the data settings on the telephony server (mgc) in main office. The telephony server (mgc) is required to recognize the sr-mgc in remote office by assigning the ip address, office name, and sys- tem data for health check. This explains each of ...

  • Page 2426

    Vol.2-2173 sr-mgc this item explains the procedures for setting up the telephony server (mgc). Log in to the telephony server (mgc) by pcpro and take the following procedures. [1] use the asydl command system data 1 index 843: assign the settings for sp down detection mode. Bit0-1: detection mode fo...

  • Page 2427

    Vol.2-2174 sr-mgc bit5: sr-mgc → mgc connectivity check by ping 0/1=sr-mgc → mgc connectivity check by ping is disabled/enabled. If the telephony server (mgc) is configured redundant, the decision as to which the telephony server (mgc) (mgc#0 or mgc#1) data will be copied depends on the following da...

  • Page 2428

    Vol.2-2175 sr-mgc 00 hex. = 5 seconds (default) 01 ~ 05 hex. = 5 seconds 06 ~ fe hex. = 6 ~ 254 seconds ff hex. = no error detection note 5: be sure not to assign the time-out timer exceeding the value of health check cycle assigned by asydl, sys1, index 850 (excepting when ff hex. Is assigned). Ind...

  • Page 2429

    Vol.2-2176 sr-mgc [3] use the cmnt command assign the sr-mgc data such as sr-mgc number, ip address, and office name. Sr-mgc number [0-255] specify the sr-mgc number in the target remote office. Office name [maximum 20 digits] enter the office name the corresponding sr-mgc belongs to. Ip address ent...

  • Page 2430

    Vol.2-2177 sr-mgc note 8: the following is an example using c_mgc when sr-mgc is used with fccs cluster feature. Kind specify the sr-mgc, which will be activated if the telephony server (mgc) is failed. All=specify all the sr-mgcs. Individual sr-mgc no.=specify the number of sr-mgc. Condition condit...

  • Page 2431

    Vol.2-2178 sr-mgc note 11: the following are examples of using these parameters. If you use sr-mgc with fccs cluster (c_mgc = 1), see also the service conditions in sr-mgc with fccs cluster part of location di- versity[l-55] in the data programming manual - business. The telephony server (mgc) is lo...

  • Page 2432

    Vol.2-2179 sr-mgc 3. When the telephony server (mgc) is recovered even though the telephony server (mgc) is recovered from network failure, the setting (mgc → sr- mgc in condition) keeps sr-mgc operating and controlling the terminals. (terminal reset will not be performed.) even when network fault a...

  • Page 2433

    Vol.2-2180 sr-mgc [4] use the akyd command (option) assign the visitor feature to the line/feature key of the terminal, which makes it re-register to primary telephony server (mgc). Kyi=1 (function key) fky:156 (visitor) [5] use the adsl command (option) assign the visitor feature to the soft key of...

  • Page 2434

    Vol.2-2181 sr-mgc this item explains the procedures for setting up sr-mgc. Log in to sr-mgc by pcpro. [1] use the aipa command assign the network data such as ip address of sr t. Ip address: specify the ip address of sr t. Net mask: enter the subnet mask. Default gw ip address: enter the ip address ...

  • Page 2435

    Vol.2-2182 sr-mgc select either of the radio buttons, specifying sr-mgc or all sr-mgc (en bloc specifying) on the man- ual copy tab to execute office data copy manually. • specifying sr-mgc click the execute button after specifying the target sr-mgc number (0 ~ 255). • all sr-mgc (en bloc specifying...

  • Page 2436

    Vol.2-2183 sr-mgc (b) use telnet to reset sr s. First, reset the sr t by turning the pwr switch off → on on the rear side. And then reset the sr s as follows. 1) use telnet to log on to the sr s. 2) type “sv7000” twice for login and password, and then check to see that a prompt is changed. 3) restar...

  • Page 2437

    Vol.2-2184 sr-mgc after sr-mgc and the telephony server (mgc) have been installed, the settings of each terminal are neces- sary to use the sr-mgc. The following must be assigned by each terminal. • in the case of dtermip(sip) [1] select “2. Sip settings” on the main menu. [2] select “2. Server addr...

  • Page 2438

    Vol.2-2185 sr-mgc 27.3.6 installation test when installation and necessary data assignment have been completed, perform the installation test. Before starting the installation test, be sure to confirm the telephony server (mgc) on the main-office is operating normally. • no alarm is indicated on the...

  • Page 2439

    Vol.2-2186 sr-mgc 27.4 system maintenance 27.4.1 fault diagnosis if operation state “ng” is indicated on cmnt command, check the cause of fault following the procedure below and take countermeasures on sr-mgc to keep normal stand-by mode. Start 1. Is the pwr lamp lighting green? 2. Is the lan1 link ...

  • Page 2440

    Vol.2-2187 sr-mgc 27.4.2 initialization of sr-mgc cmnt command has the function to initialize the specified sr-mgc. For more information about it, refer to the operations and maintenance manual. 27.4.3 operation mode changeover cmnt command can forcibly change the operation mode of the telephony ser...

  • Page 2441

    Vol.2-2188 sr-mgc 27.4.5 fan replacement procedure when fan failure is detected by minor alarm, replace the fan as follows. This procedure can be executed while sr-mgc is operating. Step 1: unscrew the screw that fastens the fan cover to the chassis. Use a phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw. S...

  • Page 2442

    Vol.2-2189 sr-mgc step 4: detach the fan from the chassis, and replace with the new one. Step 5: fasten the new fan with screws. Fans have to be attached in the following step 6: connect the fan cables. Step 7: attach the fan cover to the chassis and fasten the screw. Step 8: check to see all the fa...

  • Page 2443

    Vol.2-2190 sr-mgc 27.5 shutdown procedure this section describes the procedure to shut down two-unit sr-mgc. For details on hardware, see specifications . The following explains how to shut down a sr-mgc(sr t). Step 1: check the lamp. Confirm the load lamp is not lighted. Step 2: turn off the power ...

  • Page 2444

    Vol.2-2191 sr-mgc 27.6 version upgrade procedure this section explains the version upgrade procedure for sr–mgc. Execute the following pro- cedure after assigning data on the telephony server (mgc) side (refer to the beginning of this chapter for details). 27.6.1 version upgrade procedure for sr t o...

  • Page 2445

    Vol.2-2192 sr-mgc assign the tcp/ip property on the pc (pcpro) as follows: ip address: 172. 16. 253. 253 subnet mask: 255. 255. 0. 0 default gateway (in this case, default ip address for sr t): 172. 16. 253. 0 note: user must change default gateway ip address after setting ip address on sr t side us...

  • Page 2446

    Vol.2-2193 sr-mgc step 2: verify that a reply is sent back from sr t. Step 3: start up pcpro program and login. 27.6.2 version upgrade procedure for sr s of sr–mgc the following explains the procedure for sr s of sr–mgc version upgrade. [1] power off turn off power for sr s. [2] lan cable disconnect...

  • Page 2447

    Vol.2-2194 sr-mgc execute the following to change settings on the sr s side: step 1: use telnet to log on to the sr s (in windows 2000, use start → program → accessory → command prompt). Telnet is accessible from any pc connected to a network.. Login screen will be displayed; enter the following: st...

  • Page 2448

    Vol.2-2195 sr-mgc execute the following procedures for data entry. Current value for each parameter is displayed in brackets ([ ]) if pre–registered. When pressing the enter key without entering any values, the value displayed in brackets ([ ]) will be used. When re–entering a value, an asterisk (*)...

  • Page 2449

    Vol.2-2196 sr-mgc the current setting will be displayed before setting new timezone information for sip station. Sr-mgc(sp) ip address [172.16.253.1] =: 10.40.182.126 type the ip address for sr s + enter key (mandatory). Sr-mgc(sp) netmask [255.255.255.0] =: type the netmask for sr s + enter key (ma...

  • Page 2450

    Vol.2-2197 sr-mgc . [when “3” is selected: ] no: area name (gmt) 1: dateline standard time(gmt-12:00) 2: samoa standard time(gmt-12:00) 3: dateline standard time(dst)(gmt-11:00) 4: hawaiian standard time(gmt-10:00) 5: samoa standard time(dst)(gmt-10:00) 6: alaskan standard time(gmt-09:00) 7: hawaiia...

  • Page 2451

    Vol.2-2198 sr-mgc when entry of all the list items is finished, they will be displayed as a list. Confirm the new data before the final registration. [when “y” is entered and new data registration is complete:] [when “q” is entered to stop operation:] note 1: when domain name server (dns) does not e...

  • Page 2452

    Vol.2-2199 sr-mgc note 3: this value must be the same as that of sr t in sr–mgc. This data will be used later in the data as- signment process, so please keep a record of the assigned number. Pcpro: “mph–id” in the alidl command. Note 4: sr s calculates the appropriate gmt time based on the time zon...

  • Page 2453

    Vol.2-2200 sr-mgc • “sr–mgc no. Individual” radio button: click to specify the target sr–mgc number to copy office data. Sr–mgc number: click to specify the sr–mgc number (0–255) to copy office data. The clicked number will be displayed in “yellow.” re–click the number to cancel the office data copy...

  • Page 2454

    Vol.2-2201 sr-mgc • “individual” radio button: initialize by entering the sr–mgc number of the target sr–mgc (0–255). (2) reset sr–mgc (sr t and sr s): first, reset the sr t by turning the pwr switch off → on on the rear side. Then, reset sr s as follows. Step 1: use telnet to log on to sr s. Step 2...

  • Page 2455

    Vol.2-2202 sr-mgc 27.7 returning sr-mgc to status before version upgrade procedure this section explains about how to return sr-mgc upgraded once to status before that. Both of following procedures (for sr t and sr s) have to be done. 27.7.1 returning sr t to status before version upgrade procedure ...

  • Page 2456

    App-1 appendix a appendix a accommodation of option module 1. How to mount 1u-mpc on 19-inch rack here describes how to mount a 1u-mpc on a 19-inch rack. Note: make sure of the following for your safety: - perform the procedure by two or more people. - a fastening screw attached on the front side of...

  • Page 2457

    App-2 appendix a note 1: a 1u-mpc is shipped with the bracket-b attached on its front side. To add the optional brackets, first change the fixing position of the bracket-b as shown below: fixing bracket to mount on open rack 1. Slightly move up the bracket front 2. Fix the upper screw to this hole (...

  • Page 2458

    App-3 appendix a step 2: mount the 1u-mpc onto a 19-inch rack. Note 1: to add the optional brackets, fix screws (included in a 1u-mpc package) pushing into the holes. 2. How to insert additional power unit (dual power unit, optional) a 1u-mpc is equipped with a power unit on the right slot of its ba...

  • Page 2459

    App-4 appendix a step 1: unfasten the left screw. Step 2: take off the blank plate. Step 3: insert an optional power unit. Rear pact phillips screw driver pact pact pact.

  • Page 2460

    App-5 appendix a step 4: fasten screws on both sides to fix the power unit; plug an ac power cable into an ac power inlet and fix the cable with the supplied ac power cable stopper. Note: after you connect the ac power cable (both sides of the ac power inlet and outlet), turn on the power switch on ...

  • Page 2461

    Appendix b app-6 appendix b mg-sip config_template data by executing configuration command “set config_template”, the standard data of mg-sip can be assigned. The following list shows the values set by “set config_template” command. 1.“config_template” data for mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgg] 2.“config_tem...

  • Page 2462

    Appendix b app-7 cdn_pattern to [userinfo] request-uri [userinfo] to [userinfo] to [userinfo] to [userinfo] to [userinfo] to [userinfo] to [userinfo] check_number disable disable disable disable disable disable disable disable codec_change disable enable disable disable disable disable disable disab...

  • Page 2463

    Appendix b app-8 drs_qos drs qos 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 precedence 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 delay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 throughput 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reliability 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cost 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dtmf_mode negotiation (sip/sdp) negotiation (sip/sdp) negotiation (sip/sdp) out-band (rfc2833) out-ban...

  • Page 2464

    Appendix b app-9 multi_regist disable disable disable disable disable disable disable disable transmitting interval timer standby timer value contact header type musictype type1 type1 type1 type1 type1 type1 type1 type1 no_media_code 488 415 488 488 488 488 488 488 out_of_area_code 408 408 408 408 4...

  • Page 2465

    Appendix b app-10 self_sip_domain disable disable disable disable disable disable enable disable self sip domain string 0 session_timer enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable session-expires 180 sec 180 sec 180 sec 3600 sec 3600 sec 3600 sec 3600 sec 180 sec refresher uac uac uac ua...

  • Page 2466

    Appendix b app-11 sip_register sip register type - - - - - - - - sip register ip ad- dress - - - - - - - - sip register fqdn - - - - - - - - sip register port num- ber - - - - - - - - sip register expires time - - - - - - - - sip_route route type - - - - - - - - sip_rtp_port_no 50000 50000 50000 500...

  • Page 2467

    Appendix b app-12 note 1: this parameter can be assigned since sp-4051 mgsip prog-g issue 2. Slipresp 488 503 503 488 488 488 488 488 softdsp note 1 codec convert mode disable disable disable disable disable disable disable disable pad setting disable disable disable disable disable disable disable ...

  • Page 2468

    Appendix b app-13 2. “config_template” data for mg-sip128 [mg-128sipmgj] -: not changed by executing “set config_template” sub command parameter value 0 (default) 1 (template) 183rbt enable enable 184toprivacy disable disable another_keynumber another keynumber 1 0 0 another keynumber 2 0 0 another ...

  • Page 2469

    Appendix b app-14 drsaddress primary drs address - - primary drs port no - - secondary drs address - - secondary drs port no - - tertiary drs address - - tertiary drs port no - - quaternary drs address - - quaternary drs port no - - drs_qos drs qos 0xa0 0xa0 precedence 5 5 delay 0 0 throughput 0 0 r...

  • Page 2470

    Appendix b app-15 ipaddress one-port only - - ether[1] ip address - - ether[1] subnet mask - - ether[2] ip address - - ether[2] subnet mask - - ipx_route route type - - ipx_rtp_port_no 51000 51000 keynumber - - mp_data - - mp_mode multipoint mode disable enable search number digits 7 server select p...

  • Page 2471

    Appendix b app-16 rtp_pathon disable enable rtp_qos rtp qos 0xa0 0xa0 precedence 5 5 delay 0 0 throughput 0 0 reliability 0 0 cost 0 0 sdp_style normal rfc4566 self_sip_domain disable disable self sip domain string session_timer enable enable session-expires 180 sec 180 sec refresher uac uac invite ...

  • Page 2472

    Appendix b app-17 note 2: this parameter can be assigned since sp-4032 mgsip prog-e issue 2. Sip_register sip register type ip address ip address sip register ip address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 sip register fqdn 0 0 sip register port number 5060 5060 sip register expires time - - sip_route route type - - si...

  • Page 2473

    Appendix b app-18 3. “config_template” data for mg-sip16 [sca-16sipmg (us)] -: not changed by executing “set config_template” sub command parameter value 0 (default) 1 2 drsaddress primary drs address - - - primary drs port no - - - secondary drs address - - - secondary drs port no - - - tertiary dr...

  • Page 2474

    Appendix b app-19 sip_qos sip qos 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 precedence 5 5 5 delay 0 0 0 throughput 0 0 0 reliability 0 0 0 cost 0 0 0 domain 0 0 0 dnsaddress 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 hc_alarm ipx and sip side enable ipx and sip side enable ipx and sip side enable hc_timer 240 240 240 musictype type1 type1 type...

  • Page 2475

    Appendix b app-20 sip_server sip server type - - - server ip address - - - server fqdn - - - server port number - - - strict or loose - - - rport (rfc3581) function - - - domain name - - - sip_register sip register type - - - register ip address - - - register fqdn - - - register port number - - - e...

  • Page 2476

    Appendix b app-21 self_sip_domain disable disable disable self sip domain string dtmf_mode negotiation (sip/sdp) negotiation (sip/sdp) negotiation (sip/sdp) dtmf duration 120 ms 120 ms 120ms dtmf pause 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms dtmf payload type 101 101 101 183rbt enable enable enable rtp_pathon disable ...

  • Page 2477

    Appendix b app-22 cc_convert disable disable disable check_number disable disable disable out_of_area_code 408 408 408 sdp_style normal rfc4566 rfc4566 g729 annexb=no disable enable enable call_id_relay disable disable disable sip_accfilter disable disable enable sip server ip address - sip_transpor...

  • Page 2478

    Revision sheet rev-1 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description - vol.2 revision sheet s7 :date july,2013 3,7,20,23,27,37,41,42,43,50,51, 58,63,67,68,69,82,98,109,110, 118,119,120,127,133,142,158, 167,168,177,196,197,198,199, .203,205,215,217,219,220,221, 227,232,234,235,244,249,295, 297,299,3...

  • Page 2479

    Revision sheet rev-2 1024,1028,1034,1036,1042, 1109,1128,1129,1136,1139,1146, 1150,1156,1158,1165,1231,1334, 1371,1485,1503,1566,1576, 1614,1615,1695,1697,1702, 1714,1715,1757,1762,1770, 1789,1790,1840,1844,1851, 1870,1871,2090,2091,2094, 2121,2122,2125 s6 :date july,2012 119,314,416,521,633,800,101...

  • Page 2480

    Revision sheet rev-3 s5 :date october,2011 202,297,399,502,614,729,733, 795,944,1020,1028,1142,1145, 1151,1154,1326,1328,1329,1331, 1335,1339,1342,1343,1349, 1350,1352,1353,1354,1355, 1356,1359,1360,1364,1366, 1367,1368,1375,1377,1386, 1387,1393,1396,1397,1398, 1399,1400,1401,1402,1404, 1405,1406,14...

  • Page 2481

    Nwa-041680-001 issue 12.0 july, 2013 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description volume 3 page vol.3-i chapter 1 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. Dtermip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 2482

    Vol.3-ii table of contents (continued) page 5.7 connecting ac-dc adapter (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5.8 caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 2483

    Vol.3-iii table of contents (continued) page 7.2.2 system outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 7.2.3 description of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 2484

    Vol.3-iv table of contents (continued) page 8.4.1 general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 8.4.2 precautions on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 2485

    Vol.3-v table of contents (continued) page 1.2 data assignment for system having dhcp server - type 2 [drs address not assigned] . . . . . 407 1.2.1 setting for redundancy configuration system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 1.3 dtermip/ip enabled dterm data ass...

  • Page 2486

    Vol.3-vi table of contents (continued) page 4.2.4 sip server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 4.2.5 area id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 2487

    Vol.3-vii table of contents (continued) page 6.2.18 hold music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 6.2.19 language on time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 2488

    Vol.3-1 chapter 1 terminals chapter 1 terminals 1. Dtermip 1.1 general the way to connect ip stations such as dtermip and dtermip inaset to a lan is described here. Follow the procedure below. Each terminal is equipped with 2–port switching hub function. One port is used for connect- ing to the lan,...

  • Page 2489

    Vol.3-2 chapter 1 terminals 1.2 kind of ip station 1.2.1 dt700 series dt700 series has a lineup of terminals with 2 to 32 line/feature keys. Each line/ feature key can be used as a line key, dss key, spd key or feature key. Terminal with 3–line/4–line lcd displays various information on the lcd. • d...

  • Page 2490

    Vol.3-3 chapter 1 terminals on the lcd, the pages are represented as page icons. The icon’s various backgrounds display informa- tion regarding events happening on that particular page. For details, see the following table. A set of eight line/feature key information can be developed over four pages...

  • Page 2491

    Vol.3-4 chapter 1 terminals 1.2.2 dtermip (sip)/dtermip (proprietary protocol) dtermip has lineup of terminals with 4 to 32 line feature programmable keys. Each line feature programmable key can be used as a line key, dss key, spd key or feature key. Terminal with 3–line lcd displays various informa...

  • Page 2492

    Vol.3-5 chapter 1 terminals 1.2.3 dtermip inaset the high-end terminal of nec, dtermip inaset is equipped with large lcd and provides voice mail indication, online directories, and other expanded functions con- figured in addition to the features provided to dtermip. Note: dtermip inaset is equipped...

  • Page 2493

    Vol.3-6 chapter 1 terminals 1.3 precautions 1.3.1 precautions in accommodating sip terminals accommodating sip-compatible equipment ( note 1 ) into the existing network shared with ip pbx, the version of ip equipment accommodated in the system might cause a failure in connection with sip-com- patibl...

  • Page 2494

    Vol.3-7 chapter 1 terminals note 3: in fccs networking via ip or ccis networking via ip, use he or later. Note 4: upgrading the firmware to dtermsp30-fe (version 7.0.0.5 or later) enables the device to make a con- nection with sip-compatible equipment. Note 5: upgrading the firmware sp-3629 to sp-37...

  • Page 2495

    Vol.3-8 chapter 1 terminals 1.4 installation procedure installation procedure 1.4.1 basic installation procedure follow the procedure below to install the dtermip. Dtermip connecting diagram step 1: make sure that ac/dc adapter is not connected to the dtermip. (when powered hub (poe switch) is used,...

  • Page 2496

    Vol.3-9 chapter 1 terminals 1.4.2 wall mounting of dt700/dt300 series a wall mount unit (wm-l unit) is used to mount dt700/dt300 series (dt730/dt730g/dt710/dt330/ dt310) telephones on the wall. This unit connects to the back side of the telephone. Warning: be careful not to drop the telephone set wh...

  • Page 2497: Stopper

    Vol.3-10 chapter 1 terminals to mount the telephone set on the wall, use the following procedure. Step 1: mount the hanger of the handset upside down. Remove the hanger from the handset once. Turn it upside down and then insert the hanger until you hear it clicks. Step 2: turn the telephone set upsi...

  • Page 2498

    Vol.3-11 chapter 1 terminals [4] remove the indicated portions (a and b) of the stopper from grooves (a and b) on the tilt leg and then widen the tilt leg. Step 3: attach wm-l unit to the wall directly or the wall plate. • when attaching wm-l unit to the wall directly: secure wm-l unit with the six ...

  • Page 2499

    Vol.3-12 chapter 1 terminals • when attaching wm-l unit to the wall plate: attach wm-l unit to the posts on the wall plate as shown in the figure below. The remainder of the procedure varies between dt300 series and dt700 series. • in the case of dt300 series: go to the next step. • in the case of d...

  • Page 2500

    Vol.3-13 chapter 1 terminals step 5: insert the line cord plug (included with the telephone set) into the modular connector. Step 6: insert the line cord plug into the line connector on the back of the telephone until you hear it clicks. Wrap the excess cord and secure it with a tie wrap. Step 7: th...

  • Page 2501

    Vol.3-14 chapter 1 terminals step 8: insert the four tabs on wm-l unit in the tab slots on the back of the telephone. Tuck the excess cord into wm-l unit. Wall tabs tab slots.

  • Page 2502

    Vol.3-15 chapter 1 terminals 1.4.3 dt700 series cabling to connect dt700 series (dt730/dt730g/dt710) to the network device such as hub, poe switch through the lan cable, use the following procedure. Prepare lan cables (10base-t/100base-t/tx straight- through) for connecting the telephone to network ...

  • Page 2503

    Vol.3-16 chapter 1 terminals 1.5 connection diagram of dt700 series as power failure transfer terminal the following is connection diagram which enables dt700 series (dt730) to be used as a power failure transfer terminal.You need to confirm whether pb or dp is used for the analog line beforehand. N...

  • Page 2504

    Vol.3-17 chapter 1 terminals 1.6 16 ld lcd add-on module (16ld adm) *optional this section explains the installation, general features, service conditions and interactions of 16ld add- on module (described as 16ld adm hereinafter). 16ld adm can be used in two different modes. One is dss mode and the...

  • Page 2505

    Vol.3-18 chapter 1 terminals 1.6.1 equipment overview • specification of 16ld adm is listed below. • key order of 16ld adm is shown below. Key order of 16ld adm no. Item d16(ld)-r/ra(wh/bk)adm 1 dss key (key 1 - key 16) 16 2 function key (f1, f2 and f3) f2/f3: the button for contrast adjustment × 2 ...

  • Page 2506

    Vol.3-19 chapter 1 terminals 1.6.2 installation of 16ld adm installation procedure of 16ld adm is shown here. Connection with the dtermip with 16ld lcd is shown here as an example. Step 1: follow the procedure listed below. (1) set the dip switch (dsw1) on the interface of the add-on module to the r...

  • Page 2507

    Vol.3-20 chapter 1 terminals (2) turn the terminal over which will have the 16-button add-on module installed. (3) if only one adapter is to be installed on the phone, the module should be installed on the right-hand side of the phone(beneath the handset). If a second adapter is required at a later ...

  • Page 2508

    Vol.3-21 chapter 1 terminals step 3: plug in the 16ld adm module lines on the backside of 16ld adm module, and mount other side onto the terminal side. Plug into.

  • Page 2509

    Vol.3-22 chapter 1 terminals step 4: mount the tilt leg cover onto terminal as shown in the figure below. Step 5: wall mounting (1) on the terminals base, remove the cutout corresponding to the position that the 16adm adapter attachment unit will be installed on the under side of the terminal. 16ld ...

  • Page 2510

    Vol.3-23 chapter 1 terminals (2) turn the base cover upside down as illustrated and feed the line cord threw the terminal base cutout. Mount the both wall units using the 8 screws for proper support. (3) install the telephone and the 16-button add-on module over the four tabs on the base covers, pus...

  • Page 2511

    Vol.3-24 chapter 1 terminals 1.6.3 feature description of 16ld adm when used as dss mode this section explains the function of 16ld adm unit when it is used as dss mode. 16ld adm can operate as an option unit of dtermip. In dss mode, 16ld adm provides additional 16 feature programmable key with lcd ...

  • Page 2512

    Vol.3-25 chapter 1 terminals (1) firmware upgrade of supported terminal is necessary to operate this feature. Behavior when terminal is connected without the firmware upgrade is shown in the table below. Behavior of terminal before and after the firmware upgrade x = available with factory setting c ...

  • Page 2513

    Vol.3-26 chapter 1 terminals (12) activating sp-phd is required for this feature. (13) system lm and ip terminals supporting this feature will be needed to operate this feature. (14) elc circuit card and firmware listed below is required to operate this feature. • circuit card: pa-16elcj-b (sp-3833 ...

  • Page 2514

    Vol.3-27 chapter 1 terminals (2) pattern 2 (24 line keys + 8 dss keys) key number 1 to key number 8 of 16ld adm will be the line key 17 to line key 24 and key number 9 to key number 16 of the 16ld adm will be dss key 1 to dss key 8. (3) pattern 3 (32 line keys) key number 1 to key number 16 of 16ld ...

  • Page 2515

    Vol.3-28 chapter 1 terminals 1.6.4 feature description of 16ld adm when used as phone book mode 16ld adm can also operate as a phone book. Caller is available to originate a call just by pressing the pre-assigned key for the destination to be called. Phone book data will be assigned to the terminal ...

  • Page 2516

    Vol.3-29 chapter 1 terminals (1) phone book call origination feature is provided by the phone book mode of 16ld adm. (2) prime line will be seized when one touch call origination is operated. (3) when call origination has been attempted while the station is in pre-line selected state, or while the s...

  • Page 2517

    Vol.3-30 chapter 1 terminals step 4: select the desired name to which you would like to initiate a call. Note: the adm will default back to the dss screen when the adm unit is idle for 20 seconds (no operation from user). Note: the “dir/exit” key will default the adm back to the dss screen from any ...

  • Page 2518

    Vol.3-31 chapter 1 terminals 2. Ip enabled dterm 2.1 general ip enabled dterm is a dterm that is equipped with ip interface adapter (option). Available dterm is dterm series i and dterm series e/dterm 75. By using ip interface adapter, dterm can be used as an ip terminal. The following hardware is u...

  • Page 2519

    Vol.3-32 chapter 1 terminals 2.3 how to install ip interface adapter this section explains how to install ip interface adapter. To install the adapter onto dterm series e/dterm 75, a flat-blade screw driver with approximately 4 mm width blade is required. How to install ip interface adapter (dterm s...

  • Page 2520

    Vol.3-33 chapter 1 terminals how to install ip interface adapter (dterm series e/dterm 75) note: when the ip enabled dterm is connected to “catalyst prw series of cisco/power patch panel of cisco,” leave the switch to the default (2). Otherwise set it to 1. (1) make sure that sw1 on the ip interface...

  • Page 2521

    Vol.3-34 chapter 1 terminals how to install ip interface adapter (dterm series i ) note: when the ip enabled dterm is connected to “catalyst prw series of cisco/power patch panel of cisco,” leave the switch to the default (2). Otherwise set it to 1. Caution: befrore starting the install, remove the ...

  • Page 2522

    Vol.3-35 chapter 1 terminals 3. Digital terminal 3.1 general three types of digital multifunction/multiline terminals are available. Features most commonly used in daily operation and functions required by the user are provided by the dedicated buttons/lamp. How to connect a dig- ital terminal is de...

  • Page 2523

    Vol.3-36 chapter 1 terminals 3.1.1 dt300 series (1) dt300 series refers to the following terminals. (2) the following shows service conditions specific to cordless terminal (dt330 (12bt)). • cordless terminal (dt330 (12bt)) is available when pa-16elcn-a (since sp-4034 16elcn-a prog- b issue1) is use...

  • Page 2524

    Vol.3-37 chapter 1 terminals • during the following status of the dt330 base unit, to avoid a conflict between the dt330 base unit and the bluetooth handset, “base unit in use” is displayed on the bluetooth handset. - displaying the menu - displaying the help - displaying the call history - displayi...

  • Page 2525

    Vol.3-38 chapter 1 terminals • when using the bluetooth handset, be sure to initialize the configuration data to the factory default setting. To initialize the configuration data, follow procedures below. Step 1: when the bluetooth handset is in a standby status, press “hold”, “trf”, “*”, and “#” in...

  • Page 2526

    Vol.3-39 chapter 1 terminals example of a microphone connection note: when you attach the microphone to the telephone, remove the sticker of the microphone and connect the sticker to the center of the speaker correctly. After that, connect the microphone plug to the cable jack. For the details, see ...

  • Page 2527

    Vol.3-40 chapter 1 terminals 3.2 installation procedure step 1: run the cables between each digital terminal and its modular block (jack), and between the modular blocks and the mdf. (protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.) step 2: install an elc circuit card into a proper slot of pir for con...

  • Page 2528

    Vol.3-41 chapter 1 terminals 3.3 cable connection diagram and maximum length power supply from the telephony server (without arrestor) note 1: for dt310, maximum distance of power supply is 1200m. Note 2: for dt330, maximum distance of power supply is 900m. Local power supply note: cordless terminal...

  • Page 2529

    Vol.3-42 chapter 1 terminals 3.4 connection diagram for digital terminal as power failure transfer terminal the following are connection diagrams which enable dt300 series (dt330)/dterm series i to be used as power failure transfer terminals.You need to confirm whether pb or dp is used for the analo...

  • Page 2530

    Vol.3-43 chapter 1 terminals connection diagram for power failure transfer terminal; dterm series i note: accommodation of connector leads is depending on lens of the circuit card. 1 3 2 4 power failure transfer terminal a00 （ digital ） b00 （ digital ） Ｒ（ analog ） Ｔ（ analog ） lt cable lt cable lt ca...

  • Page 2531

    Vol.3-44 chapter 1 terminals 4. Analog station 4.1 general how to connect an analog station is described here. Follow the procedure below to connect analog stations to the telephony server by using an lc circuit card. When using analog mc, refer to “analog mc” or “mc & mg with pft” in volume 2 in th...

  • Page 2532

    Vol.3-45 chapter 1 terminals 5. Desk console 5.1 general this section explains the installation of a desk console and the cable connection. Desk console has an ergo- nomic design and more functionality than the existing attendant console. The figure below shows the outer view of the console. Use the...

  • Page 2533

    Vol.3-46 chapter 1 terminals note: regardless of the power is supplied from the telephony server or supplied locally, ground connection is required. (1) when the power is supplied from the telephony server cable connection diagram (when the power is supplied from the telephony server) the maximum di...

  • Page 2534

    Vol.3-47 chapter 1 terminals calculating the distance between ati circuit card and modular rosette the distance m, in , is determined according to the direct-current resistance of the power supply cables (– 48v and gnd). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following formulae: m ...

  • Page 2535

    Vol.3-48 chapter 1 terminals (d) when using a local power supply: note 1 note 1: when using a local power supply, a desk console cannot be used in the event of a power failure. Cable connection diagram (when using a local power supply) the maximum distance between the ati circuit card and a desk con...

  • Page 2536

    Vol.3-49 chapter 1 terminals desk console cable connection diagram pwr #0 tsw/mux at i tsw/mux pwr #1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 lt5 the ati (pa-cs33) circuit card is the interface for connecting desk consoles. The ati circuit card must be mounted in slot 12...

  • Page 2537

    Vol.3-50 chapter 1 terminals cable connection diagram for a desk console modular block wire the cables to the modular block as shown below. Modular jack bottom view desk console page (8-core) line (6-core) rec (8-core) 6-core modular cable 6-core modular block idf/mdf viewed from direction to be ins...

  • Page 2538

    Vol.3-51 chapter 1 terminals 5.3 mounting headset (optional) the headset cable is connected to one of the modular jacks (hand h/s 0 or h/s 1) on the bottom of desk console. Headset (wideband supraplus nc polaris) modular plug pin1 head band ear pad quick disconnect pin1 tx ( - ) 2 rx 3 rx 4 tx ( + )...

  • Page 2539

    Vol.3-52 chapter 1 terminals headset (supra f53u-u03f) hand h/s0 h/s1 voice tube note: in daily use, use quick disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the headset. Slide closing clip quick disconnect pin1 tx 2 rx 3 rx 4 tx pin1 (+) (–) modular plug note slide ear pad slide head band capsule unit (m...

  • Page 2540

    Vol.3-53 chapter 1 terminals 5.4 mounting handset (optional) the handset cable is connected to the modular jack (hand h/s 0) on the bottom of a desk console. (a) when mounting at the left side of a desk console (standard) mounting a handset (left side of a desk console) (1/3) 1. Put the handset code...

  • Page 2541

    Vol.3-54 chapter 1 terminals mounting a handset (left side of a desk console) (2/3) 2. Connect the handset code to the hand h/s 0 connector as shown below (h/s 1 is not used for the handset). Bottom view of desk console h/s1 hand h/s 0 handset code top view bottom view.

  • Page 2542

    Vol.3-55 chapter 1 terminals mounting a handset (left side of a desk console) (3/3) 3. Mount the handset support to a desk console with three screws, as shown below. Handset support projection projection 3. Mount the handset support to a desk console with three screws, as shown below. Handset suppor...

  • Page 2543

    Vol.3-56 chapter 1 terminals (b) when mounting at the right side of a desk console mounting a handset (right side of a desk console) (1/3) screw (1) screw (1) screw (5) screw (5) screw (4) screw (4) screw (3) screw (3) screw (2) screw (2) handset metal plate metal plate handset when mounting at the ...

  • Page 2544

    Vol.3-57 chapter 1 terminals mounting a handset (right side of a desk console) (2/3) 3. Connect the handset code to the hand h/s0 connector as shown below (h/s1 is not used for the handset). Bottom view of desk console bottom view top view code hand h/s0 h/s1.

  • Page 2545

    Vol.3-58 chapter 1 terminals mounting a handset (right side of a desk console) (3/3) 4. Mount the handset support on a desk console with three screws, as shown below. Handset support projection projection.

  • Page 2546

    Vol.3-59 chapter 1 terminals 5.5 connecting recording/paging equipment the following items are required in order to use the recording/paging function: • recc/pgadp circuit card • recording/paging equipment • 8-core line cable • rosette an recc/pgadp (pa-m87) circuit card connects desk consoles and r...

  • Page 2547

    Vol.3-60 chapter 1 terminals (a) when using three desk consoles and one recording/paging equipment device: note 1 note 1: the sw 10, sw 12 and sw 13 switch settings on the recc/pgadp (pa-m87) circuit card are required. Refer to the circuit card description for the switch setting and the connector le...

  • Page 2548

    Vol.3-61 chapter 1 terminals (b) when using six desk consoles and one recording/paging equipment device: note 1 note 1: the sw 10, sw 12 and sw 13 switch settings on the recc/pgadp (pa-m87) circuit card are required. Refer to the circuit card description for the switch settings and the connector lea...

  • Page 2549

    Vol.3-62 chapter 1 terminals 5.6 8-core line cable (installation cable) 8-core line cable note 1: cut the cable to the proper length. Use the installation tools to attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core line cable. Note 2: be sure to check the polarity of pin numbers 7 (la) (+) and...

  • Page 2550

    Vol.3-63 chapter 1 terminals 5.7 connecting ac-dc adapter (optional) the ac-dc adapter is required when power supply from the system is not available. Ac-dc adapter connection the connector for the ac-dc adapter is on the rear side of a desk console. Ac-dc adapter ( ).

  • Page 2551

    Vol.3-64 chapter 1 terminals 5.8 caution when the lcd on desk console is in the following conditions, follow operations [1] through [3] in lcd re- covering procedure. • lcd keeps showing the state the power is on. Note 1 • lcd does not recover from showing garbled characters. Note 1: when the power ...

  • Page 2552

    Vol.3-65 chapter 1 terminals 6. Add-on console 6.1 general two types of dterm series digital multifunction/multiline terminals are available. Features most commonly used in daily operation and functions required by the user are provided by the dedicated buttons/lamp. How to connect a dterm is descri...

  • Page 2553

    Vol.3-66 chapter 1 terminals 6.3 mounting an add-on console (for the hotel system) an add-on console is used in the hotel system. 1. Cable connection diagram (a) cable connection diagram for an add-on console (when the power is supplied from the telephony server): add-on console cable connection dia...

  • Page 2554

    Vol.3-67 chapter 1 terminals (b) cable connection diagram for an add-on console (when using a local power supply): note 1 note 1: when using a local power supply, a desk console cannot be used in the event of a power failure. Add-on console cable connection diagram (when using a local power supply) ...

  • Page 2555

    Vol.3-68 chapter 1 terminals cable connection diagram for an add-on console modular block wire the cables to the modular block as shown below. Modular jack bottom view add-on console line (6-core) 6-core modular cable 6-core modular block idf/mdf viewed from direction to be inserted 1 2 3 4 5 6 tran...

  • Page 2556

    Vol.3-69 chapter 1 terminals 6.4 mounting an add-on console (a) when mounting at the right side of a desk console mounting an add-on console (right side of a desk console) (1/2) l 6 l 5 l 4 l 3 l 2 l 1 1 2 abc 3 def 6 mno 5 jkl 4 ghi 9 wxyz 8 tuv 7 pqrs # 0 cancel talk src answer dest release hold p...

  • Page 2557

    Vol.3-70 chapter 1 terminals mounting an add-on console (right side of a desk console) (2/2) mount the add-on console to a desk console with three screws, as shown below. Projection projection add-on console desk console.

  • Page 2558

    Vol.3-71 chapter 1 terminals (b) when mounting at the left side of a desk console mounting an add-on console (left side of a desk console) (1/2) l 6 l 5 l 4 l 3 l 2 l 1 1 9 # 0 cancel talk src answer dest release hold position position night night page rec start mute tf recall nans adm busy tie ldn ...

  • Page 2559

    Vol.3-72 chapter 1 terminals mounting an add-on console (left side of a desk console) (2/2) trksl svc sc ddc wus wur ddr rcr mwr sts dds rcs mws hws bv mr clr tg1 tg6 tg7 tg8 tg9 tg10 tg5 tg4 tg3 tg2 enter clear exit top view bottom view 2. Mount the add-on console to desk console with three screws,...

  • Page 2560

    Vol.3-73 chapter 1 terminals 6.5 connecting an ac-dc adapter to an add-on console (optional) the ac-dc adapter is required when the distant pbx power supply is not available. Ac-dc adapter connection for an add-on console the connector for the ac-dc adapter is on the rear side of add-on console. Con...

  • Page 2561

    Vol.3-74 chapter 1 terminals 7. Dss console 7.1 overview 7.1.1 purpose of this guide the purpose of this guide is to provide technicians with information associated with the direct station selection (dss) console. The figure below shows the outer view of dss console. Note: since fp85-106 s3, dss con...

  • Page 2562

    Vol.3-75 chapter 1 terminals 7.1.2 functional outline the dss console is used as a dss console (dss/blf) or an dss console (adm) depending on the following two factors: level number (even or odd) of the allocated lens for the dss console office data programming note: for office data programming, ref...

  • Page 2563

    Vol.3-76 chapter 1 terminals add-on module (adm) mode a dss console expands the line/feature access keys of a desktop terminal, in the adm mode. A max- imum of 60 keys (line keys including multi-line keys and feature keys) are available in addition to the existing line/feature access keys on each de...

  • Page 2564

    Vol.3-77 chapter 1 terminals 7.1.3 specifications the following tables show the specifications for dss consoles. Specifications for dss console • dt700 (available since fp85-106 s3)/dt300 series • dterm series i item specifications number of keys × 60 number of light emitting diodes (leds) × 60 (red...

  • Page 2565

    Vol.3-78 chapter 1 terminals • dterm75 / dterm series e note 1: here shows the allowable cable distances, and the cable type. Cable distance limitation • dt300 series * dau does not support the connection of dt300 series. • dterm series i / dterm75 / dterm series e item specifications number of keys...

  • Page 2566

    Vol.3-79 chapter 1 terminals cable distance definition telephony server mdf champ connector 25-pair installation cable rosette dss console rear view cable distance between telephony server and dss console station wire 0.4mm(26awg)/ 0.5mm(24awg) • as illustrated below, the allowable cable distance in...

  • Page 2567

    Vol.3-80 chapter 1 terminals 7.2 installation procedure 7.2.1 mounting the dss console to the dt700/dt300 series terminal this section describes mounting procedure of the dss console to the dt700/dt300 series terminal. Tools required basic tools required in addition to the above, the following tools...

  • Page 2568

    Vol.3-81 chapter 1 terminals step 4: put your finger in the indentation on the mounting side of the desktop terminal and pull down to re- move the side panel . Step 5: attach the provided bracket to the desktop terminal with provided three mounting screws as shown in the figure. Step 6: turn the des...

  • Page 2569

    Vol.3-82 chapter 1 terminals step 8: insert the line cable modular plug into the line connector on the back of the desktop terminal until you hear a click. Step 9: thread the cable through the groove on the back of the desktop terminal as shown in the figure. Step 10: level the desktop terminal and ...

  • Page 2570

    Vol.3-83 chapter 1 terminals [2] connecting the dss console to the dt700 series terminal step 1: perform steps 1 to 6 described in [1]connecting the dss console to the dt300 series terminal . Step 2: insert the provided telephone connection cable plug into the telephone cable connector on the back o...

  • Page 2571

    Vol.3-84 chapter 1 terminals step 5: pull the latch to open the expansion connector cover as shown the figure below. Step 6: plug the other end of the telephone connection cable into the console connector on the back of the desktop terminal (see the figure above). Step 7: coil the excess cable and p...

  • Page 2572

    Vol.3-85 chapter 1 terminals [3] adjusting the tilt leg the angle of the tilt leg can be adjusted in four levels. Step 1: turn the desktop terminal upside down. Step 2: pull the tilt leg toward you until you hear a click. Step 3: turn the desktop terminal right side up. Step 1: turn the desktop term...

  • Page 2573

    Vol.3-86 chapter 1 terminals [4] installing the side panel step 1: align the side panel on the left or right side of the desktop terminal/dss console. Step 2: push the side panel until you hear a click. Step 3: make sure it fits tightly and snugly into place. Side panel side panel.

  • Page 2574

    Vol.3-87 chapter 1 terminals 7.2.2 connecting diagram connecting diagram of dss console (dss/blf) when the dss console is used as a dss console (dss/blf), connect the cables as shown below. Connecting diagram of dss console (dss/blf) • connecting diagram pir elc lt connector mdf installation cable a...

  • Page 2575

    Vol.3-88 chapter 1 terminals connecting diagram of dss console (adm) when the dss console is used as a dss console (adm), connect the cables as shown below. Connecting diagram of dss console (adm) • connecting diagram pir elc lt connector mdf installation cable a0 a0 b0 b0 modular rosette dterm modu...

  • Page 2576

    Vol.3-89 chapter 1 terminals 7.2.3 cable lead accommodation the cable leads are shown in the figure below. This figure illustrates an example of cable lead accommodations. For more information on each card, refer to the related manual. Cable lead accommodation (example) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35...

  • Page 2577

    Vol.3-90 chapter 2 terminal-related devices chapter 2 terminal-related devices 1. Trunk answer from any station (tas) indicator 1.1 general tas indicator allows any station (except stations with incoming restrictions) to answer incoming calls when the system is in night mode. Incoming calls will act...

  • Page 2578

    Vol.3-91 chapter 2 terminal-related devices tas cable connection diagram pin no. 26 27 lead name pin no. 1 2 lead name 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 bn4800 bn4820 tas1b bn4810 tas0b bn4830 b2 b3 bn4801 bn4821 tas1a bn48...

  • Page 2579

    Vol.3-92 chapter 2 terminal-related devices • cable connection diagram provide the following connections at the mdf. Tas cable connection diagram mdf installation cable (1p) tas indicator tas indicator tas0a0 tas0b0 tas0a1 tas0b1 telephony server lt connector cable lt connector.

  • Page 2580

    Vol.3-93 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 2. Announcement machine 2.1 general this feature allows a user to hear a prearranged announcement when the user dials a predetermined access code. Announcement machine 2.2 installation procedure the following shows when using cot/tlt. When using dat circui...

  • Page 2581

    Vol.3-94 chapter 2 terminal-related devices announcement machine connection note: an antk circuit is available only on circuit 0 of the 16cot circuit card. If a starting wire is required, circuit 1 cannot be used for a cot. Configuration of 16cot lead antk when circuit 0 is used for a speech wires s...

  • Page 2582

    Vol.3-95 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 3. Paging equipment 3.1 general this feature provides both desk console and station users with dial access to paging equipment. A cot or tlt circuit card is used as an interface card (paging trunk). The user can seize the paging trunk by dialing the specia...

  • Page 2583

    Vol.3-96 chapter 2 terminal-related devices paging equipment connection note: a pgt circuit is available only on the circuit 0 of the 16cot circuit card. If a starting wire is required, circuit 1 cannot be used for a cot. Configuration of 16 cot lead antk when circuit 0 is used for a when circuit 0 ...

  • Page 2584

    Vol.3-97 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 4. Alarm indicating panel and external music-on-hold 4.1 general alarm indication panel can notify the maintenance personnel the occurrence of faults of the system by an audi- ble and visual indicator as shown below. The alarm information (mj/mn) is obtain...

  • Page 2585

    Vol.3-98 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 4.2 installation procedure for alarm indicating panel step 1: mount the alarm indicating panel by using ay plugs, curl plugs, board plugs, etc. Depending on the type of ema sub-a card, the number of alarm indication panels that can be con- nected changes. ...

  • Page 2586

    Vol.3-99 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cabling diagram for ema sub-a card terminal and connector locations the exalm connector appears on the rear side of telephony server. Note 3 : ema sub-a (cg-m00) does not have dsp connector. Mj mn nec gnd -48v exalm maximum 100 m (328.1 feet) mj mn bell in...

  • Page 2587

    Vol.3-100 chapter 2 terminal-related devices alarm indicating panel, music-on-hold connections when cg-m03 card is used (img) note: if your telephony server is ac power type, alarm indicating panel can be powered from the ac/dc power unit. In this case, connect the ac/dc power unit to mdf at g and -...

  • Page 2588

    Vol.3-101 chapter 2 terminal-related devices alarm indicating panel, music-on-hold connections when cg-m00 card is used (img) note: if your telephony server is ac power type, alarm indicating panel can be powered from the ac/dc power unit. In this case, connect the ac/dc power unit to mdf at g and -...

  • Page 2589

    Vol.3-102 chapter 2 terminal-related devices external music-on-hold (mmg) mdf plo#1 exclk0 (slot 14) exclk1 (slot 15) plo#0 fm0 e fm0 e d37ph exclk ca-a d37ph exclk ca-a d37ph exclk ca-a pin assignment installation cable ph-ck16-d pin no. Pin no. Lead name lead name 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 2 3 ...

  • Page 2590

    Vol.3-103 chapter 2 terminal-related devices external music-on-hold (umg) exclk 0 exclk 1 tswr 0 tswr 1 lmg 0 lmg 1 lmg 2 lmg 3 mdf d37 exclk ca-a to mdf to mdf to mdf 1 2 fm 0 26 27 diu 3b 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 diu 2b diu 1b diu 0b dcs b syn 1b syn 0b 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 28 34 13 diu 3a ...

  • Page 2591

    Vol.3-104 chapter 2 terminal-related devices d25 exalm ca-a cable a b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 fm_p fm_n e e mj1a mj1b mn1a mn1b sup1a sup1b bella bellb mj2a mj2b mn2a mn2b mj3a mj3b mn3a mn3b mj4a mj4b mn4a mn4b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1...

  • Page 2592

    Vol.3-105 chapter 2 terminal-related devices d15f exalm ca-a cable typ1 d15f exalm ca-a 1500mm (4.3 feet) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 fm0p fm0p fm0n fm0n mja mja mjb mjb mna mna mnb mnb b...

  • Page 2593

    Vol.3-106 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 5. Alarm display panel (dspp) 5.1 general alarm display panel (dspp) can notify the maintenance personnel of power state (pwr) and failure occurrence (mj/mn/sup) of the system by an audible and visual indicator as shown below. The alarm information (mj/ m...

  • Page 2594

    Vol.3-107 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 5.3 installation procedure (1) required equipment ema sub-a [cg-m03] card note: alarm display panel cannot be connected to cg-m00. (2) connecting route (3) conditions for mounting position • alarm display panel needs to be mounted on a 19-inch rack. (1u-s...

  • Page 2595

    Vol.3-108 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 6. External switch (external key box) 6.1 general external switch is used to change over day/night mode and other status of the system such as class of ser- vice by operating the external switch. Eight keys are provided on the external switch. As an inter...

  • Page 2596

    Vol.3-109 chapter 2 terminal-related devices external switch connections lt0 lt6 pir 0 provide cable connections at the mdf as shown below. #1 2 external switch no.0 #1 2 external switch no.1 rear view sv8500 baseu g(rpt1) 01 02 03 04 05 mdf pin assignment 1 pin assignment 2 pin no. 26 27 28 29 30 3...

  • Page 2597

    Vol.3-110 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7. Dru/dau 7.1 introduction 7.1.1 general this manual explains the functions, installation procedure, and maintenance of the digital remote unit (dru)/ distributed access unit (dau). Note: the following names are used in this manual: • digital remote unit...

  • Page 2598

    Vol.3-111 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2 general information 7.2.1 general this sub section explains the outline of the functions of a dru/dau, and the system components. 7.2.2 system outline purpose of the dru/dau the dru/dau is a system that extends and decentralizes the line circuits (lc/...

  • Page 2599

    Vol.3-112 chapter 2 terminal-related devices features of the dru/dau the dru/dau has the following features. • in the case of a conventional telephony server, the same number of cables and dterms/analog pb tels are needed (a one-to-one ratio) to connect to the system. However, by using the dru/dau, ...

  • Page 2600

    Vol.3-113 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2.3 description of system components this section explains the following system components of a dru/dau. • digital remote unit (dru)/distributed access unit (dau) • batteries • functions of circuit cards for the dru/dau dru (digital remote unit)/dau (di...

  • Page 2601

    Vol.3-114 chapter 2 terminal-related devices type of dru/dau the table below shows the required hardware between the telephony server and the dru/dau accord- ing to the kind of terminal. Type of dru/dau kind of terminal dru/dau side telephony server side north america australia asia, latin america, ...

  • Page 2602

    Vol.3-115 chapter 2 terminal-related devices how to install a dru/dau a dru/dau can be installed by one of the following methods. • mounting the dru/dau to the wall. • installing the dru/dau on the floor using a stand assem (optional). • installing multiple sets of dru/daus at one location using a19...

  • Page 2603

    Vol.3-116 chapter 2 terminal-related devices example installation of a dru/dau mounting on a 19-inch rack (optional) dru/dau dru/dau dru/dau dru/dau batt box unit (special) dru/dau dru/dau dru/dau 19-inch rack (iec spec.) batt box assem (standard) when installing 4 sets of dru/dau when installing 3 ...

  • Page 2604

    Vol.3-117 chapter 2 terminal-related devices replacement of a battery the battery used for dau needs a periodic replacement.The replacement cycle of the battery differs among the ambient temperature of where the battery is installed. The following is the replacement cycle for each ambient temperatur...

  • Page 2605

    Vol.3-118 chapter 2 terminal-related devices specifications of a dru/dau the following tables show the specifications of the dru/dau. Note: see the table on the previous page for the type of terminals connected to each dru/dau. Specifications of the dru/dau item specifications sn880 dre-a/sn880 dre-...

  • Page 2606

    Vol.3-119 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2.4 circuit cards in the dru/dau the dru/dau is equipped with a digital remote equipment (dre) card that provides an interface between the dru/dau and the telephony server, and between the dru/dau and dterms/analog pb tels. The figures on the next pages...

  • Page 2607

    Vol.3-120 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn880 dre-a dre card lamp indication reference table lamp name color state remarks link green signal link with the telephony server is established. Alm red such an alarm as a clock failure, frame loss, etc. Has oc- curred. Lb red loop-back test is in prog...

  • Page 2608

    Vol.3-121 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn880 dre-b cnp0 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30lcp-a champ0 champ1 pz-cc63-b sw62 cnp1 sw63 sw61 (imp) sw60 alm link lb.

  • Page 2609

    Vol.3-122 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn877 dre-b/sn904 drea-b sw63 cnp0 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30lcm-a/pz-30lcq-a champ0 champ1 pz-cc93-a / pz-cc63-b sw61 (imp) sw62 sw60 cnp1 rghz note 2 note 1 note 1 sw cn rc tr alm link lb note 1: for australia pz-cc93-a and pz-30lcm-a for the countries t...

  • Page 2610

    Vol.3-123 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn886 dre-a sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-23elck champ0 champ1 pz-cc94 sw73 sw74.

  • Page 2611

    Vol.3-124 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn885 dre-a sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn sw72 cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30elcl champ0 champ1 pz-cc79.

  • Page 2612

    Vol.3-125 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn887 dre-a sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30elcm champ0 champ1 pz-cc95 sw72 sw cn rc tr sw75.

  • Page 2613

    Vol.3-126 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn886 dre-b sw70 sw71 pwr lb alm link ivdcn batt0 batt1 led pz-23elcn champ0 champ1.

  • Page 2614

    Vol.3-127 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn885 dre-b sw70 sw71 sw72 pwr lb alm link ivdcn batt0 batt1 led pz-30elcp champ0 champ1.

  • Page 2615

    Vol.3-128 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn887 dre-b/sn905 dreb-b ivdcn pz-30elcr champ0 champ1 led batt1 batt0 pwr sw75 sw70 sw71 sw72 sw cn rc tr lb alm link.

  • Page 2616

    Vol.3-129 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn8061 dreh-a sw70 sw71 sw72 sw cn sw75 pwr lb alm link ivdcn batt0 batt1 led pz-30elcu champ0 champ1.

  • Page 2617

    Vol.3-130 chapter 2 terminal-related devices sn8063 drej-a/sn8064 drek-a batteries (optional) the dru/dau usually operates on ac operating power. An optional battery can be supplied to the dru/ dau so that the dru/dau can continue operations, even if the ac power supply to the dru/dau has stopped. T...

  • Page 2618

    Vol.3-131 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2.5 specifications of battery the table below shows the required specifications of the battery. Note: the battery should be able to connect to terminals of fasten terminal 187 series. Specifications of battery battery location q’ty feed duration require...

  • Page 2619

    Vol.3-132 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2.6 functions of circuit cards for the dru/dau required circuit cards in the telephony server for dru/dau for interface between the telephony server and the dru/dau, the following circuit cards are required. Required circuit cards in the telephony serve...

  • Page 2620

    Vol.3-133 chapter 2 terminal-related devices functions of circuit cards for the dru/dau this section explains the mounting location, front view, and lamp indications of the dli/dai cards. Symbol: dli/dai circuit card:pa-daia function: digital line interface/distributed access interface this circuit ...

  • Page 2621

    Vol.3-134 chapter 2 terminal-related devices front view • front view of pa-daia shows a front view of the pa-daia card. Front view of pa-daia lb ope n-ope link crc pcm frm mfrm rmt blue palm mb bl7 bl ~ bl4 bl3 ~ bl0 sw3 (r) (g) (r) (g) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r).

  • Page 2622

    Vol.3-135 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications • pa-daia lamp indication reference table shows the lamp indications. Pa-daia lamp indication reference table lamp name color state remarks lb red indicates that a loop-back test is in-progress. Ope green indicates that the circuit card i...

  • Page 2623

    Vol.3-136 chapter 2 terminal-related devices symbol:dli/dai circuit card:pa-daij-a function:digital line interface this circuit card provides the interface between the telephony server and the dru/dau (sn886 dre-a/ sn886 dre-b). Interface • communication speed: 1.544 mbps • line impedance: 100 Ω • t...

  • Page 2624

    Vol.3-137 chapter 2 terminal-related devices front view • front view of pa-daij-a shows a front view of the pa-daij-a card. Front view of pa-daij-a lb ope link crc pcm frm rmt blue palm sw00(mb) bl7 bl ~ bl4 bl3 ~ bl0 sw01 (r) (g) (g) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (g) (g) (g).

  • Page 2625

    Vol.3-138 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications • pa-daij-a lamp indication reference table shows the lamp indications. Pa-daij-a lamp indication reference table lamp name color state remarks ope green indicates that the circuit card is operating normally. Link green indicates that a s...

  • Page 2626

    Vol.3-139 chapter 2 terminal-related devices symbol:dli/dai circuit card:pa-daiu function:digital line interface this circuit card provides the interface between the telephony server and the following dru/dau. - north america sn8061 dreh-a - australia sn8063 drej-a - asia, latin america, middle east...

  • Page 2627

    Vol.3-140 chapter 2 terminal-related devices front view • front view of pa-daiu shows a front view of the pa-daiu card. Front view of pa-daiu mfrm lb ope link crc pcm frm ais rmt palm sw00(mb) bl03 ~ bl00 bl07 ~ bl04 bl11 ~ bl08 bl15 ~ bl12 sw02 (r) (g) (g) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (r) (g) (g) (g) (g...

  • Page 2628

    Vol.3-141 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications • pa-daiu lamp indication reference table shows the lamp indications. Pa-daiu lamp indication reference table lamp name color state remarks ope green indicates that the circuit card is operating normally. Off indicates that the circuit ca...

  • Page 2629

    Vol.3-142 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.2.7 data programming plan this section explains the relationship between each circuit on the dli/dai card and line equipment numbers (lens). Relationship between each circuit on the dli/dai card and lens relationship between each circuit on the dli/dai ...

  • Page 2630

    Vol.3-143 chapter 2 terminal-related devices a/da= analog port adapter or data adapter * voice only not apa/apr or data adapter. Example of b1 mode and b2 mode port and cable breakout 23 elc b1 mode single port mode 11 dlc & elc b2 mode dual port mode station no. Lens time slot no. Dru/dau champ con...

  • Page 2631

    Vol.3-144 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.3 installation procedure 7.3.1 general this section explains the procedure for the installation of the dru/dau, cable connections with the battery, switch settings on the circuit cards, cable connections between the telephony server and the dru/dau, and...

  • Page 2632

    Vol.3-145 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the figure below describes the 3m ® model 8012 portable field service kit. This kit is recommended as an ef- fective countermeasure against static electricity (available for purchase from nec). How to use the service kit note 1: a ground wire should be co...

  • Page 2633

    Vol.3-146 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.3.3 installation procedure the procedure to install the dru/dau is as follows. Start marking and drilling mounting of dru/dau check of the power cable of dru/ dau mounting of battery (optional) mounting of coax term (op- tional) setting switch position ...

  • Page 2634

    Vol.3-147 chapter 2 terminal-related devices marking and drilling when mounting the dru/dau to a wall marking for mounting the dru/dau to a wall start marking drilling end referring to the figure below, mark the dru/dau setting loca- tions. Referring to figures on the next page drill holes at the lo...

  • Page 2635

    Vol.3-148 chapter 2 terminal-related devices drilling for mounting the dru/dau to a concrete wall drilling for mounting the dru/dau to a wood wall 50mm(2 inches) 50mm(2 inches) (1) drill with a drill bit of 3 Φ ~ 5 Φ. (2) drill with a drill bit of 7 Φ. (3) inset an anchor (carl pc plug) into each dr...

  • Page 2636

    Vol.3-149 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when installing the dru/dau on the floor using stand assem (optional) marking for stand assem start marking drilling end referring to the figure below, mark the stand assem setting locations. Referring to the figure on the next page, drill holes at the lo...

  • Page 2637

    Vol.3-150 chapter 2 terminal-related devices drilling for setting stand assem 50mm(2 inches) 50mm(2 inches) (1) drill with a drill bit of 3 Φ ~ 5 Φ. (2) drill with a drill bit of 7 Φ. (3) inset an anchor (carl pc plug) into each drilled hole. Specifications of carl pc plug are as shown below. Part n...

  • Page 2638

    Vol.3-151 chapter 2 terminal-related devices fastening of stand assem stand assem set screw set screw.

  • Page 2639

    Vol.3-152 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting of dru/dau when mounting dru/dau on the wall removal of dru/dau cover start referring to the figure below, remove the cover off the dru/dau. Referring to the figure on the next page, hook up the dru/dau onto the wood screws inset on the wall. Fas...

  • Page 2640

    Vol.3-153 chapter 2 terminal-related devices installation of dru/dau wall mounting dru/dau wood screw wood screw.

  • Page 2641

    Vol.3-154 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when installing the dru/dau on the floor using stand assem (optional) installation of dru/dau floor installation by the stand assem start remove the cover of the dru/dau. Referring to the figure below, hook up the dru/dau onto the screws (pl-c. P. Ims × 4...

  • Page 2642

    Vol.3-155 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when mounting the dru/dau onto a 19-inch rack (optional) mount the dru/dau onto the 19-inch rack by referring to the following two figures. Note: the 19-inch rack should be provided by the installer. Installation of dru/dau when mounting four sets of dru/...

  • Page 2643

    Vol.3-156 chapter 2 terminal-related devices installation of dru/dau when mounting three sets of dru/daus onto a 19-inch rack 2100 mm (7'10" inches) 1958 mm (7'5" inches) dru/dau mounting m.T.G 19-inch rack (iec spec.) batt box unit (standard) batt box assem (standard) dru/dau note: the battery and ...

  • Page 2644

    Vol.3-157 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.4 verifying the power cable of the dru/dau (except sn885 dre-b and sn886 dre-b) referring to the figure below, make sure that a short piece of circuiting cable is connected across the 100v/ 200v terminals on the power supply in the dru/dau. If a short p...

  • Page 2645

    Vol.3-158 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting of battery (optional) when mounting battery within the dru/dau battery connection when mounting battery within the dru/dau start referring to the figure below, mount the battery to the dru/dau. Referring to the figure on the next page, connect th...

  • Page 2646

    Vol.3-159 chapter 2 terminal-related devices battery cable connection when mounting battery within the dru/dau batt0 batt1 battery cable dre card battery dru/dau.

  • Page 2647

    Vol.3-160 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.4.1 when mounting battery externally battery mounting start referring to the figure below, mount the battery onto the batt box assem. Referring to the figure on the next page, connect the battery cable. End battery batt box assem (-) (+) (+) (-).

  • Page 2648

    Vol.3-161 chapter 2 terminal-related devices battery cable connection when mounting the battery externally battery cable note 1 (-) (+) batt box assem note 2 (-) (+) batt1 batt0 dru/dau dre card note 1: in regard to the battery cables, use the following: • dru ex-battery lau stock #240542 • for wall...

  • Page 2649

    Vol.3-162 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting of coax term (optional) the procedure in this section is required for australia, asia, latin america, middle east, and russia. Type of coax term the table below describes the available coax term types and how they are distributed. 7.4.2 mounting ...

  • Page 2650

    Vol.3-163 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (a) face layout of coax term face layout of 1-port coax term (b) dai circuit card mounting conditions please refer to the circuit card description. To lt connector pz-m401-a/pz-m406-a rcv0 clk tns0 sw5 sw4 sw3 ra a b c sw2 poutb a b c sw5 tb a b c sw1 pou...

  • Page 2651

    Vol.3-164 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (c) mounting of the coax term mounting of the coax term lt connector b.W.B coax term coaxial cable.

  • Page 2652

    Vol.3-165 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting of dre card referring to the switch setting sheets of the dre card, make switch setting on the dre card in the dru/ dau. Note: when handling circuit cards, observe the following precautions: (1) protection against static electricity: when s...

  • Page 2653

    Vol.3-166 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting sheet of dre card in dru/dau for analog pb tel switch settings symbol circuit card sn880 dre-a dre pz-cc63/pz-30lcp attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw3 cnp0 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30lcp champ0 champ1 pz-cc6...

  • Page 2654

    Vol.3-167 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings symbol circuit card sn880 dre-b dre pz-cc63-b/pz-30lcp-a attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required cnp0 pwr batt1 batt0 led pz-30lcp-a champ0 champ1 pz-cc63-b sw62 cnp1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 note 1 on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 note...

  • Page 2655

    Vol.3-168 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2656

    Vol.3-169 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2657

    Vol.3-170 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “20”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2658

    Vol.3-171 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2659

    Vol.3-172 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for crc synchronization detection timer sequence. Sw0-2/sw60-2 when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is disabled: off (normal setting) when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is enabled : on note 3: switch sett...

  • Page 2660

    Vol.3-173 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw1-6/sw61-6 sw1-7/sw61-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back test : off on when setting the d...

  • Page 2661

    Vol.3-174 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings (when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “31.”) symbol circuit card sn877 dre-b sn904 drea-b dre pz-cc93-a/pz-30lcm-a pz-cc63-b/pz-30lcq-a attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw63 cnp0 pwr b...

  • Page 2662

    Vol.3-175 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2663

    Vol.3-176 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2664

    Vol.3-177 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “17”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2665

    Vol.3-178 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2666

    Vol.3-179 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for crc synchronization detection timer sequence sw60-2 when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is disabled: off (normal setting) when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is enabled : on note 3: switch setting for...

  • Page 2667

    Vol.3-180 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw61-6 sw61-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back test : off on when setting the dre to remote...

  • Page 2668

    Vol.3-181 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting sheet of dre card in dru/dau for dterm (23ch) switch settings symbol circuit card sn886 dre-a dre pz-cc94/pz-23elck attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr batt1 batt0 le...

  • Page 2669

    Vol.3-182 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings symbol circuit card sn886 dre-b dre pz-23elcn attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw70 sw71 pwr lb alm link ivdcn batt0 batt1 led pz-23elcn champ0 champ1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 note 5 on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 note 1 on sw7...

  • Page 2670

    Vol.3-183 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “0”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2671

    Vol.3-184 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2672

    Vol.3-185 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “23”. (standard setting) * this switch setting must agree with the...

  • Page 2673

    Vol.3-186 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting when specifying baud rate of data transmission. * sw70-1 64 kbps : on 48/56 kbps : off * this switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated pa-daij-a card. Note 3: switch setting for 12/24 multi-frame format. S...

  • Page 2674

    Vol.3-187 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 5: switch setting specifying the equalizer (the distance between the dru/dau and the pcm mux). Sw71-1 sw71-2 sw71-3 0 ~ 266 feet : on on on 266 ~ 534 feet : on on off 534 ~ 800 feet : on off on 800 ~ 1066 feet : on off off 1066 ~ 1310 feet : off on o...

  • Page 2675

    Vol.3-188 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 8: switch setting for loop-back test sw71-6 sw71-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back test : off on when setting the dre to remote ...

  • Page 2676

    Vol.3-189 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting sheet of dre card in dru/dau for dterm (30ch) switch settings symbol circuit card sn885 dre-a dre pz-cc79/pz-30elcl attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn sw72 cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr batt1 bat...

  • Page 2677

    Vol.3-190 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings symbol circuit card sn885 dre-b dre pz-30elcp attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw70 sw71 sw72 pwt lb alm link ivdcn batt0 batt1 led pz-30elcp champ0 champ1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 note 6 note 7 note 5 note 4 note 8...

  • Page 2678

    Vol.3-191 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2679

    Vol.3-192 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2680

    Vol.3-193 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “20”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2681

    Vol.3-194 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2682

    Vol.3-195 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for crc synchronization detection timer sequence sw70-2 when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is disabled: off (normal setting) when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is enabled : on note 3: switch setting for...

  • Page 2683

    Vol.3-196 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw71-6 sw71-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back check : off on when setting the dre to remot...

  • Page 2684

    Vol.3-197 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings (when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “31.”) symbol circuit card sn887 dre-a dre pz-cc95 and pz-30elcm attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required sw70 sw71 lb alm link ivdcn sw72 cn3 cn1 cn2 pwr...

  • Page 2685

    Vol.3-198 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings (when setting channel number of the signal data link to “31.”) symbol circuit card sn887 dre-b sn905 dreb-b dre pz-30elcr attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required ivdcn pz-30elcr champ0 champ1 led link alm lb sw cn...

  • Page 2686

    Vol.3-199 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2687

    Vol.3-200 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2688

    Vol.3-201 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “17”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2689

    Vol.3-202 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2690

    Vol.3-203 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for crc synchronization detection timer sequence. Sw70-2 when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is disabled: off (normal setting) when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is enabled : on note 3: switch setting fo...

  • Page 2691

    Vol.3-204 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw71-6 sw71-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back check : off on when setting the dre to remot...

  • Page 2692

    Vol.3-205 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting sheet of dre card in dru/dau for dterm series i (30ch) switch settings (when setting channel number of the signal data link to “31.”) symbol circuit card sn8061 dreh-a sn8063 drej-a sn8064 drek-a dre pz-30elcu attention contents static sens...

  • Page 2693

    Vol.3-206 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting the channel number of the signal data l...

  • Page 2694

    Vol.3-207 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “1...

  • Page 2695

    Vol.3-208 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “17”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2696

    Vol.3-209 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting the channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting the channel number of the signal data link to “...

  • Page 2697

    Vol.3-210 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for crc synchronization detection timer sequence. Sw70-2 when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is disabled: off (normal setting) when crc synchronization detection timer sequence is enabled : on note 3: switch setting fo...

  • Page 2698

    Vol.3-211 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw71-6 sw71-7 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dre to remote loop-back : on off when setting the dre to local loop-back test : off on when setting the dre to remote...

  • Page 2699

    Vol.3-212 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.5 setting of switch positions and mounting of dli/dai card note: when handling circuit cards, observe the following precautions: (1) protection against static electricity: when setting switches on circuit cards, use a portable field service grounding ki...

  • Page 2700

    Vol.3-213 chapter 2 terminal-related devices attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required start unpack the circuit cards clean the connector portion of the circuit cards verify the mounting positions of the circuit cards perform switch setting insert the cards into the module en...

  • Page 2701

    Vol.3-214 chapter 2 terminal-related devices circuit card mounting partial insertion attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required about 50 mm (2 inches) pir pir.

  • Page 2702

    Vol.3-215 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.5.1 dai/dli card switch setting refer to the circuit card description for setting switches on the following circuit cards. • pa-daia • pa-daij-a • pa-daiu.

  • Page 2703

    Vol.3-216 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable termination and cross connection from mdf to dru/dau and from dru/dau to dterm/ analog pb tel this section explains the following procedures. • cable termination and cross connection from mdf to dru/dau • cross connections for digital interface (whe...

  • Page 2704

    Vol.3-217 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cross connections for digital interface when remotely installing dru/dau by digital interface connecting route diagram for dli/dai ta mdf dli/dai dru/dau tb ta tb ra rb ra rb pouta poutb.

  • Page 2705

    Vol.3-218 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable termination and cross connection from dru/dau (2m ami) to dterm/analog pb tel connection of dterms/analog pb tels start cable running cable termination check terminal locations on the dru/dau side of the idf cross connection end while referring to t...

  • Page 2706

    Vol.3-219 chapter 2 terminal-related devices details of analog pb tel connection bx ax idf cable pair modular cable modular block (jack) l1 l2 analog pb tel a b modular jack champ connector lead.

  • Page 2707

    Vol.3-220 chapter 2 terminal-related devices details of dterm connection bx ax idf cable pair modular cable modular block (jack) h2 h1 g l2 e l1 bk y r g d term rb ra tb ta modular jack champ connector lead.

  • Page 2708

    Vol.3-221 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the figure below shows the pin accommodation of the champ connector equipped on the dru/dau systems below. • sn880 dre-a/sn880 dre-b/sn877 dre-b/sn904 drea-b • sn885 dre-a/sn887 dre-a • sn885 dre-b/sn887 dre-b/sn905 dreb-b • sn8061 dreh-a/sn8063 drej-a/sn...

  • Page 2709

    Vol.3-222 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable termination and cross connection from dru/dau (1.5m ami) to the dterm connection of dterms start running cable cable termination check terminal locations on the dru/dau side of the idf cross connection end while referring to the figure below, run ca...

  • Page 2710

    Vol.3-223 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the figure below shows the pin accommodation of the champ connector equipped on the dru/dau systems below. • sn886 dre-a • sn886 dre-b champ connector pin accommodation for dru/dau 23 channel type dru/dau champ0 champ1 dre card pin no. 26 27 28 29 30 31 3...

  • Page 2711

    Vol.3-224 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.6 cleaning and visual inspection start cleaning visual inspection end clean the inside of the dru/dau. Clean the area around the dru/dau, rectifier, and mdf/idf. Clean the location for the field office. Dispose of dust, trash, etc. Make sure that dli/da...

  • Page 2712

    Vol.3-225 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.7 installation test procedure 7.7.1 general this section explains the procedure to start-up the dru/dau, basic functional tests, and loop-back tests to be performed after the installation has been completed. Loop-back function test loop-back tests are p...

  • Page 2713

    Vol.3-226 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.7.2 remote loop-back test this test checks to see if the test signal sent out (using the control signal link) to the remote office can be received as it has been sent out, verifying that the line is working properly (the transmission line be- tween the ...

  • Page 2714

    Vol.3-227 chapter 2 terminal-related devices remote loop-back this test loops the signals arrived from the remote office directly back to the remote office so that the remote office can verify that the line is working properly (the transmission line between the dli/dai and the dru/dau) by remote loo...

  • Page 2715

    Vol.3-228 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.7.3 installation test procedure the installation test procedure of the dru/dau is shown below. Start start-up of the dru/dau test of lamp indications and system messages test of loop-back test execution re- quired/not required test of battery operation ...

  • Page 2716

    Vol.3-229 chapter 2 terminal-related devices start-up of dru/dau start set the mb switch of the dli/dai card up. Insert the dli/dai card into its mounting slot. Plug the ac cord of the dru/dau into the ac outlet. Turn on the operating power to the dru/dau. Set the mb switch of the dli/dai card down....

  • Page 2717

    Vol.3-230 chapter 2 terminal-related devices test of lamp indications and system messages attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required start check lamp indications on the dli/ dai card make sure that no alarm lamps (r) are lighting on the topu check system messages end make sure...

  • Page 2718

    Vol.3-231 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.8 loop-back test execution required/not required attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required start check lamp indications on the dli/ dai card a see if the lamp indications on the dli/dai card are as shown below. When the lamp indi...

  • Page 2719

    Vol.3-232 chapter 2 terminal-related devices test of battery operations when a power supply failure occurs at the dru/dau attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required test lamp indications on the dre card in the dru/dau end a make sure that the lamp indications of the dre card a...

  • Page 2720

    Vol.3-233 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.8.1 mounting of cover this section explains the method of mounting the cover of the dru/dau after the installation tests have been completed. Mounting of dru/dau cover start referring to the figure below, mount the cover of the dru/dau. When the battery...

  • Page 2721

    Vol.3-234 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting of batt box assem cover batt box assem.

  • Page 2722

    Vol.3-235 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9 maintenance procedure 7.9.1 general this section explains system messages pertaining to the dru/dau, the procedure of fault diagnosis by loop- back tests between the telephony server and the dru/dau, and the fault repair procedure. For other matters, ...

  • Page 2723

    Vol.3-236 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9.3 technical terms for explaining message detail data this section explains how to interpret message detail data in each system message. In the explanations, the following technical terms are used: • circuit card location information the sections and f...

  • Page 2724

    Vol.3-237 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9.4 circuit card location information the accommodated location information of each circuit card is given by a hexadecimal number. Relation between accommodated location information and mounting location mg u g 1 : xx00 00 mg: u: g: module group number ...

  • Page 2725

    Vol.3-238 chapter 2 terminal-related devices relation between hexadecimal data values and mg, u&g data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g 00 00 0 0 20 00 1 0 40 00 2 0 60 00 3 0 01 00 0 1 21 00 1 1 41 00 2 1 61 00 3 1 02 00 0 2 22 00 1 2 42 00 2 2 ...

  • Page 2726

    Vol.3-239 chapter 2 terminal-related devices relation between hexadecimal data values and mg, u&g (continued) data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g data value (xx) mg u g 80 01 0 0 a0 01 1 0 c0 01 2 0 e0 01 3 0 81 01 0 1 a1 01 1 1 c1 01 2 1 e1 01 3 1 82 01 0 2 a2 01 1 ...

  • Page 2727

    Vol.3-240 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9.5 how to proceed with diagnostic work from system message the diagnostic procedure to follow after receiving a system message is illustrated in the figure on the next page. Decide if the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following the ...

  • Page 2728

    Vol.3-241 chapter 2 terminal-related devices example of diagnostic work items and symbols start end (when) fault : section no. (1) (2) (3) section no. (3) (6) (perform) (4) (when) fault supervision (5) (when) fault : is faulty. (2) is faulty. Note: (1): judgement of faulty status (2): when the fault...

  • Page 2729

    Vol.3-242 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9.6 system messages 13-n: digital line warning (1) meaning the system message “13-n” indicates that a fault such as a frame loss, multi-frame loss, signal link down detected, etc. Has occurred during data transfer from the telephony server to the dru/da...

  • Page 2730

    Vol.3-243 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (4) message detail data 1: xx xx kind of fault 01: frame loss pcm down (minor) 02: bit error more than 10 -6 03: slip detected (minor) 05: signal link down detected 06: multi-frame loss (minor) 11: frame loss pcm down (major) 12: bit error 10 -4 13: slip ...

  • Page 2731

    Vol.3-244 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (5) diagnostic from system message start on the dli/dai card indicated as faulty, flip its mb switch to down → up → down. After system message “13-n”/“13-o” digital line failure has been indicated, “13-p” is being indicated. The message detail data of sys...

  • Page 2732

    Vol.3-245 chapter 2 terminal-related devices “13-o”: digital line failure (1) meaning the system message “13-o” indicates that a fault such as a frame loss, multi-frame loss, etc. Has occurred more than 16 times in a one-hour period consecutively during data transfer from the telephony server to the...

  • Page 2733

    Vol.3-246 chapter 2 terminal-related devices “13-p”: digital line restore (1) meaning the system message “13-p” indicates that the faults pertaining to digital line restores to normal. (2) related system messages this system message is displayed when a fault indicated by system message “13-n” or “13...

  • Page 2734

    Vol.3-247 chapter 2 terminal-related devices “13-q”: dru/dau battery operation (1) meaning the system message “13-q” means that the ac power supply to the dru/dau has stopped and thus the dru/dau is operating on the battery power. (2) related system messages if the ac power supply has been restored ...

  • Page 2735

    Vol.3-248 chapter 2 terminal-related devices “13-r”: ac line operation (1) meaning the system message “13-r” means that the ac power supply to the dru/dau has been restored to normal. (2) related system messages if the ac power supply to the dru/dau stops and the dru/dau starts operating on the batt...

  • Page 2736

    Vol.3-249 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.9.7 fault diagnosis by loop-back test this section explains loop-back diagnosis by loop-back tests. Loop-back diagnosis by loop-back test are available in the following three methods. • loop-back diagnosis from dli/dai to dru/dau • loop-back diagnosis b...

  • Page 2737

    Vol.3-250 chapter 2 terminal-related devices procedure for loop-back diagnosis from dli/dai to dru/dau start pcm lamp (red) on the dli/dai card lights. Set the corresponding switch of the dli/dai card to up (on), referring to the table below. Switch setting for local loop-back check on the dli/dai c...

  • Page 2738

    Vol.3-251 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (b) pa-daij-a card • link (g): on, flashing, or off • crc (r): • pcm (r): • frm (r): • rmt (r): • blue (r): set the corresponding switch of the dli/dai card to up (on), referring to the table below. Switch setting for remote loop-back check remove the cov...

  • Page 2739

    Vol.3-252 chapter 2 terminal-related devices on the dli/dai card, various lamps are indicat- ing as follows. (a) pa-daia/pa-daiu • link (g): off • crc (r): on, flashing or off • pcm (r): • frm (r): • mfrm (r): off • rmt (r): • blue/ais (r): (b) pa-daij-a card • link (g): off • crc (r): on, flashing ...

  • Page 2740

    Vol.3-253 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.10 loop-back diagnosis between dli/dai and transmission equipment this section explains the procedure of loop-back diagnosis between the dli/dai and the transmission equipment when the dli/dai and the dru/dau are connected via the transmission equipment...

  • Page 2741

    Vol.3-254 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note: the mfrm lamp is not mounted on the pa-daij-a card. Set the corresponding switch of the dli/dai card up (on), referring to the table below. Switch setting for remote loop-back check set the transmission equipment to remote loop- back mode. On the dl...

  • Page 2742

    Vol.3-255 chapter 2 terminal-related devices set the corresponding switch of each dre card up (on), referring to the table below. Switch setting for remote loop-back check set the transmission equipment to remote loop- back mode. Lamps on the dre card are indicating as follows. • link (g): off (or m...

  • Page 2743

    Vol.3-256 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.10.2 loop-back diagnosis between dru/dau and transmission equipment this section explains the procedure of loop-back diagnosis between the dru/dau and the transmission equipment when the dli/dai and the dru/dau are connected via the transmission equipme...

  • Page 2744

    Vol.3-257 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 7.10.3 fault repair procedure this section explains the repair procedure of the following faults. • dli/dai fault • dru/dau fault • battery fault dli/dai fault start on the dli/dai card, set the mb switch up and remote the dli/dai card from its mounting s...

  • Page 2745

    Vol.3-258 chapter 2 terminal-related devices dru/dau fault start on the dli/dai card, set the mb switch up. Turn off the power supply to the dru/dau. Unplug the ac cord of the dru/dau from the ac outlet. Remove the cover of the dru/dau. Remove the cable connected with pwr, led, batt0 and batt1 conne...

  • Page 2746

    Vol.3-259 chapter 2 terminal-related devices battery fault (1) when the battery is mounted inside the dru/dau start on the dli/dai card, set the mb switch up. Turn off the power supply to the dru/dau. Remove the cover of the dru/dau. Remove the cable connected with batt0 and batt1 connectors of the ...

  • Page 2747

    Vol.3-260 chapter 2 terminal-related devices (2) when the battery is installed externally start on the dli/dai card, set the mb switch up. Turn off the power supply to the dru/dau. Remove the cover of the batt box assem. Remove the cable connected to the battery. Replace the battery with a spare and...

  • Page 2748

    Vol.3-261 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8. Distributed communication server (dcs) 8.1 general 8.1.1 outerview this section covers how to install and maintain the distributed communication server (dcs), an optional remote server system. The figure below shows the outer view of the dcs. 8.1.2 rel...

  • Page 2749

    Vol.3-262 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.2 general information on dcs 8.2.1 general this chapter describes the functional outline of the distributed communication server (dcs) system, required hardware, and precautions before the installation. 8.2.2 functional outline of the dcs purpose of the...

  • Page 2750

    Vol.3-263 chapter 2 terminal-related devices system configuration of the dcs 1. System configuration and circuit cards connection between the telephony server and dcs nec distributed communications server fusion networking nec distributed communications server fusion networking telephony server dap0...

  • Page 2751

    Vol.3-264 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 2. Dcs power circuit cards as an input power source, ac power supply can be used when the dcs accommodates ac/dc (pa-pw64) card. The figure below shows the pwr card configuration in each system. Dcs pwr card configuration pwr0 power receiving terminal pwr...

  • Page 2752

    Vol.3-265 chapter 2 terminal-related devices face layout of dcs 1. Dc power supply type the figure below shows the face layout of dcs with “dc” power supply. Face layout of dcs (dc power) roptmux dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 roptmux dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 term n...

  • Page 2753

    Vol.3-266 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 2. Ac power supply type the figure below shows the face layout of dcs with “ac” power supply. Face layout of dcs (ac power) roptmux dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 : ac pwr1 fan dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 : ac pwr1 fan roptmux dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 : ac pwr1 fa...

  • Page 2754

    Vol.3-267 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.2.3 description of system components this section shows the outline of dcs system such as the face layout, specifications, components and connect- ing diagram. 8.3 front view of dcs the figure below shows the front view of dcs systems. Front view of dcs...

  • Page 2755

    Vol.3-268 chapter 2 terminal-related devices specifications of the dcs the following is a listing of maximums for hardware and the related specifications. Note: dcs system must be taken safety measures to clear the following regulations; vcci class 1 (emi) fcc part15 class a (emi) uli1950 (safety st...

  • Page 2756

    Vol.3-269 chapter 2 terminal-related devices components of the dcs the following is a listing of the dcs components. Components of the dcs item components specified nr/ng quantity remarks dcs sn1551 dard-a nr-575229 1 dcs main body bz-m23 nr-575224 1 bwb gt-210j (dc only) e43-200515-026 1 noise filt...

  • Page 2757

    Vol.3-270 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connecting diagram of the dcs system connecting diagram of the system is as follows. Cable connection diagram (dc power for dard-0) nec distributed communications server fusion networking pa- pw55-b pa- pw54-b dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 roptmux optmux (not used)...

  • Page 2758

    Vol.3-271 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable connection diagram (dc power for dard-1) nec distributed communications server fusion networking pa- pw55-b pa- pw54-b dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) dcnt power receiving terminal (6p) -48v -48v com -48v g...

  • Page 2759

    Vol.3-272 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable connection diagram (ac power for dard-0) nec distributed communications server fusion networking pa- pw64 pa- pw55-b dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 roptmux optmux (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) dcnt dccon batalm ou...

  • Page 2760

    Vol.3-273 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable connection diagram (ac power for dard-1) nec distributed communications server fusion networking pa- pw64 pa- pw55-b dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 roptmux (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) (not used) dcnt dccon batal...

  • Page 2761

    Vol.3-274 chapter 2 terminal-related devices warnings when installing the dcs the following are the warnings when installing the dcs system. • don’t look into the light emitting point of the smf/mmf connectors. • make sure not to wind optical fiber cables to less than 3cm radius..

  • Page 2762

    Vol.3-275 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.4 installation 8.4.1 general this section explains the work procedures pertaining to the installation of the dcs, mounting of circuit cards, cable connections, and attachment of covers. 8.4.2 precautions on installation this manual provides “static caut...

  • Page 2763

    Vol.3-276 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the 3m model 8012 portable field service kit is recommended as an effective countermeasure against static elec- tricity. The kit is available from nec. How to use the service kit note 1: a ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated b...

  • Page 2764

    Vol.3-277 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.4.3 installation procedure the procedure to install the dcs is as follows. 1. Installation of telephony server 2. Setting of switch on optmux card 3. Mounting of optmux and dai cards 4. Connection of optical fiber cable step 1: installation procedure fo...

  • Page 2765

    Vol.3-278 chapter 2 terminal-related devices installation procedure for the telephony server side this section explains the installation procedure at the telephony server side related to dcs system. Refer to “installation manual” as to the procedure for installing the telephony server. Setting of th...

  • Page 2766

    Vol.3-279 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connection of optical fiber cable referring to the following three figures, connect the optical fiber cable (mmf: multi mode fi- ber/smf: single mode fiber) to rx/tx connectors on the front of optmux card. Connection of optical fiber cable to optmux atten...

  • Page 2767

    Vol.3-280 chapter 2 terminal-related devices optical fiber cable running lead optical fiber cable through the right side cable duct. Tie optical fiber cable to pir frame. Use pir cable window when it runs to the other img. Tie optical fiber cable to front bracket. Use baseu cable hole for optical fi...

  • Page 2768

    Vol.3-281 chapter 2 terminal-related devices optical fiber cable running in pir optmux note 2 note 2 note 2 note 1 cable duct note 3 front bracket code keep optical fiber cable tying material clearance tie mount tie bracket note 1: secure optical fiber cable at tie mount remaining enough room for ci...

  • Page 2769

    Vol.3-282 chapter 2 terminal-related devices installation procedure for the dcs this section explains the installation procedure of the dcs. Mounting of the dcs secure the 19-inch rack firmly as to each rack’s specification, then mount the dcs (sn1551 dard-a/bz- m23) on the rack. Mounting of the dcs...

  • Page 2770

    Vol.3-283 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when the dcs has two dards, connect the following cables. Note that “opt pwr ca-a” is used for ac power systems only. Connecting cables between dards attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required dard-0 dard-1 dcs alm ca-a opt pwr ca-a...

  • Page 2771

    Vol.3-284 chapter 2 terminal-related devices inserting of pwr and pwr cable connections this section explains the insertion of pwr cards and the power cable connections. Step 1: remove the circuit card stopper. Removing circuit card stopper step 2: mount the following circuit cards: mounting the pwr...

  • Page 2772

    Vol.3-285 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable connection for pwr cards connect the power cables as shown below. Power cable connections (dc power) power cable connections (ac power) attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required pwr31 pwr30 pwr20 pwr21 pwr11 pwr10 pwr00 pwr i...

  • Page 2773

    Vol.3-286 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the locations of connector on the bz-m23 are shown below. Set jp00-03 to “s (single)” on the bz-m23 card. Connector locations on bcs backplane (bz-m23) batalm note pwr31 pwr30 pwr20 pwr21 pwr11 pwr10 pwr00 pwr in pwr in pwr out pwr out 2m10 2m11 2m12 2m13...

  • Page 2774

    Vol.3-287 chapter 2 terminal-related devices inserting dap step 3: set the switch setting of dap. See 8.5circuit card in this manual. Step 4: insert the dap card in the slot. Step 5: fix the dap card by tightening the screws. Inserting dap cards attention contents static sensitive handling precautio...

  • Page 2775

    Vol.3-288 chapter 2 terminal-related devices cable connection for dap the figure below shows how to run the dap cables through the cable ducts. Cable connections and cable running of dap attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required pwr int lt1 lt0 30elc sn4045 dap-b int pwr lt t...

  • Page 2776

    Vol.3-289 chapter 2 terminal-related devices dap power cable connection diagram attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required pwr31 pwr21 pwr11 pwr in pwr out 2m10 2m11 2m12 2m13 2m00 2m01 2m02 2m03 -48v0 optpw -48v1 dccon pwra out-48 pwr01 dard-0 front view pa -c c 111 /1 1 2 bz...

  • Page 2777

    Vol.3-290 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connection of optical fiber cable to roptmux referring to the following two figures, connect the optical fiber cables to roptmux and lead the cable to optmux through the cutting of front. Connection of optical fiber cable to roptmux attention contents sta...

  • Page 2778

    Vol.3-291 chapter 2 terminal-related devices how to lead the optical fiber cable through the cutting (for dc power system) cutting optical fiber cable dc-source power cable out in -48v +80v com -48v com.

  • Page 2779

    Vol.3-292 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connection of power and ground cables the figure below shows the connection of power and ground cables. For the main ground cable, cv or iv cable max. 2.5 mm 2 (12awg) is to be used. Connection of power and ground cable (for dc power system) (baser) power...

  • Page 2780

    Vol.3-293 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connect the dc-source power cables and screw the fg cable on the terminal as shown is the figure below. Details on clamping the conductor is described in the figure on the next page. Cable connection to power receiving terminal (for dc power system) pwr0 ...

  • Page 2781

    Vol.3-294 chapter 2 terminal-related devices how to clamp dc-source power cable (1/2) a [1] [2] [3] take the procedure [1]~[3] continuously. Bending loosened too much twisted check the stripped length (l) l take the following procedures to clamp the cable to the terminal. (a) open the spring inserti...

  • Page 2782

    Vol.3-295 chapter 2 terminal-related devices how to clamp dc-source power cable (2/2) [1] [2] [3] ex. 1 wrap the driver with tape which length is the same as the stripped length of the conductor ex. 2 prepare the scale l l l note: the example of the way to check stripped length is as follows; [1] in...

  • Page 2783

    Vol.3-296 chapter 2 terminal-related devices attachment of rear cover attach the rear cover referring the figure below. Attachment of rear cover rear cover rear side screw air duct cutting for cables attach the rear cover fastening with the four screws..

  • Page 2784

    Vol.3-297 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5 circuit card this section explains the function of circuit cards, switch settings, lamp indications, and external connections. The table below provides a listing of the circuit cards used in pbx and the dcs system. Note: apply the anti-static kit as p...

  • Page 2785

    Vol.3-298 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.1 pa-cc109 (optmux (smf)), pa-cc110 (optmux (mmf)) general function pa-cc109/pa-cc110 circuit card, mounted in pbx, accommodates a maximum of eight “e1 lines”. The card performs mux/dmux to synchronous digital hierarchy (sdh) to connect the pbx and ro...

  • Page 2786

    Vol.3-299 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location/conditions pa-cc109/110 card is mounted in any universal slots. Mounting location of optmux card face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors the face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this card is shown below. Face layout o...

  • Page 2787

    Vol.3-300 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications the following is a listing of optmux lamp indications. Lamp name color state ope green in normal operation opt red optical line input alarm is detected. Off in normal operation sync red optical line receive frame loss alarm (lights in oof...

  • Page 2788

    Vol.3-301 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings the following is a listing of optmux switch settings. Switch name setting standard setting meaning mb up this circuit card is make-busy state. Down × make-busy cancel (operating). Switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw0...

  • Page 2789

    Vol.3-302 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw10 1 on master clock selection pa-cc111, pa-cc112 off × pa-cc109, pa-cc110 2 on × e1 line interface jitter attenuator (be sure to assign standard setting.) off 3 on off × 4 on × tmpr jitter attenua...

  • Page 2790

    Vol.3-303 chapter 2 terminal-related devices external interface the leads appear as follows on the lt connectors. Lt connector lead accommodation (optmux) (1/2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 2...

  • Page 2791

    Vol.3-304 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lt connector lead accommodation (optmux) (2/2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1...

  • Page 2792

    Vol.3-305 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connecting diagram (optmux) ta00 tb00 ra00 rb00 ta00 tb00 ra00 rb00 rx tx rx tx dai mdf smf or mmf ta01 tb01 ra01 rb01 ta01 tb01 ra01 rb01 dai ta02 tb02 ra02 rb02 ta02 tb02 ra02 rb02 dai optmux pa-cc109 or pa-cc110 roptmux pa-cc111 or pa-cc112 ta03 tb03 r...

  • Page 2793

    Vol.3-306 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.2 pa-daia (dai) general function this circuit card provides the feature to support the interface function between pbx and dcs when sn4046 dapm-a card (analog dap) is used in dcs system. Location of pa-daia (dai) card within the system interface: • com...

  • Page 2794

    Vol.3-307 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location • the figure below shows mounting location of dai card. Mounting location of dai card face layout the face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this card is shown below. Face layout of pa-daia pwr pwr mux0 mux1 01 00 02 03 04 05 ...

  • Page 2795

    Vol.3-308 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications the contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. Lamp name color state remarks lb red indicates that a loop-back test is in progress. Ope green indicates that the circuit card is operating normally. N-op...

  • Page 2796

    Vol.3-309 chapter 2 terminal-related devices pa-daia card switch setting sheet switch settings figure 2-1 switch settings of pa-daia attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required con2 3 2 1 lb ope n-ope link crc pcm frm rmt blue palm bl mb bl4~7 bl0~3 con1 sw0 sw2 sw1 sw3 mb down...

  • Page 2797

    Vol.3-310 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: switch setting when specifying channels of the signal data link. * when setting channel number of the signal data link to “1”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “2”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “3”. ...

  • Page 2798

    Vol.3-311 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting channel number of the signal data link to “9”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “10”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “11”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “12”. When setting...

  • Page 2799

    Vol.3-312 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting channel number of the signal data link to “18”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “19”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “20”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “21”. When settin...

  • Page 2800

    Vol.3-313 chapter 2 terminal-related devices when setting channel number of the signal data link to “24”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “25”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “26”. When setting channel number of the signal data link to “27”. When settin...

  • Page 2801

    Vol.3-314 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 2: switch setting for 30lc/30elc/15dlc mode. Sw1-5 for dru-30-a/dru-30-b (30lc mode) : on for dru-30-s3 30elc mode : on 15dlc mode : off note 3: switch setting for selection of stutter dt/mw lamp. Sw1-7 stutter dt and mw lamp : on mw lamp : off note ...

  • Page 2802

    Vol.3-315 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 5: switch setting for designating the case where simultaneous communications of voice and apa/apr (an- alog port adapter) are performed or the case where the data adapter is used. * sw3-3: for no. 0 ~ 3 circuit sw3-4: for no. 4 ~ 7 circuit sw3-5: for...

  • Page 2803

    Vol.3-316 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 6: switch setting for loop-back test. Sw3-1 sw3-2 when loop-back test is not performed : off off (normal setting) when setting the dai to local loop-back check : on off when setting the dai to remote loop-back : off on when setting the dai to remote ...

  • Page 2804

    Vol.3-317 chapter 2 terminal-related devices external interface the leads appear as follows on the lt connectors. Lt connector lead accommodation (pa-daia) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 e rb poutb tb 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2...

  • Page 2805

    Vol.3-318 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.3 pa-cc111 (roptmux (smf)), pa-cc112 (roptmux (mmf)) general function pa-cc111/pa-cc112 circuit card, mounted in dcs, accommodates a maximum of eight “e1 lines”. The card performs mux/dmux to synchronous digital hierarchy (sdh) to connect the roptmux ...

  • Page 2806

    Vol.3-319 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location/conditions mounting location of roptmux face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors the face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this card is shown below. Face layout of roptmux dap 1 dap 2 dap 3 dap 0 pwr 1 roptmux pwr 0 cab...

  • Page 2807

    Vol.3-320 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications lamp name color state ope green remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Opt red optical line input off in normal operation sync red optical line receive frame loss alarm (lights in oof or lof) off in normal operation c...

  • Page 2808

    Vol.3-321 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings switch name setting standard setting meaning mb up this circuit card is make-busy state. Down × make-busy cancel (operating). Switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw01 1 on make busy request off × make busy request-cance...

  • Page 2809

    Vol.3-322 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw10 1 on × master clock selection pa-cc111, pa-cc112 off pa-cc109, pa-cc110 2 on × e1 line interface jitter attenuator (be sure to assign standard setting.) off 3 on off × 4 on × tmpr jitter attenua...

  • Page 2810

    Vol.3-323 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.4 sn4046 dapm-a (analog dap) general function this circuit card provides an interface function between dcs and analog pb tel. Max 30 analog pb tels can be handled by a single dap card. Location of sn4046 dapm-a (dap) within the dcs system pbx dap0 dap...

  • Page 2811

    Vol.3-324 chapter 2 terminal-related devices the table below shows the specification of sn4046 dapm-a card. Mounting location mounting location of dap specification of sn4046 dapm-a item specifications dcs interface transmission code ami (hdb3) transmission speed 2.048 mbps number of voice channels ...

  • Page 2812

    Vol.3-325 chapter 2 terminal-related devices face layout face layout of sn4046 dapm-a lamp indications name color state reference link green on line signalling link is established. Alm red lights when alarm occurs. Pcm, frm, mfrm, rmt, blue, crc lb red lights when loop back is set. Sn4046 dapm-a pwr...

  • Page 2813

    Vol.3-326 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw60 1 on × fixed to on 2 on designate crc synchronization detection timer sequence off × not designate crc synchronization detection timer sequence 3 on designate crc4 check sequence...

  • Page 2814

    Vol.3-327 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: assign the same ts number which has been used for dai card. Note 2: ts0 and ts28 cannot be used. Time slot designation sw60 time slot number no.4 no.5 no.6 no.7 no.8 on off off on off ts9 off on off on off ts10 on on off on off ts11 off off on on ...

  • Page 2815

    Vol.3-328 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch name switch no. Setting standard setting meaning sw61 1 on × fixed to on 2 on × fixed to on 3 on × fixed to on 4 off × fixed to off 5 on e bit send control: crc4 check result automatic send off × e bit send control: fixed to 1 (no error) 6 on loop ...

  • Page 2816

    Vol.3-329 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connection between lt connector and analog pb tel details of analog pb tel connection idf cable pair modular cable modular block (jack) l1 l2 analog pb tel a b modular jack champ connector lead pin no. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43...

  • Page 2817

    Vol.3-330 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.5 sn4044 dapk-a (digital dap) general function this circuit card provides an interface function between dcs and dterm max. 30 dterms can be connected to a single dap card. Location of sn4044 dapk-a (dap) within the dcs system the table below shows the...

  • Page 2818

    Vol.3-331 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location mounting location of dap face layout face layout of sn4044 dapk-a power consumption 163.8+9.6 × n (n=the number of circuit) specification of sn4044 dapk-a item specifications dap 1 dap 2 dap 3 dap 0 pwr 1 pwr 0 roptmux cable duct cable d...

  • Page 2819

    Vol.3-332 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications switch settings name color state reference link0 green digital interface is established. Signalling link is established. Alm0 red dre is abnormal pcm, frm, mfrm, rmt, blue, crc lb0 red loop back mode switch name switch no. Setting standar...

  • Page 2820

    Vol.3-333 chapter 2 terminal-related devices time slot designation sw70 time slot number no.4 no.5 no.6 no.7 no.8 on off off off off ts1 off on off off off ts2 on on off off off ts3 off off on off off ts4 on off on off off ts5 off on on off off ts6 on on on off off ts7 off off off on off ts8 time sl...

  • Page 2821

    Vol.3-334 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: assign the same ts number which has been used for dai card. Note 2: ts0 and ts28 cannot be used. Off off off on on ts24 on off off on on ts25 off on off on on ts26 on on off on on ts27 off off on on on ts28 note 2 on off on on on ts29 off on on on...

  • Page 2822

    Vol.3-335 chapter 2 terminal-related devices off on local loop back on on remote loop back check switch name setting standard setting meaning sw72 down × fixed to down sw71 loop back mode designation no.6 no.7.

  • Page 2823

    Vol.3-336 chapter 2 terminal-related devices connection between lt connector and dterm details of dterm connection idf champ connector lead pin no. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 rb tb b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 b18 b19 b...

  • Page 2824

    Vol.3-337 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.6 pa-pw54-b (dpwr) general function the pa-pw54-b (dpwr) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the pim. The -48v input power source, which is converted to +5v, -5v, and +12v, is distributed to each circuit card in the ...

  • Page 2825

    Vol.3-338 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location mounting location of pa-pw54-b face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors the face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below. Face layout of pa-pw54-b (dpwr) card dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 ropt...

  • Page 2826

    Vol.3-339 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications the contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. Switch settings this circuit card has the following switches. Pa-pw54-b (dpwr) lamp indications reference lamp name color state +80v on green remains lit ...

  • Page 2827

    Vol.3-340 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch setting sheet switch name switch shape remarks –48 v reset mb down circuit card make busy cancel sw4 20 [hz] 90 [vrms] on 1 2.

  • Page 2828

    Vol.3-341 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.7 pa-pw55-b (pwr) general function the pa-pw55-b (pwr) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the pim. The -48v input power source, which is converted to +5v, -5v, and +12v, is distributed to each circuit card in the as...

  • Page 2829

    Vol.3-342 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location mounting location of pa-pw55-b dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 ropt p a-pw55-b mount this card to pwr0. Dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 ropt p a-pw55-b mount this card to pwr1. Cable duct cable duct cable duct cable duct front view front vie...

  • Page 2830

    Vol.3-343 chapter 2 terminal-related devices face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors the face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below. Face layout of pa-pw55-b -48v sw fuse fuse side view sw4 front view pa- pw55 -b pwr conn -48vin -48vout 2a 125v ac/dc +8...

  • Page 2831

    Vol.3-344 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications the contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. Pa-pw55-b (pwr) lamp indications reference lamp name color state +80v on green remains lit while +80 v input power is being supplied. –48 v on green remai...

  • Page 2832

    Vol.3-345 chapter 2 terminal-related devices switch settings this circuit card has the following switches. Switch setting sheet switch name switch no. Setting standard setting description –48v sw on × –48v input power is supplied. Off –48v input power is not supplied. Reset push hardware reset of th...

  • Page 2833

    Vol.3-346 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.5.8 pa-pw64 general function this circuit card converts ac input to dc for supplying operating power to the dcs system. Note that the card is used for “ac power systems” only. Block diagram of pa-pw64 pwr alm 3p connector psdn fuse alm fan alm ~ ~ ~ g l...

  • Page 2834

    Vol.3-347 chapter 2 terminal-related devices mounting location this card is mounted in the following slot shown below. Mounting location of pa-pw64 dap0 dap1 dap2 dap3 pwr0 pwr1 ropt p a-pw64 cable duct cable duct front view note: ac-dc (pa-pw64) is used for ac power system only. This card is mounte...

  • Page 2835

    Vol.3-348 chapter 2 terminal-related devices face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors the face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown below. Face layout of pa-pw64 ac/sw pa- pw64 on +80v alm -48v alm +80vout 1a 125v ac/dc -48vout 2a 125v ac/dc conn -48vout fan c...

  • Page 2836

    Vol.3-349 chapter 2 terminal-related devices lamp indications the following is a listing of ac/dc card lamp indications on a “circuit card state” basis. Switch settings the following a listing of ac/dc card switch settings. Switch setting sheet state lamp on -48v alm +80v alm pwr is off off – – norm...

  • Page 2837

    Vol.3-350 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.6 office data assignment this section explains how to assign office data of the telephony server and the dcs respectively. Step 1: assign station data for terminals (dterm and analog telephones) connected to the dcs by using the asdt command. Refer to t...

  • Page 2838

    Vol.3-351 chapter 2 terminal-related devices step 2: artd assign the following data for the optmux route. Cdn func data cdn func data cdn func data 1 osgs 0 25 r/l 0 49 trks 0 2 onsg 2 26 rvsd 0 50 dply 1 3 isgs 0 27 tl 0 51 acd 0 4 insg 2 28 ans 1 52 2w/4w 0 5 tf 3 29 telp 0 53 faat 0 6 tcl 4 30 pa...

  • Page 2839

    Vol.3-352 chapter 2 terminal-related devices step 3: atrk assign the optmux card by using the upper group number and lv0. See the example list- ed below. Optmux lens data (example) step 4: mbtk unbusy the assigned trunk data. Step 5: alrtn assign a logical route number for the optmux route as requir...

  • Page 2840

    Vol.3-353 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.7 system start-up after completion of the dcs installation, proceed with the following tasks explained in this section. • start-up of dcs system including the post installation test: • light level check at both roptmux and optmux sides: 8.7.1 start-up o...

  • Page 2841

    Vol.3-354 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.7.2 light level check using a fiber optic power meter, make sure that the light level at points [1] through [4] is within the range of “nor- mal light level” indicated by the table below. If it is not, perform the following repair procedure. Light level...

  • Page 2842

    Vol.3-355 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.8 maintenance procedure 8.8.1 system messages the following is a listing of dcs related system messages. For details of these system messages, refer to chapter3 system messages in operations and maintenance manual. System messages related to dcs 33-l op...

  • Page 2843

    Vol.3-356 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.8.2 fault diagnosis when the system message “33-l” is output, perform the procedure on the next page for fault diagnosis. Note that a light level measurement tool is required for this procedure. Light level check points dcs telephony server outbound inb...

  • Page 2844

    Vol.3-357 chapter 2 terminal-related devices note 1: normal light level is as follows . Distance between telephony server and dcs power level (send) power level (receive) mmf 2 km -20~-14 dbm -27~-14 dbm smf 15 km -15~-8 dbm -27~-8 dbm the lamp lights red on both cards. Start check the light level a...

  • Page 2845

    Vol.3-358 chapter 2 terminal-related devices 8.8.3 circuit card replacement procedure this section explains the procedure for replacing the roptmux (pa-cc111/112) card. Roptmux replacement procedure confirm the line 0 through line 3 lamps are off (not used). Start end set the mb key up (on) on the r...

  • Page 2846

    Vol.3-359 chapter 2 terminal-related devices dap replacement procedure note: for more information about each procedure, refer to the related part. Note 1: check the following switch settings of each dap. A.) sn4046 dapm-a (analog dap) • sw 60-61 • sw 62 • sw 63 b.) sn4044 dapk-a (digital dap) • sw 7...

  • Page 2847

    Vol.3-360 chapter 2 terminal-related devices fan replacement procedure to replace the fan, follow the procedure below. Note that the fan can be replaced while the dcs system is in operation. Fan replacement procedure attention contents static sensitive handling precautions required start end replace...

  • Page 2848

    Vol.3-361 chapter 3 network interface chapter 3 network interface 1. Analog c.O. Line 1.1 general here explains how to connect analog central office (c.O.) line. For this connection a central office trunk (cot) circuit card is required. When using mg (cot), refer to the part of the device you use in...

  • Page 2849

    Vol.3-362 chapter 3 network interface 2. Analog tie line 2.1 general here explains how to connect analog tie line. For this connection a tie line trunk (tlt) circuit card is required. Tlt circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among the following four types by key setting...

  • Page 2850

    Vol.3-363 chapter 3 network interface trunk cross connections for tie line (ld/did/2w e&m) telephony server a0 b0 a7 b7 a b a b network lt connector installation cable pa-8tltr ld/did 2w e&m telephony server a0 b0 a b lt connector installation cable pa-8tltr e0 e m0 m a3 b3 a b e3 e m3 m a4 b4 a b e...

  • Page 2851

    Vol.3-364 chapter 3 network interface trunk cross connections for tie line (4w e&m) 4w e&m telephony server a0(ta0) b0(tb0) ta tb lt connector installation cable pa-8tltr ra0 ra rb0 rb 4-wire carrier equipment 4-wire carrier equipment 4-wire carrier equipment 2400 odt cable odt connector e0 e m0 m a...

  • Page 2852

    Vol.3-365 chapter 3 network interface 3. Digital tie line 3.1 general here explains how to connect digital tie line. For this connection a digital trunk interface (dti) circuit card is required. If the telephony server is used as a clock-subordinate node, clock signal must be extracted from the digi...

  • Page 2853

    Vol.3-366 chapter 3 network interface plo pin assignments for receiving or distributing clock lt 10 lt 7 lt 6 lt 11 / pl 0 lt 3 lt 2 lbus 1 lbus 0 lt 5 lt 4 lt 1 lt 0 lt 8 lt 9 phase lock oscillator (plo) pir 0 • plo connector pin assignment when the clock is distributed from a digital interface, us...

  • Page 2854

    Vol.3-367 chapter 3 network interface cable connection diagram for accepting synchronization clocks from an external high-stability oscillator plo mdf pcm cable (ip) pcm cable (ip) dcsa0 dcsb0 lt connector cable dcsb1 dcsa1 tsw baseu maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24awg) external high-stability osc...

  • Page 2855

    Vol.3-368 chapter 3 network interface cable connection diagram for distributing clock from a digital interface plo maximum 100 meters (328 feet) mdf telephony server pcm carrier equipment/ dsu clk pcm cable (2p) lt connector tsw baseu to other node ra rb ta tb pouta poutb diu0a0 diu0b0 diu1a0 diu1b0...

  • Page 2856

    Vol.3-369 chapter 3 network interface 4. Ccis interface 4.1 general here explains how to install ccis interface circuit card and cable connections. For configuring ccis inter- face, one of the following configuration is available: (1) using common channel trunk (cct) (2) using digital trunk interfac...

  • Page 2857

    Vol.3-370 chapter 3 network interface 4.2 installation procedure follow the procedure below to install ccis interface. (1) digital ccis by using cct step 1: install a cct circuit card into a proper slot of pir for connecting digital ccis line. For more infor- mation about cct circuit card, refer to ...

  • Page 2858

    Vol.3-371 chapter 3 network interface digital ccis by dti and cch (3) analog ccis step 1: install a tlt circuit card into a proper slot of pir for connecting analog ccis line. For more infor- mation, refer to 2.Analog tie line step 2: install a cch circuit card into a proper slot of pir for exchangi...

  • Page 2859

    Vol.3-372 chapter 3 network interface analog ccis by cch via modem rd sg rd sg telephony server mdf er er rt rt st2 rs modem st2 rs sd sd 15 m (50 feet) cable limit available modem synchronous 2400, 4800, 9600 bps 4-wire full duplex cch installation cable.

  • Page 2860

    Vol.3-373 chapter 3 network interface 5. Isdn interface 5.1 general here explains how to install isdn interface circuit card and cable connections. For configuring isdn inter- face, one of the following configuration is available: (1) using prt (2) using digital trunk interface (dti) and common chan...

  • Page 2861

    Vol.3-374 chapter 3 network interface 5.2 installation procedure follow the procedure below to install isdn interface. (1) isdn interface by using prt step 1: install a prt circuit card into a proper slot of pir for connecting isdn line. For more information about prt circuit card, refer to the circ...

  • Page 2862

    Vol.3-375 chapter 3 network interface isdn by dti and cch dti ta tb ta tb telephony server mdf ra ra rb rb pouta poutb to plo dch pcm carrier equipment trk dch/ cch cn2 dti dch front view out in.

  • Page 2863

    Vol.3-376 chapter 3 network interface 6. Power failure transfer (pft) 6.1 general here describes how to install pft card and the related cross connections on the mdf. For this function, pa- m69-a circuit card is required. When using pft function of ip devices including mc & mg (cot) with pft, this c...

  • Page 2864

    Vol.3-377 chapter 3 network interface 6.2 installation procedure follow the procedure below to use pft features. Step 1: install a pft circuit card into a proper slot of pir for more information about pft circuit card, refer to the circuit card manual. Note 1 note 1: mount the cot circuit card and a...

  • Page 2865

    Vol.3-378 chapter 3 network interface pft cross connections (1/2) telephony server mdf pft lc cot ao00 bo00 a b a b a b a b ai00 bi00 ro00 to00 ri00 ti00 c.O. Line analog station front connector ncu0 ncu1.

  • Page 2866

    Vol.3-379 chapter 3 network interface pft cross connections (2/2) telephony server mdf pft elc cot ai00 ai01 ao00 ao01 a b a b a00 (digital) b00 (digital) r (analog) t (analog) a b bo00 bo01 to00 to01 ti00 ti01 c.O. Line desktop terminal with pft adapter front connector ncu0 ncu1.

  • Page 2867

    Vol.3-380 chapter 4 configuration setup chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dtermip/ip enabled dterm 2. Autoconfig feature of dtermip 3. Desk console 4. Dtermip(sip) 5. Online monitoring feature of dtermip(sip) 6. Dt700 series 7. Firmware auto update tool for dt700 series.

  • Page 2868

    Vol.3-381 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dtermip/ip enabled dterm the following shows the overall procedure for assigning the configuration data of dtermip and ip enabled dterms. Note that configuration setup falls into the following three categories depending on the system type. • type 1: system ...

  • Page 2869

    Vol.3-382 chapter 4 configuration setup preparation prepare the following to use dtermip/ip enabled dterm: • telephony server • sp-phd note 1 • dhcp server (required when dhcp is used) • ftp (tftp) server (required when downloading) to use dtermip/ip enabled dterm immediately after the data assignme...

  • Page 2870

    Vol.3-383 chapter 4 configuration setup user menu and administrator menu 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address 4. Ip address 5. Default gateway 6. Subnet mask 7. Dns 8. Ether port settings 9. System information up down cancel save 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address up d...

  • Page 2871

    Vol.3-384 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters on user menu and administrator menu the tables below show the description of each parameter on the user menu and administrator menu. Parameters on user menu parameter description default 1. Dhcp mode select whether to use dhcp or not. Enable 1. Disa...

  • Page 2872

    Vol.3-385 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Lan port settings setting lan port. - 1. Speed & duplex (lan) setting lan speed. Autonego 1. Autonego auto-negotiation 2. 100m full fixed to 100 mbps and full duplex mode. 3. 100m half fixed to 100 mbps and half duplex mode. 4. 10m full fixed to 10 mbps and...

  • Page 2873

    Vol.3-386 chapter 4 configuration setup 9. System information display the setting information of dtermip/ip enabled dterm. - drs address (primary) ip address of primary drs. Note 1 drs address (2nd) ip address of the second drs. Note 1 drs address (3rd) ip address of the third drs. Note 1 drs addres...

  • Page 2874

    Vol.3-387 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: about ip address of drs (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations” in introduction of installation manual. Autoconfig mode autoconfig mode is enabled or disabled. - configfile version displaying the version of the do...

  • Page 2875

    Vol.3-388 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters on administrator menu (page 1) parameter description default 1. Dtermip mode displaying or setting the dtermip/ip enabled dterm location infor- mation. Remote: dtermip/ip enabled dterm is remotely connected to drs via dial-up router, etc. Normal: dt...

  • Page 2876

    Vol.3-389 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Port setting the port number. Note 2 - 1. Drs mate port drs port used for receiving message from dtermip/ip enabled dterm. Note 2 3456 2. Drs self port dtermip/ip enabled dterm port for sending/receiving message to/ from drs. Note 2 3455 3. Protims self por...

  • Page 2877

    Vol.3-390 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: when changing this data manually, ask the maintenance personnel. Note 2: do not change the default port numbers except in cases of absolute necessity. When changing the default port numbers, ask the maintenance personnel for the port numbers. Note 3: t...

  • Page 2878

    Vol.3-391 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “ring volume loundness” is available for dterm series i only. If this function is enabled, the volume level of ringer tone is raised (two levels). 2. Music select setting music on hold default data 1. Download data downloaded music on hold 2. Default d...

  • Page 2879

    Vol.3-392 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters on administrator menu (page 2) (for dterm series e/dterm 75) parameter description default 1. Ping setting/sending echo request - 1. Echo request start sending echo request - 2. Destination address setting the destination address of echo request 0.0...

  • Page 2880

    Vol.3-393 chapter 4 configuration setup precautions before starting ip enabled dterm operation and the configuration data setting before starting dtermip/ip enabled dterm operation and the data setting, be sure to read the following precau- tions. A. Dtermip/ip enabled dterm setup b.Downloading (1) ...

  • Page 2881

    Vol.3-394 chapter 4 configuration setup c. Changing port number 1. "well-known port" (0-1023) cannot be used except for drs mate port. 2. Changeable port numbers are as follows: • drs mate port: 1-65535 (default is 3456) • drs self port: 1024-65535 (default is 3455) • protims self port: 1024-65535 (...

  • Page 2882

    Vol.3-395 chapter 4 configuration setup d. Pc / lan connection e. Installing ip interface adapter considerations should be given for the following for pc / lan connections. Connecting a pc: • dtermip/ip enabled dterm is equipped with 'switching hub' function, allowing the cascading connec- tion of a...

  • Page 2883

    Vol.3-396 chapter 4 configuration setup f. Config menu g. Others configuration menu is automatically closed when no key input is detected for more than five minutes. The terminal is automatically reset discarding the data change. This is performed for preventing unauthorized personnel from changing ...

  • Page 2884

    Vol.3-397 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.1 data assignment for system having dhcp server - type 1 [drs address already assigned] the following shows the procedure of dtermip/ip enabled dterm data assignment for a system having dhcp server [mgc (drs) address already assigned at the dhcp server]. The...

  • Page 2885

    Vol.3-398 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 4: select "7. Factory value" by pressing "7" key on the administrator menu. Step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. Step 6: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the...

  • Page 2886

    Vol.3-399 chapter 4 configuration setup b 1. Disable 2. Enable step 8: check to see that "2. Enable" is flashing, and press ok key. By pressing ok key, the display automatically returns to the user menu. Note: default value is "dhcp enable." 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs ad...

  • Page 2887

    Vol.3-400 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.1.1 setting for redundancy configuration system the following procedure explains how to use the previous ip address (obtained through the dhcp server) as an alternative when dtermip/ip enabled dterm failed to connect to the dhcp server. Step 1: turn on the d...

  • Page 2888

    Vol.3-401 chapter 4 configuration setup the following procedure explains how to use a fixed ip address as an alternative when ip enabled dterm failed to connect to the dhcp server. A step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to...

  • Page 2889

    Vol.3-402 chapter 4 configuration setup step 1: turn on the dtermip/ip enabled dterm. Step 2: while indicating "connecting..." or "drs(1st) connecting" on the display, press "hold" + "transfer" + "*" + "#" on the ip enabled dterm, and open the user menu. Wait for a while until the following message ...

  • Page 2890

    Vol.3-403 chapter 4 configuration setup a b step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the administrator menu. Factory value set? Cancel ok step 6: select "dhcp mode" by pressing "1" key on the user menu. Step 7: select "enab...

  • Page 2891

    Vol.3-404 chapter 4 configuration setup b c step 9: if "3. Enable (w/ spare ip)" is flashing, press ok key and return to the user menu. 2. Enable 3. Enable (w/ spare ip) cancel ok up down adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok step 10: select "2. Drs address primary" by pressing "2" key on the ...

  • Page 2892

    Vol.3-405 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Drs address 2nd 2. Drs address 3rd 3. Drs address 4th up down backup-drs menu list backup-drs selection menu 1. Drs address 2nd 2. Drs address 3rd up down exit adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok ip addresses of a maximum of three redundancy configu...

  • Page 2893

    Vol.3-406 chapter 4 configuration setup when the ip address is entered, press "ok" key to confirm your entry. By pressing "ok" key, the display returns to the user menu. "ok" key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored. To stop data entry, press "cancel" key when the ip address is e...

  • Page 2894

    Vol.3-407 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.2 data assignment for system having dhcp server - type 2 [drs address not assigned] the following shows the procedure of dtermip/ip enabled dterm data assignment for a system having dhcp server [drs address not assigned ( note 1 )]. Note 1: about ip address ...

  • Page 2895

    Vol.3-408 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 6: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. 6. Softreset 7. Factory value up down exit [administrator menu] step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the administrator me...

  • Page 2896

    Vol.3-409 chapter 4 configuration setup c b step 10: press ok key to return to the user menu. Adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok step 9: select "2. Drs address primary" and assign the ip address of the drs connected to the lan. Assign the ip address of the drs connected to the lan. 2. Drs a...

  • Page 2897

    Vol.3-410 chapter 4 configuration setup c d 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address up down cancel save 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address 4. Ip address 5. Default gateway 6. Subnet mask 7. Dns 8. Ether port settings 9. System information up down cancel save up down user ...

  • Page 2898

    Vol.3-411 chapter 4 configuration setup note: by pressing cancel key at this time, all assigned data is discarded returning to the previous setting. 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down cancel save [user menu] step 15: press save key to save the data change. After saving the data, the configu...

  • Page 2899

    Vol.3-412 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.2.1 setting for redundancy configuration system the following procedure explains how to use the previous ip address (obtained through the dhcp server) as an alternative when dtermip/ip enabled dterm failed to connect to the dhcp server. Step 1: turn on the d...

  • Page 2900

    Vol.3-413 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the administrator menu. Factory value set? Cancel ok step 6: select "dhcp mode" by pressing "1" key on the user menu. Step 7: select "enab...

  • Page 2901

    Vol.3-414 chapter 4 configuration setup c b adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok step 9: enter the ip address of the drs connected to the lan. When the ip address is entered, press "ok" key and return to the user menu. "ok" key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored. To stop...

  • Page 2902

    Vol.3-415 chapter 4 configuration setup c backup-drs selection menu 1. Drs address 2nd 2. Drs address 3rd up down exit step 13: after all the necessary ip addresses are set, press the exit key to return to the user menu. 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down cancel save [user menu] step 14: pr...

  • Page 2903

    Vol.3-416 chapter 4 configuration setup the following procedure explains how to use a fixed ip address as an alternative when dtermip/ip enabled dterm failed to connect to the dhcp server. Step 1: turn on the dtermip/ip enabled dterm. Step 2: while indicating "connecting..." or "drs(1st) connecting"...

  • Page 2904

    Vol.3-417 chapter 4 configuration setup a b step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the administrator menu.On factory value set? Cancel ok step 6: select "dhcp mode" by pressing "1" key on the user menu. Step 7: select "en...

  • Page 2905

    Vol.3-418 chapter 4 configuration setup b c step 9: if "3. Enable (w/ spare ip)" is flashing, press ok key and return to the user menu. 2. Enable 3. Enable (w/ spare ip) cancel ok up down adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok step 10: select "2. Drs address primary" by pressing "2" key on the ...

  • Page 2906

    Vol.3-419 chapter 4 configuration setup up down 1. Drs address 2nd 2. Drs address 3rd 3. Drs address 4th backup-drs menu list backup-drs selection menu 1. Drs address 2nd 2. Drs address 3rd up down exit adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok ip addresses of a maximum of three redundancy configu...

  • Page 2907

    Vol.3-420 chapter 4 configuration setup when the ip address is entered, press "ok" key to confirm your entry. By pressing "ok" key, the display returns to the user menu. "ok" key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored. To stop data entry, press "cancel" key when the ip address is e...

  • Page 2908

    Vol.3-421 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.3 dtermip/ip enabled dterm data assignment for system without dhcp server - type 3 the following shows the procedure of dtermip/ip enabled dterm data assignment for a system having no dhcp server. Caution: observe the following while performing this procedur...

  • Page 2909

    Vol.3-422 chapter 4 configuration setup a b step 7: select "dhcp mode" by pressing "1" key on the user menu. Step 6: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. 6. Softreset 7. Factory value up down exit [administrator menu] step 5: "factory value set?" is displayed. Press ok key. By pressing the ...

  • Page 2910

    Vol.3-423 chapter 4 configuration setup b c step 9: select "2. Drs address primary" and assign the ip address of the drs connected to the lan. Step 10: press ok key to confirm your entry. Assign the ip address of the drs connected to the lan. 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address adr? Xxx.Xxx...

  • Page 2911

    Vol.3-424 chapter 4 configuration setup c d 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary 3. Backup-drs address 4. Ip address 5. Default gateway 6. Subnet mask 7. Dns 8. Ethre port settings 9. System information up down cancel save up down user menu list 1. Drs add...

  • Page 2912

    Vol.3-425 chapter 4 configuration setup e d step 15: select "4. Ip address" by pressing "4" on the user menu. Step 16: enter the ip address of the terminal. Step 17: select "5. Default gateway" on the user menu by pressing "5" when a default gateway is used. Step 18: enter the ip address of the defa...

  • Page 2913

    Vol.3-426 chapter 4 configuration setup step 19: select "6. Subnet mask" on the user menu by pressing "6" when a subnet mask is used. Step 20: enter the subnet mask data when a subnet mask is used. Adr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx '*' for . Bk cancel ok user menu 6. Subnet mask 7. Dns up down cancel save e 1. D...

  • Page 2914

    Vol.3-427 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4 operations of ip enabled dterm a dtermip/ip enabled dterm operates in one of two modes: mac authentication mode when mac address and station number has already been registered to office data, the terminal can be used only by connecting to the lan (with its...

  • Page 2915

    Vol.3-428 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.1 how to login the procedure below explains how to log in to the system from an ip enabled dterm. Note: if the current data and time are not displayed and the following message is issued, the entered login code or password is not correct. After pressing ye...

  • Page 2916

    Vol.3-429 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.2 how to logout follow the procedure below to logout. Step 1: press the preassigned "logout" button on the terminal. Step 2: logout? Is displayed. Press the "logout" button again within 5 seconds. Logout button is assigned to a function key and/or a soft k...

  • Page 2917

    Vol.3-430 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.3 override when attempting login using the same station number, the following is displayed on the terminal. Dtermip/ip enabled dterms with duplicate station number cannot operate in a system. If the indication below appears, do one of the following. Step 2...

  • Page 2918

    Vol.3-431 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.4 password setting • new password assignment to assign a new password, follow the procedure below. Note that the password stored in system memory can be assigned from the dtermip/ip enabled dterm only. Note: when starting up login mode on ip terminal for t...

  • Page 2919

    Vol.3-432 chapter 4 configuration setup 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> repeat 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> set 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> spdt dt sst new password 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> lift the handset and dial "ip enabled d...

  • Page 2920

    Vol.3-433 chapter 4 configuration setup • password change to change an existing password, follow the procedure below. The password stored in system memory can be changed from the dtermip/ip enabled dterm only. 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> dt new password 10:31 am fri 30 mar 2001 mic dnd >>> ...

  • Page 2921

    Vol.3-434 chapter 4 configuration setup • password deletion passwords stored in system memory can be deleted from pcpro only. Use the rdpd (remove of dtermip pass- word) command. Select either, stn (tn and stn) or teln (ugn and teln) for specifying terminal on which the password to be removed..

  • Page 2922

    Vol.3-435 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.5 how to set lan port/pc port ip terminal can add vlan tag to the lan packet sent from the pc port, and send it to the lan port. Also, ip terminal can delete vlan tag of the lan packet sent from the lan port, and send it to the pc port. Step 1: open the us...

  • Page 2923

    Vol.3-436 chapter 4 configuration setup (a) 1. Speed & duplex (lan) the display changes follows when “1. Speed & duplex (lan)” is selected. Choose a desired lan speed by pressing each digit key, and then press ok key. 1. Autonego: auto-negotiation (default) 2. 100m full: fixed to 100 mbps and full d...

  • Page 2924

    Vol.3-437 chapter 4 configuration setup (d) 4. Vlan priority (lan) the display changes as follows when “4. Vlan priority (lan)” is selected. Set vlan priority in the range from 0 to 7 (the default value is 5.), and the press ok key. Note: pressing any key other than 0 to 7is invalid. To delete an en...

  • Page 2925

    Vol.3-438 chapter 4 configuration setup (a) 1. Speed & duplex (pc) the display changes as follows when “1. Speed & duplex (pc)” is selected. Choose a desired lan speed by pressing each digit key, and then press ok key. 1. Autonego: auto-negotiation (default) 2. 100m full: fixed to 100 mbps and full ...

  • Page 2926

    Vol.3-439 chapter 4 configuration setup (d) 4. Vlan priority (pc) the display changes as follows when “4. Vlan priority (pc)” is selected. Set vlan priority in the range from 0 to 7 (the default value is 5.), and the press ok key. Note: pressing any key other than 0 to 7is invalid. To delete an ente...

  • Page 2927

    Vol.3-440 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.6 how to change area id data by setting the area id data, audible tone such as dial tone or ring back tone and the ringing pattern to be used by dtermip/ip enabled dterm can be changed on an area (a country) basis. To set the area id data, follow the proce...

  • Page 2928

    Vol.3-441 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: the administrator menu is displayed again. Step 7: press the save key on the user menu to save the assigned data. 1. Dterm ip mode 2. Download address up down exit [administrator menu] step 5: after selecting the area (country) and pressing "#", the se...

  • Page 2929

    Vol.3-442 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.7 how to set tos data to set the tos (type of service) data, follow the procedure below. Note: tos values, except the one that is sent to drs, are set from pcpro (at the system side). Consequently, tos value setting from the terminal is not especially requ...

  • Page 2930

    Vol.3-443 chapter 4 configuration setup tos(hex) 0x 0 bk cancel ok tos(hex) 0x 02 bk cancel ok tos(hex) 0x 0a bk cancel ok tos(hex) 0x 0b bk cancel ok [press "0" key (+ "#" key)] [press "2" key] [press "2" key] [press "2" key] example: when entering "0b"... A b tos(hex) 0x _ bk cancel ok step 5: aft...

  • Page 2931

    Vol.3-444 chapter 4 configuration setup end b step 9: press the save key on the user menu to save the assigned data. 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel [user menu] when the data saving ends successfully, tos value data assignment is complete..

  • Page 2932

    Vol.3-445 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.8 how to register mac address onto the telephony server mac address can also be registered onto the telephony server from the terminal when initially connecting the terminal to the lan and turning on the power of the terminal. At this time, mac registratio...

  • Page 2933

    Vol.3-446 chapter 4 configuration setup unauthorized retry? No yes note: if the current data and time are not displayed and the following message is displayed, the entered station number is not correct. After pressing "yes" key on the following display, enter the correct station number again..

  • Page 2934

    Vol.3-447 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.9 how to download and set music on hold this section explains how to download and set music on hold to be heard by dtermip/ip enabled dterm user. 1.4.9.1 tftp(ftp) server ip address setting before starting download of music on hold, an ip address of the tf...

  • Page 2935

    Vol.3-448 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: enter the ip address of the tftp (ftp) server, and press ok key. Step 7: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. Step 8: press save key to save the assigned data. 1. Dtermip mode 2. Download address up down exit [administrator menu] [user menu] 1...

  • Page 2936

    Vol.3-449 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.9.2 downloading music on hold 1. Program 2. Config up down exit file: music. Mdt tftp cancel ftp 1. Program 2. Config 3. Input file name 4. Boot & program 5. Music download menu list up down step 2: open the administrator menu by pressing "hold"+"#"+"0" on...

  • Page 2937

    Vol.3-450 chapter 4 configuration setup file: music. Mdt tftp cancel ftp downloading... Downloading... Download complete exit downloading... Download complete exit step 5: press tftp key (the leftmost soft key) for tftp, or ftp key (the rightmost soft key) for ftp. Step 6: after a while, the display...

  • Page 2938

    Vol.3-451 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.9.3 setting music on hold note: the following procedure explains how to set music on hold to be heard by dterm user. 1. Ping 2. Music select up down 1. Download data 2. Default data cancel ok step 2: open the administrator menu by pressing "hold"+"#"+"0" o...

  • Page 2939

    Vol.3-452 chapter 4 configuration setup a 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel [user menu] step 5: when the above procedure is all completed, the administrator menu is displayed again. Return to the user menu by pressing exit key. 1. Dterm ip mode 2. Download address up down exit ...

  • Page 2940

    Vol.3-453 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.10 how to send ping packet to send packets from the ip enabled dterm by using the ping command, follow the procedure below. Note: when the ip addresses of the terminal and the destination is not set on the ip enabled dterm, ping packet cannot be sent. Step...

  • Page 2941

    Vol.3-454 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5: enter the destination ip address, and then press ok key. Step 6: ping menu will appear again. Select “3. Request count” by pressing “3” key. Step 7: select either “1. 4-times” or “2. Endless,” and then press ok key. Step 8: .Ping menu will appear again...

  • Page 2942

    Vol.3-455 chapter 4 configuration setup step 10: select “1. Echo request start” by pressing “1” on ping menu. The following display appears and the terminal starts to send ping. Step 11: when the sending of ping is completed or "stop" key is pressed, the sending report will be displayed as follows. ...

  • Page 2943

    Vol.3-456 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.11 how to set language for time display to set language for time display of dtermip/ip enabled dterm, follow the procedure below. The following languages are supported by each terminal: • ip enabled dterm (dterm series e/dterm 75): automatic (according to ...

  • Page 2944

    Vol.3-457 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4: select the desired language by pressing "*" and "0-9" keys. After entering the appropriate number, press the "#" key. Step 5: press ok key on the above menu and go back to the administrator menu. (example) when selecting "2. Spanish": 1. Enter "2", "02...

  • Page 2945

    Vol.3-458 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.4.12 how to switch dtmf/rtp alarm on and off to switch dtmf/rtp alarm on and off, follow the procedure below. I > step 1: open the user menu by pressing “hold” + “transfer” + “*” + “#” on the terminal while indicating time, an error message, or “dhcp connect...

  • Page 2946

    Vol.3-459 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. On: follow the setting on the terminal (on). 2. Off follow the setting on the terminal (off). Step 5: go back to the administrator menu (page 1) by pressing “0” key on the page 2. Then, go back to the user menu by pressing the exit key. On the user menu, pr...

  • Page 2947

    Vol.3-460 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4: the display changes as follows. Choose either “0. Automatic”, “1. On” or “2.Off” by pressing each digit key. Then press the ok key. 0. Automatic: follow the setting on the system. If no setting is made in the system, the default setting (dtmf=off/rtp a...

  • Page 2948

    Vol.3-461 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5 program download • preparation before downloading prepare the following before starting download: • dtermip/ip enabled dterm • equipment having ftp (tftp) server function such as a pc • device and cable for connecting dtermip/ip enabled dterm and ftp (tftp...

  • Page 2949

    Vol.3-462 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.1 confirmation of file to be downloaded before starting program download, confirm the file to be downloaded using the procedure shown below. Note: set the necessary data for operation of the ip enabled dterm such as “drs address,” “ip address of the termin...

  • Page 2950

    Vol.3-463 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4: change the file name according to the program to be downloaded. Step 5: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. End note: when the file name is not changed, the downloading cannot be completed normally. When upgrading telephony server system, the...

  • Page 2951

    Vol.3-464 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.2 tftp(ftp) server ip address setting the following shows the procedure for downloading on the config menu. Before downloading, install the tftp (ftp) server and the dtermip/ip enabled dterm on the same network . Step 1: set up the tftp (ftp) server. Step ...

  • Page 2952

    Vol.3-465 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: set the ip address of the ftp (tftp) server, and press ok key. Step 7: return to the user menu by pressing exit key. Step 8: press save key to save the assigned data. 1. Terminal id 2. Download address up down exit [administrator menu] [user menu] 1. D...

  • Page 2953

    Vol.3-466 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3 program downloading the download procedure varies depending on the program to be downloaded: • when upgrading ptop, refer to “program download 1: upgrading ptop”. • when changing the program from ptop to protims, refer to “program download 2: changing pr...

  • Page 2954

    Vol.3-467 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3.1 upgrading ptop (program download 1) 1. Program 2. Config up down cancel ok file: xxxxxxxxxxx. Hex tftp cancel ftp 1. Program 2. Config 3. Input file name 4. Boot & program 5. Music download menu list up down step 2: open the administrator menu by press...

  • Page 2955

    Vol.3-468 chapter 4 configuration setup file: xxxxxxxxxxx. Hex tftp cancel ftp downloading... Downloading... Download complete exit downloading... Download complete exit step 5: press tftp key (the leftmost soft key) for tftp, or ftp key (the rightmost soft key) for ftp. Step 6: after a while, the d...

  • Page 2956

    Vol.3-469 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel 1. Dtermip mode 2. Download address up down exit factory value set? Cancel ok drs(1st) connecting... Dhcp connecting... While indicating "dhcp connecting/drs(1st) connecting" on the display, open the user...

  • Page 2957

    Vol.3-470 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3.2 changing program from ptop to protims (program download 2) note: the following procedure is available only for ip enabled dterm (dterm series e/dterm 75). 1. Program 2. Config up down exit file: xxxxxxxxxxx. Hex tftp cancel ftp step 2: open the adminis...

  • Page 2958

    Vol.3-471 chapter 4 configuration setup file: xxxxxxxxxxx. Hex tftp cancel ftp downloading... Downloading... Download complete exit downloading... Download complete exit step 5: press tftp key (the leftmost soft key) for tftp, or ftp key (the rightmost soft key) for ftp. Step 6: after a while, the d...

  • Page 2959

    Vol.3-472 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel 1. Terminal id 2. Download address up down exit factory value set? Cancel set dhcp connecting... Drs(1st) connecting... By pressing the ok key, the display automatically returns to the administrator menu....

  • Page 2960

    Vol.3-473 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3.3 upgrading program from protims to ptop (program download 3) note: the following procedure is available only for ip enabled dterm (dterm series e/dterm 75). 1. Program (tftp) 2. Program (ftp) up down cancel set up down cancel set 1. Program (tftp) 2. Pr...

  • Page 2961

    Vol.3-474 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5: make sure the selected item "1. Program (tftp)" or "2. Program (ftp)" is flashing. Then press "set" key to start download. Step 6: after a while, the display will change as follows indicating the download is complete. Step 7: press exit key to reset th...

  • Page 2962

    Vol.3-475 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel 1. Dtermip mode 2. Download address up down exit factory value set? Cancel ok dhcp connecting... Drs(1st) connecting... While indicating "dhcp connecting.../drs(1st) connecting..." on the display, open th...

  • Page 2963

    Vol.3-476 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3.4 download failure download failure downloading... Program download failed exit perform the program download again following the instructions listed above. If the download ends in failure again, there is a possibility that the memory of the ip enabled dt...

  • Page 2964

    Vol.3-477 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.5.3.5 program download by specifying file name (additional information) program download can also be executed by specifying the file name (only the file name which can be recog- nized by the ip enabled dterm) to be downloaded. Follow the procedure shown belo...

  • Page 2965

    Vol.3-478 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 5: enter the file name to be downloaded by pressing "numeric keys", " " or "#" on the terminal. Step 6: after entering the file name, press tftp key (the leftmost soft key) for tftp, or ftp key (the rightmost soft key) for ftp. Keys enterable alphanumer...

  • Page 2966

    Vol.3-479 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dhcp mode 2. Drs address primary up down save cancel 1. Dtermip mode 2. Download address up down exit factory value set? Cancel ok drs(1st) connecting... Dhcp connecting... While indicating "dhcp connecting.../drs(1st) connecting..." on the display, open th...

  • Page 2967

    Vol.3-480 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.6 changing port number when the port number (default port number) already assigned to the ip enabled dterm cannot be used because of the proxy setting, etc., the default port number can be changed from the terminal according to the procedure below. 1. Dtermi...

  • Page 2968

    Vol.3-481 chapter 4 configuration setup port? Xxxxx bk cancel ok step 5: after selecting a port to be changed in the step 4, the display changes as follows. Enter the new port number and press ok key. Step 6: if more than one port number must be changed, repeat the step 4 and 5. Step 7: when the por...

  • Page 2969

    Vol.3-482 chapter 4 configuration setup 1.7 error messages the following messages may be displayed when an error occurs during ip enabled dterm setup. Error message of ip enabled dterm (1/4) error messages example action parameter is abnormal in spite of “dhcp disable,” the ip ad- dress of the termi...

  • Page 2970

    Vol.3-483 chapter 4 configuration setup error messages of ip enabled dterm (2/4) error messages meaning action ip enabled dterm double assignment “double assignment” was received from drs, after sending “initial setup request” from the ip enabled dterm. (from this indication, configuration display c...

  • Page 2971

    Vol.3-484 chapter 4 configuration setup error messages of ip enabled dterm (3/4) error messages meaning action licensed number of ip terminals is ex- ceeded. The system has reached its licensed registration limit. • please contact the system main- tenance personnel for further in- formation. Unrecog...

  • Page 2972

    Vol.3-485 chapter 4 configuration setup error messages of ip enabled dterm (4/4) error messages meaning action ip enabled dterm cannot contact with the telephony server ip enabled dterm cannot receive the ack message for call control data from the telephony server because of network congestion. • ch...

  • Page 2973

    Vol.3-486 chapter 4 configuration setup other messages on the ip enabled dterm lcd other messages meaning program downloading indicates the ip enabled dterm is downloading data according to directions from drs. Login mode of ip enabled dterm the ip enabled dterm is activated in login mode. Desired s...

  • Page 2974

    Vol.3-487 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Autoconfig feature of dtermip note: “drs (device registration server)” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as drs, where dtermip/ip enabled dterm is registered. 2.1 overview autoconfig feature is a method to automa...

  • Page 2975

    Vol.3-488 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.2 setting procedure [1] prepare the dhcp, ftp server and dtermip set up a dhcp and ftp server. Dtermip must be used with factory default settings. Even if the network segment where the dtermip exists is different with the segment of the dhcp or ftp servers, ...

  • Page 2976

    Vol.3-489 chapter 4 configuration setup step 2:on the “predetermined option and values” screen, click the add button. Step 3:type “ftp server address” in the name box and select “ip address” as the data type. Place a checkmark in the array checkbox. Enter 141 in the code box, and click the ok button...

  • Page 2977

    Vol.3-490 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:click the add button when returned to the “predetermined options and values” screen. Step 5:type “config file name” in the name box and select “string” as the data type. Enter “151” in the code box, and click the ok button. Step 6:the “predetermined opt...

  • Page 2978

    Vol.3-491 chapter 4 configuration setup step 7:to add option to each scope, highlight and right-click on the “scope options”, and select “configuration options”. Step 8:on the “scope options” screen, mark a checkmark in the checkbox next to “141 ftp server address”. Enter the address of ftp server i...

  • Page 2979

    Vol.3-492 chapter 4 configuration setup step 9:confirm that ftp server address is listed on the line of “141 ftp server address”. Then, highlight and right-click on the “scope option”, and select “configuration options” again. Step 10:on the “scope options” screen, mark a checkmark in the checkbox n...

  • Page 2980

    Vol.3-493 chapter 4 configuration setup step 11:go back to the dhcp screen, and confirm that the specified file name is listed on the line of “151 config file name”. Note: if another scope setting needs to be set, go back to the step 9 and make the option setting for another scope..

  • Page 2981

    Vol.3-494 chapter 4 configuration setup [4] power on the dtermip, and connect it to the network. Step 1:power on the dtermip, and connect it to the network. Wait for a while until the following message is displayed. Step 2:dtermip acquires the ftp server address and the config file name from the dhc...

  • Page 2982

    Vol.3-495 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5:the time is displayed. Note: when dtermip is registered in the login mode or mac address is not set, login screen appears before the display of step 4. Note: if the configuration data file cannot be downloaded properly in the step 2, the following messa...

  • Page 2983

    Vol.3-496 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.3 applied setting the procedure described in “section 2.2 setting procedure” is for basic operation of the autoconfig feature. Additional steps are required when the following conditions are met: • when vlan is used: • when the autoconfig feature is used onl...

  • Page 2984

    Vol.3-497 chapter 4 configuration setup • dtermip must be operational. When moving a dtermip which cannot access the dhcp or drs, it is necessary to initialize the dtermip to the factory default setting. (4) when the configuration data of dtermip is changed individually: when changing the configurat...

  • Page 2985

    Vol.3-498 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.4 enable/disable autoconfig mode from dtermip menu the following shows how to enable/disable autoconfig mode from the dtermip configuration menu. Step 1: open the user menu by pressing “hold” + “transfer” + “*” + “#” on the terminal while indicating time, an...

  • Page 2986

    Vol.3-499 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5: go back to the administrator menu (page 1) by pressing “0” key on the page 2. Then, go back to the user menu by pressing the exit key. On the user menu, press the save key to save the setting data. [administrator menu (page2)] [administrator menu (page...

  • Page 2987

    Vol.3-500 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Desk console 3.1 configuration menu 3.1.1 general use the configuration menu to assign the configuration data for a desk console. The menu has the following items: 1. Headset/handset 2. Headset type 3. Mute 4. Rec control 5. Page control 6. Sup connection n...

  • Page 2988

    Vol.3-501 chapter 4 configuration setup displaying the configuration menu the first page of the configuration menu appears on the lcd. The configuration menu has five or six pages. • 1st page • 2nd page note 1: do not change this data. • 3rd page • 4th page [config menu p1] ver x src: prev page 1: h...

  • Page 2989

    Vol.3-502 chapter 4 configuration setup • 5th page • 6th page (b) press the dest key to display the next menu page. Press the src key to display the previous menu page. (c) when pressing the release key, the configuration menu disappears and the desk console returns to normal operation. 3: receiver ...

  • Page 2990

    Vol.3-503 chapter 4 configuration setup 3.2 selecting a configuration item when the desired page of the configuration menu is reached, press a numeric key to select the individual con- figuration item. A menu for assigning configuration data is viewed. Assign the configuration data, referring to the...

  • Page 2991

    Vol.3-504 chapter 4 configuration setup 3.3 assigning configuration data this section explains how to assign data for each configuration item. When assigning configuration data, use the following shaded keys. Assigning configuration data 1. Headset/handset this item specifies an optional device conn...

  • Page 2992

    Vol.3-505 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: the default setting is “1: headset”. (b) press the src key. The display returns to the first page of the configuration menu. (c) to assign data to additional configuration items, refer to the selecting a configuration item section. When finished, proce...

  • Page 2993

    Vol.3-506 chapter 4 configuration setup if the mute key is pressed, when the mute function is set to on, the voice at the desk console side is not sent to the other party. (a) press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number. 1. Both the h/s0 mute function and the h/s1 mute functi...

  • Page 2994

    Vol.3-507 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Manual mode 2. Automatic mode src: return to the configuration menu note 1: default setting is “1: manual”. (b) press the src key. The display returns to the second page of the configuration menu. Note 1: do not change this data. (c) to assign data to addit...

  • Page 2995

    Vol.3-508 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: default setting is “1: manual”. (b) press the src key. The display returns to the second page of the configuration menu. Note 1: do not change this data. (c) to data to additional configuration items, refer to the selecting a configuration item section...

  • Page 2996

    Vol.3-509 chapter 4 configuration setup 7. Blf this item specifies the on/off setting of the busy lamp field (blf) function. If the blf function is used, then the required system data must be assigned. (a) press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number. 1. 10blf available 2. Blf...

  • Page 2997

    Vol.3-510 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the locations of each key changes as shown below. Src: return to the configuration menu note 1: the default setting is “1: original”. (b) press the src key. The display returns to the third page of the configuration menu. (c) to assign data to additional...

  • Page 2998

    Vol.3-511 chapter 4 configuration setup (b) press the src key. The display returns to the fourth page of the configuration menu. (c) to assign data to additional configuration items, refer to the selecting a configuration item section. When finished, proceed to the updating the configuration data se...

  • Page 2999

    Vol.3-512 chapter 4 configuration setup 11. Receiver volume set this item specifies the receiver volume. (a) press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number. 1. Receiver volume is set to the default level of the ati card 2. Receiver volume is set to the level in accordance with t...

  • Page 3000

    Vol.3-513 chapter 4 configuration setup 12. Function key swap this item specifies the locations of function keys. (a) press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number. 1. Original setting 2. Swapped setting note: the location of each key changes as shown below. Src return to the c...

  • Page 3001

    Vol.3-514 chapter 4 configuration setup (c) when configuration data assignment is completed, proceed to updating configuration data. When the other item is also specified, return to selection of configuration item. 13. Ringer volume in pb this item specifies the ringer volume in the position busy st...

  • Page 3002

    Vol.3-515 chapter 4 configuration setup 14. Power control this item specifies the power control of the console in the night mode. (a) press the desired number. An asterisk (*) shows the selected number. 1. Power control is not effective. 2. The lcd back light is put out. When pressing any key, the l...

  • Page 3003

    Vol.3-516 chapter 4 configuration setup src return to the configuration menu note 1: default setting is “1: enable”. (b) press the src key. The display returns to configuration menu. (c) when configuration data assignment is completed, proceed to updating configuration data. When the other item is a...

  • Page 3004

    Vol.3-517 chapter 4 configuration setup updating configuration data alarm ldn tie busy atnd nans recall emg bv trksl call park sc svc page start rec night position busy mute dest src 3 def 2 abc 1 l 6 l 5 l 4 l 3 l 2 l 1 6 mno 5 jkl 4 ghi 9 wxyz 8 tuv 0 7 pqrs * # cancel talk answer hold release pos...

  • Page 3005

    Vol.3-518 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Dtermip(sip) use the user menu to set the configuration data for dtermip (sip). On the user menu, the following configu- ration data can be set. • network settings : set network-related data. • sip settings : set sip-related data: • audio & visual settings ...

  • Page 3006

    Vol.3-519 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: available for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Note: the user cannot go to configuration setting screen from online monitoring screen and vice versa. For on- line monitoring, refer to section 5., online monitoring feature of dtermi...

  • Page 3007

    Vol.3-520 chapter 4 configuration setup if the invalid password is entered three times, “config login failed!” is displayed on the lcd. Press the exit key to reset the terminal. For more details on login password, see section 4.4.5, config password mode. Parameters on user menu the tables below show...

  • Page 3008

    Vol.3-521 chapter 4 configuration setup lan port settings set the lan port. Speed & duplex set the lan speed. Autonego autonegotiation 100m full 100mbps speed and full-duplex mode 100m half 100mbps speed and half-duplex mode 10m full 10mbps speed and full-duplex mode 10m half 10mbps speed and half-d...

  • Page 3009

    Vol.3-522 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 2.0.4.0 or later. For dtermip (sip) with firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later, the parameter changes as follows: 1. Automatic: follows the data assignment on cpcp command. If no cpcp data is assigned, pc port is ena...

  • Page 3010

    Vol.3-523 chapter 4 configuration setup sip settings (1 of 3) parameter description 1. User set the user data. 1. User id set the user id. 2. Password set the password of the user id used for user authentication. 2. Server address & uri set ip address and uri of the sip server. Note 1 1. 1st server ...

  • Page 3011

    Vol.3-524 chapter 4 configuration setup 0. Automatic automated setting 1. Japan japan 2. America north america 3. Australia australia 4. Others other countries 5. Hongkong hong kong 6. Malaysia malaysia 7. Singapore singapore 8. Mexico mexico 9. Taiwan taiwan 10. Korea korea 11. Brazil brazil 12. Ch...

  • Page 3012

    Vol.3-525 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. Note 2: for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 2.0.4.0 or later. Do not set this parameter except w...

  • Page 3013

    Vol.3-526 chapter 4 configuration setup audio & visual settings (1 of 2) parameter description 1. Audio settings audio-related setting. 1. Confirmation tone select whether to sound confirmation tone. 1. Disable confirmation tone is off. 2. Enable confirmation tone is on. 2. Music select select wheth...

  • Page 3014

    Vol.3-527 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later. Note 2: “(nec)” is displayed since firmware version 4.1.X.X. Note 3: for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Note 4: when “9. Norwegian” is selected, language is displayed in e...

  • Page 3015

    Vol.3-528 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later. Maintenance settings parameter description 1. Download menu settings for the downloading. 1. Download download the f/w. 1. Program download the program. 2. Music download the data of music on ho...

  • Page 3016

    Vol.3-529 chapter 4 configuration setup terminal information parameter description hardware version display the hardware version of the terminal. Mac address display the mac address of the terminal. Firmware version display the firmware version of the terminal..

  • Page 3017

    Vol.3-530 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1 network settings this section explains each setting on the network settings menu. The network settings menu has the following items: • dhcp mode : select whether to use dhcp protocol. • ip address : set ip address of the dtermip (sip). • default gateway : ...

  • Page 3018

    Vol.3-531 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the item number(s) of higher-level menu(s) will always be displayed on the top line of each menu. Up down exit 11.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address up down exit 12.Ip address 3.Default gateway up down exit 13.Default gateway 4.Subnetmask press down key. Press down ...

  • Page 3019

    Vol.3-532 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.1 dhcp mode on the dhcp mode parameter, select whether to use dhcp protocol. Step 1:select “1. Dhcp mode” by pressing “1” key on the network settings menu. Network settings menu step 2:select either “1. Disable” or “2. Enable”. Press “1” key to disable dhc...

  • Page 3020

    Vol.3-533 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.2 ip address on the ip address parameter, set ip address of the terminal. Step 1: select “2. Ip address” by pressing “2” key on the network settings menu. Network settings menu step 2: enter ip address of dtermip (sip). For example, to set the ip address o...

  • Page 3021

    Vol.3-534 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.3 default gateway on the default gateway parameter, set ip address of the default router. Step 1: select “3. Default gateway” by pressing “3” key on the network settings menu. Network settings menu step 2: enter the default gateway ip address. For example,...

  • Page 3022

    Vol.3-535 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.4 subnet mask on the subnetmask parameter, set subnet mask of the terminal. Step 1: select “4. Subnetmask” by pressing “4” key on the network settings menu. Network settings menu step 2: enter the subnet mask. For example, to set the subnet mask of 255.255...

  • Page 3023

    Vol.3-536 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.5 dns on the dns address parameter, set ip address of the dns server. Step 1: select “5. Dns address” by pressing “5” key on the network settings menu. Network settings menu step 2: enter ip address of the dns server. For example, to set the ip address of ...

  • Page 3024

    Vol.3-537 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.1.6 advanced settings advanced settings parameter has the following additional parameters: lan port settings, pc port settings, cdp mode, type of service and 802.1x settings. 4.1.6.1 lan port settings on the lan port settings parameter, set the lan port-rela...

  • Page 3025

    Vol.3-538 chapter 4 configuration setup lan port settings menu step 4:when “1.Speed & duplex” is selected by pressing “1” key: specify the lan speed and communication method (full-duplex or half-duplex). Autonegotiation is set by pressing “1” key. 100mbps speed and full-duplex mode are set by pressi...

  • Page 3026

    Vol.3-539 chapter 4 configuration setup step 9:press save key on the main menu to save the assigned data. 4.1.6.2 pc port settings on the pc port settings parameter, set the pc port-related data. Step 1:select “6. Advanced settings” by pressing “6” key on the network settings menu. Network settings ...

  • Page 3027

    Vol.3-540 chapter 4 configuration setup pc port settings menu step 4:when “1.Speed & duplex” is selected by pressing “1” key: specify the lan speed and communication method (full-duplex or half-duplex). Autonegotiation is set by pressing “1” key. 100mbps speed and full-duplex mode are set by pressin...

  • Page 3028

    Vol.3-541 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5:after assigning each data, press ok key and go back to the pc port settings menu. Repeat step 3-4 until all the necessary data is set. Step 6:when the all necessary data is set, press exit key on the pc port settings menu to go back to advanced settings...

  • Page 3029

    Vol.3-542 chapter 4 configuration setup step 2:advanced settings menu appears. Select “3. Cdp mode” by pressing “3” key on the advanced settings menu. Advanced settings menu step 3:select whether to send the power consumption information to the hub. When selecting “1. Disable”, power consumption inf...

  • Page 3030

    Vol.3-543 chapter 4 configuration setup network settings menu step 2: advanced settings menu appears. Select “4. Type of service” by pressing “4” key on the advanced settings menu. Advanced settings menu step 3: when setting tos of rtp, select “1. Rtp” by pressing “1” key. When setting tos of sip, s...

  • Page 3031

    Vol.3-544 chapter 4 configuration setup key entry method note: to delete an entered character, press bk key. Step 5: press ok key and go back to the display of step 3. Repeat step 3-4 until all the necessary data is set. Step 6: when the all necessary data is set, press exit key and go back to the a...

  • Page 3032

    Vol.3-545 chapter 4 configuration setup network settings menu step 2: advanced settings menu appears. Select “5. 802.1x settings” by pressing “5” key on the advanced settings menu. Advanced settings menu step 3: 802.1x settings menu appears. Select “1. Supplicant mode” by pressing “1” key to enable ...

  • Page 3033

    Vol.3-546 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4: - when using supplicant mode of dtermip(sip): when “1. Supplicant mode” is selected by pressing “1” key. Select whether to disable or enable supplicant mode. Press “1” key to disable the supplicant mode. Press “2” key to enable the supplicant mode. Sup...

  • Page 3034

    Vol.3-547 chapter 4 configuration setup • account (md5) • password (md5) • uri of the sip server • file name key entry method note 2: to enable eapol vlan mode, the following data setting is also required on “lan port settings”. For the details of lan port settings, refer to “4.1.6.1 lan port settin...

  • Page 3035

    Vol.3-548 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the following operation system of pc equipped with supplicant function can be connected to the dter- mip(sip) pc port. • microsoft ® windows 2000 ® with service pack 4 or later • microsoft ® windows xp ® with service pack 2 or later.

  • Page 3036

    Vol.3-549 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2 sip settings this section explains each setting on the sip settings menu. The sip settings menu has the following items: • user : set the user data. • server address & uri : set ip address and uri of the sip server. Note 1 • access mode : set the access mo...

  • Page 3037

    Vol.3-550 chapter 4 configuration setup sip settings menu 4.2.1 user on the user parameter, set the user id and the password used for user authentication. Step 1:select “1. User” by pressing “1”key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:when setting the user id, select “1. User id” by pr...

  • Page 3038

    Vol.3-551 chapter 4 configuration setup note: to delete an entered character, press bk key. Step 4:after entering the user id and the password, press ok key and go back to the display of step 2. Step 5:press exit key on the display of step 2 to go back to the sip settings menu. Step 6:press exit key...

  • Page 3039

    Vol.3-552 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3: if specifying sip server by entering ip address, enter ip address of the specified sip server. For ex- ample, to set the ip address of 10.41.208.205, enter 10*41*208*205 [separate with an asterisk (*)]. Note: the default value is “0.0.0.0”. Note: about...

  • Page 3040

    Vol.3-553 chapter 4 configuration setup key entry method step 5: press ok key and go back to the display of step 2. Repeat step 2-4 until all the necessary servers are set. Step 6: when all the necessary data is set, press exit key on the display of step 2 to go back to the sip settings menu. Step 7...

  • Page 3041

    Vol.3-554 chapter 4 configuration setup sip settings menu step 2: select “5. Registrar destination” by pressing “5” key. Step 3: press “1”, “2”, “3” or “4” key to select a sip server whose ip address or domain name is to be set. Step 4: if specifying sip server by entering ip address, enter ip addre...

  • Page 3042

    Vol.3-555 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5: if specifying sip server by entering fully qualified domain name (fqdn), press the uri key. The display changes as follows. Enter fqdn of the sip server. A maximum of 128 characters (“0-9”, “a- z”, “a-z”, “*”, “#”, “.”, “-” or “_”) can be entered as a ...

  • Page 3043

    Vol.3-556 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: press ok key and go back to the display of step 2. Repeat step 2-4 until all the necessary servers are set. Step 7: when all the necessary data is set, press exit key on the display of step 2 to go back to the sip settings menu. Step 8: press exit key ...

  • Page 3044

    Vol.3-557 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.3 access mode on the access mode parameter, set the access mode to the sip server. Step 1:select “3. Access mode” by pressing “3” key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:specify the access mode to the sip server. When selecting “1. Remote mo...

  • Page 3045

    Vol.3-558 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.4 sip server port on the sip server port parameter, set the port number of the sip server. Step 1:select “4. Sip server port” by pressing “4” key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:press “1”, “2”, “3” or “4” key to select a sip server whose...

  • Page 3046

    Vol.3-559 chapter 4 configuration setup step 7:press save key on the main menu to save the assigned data. 4.2.4.1 register destination (sip server port) set the port number of the register destination sip server. Note: “registrardestination” parameter is available for dtermip (sip) with firmware ver...

  • Page 3047

    Vol.3-560 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3:enter the port number (1024-65535) of the specified sip server. Note: the default port number is 5060. Note: to delete an entered character, press bk key. Step 4:press ok key and go back to the display of step 2. Repeat step 2-3 until all the necessary ...

  • Page 3048

    Vol.3-561 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.5 area id on the area id parameter, specify the country. Step 1:select “5. Area id” by pressing “5” key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:select a country by pressing each country code. The default setting is “automatic”. Step 3:the presse...

  • Page 3049

    Vol.3-562 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.6 encryption encryption parameter has the following additional parameters: authentication mode, one time password and authentication status. 4.2.6.1 authentication mode on the authentication mode parameters, select whether to enable or disable the authenti...

  • Page 3050

    Vol.3-563 chapter 4 configuration setup step 7:press save key on the main menu to save the assigned data. 4.2.6.2 one time password on the one time password parameters, set the onetime password. Step 1:select “6. Encryption” by pressing “6” key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:encr...

  • Page 3051

    Vol.3-564 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.6.3 authentication status on the authentication status parameter, display the authentication status. Step 1:select “6. Encryption” by pressing “6” key on the sip settings menu. Sip settings menu step 2:encryption menu appears. Select “3. Authentication sta...

  • Page 3052

    Vol.3-565 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.2.7 extra function on the extra function parameter, set additional functions such as retransmit interval, keeping call, and lan- guage pattern. 4.2.7.1 retransmit interval on the retransmit interval parameter, set retransmit interval of register and subscrib...

  • Page 3053

    Vol.3-566 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the currently applied interval flashes. Step 4:after retransmit interval is set, press ok key and go back to the extra function menu. Step 5:press exit key on the extra function menu to return to the sip settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the sip se...

  • Page 3054

    Vol.3-567 chapter 4 configuration setup note: “1. Retransmit interval”, “2. Keeping call” and “4. Language pattern” are available for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Note: “3. Howler tone” is not supported by dtermip(sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X. The setting should be “1....

  • Page 3055

    Vol.3-568 chapter 4 configuration setup if any keys except volume control key are pressed after the communication failure step 3: when dtermip(sip) station goes on-hook after finishing the call • when the communication failure is detected at dtermip(sip), key operations except the volume control key...

  • Page 3056

    Vol.3-569 chapter 4 configuration setup extra function menu note: “1. Retransmit interval”, “2. Keeping call” and “4. Language pattern” are available for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Note: “3. Howler tone” is not supported by dtermip(sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X. The s...

  • Page 3057

    Vol.3-570 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.3 audio & visual settings this section explains each setting on the audio & visual settings menu. The audio & visual settings menu has the following items: • audio settings : audio-related setting. • visual settings : lcd display setting. Step 1:to open the ...

  • Page 3058

    Vol.3-571 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.3.1 audio settings audio settings parameter has the following additional parameters: confirmation tone, music select, sidetone volume, send gain, receive bias, receive gain, ring settings, rtp alarm and dtmf play mode. 4.3.1.1 confirmation tone on the confir...

  • Page 3059

    Vol.3-572 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio setting menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the audio & visual settings menu and go back to the main menu. Step 7:press sav...

  • Page 3060

    Vol.3-573 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio settings menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the audio & visual settings menu and go back to the main menu. Step 7:press sa...

  • Page 3061

    Vol.3-574 chapter 4 configuration setup note: to delete an entered digit, press bk key. Step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio settings menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the audio & visual settings me...

  • Page 3062

    Vol.3-575 chapter 4 configuration setup audio settings menu step 3:specify the sending gain of the handset [(lower) 0-31 (higher), 99 (automatic)]. The default value is “99”. Note: to delete an entered digit, press bk key. Step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit...

  • Page 3063

    Vol.3-576 chapter 4 configuration setup step 1:select “1. Audio settings” by pressing “1” key on the audio & visual settings menu. Audio & visual settings menu step 2:audio settings menu appears. Select “5. Receive bias” by pressing “5” key. Audio settings menu step 3:specify the receiving bias of t...

  • Page 3064

    Vol.3-577 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio settings menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the audio & visual settings menu and go back to the main menu. Step 7:press sa...

  • Page 3065

    Vol.3-578 chapter 4 configuration setup note: to delete an entered digit, press bk key. Step 4:press ok key and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio settings menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 6:press exit key on the audio & visual settings me...

  • Page 3066

    Vol.3-579 chapter 4 configuration setup audio settings menu step 3:select a ringer pattern (ringing tone for external call or ringing tone for internal call) to be set. Step 4:set a tone type for the ringer pattern specified at step 3. “0. Default” is set for all the ringer patterns by the default s...

  • Page 3067

    Vol.3-580 chapter 4 configuration setup patterns are set. Step 6:when the all necessary data is set, press exit key on the display of step 3 and go back to the audio settings menu. Step 7:press exit key on the audio settings menu to go back to the audio & visual settings menu. Step 8:press exit key ...

  • Page 3068

    Vol.3-581 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3:select whether to send rtp warning tone to the terminal. When selecting “1. Automatic”, rtp warning tone is sent to the terminal according to directions from the system. When selecting “2.On”, rtp warning tone is sent to the terminal. When selecting “3....

  • Page 3069

    Vol.3-582 chapter 4 configuration setup audio settings menu step 3:select whether to play back the dtmf tone. When selecting “1. Automatic”, dtmf tone is played back according to directions from the system. When selecting “2.On”, dtmf tone is played back. When selecting “3.Off”, dtmf tone is not pla...

  • Page 3070

    Vol.3-583 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.3.2 visual settings visual settings parameter has the following additional parameters: time display type, local volume and lan- guage. 4.3.2.1 time display type on the time display type parameters, set the time display on the lcd. Step 1:select “2. Visual se...

  • Page 3071

    Vol.3-584 chapter 4 configuration setup step 7:press save key on the main menu to save the assigned data. 4.3.2.2 local volume on the local volume parameters, set whether to display the local volume indication on the lcd. Step 1:select “2. Visual settings” by pressing “2” key on the audio & visual s...

  • Page 3072

    Vol.3-585 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.3.2.3 language on the language parameters, specify a language to be displayed on the lcd. Step 1:select “2. Visual settings” by pressing “2” key on the audio & visual settings menu. Audio & visual settings menu step 2:visual settings menu appears. Select “3....

  • Page 3073

    Vol.3-586 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the currently enabled language flashes, and the number of language is displayed upper right for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Step 4:press ok key and go back to the visual settings menu. Step 5:press exit key on the audio settings...

  • Page 3074

    Vol.3-587 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4 maintenance settings this section explains each setting on the maintenance settings menu. The maintenance settings menu has the fol- lowing items: • download menu : set the downloading-related data. • hard reset : reset dtermip (sip) without saving the dat...

  • Page 3075

    Vol.3-588 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.1 download menu on the download menu parameters, set ip address of the tftp/ftp server and download program or music on hold file. Step 1: select “1. Download menu” by pressing “1” key on the maintenance settings menu. Maintenance settings menu note: “6. A...

  • Page 3076

    Vol.3-589 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: the following display appears. Note: if the download address parameter is not assigned, no reaction occurs. Select “1. Program” by pressing “1” key to download the program. Select “2. Music” by pressing “2” key to download the data of music on hold. Se...

  • Page 3077

    Vol.3-590 chapter 4 configuration setup • account (md5) • password (md5) • uri of the sip server • file name key entry method step 8: after specifying the file name to be downloaded, press tftp or ftp key to start the downloading. Step 9: when the downloading process is completed, the display change...

  • Page 3078

    Vol.3-591 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.2 hard reset on the hard rest parameters, reset the terminal without saving the data. Step 1:select “2. Hard reset” by pressing “2” key on the maintenance settings menu. Maintenance settings menu note: “6. Auto config” is not supported by dtermip (sip) wit...

  • Page 3079

    Vol.3-592 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.3 factory value on the factory value parameters, reset the terminal to its factory defaults. Step 1:select “3. Factory value” by pressing “3” key on the maintenance settings menu. Maintenance settings menu note: “6. Auto config” is not supported by dtermip...

  • Page 3080

    Vol.3-593 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.4 simple test mode simple test mode parameter has the following additional parameters: test call on, call test address, key test (random), key test (seq.), voice loopback and speaker test. 4.4.4.1 test call on on the test call on parameters, perform the te...

  • Page 3081

    Vol.3-594 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.4.2 call test address on the call test address parameters, set ip address of the destination terminal for performing the telephone call test. Step 1:select “4. Simple test mode” by pressing “4” key on the maintenance settings menu. Maintenance settings men...

  • Page 3082

    Vol.3-595 chapter 4 configuration setup note: to delete an entered character, press bk key. Step 4:press ok key to enable the entered ip address, and go back to the simple test mode menu. 4.4.4.3 key test (random) on the key test (random) parameters, perform the key test (keys are randomly pressed)....

  • Page 3083

    Vol.3-596 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:to end the key test, go off-hook. The display returns to the simple test mode menu. 4.4.4.4 key test (seq.) on the key test (seq.) parameters, perform the key test (keys are sequentially pressed). Step 1:select “4. Simple test mode” by pressing “4” key ...

  • Page 3084

    Vol.3-597 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:to end the key test, go off-hook. The display returns to the simple test mode menu. 4.4.4.5 voice loopback on the voice loopback parameters, perform the voice loopback test. Step 1:select “4. Simple test mode” by pressing “4” key on the maintenance sett...

  • Page 3085

    Vol.3-598 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4:the display changes as follows: step 5:after the loopback test is completed, press exit key. 4.4.4.6 speaker test on the speaker test parameters, perform the speaker test. Step 1:select “4. Simple test mode” by pressing “4” key on the maintenance settin...

  • Page 3086

    Vol.3-599 chapter 4 configuration setup simple test mode menu step 3:select either “1. America” (by pressing “1” key) or “2. Japan” (by pressing “2” key). Note: dial tone sounds immediately after pressing “1” or “2” key. Step 4:the display changes as follows. You hear dial tone from the speaker at t...

  • Page 3087

    Vol.3-600 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.4.5 config password mode on the config password mode parameter, set the control method of configuration password. Note: this parameter is available for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later. Step 1: select “5. Config password mode” by pressing...

  • Page 3088

    Vol.3-601 chapter 4 configuration setup note: to delete an entered character, press bk key. Step 4: press ok key. The following display appears. Enter the same password again for confirmation. Note: if the password entered here differs from the password entered in step 3, the following message will ...

  • Page 3089

    Vol.3-602 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.5 terminal information this section explains each setting on the terminal information menu. The terminal information menu is used to display the hardware version, firmware version and mac address of the terminal. Step 1:to open the terminal information menu,...

  • Page 3090

    Vol.3-603 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Online monitoring feature of dtermip(sip) this feature allows the user to display the following information on the terminal’s lcd: • qos: qos information (the number of packet-loss events, codec and payload). • system information: the current setting data (...

  • Page 3091

    Vol.3-604 chapter 4 configuration setup parameter missing : errors in local setting and dhcp obtained data. Otp not included : one time password is not entered. Failed (server) : authentication with sip server is failed (sip server authentication) failed (terminal) : authentication with sip server i...

  • Page 3092

    Vol.3-605 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.1 qos on the qos menu, the qos information can be displayed. Step 1:to open the qos screen, press “1” key on the online monitoring main screen. Note: press exit key to go back to the normal operation display. Online monitoring main screen step 2:the qos scre...

  • Page 3093

    Vol.3-606 chapter 4 configuration setup note 3: the display pattern for codec and payload is as follows: codec payload g.711 μ 10, 20, 30, 40 g.711a 10, 20, 30, 40 g.729a 10, 20, 30, 40

  • Page 3094

    Vol.3-607 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2 system information on the system information menu, the assigned configuration data can be displayed. Step 1:select “2. System information” by pressing “2” on the online monitoring main screen. Online monitoring main screen note: press exit key to go back t...

  • Page 3095

    Vol.3-608 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2.1 network settings information note: to go back to the system information main screen, press prev key. Note: “(dhcp)” is displayed for the ip address and subnet mask obtained from the dhcp server note: “pc port vlan mode”, “pc port vlan id”, “pc port vlan ...

  • Page 3096

    Vol.3-609 chapter 4 configuration setup note: on the pc port available parameter, there is a choice of the following three settings: prev on(auto) pc port available up down prev off(auto) pc port available up down prev off pc port available up down (2) pc port is disabled according to directions fro...

  • Page 3097

    Vol.3-610 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2.2 sip settings information press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. P...

  • Page 3098

    Vol.3-611 chapter 4 configuration setup note: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. Note: to go back to the system information main screen, press prev key. Note: either of sip server ip ...

  • Page 3099

    Vol.3-612 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2.3 audio & visual settings information note: to go back to the system information main screen, press prev key. Up down prev off / on confirmation tone up down prev default / download data music systm information main menu press up key. Press up key. Press d...

  • Page 3100

    Vol.3-613 chapter 4 configuration setup note: on the rtp alarm parameter, there is a choice of the following four settings: note: on the dtmf play mode parameter, there is a choice of the following four settings: prev on(auto) rtp alarm up down prev off(auto) rtp alarm up down prev off rtp alarm up ...

  • Page 3101

    Vol.3-614 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2.4 maintenance settings information note: to go back to the system information main screen, press prev key. Press " 4 " key. Press prev key. Prev xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx download address system information main menu.

  • Page 3102

    Vol.3-615 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.2.5 terminal information note: to go back to the system information main screen, press prev key. Note: terminal information display is available for dtermip (sip) with firmware version 4.1.X.X or later. Up down prev xx.Xx.Xx.Xx hardware version up down prev ...

  • Page 3103

    Vol.3-616 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.3 ping on the ping menu, send ping to the specified ip address. Step 1:select “3. Ping” by pressing “3” on the online monitoring main screen. Online monitoring main screen note: press exit key to go back to the normal operation display. Step 2:the display ch...

  • Page 3104

    Vol.3-617 chapter 4 configuration setup note: press prev key to go back to the online monitoring main screen. The following displays appears only when network interface (ni) is available. If a network status change noti- fication is received while the following screens appear, either “ok” or “ng” is...

  • Page 3105

    Vol.3-618 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Dt700 series this section explains the configuration setup for dt700 series. The following types of configuration setting are provided for dt700 series: [1] configuration setup on terminal configuration data can be assigned by terminal operation. Each termi...

  • Page 3106

    Vol.3-619 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.1 how to start configuration setting this section explains the operation procedure to start configuration settings on terminal and web programming on maintenance console. 6.1.1 configuration setup on terminal this section explains the operation procedure to ...

  • Page 3107

    Vol.3-620 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.1.1.1 startup procedure from turning on the power to getting [menu] and [config] menus on the lcd are explained in this section. [1] power on step 1: power on plug in the lan cable to the lan port. (connect optional ac/dc adapter to dc24v jack, if required.)...

  • Page 3108

    Vol.3-621 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] user menu: [menu] while the lcd displays date and time (step 5 on the previous page), press the “menu” key ( note ) on the terminal to open [menu] screen for user’s menu. Note: on 6-button type of dt710 series, menu screen cannot be displayed if you press ...

  • Page 3109

    Vol.3-622 chapter 4 configuration setup [3] administrator menu: [config] the lcd can be switched to [config] for administrator’s menu either before login or after login. (a) switch to [config] menu before login connecting... Step 1: while the lcd indicating "connecting..." after turning on the power...

  • Page 3110

    Vol.3-623 chapter 4 configuration setup (b) switch to [config] menu after login note: to exit [config] menu, press the software key for “cancel” or “save.” after existing [config] menu, the terminal restarts and returns to “initializing...” display (step 2 in [1] power on). Note: refer to section 6....

  • Page 3111

    Vol.3-624 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.1.1.2 operations follow the operations below to select the menu/parameter and to go forward/back the screen. • digit key - - - - - - - - pressing the digit key corresponding to the menu number moves on to the next screen. Note: for dt750 (equipped with firmw...

  • Page 3112

    Vol.3-625 chapter 4 configuration setup [how to enter characters on configuration menu] by key operation, users can input alphanumeric characters and symbols on the lcd for such as user id and password entry. See the tables below for available characters and symbols. Pressing the “*” key switches th...

  • Page 3113

    Vol.3-626 chapter 4 configuration setup (b) english: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3114

    Vol.3-627 chapter 4 configuration setup (c) turkish: bg (upper case) (d) turkish: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3115

    Vol.3-628 chapter 4 configuration setup (e) russian: bg (upper case) (f) russian: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3116

    Vol.3-629 chapter 4 configuration setup (g) others (emea): bg (upper case) (h) others (emea): sm (lower case).

  • Page 3117

    Vol.3-630 chapter 4 configuration setup fw 2.2.X.X or earlier (except for dt730g) (a) english: bg (upper case).

  • Page 3118

    Vol.3-631 chapter 4 configuration setup (b) english: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3119

    Vol.3-632 chapter 4 configuration setup (c) turkish: bg (upper case) (d) turkish: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3120

    Vol.3-633 chapter 4 configuration setup (e) russian: bg (upper case) (f) russian: sm (lower case).

  • Page 3121

    Vol.3-634 chapter 4 configuration setup (g) others (emea): bg (upper case) (h) others (emea): sm (lower case).

  • Page 3122

    Vol.3-635 chapter 4 configuration setup [function menu on software key] see the table below for the function menus allocated for the software keys in configuration settings. [parameters on configuration menu] see section 6.3 configuration menu list (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0) or section 6.4 configurat...

  • Page 3123

    Vol.3-636 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.1.2 configuration setup by web programming web programming is an application software for assigning the terminal configuration data via maintenance con- sole using web browser. This section explains how to start and operate web programming. Note: refer to 6....

  • Page 3124

    Vol.3-637 chapter 4 configuration setup step 1: select the setting menu. Step 2: assign parameters. Step 3: click the “save” button to save the setting data. Step 4: confirming data save is displayed. Click the “ok” button to save the data. A popup dialogue.

  • Page 3125

    Vol.3-638 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2 configuration data setting procedure this section explains the setting procedure of each configuration menu. The explanation covers the procedure for [1] configuration setting on terminal and [2] configuration setting by web programming. Lcd varies dependi...

  • Page 3126

    Vol.3-639 chapter 4 configuration setup type 1: with dhcp server (sip server’s ip address is pre-assigned by dhcp server) dhcp server is connected to the network. Dt700 series terminal starts up and operates by obtaining own ip address and subnet mask, ip address (or fqdn) of sip server, and router ...

  • Page 3127

    Vol.3-640 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Press “speaker”. 4. Press “mic”. 5. Make sure that message waiting lamp is lit green. 6. Press line key 1 (the terminal starts the data initialization). 7. Make sure that message waiting lamp is lit alternately with green and red. 8. Press line key 1 to reb...

  • Page 3128

    Vol.3-641 chapter 4 configuration setup for dt 700 series, select option according to the following priorities: 1st priority is option 162. If there is no option 162, 2nd priority is option 120. If there is no option 120, 3rd priority is terminal local setting. Caution: observe the following while a...

  • Page 3129

    Vol.3-642 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: on [config] main menu, select "3. Maintenance settings." note: for login mode, loginid and password entry is required here. [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 2: on [...

  • Page 3130

    Vol.3-643 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: on [maintenance] menu, press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] main menu. Step 7: on [config] menu, select "1. Network settings." [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 8: on [network settings...

  • Page 3131

    Vol.3-644 chapter 4 configuration setup on [network settings] menu, press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] menu. Fqdn ip address [dns address] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0. 0 bk cancel ok c b [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip ...

  • Page 3132

    Vol.3-645 chapter 4 configuration setup end c [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit step 13: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] menu. Step 14: on [config] screen, press the software key "save" to save the set...

  • Page 3133

    Vol.3-646 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [data clear] → [factory value]. Step 2: clicking the “ok” button will return all the parameters to factory default settings. Step 3: select [network settings] → [dhcp mode]. Step 4: se...

  • Page 3134

    Vol.3-647 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.1.2 type 2 - system with dhcp server (sip server’s ip address is not assigned by dhcp server) this section explains the procedure of dt700 series data assignment for a system with dhcp server and sip server’s ip address (or fqdn) is not assigned on the dhc...

  • Page 3135

    Vol.3-648 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: on [maintenance] menu, press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] main menu. Step 7: on [config] menu, select "1. Network settings." [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 8: on [network settings...

  • Page 3136

    Vol.3-649 chapter 4 configuration setup on [network settings] menu, press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] menu. Fqdn ip address [dns address] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0. 0 bk cancel ok c b [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip ...

  • Page 3137

    Vol.3-650 chapter 4 configuration setup c d [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit step 13: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] menu. Step 14: on [config] menu, select "2. Sip settings." [config] 1.Network sett...

  • Page 3138

    Vol.3-651 chapter 4 configuration setup d e step 17: the lcd displays the [1st server address] setting screen. Step 18: if there are backup sip servers in the network, continue assigning 2nd, 3rd and 4th sip server addresses. Step 19: the lcd displays each of the [server address] setting screen. Fqd...

  • Page 3139

    Vol.3-652 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [data clear] → [factory value]. Step 2: clicking the “ok” button will return all the parameters to factory default settings. Step 3: select [network settings] → [dhcp mode]. End e step...

  • Page 3140

    Vol.3-653 chapter 4 configuration setup step 4: select “2. Enable” radio button (dhcp is enabled). Click the “ok” button. Step 5: depending on the way to specify sip server, perform either of the following: a. When sip server is specified by ip address via dhcp: → go to step 8. B. When sip server is...

  • Page 3141

    Vol.3-654 chapter 4 configuration setup - connect dhcp server to the network. Refer to “error messages” for details on error messages. 6.2.1.3 type 3 - system without dhcp server this section explains the procedure of dt700 series data assignment for a system without dhcp server; dhcp server is not ...

  • Page 3142

    Vol.3-655 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: on [config] main menu, select "3. Maintenance settings." note: for login mode, loginid and password entry is required here. [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 2: on [...

  • Page 3143

    Vol.3-656 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: on [maintenance] menu, press the software key for "exit" to return to [config] main menu. Step 7: on [config] menu, select "1. Network settings." [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 8: on [network settings...

  • Page 3144

    Vol.3-657 chapter 4 configuration setup c b [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit step 11: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Select "2. Ip address" to display [ip address] menu. [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit step 13: the lcd d...

  • Page 3145

    Vol.3-658 chapter 4 configuration setup d c [network settings] 1.Dhcp mode 2.Ip address 3.Default gateway exit step 15: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Select "4. Subnet mask." step 16: the lcd displays [subnet mask] setting screen. Assign subnet mask using digit keys. [subnet mask] *'for'...

  • Page 3146

    Vol.3-659 chapter 4 configuration setup d e [dns address] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0. 0 bk cancel ok step 19: on [dns address] screen, assign the dns server's ip address using the number button. Use "*" to separate each bytes. Press the software key for "ok" when all settings are complete. [network settings] ...

  • Page 3147

    Vol.3-660 chapter 4 configuration setup e f step 24: the lcd displays the [1st server address] setting screen. Step 25: if there are backup sip servers in the network, continue assigning 2nd, 3rd and 4th sip server addresses. Step 26: the lcd displays each of the [server address] setting screen. Fqd...

  • Page 3148

    Vol.3-661 chapter 4 configuration setup end f step 29: on [config] screen, press the software key "save" to save the settings. Sip server begins setup for dt700 series. [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 27: on [server address] menu, press the software...

  • Page 3149

    Vol.3-662 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [data clear] → [factory value]. Step 2: clicking the “ok” button will return all the parameters to factory default settings. Step 3: select [network settings] → [dhcp mode]. Step 4: se...

  • Page 3150

    Vol.3-663 chapter 4 configuration setup note: in the following instances, the terminal will display an error message. - sip server does not exist in the network - connection to sip server could not be established since the user assigned an incorrect value. - connection to dhcp server could not be es...

  • Page 3151

    Vol.3-664 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] configuration setting on terminal a [network settings] 4.Subnet mask 5.Dns address 6.Advanced settings exit step 2: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Select "6. Advanced settings." step 3: on [advanced settings] menu, select "2. Pc port settings." ...

  • Page 3152

    Vol.3-665 chapter 4 configuration setup a b [pc port settings] 3.Port vlan id 4.Port vlan priority 5.Port available exit [pc port settings] 6.Eapol forwarding 4.Port vlan priority 5.Port available exit step 4: on [pc port settings] menu, select "5. Port available." step 6: the lcd returns to [pc por...

  • Page 3153

    Vol.3-666 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [network settings] → [advance settings] → [pc port settings] → [port available]. Step 2: select the [port available] parameter, and click the “ok” button. 1. Automatic: automatically sets the dt700 se...

  • Page 3154

    Vol.3-667 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] configuration setting on terminal a [network settings] 4.Subnet mask 5.Dns address 6.Advanced settings exit step 2: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Select “6. Advanced settings.” step 3: on [advanced settings] menu, select “4. Type of service.” [...

  • Page 3155

    Vol.3-668 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [network settings] → [advance settings] → [type of service]. Step 2: select the packet type for setting the tos value. Rtp: click “rtp” to change the tos value for sending rtp packet. Sip: click “sip”...

  • Page 3156

    Vol.3-669 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.4 digest authentication this menu assigns user id and password for digest authentication. [1] configuration setting on terminal [sip user] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Incom number exit [sip user] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Incom number exit a step 2: the lcd displa...

  • Page 3157

    Vol.3-670 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 9: on [config] screen, press the software key “save” to save the settings. [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save end step 7: the lcd returns to [sip user] menu. Press the software key for “exit.” [sip user] 1.User...

  • Page 3158

    Vol.3-671 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [sip settings] → [user] → [user id]. Step 2: enter user id using the digit keys, and then click the “ok” button. 0-9, *, # are available (maximum 32 characters). Step 3: select [sip settings] → [user]...

  • Page 3159

    Vol.3-672 chapter 4 configuration setup a end step 6: the lcd returns to [sip settings] menu. Press the software key for “exit” to return to [config] menu. [sip settings] 1.Sip user 2.Server address 3.Access mode exit step 4: the lcd displays the chosen [server port] setting screen. (the user chose ...

  • Page 3160

    Vol.3-673 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [sip settings] → [sip server port]. Step 2: choose which sip server’s port number to change. • choose 1. To change the port number of 1st sip server used to send packets. • choose 2. To change the por...

  • Page 3161

    Vol.3-674 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: initial factory setting is “0. Automatic.” in other settings, the terminal side setting has priority. Note 2: “35. Brazil (nec philips)” is displayed in the configuration menu earlier than fw 4.0.0.0 (except for dt730g). 18. Italy 19. Netherlands 20. C...

  • Page 3162

    Vol.3-675 chapter 4 configuration setup [area id] 0.Automatic 1.Japan 2.America cancel ok step 3: the lcd displays [area id] menu. Step 1: on [config] menu, select “2. Sip settings.” [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 2: the lcd displays [sip settings]...

  • Page 3163

    Vol.3-676 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [sip settings] → [area id]. Step 2: enter the area id using digit keys. Then click the “ok” button. [countries (areas) where dt700 series usage is available] [area id/country] 0. Automatic (telephony ...

  • Page 3164

    Vol.3-677 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3: click the “save” button. Note 1: “35. Brazil (nec philips)” is displayed in the configuration menu earlier than fw 4.0.0.0 (except for dt730g). 6.2.7 keeping call user can assign data to retain an ongoing call when the network between dt700 series and ...

  • Page 3165

    Vol.3-678 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [sip settings] → [extra function] → [keeping call]. Step 2: select “2. Enable” radio button (keeping call is enabled). Step 3: click the “ok” button. Step 4: click the “save” button. [extra function] ...

  • Page 3166

    Vol.3-679 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.8 side tone user can assign sidetone volume on dt700 series terminal. Note: sidetone volume set by system takes priority over this setting. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: on [config] main menu, select "3. Maintenance settings." [config] 1.Ne...

  • Page 3167

    Vol.3-680 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 7: on [adjust] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [maintenance] menu. [adjust] exit 1.Audio 2.Key kit type 3.Calibration step 6: on [audio] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [adjust] menu. [audio] 1.Sidetone volume 2.Sen...

  • Page 3168

    Vol.3-681 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [adjust] → [audio] → [sidetone volume]. Step 2: enter sidetone volume using number buttons 0-7. Note 1 step 3: click the “ok” button. Step 4: click the “save” button. Note 1: for detai...

  • Page 3169

    Vol.3-682 chapter 4 configuration setup 0 (minimum volume) ~ ~ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (maximum volume) a step 7: on [adjust] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [maintenance] menu. [adjust] exit 1.Audio 2.Key kit type 3.Calibration step 6: on [audio] menu, press the software ke...

  • Page 3170

    Vol.3-683 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [adjust] → [audio] → [send gain]. Step 2: enter handset send volume using number buttons 0-31. Note 1 step 3: click the “ok” button. Step 4: click the “save” button. Note 1: for detail...

  • Page 3171

    Vol.3-684 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 7: on [adjust] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [maintenance] menu. [adjust] exit 1.Audio 2.Key kit type 3.Calibration step 6: on [audio] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [adjust] menu. [audio] 1.Sidetone volume 2.Sen...

  • Page 3172

    Vol.3-685 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [adjust] → [audio] → [receive bias]. Step 2: enter handset receive volume using number buttons 0-7. Note 1 step 3: click the “ok” button. Step 4: click the “save” button. Note 1: for d...

  • Page 3173

    Vol.3-686 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 7: on [adjust] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [maintenance] menu. [adjust] exit 1.Audio 2.Key kit type 3.Calibration step 6: on [audio] menu, press the software key for “exit” to display [adjust] menu. [audio] 1.Sidetone volume 2.Sen...

  • Page 3174

    Vol.3-687 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [maintenance] → [adjust] → [audio] → [receive gain]. Step 2: enter handset receive gain using number buttons 0-31. Note 1 step 3: click the “ok” button. Step 4: click the “save” button. Note 1: for de...

  • Page 3175

    Vol.3-688 chapter 4 configuration setup pattern 3: • hardware with supplicant feature is connected to dt700 series terminal’s pc port. • user enables dt700 series terminal’s 802.1x supplicant feature. • dt700 series operates by connecting to a switch corresponding to authentication. • when separatin...

  • Page 3176

    Vol.3-689 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.12.1 supplicant feature data assignment this section explains the data assignment when using 802.1x authentication for dt700 series. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: on [config] main menu, select “4. Security.” step 2: on [security] menu, sele...

  • Page 3177

    Vol.3-690 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 5: the lcd returns to [802.1x supplicant] menu. Select “3. Account” to display the [account] menu. [802.1x supplicant] exit 1.Supplicant 2. Eap method 3.Account step 7: the lcd returns to [802.1x supplicant] menu. Select “4. Password” to display the [...

  • Page 3178

    Vol.3-691 chapter 4 configuration setup c b step 9: the lcd returns to [802.1x supplicant] menu. Select “5” to display the [eap vlan mode] menu. [802.1x supplicant] exit 1.Supplicant 2. Eap method 3.Account step 11: the lcd returns to [802.1x supplicant] menu. Press the software key for “exit.” [802...

  • Page 3179

    Vol.3-692 chapter 4 configuration setup step 13: the lcd returns to [config] menu. Select “1” to display the [network settings] menu. [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save d step 17: select “2. Enable.” verify that “2. Enable” line is flashing. Then, press the...

  • Page 3180

    Vol.3-693 chapter 4 configuration setup e d step 19: the lcd displays [vlan id] menu. Use digit keys to assign vlan id. - vlan id value must be between 0–4094. - press the software key for “bk” to delete entered value. - press the software key for “ok” when all settings are complete. [vlan id] bk ca...

  • Page 3181

    Vol.3-694 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [security] → [802.1x supplicant] → [supplicant]. Step 2: select “2. Enable.” click the “ok” button. Step 3: select [security] → [802.1x supplicant] → [account]. Step 4: enter user id for eap-md5 authe...

  • Page 3182

    Vol.3-695 chapter 4 configuration setup step 8: select “2. Enable” (vlan tag is attached to eap packet). Click the “ok” button. Note 1 step 9: select [network settings] → [advance settings] → [lan port settings] → [vlan mode]. Step 10: select “2. Enable.” click the “ok” button. Step 11: select [netw...

  • Page 3183

    Vol.3-696 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.12.2 using supplicant mode this section explains the procedure to connect a pc with supplicant feature to the pc port of dt700 series. Note 1 note 1: pc to be connected to pc port of dt700 series requires the following operating system (os): • microsoft ® ...

  • Page 3184

    Vol.3-697 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 5: select “2. Enable.” verify that “2. Enable” line is flashing. Then, press the software key for “ok.” step 7: select “2. Enable.” verify that “2. Enable” line is flashing. Then, press the software key for “ok.” [eapol forwarding] 1.Disable 2.Enable ...

  • Page 3185

    Vol.3-698 chapter 4 configuration setup b step 10: the lcd returns to [pc port settings] menu. Select “4. Port vlan priority.” [pc port settings] exit 4.Port vlan priority 2.Port vlan mode 3.Port vlan id step 12: the lcd returns to [pc port settings] menu. Select “7. Port security.” [pc port setting...

  • Page 3186

    Vol.3-699 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [network settings] → [advance settings] → [pc port settings] → [eapol forward]. Step 2: select “2. Enable.” this enables the eapol packet forwarding feature. Click the “ok” button. Step 3: select [net...

  • Page 3187

    Vol.3-700 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.13 corporate phonebook this section explains how to specify corporate phonebook. Referring to the following procedure, assign the url of the target phonebook. After completing this setting, corporate phonebook is listed on the terminal’s directory menu. [1...

  • Page 3188

    Vol.3-701 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [application settings] → [xml settings] → [directory url]. Step 2: enter the url of corporate phonebook, and click the “ok” button. Step 3: click the “save” button. A step 5: the lcd displays [xml set...

  • Page 3189

    Vol.3-702 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.14 password change in this section, the user can change the password for dt700 series terminal’s local data assignment and admin password for administrator menu login. The password for terminal authentication assigned in this section is also used for relea...

  • Page 3190

    Vol.3-703 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 5: the lcd returns to [user setting] menu. Press the software key for “back.” [user setting] 4.Password change 5.Security (not used) 6.Peripheral (not used) end step 6: the lcd returns to [setting] menu. Press the software key for “ok” to save settings....

  • Page 3191

    Vol.3-704 chapter 4 configuration setup (b) admin password a step 1: on [config] menu, select “4. Security.” [config] 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings 4.Security cancel save 1. Network settings 2. Sip settings 3. Maintenance settings 4. Security 5. Terminal information 6. Application settings #...

  • Page 3192

    Vol.3-705 chapter 4 configuration setup note: when the terminal user forgets the assigned security password, the restriction can be released by admin- istrator’s menu [config] → 3.Maintenance settings data → 3.Data clear → 1.Factory value. Note that all the data including phonebook data on the termi...

  • Page 3193

    Vol.3-706 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.15 ringing tone user can change ringing tone settings on dt700 series terminal. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: go to [menu] main menu. Select “5. Setting.” step 2: on [setting] menu, select “1. User setting.” step 3: on [user setting] menu, ...

  • Page 3194

    Vol.3-707 chapter 4 configuration setup b see the table below for details on ring tone setting. A step 5: lcd displays the [ring tone] menu. Select “2. Internal call.” [ring tone] 1.External call 2.Internal call 3.Im back ok (not used) (not used) step 4: on [incoming call] menu, select “4. Ring tone...

  • Page 3195

    Vol.3-708 chapter 4 configuration setup ring tone settings value display name 1st frequency [hz] 2nd frequency [hz] tone kind 00 automatic note 1 520 660 16 hz modulation 01 tone type 1 16 hz modulation 02 tone type 2 8 hz modulation 03 tone type 3 1400 1100 door phone 04 tone type 4 1100 no modulat...

  • Page 3196

    Vol.3-709 chapter 4 configuration setup step 7: lcd returns to the [ring tone] menu. Pressing the software key for "back" will return to the upper menu. [ring tone] 1.External call(not used) 2.Internal call 3.Im back ok b end (not used) step 6: lcd displays [internal call] menu. The lcd will display...

  • Page 3197

    Vol.3-710 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.16 rtp alarm user can disable or enable rtp alarm on dt700 series terminal. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: go to [menu] main menu. Select “5. Setting.” a step 2: on [setting] menu, select “1. User setting.” [setting] 3.Data backup/restore 1....

  • Page 3198

    Vol.3-711 chapter 4 configuration setup end step 6: lcd returns to [talk] menu. Pressing the software key for "back" will return to uppder menu. [talk] 1.Rtp alarm 2.Dtmf tone 3.Key touch tone back ok lcd display assignment conditions 0. Automatic 1. Disable 2. Enable - does not follow the setting a...

  • Page 3199

    Vol.3-712 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.17 dtmf tone user can disable or enable dtmf tone on dt700 series terminal. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: go to [menu] main menu. Select “5. Setting.” a step 2: on [setting] menu, select “1. User setting.” [setting] 3.Data backup/restore 1....

  • Page 3200

    Vol.3-713 chapter 4 configuration setup end a step 5: lcd displays the [dtmf tone] menu. Select either automatic, disable or enable using digit keys. “0. Automatic” will be flashing before any selection is made, since “0” is assigned by default. Press the software key for “ok” when done. [dtmf tone]...

  • Page 3201

    Vol.3-714 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.18 hold music you can select the default hold music (minuet) or downloaded hold music that are heard from the terminal when held by the calling party while talking. Note: to use a downloaded hold music, it needs to be downloaded in advance. For how to down...

  • Page 3202

    Vol.3-715 chapter 4 configuration setup a end step 5: on [hold music] menu, select either "1. Default (minuet)" or "2. Download" by digit key, and then press the software key for "ok." [user setting] 1.Incoming call 2.Talk 3.Display back ok step 6: the lcd displays "talk" menu. Presings the software...

  • Page 3203

    Vol.3-716 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.19 language on time display by changing the language on the configuration menu of the terminal, the time display can be displayed by the language of each country. Here describes the languages supported by the terminal, and the procedure to set them. Note 1...

  • Page 3204

    Vol.3-717 chapter 4 configuration setup step 1: go to [menu] main menu. Select “5. Setting.” a step 2: on [setting] menu, select “1. User setting.” [setting] 3.Data backup/restore 1.User setting 2.Download back ok [menu] 6.Presence back ok 4.Call func. 5.Setting note: for other operations, " ↑ " and...

  • Page 3205

    Vol.3-718 chapter 4 configuration setup a step 4: on [display] menu, select “6. Language.” [display] 4.Back light 5.Font size 6.Language back ok [display] 4.Back light 5.Font size 6.Language back ok end step 5: on [language] menu, select the language by pressing the digit key, and then press the sof...

  • Page 3206

    Vol.3-719 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.20 security mode pressing the “security” button on dt700 series terminal starts up security mode, which can restrict the tele- phony server provided service features and any configuration menu operation following the “menu” key. [service conditions] (1) th...

  • Page 3207

    Vol.3-720 chapter 4 configuration setup (5) failed in password entry three times, the terminal user cannot cancel security mode for 10 minutes. This state is called “cancel locked.” when cancel-locked terminal restarts for some reason, security mode is not canceled. (6) to make a call of voice call ...

  • Page 3208

    Vol.3-721 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] release security mode security lock will be released. Please input a password. Cancel ok bk password error. Retry? Cancel ok incorrect security code password entered. Ok step 1: while the security mode is in service (while the lcd displaying screen saver),...

  • Page 3209

    Vol.3-722 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.20.2 sip terminal authentication and voip encryption while the security mode is in service, terminal users can set data for sip terminal authentication and voip encryption. [1] configuration setting on terminal note: refer to sip terminal authentication [s...

  • Page 3210

    Vol.3-723 chapter 4 configuration setup [auth mode] 1.Disable 2.Enable cancel ok [one time password] input a password. Xxxxxxxxxx cancel ok bk [encryption] 1.Authentication mode 2.One time password 3.Authentication status exit step 4: on [auth mode] menu, select “2. Enable”, then press the software ...

  • Page 3211

    Vol.3-724 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1: select [sip settings] → [encryption] → [authentication mode]. Step 2: select the [enable] parameter, and click the “ok” button. Step 3: select [sip settings] → [encryption] → [one time password]. Step 4: ent...

  • Page 3212

    Vol.3-725 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.20.3 emergency call while the security mode is in service, terminal user can originate an emergency call to pre-assigned number by handset’s off-hook operation on emergency menu. Note: • emergency call can be set for firmware version 3.0.0.0 (dt730g with f...

  • Page 3213

    Vol.3-726 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] emergency call number assignment register the destination number for emergency call on configuration menu of terminal. Up to three desti- nations can be assigned. [config] 4.Security 5.Terminal information 6.Application setting cancel save 1. Network setti...

  • Page 3214

    Vol.3-727 chapter 4 configuration setup [emergency dial 1] input an emergency dial bk cancel ok [app settings] 4.Screen saver url 5.Emergency call 3.Incoming popup exit [config] 4.Security 5.Terminal information 6.Application setting cancel save step 4: enter the destination number for emergency cal...

  • Page 3215

    Vol.3-728 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] emergency call origination emergency call? Unlock invalid dial 0123 step 1: while the security mode is in service (while the lcd displaying screen saver), go off-hook the handset to display emergency call menu. Step 2: dial an emergency number using digit ...

  • Page 3216

    Vol.3-729 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.21 lldp and lldp-med this section explains how to assign data for link layer discovery protocol (lldp) and lldp-media endpoint discovery (lldp-med) on dt700 series terminals. Dt700 series supports lldp, a standard neighbor discovery protocol, and can excha...

  • Page 3217

    Vol.3-730 chapter 4 configuration setup lldp fast start dt700 series usually transmits lldp packets at the interval (30 seconds by default) specified by lldp packet transmission interval (transmit interval). However, this may cause slow med device configu- ration due to the detection delay. In order...

  • Page 3218

    Vol.3-731 chapter 4 configuration setup • cisco catalyst 3560 series ios release 12.2 or higher (4) settings for lldp and lldp-med features will be only valid after restarting the dt700 series terminal. (5) transmission and reception of lldp packets is performed after ieee802.1x authentication. (6) ...

  • Page 3219

    Vol.3-732 chapter 4 configuration setup (13) when the lldp transparent mode is enabled, dt700 series forwards lldp packets between the lan and pc ports. In this case, the lldp-capable device (switch) will recognize the dt700 series terminal and the pc connected to the terminal as its neighbor. (14) ...

  • Page 3220

    Vol.3-733 chapter 4 configuration setup mac/phy configuration/ status tlv auto-negotiation support/ status auto-negotiation support/ status 0x02 (when speed&duplex on the lan port is set to au- tomatic) 0x01 (when speed&duplex on the lan port is set to other than automatic) pmd auto-negotiation ad- ...

  • Page 3221

    Vol.3-734 chapter 4 configuration setup network policy tlv [1] application type application type to which the network policy applies 1 (voice) u flag to indicate whether the information is known or un- known in the network policy request in the lldp auto setting mode; 1 (unknown) otherwise; 0 (defin...

  • Page 3222

    Vol.3-735 chapter 4 configuration setup note 5: if dscp value (set value for sip tos) of network policy [2] is equal to that of network policy [1] (set value for rtp tos), the tlv will not be advertised. Note 6: for firmware version 4.0.0.0 or earlier (except for dt730g), only “dt700 series” is disp...

  • Page 3223

    Vol.3-736 chapter 4 configuration setup received lldp tlv tlv description received data availability online monitoring basic management chassis id tlv chassis id receivable viewed (info only: ip ad- dress, mac address) port id tlv port id receivable viewed (info only) time to live tlv length of time...

  • Page 3224

    Vol.3-737 chapter 4 configuration setup [conditions for lldp auto setting] (1) to enable the lldp auto setting mode, an lldp packet needs to contain a network policy tlv with unknown policy flag (u) set to “0.” if more than one network policy tlv is contained in a lldp packet, all of their unknown p...

  • Page 3225

    Vol.3-738 chapter 4 configuration setup (5) the lldp auto setting is performed for each setting. (6) the configuration data assigned to dt700 series terminal is used until the lldp data configured by the lldp auto setting is applied. (7) for setting items with invalid data, the lldp auto setting is ...

  • Page 3226

    Vol.3-739 chapter 4 configuration setup to configure vlan priority, dt700 series needs to receive an lldp packet containing one or more net- work policy tlvs. Vlan priority is determined based on the received network tlvs meeting the condi- tions below: note: for tlv definition, refer to the relevan...

  • Page 3227

    Vol.3-740 chapter 4 configuration setup (17) the lcd displays the following message during the lldp auto setting, including lldp packet reception. Lldp receiving....

  • Page 3228

    Vol.3-741 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.21.2 how to enable lldp and lldp-med step 1: on [config] menu, select “1. Network settings.” [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save a step 4: the lcd displays [lldp settings] screen. Select “1. Lldp mode.” step 2: the...

  • Page 3229

    Vol.3-742 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: the lcd displays [lldp settings] screen. B a step 7: on [lldp settings] menu, select “2. Auto setting mode.” [rx waiting time] ok 1-60 (second) 15 step 9: the lcd displays [rx waiting time] menu. Exit [lldp settings] 1.Lldp mode 2.Auto setting mode 3.R...

  • Page 3230

    Vol.3-743 chapter 4 configuration setup c b step 13: the lcd displays [hold multiplier] setting screen. Step 10: the lcd displays [lldp settings] menu. Select “4. Transmit interval.” step 12: the lcd displays [lldp settings] menu. Select “5. Hold multiplier.” exit [lldp settings] 4.Transmit interval...

  • Page 3231

    Vol.3-744 chapter 4 configuration setup d c step 17: the lcd displays [transparent mode] setting screen. Step 14: the lcd displays [lldp settings] menu. Select “6. Fast start count.” step 16: the lcd displays [lldp settings] menu. Select “7. Transparent mode.” [fast start count] ok 1-10 (times) 3 bk...

  • Page 3232

    Vol.3-745 chapter 4 configuration setup e d step 18: the lcd displays [lldp settings] menu. Select “8. Asset id.” exit [lldp settings] 7.Transparent mode 8.Asset id 1.Lldp mode bk bk [asset id] ok 1-32 (digits) - cancel - set the asset id using digit keys for the lldp packet to be transmitted. - you...

  • Page 3233

    Vol.3-746 chapter 4 configuration setup end step 22: the lcd returns to [network settings] menu. Press the software key for “exit”. E [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save step 23: the lcd returns to [config] menu. Press the software key for “save” to save set...

  • Page 3234

    Vol.3-747 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.22 spare/backup ip this section explains data assignment of spare/backup ip. Even if dt700 series fails to obtain an ip address from dhcp server, the dt700 series can connect to the telephony server using spare/backup ip address. Either of the following wi...

  • Page 3235

    Vol.3-748 chapter 4 configuration setup backup ip if you set the following information when substitute ip address mode is backup ip, dt700 series can save the following information which has been obtained from the dhcp server in advance so that dt700 series can use the information as the substitute ...

  • Page 3236

    Vol.3-749 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.22.1 service conditions (1) this service is available for dt700 series equipped with firmware version 4.0.0.0 or later. Note: for dt730g, available for firmware version 1.0.0.0 or later. (2) to use the spare ip/backup ip function, dhcp mode needs to be ena...

  • Page 3237

    Vol.3-750 chapter 4 configuration setup note: when no higher priority data is set in the configuration, the lower priority data will be used without using the default data. When no data exists in all the groups, the default data of the lowest priority will be used. (9) even if the dhcp server allows...

  • Page 3238

    Vol.3-751 chapter 4 configuration setup (21) when the substitute ip address is out of service, the lcd displays the following error message. Dt700 se- ries retries to obtain the ip address from the dhcp server when the certain period of time has elapsed since the lcd displays the error, or a user of...

  • Page 3239

    Vol.3-752 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.22.2 how to set the substitute ip address step 1: on [config] menu, select “1. Network settings.” [config] 1.Network settings 2.Sip settings 3.Maintenance settings cancel save a step 4: the lcd displays [spare ip settings] screen. Select “1. Spare/backup i...

  • Page 3240

    Vol.3-753 chapter 4 configuration setup step 6: the lcd displays [spare ip settings] menu. Select “2. Network settings.” b a step 7: the lcd displays [network settings] menu. Step 8: on [network settings] menu, select “1. Ip address.” assign the ip address using the digit keys. [network settings] ex...

  • Page 3241

    Vol.3-754 chapter 4 configuration setup c b step 10: on [network settings] menu, select “3. Subnet mask.” assign the subnet mask using the digit keys. [subnet mask] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0. 0 bk cancel ok [network settings] exit 1.Ip address 2.Default gateway 3.Subnet mask step 11: the lcd displays [networ...

  • Page 3242

    Vol.3-755 chapter 4 configuration setup d c step 14: on [network settings] menu, select “4. Dns address.” assign the dns address using digit keys. [dns address] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0. 0 bk cancel ok [network settings] exit 4. Dns address 1. Ip address 2. Default gateway step 15: the lcd displays [network...

  • Page 3243

    Vol.3-756 chapter 4 configuration setup e d step 18: the lcd displays the selected [server address] or [server port] setting screen. Step 19: the lcd displays [sip settings] menu. [sip settings] 1.2nd server address 2.3rd server address 3.4th server address exit [2nd server address] *'for'.' 0. 0. 0...

  • Page 3244

    Vol.3-757 chapter 4 configuration setup end step 20: the lcd returns to [spare ip settings] menu. Press the software key for “exit.” step 23: the lcd returns to [network settings] menu. Press the software key for “exit”. [network settings] exit 1.Ip address 2.Default gateway 3.Subnet mask e step 21:...

  • Page 3245

    Vol.3-758 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.23 file downloading this section explains how to update program and how to download music-on-hold file on dt700 series termi- nal using configuration menu. Ftp/tftp server is required for file downloading. 6.2.23.1 before downloading before downloading pro...

  • Page 3246

    Vol.3-759 chapter 4 configuration setup note: after downloading, the parameters assigned on each configuration menu may return to factory default. Be sure to write down the assigned value before starting the downloading procedure. Caution: observe the following while program downloading: • do not tu...

  • Page 3247

    Vol.3-760 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.23.2 downloading procedure program downloading procedure is explained. Also program downloading specifying the file name is available. [1] configuration setting on terminal [download menu] 1.Download files 2.Download address 3.Protocol back ok step 1: prep...

  • Page 3248

    Vol.3-761 chapter 4 configuration setup step 5: on [protocol] screen, select the file server's protocol type "1. Ftp" or "2. Tftp, and then press the software key for "ok." step 6: the lcd displays [download menu]. Select "4. Ftp settings". Step 7: on [ftp settings] menu, select "1. User id". [ftp s...

  • Page 3249

    Vol.3-762 chapter 4 configuration setup step 14: on [download menu], select "2. Download address." [password] ******** bk back ok step 13: the lcd displays [ftp settings] menu. Press the software key for "back" to return to [download menu]. [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Folder back ok step 1...

  • Page 3250

    Vol.3-763 chapter 4 configuration setup step 16: the lcd displays [download menu] screen. Select "1. Download files." step 15: the lcd displays [download address] screen. Assign the ip address of ftp/tftp server using digit keys. [hold music] moh.Wav bk cancel exec [download menu] 1.Download files 2...

  • Page 3251

    Vol.3-764 chapter 4 configuration setup step 21: following step 1 for (b) configuration, boot & program, flash memory, voice, translation file downloading, on [config] menu, select "3. Maintenance." step 20: when you want to change the download file name, perform this step. [ring tone] ringmusic.Wav...

  • Page 3252

    Vol.3-765 chapter 4 configuration setup f e step 25: the lcd displays [download menu]. Select "4. Ftp settings". Step 26: on [ftp settings] menu, select "1. User id". [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Folder exit [user id] xxxxxxxxxxx bk cancel ok [download menu] 1.Download files 2.Download addr...

  • Page 3253

    Vol.3-766 chapter 4 configuration setup step 32: the lcd displays [ftp settings] menu. Press the software key for "exit" to return to [download menu]. [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Folder exit step 30: the lcd displays [ftp settings] menu. Select "3. Folder." [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Passw...

  • Page 3254

    Vol.3-767 chapter 4 configuration setup step 35: the lcd displays [download menu] screen. Select "1. Download files." [download menu] 1.Download files 2.Download address 3.Protocol exit step 36: on [download files] menu, select the download file type and then press the software key for "ok." [downlo...

  • Page 3255

    Vol.3-768 chapter 4 configuration setup saving... [ ] step 39: the terminal starts downloading. "downloading..." flashes on the lcd. End h note: do not power off the terminal during the lcd displaying "saving...". It may cause trouble in dt700 series starting up. Step 40: the lcd displays the messag...

  • Page 3256

    Vol.3-769 chapter 4 configuration setup note: in the case of download failure, the lcd displays the message below. The following table lists the points to be checked. Try downloading again. When the lcd responses “download failed” message again even after some retry, the memory of the ter- minal may...

  • Page 3257

    Vol.3-770 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3: enter the parameters below and then click the “ok” button. The terminal starts downloading. [protocol] : select the protocol of the file server storing download file. [download address] : enter the ip address of ftp/tftp server. [folder] : enter the fo...

  • Page 3258

    Vol.3-771 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.24 online monitoring online monitoring menu supports displaying the information of configuration parameter settings and the voice related data (qos setting) on the lcd of dt700 series. In addition, ping command is available to check the network connection....

  • Page 3259

    Vol.3-772 chapter 4 configuration setup the lcd can list three lines for dt750/dt730/dt730g series and two lines for dt710 series per page. Pressing the software key for “up” and “down” will scroll one line up/down. Menu list [2] exit online monitoring menu pressing the “exit” key (lower left of the...

  • Page 3260

    Vol.3-773 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.24.2 qos to display rtp packet related information by qos menu, follow the steps below. Note 1: the maximum number to be displayed is “99999999”. Even if the number of packet-loss events exceeds 99999999, “99999999” is displayed on the lcd. Note 2: when a ...

  • Page 3261

    Vol.3-774 chapter 4 configuration setup note 3: the display patterns for codec and payload are as follows: 6.2.24.3 system information to display the current configuration setting by system information menu, follow the steps below. Codec payload g.711 μ 10, 20, 30, 40 g.711a 10, 20, 30, 40 g.729a 10...

  • Page 3262

    Vol.3-775 chapter 4 configuration setup • select “1. Network settings.” to display the network related parameters assigned in “network settings” in [config] menu. → go to [1] network settings. • select “2. Sip settings.” to display the sip server related parameters assigned in “sip settings” of [con...

  • Page 3263

    Vol.3-776 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] network settings dhcp mode enable up down prev step 1: when “1. Network settings” is selected, the lcd displays the following “dhcp mode.” step 2: switch the page to display other parameters by pressing the software key for “up” and “down.” • dhcp mode - -...

  • Page 3264

    Vol.3-777 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters in network settings note 1: ip address of dt700 series is displayed in the following way. • “(dhcp)” is displayed when the parameter is obtained from dhcp server. • “(spare ip)” is displayed when the parameter is assigned by spare ip function. Up do...

  • Page 3265

    Vol.3-778 chapter 4 configuration setup • “(backup ip)” is displayed when the parameter is assigned by backup ip function. Note 2: depending on the direction by the telephony server and the configuration setting, pc port has the follow- ing three patterns of display. Note 3: dt730g does not support ...

  • Page 3266

    Vol.3-779 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] sip settings user id xxxxxxxx up down prev step 1: when “2.Sip settings” is selected, the lcd displays the user id for digest authentication as follows. Step 2: switch the page to display other parameters by pressing the software key for “up” and “down.” •...

  • Page 3267

    Vol.3-780 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters in sip settings press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. Press...

  • Page 3268

    Vol.3-781 chapter 4 configuration setup note: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is registered. Note 1: when the assigned parameter cannot be displayed in one page, the lcd displays as follows. Note 2: about ip a...

  • Page 3269

    Vol.3-782 chapter 4 configuration setup [3] audio & visual settings confirmation tone on up down prev 4.Maintenance settings 5.Terminal information 3.Audio&visual settings exit up down prev step 1: when “3. Audio & visual settings” is selected, the lcd displays the following. Step 2: switch the page...

  • Page 3270

    Vol.3-783 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters in audio & visual settings up down prev off / on confirmation tone up down prev default / download data music systm information main menu press up key. Press up key. Press down key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press d...

  • Page 3271

    Vol.3-784 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: depending on the direction by the telephony server and the configuration settings, rtp alarm parameter has the following four patterns of display. Note 2: depending on the direction by the telephony server and the configuration settings, dtmf play mode...

  • Page 3272

    Vol.3-785 chapter 4 configuration setup [4] maintenance setting download address xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx prev 4.Maintenance settings 5.Terminal information 1.Network settings exit up down prev step 1: when “4. Maintenance settings” is selected, the lcd displays the following. • download address - - - - - - ...

  • Page 3273

    Vol.3-786 chapter 4 configuration setup [5] terminal settings 2.Sip settings 5.Terminal information 1.Network settings exit up down prev step 1: when “5. Terminal settings” is selected, the lcd displays the following. Note: the destination information of the unit attached “(yyyyyy)” is displayed fro...

  • Page 3274

    Vol.3-787 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters in terminal settings up down prev xx.Xx.Xx.Xx hardware version up down prev xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx mac address system information main menu press up key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. Press down key. Up down prev xx.Xx.Xx.Xx...

  • Page 3275

    Vol.3-788 chapter 4 configuration setup [6] lldp settings step 1: when “6. Lldp settings” is selected, the lcd displays the following. Step 2: when the received lldp data is valid, switch the page to display other parameters by pressing the software key for “up” and “down.” • manufacturer name- - - ...

  • Page 3276

    Vol.3-789 chapter 4 configuration setup a • vlan id (voice)- - - - - - - - - - -tlv element “vlan id” of network policy tlv in the re- ceived lldp packet • l2 priority (voice) - - - - - - - - - -tlv element “l2 priority” of network policy tlv in the received lldp packet • dscp value (voice) - - - - ...

  • Page 3277

    Vol.3-790 chapter 4 configuration setup parameters in lldp settings up down prev lldp receive data valid up down prev manufacturer name xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx systm information main menu press up key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. Press up key. Press down key. Press dow...

  • Page 3278

    Vol.3-791 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.24.4 ping to check the network connection by sending ping packet to specified ip address, follow the steps below. Pingadr? Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx use '*' for. Bk cancel ok dhcp server down prev ping... Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx prev retry ping... Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx 1.Ok 2. St...

  • Page 3279

    Vol.3-792 chapter 4 configuration setup ping... Xxx.Xxx.Xxx.Xxx 1.Ok 2.Ok 3.Ok 4.Ok complete prev retry step 5: “complete” is displayed after sending ping four times. Step 6: to display online monitoring’s other menu, press the software key for “prev.” to close online monitoring menu, refer to secti...

  • Page 3280

    Vol.3-793 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.25 font download feature this feature enables a terminal to support various languages using fonts which are not included in the standard firmware. When using this feature, download the font data file called “language pack” from configuration menu or web pr...

  • Page 3281

    Vol.3-794 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.25.2 before downloading before downloading the font data file, prepare the following: • dt700 series • device with ftp/tftp server function (pc) • hub and lan cable for connecting dt700 series and ftp/tftp server to network • download file note 1: for firm...

  • Page 3282

    Vol.3-795 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.2.25.3 downloading procedure following shows the procedure of program download. Also program download by specifying a file name is available. [1] configuration setting on terminal step 1: prepare download file on ftp/tftp server. Step 2: on [config] menu, se...

  • Page 3283

    Vol.3-796 chapter 4 configuration setup b a step 6: the lcd displays [download menu]. Select "4. Ftp settings". Step 7: on [ftp settings] menu, select "1. User id". [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Folder exit [user id] xxxxxxxxxxx bk cancel ok [download menu] 1.Download files 2.Download addres...

  • Page 3284

    Vol.3-797 chapter 4 configuration setup step 13: the lcd displays [ftp settings] menu. Press the software key for "exit" to return to [download menu]. [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Password 3.Folder exit step 11: the lcd displays [ftp settings] menu. Select "3. Folder." [ftp settings] 1.User id 2.Passw...

  • Page 3285

    Vol.3-798 chapter 4 configuration setup step 16: the lcd displays [download menu] screen. Select "1. Download files." [download menu] 1.Download files 2.Download address 3.Protocol exit step 17: on [download files] menu, select "7. Language pack" and then press the software key for "ok." [download f...

  • Page 3286

    Vol.3-799 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the following table lists the points to be checked. Try downloading again. When the lcd returns “download failed” messages even after some retry, the memory of the terminal may be damaged. Contact a maintenance personnel. Cause countermeasures target dow...

  • Page 3287

    Vol.3-800 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] configuration setting by web programming step 1:prepare download file on ftp/tftp server. (see step 1 in [1] configuration setting on terminal.) step 2:select [maintenance] → [download menu] → [download files] → [language pack] note 1 . Note 1: for firmwar...

  • Page 3288

    Vol.3-801 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.3 configuration menu list (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0) this section lists the configuration menu used for dt700 series configuration setting. Dt750 series, dt730 series, and dt710 series columns on the tables below show whether the menu is available or not for ...

  • Page 3289

    Vol.3-802 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: this menu has the same function with “2. Directory (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0)” → “2. Edit.” note 3: the following shows the operating procedure from directory search to directory add: step 1:this directory search menu has the same function with “2. Dire...

  • Page 3290

    Vol.3-803 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Directory (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0) parameter description default dt750 series dt730 series 1. Personal displays terminal phonebook note 4 - x x 1. Search searches phonebook. - x x 1. Group searches by specifying group. - x x 1. Default searches through “de...

  • Page 3291

    Vol.3-804 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Edit edits the data in terminal phonebook. - x x 1. Name registers name. - x x 2. Group allocates group. Default x x 1. Default 2. Colleagues 3. Vips 4. Family 5. Friends 6. Group6 ~ 20. Group 20 3. Tel #1 ~ 6. Tel #4 registers telephone number to tel #1 ~ ...

  • Page 3292

    Vol.3-805 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (earlier tha...

  • Page 3293

    Vol.3-806 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Call func. (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0) not used. (this menu depends on the telephony server.) 1. Service starts up xml browser. - x x x 2. Im not used. - - - - 5. Setting (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0) parameter description default dt750 series dt730 series 1. Use...

  • Page 3294

    Vol.3-807 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Illumination note 2 sets lamp indication pattern for incoming call termination. - x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for the lamp indication of incoming call termination. *the lamp illuminates red when automatic is selected. Automatic x x 1. Disable lamp indic...

  • Page 3295

    Vol.3-808 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Local volume selects whether to display volume gage when adjusting the volume level. Automatic x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for volume gage display. 1. Disable volume gage is not displayed. 2. Enable volume gage is displayed. 3. Screen saver not used. - ...

  • Page 3296

    Vol.3-809 chapter 4 configuration setup 7. Advanced sets other data for display (dt750 series (color lcd) only). - x - 1. Wallpaper select not used. - - - 2. Touch panel selects whether to use touch-sensitive panel function. Enable x - 1. Disable touch-sensitive panel is off. 2. Enable touch-sensiti...

  • Page 3297

    Vol.3-810 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: do not go the handset off-hook when headset is used. Note 2: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (earlier than fw 2.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd ...

  • Page 3298

    Vol.3-811 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Dhcp mode selects whether to use dhcp protocol. Enable x x x 1. Disable dhcp is not used. 2. Enable dhcp is used. 2. Ip address sets dt700 series terminal’s ip address. 0.0.0.0 x x x 3. Default gateway sets default router’s ip address. 0.0.0.0 x x x 4. Subn...

  • Page 3299

    Vol.3-812 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Sip settings sets sip related data. - x x x 1. Sip user sets user data. - x x x 1. User id sets user id for digest authentication. - x x x 2. Password sets password for digest authentication. - x x x 3. Extension number not used. - - - - 4. Backup logon not...

  • Page 3300

    Vol.3-813 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Area id sets the area (country) using dt700 series. Automatic x x x 0. Automatic the telephony server side setting is applied when automatic is selected. 1. Japan selects the area (country) note: area ids allowed on the telepho- ny server can be selected. 2...

  • Page 3301

    Vol.3-814 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Extra function sets expanded data related to sip packet. - x x x 1. Retransmit interval selects retransmit interval of register and subscribe message during the registration process. Standard x x x 1. Standard sip standard retransmit interval is used (500ms...

  • Page 3302

    Vol.3-815 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Data clear initializes dt700 series selecting the initialization mode. - x x x 1. Factory value initializes dt700 series to factory default. - x x x 2. Terminal data clears terminal data on dt700 series. - x x x 3. Personal data clears personal data on dt70...

  • Page 3303

    Vol.3-816 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Data maintenance sets data maintenance related. - x x x 1. Backup executes data backup. - x x x 1. All data executes backup for all the configuration setting and data. Alldata.Tg z x x x 2. Terminal data executes backup for terminal setting and data. Termin...

  • Page 3304

    Vol.3-817 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Security sets security related data. - x x x 1. Web programming selects whether to use web programming. Enable x x n 1. Disable web programming is disabled. 2. Enable web programming is enabled. 2. Push server sets xml’s push server related data. - x x n 1....

  • Page 3305

    Vol.3-818 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is registered. Note 2: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- t...

  • Page 3306

    Vol.3-819 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.4 configuration menu list (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0) this section lists the configuration menu used for dt700 series configuration setting. Dt750 series, dt730 series, and dt710 series columns on the tables below show whether t...

  • Page 3307

    Vol.3-820 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: this menu has the same function with “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” → “2. Edit.” note 3: the following shows the operating procedure from directory search to directory add: step 1:this directory search menu has...

  • Page 3308

    Vol.3-821 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0) parameter description default dt750 series dt730 series 1. Personal displays terminal phonebook note 4 - x x 1. Search searches phonebook. - x x 1. Group searches by specifying group. - x x...

  • Page 3309

    Vol.3-822 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Edit edits the data in terminal phonebook. - x x 1. Name registers name. - x x 2. Group allocates group. Default x x 1. Default 2. Colleagues 3. Vips 4. Family 5. Friends 6. Group6 ~ 20. Group 20 3. Tel #1 ~ 6. Tel #4 registers telephone number to tel #1 ~ ...

  • Page 3310

    Vol.3-823 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settin...

  • Page 3311

    Vol.3-824 chapter 4 configuration setup note 6: for firmware versions earlier than 4.0.0.0, the default is “automatic.” 4. Call func. (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0) not used. (this menu depends on the telephony server.) 3. Tool (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than...

  • Page 3312

    Vol.3-825 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. External call note 6 sets illumination for external call. - x x - 0. Automatic sets automatic for the lamp indication of incoming call termination. Automatic x x - 1. Disable lamp indication is off. 2. Red specifies the color of lamp indication for incoming...

  • Page 3313

    Vol.3-826 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Hold music sets music-on-hold. Default x x x 1. Default applies the default music (minuet). 2. Download applies the downloaded music. 5. Prefix sets prefix number. - x x - 1. Prefix 1 ~ 3. Prefix 3 sets number to prefix 1 ~ prefix 3. - x x - 3. Display sets...

  • Page 3314

    Vol.3-827 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Language selects the language on date and time display. Automatic x x x note 10 0. Automatic sets automatic for language setting on date and time display. 1. Japanese selected language is displayed on date and time display. 2. Nec english 3. Nec portuguese ...

  • Page 3315

    Vol.3-828 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.Turn off display note 12 sets the data when turning off the backlight of the display automatically. - x - - 1.Turn off display mode sets whether turn off display mode is in service. App priority 1.Disable disables turn off display mode. 2.Enable enables turn...

  • Page 3316

    Vol.3-829 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: do not go the handset off-hook when headset is used. Note 2: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Rin...

  • Page 3317

    Vol.3-830 chapter 4 configuration setup note 10: only automatic/japanese/nec english are available. A setting on the telephony server is applied when automatic has been set. Note 11: this service is available for dt700 series running firmware version 2.2.0.0 or later. Note 12: this service is availa...

  • Page 3318

    Vol.3-831 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Pc port settings sets pc port. - x x x 1. Speed&duplex sets communication speed of pc port. Autonego x x x 1. Autonego autonegotiation 2. 100m full 100mbps in full-duplex mode 3. 100m half 100mbps in half-duplex mode 4. 10m full 10mbps in full-duplex mode 5...

  • Page 3319

    Vol.3-832 chapter 4 configuration setup 3.Rx waiting time for auto setting, sets the waiting time until dt700 series receives lldp packets. (1-60 seconds) 15 x x x 1-60 (second) 4.Transmit interval sets intervals to transmit lldp packets. (5- 32768 seconds) 30 x x x 5-32768 (second) 5.Hold multiplie...

  • Page 3320

    Vol.3-833 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Sip settings sets sip related data. - x x x 1. Sip user sets user data. - x x x 1. User id sets user id for digest authentication. - x x x 2. Password sets password for digest authentication. - x x x 3. Extension number not used. - - - - 4. Backup logon not...

  • Page 3321

    Vol.3-834 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Area id sets the area (country) using dt700 series. Automatic x x x 0. Automatic telephony server side setting is applied when automatic is selected. 1. Japan selects the area (country) note: area ids allowed on the telepho- ny server can be selected. 2. Am...

  • Page 3322

    Vol.3-835 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Extra function sets expanded data related to sip packet. - x x x 1. Retransmit interval selects retransmit interval of register and subscribe message during the registration process. Standard x x x 1. Standard sip standard retransmit interval is used (500ms...

  • Page 3323

    Vol.3-836 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Maintenance settings sets maintenance related data. - x x x 1. Download menu downloads specified file to dt700 series. - x x x 1. Download files specifies download file name for each file type. - x x x 1. Config downloads configuration file. Config.Tgz x x ...

  • Page 3324

    Vol.3-837 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Data clear initializes dt700 series selecting the initialization mode. - x x x 1. Factory value initializes dt700 series to factory default. - x x x 2. Terminal data clears terminal data on dt700 series. - x x x 3. Personal data clears personal data on dt70...

  • Page 3325

    Vol.3-838 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Data maintenance sets data maintenance related. - x x x 1. Backup executes data backup. - x x x 1. All data executes backup for all the configuration setting and data. Alldata.Tg z x x x 2. Terminal data executes backup for terminal setting and data. Termin...

  • Page 3326

    Vol.3-839 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Speaker test tests the speaker. - x x x 1. Japan a dt for japan is heard in maximum volume. - x x x 2. America a dt for north america is heard in maximum volume. - x x x 7. Receiver test note 14 receiver test for a handset - x x x 4. Security sets security ...

  • Page 3327

    Vol.3-840 chapter 4 configuration setup 1. Xml settings specifies xml browser function. - x x x 1. Terminal id note 6 login number for accessing xml server. - x x x 2. Xml browser note 6 sets xml browser related data. - x x x 1. Home url note 5 sets the address of the contents to access when startin...

  • Page 3328

    Vol.3-841 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is registered. Note 2: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- t...

  • Page 3329

    Vol.3-842 chapter 4 configuration setup note 13: this service is available for dt700 series equipped with firmware version 3.0.3.0 or later. Note 14: this service is available for dt700 series equipped with firmware version 4.0.0.0 or later. Note 15: this service is available for dt750 equipped with...

  • Page 3330

    Vol.3-843 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.5 dt730g series configuration menu list (fw 1.0.0.0 or later) this section lists the configuration menu used for dt730g series configuration setting. Dt730g (12/24cg), and dt730g (12/24dg) columns on the tables below show whether the menu is available or not...

  • Page 3331

    Vol.3-844 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: this menu has the same function with “2. Directory” → “2. Edit.” note 3: the following shows the operating procedure from directory search to directory add: step 1:this directory search menu has the same function with “2. Directory” → “1. Personal” → “...

  • Page 3332

    Vol.3-845 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Directory parameter description default dt730g (12/24cg) dt730g (12/24dg) 1. Personal displays terminal phonebook note 4 - x x 1. Search searches phonebook. - x x 1. Group searches by specifying group. - x x 1. Default searches through “default” group. - x ...

  • Page 3333

    Vol.3-846 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Tel #1 ~ 6. Tel #4 registers telephone number to tel #1 ~ tel #4. - x x category set allocates category to tel #1 ~ tel #4. Company x x 1. Company 2. Mobile 3. Voice mail 4. Home 5. Others priority flag selects whether to set priority for tel #1 ~ tel #4. (...

  • Page 3334

    Vol.3-847 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory” - “3.Group setting” - 2.Ringing tone/...

  • Page 3335

    Vol.3-848 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: unavailable (not configured) services appear dimmed on the menu. 3. Service parameter description default dt730g (12/24cg) dt730g (12/24dg) 3. Service note 1 starts up xml browser and instant message tool. - x x 1. Service 1 starts up xml browser. - x ...

  • Page 3336

    Vol.3-849 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Ring tone note 2 sets ringing tone for incoming call termination. - x x 1. External call note 4 sets ringing tone for external call termination. * tone type 1 rings when automatic is selected. Automatic x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for the ringing tone o...

  • Page 3337

    Vol.3-850 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.Internal call note 5 sets illumination for internal call. * the lamp illuminates red when automatic is selected. - x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for the lamp indication of incoming call termination. Automatic x x 1. Disable lamp indication is off. 2. Red s...

  • Page 3338

    Vol.3-851 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Display sets display related data. - x x 1. Time format switches 12-hour/24-hour indication. Automatic note 7 x x 0. Automatic applies the time indication on the telephony server. 1. 12 hour indication 12-hour indication 2. 24 hour indication 24-hour indica...

  • Page 3339

    Vol.3-852 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Language selects the language on date and time display. Automatic note 9 x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for language setting on date and time display. 1. Japanese selected language is displayed on date and time display. 2. Nec english 3. Nec portuguese 4. ...

  • Page 3340

    Vol.3-853 chapter 4 configuration setup 4.Turn off display sets the data when turning off the backlight of the display automatically. - x - 1.Turn off display mode sets whether turn off display mode is in service. App priority 1.Disable disables turn off display mode. 2.Enable enables turn off displ...

  • Page 3341

    Vol.3-854 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: do not go the handset off-hook when headset is used. 2. Download sets download related data. - x x 1. Download files downloads files of music-on-hold, ringing tone, and phonebook. 1. Hold music downloads a sound file used for music-on- hold. Moh.Wav x ...

  • Page 3342

    Vol.3-855 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory” - “3.Group setting” - 2.Ringing tone/...

  • Page 3343

    Vol.3-856 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Phone depending on the home url setting, this menu is displayed as follows. • when home url is not registered, home screen is displayed and the menu name is displayed as “phone”. • when home url is registered, xml application screen is displayed, and the me...

  • Page 3344

    Vol.3-857 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Pc port settings sets pc port. - x x 1. Speed&duplex sets communication speed of pc port. Autonego x x 1. Autonego autonegotiation 2. 100m full 100mbps in full-duplex mode 3. 100m half 100mbps in half-duplex mode 4. 10m full 10mbps in full-duplex mode 5. 10...

  • Page 3345

    Vol.3-858 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.Auto setting mode sets whether to perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. Enable x x 1. Disable dt700 series does not perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. 2. Enable dt700 series performs data setting a...

  • Page 3346

    Vol.3-859 chapter 4 configuration setup 7.Spare ip settings sets information related to spare ip/backup ip. - - - 1.Spare/backup ip mode specifies which mode is to be used for spare ip settings. Disable x x 1. Disable both spare and backup ips are disabled. 2. Spare ip spare ip is enabled. 3. Backup...

  • Page 3347

    Vol.3-860 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Server address sets ip address or uri of sip server. Note 1 , note 2 - x x 1. 1st server address sets ip address or fully qualified domain name (fqdn) of 1st ~ 4th sip server. - x x 2. 2nd server address 3. 3rd server address 4. 4th server address 5. Regist...

  • Page 3348

    Vol.3-861 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Area id sets the area (country) using dt700 series. Automatic x x 0. Automatic the telephony server side setting is applied when automatic is selected. 1. Japan selects the area (country) note: area ids allowed on the tele- phony server can be selected. 2. ...

  • Page 3349

    Vol.3-862 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Extra function sets expanded data related to sip packet. - x x 1. Retransmit interval selects retransmit interval of register and subscribe message during the registration process. Standard x x 1. Standard sip standard retransmit interval is used (500ms, 1s...

  • Page 3350

    Vol.3-863 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Maintenance settings sets maintenance related data. - x x 1. Download menu downloads specified file to dt700 series. - x x 1. Download files specifies download file name for each file type. - x x 1. Boot & program downloads boot and program. 12/24cg: itlisi...

  • Page 3351

    Vol.3-864 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Adjust adjusts lcd, audio, and button kit. - x x 1. Default audio sets audio data. - x x 1. Sidetone volume sets side tone volume [0-7]. 4 x x 2. Send gain sets sending gain of handset [0-31]. 24 x x 3. Receive bias sets receiving bias of handset [0-7]. 0 x...

  • Page 3352

    Vol.3-865 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Lcd contrast adjusts lcd contrast. Area contrast (narrow) - x 0. Area contrast 1. Wide 2. Narrow 5. Auto config selects whether to use auto-config function. Enable x x 1. Disable auto config is not used. 2. Enable auto config is used. 6. Data maintenance se...

  • Page 3353

    Vol.3-866 chapter 4 configuration setup 7. Simple test note 6 changes the terminal to test mode. - x x 1. Call test call test - x x 2. Call test address sets an ip address of the opposite terminal to perform the call test. 10.136.20. 188 x x 3. Key test 1 (random) tests to press the random button. -...

  • Page 3354

    Vol.3-867 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. 802.1x supplicant sets 802.1x authentication related parameter. - x x 1. Supplicant sets whether to use supplicant on dt700 series. Disable x x 1. Disable supplicant is disabled on dt700 series. 2. Enable supplicant is enabled on dt700 series. 2. Eap method...

  • Page 3355

    Vol.3-868 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Application settings sets application data. - x x 1. Xml settings specifies xml browser function. - x x 1. Terminal id note 5 login number for accessing xml server. 0000 x x 2. Xml browser note 5 sets xml browser related data. - x x 1. Home url note 4 sets ...

  • Page 3356

    Vol.3-869 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt730g series terminal is registered. Note 2: for ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/station...

  • Page 3357

    Vol.3-870 chapter 4 configuration setup note 14: a unique number must be assigned to each of the following ports. For rtp self port, 16 ports starting from an assigned port are used. • rtp self port • sip self port • push server port • ipm self port.

  • Page 3358

    Vol.3-871 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.6 configuration menu list (fw 5.0.0.0 or later) this section lists the configuration menu used for dt700 series configuration setting. Dt750 series, dt730 series, and dt710 series columns on the tables below show whether the menu is available or not for each...

  • Page 3359

    Vol.3-872 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: this menu has the same function with “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” → “2. Edit.” note 3: the following shows the operating procedure from directory search to directory add: step 1:this directory search menu has...

  • Page 3360

    Vol.3-873 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Directory (fw 5.0.0.0 or later) parameter description default dt750 series dt730 series 1. Personal displays terminal phonebook note 4 - x x 1. Search searches phonebook. - x x 1. Group searches by specifying group. - x x 1. Default searches through “defaul...

  • Page 3361

    Vol.3-874 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Tel #1 ~ 6. Tel #4 registers telephone number to tel #1 ~ tel #4. - x x category set allocates category to tel #1 ~ tel #4. Company x x 1. Company 2. Mobile 3. Voice mail 4. Home 5. Others priority flag selects whether to set priority for tel #1 ~ tel #4. (...

  • Page 3362

    Vol.3-875 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settin...

  • Page 3363

    Vol.3-876 chapter 4 configuration setup note 6: for dt710 desi-less terminal, “9. Illumination” menu is as shown below. Parameter description default 9. Illumination note 1 sets lamp indication for announcing call termination. Default (follows group settings) note 5 1. Automatic sets automatic to la...

  • Page 3364

    Vol.3-877 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Ring tone note 2 sets ringing tone for incoming call termination. - x x x 1. External call note 4 sets ringing tone for external call termination. * tone type 1 rings when automatic is selected. Automatic x x x 0. Automatic sets automatic for the ringing to...

  • Page 3365

    Vol.3-878 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.Internal call note 5 sets illumination for internal call. * the lamp illuminates red when automatic is selected. - x x - 0. Automatic sets automatic for the lamp indication of incoming call termination. Automatic x x - 1. Disable lamp indication is off. 2. R...

  • Page 3366

    Vol.3-879 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Display sets display related data. - x x x note 13 1. Time format switches 12-hour/24-hour indication. Automatic note 7 x x x 0. Automatic applies the time indication on the telephony server. 1. 12 hour indication 12-hour indication 2. 24 hour indication 24...

  • Page 3367

    Vol.3-880 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Language selects the language on date and time display. Automatic note 10 x x x note 9 0. Automatic sets automatic for language setting on date and time display. 1. Japanese selected language is displayed on date and time display. 2. Nec english 3. Nec port...

  • Page 3368

    Vol.3-881 chapter 4 configuration setup 5.Turn off display sets the data when turning off the backlight of the display automatically. - x - - 1.Turn off display mode sets whether turn off display mode is in service. App priority 1.Disable disables turn off display mode. 2.Enable enables turn off dis...

  • Page 3369

    Vol.3-882 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: do not go the handset off-hook when headset is used. 2. Download sets download related data. - x x x 1. Download files downloads files of music-on-hold, ringing tone, and phonebook. 1. Hold music downloads a sound file used for music- on-hold. Moh.Wav ...

  • Page 3370

    Vol.3-883 chapter 4 configuration setup note 2: the priority order of ringing tone settings is as follows. • 1st priority: ringing tone settings by “2. Directory (not earlier than fw 2.0.0.0 but earlier than fw 5.0.0.0)” - “2.Edit” - 8.Ringing tone/9. Illumination • 2nd priority: ringing tone settin...

  • Page 3371

    Vol.3-884 chapter 4 configuration setup note 12: for dt710 desi-less terminal, the order of menus ([4.Terminal settings] - [1.User setting] - [1.Incoming call]) is as follows. Parameter description default note 1. User setting sets user interface related. - 1. Incoming call sets ringing and lamp ind...

  • Page 3372

    Vol.3-885 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Illumination sets lamp indication pattern for incoming call termination. - 1. External call sets illumination for external call. * the lamp illuminates red when automatic is selected. - • the lamp illumi- nates red when automatic is se- lected. • if an illu...

  • Page 3373

    Vol.3-886 chapter 4 configuration setup note 13: for dt710 desi-less terminal, the order of menus ([4.Terminal settings] - [1.User setting] - [3.Display]) is as follows. Parameter description default note 3. Display sets display related data. - 1. Time format switches 12-hour/24-hour indication. Aut...

  • Page 3374

    Vol.3-887 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Phone depending on the home url setting, this menu is displayed as follows. • when home url is not registered, home screen is displayed and the menu name is displayed as “phone”. • when home url is registered, xml application screen is displayed, and the me...

  • Page 3375

    Vol.3-888 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Pc port settings sets pc port. - x x x 1. Speed&duplex sets communication speed of pc port. Autonego x x x 1. Autonego autonegotiation 2. 100m full 100mbps in full-duplex mode 3. 100m half 100mbps in half-duplex mode 4. 10m full 10mbps in full-duplex mode 5...

  • Page 3376

    Vol.3-889 chapter 4 configuration setup 2.Auto setting mode sets whether to perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. Enable x x x 1. Disable dt700 series does not perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. 2. Enable dt700 series performs data setting...

  • Page 3377

    Vol.3-890 chapter 4 configuration setup 7.Spare ip settings sets information related to spare ip/backup ip. - - - - 1.Spare/backup ip mode specifies which mode is to be used for spare ip settings. Disable x x x 1. Disable both spare and backup ips are disabled. 2. Spare ip spare ip is enabled. 3. Ba...

  • Page 3378

    Vol.3-891 chapter 4 configuration setup 2. Server address sets ip address or uri of sip server. Note 1 , note 2 - x x x 1. 1st server address sets ip address or fully qualified domain name (fqdn) of 1st ~ 4th sip server. - x x x 2. 2nd server address 3. 3rd server address 4. 4th server address 5. Re...

  • Page 3379

    Vol.3-892 chapter 4 configuration setup 5. Area id sets the area (country) using dt700 series. Automatic x x x 0. Automatic the telephony server side setting is applied when automatic is selected. 1. Japan selects the area (country) note: area ids allowed on the telepho- ny server can be selected. 2...

  • Page 3380

    Vol.3-893 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Extra function sets expanded data related to sip packet. - x x x 1. Retransmit interval selects retransmit interval of register and subscribe message during the registration process. Standard x x x 1. Standard sip standard retransmit interval is used (500ms...

  • Page 3381

    Vol.3-894 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Maintenance settings sets maintenance related data. - x x x 1. Download menu downloads specified file to dt700 series. - x x x 1. Download files specifies download file name for each file type. - x x x 1. Config downloads configuration file. Config.Tgz x x ...

  • Page 3382

    Vol.3-895 chapter 4 configuration setup 3. Data clear initializes dt700 series selecting the initialization mode. - x x x 1. Factory value initializes dt700 series to factory default. - x x x 2. Terminal data clears terminal data on dt700 series. - x x x 3. Personal data clears personal data on dt70...

  • Page 3383

    Vol.3-896 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. Lcd contrast adjusts lcd contrast. Area contrast - x - 0. Area contrast 1. Wide 2. Narrow 5. Auto config selects whether to use auto-config function. Enable x x x 1. Disable auto config is not used. 2. Enable auto config is used. 6. Data maintenance sets da...

  • Page 3384

    Vol.3-897 chapter 4 configuration setup 7. Simple test note 7 changes the terminal to test mode. - x x x 1. Call test call test - x x x 2. Call test address sets an ip address of the opposite terminal to perform the call test. 10.136.20. 188 x x x 3. Key test 1 (random) tests to press the random but...

  • Page 3385

    Vol.3-898 chapter 4 configuration setup 4. 802.1x supplicant sets 802.1x authentication related parameter. - x x x 1. Supplicant sets whether to use supplicant on dt700 series. Disable x x x 1. Disable supplicant is disabled on dt700 series. 2. Enable supplicant is enabled on dt700 series. 2. Eap me...

  • Page 3386

    Vol.3-899 chapter 4 configuration setup 6. Application settings sets application data. - x x x 1. Xml settings specifies xml browser function. - x x x 1. Terminal id note 6 login number for accessing xml server. 0000 x x x 2. Xml browser note 6 sets xml browser related data. - x x x 1. Home url note...

  • Page 3387

    Vol.3-900 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is registered. Note 2: for ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations...

  • Page 3388

    Vol.3-901 chapter 4 configuration setup note 14: a unique number must be assigned to each of the following ports. For rtp self port, 16 ports starting from an assigned port are used. • rtp self port • sip self port • push server port • ipm self port note 15: for dt710 desi-less, this menu is display...

  • Page 3389

    Vol.3-902 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.7 configuration menu list for dt770g this section lists the configuration menu used for dt770g configuration setting. On the login window for web programming, enter the user id (default value: admin) and the password (default value: 6633222) to login. Config...

  • Page 3390

    Vol.3-903 chapter 4 configuration setup pc port settings sets pc port. - speed&duplex sets communication speed of pc port. Autonego 1. Autonego autonegotiation 2. 100m full 100mbps in full-duplex mode 3. 100m half 100mbps in half-duplex mode 4. 10m full 10mbps in full-duplex mode 5. 10m half 10mbps ...

  • Page 3391

    Vol.3-904 chapter 4 configuration setup auto setting mode sets whether to perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. Enable 1. Disable dt770g does not perform data setting automatically when lldp packets are received. 2. Enable dt770g performs data setting automatically when ...

  • Page 3392

    Vol.3-905 chapter 4 configuration setup server address sets ip address or uri of sip server. Note 1 , note 2 - 1. 1st server address sets ip address or fully qualified domain name (fqdn) of 1st ~ 4th sip server. 0.0.0.0 2. 2nd server address 3. 3rd server address 4. 4th server address 5. Registrar d...

  • Page 3393

    Vol.3-906 chapter 4 configuration setup area id sets the area (country) using dt770g. Automatic 0. Automatic the telephony server side setting is applied when automatic is selected. 1. Japan selects the area (country) note: area ids allowed on the telephony server can be select- ed. 2. America (cana...

  • Page 3394

    Vol.3-907 chapter 4 configuration setup extra function sets expanded data related to sip packet. - retransmit interval selects retransmit interval of register and subscribe message during the registration process. Standard 1. Standard sip standard retransmit interval is used (500ms, 1s, 2s, 4s, 4s, ...

  • Page 3395

    Vol.3-908 chapter 4 configuration setup maintenance sets maintenance related data. - download menu downloads specified file to dt770g. - download files specifies download file name for each file type. - boot & program downloads boot and program. Itlisipcr.Tgz config downloads configuration file. Con...

  • Page 3396

    Vol.3-909 chapter 4 configuration setup auto config selects whether to use auto-config function. Enable 1. Disable auto config is not used. 2. Enable auto config is used. Data maintenance sets data maintenance related. - backup executes data backup. - 1. All data executes backup for all the configur...

  • Page 3397

    Vol.3-910 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: “sip server” used here refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is registered. Note 2: for ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/stations...

  • Page 3398

    Vol.3-911 chapter 4 configuration setup on the login window for web programming, enter the user id (default value: user) and the password (default value: 0000) to login. Setting parameter description default user setting sets user interface related. - incoming call sets ringing and lamp indication d...

  • Page 3399

    Vol.3-912 chapter 4 configuration setup hold music sets music-on-hold. Default 1. Default applies the default music (minuet). 2. Download applies the downloaded music. Display sets display related data. - language selects the language on date and time display of web page. Automatic 0. Automatic sets...

  • Page 3400

    Vol.3-913 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: tone type 1 rings when automatic is selected. Note 2: a tone will be provided if automatic has been set. Download sets download related data. - download files downloads files of music-on-hold, ringing tone, and phonebook. Hold music downloads a sound f...

  • Page 3401

    Vol.3-914 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.8 error messages the following messages might be displayed when an error occurs during dt700 series setup. Note: “sip server” used in this section refers to the telephony server. The telephony server acts as sip server where dt700 series terminal is register...

  • Page 3402

    Vol.3-915 chapter 4 configuration setup note 1: about ip address of sip server (telephony server), refer to “registration destination of ip devices/sta- tions” in introduction of installation manual. The following messages may be displayed in dt700 series operation. Dt700 series cannot communicate d...

  • Page 3403

    Vol.3-916 chapter 4 configuration setup error messages on dt700 series (others) error messages example action desired station number duplicates already registered one. When “yes” is selected, the dt700 se- ries connected later is starting to oper- ate, and the dt700 series connected earlier will be ...

  • Page 3404

    Vol.3-917 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.9 how to create terminal phonebook file this section explains how to create terminal phonebook file in csv format. [1] file format [2] data assignment the table below shows one entry of group setting data. 20 entries of group data need to be assigned on a cs...

  • Page 3405

    Vol.3-918 chapter 4 configuration setup the table below shows one entry of phonebook data. A csv file can register 0 ~ 500 entries of phonebook data. No parameters for each entry can be skipped. Be sure to enter “” for a blank. Setting parameter setting value meaning available number of characters/ ...

  • Page 3406

    Vol.3-919 chapter 4 configuration setup note: the following configuration menu reflects this data assignment. 2. Directory → 1. Personal → 2. Edit. Note 1: for the priority flag of tel #1 ~ tel #4, be sure to assign “1 enable” to one of tel #1 ~ tel #4 and “0 disable” to the rest three. When two or ...

  • Page 3407

    Vol.3-920 chapter 4 configuration setup [3] example setting group1: terminal phonebook 1: terminal phonebook 2: note: this example table extracts the csv format “directory.Csv” shown in [4] how to create csv file. Setting item setting value group name groupnec ring tone 2 (tone type 1) illumination ...

  • Page 3408

    Vol.3-921 chapter 4 configuration setup [4] how to create csv file write 20 of group setting data (fixed) from the first line through the 20th line, and then proceed to write 0 ~ 500 of terminal phonebook data. Separate the value by a comma mark (,) for each parameter and insert a linefeed for each ...

  • Page 3409

    Vol.3-922 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.9.2 when using dt700 series (dt730, dt730g (12/24dg), dt710 desi-less) (1) control of the lcd contrast can be switched between wide and narrow, as illustrated below: note: this feature is available for: • dt730/dt710 desi-less: firmware version 5.0.0.0 or la...

  • Page 3410

    Vol.3-923 chapter 4 configuration setup (3) precautions for using wireless headset (wt100-ehs-ne) wireless headset (wt100-ehs-ne) enables you to answer a call, having a conversation, or disconnect the call with hooking operations. The following diagram shows the example of a wireless headset connect...

  • Page 3411

    Vol.3-924 chapter 4 configuration setup (4) to activate a ringer tone when an incoming call arrives on the wireless headset, put an attached micro- phone on the center of the telephone speaker. After the ringing tone (0.1 seconds or more on/one second or more off) is detected on the telephone, the r...

  • Page 3412

    Vol.3-925 chapter 4 configuration setup 6.9.5 when using screen saver when the terminal is dt700 series equipped with firmware version 2.2.0.0 or later, terminal users can ac- tivate screen saver. For the operating procedures, refer to the user’s guide of the relevant terminal. 6.9.6 other informati...

  • Page 3413

    Vol.3-926 chapter 4 configuration setup 7. Firmware auto update tool for dt700 series this section describes the general feature, service conditions, and operation procedure of firmware auto update function via web browser. Firmware auto update tool supports the following three functions: (1) by che...

  • Page 3414

    Vol.3-927 chapter 4 configuration setup [8] the telephony server normally starts up the ip station..

  • Page 3415

    Vol.3-928 chapter 4 configuration setup (1) firmware auto update is provided for dt700 series. Other terminals are not supported. (2) internet explorer 6 or later version is required to use this feature. (3) it is required to activate http server by adtm in advance. (4) id: “ftpuser” and password: “...

  • Page 3416

    Vol.3-929 chapter 4 configuration setup (17) when the terminal is set in login mode, firmware update is executed on login operation (after id and pass- word are entered). (18) duration of firmware updating varies depending on the terminal type and the line speed. (19) in the case of firmware downloa...

  • Page 3417

    Vol.3-930 chapter 4 configuration setup [1] data assignment on pcpro step 1: activate adtm on pcpro. Step 2: select the radio button “lan1” in the box “select lan interface”. Step 3: select “activation setting of internal server” in “options” tab, and click “execute” button. Step 4: click the check ...

  • Page 3418

    Vol.3-931 chapter 4 configuration setup [2] how to login step 1: enter the following url in the address bar and press enter key. Url: http://xxx/mainte/ ( note 1 ) then login id and password entry dialog opens. Enter the followings and then click ok button. Login id: admin password: mainte note 1: “...

  • Page 3419

    Vol.3-932 chapter 4 configuration setup step 2: dterm firmware update main menu window appears. Select required operation by clicking on the hyper-link..

  • Page 3420

    Vol.3-933 chapter 4 configuration setup [3] firmware upload step 1: when firmware upload is selected on the main menu window, the firmware upload window shown below appears. Select a terminal type and then click the browse... Button. The choose file di- alog appears. Select a target file to be uploa...

  • Page 3421

    Vol.3-934 chapter 4 configuration setup step 3: result of the file upload is displayed. • when the upload is successful, uploaded file information (file name and file size) is displayed. • when the upload fails, cause of the failure is displayed. Dt770g dt730cg dt730dg dt750 dt730 dt710 cause of fai...

  • Page 3422

    Vol.3-935 chapter 4 configuration setup [4] firmware delete step 1: when firmware delete is selected on the main menu window, the firmware delete window shown below appears. Select a target file to be deleted and then click the delete button. Dt770g dt730cg dt730dg dt750 dt730 dt710 itlisipcr.Tgz it...

  • Page 3423

    Vol.3-936 chapter 4 configuration setup step 2: result of the file deletion is displayed. • when the file deletion is successful, the deleted file information (file name) is displayed. • when the file deletion fails, cause of the failure is displayed. Itlisipcr.Tgz itlisipcr.Tgz has been deleted. Ca...

  • Page 3424

    Vol.3-937 chapter 4 configuration setup [5] firmware list when firmware list is selected on the main menu window, all the firmware files are listed. [6] setup of firmware automatic update step 1: when set firmware automatic updating is selected on the main menu window, setup of firm- ware automatic ...

  • Page 3425

    Vol.3-938 chapter 4 configuration setup step 2: conditions specified in step 1 appears. If there is no problem with the above settings, click the save button. Step 3: the setting result is displayed. Dt770g dt770g itlisipcr.Tgz.

  • Page 3426

    Vol.3-939 chapter 4 configuration setup [7] stop firmware automatic updating step 1: when stop firmware automatic updating is selected on the main menu window, stop firmware automatic updating window below appears. Currently assigned information is listed. Click stop button if you want to stop firmw...

  • Page 3427

    Vol.3-940 chapter 4 configuration setup [8] firmware automatic update log step 1: when firmware automatic updating log is selected on the main menu window, firmware auto- matic update log window below appears. Select the conditions and then click disp button. Step 2: logs are displayed (error log is...

  • Page 3428

    Vol.3-941 chapter 4 configuration setup note: use the internet explorer’s function to search or to save the logs on a file. Note: see the table below for the meaning of the message displayed on the conclusion row: conclusion meanings countermeasures success succeeded in executing the selected operat...

  • Page 3429

    App-1 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals terminals can detect automatically the activation of spare line power feeding or phantom power feeding. No man- ual intervention is required by administrator. The following a...

  • Page 3430

    App-2 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals 1. Power over ethernet inline power adaptor (ilpa-r) the sw1 located in the bottom of ilpa is used as the power switch. The settings of the terminals required for the poe switch conditions are as follows: table app-1 terminal/ilpa to ...

  • Page 3431

    App-3 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals 2. Power over ethernet dtermip version 3 power consumption of the terminals required for connecting to poe switch are as follows: note: the above poe consumption is noted on terminals without optional adaptors installed. Note: 4d ip v...

  • Page 3432

    App-4 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals 3. Power over ethernet for dtermip version1/2 and dterm series i with ip-r power consumption of the terminals required for connecting to poe switch are as follows: the power switch is located in the bottom of the ip terminal. In ip-r ...

  • Page 3433

    App-5 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals 4. Power over ethernet series e with ipw-2u power consumption of the terminals required for connecting to poe switch are as follows: sw1 located in the bottom of the ipw-2u adaptor is used as the power switch. The settings of the powe...

  • Page 3434

    App-6 appendix a power over ethernet specifications for terminals the following is a sheet for poe switch and ip terminals correspondence. Table app-9 device correspondence table ip terminals and adapters power over ethernet cisco - catalyst - power patch panel nec - nec power patch panel -bf200/24 ...

  • Page 3435

    App-7 appendix b power consumption for dt700 series terminals appendix b power consumption for dt700 series terminals the table below shows the power consumption of the dt700 series terminals, which support only ieee 802.3af. Table app-10 dt700 series terminal power chart note: label indication: dt7...

  • Page 3436

    Revision sheet rev-1 univerge sv8500 peripheral equipment description - vol.3 revision sheet s7 :date july,2013 chapter 1 38,39,40,41,44,45,46,66,77,78 chapter 2 90,93,95,97,98,106,108,110,111, 112,114,119,120,132,133,136, 139,144,146,216,224,228,235, 236,242,245,261,262,263,278, 350,353 chapter 3 3...

  • Page 3437

    Revision sheet rev-2 appendix a 6 appendix b 7 s2e :date february,2010 chapter 1 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 16, 17, 39, 72 chapter 2 144 chapter 4 394, 494, 497, 634, 650, 651, 690, 692, 694, 696, 698, 803, 807 s2 :date july,2009 chapter 1 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 33 chapter 4 413, 414, 416, 564, 565, 646, 647...

  • Page 3438

    Printed in japan 1307-120